There are many you’s in the probable systems, and each You is related psychologically in a personality structure. The You that you know is a part of this. In our system, all the other You’s seem to exist in a probable reality.
To any of them, the others would seem to exist in a probable universe, yet all are connected. All of us did not have the same parents, for example, and there are portions of probable situations existing in our own parents’ separate lives. In two probable realities, your mother did not have children. You do no exist in these. In some, she married but not the man/woman you know. A psychological connection exists between that first son/daughter in that other system and yourself.
Emotional charged feeling immediately sets up what you may think of as a tangent. It is expressed in some reality system. This is the inner nature of action. Those thoughts and desires and impulses not made physically real in our terms will be made real in other systems.
Now, the inner self is psychologically influenced by these probable personalities, for they represent a whole personality structure or gestalt with which we are utterly unfamiliar. Our psychologist are dealing with a one-dimensional psychology, at their best.
In the dream state, the portions of the larger ‘structure’ sometimes communicate in highly codified symbols. It would be highly improbable that we could decipher many of these now. There is a feedback system that operates, and yet you must understand that these other identities are fully independent and individual. They exist in codified psychological structures within our personality, as we do theirs.
They remain latent within us, and unexpressed in our system. We have their abilities, unused. We remain latent in their personality structures, and our main abilities are unused within their systems. Yet each of us is a part of one self in a multi-dimensional psychological structure.
These do not necessarily represent more evolved selves. Certain abilities will be more developed in them than in you, and vice versa. I am not speaking of portions of yourself that exist in the “future.” Each probable self, you see, has ‘future’ selves.
This multidimensional personality or identity is the psychological structure with which we will concerned. the term includes probable selves, reincarnated selves and selves more developed than the self that you know. These make up the basic identity of the whole self. All portions are independent.
THERE WAS ONCE a virgin named Kwaboaso. To whomever they gave to marry she said, “I do not desire him.” They gave her to a hunter, and she said, “Ugh! This man has ticks on him; I do not want him.”
One day she went off to the plantation, saying she was going to cut plantains. She took a knife and struck at the pantain, when behold, the little folk were sitting on the plantains. They descended aand came and caught Kwahoaso. They said, “You are the one who shakes your head, pusu! pusu! when they take you to give to anyone.” And the fairies caught hold of her and said:
“Come let us squeeze her.
We squeeze her, O!
We squeeze Kwaboaso.
Come, Let us squeeze her.
We squeeze her, O!”
Now, when the hunter to whom they had given Kwaboaso heard Kwaboaso’s voice, he said, “I am going to see what is the matter, for we don’t take something bad to repay something bad.” When he arrived, there was Kwaboaso and the fairies squeezing her. Then the hunter fired a gun at the fairies, and one fell down.
The eldest of them said to the others, “He has drunk palm wine and is intoxicated; place him yonder in the meantime, and then go on squeezing her.” Again the hunter fired, and another fell. The eldest again said, “The brave fellow has drunk palm wine nd is overcome; take him and lay him aside there.” The hunter killed all the little folk except the eldest The eldest called out to the hunter, “Come, oh, come on! I will not do anything to you.”
Thhe hunter went over to her. Th eldest of the fairies said, “Look in my room there and you will see the medicine for the gun and all the bullets which you have fired. Take what belongs to you and take Kwaboaso as well. But before you leave, go and cut bananas and, as you go, throw them away, so that when the other fairies wake up and come to catch you they will stop to pick them up, one by one, and you will have gone long, long, long aago.”
And accordingly, the hunter went and cut bananas, and he took Kwaboaso as well, and, when he reached the path, he threw one banana away. He continued doing so all the way home. And when only a short time remained before they would reach home, behold! the fairies were pursuing them. And he threw down the only banana left, and the fairies went after it, and eventually turned back. And the hunter restored Kwaboaso to her blood relations. Then the hunter went off to his own house.
Now the hunter was living there when he saw messengers had arrived at his place, and he said, “What is the news?”
The messengers said, “Kwaboaso says she has asked the head of the village to intercede for her, saying that now she is willing to marry you.”
The hunter said, “I thank you for the words from the mouth of the headman of the village, but I cannot marry the girl, for I still have ticks on my body.”
That is why the elders say, “When they take you to give you in marriage to anyone, marry him, for you do not know whether some day when you are in need, he will not rescue you.”
SHE WAS AN OLD WOMAN of a family with a long genealogy. Leza Shikakunamo – “The Besetting One” – had stretched out his hand against her family. He slew her mother and her father while she was yet a child; and in the course of the years all connected with her perished. She said to herlsef, “Surely, I shall keep those who sit on my thighs” – but no, even they, the children of her children, were taken from her. She became withered with age, and it seemed to her that she herself was a last to be taken. But no, a change came over her: she grew younger. Then came into her heart a desperate resolution to find God and ask the meaning of it all. Somewhere up there in the sky must be His dwelling: if only she could reach it!
She began to cut down trees, immense, tall trees, joining them together, and so planning a structure that would reach to heaven. It grew and grew, but as it was getting to be as she wanted it, the lowest timbers rotted and it fell. She fell with it, but without being killed or breaking a bone. She set to work again and rebuilt the structure, but once again the foundations rotted and it fell. She gave it up in despair, but not her intention of finding Leza. Somewhere on earth there must be another way to heaven!
So she began to travel, going through country after country, nation after nation, always with the thought in her mind: “I shall come to where the earth ends, and there, where the earth and sky touch, I shall find a road to God, and I shall ask him, “What have I done to Thee that Thou affictest me in this manner?”
The old woman never found where the earth ends, but though disappointed, she did not give up her search. As she passed through the different countries the people asked her, “What have you come for, old woman?”
And her answer would be, “I am seeking Leza.”
“Seeking Leza! For what?”
“My brothers, you ask me! Here in the nations is there one who suffers as I have suffered?”
And they would ask again, “How have you suffered?” “In this way. I am alone. As you see me, a solitary old woman: that is how I am!”
And they answered again, “Yes, we see. That is how you are! Bereaved of friends and kindred? In what do you differ from others? Leza Shiakunamo sits on the back of every one of us, and we cannot shake him off!”
She never obtained her desire: she did died of a broken heart.
ONCE UPON A TIME there were a man and a woman. They lived for many days in the land of Tata, and a son was born to them. Their fortune consisted of a hundred cattle. Beyond these they did not have a single calf; they had nothing but the cattle.
As time went by the son grew and became a big child, and when the boy was fifteen years of age, his father died. Several years later, his mother also died. So the young man had a heritage from both his parents – he inherited the hundred cattle which were left to him. He stayed in his home and observed the time of mourning for his parents. When he had finished mourning he felt an urge to look for a woman to marry.
He said to his neighbors, “I want to marry a woman, for my parents are dead and I am all alone now. I cannot stay alone. I must get married.”
His neighbors said to him, “Surely, get married, for indeed you are lonely now. We shall look around for you so that you may find a suitable woman to marry.”‘
He said, “Yes, be it so.”
Later, he said, “I would like somebody to go out and look for a woman for me.”
The said, “If God wills it!”
So one of the neighbors rose and went and looked for a woman whom the young man could marry, until he found one. Then he came and said to him, “I have found such a woman as you want, but she is not from this town.”
He asked, “Where, then, does she live?” the neighbor said, “In a different town, pretty far away. I think it takes eight hours of traveling from here to get there.”
He asked him, “Whose daughter is this girl?”
And the neighbor said to him, “She is the daughter of Abdallah, and her father is very rich. This woman owns six thousand cattle. The father has no other child, just this one daughter.”
When the young man heard this, he was all full of desire to obtain this woman, and he said to his neighbor, “Would you go there tomorrow and carry my answer – which is that I am agreeable.”
The neighbor said, “God willing, I will go there tomorrow.” And at da. n, the matchmaker rose and traveled until he came to old Abdallah, and he carried the young man’s message to him, and related all that had happened.
Finally the father answered him, saying, “I have heard yor words, but I desire that anyone who wants to marry my daighter should give me a hundred cattle as a bride-price. If he gives such a bride-price I will give him my daughter for wife.”
The matchmaker said, “God willing, I shall go and carry the amswer to him.” The father said to him, “Yes, do that!”
The matchmaker rose and went back, and gave the young man the answer. He told him everything that had been discussed.
The young man said, “I have heard your words, but he wants a hundred cattle as a bride-price, and I have just a hundred cattle. If I give them all to him, what will my wife have to live on, if she comes to me? I have no other fortune but these hundred cattle which i have inherited from my father.”
Finally, his neighbor said to him, “Well now, if you do not want her, tell me so. Then I can go and carry back your reply; or if you want her, tell me so definitely.”
The young man bowed his head and meditated and, when he raised his head again, he said, “It does not matter, go and say that I accept. I will go and fetch the hundred cattle and give them to him.”
So the matchmaker got up and went to the father of the girl and said to him, “The young man is willng to pay the hundred cattle.”
And the father said, “I am willing then that he should take my daughter.”
They talked over the details, and then someone was sent to bring the young man. The latter came and was amiably received, and they discussed the marriage. So the young man was wedded to the girl and paid the hundred cattle, and the wedding feast was celebrated.
Then the young man took his wife and traveled home. There they remained at first ten days; but when the provisions which they had taken along were used up, the young man had nothing for his wife to eat. Then he said to her, “Dear wife, now I have nothing left to eat. Formerly, I had my cattle. these I milked and thus I had my sustence; but now I have given my cattle away for you and, therefore, I have nothing left. Dear wife, I will go now to my neighbors and from those who have cows I shall obtain some milk, however little it be, so that we shall have something to eat.”
Then the woman said to him, “Yes, dear husband!”
So the young man went out and this now became his occupation. Every day he went out and milked other people’s cows, so that he could have something to eat for himself and his wife. This he continued to do every day.
One day his wife went out and placed herself in front of her door just as a very handsome young man passed by. When he saw the woman standing by the door, he was seized with a desire to seduce her. Thereupon he sent a procurer to talk to the woman.
The woman said, “God is my witness that I have heard the message you convey to me, but you must wait a little longer, until I have made up my mind, and then I will let you l know. I cannot answer yet.” So the procurer rose and went home.
Three months later, the woman’s father thought to himself, “I must go and pay a visit to my daughter and her husband.” So he started on his journey and went his way until he came to his son-in-law’s house. Arrived there, he knocked at the door. The daughter got up and answered, “Who is there?”
The old man said, “It is I Abdallah.”
The daughter rose and said to him, “Will you not come in?”
So he entered and exchanged greetings with his daughter, and she invited him into the hall, and the old man sat down there. The father asked the daughter how she was getting along, and she said, “Pretty well, my father.”
Finally the daughter got up, went away from where her father was sitting and went into her room, cogitating and crying prosusely, because there was not the slightest bit of food in the house that she could cook for her father. then she left by the back door, and when she looked behind the yard, she noticed the young man who wanted to seduce her, and he called to her to come nearer. So she went over to him and said to him “How are you getting along, sir?”
He said, “I once sent someone to you, and you said that you would come to me for a visit, but you have not come. Why are you so wavering?” Since I saw you that day more; every day, when I lie down, I dream only of you in my sleep.”
The woman answered him saying, “God be my witness, I shall not harass you any more. If you long for me I shall come without delay. First, however, get a piece of meat for me, so that I can cook something to eat for my guest. I sahll come afterward.”
The young man aksed her, “Who is your guest?”
The woman replied, saying, “It is my father whom I receive as a guest.”
Thereupon he said, “You wait here, and i will bring you some meat right away.”
So he rose and went out, and the woman remained standing there. A little later, he returned with a quarter of beef and said to her, “Here is the meat, but now do not put me off any longer.”
She said, “God be my witness, I shall not put you off.”
He stretched out his hand and gave her the meat, and the woman took it and went back into her house. Then he who had given her the meat paced up and down outside and waited for the fulfillment of the promise that the woman had made him.
After the woman returned, she took the meat, cut it into pieces, and put it into the pot. As soon as she had placed it in the pot, her husband came back and found his father-in-law sitting in the hall. As he saw his father-in-law sitting in the hall, his blood rose. He could not find a word to say, not did he know what to do. He greeted him according to custom and asked him how he was getting along. After that he went to his wife and found her cooking meat and asked her, “I am cooking meat.”
He asked, “Where did you get this meat from?”
She said, “I received it from the neighbors; they have given it to me.”
When her husband heard this he remained silent and became sad because he was so terribly poor.
Then he said to his wife, “My dear wife, what shall we do now that we have not only ourselves to feed but also a guest?”
His wife answered him saying, “I do not know what we shall do.”
Then the man said, “I will go out to the rich people where I milk the cows and tell them, “I have a guest staying with me now, and I would like you to give something, whatever it be, to cook for my guest.’ “So he rose, went to rich people where he worked, and apprised them of everything that had happened to him.
These rich people were sympathetic and gave him a little meat and a little milk, which he took. Then he went home.
At his house, in the meantime, his wife had finished cooking the meat that she had received from her would-be seducer. When her husband returned with the meat, the woman put out her hand, accepted it, and laid it on the floor. then the husband rose and washed his hands and went into the hall. The woman in the kitchen withdraw the meat from the pot and placed it on the platter from which they were accustomed to eat.
Now the would-be seducer had remained where he was, walking up and down, until he saw that the time, which had been agreed upon with the woman, had passed. Then he said to his heart, “The best thing for me to do is to pass by the front door and look inside. erhaps I shall see the woman.” So he went off and passed by the door, and encountered the woman’s husband and the father-in-law sitting and chatting. When the wicked man saw that, he greeted them, and the woman’s husband anwsered the greeting, inviting him to approach. So the wicked man came up and sat down.
Then they conversed together, the woman’s husband having no inklings of the stranger’s plan and of what he really wanted. Thus they conversed with each other – the woman’s father, and the woman’s husband, and that impious creature who wanted to disturb the peace of the young man’s house. The three men stayed together in the hall.
As soon as the woman inside had placed the meat on the platter, she brought it out into the hall. As soon as her husband rose to be handed the meat, the woman said, “Eat now, you three fools!”
Thereupon her father began, saying, “Well now, wherefore am I a fool?”
His daughter answered him, saying, “Please, father, eat first. Afterwards I shall tell you all about your foolishness.”
But the father said, “No, I shall not eat, but you shall first tell me about my foolishness. After that, I shall eat.”
Thereupon the daughter rose and said, “My father, you have sold an expensive object for a cheap one.”
Her father said to her, “What is it that i have sold too cheaply?”
She said, “It is I, my father whom you have sold too cheaply.”
He said, “Why so?”
She said, “Father, you have no daughter and no child except only me and you went and sold me for a hundred cattle, yet you, father, have six thousand cattle anyhow. You have regarded a hundred cattle as more valuable than me. That is why I have said, “You have gfiven up a valuable thing for a cheap one.”
The father answered, “That is true, my child, I was a fool.”
then her husband rose and said, “Now, please, tell me the nature of my foolishness too.”
The woman said to him, “You are even a greater fool.”
He said, “Why that?’
She said, “You inherited a hundred cattle from your parents, not a single calf more did you inherit. And you took them all and wedded me in exchange for them, in exchange for all your hundred cattle, yet there were so many women in your own town whose bride-price amounted to only ten or twenty cattle. But you did not look at them. Instead, you came and married me in exchange for all your cattle. And now you have nothing, not even anything to eat for me and for yourself, and you have become a servant of others. You go and milk the cows of other people to get something to eat. Had you kept half of your herd of cattle and married a woman with the other half, you would have had something to eat. Therefore, this is your foolishness, my dear husband.”
Then the worthless knave asked, “And wherein does my foolishness consist? Tell me!”
thereupon the woman rose and said, “You are even a greater fool than both the others.”
And he asked her, “Why is that?”
She answered him, saying, “You wanted to get with a single quarter of beef what had been bought for a hundred cattle. Are you not, therefore, a fool?”
He jumped up in a hurry and ran away as quickly as he could.
The woman’s father stayed with them for two days. On the third day he made his preparation for taking leave and then went home. When he arrived at his house, he unhobbled the cattle which he had received from his son-in-law and sent them back to him. With them he sent another two hundred. Thus his daughter could live in comfort with her husband for many days.
THERE WAS ONCE a small boy who was herding the goats, and his father came and pointed out to him some long and luxurious grass and told him to take the goats there to feed. So he pastured them there that day and took them there again the day following. Now the next day while the goats were feeding, the owner of the pasture appeared, and said to the boy, “Why are you feeding your goats on my grass?” And the boy said, “It is not my doing, for my father’s house and talk to him.” Now the owner of the grazing ground was a man very bog and tall, and his name was Mukun’ ga M’Bura, so in the evening he came to the home of the biy and he said to the father, “Why were your goats eating my grass when you could see I had closed it to you?’
The father said, “That is my affair.” Mukn’ ga M’Bura said, “As you have done this, I will eat you and all your people.” To this the father reoplied, “You shall do no such thing.” So the young men made sharp their swords and got ready their spears, but Munkun’ ga M’Bura was too strong for them, and he ate the father, and the young men, and the women, and the children, and the oxen, and the goats, and then he ate the house and the barns, so that there was nothing left. The only person who escaped was a little boy, who ran away and hid in the grass so that Mukun’ga M’Bura, did not see him.
The boy made himself a bow and shot wild game and became very strong and built himself a house; and at last he said, when he was full-grown, “Why do I stay here? I am big and strong. Mukun’ ga M’Bura, who killed my father and all my people, still lives.”
So he took his sword and made it very sharp and went to the district where Mukun’ ga M’Bura lived, and as he drew near he saw him coming up out of the great water where he lived. He shouted to him, “Tomorrow I will come and kill you.” And he went back and ate more meat so as to be stronger then ever. The next day he went again, but Mukun’ ga M’Bura was not to be seen. The third day he met him again, and said, “You have killed all my people, so I will kill you,” and Mukun’ ga M’Bura was afraid and said to the warrior, “Do not strike me with your sword over the heart or I shall die, but open my middle finger,” so the warrior did so, and said, “Make a big hole, not a little one.”
And the warrior made a big hole, and out came first the father, whom Mukun’ ga M’Bura had eaten, and then they young men, and the women, and the cattle, and the sheep, and the houses, and the food stores just as before. And the warrior said, “No, I will spare you, for you have restored my father, his people and his goods, but you must not eat them again.” And the giant said, “They shall be safe.”
The warrior and his people went back and rebuilt their homesteads, but the warrior thought to himself, “Now this Mukun’ ga M’Bura is big and strong my very bad. He has eaten many people. He may come again and destroy my father.”
So he called the young men and asked them to come and fight Mukun’ ga M’Bura with him, and they all made ready for war and went to the home of Mukun’ ga M’Bura. He saw them coming and said, “Why are you here to slay me? Have I not given you back your people?” But the warrior replied, “You are very evil, you have killed and eaten many people, therefore you shall die.” Then they all fell upon him and slew him and cut off his head and hewed his body in pieces. But a big piece separated itself from the rest of the body, which was dead, and went back into the water; and the warrior returned to his home and told his brother that he had slain Mukun’ ga M’Bura, all but one leg. “Tomorrow,” he said, “I will go into the water and get that leg and burn it.” And the mother besought him not to go, but the next day he went, and when he got to the place there was no water to be seen, only cattle and goats, for what remained of Mukun’ ga M’Bura had gathered together his children and taken all the water and gone very far. The beasts, however, he had not taken but left behind. So the warrior went back and brought his people, and they gathered the cattle and goats together and took them back to their own homestead.
THER WAS ONCE a great famine in a certain country, and the people were obliged to eat wild plants to keep themselves alive. Their principal food during this time was nongwes which they dug out of the ground.
There was living at that place a man called Kenkebe, and one day his wife said to him, “My husband, go to my father and ask him to give us some corn.
The man said, “Yes, I will go.”
So he rose up early in the morning and went on until he arrived at his father-in-law’s village, where he was received with every mark of kindness. A very large ox was killed for his entertainment. It was so large that it was six days before it was all eaten. His father-in-law asked of him the news.
He said, “there is no news to tell to friends. All the news is this – that at my home there is not a grain to be eaten. Famine is over our heads. Will you give us some corn, for was are dying?”
His father-in-law gave him seen bags full of millet, and his wife’s sisters went with him to carry them. When they came to a valley close by his home, he told his sisters-in-law that they could now go back to their father
They said, “How will you manage to carry all those bags alone?”
He replied, “I shall be able to carry them all now, because we are not far from my home.”
So the girls went back to their father.
Then he carried the bags, one by one, and hid them in a cave under a great rock that was there. Afterward he took some of the millet and ground it. When it was ground very fine he made it into cakes just like nongwes. Then he dug some real nongwes out of the ground and went to his wife.
He said to her, “There is a great famine at your father’s also. I found the people there eating themselves.”
He told his wife to make fire. Then he pretended to cut a piece of meat out of his thigh and said, “So are they doing at your father’s village. Now, my wife, let us do the same.’
His wife cut a piece from her leg and roasted it, but the piece that Kenkebe put on the fire was meat that he had brought home with him.
Then Kenkebe’s little boy said, “Why does my father’s meat smell nice in roasting and my mother’s meat does not smell nice?”
Kenkebe Answered, “it is because it is taken from the leg of a man.”
After this he gave his wife some nongwes to roast. He took for himself some of those he had made of corn.
The little boy said, “Why do my father’s nongwes smell nice in roasting, and my mother’s do not smell nice?”
Kenkebe said, “It is because they were dug by a man.”
After eating, he went outside, but he had dropped one of his nongwes by the fire. When he went out, the boy found it. He broke it in two and gave half to his mother.
He said, “There is a difference between our nongwes and those of father.”
His mother said, “Yes, my child, this one is made of corn.”
The next morning, just at the very beginning of dawn, Kenkebe got up and went away with a pot in his hand. The boy was awake and saw his father go out. So he called to his mother and said, “Mother, mother, wake! My father is going away with the pot in his hand!”
So she got up and they followed after Kenkebe. They saw him go to the cave where he took some corn out of one of the bags and began to grind it. Then they went on top of the rock, and rolled a big stone over.
When Kenkebe saw the stone coming he ran away, but it followed close behind him. He ran down the valley, but the stone kept running too. He jumped into a deep hole in the river. Down went the stone, too. He ran up the hill and up went the stone. He ran over the plain but, whenever he turned to look, the stone was just there behind him. So it continued all that day. At night he reached his own house and then the stone stopped. His wife had already come home and had brought with her one of the bags of corn.
Kenkebe came in crying.
His wife said to him, “Why do you cry as if you were a child?”
He said, “Because I am very tired and very hungry.”
She said, “Where are your clothes and your bag?”
He replied, “I was crossing a river, and I fell down. The stream carried away my mantle, my bag, and my kerries, indeed everything that was mine.”
Then his wife gave him his mantle, which she had picked up when he was running away, and she said to him, “You are foolish to do such things. There is no food for you tonight.”
The next morning Kenkebe rose and went out to hunt with his two dogs. The name of the one was Tumtumse, and the name of the other was Mbambozozele. He found am eland with a young calf which he drove to his place. He cut an ear off the calf and roasted it in the fire. It was fat, and he liked it so much that he cut the other ear off and cooked it also. Then he wished to kill the calf, but he said to himself, “If I kill this calf, I shall not be able to get milk from the eland.”
So he called his two dogs and said to the one, “Tumtumse, my dog, if I kill this calf, will you imitate it and suck the eland for me?
The dog said “No, I shall bark like a dog.”
Kenkebe said, “Get out of my sight and never come near me again, you ugly, useless animal.”
He said to the other, “Mbambozozele, my dog, if I kill calf, will you imitate it and suck the eland for me?”
The dog said, “I will do so.”
Then he killed the calf and ate it. He took the skin and put it upon Mbambozozele, so that the eland thought it was her calf that sucked before Kenkebe milked her. But one day the dog was sucking too long, and Kenkebe wanted him to leave off. He tried to drink just a few drops more, when his master got angry and struck him with a stick. Thereupon the dog began to howl, and the eland saw him with her horns. He ran one way and the eland ran after him, then he ran another way, and still the eland chased him.
His wife came out and saw him running. She cried out to him, “Jump up quickly on the big stone.” He did so, and the eland ran with such fury against the stone that it broke its head and fell down dead.
They then cut the eland up and wanted to cook it, but there was no fire. Kenkebe said to his son, “Go to the village of the cannibals that is on that hill over the valley and ask for some fire; but do not take any meat with you, lest they should smell it.”
The boy went, but he hid a piece of meat and took it with him. When he got to the first house he asked for fire, but they sent him to the next. At the next they sent him farther, and so he finally had to go to the house that was farthest away. An old woman lived there. The boy gave her a little piece of meat and said, “Do not cook it until I am far away with the fire.”
But as soon as the boy was gone she put it on the coals. The smell came to the noses of the cannibals and they ran to the place and swallowed the old woman, and the meat, and the fire, and even the ashes.
Then they ran after the boy. When he came near his own house, he cried out, “Hide yourselves, you that are at home!”
His father said, “My son is saying we must gather wood that will make coals.”
His mother said, “No, he is saying that we must hide ourselves.”
The boy cried again, “Hide yourselves!”
Then his mother hid herself in a bush. An old woman who was there covered herself with ashes, and Kenkebe climbed up into a tree, with the breast of the eland in his hand. The boy slipped into a hole which was by the side of the path.
The cannibals came to the place. First they ate the eland. Then one of them said, “Search under the ashes.”
There they found the old woman, and they ate her. Then they said, “Search in the tree.”
There they found Kenkebe. He cried very much, but they would not spare him. They ate him and the breast of the eland. Then the wise one said, “Look in the bush.”
They looked there and found the wife of Kenkebe. They said, “We will eat her another time,” and so they took her home with them. They did not look for the boy.
The woman made a plan to escape. She made beer for the cannibals and they all came to drink. They sat together in a bog house, and drank very much beer. Then said, “May I go out?”
They said, “You may go, but come back quickly.”
She said, “Shall I close the entrance?”
They said, “Close it.”
Then she took fire and put it on the house and all there cannibals were burned to death. so the woman escaped, and lived happily afterward with her son.
ONCE A WOMAN, after prolonged labour, gave birth to twins, both sons. And each one, as he was brought forth, came into this world with a valuable fetish. One the mother called Luemba, the other Mavungu. And they were almost full-grown at their birth, so that Mavungu, the first-born, wished to start upon his travels.
Now about this time the daughter of Nzambi was ready for marriage. The tiger came and offered himself in marriage, but Nzambi told him that he must speak to her daughter himself, as she should only marry the man of her choice. Then the tiger went to the girl and asked her to marry him, but she refused him. Then the gazelle, and the pig, and all created things that had breath, one after the other, asked the daughter in marriage; but she refused them all, saying that she did not love them. And they were all very sad.
Mavungu heard of this girl, and determined to marry her. And so he called upon his charm, and asked it to help him. He took some grass in his hands, and changed one blade of grass into a horn, another into a knife, another into a gun, and so on, until he was quite ready for the long journey.
Then he set out, and travelled and travelled, until at last hunger overcame him, when he asked his fetish whether it was true that he was going to be allowed to starve. The charm hastened to place a sumptuous feast before him, and Mavungu ate and was satisfied.
“Oh, fetish!” Mavungu said, “Are you going to leave these beautiful plates which I have used, for the use of any commoner that may come along?” The charm immediately caused all to disappear.
Then Mavungu travelled and travelled, until at length he came very tired, and had to ask his charm to arrange a place for him where he might sleep. And the charm saw to his comfort, so that he passed a peaceful night.
And after many days’ weary traveling he at length arrived at Nzambi’s town. And Nzambi’s daughter saw Mavungu and straightaway fell in love with him, and ran to her mother and father and cried, “I have seen the man I love, and I shall die if I do not marry him.”
Then Mavungu sought out Nzambi, and told her that he had come to marry her daughter.
“Go and see her first,” said Nzambi, “and is she will have you, you may marry her.”
And when Mavungu and the daughter of Nzambi saw each other, they ran towards each other and loved one another.
They were led to a fine shimbec; and while all the people in the town danced and sang for gladness. Mavungu and the daughter of Nzambi slept there. And in the morning Mavungu noticed that the whole shimbec was crowded with mirrors, but that each mirror was covered so that the glass could not be seen. And he asked the daughter of Nzambi to uncover them, so that he might see himself in them. And she took him to one and opened it, and Mavungu immediately saw the perfect likeness of his native town. And she took him to another, and he there saw another town he knew; and thus she took took him to all the mirrors save one, and this one she refused to let him see.
“Why will you not let me look into that mirror?” asked Mavungu.
“Because that is the picture of the town whence no man who arrives there returns.”
“Do let me see it!” urged Mavungu.
At last the daughter of Nzambi yielded, and Mavungu looked hard at the reflected image of the terrible place.
“I must go there,” he said.
“Nay, you will never return. Please don’t go!” pleaded the daughter of Nzambi.
“Have no fear!” answered Mavungu. “My fetish will protect me.”
The daughter of Nzambi cried very much, but could not move Mavungu from his purpose. Mavungu then left his newly-married wife, mounted his horse, and set off for the town from whence no man returns.
He traveled and traveled, until at last he came near to the town, when, meeting an old woman, he asked her for fire to light his pipe.
“Tie up your horse first, and come and fetch it.”
Mavungu descended, and having tied his horse up very securely, he went to the woman for the fire; and when he had come near to her she killed him, so that he disappeared entirely.
Now Luemba wondered at the long absence of his brother Mavungu and determined to follow him. So he took some grass, and by the aid of his fetish changed one blade into a horse, another into a knife, another into a gun, and so on, until he was fully prepared for his journey. Then he set out and, after some days journeying, arrived at Nzambi’s town.
Nzambi rushed out to meet him, and calling him Mavungu, embraced him.
“Nay,” said Luemba, “My name is not Mavungu; I am his brother, Luemba.”
“Nonsense!” answered Nzambi. “You are my son-in-law, Mvaungu.” And straightway a great feast was prepared. Nzambi’s daughter danced for joy and would not hear of his not being Mavungu. And Luemba was sorely troubled, and did not know what to do, as he was now sure that Mzambi’s daughter was Mavungu’s wife. And when night came, Nzambi’s daughter would sleep in Luemba’s shimbec; but he appealed to his charm, and it enclosed Nzambi’s daughter in a room, lifting her out of Luemba’s room for the might and bringing her back in the early morning.
Luemba’s curiosity, too, was aroused by the many closed mirrors that hung about the walls, so he asked Nzambi’s daughter to let him look into them. And she showed him all excepting one. This she told him was the one that reflected the town whence no man returns. Luemba insisted upon. looking into this one and when he had seen the terrible picture he knew that his brother was there.
Luemba determined to leave Nzambis town for the town whence no man returns; and so after thanking them all for his kind reception, he set out. They all wept loudly, but were consoled by the fact that he had been there once already, and returned safely, so that he could of course return a second time. Luemba traveled and traveled, until he also came to where the old woman was standing, and asked her for fire.
She told him to tie up his horse and come to her to fetch it, but he tied his horse up only very lightly, and then fell upon the old woman and killed her.
Then he sought out his brother’s bones and the bones of his horse, and out them together, and then touched them with his charm. And Mavungu and his horse came to life again. Then together they joined the bones of hundreds of people together and touched them with their charms, so that they all lived again. And they set off with all their followers to Nzambi’s town. And Luemba told Mavungu how he had been mistaken for him by his father-in-law and wife, and how by the help of his charm he had saved his wife from dishonor. Mavungu thanked him, and said it was well.
But a quarrel broke out between the two brothers about the followers. Mavungu said they were his, because he was the elder; but Luemba said that the belonged to him, because he had given Mavungu and them life. Mavungu then fell upon Luemba and killed him; but his horse remained by his body. Mavungu then went on his way to Nzambi’s town and was magnificently welcomed.
Now Luemba’s horse took his charm and touched Luemba’s body, so that he lived again. Then Luemba mounted his horse and sought out his brother Mavungu and killed him.
And when the town had heard the whole story, they all said Luemba had done quite rightly.
WHAT DO YOU THINK? This is what they did. They went looking for wives, saying, “Let us go and try to marry.”
One of them went looking for a wife everywhere. Every one rejected him. At last he, too, like the others, succeeded in making a marriage such as it was.
Well! He brought his wife into the house.
Now, when he married her, he said, “Look here, woman you will eat porridge of small millet, and no other.”
“All right,” answered the woman.
“And I,” added the man, “I shall eat only kafir-corn porridge.”
“All right,” said the woman again.
So, after that, they simply ate porridge, the woman millet, the man kafir-corn.
Alas! One day the woman, making a mistake, happened to eat the kafir-corn porridge. The man came. “You have eaten my porridge,” he said, “yet I told you to eat only millet porridge.” Whereupon he picked up an axe and struck the woman. Then he dragged her, drag! drag! drag! and went and threw her away to the west.
After that the man went alone, wandering about.
One day he said to himself, “We are going for a ramble in the bush.” He went there and killed game. He then remembered that one woman had been left in the village over there. So he said to himself, “Let us go and marry her.”
He went there, received her in marriage, brought her to his home, and said to her, “Look here! You know what killed my former mate… Now don’t you ever dare to eat kafir-corn porridge; you shall eat millet porridge, that’s all.”
“No fear,” said the woman, “I shall eat no kafir-corn porridge.”
The following day he thought of resuming his expedition to the bush. Leaving his bride alone in the hut, he said, “Now I shall have a walk into the bush.” And away he went.
Well! At night when it was quite dark, the new bride heard the sound kwe! kwe! kwe! drag! drag! drag! “That must be,” she thought, “The former wife, the one that was killed, struck with an axe!”
There she was already at the door, drag! drag! drag! Then she knocked nku! nku! nku! knock! knock! knock! Then a song Ramba:
“Open,, open, little bird.
Open, open, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a little bird.”
The new bride went to open for her. The old one dragged herself into the hut, and said:
“Put it on the fire, put it on the fire, little bird.
Put it on the fire, put it on the fire, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
The old wife herself went ahead and put the pot on the fire. They both then remained quiet. Did you ever! The pot boiled, and the new bride then clearly recognized the former one, and heard:
“Stir the porridge, stir the porridge, little bird.
Stir the porridge, stir the porridge, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
The old bride then got up herself to bring kafir-corn meal from the big jar, put it with her own hands in the pot, stirred and stirred her porridge, and then put it in a dish. Just imagine! She actually put tow fingers into it, saying:
“Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
She just ate alone. Her new mate went so far as to put a finger into the porridge, but she did not eat. So the woman repeated:
“Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
She finished her porridge alone. Her mate had not said a word. The woman then moved away. There! She was going. Drag yourself! Drag yourself! Then she stopped at the door to say:
“Shut behind me, shut behind me, little bird.
Shut behind me, shut behind me, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
Now she was out! There she went toward her hole and buried herself in it.
The next day the man returned from the bush, and his wife came to meet him. “Dear me!” she said, “Here in the hut where you have left me there is a thing which comes at night. It is impossible to sleep. It keeps one awake with songs.”
“What is it like?” asked the man.
“You will see it tonight,” answered the woman.
Night came. “Now,” asked the man, “how about the thing you were speaking of?”
“We shall see it, sure enough,” said the woman.
Then it was dark. The woman was already there. The people inside heard kwe! kwe! kwe! drag! drag! There she was already knocking at the door:
“Open, open, little bird.
Open, open, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
Heaven help us! The present wife moved to go and open the door. The husband caught hold of her. “Do not go! he said.
“I will go,” she said.
So the little woman got away from his grip and went to open the door. The first wife then came in, dragging herself along.
“Put it on the fire, put it on the fire, little bird.
Put it on the fire, put it on the fire, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
She put the pot on the fire, and then say down. When the pot boiled she said:
“Stir the porridge, stir the porridge, little bird.
Stir the porridge, stir the porridge, little bird.
O mother! be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
Then she herself stirred the porridge, took it out of the pot and put two fingers in it, singing:
“Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
Let us eat, let us eat, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little porridge of kafir corn is a spirit.”
Good gracious! She ate and ate her porridge. Then she again began to drag herself along, but this time in the direction of the bed, saying:
“Let us sleep, let us sleep, little bird.
Let us sleep, let us sleep, little bird.
O mother! Be satisfied with millet.
A little kafir corn porridge is a spirit.”
She then began to stretch herself on the bed in which lay her husband who had struck her with an axe. Seeing that, the second little wife rushed outside.
When people came, the next morning, they found in the hut only a corpse, and this already swollen.
And this litTle story, too, that’s all. It ends there.
THE WAS IN TIMES of long ago a certain old woman; she was living with her daughter; she was the mother-in-law. Her son-in-law offered her amasi, telling her to eat; for there was not much food, it was a famine. She refused the amasi. He offered her a cow, telling her to eat the milk: she refused, saying she could not eat the milk of her son-in-law.
In the digging season she was very hungry; she was in the habit of returning home at moon, and she would open her son-in-law’s house, and pour out the amasi and eat it. But when the sun had set, her s0n-in-law said, speaking to his wife, “Go home and boil some maize, that we may mix it with the amasi, for the calabash is now full.” On their arrival she boiled maize, and made a soft mass; the husband went and took the calabash; he found it empty; there was now nothing but whey in it. They and their children will die, for a thief is eating their milk, through this great famine.” The old woman did thus at all times. But the husband and wife did not know that the milk was taken by their mother.
One day the husband lay in wait, and caught their mother; but their mother cried, saying, “I did it for the first time this very day.” Her son-in-law said, “Go and fetch for me water at a place where no frog cries; and I will not expose you to the people.”
He gave her a water-vessel. She went on and on for a long time, passing many rivers; she came to rivers which she did not know; she asked, “Is there any frog here?” A frog answered, “Khhwe, I am here.” She passed on, and came to another place; she saw a pool; she went to it and dipped water; a frog said, “Khhwe, I am here.” She poured it out. She travelled acting thus, and the frog answering in like manner, for there were frogs in every pool. She came to another pool and said, “Is there a frog here?” No frog answered. She sat down and dipped water. But when the vessel was nearly full (for it was a very large one), a frog said, “Khhwe, I am here.” She poured out the water again, now crying and saying, “Woe is me, mamo! I merely took of my own accord the amasi of my son-in-law for food.” She went on and came to a very great pool. There were many paths which went to the pool. She was afraid. There were many shady trees on the banks of the pool. She went to the pool and sat down; she said, “Is there any frog here?” There was no answer. She repeated her question. There was no answer. She dipped water into the vessel; the vessel was very full. When it was full, she drank very much, until the vessel was empty. She dipped again till it was full; she drank; she was no longer able to drink the whole, she had pain in the stomach, for she was unable to leave off drinking, it was so nice.
But when she wished to arise and depart, she was unable to arise; she dragged the water-vessel, and went into the shade, and sat down there, for she was unable to walk. At length it was noon; there came a rock-rabbit, and said, “Who is this sitting in the shade of the king?” She said, “It is I, father. I was about to depart; but my limbs failed me.” The rock-rabbit said, “You will soon see Ugunqu-kubantwana.” She went and drank at the pool, and returned to the shade. A duiker came and said, “Who is this sitting in the shade of the king?” She said, “It is I father. I was about to depart, but my limbs failed me.” The duiker said, “You will soon see Ugungqu-kubantwana.” A leopard came and said, “Who is sitting in the shade of the king?” She said, “It is I father. I was about to depart, but my limbs failked me.” The leopard said, “You will soon see Ugungqu-kubantwana.” All animals came saying the same. And when at length it was about sunset, there came very many and great animals; all the animals said the same.
When the sun was setting, she heard a great noise – gungqu, gungqu. She was afraid and trembled. At length there appeared something greater than all the animals she had seen. When it appeared the all said with one accord, “This is Ugungqu-kubantwana.” When it came in sight, while still at some distance, she said, “Who, who are you sitting in the shade of Ugungqu-kubantwana?” Then the old woman had no more any power to speak; it was now as though death had already come to her. Ugungqu-kubantwana asked a second time. The old woman replied, “It is I, my lord. I was thinking of departing, but my limbs failed me.” She s aid, “You will soon see Ugungqu-kubantwana.”
The creature went to the river; when she reached it, she knelt on her knees, and drank the pool; although it was very great, she drank until the mud at the bottom of the pool appeared. She then sat down. And there were oribis there, who were the officers of Ugungqu-kubantwana; there were also hyenas. Ugungqu-kabantwana said, “Let her be eaten.” The hyenas agreed. But the oribis said, “She shall be eaten when she is fat. I chief.” Again she said, “Let her be eaten.” The oribis said, “It is now dark; she shall be eaten in the morning, O chief.”
It was dark; they slept, and all the animals slept. But some animals put off sleeping because they wished that she should be eaten. At length it was midnight and all were asleep. But four oribis had not gone to sleep; they arose and took the old woman, and raised her and placed her on the back of three of them; the fourth oribis took the water-vessel. They ran during the night, and went and placed her on the border of her village. Then they returned with speed, saying, then they should get back before morning. And truly they soon arrived at the pool again.
One said to the other, “What shall we do? Let us devise a plan, that it may not appear that it is we who have enabled her to flee.” The others said, “Since the animals which like to eat men are the leopard, the lion, other wild beasts, and hyenas–” Then one said, “Let us smear mud on the hyenas, for it is they who like to eat men; and the chief will agree and say, “They have taken the game of the chief, and gone and eaten it at a distance.’ For if we smear the leopard it will feel (for it is a very wrathful creature) and awake, and all the people will awake, and the cief say, it is we who have taken away the game, and gone to eat it.” So all the other oribis agreed. They went and smeared the mud on the legs of the hyenas; and when they had cleansed themselves they went and lay down where they had lain.
In the morning all the animals arose and said, “Where is the game of the chief? She will kill the oribis, it was they who objected to its being eaten.” The oribis at once awake, saying, “The chief will look at the feet of all the people. If they have not gone anywhere, they will be clean. But if they have gone, there will be seen mud on their feet and their legs.” The chief agreed, and said to the oribis, “make haste at once, and look for the muddy legs, and let them he seized and brought to me.” All the animals stood forth, and looked at each other; there was found mud on the hyenas. The oribis said, “It is the hyenas who have taken and eaten her, for they are animals which like to eat men.” The hyenas were seized and taken to the chief. She seized the three hyenas, and ate them.
The old woman remained at the border of the kraal; at length she saw some one belonging to her home; he told her son-in-law; he went and fetched her and the water-vessel. The son-in-law continually drank the water which his mother-in-law had brought.
It came to pass on the day the water was finished the old woman said, “Since I went and fetched water, do you go and fetch for me the liver of an ingogo.” Many loaves were made for him to eat on his journey, for it was a great way off. In the morning, carrying the loaves, he set out on his journey, sleeping in the open air; at length he arrived at the new moon, and found very many izingogo, leaping on the bank of a river, at play. He approached them, he too now running and now going on his hands and feet. The old izingogo said, “There is out ingogo.” The young ones said, “What kind of ingogo is that, which has hair like a man; and little eyes like a man; and little ears like a man?” The old ones said, “It is an ingogo; by such and such things we see it is nought but an ingogo; by such and such things we see it is nought but an ingogo; by such and such things we see it is nought but an ingogo.” So the little ones were silent. But when they were by themselves they laughed, saying, “That is not an ingogo.” At length they returned to their homes.
On his arrival the man had noticed that there was at the kraal a grandmother, who was now old. In the morning the others said, “Go, fellow, we are going to hunt.” He said, “I am tired; I shall not go today.” All the old ones went; the young ones said, “Let us come home by and by, and find that you have already fetched firewood for cooking.” The little ones said, “We do not like to leave our grandmother alone with the person who has come.” So they went to hunt. At length they returned; on their arrival the little ones were sitting still; the old ones were angry, and said, “we are already come from hunting; but you have not been to fetch firewood.” The little ones were silent. The game was cooked. They ate and lay down.
In the morning they said, “Let us go and hunt.” He went with them. They went and hunted, and returned in the afternoon; they found the little ones too now returning from fetching wood. They cooked their game. The newly arrived ingogo said, when the game was dressed, “Just put aside a leg for me, for I have a pain in my stomach. I cannot just now eat meat.” They assented, and put aside a leg for him. They lay down.
In the morning they asked him how his stomach was. He said, “It is still painful.” They said, “Let us go and hunt.” So they went, and he remained alone with the little ones. As soon as the hunters were gone, he said, “Do you go and fetch me some water from the river, that I may drink.” They took a water-vessel and went with it. But the vessel leaked, having a hole in the bottom. They arrived at the river, and dipped water; the vessel leaked. They took a long time in returning from the river. But the moment they had gone, the ingogo arose and took a spear, and killed the grandmother of the izingogo who were absent. He cut open the chest and bowels; the liver appeared; he took it out; he looked on every side; he looked upwards and saw an uvati; he took it down and fled.
When the sun was setting the little izingogo returned; when they were in the lower part of the village, saw much blood which had run on the path, now dry, for he had stabbed the old ingogo in the morning. They at once ran home; on their arrival they entered the house; but the house was very long, and not very light inside; they found their grandmother dead. They went out, running with all their might, crying, and looking in the direction whither they had gone to hunt. When they saw the old ones, the littles ones cried out again and again saying, “What kind of an ingogo is that who has eyes like a man?” The old ones said, “what has happened?” The little ones replied, “He has killed grandmother.” They ran, they threw down their game; they carried their spears in their hands. They asked, “In what direction has the man gone who we thought was an ingogo?” The little ones said, “We saw him not; we had gone to fetch water; on our return we found grandmother dead; but saw no more of him.”
They followed his track by the blood where it had gone dropping in the path. They ran; when it was dark they slept in the open country. In the morning they awoke and ran with all their might. When it was noon, the man who was carrying the liver looked and saw much dust behind him. He ran very fast. But the real izingogo were more swift than he; for he was a man; they were animals. At midday they saw him. It was a though they flew through catching sight of him. He saw that they would soon catch him. He ascended a very long steep place; when he was at the top, they were reaching the bottom; he descended; he found very much long and thick grass; he took the uvati, and sat down, and churned it, and kindled a fire, and set the grass on fire; it surrounded the steep hill; the izingogo fled, for they feared the fire; they went back from the mountain by the way they came. And he ran forward until it was dark without seeing them.
He slept. In the morning he awoke and fled. That night he slept at another village on the high land. In the morning he awoke and ran. At noon he looked behind him, and saw the izingogo coming to him running. And those who had lagged behind, being tired, now when they saw him ran rapidly; it was again as if their fatigue was at an end. Again he saw they were about to catch him. He churned the uvati, and kindled fore, and burnt the grass: when they saw the fore burning, they halted. He ran and saw them no more; until he had slept twice in the way he did not see them. On the third day, the day he would reach his own people, he saw them at noon; they pursued him; he hastened and approached near the villages, and then turned back.
The izingogo returned to their own home. On their arrival they took the grandmother, and boiled her in a large pot. They took a whole day cooking her. Until it was morning they kept up the fire, and during the morning they kept up the fire. At noon they took her out of the pot, and placed her on the feeding-mats; she remained there till she was cold. The old ones said to the little ones, “Let us eat your grandmother, then we shall not die.” So they ate her up.
The son-in-law of the old woman reached his home; on his arrival he gave her the liver. She said, “You have done well, my child.”
EXPLANATIONS BY THE ZULU NARRATOR
UGUNGQU-KUBANTWANA WAS SO CALLED BECAUSE SHE WAS THE MOTHER OF ALL ANIMALS, FOR SHE WAS THEIR CHIEF; AND AS REGARDS THE POOL, THE ANIMALS USED TO GO TO IT FIRST AND DRINK, AND LEAVE WATER FOR HER, FOR SHE COULD NOT DRINK FIRST, FOR ALL THE WATER WOULD HAVE BEEN EXHAUSTED BEFORE THE ANIMALS HAD DRUNK IF SHE HAD DRUNK FIRST; AND AS TOHER BODY, ON ONE SIDE THERE WAS A COUNTRY, ON THE OTHER RIVERS AND GREAT FORESTS; BUT THE RIVERS WHICH WERE IN HER THE ANIMALS DID NOT LIKE TO DRINK, FOR THEY WERE LIKE COMMON WATER; THAT POOL AT WHICH THEY ALL DRANK WAS, AS IT WERE, MILK; THEREFORE THEY DID NOT DRINK AT OTHER RIVERS, THEY DRANK AT THE POOL. SHE WAS CALLED UGUNQU BECAUSE WHEN SHE WAS STILL AT A DISTANCE SHE WAS HEARD COMING, FOR WHEN SHE WAS MOVING THERE WAS HEARD A GREAT NOISE, AND THEY HEARD THAT SHE WAS COMING BY THE GUNQU, GUNGQU.
THE IZINGOGO WERE APPARENTLY MEN; BUT IT CAME TO PASS BY THEIR CHOICE THEY LIVED IN THE OPEN COUNTRY, UNTIL THEY WERE CALLED ANIMALS, FOR THEY LIVED IN THE OPEN COUNTRY, AND THEREFORE THEY ATE MAN. BUT WHEN THERE ARRIVED A MAN WHO CAME FROM OTHER MEN WHO PRACTICED THE SAME HABITS AS THEMSELVES, THEY REJOICED, SAYING, HE TOO WAS AN INGOGO, BECAUSE HE DID AS THEY DID. BUT THE DISCERNMENT OF THE CHILDREN, WHO WERE ON THEIR GUARD AGAINST HIM, SAYING, “IT IS NOT AN INGOGO.” AND EVEN THOUGH THE OLD ONES WERE ANGRY AND BEAT THEM, THEY DENIED NOTWITHSTANDING THEY WERE BEATEN. THEY USED TO GO AND PLAY ON THE BANK OF THE RIVER; ON THEIR ARRIVAL THEY CONTENDED BY LEAPING, SAYING THAT HE WHO COULD NOT LEAP WAS NOT AN INGOGO; THE LITTLE ONES LEAPED TOO; AND IF THERE CAME A MAN FEIGNING TO AN INGOGO, THEY WOULD GO WITH HIM TO THE BANK, AND TELL HIM TO LEAP LIKE THEM; FOR IT IS SAID, WHEN THEY LEAPED THEY WERE LIGHT, BECAUSE THEY ATE RED EARTH.
THE IZINGOGO USED TO GO ON ALL FOURS; THEY HAD TAILS; BUT THEY TALKED LIKE MEN.
THERE WAS ONCE a certain girl who loved a youth, but her parents said that they would not give her to him in marriage. He was always coming and begging them to let him marry her, but they would say, “We shall not give her to you.”
Now one day the girl came to him and said, “I have come to you to ask you to give me your knife so that I may go and kill my mother. Then we can run away to some other town and be married.”
But he said, “No, no, we must not do that.”
Again she came and said, “Give me your knife, that I may go and kill my mother.”
But again he replied, No, no, you must not kill your mother because of me.” And he continued: “Go home and stay there. Those who can give your parents presents can give you some also.”
Five days passed and then the girl asked, “Will you give me your knife to cut pumpkins?”
Now the boy had forgotten, and he pulled out his knife and gave it to her, and immediately upon receiving it, she went and cut her mother’s throat. Then she ran to the youth and said, “Now, you see I have done it. If we do not flee, you and I will be killed. Look at the blood on your knife; I have cut my mother’s throat with it.”
So they started off. The youth took a bow and arrows and sent the firl in front of him, and they escaped from the city.
They pressed on and on toward the forest. They slept there that night and the next morning they pushed on again. When they reached the centre of the forest, the girl was seized with an internal pain, and she fell down and died. Then the youth drew out one of his arrows and fitted it to the bow and stood and guarded her body.
Soon the beasts of the forest all assembled to eat her, but he would not allow them to do so, but said that nothing should touch her unless he should first be killed.
The eagle came and alighted in front of the youth and said, “Let us feast.” But he said, “No, no, did I not promise that I would not leave her?” Shall I allow you to eat her body?”
The eagle replied, “Do not put your trust in women, they are not truthful.”
But the youth said, “I do not agree, I trust this one.”
Then the eagle said, “Have you a flask?”
And the youth said “I have.”
The eagle said, “Give me it,” and took it and flew off.
Soon he returned with water in the flask and said, “Have you a knife?” And the youth said, “Yes.”
Then the eagle said, “Separate her teeth.” And he plucked out two feathers from his wings and stirred them around in the water. So the girl’s mouth was opened, the water was poured in, and immediately the girl rose up.
Then the eagle said to the youth, “See these feaathers – keep them, some day when you have gone to another city and have obtained something to eat, you will repay is for our feast which was have lost today.”
Sp the youth and the girl went off again and reached a city. They came to the house of an old woman which they entered, and they remained there until the afternoon. They even slept there.
The next morning they heard weeping, and they were told that the king’s mother had died. Then the youth arose and said, “Let me go and see what can be done.” So he started off, and came to where the desth had taken place, and when he had come, he went up to a man and said, “Can you obtain for me an interview with the king?”
“The king’s heart is broken,” the man replied. “Is anyone going to bother him now?”
But another one said, “Here, do you know what his business is? Go and ask the king indeed.”
And the king, when he heard, said, “Tell the youth to come.”
So he was summoned, and he came and said, “If I bring your mother back to life, what will you give me?”
then one of the attendants said, “Have you ever seen anyone who has died come back to life?”
But the king said, “Leave him alone, perhaps he has some magic.” and he continued, addressing the youth, “I will give you ten slaves.” He said, “See, this house also will I give you, and these horses.”
So the youth said, “Very well, bring me water in a flask.” And water was obtained and brought to him.
Then he walked around to the back, and said, “Now open the king’s mother’s mouth.” Immediately after the water had been poured down her throat, she rose up and remained alive, so the youth’s presents were brought and given to him. Then he returned to his house and remained in the town and, whenever anyone died, someone would come and summon him to give the dead person the charm so as to bring him back to life again.
Now after a time, one of the king’s slaves made the girl fall in love with him, and he said, “Look here, girl, since we know each other so well, will you not give me your husband’s charm?”
And she said, “Very well.” So when she went to bed and her husband talked, she remained silent; when he asked her anything, she did not reply.
Then her husband said, “What is the matter with you?”
And she replied, “Well, we have been together for some time now, but you have got something which you are keeping secret from me; you are always hiding it.” Then he said, “Is it only that which has made you so quiet?” Well, here it is; keep it for me.” And he gave the girl the eagle’s feathers. No sooner had she received them than she took a water-pot and said that she was going to the river for water. But instead of doing so, she went and gave the feathers to the king’s slave who took them to his house.
Soon afterward, another death took place in the king’s family and the youth was summoned as usual. He came and said to his wife, “Where is the thing which i gave you to keep for me?”
And she replied, “It is here somewhere, I put it just here.”
They looked but did not find it; they looked again but did not find it.
Now the king’s slave went and said to the king, “If I make him up again, how much will you give me?”
The king replied, “Everything that you want I will give you.”
So the slave said, “Very well,” and he made the dead man rise up.
When he had done this, the king’s slave asked that the youth should be seized and given to him for a slave. The king said, “Very well, go and seize him.”
So he went and caught the youth and took his wife for himself. The king’s slave bound the youth and out handcuffs on him and took him to the forest and made him clear the ground.
Some time later the eagle came to where he was and said: “Where is that which you promised me? I told you that the woman was not faithful, but you said she was. Now let me do you another good turn. Tonight, hold your leg irons up to your thighs and go into the city and find me a cat.” So the youth went and found a cat, and he returned and hid the cat until day-break.
Then the eagle came again and said, “The reason we sought you, O Cat, is that we want you to get us a mouse.”
The cat said, “Very well,” and immediately she ran in where the youth had been cutting wood and caught a mouse.
Then the eagle said, “O Cat, and you, O Mouse, you know the smell of my feathers. Take the road, go into the city, and enter the house of the king’s slave, and if the mouse sees any feather, you, O Cat, take them and bring them here.”
The cat and the mouse went to the city and entered the house of the king’s slave. The mouse looked everywhere, in the pots, in the quiver, but did not see the feathers, and he went outside to the cat, and said, “I cannot see them.”
Then the cat said, “Return, go and look again.” And the cat entered and cried out “Miyau.”
Then the sleepers said, “Thank goodness! She will catch that ouse which has prevented our sleeping.” So they went to sleep, both the king’s slave and his wife.
Then the mouse came and sniffed at the slave’s mouth and saw where the feathers were, and he said to the cat, “Here they are! I see them!”
“Where do you see them?” asked the cat.
The mouse replied, “In his mouth.”
Then the cat said, “Very well, go and bite him.”
The mouse went and bit the slave, and he went poof. The feathers fell out of his mouth and the cat caught them and took them to the youth in the forest.
The next morning the eagle came again and said, “Where are they?”
The youth replied, “See them.”
Then the eagle said, “Good! but let us have another understanding. Some day you must pay me back for my feast which I gave up.”
Now it happened that on the next day one of the king’s sons became ill and died, and the king’s slave was sent for and told to work his magic. But he said that he had lost his charm.
Then the king said, “Summon the other one to come. Here is a horse, go quickly and bring the one who is in the forest.” The youth was sent for quickly and was brought and when he had come, the king said, “See, we have summoned you. May God cause your power to return to you.”
“How can one who lives out in the forest obtain magic?” asked the youth.
But the king said, “For God’s sake, help us.”
Then the youth said, “Very well, but what will you give me?”
The king replied, “Everything that is in the slave’s house I will give you.”
Then the youth prepared his charm and raised up the dead man, and the king said, “Go and seize the slave.”
The youth went and caught the slave and his wife; he undid his own handcuffs and out them on the slave and his wife; he took another pair and out them on the wife; and then he took them to the place where he had been cutting wood and said that they were to stack it all in one place. Then he called to the eagle, telling him to come; and when he had arrived, the youth said, “Go assemble all your relatives; tomorrow we shall meet at the clearing.”
The next morning the eagle came together, all the birds assembled, and all the beasts of the forest also came. When all had arrived, the youth said, “Now set fire to the pile.” So they set fire to it. The fire consumed all the wood and left a great mass of embers. Then he said to the slave and his wife, “Get up and fall into the fire.” But they refused. Then he told his attendants to get up and drag them in; and they threw them into the fire. Every time that they got out, they were thrown in again, and at last they were cooked. The youth told the attendants to pull the bodies out of the fire to put them out in the open.
Then he said, “Eagle!”
And the bird replied “UM!”
“Now, see, here is your feast,” the youth said, and then he mounted his horse and returned to the city.
It is certainly true that women are not to be trusted.
The beasts were dying of thirst. They dug a well, but Master Rabbit refused to dig, saying “I have enough juicy food.”
He went and met the crane. They resolved to gather certain berries called mfulimuninga or nkoroondo, and soon they found them. Then they ate some and put the others aside. This done, they went and walked each his own way in the forest.
While they were on their walk, Master Rabbit bethought himself of going back, and he went and ate all the berries.
He then called to the crane and asked, “Who has eaten my berries? It must be you, Crane, since you were here.”
“Friend,” said the crane, “I have not seen them.”
“Now,” said the rabbit, “what will you pay me for the berries, my berries which you have eaten?” and he went on singing:
“My berries!
I am dead, I am eaten up.”
Mother! There is the crane shaking off and shaking off some of his feathers… “Which is the biggest?” he said, He threw a big one to Master Rabbit, who picked it up and went on his way home.
There he goes… He happened to meet on the road some people who were dancing the war dance and throwing the assegai at one another. “Here is a feather,” he said, “for one of you to put on.” So one of them stuck the feather on his head, but a gust of wind came and blew it off….
“Hello, munsanje!” said the man. “There is your feather going away.”
“Let it go,” said the rabbit, “let it go. What is it worth?”
“Well, Rabbit,” asked some of the people, “Does it not look as if we were men?”
The sun was going down, Someone said, “Have they given you back your feather?”
“They have not.”
So he sang:
“alas! My big feather,
That i got from my brother the crane,
The crane that ate my berries,
My berries that I found on a dry tree.
My berries! I am dead, I am eaten up.”
They gave the rabbit a fish-spear. He picked it up and went and met some people who were fishing. “here is a spear,” he said, “for one of you to spear the fishes.”
One man took it and went on killing fish after fish until he hit a big one. There was the spear disappearing into the water. Dear! Dear! It was going to stop only at the bottom.
“O munsanje, your spear is gone.”
“Let it go. What is it worth?”
When the rabbit saw the sun go down, he said, “It looks as if the sun were going while we rabbits are still here.”
“Yes,” he sang,
“My spear that I got from playing at war,
The people playing at war that lost my big feather,
The big feather that I got from my brother the crane,
The crane that ate my berries,
My berries that I found on a dry tree.
My berries! I am dead, I am eaten up.”
They made for the rabbit a parcel of fish, and he picked it up.
He went on and met some people who were eating porridge without relish. He asked them, “Do you really eat without relish? Here is some fish.”
They put the pot on the fire, then ate, and finished the fish while Rabbit slept. He then awoke. “Have you finished them?” he asked.
“Alas! My fishes which you have eaten,
The fishes that I got from people
fishing with kafir-corn stalks,
The fishermen that lost my fish-spears,
The fish-spear that I got from people playing at war,
The people playing at war that lost my big feather,
The big feather that I got from my brother the crane,
The crane that ate my berries,
The berries that I found on a dry tree.
My berries! I am dead, I am eaten up.”
They gave him kafir corn. He took it and went and met some people who were eating sour milk. “Here is some grain,” he said. “Grind it and cook some light porridge.”
They cooked it and ate it all up… Then he remembered: “Have they given you back your kafir corn, Rabbit?”
The sun was going down. So he said, “Give me back my kafir corn.”
“What?” they replied. “Did you not give it to us?”
“And I, did I tell you to eat it? O mother!
“Alas! my kafir corn that you have eaten,
The kafir corn that I got from people
Who were eating porridge without relish,
The people eating without relish that ate my fishes,
The fishes that I got from people
fishing with kafir-corn stalks,
The fishermen that lost my fish-spears,
The fishermen that lost my fish-spears,
The fish-spear that I got from people playing at war,
The people playing at war that lost my big feather,
The big feather that I got from my brother the crane,
The crane that at my berries,
My berries that I found on a dry tree.
My berries! I am dead, I eaten up.”
They gave him sour milk. So he went on and on, walking carefully. He then saw clouds: “Now,” he said, “it looks as if this little cloud were going to drench me. Somebody will have to pay for it.”
So he went to the top of an ant-hill. And there the little cloud burst upon him. He began to slip and fell over there. There was the sour milk spilt on the ground… “To think, he said, “that my sour milk should be spilt like that!
“My sour milk that I got from people eating think milk,
The people eating thick milk, that ate my kafir corn!
Ant-hill!
Give me my sour milk.
Ant-hill!
Give me my sour milk.”
O mother! Did not the ant-hill actually send out winged ants form him!
He picked them up and went to meet the lion, who was guarding the animals’ well. “Give me some water, ” he said, “I am thirsty.”
“This is no water for the rabbit,” said the lion. Did you not refuse to dig?
The rabbit said, “Do you know what I have here?”
“What is it that you have?” asked the lion.
“They are winged ants,” answered the rabbit.
“Well!” said the lion. “Tie me up while I eat, but let me have the winged ants.”
The rabbit tied him up properly, then gave him the winged ants. After that he went and drank his fill, and, when he had had enough, he took a bath in the well. Then he said, “Your water is all dirtied, as we are rabbits.” He went away.
Soon after that the beats came to drink from their well. They found the water dirty and asked, “Who is it that has made our water so dirty?”
The lion said, “It is the rabbit. Do you not see how he has tied me up?”
“What! The little rabbit has tied up such a big person! How did that happen?”
“He deceived me by giving me winged ants.”
The beats, hearing that, got up and, coming up to the rabbit, fired a cannon at him, boom! and he came to an end.
THE SUN WAS VERY HOT and there was no rain, so the crops died and hunger was great. This happened one year; and it happened again a second, and even a third year, that the rain failed. The People all gathered together on the great open space on the hilltop, where they were wont to dance, and they said to each other, “Why does the rain delay in coming?” And they went to the Medicine-Man and they said to him, “Tell us why there is no rain, for our crops have died, and we shall die of hunger.”
And he took his gourd and poured its contents. This he did many times; and at last he said, “There is a maiden here who must be bought if rain is to fall, and the maiden is named Wanjiru. The day after tomorrow let all of you return to this place, and every one of you from the eldest to the youngest bring with him a goat for the purchase of the maiden.
On this day after morrow, old men and young men all gathered together, and each brought in his hand a goat. Now they all stood in a circle, and the relations of Wanjiru stood together, and she herself stood in the middle. As they stood there, the feet of Wanjiru sank lower to her waist, and again he cried aloud, “I am lost, but much rain will come!”
She sank to her breast; but the rain did not come. Then she again, “Much rain will come.”
Now she sank in to her neck, and then the rain came in great drops. Her people would have rushed forward to save her, but those who stood around pressed upon them more goats, and they desisted.
The Wanjiru said, “My people have undone me,” and she sank down to her eyes. As one after of her family stepped forward to save her, someone in the crowd would give to him or her a goat, and he would fall back. An Wanjiru cried aloud for the last time, “I am undone, and my own people have done this thing.” The she vanished from sight; the earth closed over her, and rain poured down, not in showers, as it sometimes does, but in a great deluge, and all the people hastened to their own homes.
Now there was a young warrior who loved Wanjiru, and he lamented continually, saying, “Wanjiru is lost, and her own people have done this thing.” And he said, “Where has Wanjiru gone? I will go to the same place.” So he took his shield and spear. And he wandered over the country day and night until, at last, as the dusk fell, he came to the spot where Wanjiru had vanished. Then he stood where she had stood and, as he stood, his feet began to sink as hers had sunk; and he sank lower and lower until the ground closed over him, and he went by a long road under the earth as Wanjiru had gone and , at length, he saw the maiden. But, indeed, he pitied her sorely, for her state was miserable, and her raiment had perished. He said to her, “You were sacrificed to bring the rain; now the rain has come, and I shall take you back.” So he took Wanjiru on his back as if she had been a child and brought her to the road once more on the ground.
Then the warrior said, “You shall not return to the house of your people, for they have treated you shamefully.” And he bade her wait until nightfall. When it was dark he took her to the house of his mother and he asked his mother to leave, saying that he had business, and he allowed no one to enter.
But his mother said, “Why do you hide this thing from me, seeing I am your mother who bore you?” So he suffered his mother to know, but he said, “Tell no one that Wanjiru has returned.”
So she abode in the house of his mother. He and his mother slew goats, and Wanjiru ate the fat and grew strong. Then of the skins they made garments for her, so that she was attired most beautifully.
It came to pass that the next day there was a great dance, and her lover went with the throng. But his mother and the girl waited until everyone had assembled at the dance, and all the road was empty. Then they came out of the house and mingled with the crowd. When the relations saw Wanjiru, they said, “Surely, that is Wanjiru whom we had lost.”
And they pressed to greet her, but her lover beat them off, for he said, “You sold Wanjiru shamefully.”
Then she returned to his mother’s house. But on the fourth day her family again came and the warrior repented, for he said, “Surely they are her father and her mother and her brothers.”
So he paid them the purchase price, and he wedded Wanjiru who had been lost.
THERE WAS ONCE a man who had three sons, none of whom had a wife. One day the father went out to see if he could find a suitable girl for his eldest son, and he found a beautiful girl at a village nearby. That night, when he returned home, he called his eldest so and said, “I have found a beautiful girl for you, and tomorrow I want you to take cattle to her father.”
Early next morning the son went out with five of the cattle and presented them to the girl’s father. On his arrival the girl took his sticks and the young boys took the cattle to the kraal. The girl’s father then said, “Have you come to take my daughter?” To this the man replied that he had. The girl’s fasther then called his daughter and said, “Here is your husband, you must go with him to his home today.”
The girl replied that she was ready, and she and the man departed together for his home. On the road home the girl began to sing:
“I am a beautiful girl but I have no teeth.”
Her husband became alarmed and said, “Open your mouth that I may see if what you say is true.” To his surprise he found that what she said was true and that she had only a black ridge where her teeth should had been.
The husband then said, “I was not told of this, and I must return you to your father.” They returned to the girl’s home and there the husband demanded the return of his cattle as his wife had no teeth. The cattle were returned and the disappointed man went home. On his arrival his father asked, “Where is the girl, my son?”
The son replied, “I could not bring her home because she had no teeth.”
The second son, on hearing this, asked his father, “May I not go myself to see if the girl has no teeth, because I too was a wife?” The father agreed, and the next day the second son set off with the five head of cattle. Presenting them to the girl’s father, he said, “I have come for your daughter. I have come early so that I need not sleep here tonight but may return home with your daughter this evening.”
The man informed his daughter of the wishes of the young suitor and the girl replied, “Very well, but I must first give my husband some food.” After the meal the girl suggested that they depart at once, and they proceeded along the road. When she and the second son reached the same place on the road as before the girl began to sing:
“I am a beautiful girl but I have no teeth.”
On hearing this the young man asked her to open her mouth that he might see for himself. To his surprise he found that what she said was true and he immediately returned to her father.” “Here is your daughter,” he said, “she has no teeth and i want my cattle returned.” The girl’s father sadly agreed, and the second son returned to his home.
On his return his father said, “Where is the girl?”
The son replied, “I thought my brother was lying, but it is true. She has no teeth and I returned her to her father.”
The younger son now rose and asked his father if he might go and see for himself, and the father agreed.
The eldest brother asked in disgust, “Do you think that we are mad and stupid because we left the girl?”
“No, no,” answered the youngest brother, “but I should like to see a girl who has no teeth.”
The next day the youngest brother took the cattle and went to the girl’s kraal, where he presented the cattle and asked for the girl. The old man, seeing such a young man, siad, “You are very young to want a wife and, besides, both your brothers tried but returned my daughter. However, you may take her if you so wish.” Calling his daughter, he told her she must return with this new man to his home. The girl agreed and, after first giving her new husband some food, they proceeded down the road.
At the same place as before the girl again sang:
“I am beautiful but I have no teeth.”
“Opne your mouth,” said the young man anxiously. On seeing the black ridge within her mouth he showed some surprise, but only said, “Never mind, let us go on our way.” Arriving at a river the girl began to sing the same song, but the young man said nothing. When in the middle of the stream, he called to the girl to come near to him and, clasping her rightly by the neck with one hand, he told her to open her mouth; with the other hand he scrubbed the girl’s mouth with sand.
To his joy he found that beneath the coating of black shone a set of beautiful teeth, and, filled with happiness, he brought his wife to his father’s kraal. The other two brothers on seeing the girl, rushed to their father saying, “Come father, come and see your mad son, he has brought this girl home, although she is even now singing her song about her teeth.”
The father came, but said nothing, and the youngest brother called one of his sisters and told her to take his newly acquired wife to his mother’s hut. The girls of the village who had heard about this strange girl gathered about her and began to make jokes, so that when the newcomer laughed they might see if the story about her teeth were true. To their surprise they found that the girl had very good teeth.
Meanwhile the youngest son told his father that he had brought the girl home as his wife. The father was disappointed. “Yes, my son,” he said, “that’s all very well, but you have lost all my cattle. What can we do with this girl?” I hear she has no teeth and therefore cannot eat.” The son did not reply, for at the moment his sister came in and told her father that the newcomer had teeth, for she had seen them. The father said, “Are you sure?” Being convinced that it was so, he went to his son and said, “Very well, my son, we shall see your wife tomorrow.”
The next day the father entered the hut where the girl was and said, “I want you to open your mouth. I will give you a sheep for this favor.” The girl did as she was bid and the man saw for himself that she had teeth. The woman in whose hut the girl rested then trilled with her lips, and all three went out to the main yard, where the father called the elder sons and said, “What stupid boys you are! Look, this girl has fine teeth, and it has fallen to your youngest brother to find this out and to take her to wife.”
The two eldest brothers became very ashamed and would not look at the girl. A few days later large pots of beer were made and all the friends and neighbors came to pay their respects to the new arrival. All spoke if her beauty and her excellent teeth, but the two brothers never saw for themselves, their shame being too great.
FOUR LITTLE GIRLS one day started to go out fishing. One of them was suffering sadly from sores which covered her from head to foot. Her name was Ngomba. The other three, after a little consultation, agreed that Ngomba should not accompany them, and they told her to go back.
“Nay,” said Ngomba, “I will do no such thing. I mean to catch fish for mother as well as you.”
Then the three girls beat Ngomba until she ran away. But she determined to catch fish also, so she walked and walked, she hardly knew whither, until at last she came to a large lake. Here she commenced fishing and singing:
“If my mother
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
Had taken care of me
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
I should have been with them
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
And not here alone.”
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
But a murderer, a mpunia, had for some time been watching her, and now he came up to her and accosted her:
“What are you doing here?”
“Fishing. Please, don’t kill me! See, I am full of sores, but I can catch plenty of fish.”
The mpunia watched her as she fished and sang:
“Oh, I shall surely die!
[She catches a fish and puts it in her basket]
Mother, you will never see me!
[She catches a fish and puts it in her basket]
But I don’t care
[She catches a fish and outs it in her basket]
For no one cares for me.”
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
“Come with me,” said the mpunia.
“Nay, this fish is for mother, and I must take it to her.”
“If you do not come with me, I will kill you.”
“Oh! Am I to die
[She catches a fish and puts it in her basket]
On the top of my fish?
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
If mother had loved me
[She catches another fish and puts it in the basket]
To live I should wish.”
[She catches another fish and puts it in her basket]
“Take me and cure me, dear mpunia, and I will serve you.”
The mpunia took her to his home in the woods and cured her. Then he placed her in the paint-house and married her.
Now the mpunia was very fond of dancing, and Ngomba danced beautifully, so that he loved her very much and made her mistress over all his prisoners and goods.
“When I go out for a walk,” he said to her, “I will tie this string round my waist; and that you may know when I am still going away from you, or returning, the string will be stretched tight as I depart, and will hang loose as I return.”
Now Ngomba pined for her mother and, therefore, entered into a conspiracy with her people to escape. She sent them every day to cut leaves of the mateva palm and ordered them to put the leaves in the sun to dry. Then she set them to work to make a huge utenda. When the mpunia returned, he remarked to her that the air was heavy with the smell of mateva.
Now Ngomba had made all her people put on clean clothes, and when they knew that the mpunia was returning, she ordered them to come to him and flatter him. So now they approached him, some calling him “father” and others “uncle”; others told him how he was a father and a mother to them. And he was very pleased and danced with them.
The next day when the mpunia returned, he again said he smelt mateva.
The Ngomba cried, and told him that he was both father and mother to her and that, if he accused her of smelling of mateva, she would kill herself.
He could not endure this sadness, so he kissed her and danced with her until all was forgotten.
The next day Ngomba determined to try her ntenda, and to see if it would float in the air. Four women lifted it high and gave it a start upwards, and it floated beautifully. Now the mpunia happened to be up in a tree, and he aspired this great ntenda floating in the air; and he danced and sang for joy, and wished to call Mgomba, that she might dance with him.
That night he smelt mateva again, and his suspicions were fully aroused. When he thought how easily his wife might escape him, he determined to kill her. Accordingly, he gave her some palm wine to drink which he had drugged. She drank it, and she slept as he put his sommo into the fire. He meant to kill her by pushing this red-hot wire up her nose.
But when he was almost ready, Ngomba’s little sister, who had changed herself into a cricket and hidden herself under the bed, began to sing. The mpunia heard her and felt forced to join in and dance, and thus he forgot to kill his wife. But, after a time, the cricket cased singing, and then he began to heat the wire again. The cricket then sang again, and again the mpunia danced and danced, and in his excitement he tried to wake Ngomba to dance also. But she refused to awaken, telling him that the medicine he had given her made her feel sleepy. Then the mpunia went out to get some palm wine, and as he went Ngomba drowsily asked him if he had made the string fast. He called all his people, dressed himself, and made them all dance.
The cock crew. The iron wire was still in the fire. Then the mpunia made his wife get up and fetch more palm wine.
Then the cock crew again, and it was daylight.
When the mpunia had left her in the morning. Ngomba determined to escape that very day. She called her people and made them try the ntenda again. When she was certain the it would float, she put all her people and the mpunia’s ornaments into it. Then she got in and the ntenda began to float away ever the tree-tops in the direction of her mother’s town.
When the mpunia, who ws up a tree, saw it coming toward him, he danced and sang for joy, and only wished that his wife had been there to see this huge ntenda flying through the air. It passed just over his head and then he saw plainly that the people in it were his people. So he ran after it in the tops of the trees until he saw it drop in Ngomba’s town. And he determined to go there also and claim his wife.
The ntenda floated round the house of Ngomba’s mother, and astonished all the people there, and finally settled down in front of it. Ngomba cried to the people there to come and let them out. But they were afraid and did not dare, so that she came out herself and presented herself to her mother.
Her relations at first did not recognize her, but after a little while they fell upon her and welcomed her as their long-lost Ngomba.
Then the mpunia entered the town and claimed Ngomba as his wife.
“Yes,” her relations said, “she if your wife, and you must be thanked for curing her of her sickness.”
While some of her relations were entertaining the mpunia, others were preparing a place for him and his wife to be seated. They made a large fire, and boiled a great quantity of water, and dug a deep hole in the ground. This hole they covered over with stick and a mat. When all was ready they led the mpunia and his wife to it and requested them to be seated. Ngomba sat near her husband, who, as he sat down fell into the hole. The relations then brought boiling water and fire, and threw this over him until he died.
ONCE UPON A TIME some girls went to pick cherries, and one of them said to one of her comrades, “Let us pick cherries with out eyes shut.” now the rest of her comrades picked without shutting their eyes, and they picked red cherries, but she hers unripe. And she said, “Girls, let us open our eyes,” and she saw that the cherries of her comrades were red. So she said, “My comrades, wait: let me go and pick some good cherries.” And her comrades said, “Go.” However they deceived her and went their ways and defecated. Then she asked, “And you there?” And the dung replied, “We are.” But it was the dung which replied. So she tried to follow her comrades and sang:
“I went with those girls they left me
at the cherries..
They made me stay on the dung and on
the rock,
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
After a while she came to a marsh, and the marsh caused her to trip and fall and upset her cherries. But the marsh gave her a fish in excahnge for her cherries. So the girl sang:
“Behold, this marsh upsets my cherries:
My cherries I got on the rock, where
the girls left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock,
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
The marsh then gave her another fish, but a kite snatched the fish away.
So the girl sang:
“Behold, this kite snatches my fish:
My fish I got from that marsh which upset
my cherries:
My cherries I got on the rock, where
the girl left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock.
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
Then the kite gave her a father. And the girl went along and found a boy who was dancing with a spray of grass. The boy saw that the feather was pretty to grab the feather, and it was badly broken. So the girl sang:
“Behold, this boy breaks my feather:
My feather I got from the kite that snatched
my fish:
My fish I got from that marsh which upset
,y cherries:
My cherries I got on the rock, where
the girls left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock.
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
So the boy thereupon gave her a withe. The girl went on and came upon a place where a man hit his cow with his penis. The girl laughed at him. “Why do you hit your cow with your penis? Have you no stick/” So the man seized her withe and hit his cow with it a nd the withe broke. Then the girl sang:
“Behold, this man breaks my withe:
My withe I got from the boy who broke my feather:
My feather I got from that kite that snatched
my fish:
My fish I got from that marsh which upset
my cherries:
My cherries I got on the rock, where
the girls left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock,
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
The children gave her a razor. And next the girl found a place where they shave their heads with a potsherd, and she laughed. “Why do you shave with a potsherd?” Thereupon the man seized her razor and the razor broke. So the girl sang:
“Behold, this man breaks my razor:
My razor I got from those children who upset
my milk:
My milk I got from that man who broke my withe:
My writhe I got from that boy who broke my feather:
My feather I got from that kite that snatched
my fish:
My cherries I got on the rock where
the girls left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock,
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
These people gave her a cow. Thereupon the girl went on and found a place where they eat bones with the dogs, and she said, “Take this cow and eat it.” Then they killed her cow and ate it, they and their children. So the girl sang:
“Behold, these men kill my cow:
My cow I got from that man who broke my razor:
My razor I got from those children who upset
my milk:
My milk I got from that man who broke my withe:
My withe I got from that boy who broke my feather:
My feather I got from that kite that snatched
my fish:
My fish I got from that marsh that upset
my cherries:
My cherries I got on the rock, where
the girls left me:
I went with those girls: they left me
at the cherries.
They made me stay on the dung and on the rock,
The dung cried ah-loo-rookok,
Ah-loo-rookok was cried on the rock.”
They gave her a dog in exchange for her cow. But the dog killed a man, and they arrested her as the owner of the dog. And the girl said, “Take me to the pasturage that I may defecate.” And they told her, “Go aside here.” But she said, “My dung smells offensive: let me go aside at a distance.” So she escaped from there, fearing vengeance for the man whom the dog had killed.
THERE WAS ONCE a very fat woman who was made of oil. She was beautiful and many young men applied to her parents for permission to marry her and offered a dowry; but the mother always refused. She said it was impossible for her daughter to work on a farm as she would melt in the sun. At last a stranger from a far-distant country fell in love with the fat woman, and he promised, if her mother would give her to him, that he would keep her in the shade. At last the mother agreed, and he took his wife away.
When he arrived at his house, his other wife immediately became very jealous because when there was work to be done, firewood to be collected, or water to be carried, the fat woman stayed at home and never helped, as she was frightened of the heat.
One day when the husband was absent, the jealous wife abused the fat woman so much that she finally agreed to go and work on the farm, although her little sister, whom she had brought from home with her, implored her not to go, reminding her that their mother had always told them, ever since they were born, that she would melt away if she went into the sun.
All the way to the farm the fat woman managed to keep in the shade. When they arrived at the farm the sun was very hot, so the fat woman remained in the shade of a big tree. As soon as the jealous wife saw this, she again began to abuse her and asked her why she did not do her share of the work. At last she could stand the nagging no longer and, although her little sister tried very hard to prevent her, the fat woman went out into the sun to work and immediately she began to melt away. Very soon there was nothing left of her but one big toe which had been covered by a leaf. This her little sister observed and, with tears in her eyes, she picked up the toe which was all that remained of the fat woman, and, having covered it carefully with leaves, she placed it in the bottom of her basket. As soon as she arrived at the house, the little sister placed the toe in an earthen pot, filled it with water, and covered the top up with clay.
When the husband returned, he said, “Where is my fat wife?” and the little sister, crying bitterly, told him that the jealous woman had made her go out into the sun and that she had melted away. She then showed him the pot with the remains of her sister, and told him that her sister would come to life again in three months’ time quire complete in body, but that he must send away the jealous wife, so that there should be no more trouble. If he refused to do this, the little girl said she would take the pot back to their mother, and when her sister became complete again, they would remain at home.
The husband then took the jealous wife back to her parents who sold her as a slave and paid the dowry back to the husband, so that he could get another wife. When he received the money, the husband took it home and kept it until the three months had elapsed. Then the little sister opened the pot and the fat woman emerged, quite as fat and beautiful as she had been before. The husband was so delighted that he gave a feast to all his friends and neighbors and told them the whole story of the bad behavior of his jealous wife.
Ever since that time, whenever a wife behaves very badly, the husband returns her to her parents, who sell the woman as a slave. Out of the proceeds of the sale they give the husband the amount of dowry which he paid when he married the girl.
A WOMAN HAD A CHILD. One day she went to work in the fields. While she was going to her work the child cried. When it stopped crying she suckled it, and after she had finished suckling it she laid it down in the shade. Then she went on hoeing.
Once again the child cried, and a bird came – an eagle – and sat upon it. It soothed the child with its wings. Then the child which was crying became silent. When she saw this the woman was greatly alarmed and said, “Dear me! How terrible! The eagle is eating my child!” As she went toward it the eagle flew away. Then she suckled her child, and after she had done suckling it she put it upon her back. When she had finished hoeing, she left off work and returned to the village.
On her arrival there, she did not tell her husband of the marvel which she had seen but kept it to herself. The next morning, the woman again went to work in the field with her child. The same thing happened – once again she laid the child to sleep in the shade. After a time the child cried. Then she beheld the eagle alight on the child and quiet it. Truly an astounding thing! Once again the woman went to her child. When the eagle saw her coming, it flew off and went to sit on a tree. The woman took her child and was greatly alarmed.
She returned to the village and, on her arrival, told her husband about it, saying, “A great marvel!”
Her husband asked, “What about ?”
The woman said, “Today is the second day I have seen the most amazing thing there where I hoe. I put my child to sleep in the shade, and as soon as it cried an eagle came, and when it alighted it stooped over the child and soothed it with its wings. Today is the second day that I have seen that bird act thus. Its name is eagle.'”
Thereupon the husband refused to believe her, saying, “No, you are lying; there never was such a thing.” The wife said no more.
Late in the afternoon the woman took her hoe and went to work in the field. On her arrival she laid her child in the shade. The child dried. Thereupon the woman thought, “Now I will go and call my husband, who disputed my word and said that I lied.” So the woman ran. When she arrived where her husband was, she cried, “Come on! It is you who disputed, saying there never was such a thing. Let us go now and see.”
The man took his bow and three arrows. On his arrival at the field, the woman said to him:
“Sit down here. I will put the child to sleep in the shade yonder, and then, when you see the bird coming, hide yourself.” The woman left the child and went some distance away, and the man hid himself there. Then the child cried very loudly. As the man watched, he saw the eagle come and sit upon the child. Then the man was greatly alarmed and charged his bow with two arrows, that he night pierce the eagle sitting on his child. Then he shot, but at the moment the eagle dodged, and both arrows pierced his child.
Now that is the explanation of the origin of murder. The eagle was a kind person; nevertheless that father of the child wished to kill it. Then the eagle cursed him, and said, “Now is kindness among men at an end, because you killed your child. Beginning with you, and going on to all people, you shall kill each other.
ONCE UPON A TIME there was a man who married a woman, and she bore him a male child. Then he married a second wife, and she also bore him a male child. After a while the first wife died.
Now the name of the eldest son was M’wambia, and the name of the second was also M’wambia, and he was known as M’ the Younger, to distinguish him from his brother.
When the two boys were about twelve and ten years old, it happened that the animal known as the N’jenge came from the wilds and ate the food in the fields. thereupon the two brothers went into the woods, and M’wambia the Elder made a snare to catch the N’jenge, and M’wambia the Younger also made a snare at a little distance away. Now a N’jenge came into the snare of M’wambia the Younger, and he released it and killed it and ate it. And a N’jenge also came into the snare of M’wambia the Elder, but he released it and did not kill it. He let it go free into the woods, and the two boys returned to the village and said nothing to their father.
One day the mother of M’wambia the Younger went into the fields and gathered sugar-cane, put it into her basket on her back, and brought it to the house. The father took a large piece and gave it to his elder son, but to the younger he gave a small piece. Then the younger brother said, “Why have you given me a small piece and my brother a big piece?’
And he said, “Because you have a mother while the mother of your brother is dead.”
Then M’wambia the Younger said to his father, “Come into the woods.”
Then he showed him the two snares, and told him how he had killed the N’jenge which he had caught, and how M’wambia the Elder had let him go. And the father was very angry and upbraided his elder son, because the N’jenge was very fat. He chose a tree, tall, with a straight stem, and made him climb up into it. Then he took spikes and stuck them into the ground around the tree with the points leaning inward toward the tree; and he made the points sharp, so that if the boy descended or fell down the points would run into him and he would die. He went away and left M’wambia the Elder in the tree.
Now M’Wambia stayed in the tree for twenty days, and at the end of that time, a N’jenge came and said, “Mangi Kihuti!”
And M’wambia said, “I am not Mangi, I am M’wambia.”
And the N’jenge took one spike and ccarried it away, and ten N’jenge came and each took one spike and carried it away. Then the N’jenge whom M’wambia had set free came, and he said, “Mangi.”
And the boy said, “I am M’wambia,” and he told him how he had set him free. The N’jenge, when he heard this, carried away all the remaining spikes and M’wambia gradually unloosed the grip of his arms around the stem of tree and slid to the bottom.
Next the N’jenge made a hole open in his side, and out came a big sheep. M’wambia took some fat to eat. At first he could not eat it, for he was so weak and was very sick; but afterward he ate a little, and then a little of the leg. Then the next day, he ate another piece of the leg. Thus the sheep provided him with food for four days. At the end of that time, the N’jenge opened his side again and there came out a goat, and that gave him food for four days, and then there came out tow goats, and these lasted three days, for M’wambia had grown stronger and bigger. There then came an ox, and the N’jenge ate too, and M’wambia grew still bigger and stronger.
Finally, the N’jenge said, “Go among the long grass and jump.” And M’wambia went among the long grass and jumped twice, and N’jenge said, “You are not yet strong enough.” So they ate another ox, and then the N’jenge said, “Go and jump again.” So M’wambia went and jumped four times. Finally, he said to the boy, “What would you like to possess?”
And he said, “A goat.”
And the N’jenge opened his side and gave him one hundred female goats which had not borne, one hundred female goats which had borne, one hundred young goats who knew their mother, one hundred male goats, one hundred fat male goats, one hundred sheep which had not borne, one hundred sheep which had borne, one hundred young sheep who knew their mother, one hundred male sheep, one hundred fat male sheep, one hundred cows which had not borne, one hundred cows which had borne, one hundred calves, one hundred oxen, one hundred fat oxen.
And the N’jenge said to M’wambia again, “What do you want?”
And M’wambia replied, “Women.”
And the N’jenge gave him two hundred goats and two hundred oxen to buy women. So M”wambia bought one hundred women. And the N’jenge said again, “What do you want?”
And he said, “I want nothing more.”
Then he went to the Gura River, and he built a big village for his wives and his oxen and his goats. But no children were yet born, so M’wambia went and tended the goats, and he sat on a hillside where he could see them all, for they were many.
Now the mother of M’wambia the Younger said to her young daughter, “Take a bag and go get vegetables.” So the child went to get the vegetables bout could see none; and she walked and walked, and at last she saw M’wambia sitting on the hillside herding goats, and she called out, “That is our M’wambia who was lost.” But he said nothing. And then she called out again, “That is our M’wambia who was lost.”
So he spoke to her and he asked, “How are they all at home, my father and my father’s brother?”
She said, “They are well.”
She saw his village and his wives and his cattle. Then he took a goat and killed it and cut it up and put it into her bag. She walked twelve hours and came to her home. As she came to the homestead she called out to her mother, “Bring me a cooking-pot in which to cook the vegetables.” And her mother brought a little one, and she said, “Bring me a big one.” And she brought a bigger, and the girl said, “That is not big enough.”
And the mother said, “Do you want the one in which we cook meat?” And she said, “Yes.”
And her mother asked, “What kind of vegetables have you that you want so large a pot?” The mother opened the bag and saw the meat, and she said, “You have stolen a goat.”
And the girl saaid, “I have not stolen it; it is from M’wambia.”
And her mother said, “Do not tell a lit. M’wambia is lost.”
And the girl said, “I have seen him, and the day after tomorrow you shall come and see him too.” And she told how she had seen him and his many ossessions.
So the next day they cooked the meat and ate it, and on the day after they all went together to see M’wambia. All went – his father and his father’s brother, and the mother and the father’s other wife, and M’wanbia the Younger, and the girl, and all the family. And when they came to where M’wambia the Elder was, they saw him sitting on the hill herding goats. And there was a river between them, and M’wambia the Elder took a string and he tied a goat to the end of the string and threw it across the river. And the father took hold of it to go to him. As he was being pulled across the river he was drowned because he had been cruel to his son. But the others got across safely, and when they came to the village of M’wambia the Elder and saw his many goods, they stayed there and made their home with him.
And after a while, M’wambia said, “I have many men and women to do work in my homestead.” And he gave his relations work to do – one had to mind the fill-grown goats, one had to mind the young goats, and one hed to work in the fields. And he said, “I will go away for a while and see if they do their work well.” And he went to another village and slept there for five days.
And when he came back to his homestead he saw some fat, and he said, “What is this fat on the ground?” And he looked and saw on the wall the head of N’jenge, and he knew that his friend the N’jenge had come to the village while he was away and that hsi relatives had killed him. And he said no word to them, but he said to himself, “My luck is gone, because the N’jenge is dead with whom I am of one heart.”
And he took a stone and a knife and made his knife very sharp, and he killed all the women and all the men, and all the goats and all the cattle. Then he took the knife and plunged it into his own breast, for the N’jenge, his luck, was dead.
ALL THE GIRLS of the town had assembled and had gone to the forest to pick herbs. While they were doing this, it began to rain; from the east it came, and they ran and got inside the hollow of a baobab tree, and the devil closed it up. When the rain had ceased, the devil said that each must give him her necklace and cloth before he would release her, and all gave them to him except one girl who refused to do so. So she had to remain, but the others went off home.
Now the tree had a small hole at the top, and girls who had returned told the girl’s mother, so she started off and came to see the place where her daughter was. Then she returned home and prepared food, and in the evening she went back to the tree and said, “Daughter, daughter, stretch out your hand and take this food.” So she stretched out her hand through the hole, and the girl got it and ate it, and then the mother went home again.
Now it happened, a hyena had heard all this and, later on, he returned and said, “Daughter, daughter, stretch out your hand and take this food.” But she replied, “That is not my mother’s voice,” and she would not. So the hyena went to a blacksmith and said, “Alter my voice for me, so that it will resemble that of a human being,” and the other said, “If I do improve your voice for you, even before you have arrived at the foot of the tree you will have eaten whatever you have found. However,” he continued, “I’ll do it for you,” and he did so. But as the hyena was returning, he saw a centipede, and he said, “Does one ignore what he finds in the morning?” So he took the centipede and ate it. Then he went to the tree and said, “Daughter, daughter, stretch out your hand and take this food.” But she replied, “That is not my mother’s voice.”
So the hyena became angry, and he returned to the blacksmith and was about to eat him, but the other said, “Stop, stop, stop, you must not eat me,” and he continued, “Why do you want to eat me?” Then the hyena replied, “Because you did not alter my voice properly.” Then the smith said, “Stop, I will do it properly.” So he altered the hyena’s voice and then the hyena returned to where the girl was and said, “Daughter, daughter, stretch out your hand and take this food.” This time she stretched out her hand, and, when she had done so, the hyena seized it and pulled the girl out of the tree and ate her, leaving only the bones. Then he went away.
Now the girl’s mother brought the food in the evening. But when she came, she saw her daughter’s bones, and she burst out crying there. Then she went home and got a basket, and she returned and collected the bones and took the road to the city where men were mended.
She travelled on and on, and after a time she came to a place where food was cooking itself, and she said, “O food, show me the road to the city where men are mended.” Then the food said, “Stay here and eat me,” but she replied, “I have no appetite, I do not wish to eat you.” So the food said, “When you have gone a certain distance, take the road on the right hand and leave that on the left.”
After a time she came upon meat which was grilling itself, and she said, “O meat, show me the road to the city where men are mended.” Then the meat said, “Stay here and eat me,” but she replied, “I have no appetite, I do not wish to eat you.” So the meat said, “When you have gone so far, take the road on the righthand and leave that on the left.”
So she started again, and as she was traveling, she came upon fura which was mixing itself in a pot, and she said, “O fura, show me the road to the city where men are mended.” Then the fura said, “Stay here and eat me,” but she replied, “I have no appetite, I do not wish to eat you.” So the fura said, “When you have gone a certain distance, take the road on the right hand and leave that on the left.”
She traveled on again and, at last, there she was in the city where men were mended. Then the people said, “What has brought you here?” And she replied, “The hyena has eaten my child.” “Where are the bones?” they asked. And she put down her basket and said, “See, here they are.” So they said, “Very well, tomorrow your daughter will be mended.”
When morning broke, they said to her, “Go out and tend the cattle,” so she unloosed the cattle and took them off to feed. Now these cattle had no food except the fruits of the adduwa tree, and when she had picked off the fruits above and had thrown them down, she picked out the ripe ones and gave them to the cattle, but she herself chose the green ones to eat. She fed them thus until the evening, and then they returned home, and as they reached the enclosure, the bigger bull began bellowing:
“This woman has a good heart,
Mend her daughter well.”
So the daughter was mended well, and the mother returned to her hut, for the people said to her, “Sleep here, and tomorrow you will go home.” So next day the daughter was brought and restored to her mother, and they went home.
Now the mother had a rival wife, who also had a daughter, but a very ugly one, and when the mother had returned home, the rival said that she too would kill her daughter, and go to the city where men were mended.
So took her daughter, and put her in a mortar, and began to pound her up. Then the daughter cried out, “O Mother, are you going to kill me?” But she went on pounding , and at last she took out the bones, and she brought a basket and put the bones into it, and then she took the road to the city where men were mended.
She traveled on and on, and after a time she came to a place where food was cooking itself, and she said, “O food, show me the road where men are mended.” Then the food said, “Stay here and eat me,” but she replied, “Opp, do you need to invite me to eat you?” So she stayed and ate the food.
After a time she came upon meat which was grilling itself, and she said, “O meat, show me the road to the city where men are mended.” Then the meat said, “Stay here and eat me,” and she replied, “Opp, do you need to invite me to eat you?” So she stayed and ate up the meat.
She started again, and as she was traveling, she came upon fura which was mixing itself in a pot, and she said, “O fura, show me the road to the city where men are mended.” Then the fura said, “Stay here and eat me.” and she replied, “Opp, do you need to invite me to eat you?” So she stayed and ate up the fura.
So on she traveled again and, at last, there she was in the city where men are mended. Then the people said, “What has brought you here?” And she replied, “The hyena has eaten my child.” “Where are the bones?” they asked. And she put down her basket and said, “See, here they are.” So they said, “Very well, tomorrow your daughter will be mended.”
When morning broke, they said to her, “Go out and tend the cattle,” so she unloosed the cattle and took them off to feed. Now when she had picked off the fruits of the adduwa tree, and had thrown them down, she picked out the green ones, and gave them to the cattle, and she herself choose the ripe ones to eat. She fed them thus until the evening, and then they returned home, and as they reached the enclosure, the biggest bull began bellowing:
“This woman has a bad heart,
Mend her daughter ill.”
So she tied up the cattle, and went to her hut, for the people said to her, “Sleep here, and tomorrow you will go home.” In the morning, the daughter was created with one leg, one buttock, one hand, the whole consisted of only one side. Half a nose was there, the other half was missing. And when the mother came and said that she was going home, the daughter was brought out to her, and they went off along the road.
When they had emerged from the forest, the mother said, “I am not your mother,” and she started off at a run, and went on and hid in some grass. But the daughter followed the footprints, and went on and on until she had found her, and said, “Arise, let us go on.” “Ah, it is you who are not my mother.”
Once more the mother started off at a run and entered their own town and went into her hut and shut the door. But the daughter came to the door and called out, “O Mother, I have come.” But the other remained silent. “O Mother, I have come,” said the daughter again, and she opened the door, and went to her mother. So they lived together, and the rival wife had to put up with the fact that the other’s daughter was beautiful while her own was hideous.
A CERTAIN WOMAN had tow daughters. One was married to a man who lived in a town where no one was allowed to go to sleep, the other to one in a town where one might spit.
One day the woman cooked a dish of sweetmeats to take to the daughter who lived in the town where no one was allowed to go to sleep. As soon as the dish was ready she started off and, when she arrived, all the household said to her, “Welcome, welcome!” Food was prepared for her, for the son-in-law said, “See, my mother-in-law has come.”
Bu the daughter said, “O parent, no one may sleep here. Do not eat too much lest sleepiness should overcome you.”
But the mother said, “I knew long before you were born that sleep was not permitted here.”
“Oh, very well then,” replied the daughter, “I’ll say no more.” And the mother ate every bit of the food that was brought to her.
The night =, although she lay down, she managed to keep awake. In the morning the daughter took up her jar to go to the stream for water and said to her mother, “See here, I have put the breakfast on to boil. Please keep up there fire while I am away.
but when the daughter had gone, although her mother managed to replenish the fire for a time, drowsiness overcame her in the end, and she lay down and fell fast asleep, Just then a neighbor came to get fire and, when she saw the sleeping woman, she exclaimed, “Alas! So-and-so’s mother-in-law is dead.”
Then the drummers were sent for, and soon the whole town had assembled at the house and a grave had been dug. The drums were saying:
“Birrim, birrim, get a corpse mat,
Death’s in the son-in-law’s house.”
But the daughter heard from where she was, and cried out:
“Stay, oh, stay, don’t get a corpse mat,
We are accustomed to sleep.”
And when she had come to her house, she roused her mother, and said, “Wake up, wake up.” Then the mother awoke a start and the people were terrified, but they soon saw that it was nothing to be afraid of, and the whole town began to learn how to sleep.
Now the mother returned to her own home, and one day she cooked more sweetmeats and decided to visit her other daughter, the one living in the town where no one might spit.
When she arrived, the household said, “Welcome, welcome!” And the son-in-law said, “My mother-in-law has come.” So he killed a fowl and sent her a dish of rice. The daughter said to her mother, “Do not eat much. You know that in this town no one is allowed to spit.”
The mother replied, “Thanks for the information! I knew that before ever you were born.”
“Very well,” said the daughter, and she took no more notice. The mother ate until she was full.
Now when night came, she wanted very much to spit, but she did not know where she could do so without being found out. At last she went to the place where the horses were tied, and she spat, and covered the place with some of the cut grass there. But the earth was not used to this, and the part spat upon rose up and began to complain, saying:
“Umm, umm, I am not used to this,
Umm, umm, I am not used to this.”
Soon all the people came and siad, “Who has spat here?” Then they said, “Bring out the magic gourds, the small one and the large, and let everyone come here and step over them; and the gourds will catch hold of the one who has spat.” So all the people of the town stepped over them, but no one was seized and they were surprised. Then someone said, “See here, there is a stranger amongst us, let her come and step over the gourds.”
Immediately when she had come and had lifted up a leg to step over, the gourds seized her, and everyone said, “It is she who has spat, it is she who has spat! And the gourds began singing these words:
“The things which clasp and hold on,
The mother-in-law has got them.”
She could not sit down, for they held on to her body.
Now, the spider, that interfering person, met her, and said, “O mother-in-law, how lucky you are to have gourds which sing such a beautiful song. I should like to have them.”
So she replied, “Very well, spit on the ground and say that it waas not you who did it.”
And when he had done so, he said, “There! But ut us not I who have done it, if it is I, O you magic gourds, seize me.”
And immediately the gourds loosed the woman and seized him. They began singing:
“The things which clasp and hold on,
The spider of spiders has got them,”
and the spider felt exceedingly pleased, and began to dance.
But soon he got tired and said, “O mother-in-law, you thing to be avoided, come and take your gourds.” But she refused to do so.
Then the spider climbed a tree, and when he got high up he threw himself down on his buttocks, so as to smash the gourds. But they moved to one side, and so the spider’s back was broken and he died. then the magic gourds returned to where they had come from, and all the townspeople began to spit, for they saw the there was no harm in it.
The ability of the entity to transform energy into an idea and then to construct it physically determines the entity’s place on the physical evolutionary plane. simple organisms are capable of “picking up” fewer communications, their range is less, but the vitality and validity of their constructions is excellent. In simple organisms such as the paramecium and amoeba, the few sharp ideas received are constructed almost simultaneously, without reflection. The organism needs no other mechanism to translate ideas. What is has is sufficient.
More complicated organisms – mammals, for example – have need of further mechanisms to construct ideas because they are able to perceive more of them. Here memory is an element. Now the organism has a built-in ghost image of past constructions by which to perfect and test new ones. Reflection of some sort enters into the picture, and with it the organism is given more to do. Slowly, within its range of receptivity, it is given some choice in the actual construction of ideas into physical reality.
The reflection is brief, but for a moment the animal partakes of a new dimension. The shadow of time glimmers in his eyes as the still imperfected memory of past constructions lingers in his/her consciousness. As yet, memory storage is small, but now the instantaneous construction is no longer instantaneous, in our terms. There is a pause: the organism – dog or tiger – can choose to attack or not to attack. The amoeba must construct its small world without reflection and without time as we know it.
Entities with still broader range need more complicated structure. The scope of their receptivity is so large that the simple autonomic nervous system is not enough. The amoeba constructs each idea it receives, because it is able to receive so few. All must be constructed to ensure survival. With man/woman, the opposite becomes true. He/she has such a range of receptivity that it is impossible for him/her to construct all of his/her ideas physically. As his/her scope widened, a mechanism was necessary that would allow him/her to choose. Self-consciousness and reason were the answers.
Suddenly, time blossomed like a strange flower in his/her skull. Before this he/she was transfixed in the present. But memory produced another dimension in the animal and man/woman carried it further. No longer did memory flicker briefly and disappear, enclosing him/her in darkness again. Now it stretched brightly behind him and also stretched our ahead – a road on which he/she always saw his/her own changing image.
He/she learned continuity: And with his/her focused memory at his/her command, man’s/woman’s ego was born, which could follow its own identity through the maze of blazing impulses that beset him/her, could recognize itself through the pattern of continuing constructions and could separate itself from its action in the physical world. Here you have the birth of subject and object, the I AM who is the doer or constructer, and the construction itself.
This new dimension enabled the species to manipulate and recognize its own constructions and freed it to focus greater energy in projecting some ideas over others. In other words, conscious purpose became possible, physically, Somewhere along the lone, however, man/woman began to divorce himself/herself almost completely and artificially form his/her own constructions. Hence his/her groping, his/her sense of alienation from nature, his/ehr search for a Cause or Creator of a creation he/she no longer recognized as his own.
Bessi-Bird and Capped Diaba lived together in one place at first and ate out of one dish. Bessi-Bird was the elder, Diaba the younger. They set their minds on going to hunt for honey, and it happened when they arrived in the vicinity of the honey that Bessi-Bird said, “Smile, Diaba, when you see where the honey is.” Diaba smiled, but he did not see the honey. When Bessi-Bird smiled he had really seen it. That is what they did, and then they returned home leaving the honey behind, but Diaba quietly disappeared and went off to steal the honey.
Next morning Bessi-Bird said, “Let us go to our honey.” There they found a bit of bare honeycomb mangled and thrown about, so he asked Diaba about it, and Diaba replied, “My brother, I have seen neither it nor him who has stolen the honey. Since we came out yesterday nobody has come back hereto demolish the honey in this way.” And once again Diaba said to Bessi-Bird, “As for me, I could not eat any of this honey unless you had given it tome.”
So then Bessi-Bird said no more, and they went out again looking for honey. Once more they found some honey. Bessi-Bird saw it before Diaba did, and he tested Diaba by saying, “Smile.” Diaba said, “I cannot see the honey, smile yourself, my brother.” Bessi-Bird: “No, child, smile.” So Diaba smiled and he saw the honey; then Bessi-Bird asked him, “What do you see?”
Diaba said, “It looks as if it might be flies fluttering before the eyes.”
Bessi-Bird said, “Haven’t you seen it?”
But Diaba was deceiving him, for he saw the honey all the time. When Bessi-Bird was about to smile, he saw the honey and said, “Let us cut down the tree to get it.”
Diaba refused, saying, “No, as you said yesterday that I stole the honey, well, I am Diaba! Let us bring some bird-lime and set a trap beside the honey, then if it be I who steal the honey you will catch me.”
“Good business,” replied Bessi-Bird.
They went off to get some bird-lime from the human beings. Then when they arrived at their village, Bessi-Bird said, “We will come tomorrow to set the trap.” But after a time Bessi-Bird quietly disappeared and went off to set the bird-lime at the honey. Said Diaba to himself, “Let me go quietly and eat the honey.” But the bird-lime was set already, although he did not notice it. When he thought of sitting down beside the honey, he sat on the bird-lime. Said he, “I will strike it with my wing,” but he stuck to it. And when he struck with his tail he stuck to it. When he wanted to draw back his right wing, it was stuck fast. He tried to strike it with his breast but he stuck. When he attempted to bite it with his beak, he bit the bird-lime. then he simply died for lack of breath.
When Bessi-Bird appeared on the scene, after he had looked for him at the village, he found him already dead. Then he mocked him, saying, “Diaba, smile!” As he was dried up, he said that was the reward of thievery. “From today you will not steal any more. The chieftainship is mine over honey and to be extolled by people! As for you, from today your portion shall be bird-lime already spread, and thus will you be killed by people.”
Now since they separated there on account of thievery, Biaba belongs to bird-lime and Bessi-Bird is still extolled. While he talked like this, Bessi-Bird was standing upon the corpse of Diaba. They became distinct in other directions, while their cry remianed the same and, to this day, Diaba’s portion is bird-lime and to be entrapped by men.
There once lived a certain man called Laobe-the-jealous-one, and his wife was Oni. He did not want anyone to see Oni or anyone to talk to her, so he went and built a small settlement for Oni to live in, No one ever went into the village.
Now he, Laobe-the-jealous-one, could not beger children. Because of that, if he and his wife lived in town, someone would take her away. Now the sky-god advised the young men, saying, “Laobe-the-jealous-one has been married Oni for a very, very long time. She has not conceived by him and borne a child: therefore he who is able, let him go and take Oni and, should she conceive by him, let him take her as his wife.” All the young men tried their best to lay hands on her, but not one was able.
Now Hathor, the spider, was there watching these events and he said, “I can go to Laobe-the-jealous-one’s village.”
The sky-god said, “can you really do so?”
Spider said, “If you will give me what I require.”
The sky-god said, “What kind of thing?” Spider replied, “medicine for gun and bullets.” And the sky-god gave them to him.
The Spider took the powder and bullets to various small villages, saying, “The sky-god has bade me bring bring powder and bullets to you, and you are to go and kill meat, and on the day I shall return here I shall take it and depart.” He disturbed the powder and the bullets among very many small villages, until all were exhausted. All the villagers gave him some meat.
Ona certain day Spider wove a palm-leaf basket. Its length, as it were, was from here to over yonder. Spider took it to the small village where he had disturbed the powder and bullets to receive all the meat which they had killed. Father Spider took the meat and palm-leaf basket, set them on his head, snd set out on the path leading to Laobe-the-jealous-one’s settlement. When he reached the stream from which Laobe and his wife drank, he picked out some meat and put it in the stream.
Spider strode hard, carrying the palm-leaf basket full of meat, and passed through the main entrance leading into Laobe-the-jealous-one’s compound. Oni saw him. She said, “Laobe! Come and look at something which is coming to the house here. What can it be?
Spider said, “It is the sky-god who is sending me, andI am weary, and I am coming to sleep here.”
Laobe-the-jealous-one said, “I have heard my lord’s servant.”
Oni said to Spider, “Father man, some of your meat has fallen down at the main entrance to the compound.”
The spider said, “Oh, if you happen to have a dog, let him go and take it and chew it.” So Oni went and got it and gave it to her husband. Then Spider said, “Mother, set some food on the fire for me.” Oni out some on, and Spider said, “Mother, is it fufuo that you are cooking or eto?”
Oni replied, “Fufuo.”
Spider said, “Then it is too little; go and fetch a big pot.”
Oni went and fetched a big one, and Spider said, “Come and get meat.”
There were forty hind quarters of great beasts. He said, “Take only these and out them in the pot. If you had a pot big enough, I would give you enough meat to chew to make your teeth fall out.”
Oni finished preparing the food, turned it out of the pot, and placed it on a table, slashed water, and out it beside the rest of the food. Then Oni took her portion and went and set it down near the fire, and the men went and sat down beside the table. They touched the backs of each other’s hands and ate out of the same dish. All the time they were eating, Laobe Spider said, “There is no salt in this fufuo.”
Laobe said to Oni, “Bring some.”
But Spider said, “not at all. When the woman is eating, you tell her to get up to bring salt. Do you yourself go and bring it.”
Laobe arose from the table, and Spider looked into his bag and took out a pinch of purgative medicine and put it in the fufuo. Then he called Laobe, saying, who suspected nothing, continued eating.
When they had finished their meal, Laobe said, “Friend, we and you are sitting here and yet we do not know your name.”
Spider replied, “I am called ‘Rise-up-and-Make-Love-to-Oni'”
Laobe said, “I have heard, and you, Oni, have you heard this man’s name?”
Oni replied, “Yes, I have heard.”
Laobe rose up to go and prepare one of the spare bedrooms and to make everything comfortable. He said, “Rise-up-and-Make-Love-to-Oni, this is your room, go and sleep there.”
The spider aid, “I am the soul-washer to the sky-god and I sleep in a open veranda-room. Since mother bore me and father begat me, I have never slept in a closed bedroom.”
Laobe said, “Where, then, will you sleep?”
He replied, “Were I to sleep in this open veranda-room here, to do so would be to make you equal to the sky-god, for it would mean that I was sleeping in the sky-god’s open veranda room. Since I am never to sleep in anyone’s open room except that of a sky-god, and since that is so, I shall just lie down in front of this closed sleeping-room where you repose.”
The man took out a sleeping mat and laid it there for him. Laobe and his wife went to rest, and Spider, too, lay down there. Spider lay there and he slipped in the crossbar of the bedroom door. Spider lay there and took his musical bow and sang:
“Spider, today we shall achieve something, today.
Spider, the child of Mballe, the mother of Hathor, the sky-god, today we
shall achieve something, today.
Spider, the soul-washer to Hathor, the sky-god, today I shall see something.”
Then he ceased playing his sepirewa, and he laid it aside and lay down. He had slept for some time when he heard Laobe-the-jealous-one calling, “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except the chirping of the cicada, dinn! “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! Laobe-the-jealous-one was dying. The medicine had taken effect on him, but he called, “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! At last he said, “Rise-Up-and-Make-Love-to-Oni!”
The spider said, “M! M! M!”
Laobe said, “Open the door for me.” Spider opened the door, and Laobe went out. And the spider rose up and went into the room there.
He said, “Oni, did you not hear what your husband said?”
She replied, “What did he say?”
Spider replied, “He said I must rise up and make love to you.”
Oni said, “You don’t lie.”
And he did it for her, and he went and lay down.
That night Laobe rose up nine times. The spider also went into times to where Oni was. When things became visible next morning, Spider went off.
It would be about two moons later when Oni’s belly became large. Laobe questioned her saying, “Why has your belly got like this?” Perhaps you are ill, for you know that I who live with you here I am unable to beget children.” Oni replied, “You for get that man who came here whom you told to rise up and make love to Oni. Well, he took me and I have conceived by him.”
Laobe-the-jealous-one said, “Rise up, and let me take you to go and give you to him.” They went to the sky-god’s town. On the way Oni gave birth. They reached the sky-god’s town and Laobe went and told the sky-god what had happened, saying, “A subject of yours whom you sent slept at my house and took Oni, and she has conceived by him.”
The sky-god said, “All of my subjects are roofing the huts. Go and point out the one you mean.” They went off, and the spider was sitting on a ridge-pole.
Oni said, “There he is!” Then Spider ran farther on.
And again Oni said, “There he is! Then Spider fell down from up there where he was sitting.
Now that day was Friday, Spider said, “I, who wash the sky-god’s soul – you have taken your hand and pointed it at me, so that I have fallen down and got red earth on me.” Immediately the attendants seized hold of Laobe-the-jealous-one and made him sacrificing the sheep, he said to the sky-god, “Here is the woman; let Spider take her.” So Spider took Oni, but as for the infant, they killed it, cut it into pieces, and scattered them about.
MANY YEARS AGO There was a Yourba hunter named Sungor who lived in the bush. He killed plenty of animals and made much money. Every one in the country knew him, and one of his best friends was a man called Duai, who lived near him.
Sungor was very extravagant and spent much money in eating and drinking with everyone until at last he became quite poor, and he had to go out hunting again. But now his good luck seemed to have deserted him, for although he worked hard and hunted day and night, he could not succeed in killing anything.
One day, as he was very hungry, he went to his friend Duai and borrowed two hundred rods from him. He told him to come to his house on a certain day to get his money, and he told him to bring his gun, loaded, with him.
Now sometimes before this, Sungor had made friends with a leopard and a bush cat whom he had met in the forest while on one of his hunting expeditions; and he had also made friends with a goat and a hen at a farm where she had stayed for the night. But, though Sungor had borrowed the money from Duai, he could not think how he was to repay it on the day he had promised. At last, however, he thought of a plan. The next day he went to his friend the leopard and asked him to lend him two hundred rods, promising to return the amount to him on the same day as he had promised to pay Duai. He also told the leopard the, if he were absent when he came for his money, he could kill anything he saw in the house and eat it. The leopard was then to wait until the hunter arrived, when he would pay him the money. To this the leopard agreed.
The hunter then went to his friend the goat and borrowed two hundred rods from him in the same way. Sungor also went to his friends the bush cat and the hen and borrowed two hundred rods from each of them on the same conditions, and told each one of them that if he were absent when they arrived, they could kill and eat anything they found about the place.
When the appointed day arrived, the hunter spread some corn on the ground, and then went away and left the house deserted. Very early in the morning, soon after she had heard to crow, the hen remembered what the hunter had told her and she walked over to the hunter’s house but found no one there. On looking around, however, she saw some corn on the ground and, being hungry, she commenced to eat.
About this time the bush cat also arrived, and not finding the hunter at home, he too looked about and very soon he espied the hen who was busy picking up the gains of corn. So the bush cat went up very softly behind and pounced on the hen and killed her at once, and begun to eat her.
By this time the goat had come for his money; but not finding his friend, he walked about until he came upon the bush cat who was intent upon his meal off the hen that he did not notice the goat approaching; and the goat, being in rather a bad temper at not getting his money, at once charged at the bush cat and knocked him over, butting him with his horns. This the bush cat did not like at all, so, as he was not big enough to fight the goat, he picked up the remains of the hen and an off with it to the bush; and so he lost his money, as he did not await the arrival of the hunter. The goat was thus left master of the situation and started bleating. This noise attracted the attention of the leopard, who was on his way to receive payment from the hunter. As he got nearer, the smell of goat became very strong and, being hungry, for he had not eaten anything for some time, he approached the goat very carefully. Not seeing anyone about, he stalked the goat and got nearer and nearer until he was within springing distance.
The goat, in the meantime, was quietly grazing, quite unsuspicious of any danger, as he was int the compound of his friend the hunter. Now and then he would say “Ba!” But most of the time he was busy eating the young grass and picking up the leaves which had fallen from a tree of which he was very fond. Suddenly the leopard sprang at the goat and, with one crunch at the neck, brought him down. The goat was dead almost at once, and the leopard started on his meal.
It was now about eight o’clock in the morning, and Duai, the hunter’s friend, having had his early morning meal, went out with his gun to receive payment of the two hundred rods he had lent to the hunter. When he got close to the house he heard a crunching sound. Being a hunter himself, he approached very cautiously and, looking over the fence, he saw the leopard only a few yards off busily engaged eating the goat. He took careful aim at the leopard and fired, whereupon the leopard rolled over dead.
The death of the leopard meant that four of the hunter’s creditors were now disposed of, as the bush cat had killed the hen; the goat had driven the bush cat away, who thus forfeit his claim; and in his turn the goat had been killed by the leopard, who had just been slain by Duai. This meant a saving of eight hundred rods to Sungor, but he was not content with this. As soon as he heard the report of the gun he ran out from where he had been hiding all the time and found the leopard lying dead with Duai standing over it. Then in very strong language Sungor began to upbraid Duai and asked him why he had killed his old friend the leopard. He said the nothing would satisfy him and that he would report the whole matter to the king, who would no doubt deal with Duai as he thought fit. When Sungor said this, Duai was frightened and begged him not to say anything more about the matter, as the king would be angry; but the hunter was obdurate and refused to listen to him. At last Duai said, “If you will allow the whole thing to drop and will say no more about it, I will allow the the whole thing to drop and will say no more about it, I will make you a present of the two hundred rods you borrowed from me.” This was just what Sungor wanted; but still he did not give in at once. Eventually, however, he agreed and told Duai he might go and that he would bury the body of his friend the leopard.
Directly Duai had gone, instead of burying the body, Sungor dragged it inside the house and skinned it very carefully. The skin he put out to dry in the sun and covered it with wood ash, and the body he ate. When the skin was well cured, the hunter took it to a distant market where he sold it for much money.
And now, whenever a bush cat sees a hen he always kills it and does so by right, as he takes the hen in part payment of the two hundred rods which the hunter never paid him.
Moral: Never lend money to people, because if they cannot pay they will try to kill you or get rid of you in some way, either by poison or by setting bad jujus for you.
It is God who created men and women. And since God had pity, He Said, “I do not wish men and women to die altogether. I wish that men/women, having died, should rise again.” And so He created men/women and placed them in another region. But he stayed at home.
And then God saw the chameleon and the weaver-bird. After He had spent three days with the chameleon and the weaver-bird was a great maker of words compounded of lies and truth. Now of lies there were many, but of the words of truth there were few.
Then He watched the chameleon and recognized that he had great intelligence. He did not lie. His words were true. So he spoke to the chameleon, “Chameleon, go into that region where I have placed the men/women I created, and tell them that when they have died, even if they are altogether dead, still they shall rise again – that each man/woman shall rise again after he/she dies.”
The chameleon said, “Yes, I will go there.” But he went slowly, for it is his fashion to go slowly. The weaver-bird had strayed behind with God.
The chameleon travelled on, and when he had arrived at his destination, he said, “I was told, I was told, I was told… ” But he did not say what he had been told.
The weaver-bird, since he is a bird, flew swiftly, and arrived at the place where the chameleon was speaking to the people and saying, “I was told…” Everyone was gathered there to listen. When the weaver-bird arrived, he said, “What was told to us? Truly, we were told that men/women, when they are dead, shall perish like the roots of the aloe.”
Then the chameleon exclaimed, “But we were told, we were told, we were told, that when men/women are dead, they shall rise again.”
Then the magpie interposed and said, “The first speech is the wise one.”
And now all the people left and returned to their homes. This was the way it happened.
And so men/women become old and dies; they do not rise again.
SOME MEN ONCE WENT out hunting. When they had walked some distance, they met a girl who was decked with chins that hangled to and fro. One of the men saluted her, and she returned the salutation. He said to her, “Give me food!”
“Take it, here is some!”
“I do not want any!’
“What do you want, then?”
“I want to take you home as my wife to out village.”
“Wait, then, and I’ll fetch my mother!” She called, “Mother!”
“Wau!”
“Here is a man who wants to take me to wife!”
The man saw how the water of a pool began to surge, and it rose up and down violently. He saw a head resembling a flame of fire appearing above the surface of the water. Then the man and his friends took fright and fled, throwing away their provisions and their bows and all their clothes. They ran to their camp and said, “In this neighborhood we do not wish to sleep. We are very frightened, and tomorrow we shall go back home.”
They returned home to their village and said to the people there, “We have seen a girl and her mother who live in the water. And the girl is very good-looking, but her mother, on! oh!”
“What does she look like?”
“She is an ogre!”
“Let us go and take that girl to wife; we are not afraid of ogres,” said some.
They got their equipment and set out into the wilderness. A boy who was quite small joined them. They remonstrated at length with the boy and told him to turn back, but he refused. They went on and came to the place where, on the preceding day, the other men in fright had thrown their things away. They said, “Never mind! Let us go on and bring the girls back home with us!”
They went on and found the girl. They greeted her: “Wakara, girl?”
“AAah!”
“Give us food!”
“There is food in the calabash.”
“We do not really want food.”
“What do you want, then?”
“We want to take you home with us to our village.”
“Well, wait, then, and I shall fetch my mother, so that she may see you!”
“Your mother, why should you call her?”
“I summon her so that she may come and see him who wishes to take me to wife.”
“Well, call her, then!”
“Mother!”
“Wau!“
“Come here that you may see the man who wants to take me to wife!”
They saw how the water began to surge, high, then higher. They saw a head looking out of the pool, and it looked like fire. They all ran away, only the small boy remianed. In their flight they threw away the calabashes containing their provisions. And they repaired to the camping-place from which they started. The ogre-mother pursued the men for some distance, and then she slowly returned and became very small. Then she said to the boy, “Good-day, son-in-law!”
“Aah!” said the girl
“I understand that some man wanted to take you to wife, but this one is a child,” the ogress said to her daughter.
The boy said, “So I am, mother, but never mind that!”
“Well, sit down, then, and talk with your wife, and come tonight over there to my hut.”
When evening arrived, the wife said to him, “Get up and let go to the hut!”
“But where are we to sleep? Will that be in the water?”
“There is a hut.” She took him by the arm. “Close your eyes! And opne them when we are inside the hut!”
The boy shut his eyes and then opened them again, and found that he was in a hut free from water. And the woman, his mother-in-law, was sitting there weaving a bag and looking like a Kamba woman. She said to him, “You go and lie down on the bed over there and sleep!” And they went and lay down. And in the morning they went to the garden. The boy went to make a new garden for his mother-in-law. When he came back, she asked, “Do you wish to return home?”
“Yes!”
“Then take your belongings and be off!” And to her daughter she said, “In case, when you get home, your husband should happen to die, you must give instructions that he is not to be buried, but that they must throw him outside. And when he begins to putrefy, you are to take a maggot which you shall put into a honey jar. That maggot you must smear every day with fat. You must go on smearing it with fat and, eventually, it will grow into a child. That child you must go on smearing with fat, and then it will increase in gowth, and you must give it milk. And by and by you will see that it is your husband who has returned.”
“I will do as you say,” answered the girl. The next morning they returned to the husband’s home.
When the people saw the boy arriving with the girl, they wailed and said, “Alas, alas! That beautiful girl has become the wife of a child. Has anyone ever seen the like.” And they looked about for medicine to kill the boy, but found that they were unable to kill him in that manner. Then they said, “We will show you something else.”
And they took their bows and went to hunt bush buck. The boy’s brother went and took up his station for the hunt in a spot out in the wilderness, and the boy placed himself opposite him. The brother shot him. Then he called for help, “Come here, all of you! I happened to shoot Syani when I aimed to kill a bush buck.”
“Seeing it was you who did it, there can be no case against you, as you were his brother.” They put the body of the boy down in the wilderness and returned home.
In the evening they said to the girl, “Syani is dead.”
She asked, “In what way was he killed?”
“By his brother.”
She wailed a great deal. Then she ceased, and asked the brother, “How did you manage to kill him?”
“I was aiming to kill a bush buck.”
“Well, I do not care for other men. I am going to live alone.”
She wept for two months. After that she asked where they had put her husband in the wilderness. She went there and found a maggot. She took it, brought it home, and put it into a honey jar. She smeared it with fat and continued to do so daily. It grew into ad and could grow no further within the jar. Then she took the child out and out it underneath her bed-stead in the we. Here husband’s brother lived there in the hut, but they did not sleep together.
The boy grew apace. She made food for him and brought it to him under the bed. The man asked her, “Who is it that you are feeding over there underneath the bed?”
“It is rats, it is just rats that are always hanging about there.”
One day the boy went outside the hut, and then she noticed that he had grown into a big man. She gave him sword, quiver, and bow, and said to him, “It was this child that was killed when they were hunting bush buck. Tonight he will take revenge.”
“Good!”
Now the brother had gone to drink beer at some villages far away. He returned in the evening, speaking with the beer. As he reached the gate of his fence, he heard someone talking with the wife within. He said, “Who is that?”
The wife answered, “Come here, and you will see him!”
He took his stick in order to beat the man. He walked in, and when he got to the door of the hut, he was shot by the brother to the ground, was slashed with the sword, and died.
The next morning the husband and his wife moved away from the place. They went and settled at a place called Kavithe.
IN THE COURSE OF TIME, a man had three sons. Once, the oldest one went with his mother to dig up eddos tubers. As they were thus occupied, he saw a seed-bulb. And he said, “Why, there is a seed-bulb as handsome as my little brother.” But his mother said to him, “How can a seed-bulb be as handsome as a human child?” He, however, hid the seed-bulb, and the mother tied up the eddos to carry them home. The boy hid the seed-bulb in the hollow of a tree and, using a magic formula, said, “Msura Kwivire-vire tsa kambingu na kasanga.”
The following day he went there again. The seedling had now become a child. Whenever his mother cooked food, he carried some to it, again and again. Every day he carried food there, but he himself grew leaner and leaner. His father and mother noticed how lean he had grown and asked him, “Son, what is it that makes you so lean? Where is the food going that we always cook for you? Your younger brothers have not become so lean!” Then one of his younger brothers decided to watch the food being cooked.
He saw his older brother receive his share severed on a plate, and that he did not eat it but carried it away as though to save it. His brothers followed him at a distance to spy on him and saw how he put it into the hollow of a tree. thereupon they returned home and said to their mother, “We saw how our brother out the food there into the hollow of a tree and brought it to a child living there.” And she said to them, “Whose child would inhabit the hollow of a tree?” Thereupon they said to her, “Come on, we will go and direct you there, you-who-have-nursed-us!” And they led their mother there and showed her the place. And behold! there in the hollow of the tree was a little child! So his mother approached the child and killed it.
After she had killed the child, the older brother Mrile carried food there as usual but did not find the child; instead he found it slain. There upon he went home and wept copiously. Then his parents asked him, “Mrile, why do you cry?” And he answered, “It is because of the smoke.” So they said, “Sit down here at the lower end.” Yet his tears still continued unrestrained. Again they said to him, “Why do you cry all the time?” And he answered, “It is nothing but the smoke.”” Then they responded, “Take your father’s chair along with you and go into the courtyard and sit down!” He took the chair, sat down on it in the courtyard, yet the tears continued.
Suddenly he said, “Chair, raise yourself up high like my father’s rope whereby he suspends the honey barrel in the virgin Forest and in the steppe.” About this time his younger brothers entered the courtyard. They saw how he was traveling upward the sky.
They informed their mother, “Mrile has travelled up toward the sky.” But he said, “Why do you talk about your oldest brother traveling up toward the sky? Is there a road, you-who-have-nursed-us!” So his mother came to investigate and found that he had indeed ascended high up.
There upon his mother cried:
“Mrile return
Return, my child,
Return!”
But Mrile answered:
“I shall return no more,
I shall return no more,
Mother, Ah, I,
I shall return no more,
I shall return no more.”
Thereupon his younger brother cried:
“Mrile, return,
Return, our brother,
Return!
Come home,
Come home!”
But he said: “Oh, I,
I shall return no more,
I shall return no more,
My brothers,
I shall return no more,
I shall return no more.”
Thereupon his father came and spoke:
“Mrile, here is your food,
Here is your food,
Mrile, here it is!
Mrile,here is your food,
Here is your food!”
But he answered, saying:
“I want no more,
I want no more,
My father, Ah, I,
I want no more,
I want no more.”
Thereupon his tribal companions came and sang:
“Mrile, come home!
Come home!
Mrile, come!
Come home!
Come home!
Mrile, come!”
Thereupon his uncle came and sang:
“Mrile, come home,
Come home!
Mrile, come!
Come home,
Come home!”
But he sang in reply:
“Ah, I,
I shall return no more,
I shall return no more.
Uncle, Ah, I,
I shall return no more,
I shall return no more!”
And he disappeared, so that they could not see him any more
After a while, Mrile encountered wood-gatherers. He greeted them, “Wood-gatherers, good day! Please show me the way to Moon-King.” But they answered him, “Gather some wood, then we will direct you there.” So he cut some firewood for them. Then they told him, “Just go straight ahead, and you will encounter some grass-cutters!” So he went on and soon encountered some grass-cutters. “Grass-cutters, good day!” They returned the greeting. “Please show me the road to Moon-King.” But they said to him, “Cut some grass first, then we will direct you there.” So he cut some grass for them. Thereupon they told him, “Just go straight ahead, and you will encounter some tillers.” So he went on and soon encountered some tillers. “You who are tilling there, good day!” And they said to him, “First till for us, then we will direct you there.” So he tilled for them. There upon they told him, “Just go straight ahead and then you will encounter some herdsmen.” He went on and soon encountered some herdsmen. “You, tending the herd there, good day!” Good day!” Please direct me to Moon-King!” But they told him, “Watch the herd for us for a while, and we will direct you there!” So he helped them with the grazing for a while.
Then they said to him, “Just go straight ahead to the bean-harvesters!” “You there, harvesting beans, good day! Please direct me to Moon-King!” “Help us pick beans a little, then we will direct you there!” So he picked some beans. Thereupon they said, “Just go further along this road to the millet-reapers!” Soon he encountered some millet-reapers. “You, millet-reapers, greetings! Please direct me to Moon-King!” “Help us first reap some millet, then we will direct you there!” “Now go further along the road to the people who seek banana stalks!” These, in turn, he saluted: “You, banana-stalk seekers, greetings! Please direct me to Moon-King!” “Help us seek banana stalks first, then we will direct you there!” So he found them some banana stalks. Then they told him, “Just go straight ahead, until you come to the people who carry water!” “You water-carriers, greetings! Please show me the way to Moon-King!” “Go straight ahead to the people who are just eating in their houses!” “You, house-owners, greetings! Please direct me to Moon-King!” “Come, first eat something, then we will direct you there.”
After a while he encountered people who ate raw food. They were the people of the Moon-King. And he said to them, “Why do you not cook with fire?” But they answered him thus, “What is that, fire?” He said to them, “One cooks food with it until it is done.” Then they said to him, “We know nothing about fire!” And he said to them, “If I prepare you some tasty food by means of fire, what will you give me?” The Moon-King said, “We shall rent you large cattle and some small stock.” And Mrile said to them, “Good, gather a lot of dry wood for me, and I will bring you the fore.” So they gathered some wood, but they went behind the house where they were not seen by other people.
Mrile, then, brought forth a fire-drill and a fire-board and struck fire, there, behind the house. They then lit the firewood and he placed green bananas in it for roasting. Then he said to Moon-King,”Try to eat these bananas which I have roasted in the fire.” Moon-King ate the banana and noticed how nice it tasted. thereupon Mrile put meat in to cook and said to him, “Now you must eat cooked for them all kinds of eatable things, all well done. Finally, Moon-King had the people called and he said to them, “A medicine-man has come from below there, from below there!”
Now Moon-King spoke, “Tribute shall be paid to this man to buy his fire from him.” Then they asked him, “What shall be paid you?” And he said, “Let one person bring a cow, another a goat, another something from the granary!” So they carried all these things to him. Then he distributed fire among them, whereon they went to cook their food.
After a while he reflected: “How can I reach home again, if I cannot send a message there?” So he ordered all the various birds to come to him. They came to the place where he was staying. Then he spoke to Raven: “If i send you to my homeland as a messenger, what will you say when you get there?” Raven said, “I shall speak thus: ‘Coorooh, coorooh, coorooh!” So he chased him away. Then Rhinoceros-Bird came. “You, Rhiniceros-Bird, of I send you, how will you speak to them?” He answered, “I shall say, ‘Ngaa, ngaa, ngaa!‘ ” So he chased him away, and Hawk appeared. “You, Hawk, if I send you into the homeland as a messenger, what will you say?” Hawk answered thus: “Chiri-i-i-o!” So he chased him away too. Thereupon he spoke to Buzzard: “If I send you, what will you say?” Buzzard answered, “I shall say, ‘Cheng, cheng, cheng!’“
So he chased him away. And thus he examined in turn all the birds, every species around there, without finding a bird who understood anything. Then, finally, he called Mocking-Bird. “You, Mocking-Bird, if I send you, what message will you deliver?” Mocking-Bird answered:
“Mrile will come the day after tomorrow,
The day after tomorrow;
Mrile will come the day after tomorrow,
The day after tomorrow,
The day after tomorrow.
Save some fat for him in the spoon!
Save some fat for him in the spoon!”
Thereupon Mrile said, “Well, that is good, go ahead!”
Then Mocking-Bird went and reached the gate to the court of Mrile’s father, and he sang thus:
“Mrile wants me to tell you:
He will come the day after tomorrow,
The day after tomorrow,
He will come the day after tomorrow.
The day after tomorrow,
Save some fat for him in the spoon!”
And Mrile’s father set out into the courtyard saying, “My, what is this being the shouts in the courtyard and tells me that Mrile will come the day after tomorrow? For, surely, he has perished long ago!” He drove him away and the bird disappeared.
Then Mocking-Bird went to Mrile and said, “I have been there.” But Mrile spoke to him thus: “No, you have not been there. If you have been there – what does one find there, in my Homeland?” And he said to him, “Go a second time, and when you get there, be sure to pick up my father’s stick and come back therewith, so that I can be certain you have been there.” So Mocking-Bird returned for a second time, picked up the stick and carried it to Mrile. The children in the house saw hime take it, but they could not snatch it away from him.
Then Mocking-Bird brought it to Mrile. Thereupon Mrile was certain that Mocking-Bird had really been there. Now Mrile said, “Well, I shall now set out on my journey home.” Moon-King let him go with his cattle.
So he started out with his cattle. On the way he grew tired. Now he had a bull with him, and the bull spoke to him and said, “Since you are so tired out, If I take you upon my back, what will you do?” If I take you upon back, will you eat me when they slaughter me?” And Mrile answered him, “No, I will not eat you.” So he climbed on the bull’s back, and the bull supported him. Finally he arrived, singing:
“No possessions do I lack,
The stock is mine, hae!
No possessions do I lack, The cattle are mine, hae!
No possessions do i lack,
The small stock are mine, hae!
No possessions do I lack, Mrile comes home, hae!
No possessions do I lack.”
And so Mrile came home. When he arrived at home, his father and mother smeared him with fat. Then he spoke to them thus: “This bull you shall feed until he grows old. Even when he grow old, I shall not eat his meat.” But said, “Should this bull, that my son has taken so great trouble with, be devoured without his eating therefrom?” And she his the fat, she hid it in the honey pot. When she knew that the meat had been used up, she ground flour, took the fat and added it thereto. So she brought it to her son, and Mrile tasted it. When he had tasted it with his mouth, the meat spoke to him: “Do you dare to consume me, me who have taken you on my back?” And it said to him, “Therefore be consumed, as you consume me!
Then Mrile sang:
“My mother, I told you:
Serve me not the meat of the bull!”
But when he tasted it for a second time, his foot sank into the ground. And he sang:
“My mother, I told you:
Serve me not the meat of the bull!”
Thereupon he consumed the meal completely. Suddenly, he was wallowed up.
SOME MEN ONCE WENT out hunting. When they had walked some distance, they met a girl who was decked with chains that dangled to and fro. One of the men saluted her, and she returned the salutation. He said to her, “Give me food!”
A CERTAIN MAN Once upon a time set his bird line and sent his daughter, saying, “Go and look at my line while I go to dig.” So his daughter went to see the line. She found a guinea-fowl caught in it, and the guinea-fowl sang:
“Little girl, little girl, kirijakija,
What have you come to do?”
Then said the girl, “I have come to look at the snare.” And the guinea-fowl asked her, “Whose snare is it?” And the girl said, “I have come to look at my father’s snare.” Thereupon the guinea-fowl said to her, “Go and tell your father that I will bring a white bead and a white sheep if he will let me go.”
So the girl went back and told her father, and her father abused his daughter, saying, “You are a bad child,” and sent hi son instead.
So his son went to look at his father’s line and he too found the guinea-fowl in the line. And the guinea-fowl asked him, asked him in song:
“Little boy, little boy, kirijakija,
What have you come to do?”
There upon said the little boy, “I have come to look at my father’s line.” And the guinea-fowl said, “Go and tell your father that I will bring a white chicken and a white sheep and a white bead if he will let me go.”
So the boy went back and told his father in these words.
Next the man sent his wife. His wife found the guinea-fowl, and the guinea-fowl addressed her in the same terms as he had used to the children.
Then anger overcame the man, and he went himself and found the guinea-fowl in the line. The guinea-fowl addressed his same song as before. But the man seized the guinea-fowl firmly, and the guinea-fowl said to him, “Though you seize me, seize me: here in the evening I shall seize mine.”
The man then brought him home and plucked him. As he did this, the guinea-fowl said to him, “Though you pluck me, pluck me: here in the evening I shall pluck mine.”
The man cooked the bird, and the guinea-fowl said to him, “Though you cook me, cook me: here in the evening I shall cook mine.”
But he was cooked and ready to be eaten. Then the man summoned people, and the people came for food, came the they might eat the guinea-fowl which had been cooked. They all rejoiced with a careless joy and served up the guinea-fowl. Suddenly the guinea-fowl flew up with a quick flutter and these men were left with their joy.
Now if the man had been wise enough to take the white bead and the sheep and the white chicken, he could have eaten this guinea-fowl. This was the guinea-fowl of God.
A CERTAIN MAN once upon a time set his bird line and sent his daughter, saying, “Go and look at my line while I go to dig.” So his daughter went to see the line. She found a guinea-fowl caught in it, and the guinea-fowl sang:
ONCE THERE WAS A man and woman to whom were born first a boy and then a girl. When the bride-price had been paid for the girl and she was married, the parents said to the son, “We have a herd for you to dispose of. It is now time for you to take a wife. We will choose you a pretty wife, one whose parents are honest people.”
The son, however, firmly refused. “No,” he said, “do not bother. I do not like any of the girls who are here. If I absolutely have to marry, I shall choose for myself what I want.”
“Do as you will,” said the parents, “but if you are unhappy later on, it will not be out fault.”
Then the boy set out, left the country, and travelled far, very far, into an unknown region. Finally, he came to a village where he saw some young girls, some of them crushing corn and others cooking. Secretly he made his choice, and said to himself, “That one there is the one I like.” Then he went to the men of the village and said, “Good day, fathers!”
“Good day, young man!” they answered. “What is it that you wish?”
“I want to look at your daughters, for I want to take a wife.”
“Well, well,” they said, “we shall show them to you, and then you can choose.”
So they led all of their daughters past him and he indicated the one he wanted. She fave her consent right away.
“Your parents, we expect, will pay us a visit and bring us the bride-price, is that right?” asked the young girl’s parents.
“No, not at all,” answered the young man, “I have my bride-price with me. Take it; here it is!”
“Then,” they added, “they will, we trust, come latter in order to conduct your wife to you?”
“No, no, I fear they would only pain you with the hard admonitions they would give the girl. Let me, myself, take her along right away.”
The parents of the young girl gave their consent to this request, but they took her aside in the hut once more to give her advice on how to conduct herself, “Be good to your parents-in-law and take diligent care of your husband!” Then they offered the young couple a younger daughter who could help with the housework. But the woman refused. Two, ten, twenty were then offered for her to choose from. All the girls were first examined before being offered to her.
“No,” she insisted, “I do not want them. Give me instead the buffalo of the country, our buffalo, the Wonder-Worker of the Plains. Let him serve me.”
“How can you ask for him?” they said. “You know that our life depends on him. Here he is well taken care of, but what would you do with him in a strange country? He will starve, die, and then all of us will die with him.”
Before she left her parents, she took with her a pot containing a package of medicinal roots, a horn for bleeding, a little knife for making incisions, and a gourd full of fat.
Then she set out with her husband. The buffalo followed them, but he was visible to her alone. The man did not see him. He did not suspect that the Wonder-Worker of the Plains was the servant accompanying his wife.
As soon as they had come to the husband’s village, they were received with joyful cries: “Hoyo, boyo!”
“Now look at him!” said the old ones. “So you have found a wife after all! You did not want one of those whom we suggested to you, but that makes no difference. It is well as it is. You have acted according to your own will. If, however, at some time, you have enemies, you will have no right to complain.”
The man then took his wife into the fields and showed her which were his and which were his mother’s. The girl noted everything carefully and returned with him to the village. On the way she said, “I have lost my pearls in the field; I must return to look for them at once.” In reality, however, she wanted to see the buffalo. She said to him, “Here is the boundary of the fields. Stay here! And there, too, is the forest in which you can hide.”
“You are right,” he replied.
Now whenever the wife wanted any water, she merely went to the cultivated fields and set the pitcher down in front of the buffalo. He ran with it to the lake, filled it, and brought the vessel back to his mistress. Whenever she wanted wood, he would go into the brush, break trees with his horns, and bring her as much as she needed.
The people in the village were surprised at all these things. “What strength she has!” they said. “She is always back from the well right away; in the twinkling of an eye she has gathered a bundle of dry wood.” But no one suspected that a buffalo assisted her as a servant.
The wife did not, however, bring the buffalo anything to eat, for she had only one plate for herself and her husband. At home, of course, they had had a separate plate for the Wonder-Worker and fed him her pitcher and send him to fetch water. This he did willingly, but he felt pangs of hunger.
One day she showed him a corner in the brush which he was to clear. During the night the buffalo took a hoe and prepared a vast acreage. Everyone commented, “How clever she is! And how fast she has done her work!”
One evening the buffalo said to his mistress, “I am hungry and you give me nothing to eat. Soon I shall not be able to work any more!”
“Aie,” said she, “what shall I do? We have only one plate at the house. The people at home were right when they said that you would have to start stealing. So, steal! Go into my field and take a bean here and there. Then, again, go farther. Do not, however, take them all from the same spot, thus the owners may not be too much aware of it and will not fall over in terror right away.”
That night, accordingly, the buffalo went to the field. He devoured a bean here and there, jumped from one corner to the other, and finally fled back to his hiding place. When the woman came into the fields the next morning, they could not believe their eyes. “Hey, hey, what is going on here? We have never seen anything like this! A wild beast has destroyed our plants! One can even follow his spoor. Ho, the poor land!” So they ran back and told the story in the village.
In the evening, the young woman said to the buffalo, “To be sure, they were very much terrified, but not too much, nevertheless. They did not fall on their backs. So keep on stealing tonight! And so it continued. The owners of the devastated fields cried out loud and then turned to the men and asked them to summon the watchmen with their guns.
Now, the husband of the young woman was a very good marksman. He, therefore, hid in an ambush in his field and waited. The buffalo, however, thought that someone might be lying in wait for him where he had stolen the night before, so he went to his mistress’s beans, the place where he had pastured the first time.
“Say,” cried the man, “this is a buffalo! One has never seen any like him here. This is a strange animal, indeed.” He fired. The bullet entered the temple of the buffalo, close to the ear, and came out exactly opposite on the other side. The Wonder-Worker of the Plains turned one somersault and fell dead.
“That was a good shot! exclaimed the hunter and announced it to the village
But the woman now began to cry out in pain and writhe. Oh, I have stomach-aches, on, oh!”
“Calm yourself,” she was told. She seemed sick, but in reality she only wanted to explain why she was crying thus, and why she was so terrified when she heard of the buffalo’s death. She was given medicine, but she poured it out when nobody else saw her.
Now everyone set out, women with baskets, and men with weapons, in order to cut up the buffalo. They young wife alone remained in the village. Soon, however, she followed them, holding her belly, whimpering and crying.
“What is wrong with you, that you come here,” said her husband. “If you are sick, stay home!”
“No, I did not want to stay in the village all by myself.”
Her mother-in-law scolded her, saying that she could not understand what she was doing and that she would kill herself by this. When they had filled the baskets with meat, she said, “Let me carry the head!”
“But no, you are sick, it is much too heavy for you.”
“No,” said she, “let me do it!” So she shouldered it and carried it.
After they had arrived at the village, however, instead of stepping into the house, she went into the shed where the cooking-pots were kept and set down the buffalo’s head. Obstinately, she refused to move. He husband looked for her in order to bring her into the hut. He said she would be much better off there, but she only replied to him harshly, “Do not disturb me!”
Then her mother-in-law came and admonished her gently. “Why do you torture yourself?”
And she replied crossly, “Will you not let me sleep even a little?”
Then they brought her some food, but she pushed it away. Night came. Her husband went to rest. He did not sleep, however, but listened.
The woman now fetched fire, cooked some water in her pot, and poured into it the package of medicine which she had brought with her from her home. Then she took the buffalo’s head and, with the knife, made incisions in front of the ear, at the temple, where the bullet had struck the animal. There she set the bleeding horn and sucked, sucked with all the force of her body, and succeeded in drawing first a few lumps of clotted blood, and the liquid blood. Thereupon she exposed the place to the team which rose from the cooking-pot, after, however, smeared it completely with the fat that she had saved in the gourd. That soother the spot. Then she sang as follows:
“Ah, my father, Wonder-Worker of the plains,
They told me: You would go through the deep darkness; that in all directions you would stumble through the night, Wonder-Worker of the Plains;
You are the young wonder-tree plant, grown out of ruins, which dies before its time, consumed be a gnawing worm…..
You made flowers and fruits fall upon your road, Wonder-Worker of the Plains!”
When she had finished her invocation formula, the head moved, the limbs grew again, the buffalo came to life once more, shook his ears and horns, rose up, and stretched his limbs….
But at this point the man, who could not sleep in the hut, stepped out and said, “why does my wife have to cry so long? I must see why she pours out all these sighs!” He entered the shed and called for her, nut in great anger she replied, “leave me alone!” Thereupon, however, the buffalo head fell to the ground again, dead, pierced as before.
The man returned to the hut; he had understood nothing of all this and had seen nothing. Once again the woman took the pot, cooked the medicine, made the incisions, placed the bleeding horn in the proper spot, exposed the wound to the steam, and sang as before:
“Ah, my father, Wonder-Worker of the Plains,
Indeed they have told me: You would go through the deep darkness; that in all directions you would stumble through the night, Wonder-Worker of the Plains.
You are the young wonder-tree plant, grown out of ruins, which dies before its time, consumed by a gnawing worm…..
You made flowers and fruit fall upon your road, Wonder-Worker of the Plains!”
Once again, the buffalo rose up, his limbs grew together again, he felt himself coming to life, shook his ears and horns, stretched himself – but then again came the man, disquieted, in order to see what his wife was doing. Then she became very angry with him, but he settled down in the shed in order to watch what was going on. Now she took her fire, her cooking pot and all the other things and went out. She pulled up grass to kindle the embers and began for the third time to resuscitate the buffalo.
Morning had already broken when her mother-in-law came – and once more the head fell to the ground. Day came, and the buffalo’s wound began to grow worse.
Finally, she said to all of them, “I would like to go bathing in the lake all alone.”
They answered her, “but how will you get there since you are sick?”
She went on her way anyhow and then came back and said, “On my way I came upon someone from home. He told me that my mother is very, very sick. I told him to come here to the village but he refused and said, ‘They would offer me food and that would only delay me.’ He went on right away and added that I should hurry lest my mother die before my arrival. Therefore, good-bye, I am going away!”
Of course, ll this was a lie. She had thought of the idea of going to the lake so that she could invent this story and have a reason for carrying the news of the buffalo’s death to her people.
She went off, carrying the basket on her head and singing all along the road the end of the song about the Wonder-Worker of the Plains. Wherever she passed, the people would band together behind her to accompany her into her village. Arrived there, she announced to them that the buffalo no longer lived.
Then they sent out messengers in all directions in order to gather together the inhabitants of the country. They reproached the young woman earnestly, saying, “Do you see now? We told you so. But you refused all the young girls and wanted absolutely to have the buffalo. Now you have killed all of us!”
Things had advanced thus far when the man, who had followed his wife into the village, also arrived. He rested his gun against a tree trunk and sat down. They greeted him by shouting, “Be saluted, criminal, be saluted! You have killed us all!” He did not understand this and wondered how one could call him a murderer and a criminal.
“To be sure, I have killed a buffalo,” Said he, “but the is all.”
“Yes, but this buffalo was your wife’s assistant. He drew water for her, cut wood, worked in the field.”
Completely stunned, the man said, “Why did you not let me know that? I would not have killed him then.”
“That is how it is,” they added. “The lives of all of us depended on him.”
Thereupon all of the people began to cut their own throats. First, the young woman, who, as she did it, called out:
“Ah, my father, Wonder-Worker of the plains!”
Then came her parents, brothers, sisters, one after the other.
The first one said:
“You shall go through darkness!”
The next:
“You shall stumble through the night in all directions!”
The next:
“You are the young wonder-tree plant which dies before its time.”
The next:
“You made flowers and fruit fall upon your road!”
All cut their throats and they even slew the little children who were still being carried in skins upon the back. “Why should we let them live,” They said, “since they would only lose their minds!”
The man returned home and told his people how, by shooting the buffalo, he had killed them all. His parents said to him, “Do you see now? Did we not tell you that misfortune would come to you? When we offered a fitting and wise woman for you, you wanted to act according to your own desire. Now you have lost your fortune. Who will give it back to you, since they are all dead, all of your wife’s relatives, to whom you have given your money!”
THE DAUGHTER OF THE KING Usikulumi said, “Father, I am going to the Llulange next year.” Her father said, “Nothing goes to that place and comes back again: it goes there for ever.” She came again the next year and said, “Father, I am going to the Llulange. Mother, I am going to the Llulange.” He said, “nothing goes to that place and comes back again: it goes there for ever.” Another year came round. She said, “Father, I am going to the Llulange.” She said, “Mother, I am going to the Llulange.” They said, “To the Llulange nothing goes and returns again: it goes there for ever.” The father and mother at last consented to let Untombinde go.
She collected a hundred virgins on one side of the road, and a hundred on the other. So they went on their way. They met some merchants. The girls came and stood on each side of the path, on this side and that. They said, “Merchants, tell us which is the prettiest girl here; for we are two wedding companies.” The merchants said, “You are beautiful, Utinkabazana; but you are not equal to Untombinde, the king’s child, who is like a spread-out surface of good green grass; who is like fat for cooking; who is like a goat’s gall-bladder!” The marriage company of Utinkabazana killed these merchants.
They arrived at the river Llulange. They had put on bracelets and ornaments for the breast, and collars, and petticoats ornamented with brass beads. They took them off, and placed them on the banks of the pool of the Llulange. They went in, and both marriage companies sported in the water. When they had sported a while, a little girl went out first and found nothing there, neither the collars, nor the ornaments for the breast, nor the bracelets, nor the petticoats ornamented with brass beads. She said, “Come out; the things are no longer here.” All went out. Utombinde, the princess, said, “What can we do?” One of the girls said, “Let us petition. The things have been taken away by the Isikqukqumadevu.” Another said, “You, Isikqukqumadevu, give me my things, that I may depart. I have been brought into this trouble by Untombinde, the king’s child, who said, ‘Men bathe in the great pool: our first fathers bathed there.’ Is it I who bring down upon you the Intontela?” The Isikqukqumadevu gave her the petticoat. Another girl began, and besought the Isikqukqumadevu: she said, “You, Isikqukqumadevu, just give me my things, that I may depart. I have been brought into this trouble by Untombinde, the king’s child; she said, ‘At the great pool men bathe: our first fathers used to bathe there.’ Is it I who have brought down upon you Intontela?” The whole marriage company began until every one of them had done the same. There remained Untombinde, the king’s child, only brought into this trouble by Utombinde, the king’s child; she said, ‘At the great pool men bathe: our first fathers used to bathe there.’ Is it I who have brought down upon you Intontela?”
The marriage party said, “Beseech Usikqukqumadevu, Utombinde.” She refused, and said, “I will never beseech the Isikqukqumadevu, I being the king’s child.” The Isikqukqumadevu seized her, and put her into the pool.
The other girls cried, and cried, and then went home. When they arrived, they said, Untombinde has been taken away by the Isikqukqumadevu.” Her father said, “A long time ago I told Untombinde so; I refused her, saying, ‘To the Llulange, nothing goes to that place and returns again: it goes there for ever.’ Behold, she goes there for ever.”
The king mustered the troops of young men, and said, “Go and fetch the Isikqukqumadevu, which has killed Untombinde.” The troops came to the river, and fell in with it, it having already come out of the water, and being now on the bank. It was as big as a mountain. It came and swallowed all that army; and then it went to the very village of the king; it came, and swallowed up all men and dogs; it swallowed them up, the whole country, together with the cattle. It swallowed up two children in that country; they were twins, beautiful children, and much beloved.
But the father escaped from that house; and he went, taking two clubs, saying, “It is I who will kill the Isikqukqumadevu.” And he took his large spear and went on his way. He met with some buffalo, and said “Whither has Isikqukqumadevu gone? She has gone away with my children.”The Buffalo said, “You are seeking Unomabunge, O-gaul’-iminga. Forward! Forward! Mametu!” He then met with some leopards, and said, I am looking for Isikqukqumadevu, who has gone for Unomabunge, O-gaul’-iminga, O-nsiba-zimak-qembe. Forward! Forward! Mametu!” Then he met with an elephant, and said, “I inquire for Isikqukqumadevu, who has gone away with my children. It said, “You mean Unomabunge, O-gaul’-iminga, O-nsiba-bunge herself: the men found her crouched down, being as big as a mountain. And he said, “I am seeking Isikqukqumadevu, who is taking away my children.” And he said, “You are seeking Unomabunge; you are seeking O-gual’iminga, O-nsiba-zimakqembe. Forward! Forward! Mametu!” Then the man came and stabbed the lump; and so the Isikqukqumadevu died.
And then there came out of her cattle, and dogs, and a man, and all the men; and then Untombinde herself came out. And when she had come out, she returned to her father, Usikulumi, the son of Uthlokothloko. When she arrived, she was taken by Unthlatu, the son of Usibilingwana, to be his wife.
Untombinde went to take her stand in her bridegroom’s kraal. On her arrival she stood at the upper part of the kraal. They asked, “When have you come to marry?” She said, “Unthlatu.” They said, “Where is he!” She said, “I heard said that King Usibilingwana has begotten a king.” They said, “Not so: he is not here. But he did beget a son; but when he was a boy he was lost.” The mother wept, saying, “What did the damsel hear reported? I gave birth to one child; he was lost: there was no other!” The girl remained. The father, the king, said, “Why has she remained?” The people said, “Let her depart.” The king again said, “Let her stay, since there are sons of mine here; she shall become their wife.” The people said, “Let her stay with the mother.” The mother refused, saying, “Let her have a house built for her.” Untombinde therefore had a house built.
It came to pass that, when the house was built, the mother put in it sour milk, and meat, and beer. The girl said, “Why do you put this here?” She said, “I used to place it even before you came.” The girl was silent, and lay down. And in the night Unthlatu came; he took out from the sour milk, he ate the meat, and drank the beer. He stayed a long time, and then went out.
In the morning Utombinde uncovered the sour milk: she found some had been taken out; she uncovered the meat: she saw that it had been eaten; she uncovered the beer: she found that it had been drunk. She said, “O, Mother placed this food here. It will be said that I have stolen it.” The mother came in; she uncovered the food, and said, “What has eaten it?” She said, “I do not know. I too saw that it had been eaten.” She said, Did you not hear the man?” She said, “No.”
The sun set. They ate those three kinds of food. A wether was slaughtered. There was placed meat; there was placed sour milk; and there was placed beer in the house. It became dark, and Untombinde lay down. Unthlatu came in; he felt the damsel’s face. She awoke. He said, “What are you about to do here?” She said, “I come to be married.” He said, “To whom?” The girl said, “To Unthlatu.” He said, “Where is he?” She replied, “He was lost.” He said, “But since he was thus lost, to whom do you marry?” She said, “To him only.” He said, “Do you know that he will come?” He said, “Since there are the king’s other sons, why do you not marry them, rather than wait for a man that is lost?” Then he said, “Eat, let us eat meat.” The girl said, “I do mot yet eat meat.” Unthlatu said, “Not so. As regards me too, your bridegroom gives my people meat before the time of their eating it, and they eat.” He said, “Drink, there is beer.” She said, “I do not yet drink beer; for I have not yet had the imvuma slaughtered for me.” He said, “Not so. Your bridegroom too gives my people beer before they have had anything killed for them.” In the morning he went away; he speaking continually, the girl not seeing him. During all this time he would not allow the girl to light a fire. He went out. The girl arose, going to feel at the wicker door, saying, “Let me feel, since I closed it, where he went out?” She found that it was still closed with her own closing; and said, “Where did the man go out?”
The mother came in the morning, and said, “My friend, with whom were you speaking?” She said, “No; I was speaking with no one.” She said, “Who was eating here of the food?” She said, “I do not know.” They ate that food also. There was brought out food for the third time. They cooked beer and meat, and prepared sour milk. In the evening Unthlatu came, and felt her face, and said, “Awake.” Untombinde awoke. Unthlatu said, “Begin at my foot, and felt me till you come to my head, that you may know what I am like.” The girl felt him; she found that the body was slippery; it would not allow the hands to grasp it. He said, “Do you wish that I should tell you to light the fire?” She said, “Yes.” He said, “Give me some snuff then.” She gave him snuff. He said, “Let me take a pinch from your hand.” He took a pinch, and sniffed it. He spat. The spittle said, “Hail, king! Thou black one! Thou who art as big as the mountains!” He took a pinch; he spat; the spittle said, “Hail, chief! Hail, thou who art as big as the mountains!’ He then said, “Light the fire.” Untombinde lighted it, and saw a shining body. The girl was afraid, and wondered, and said, “I never saw such a body.” He said, “In the morning whom will you say you have seen?” She said, “I shall say that I have seen no one.” He said, “What will you say to that your mother, who gave birth to Unthlatu, because she is troubled at his disappearance? What does your mother say?” She replied, “She weeps, and says, ‘I wonder by whom it has been eaten. Would that I could see the man who eats this food.’ ” He said, “I am going away.” The girl said, “And you, where do you live, since you were lost when a little child?” He said, “I live underground.” She asked, “Why did you go away?” He said, “I went away on account of my brethren: they were saying they would put a clod of earth into my windpipe; for they were jealous, because it was said that I was king. They said, ‘Why should the king be young, while we who are old remain subjects?’
He said to the girl, “Go and call that your mother who is afflicted.” The mother came in with the girl. The mother wept, weeping a little in secret. She said, “What then did I say? I said, ‘It is my child who was lost, who had the smooth body.’ ” He then said, “What will you say to my father?” She said, “I will say, ‘Let the whole country brew beer.’ “
The father said, “What is the beer to do?” The mother said, “I am going to see the people; for I used to be queen. I was deposed because I had no child.” So the beer was brewed; and the people laughed, saying, “She sends for beer. What is she going to do, since she was the rejected one, and was deposed?” The beer was ready; the people came together; the soldiers went into the cattle enclosure; they had shields, and were all there. The father looked on and said, “I shall see presently what the woman is about to do.”
Unthlatu came out. The eyes of the people were dazzled by the brightness of his body. They wondered, and said, “We never saw such a man, whose body does not resemble the body of men.” He sat down. The father wondered. A great festival was kept. Then resounded the shields of Unthlatu, who was as great as all kings. Untombinde was given a leopard’s tail; and the mother the tail of a wild cat; and the festival was kept, Unthlatu being again restored to his position as king. So that is the end of the tale.
THERE WAS ONCE a virgin named Botalub. To whomsoever they gave her to marry she said, “I do not desire him.” They gave her to a hunter, and she said, “Ugh! This man has ticks on him; I do not want him.”
One day she went off to the plantation, saying she was going to cut plantains. She took a knife and struck at the plantain, when behold, the little folk were sitting on the plantains. They descended and came and caught Botalub. They said, “You are the one who shakes your head, pusu! pusu! when they take you to give to give to anyone.” And the fairies caught hold of her and said:
“Come let us squeeze her.
We squeeze her, O!
We squeeze Botalub.
Come, let us squeeze her.
We squeeze her, O!”
Now, when the hunter to whom they had given Botalub heard Batalub’s voice, he said, “I am going to see what is the matter, for we don’t take something bad to repay something bad.” When he arrived, there was Batalub and the fairies squeezing her. Then the hunter fired a gun at the fairies, and one fell down.
The eldest of them said to the others, “He has drunk palm wine and is intoxicated; place him yonder in the meantime, and then go on squeezing her.” Again the hunter fired, and another fell. The eldest again said, “The brave fellow has drunk palm wine and is overcome; take him and lay him aside there.” The hunter killed all the little folk except the eldest. The eldest called out to the hunter, “Come, oh, come on! I will not do anything to you.”
The hunter went over to her. The eldest of the fairies said, “Look in my room there and you will see the medicine for the gun and all the bullets which you have fired. Take what belongs to you and take Batalub as well. But before you leave, go and cut bananas and, as you go, throw them away, so that when the other fairies wake up and come to catch you they will stop to pick them up, one by one, and you will have gone long, long, long ago.”
And, accordingly, the hunter went and cut bananas, and he took Batalub as well, and when he reached the path, he threw one banana away. He continued doing so all the way home. And when only a short time remained before they would reach home, behold! the fairies were pursuing them. And he threw down the only banana left, and the fairies went after it, and eventually turned back. And the hunter restored Batalub to her blood relations. Then the hunter went off to his own house.
Now the hunter was living there when he saw messengers had arrived at his place, and he said, “What is the news?”
The messengers said, “Batalub says she has asked the head of the village to intercede for her, saying that now she is willing to marry you.”
The hunter said, “I thank you for the words from the mouth of the headman of the village, but I cannot marry the girl, for I still have ticks on my body.”
That is why the elders say, “When they take you to give you in marriage to anyone, marry him, for you do not know whether some day when you are in need, he will not rescue you.”
THERE WAS ONCE a hunter. After he got up in the morning he used to go to the bush to seek for game to kill so that he might get something to eat and something to sell.
Now one day he went to the bush and he heard Dorobe, the bush pig, call out to its kinsman, “Dorobe Guedj!”
He replied, “Yes, brother, yes.” Dorobe again called, “The time for work on our farms has arrived. Let us go to the blacksmith’s forge that he may fashion the iron and out an edge on our cutting tolls, so that, if we have to cut down any trees, we may be able to do so.”
When the bush pig called to his brothers, the hunter crouched down and hid, and he heard all the conversation. Now Dorobe’s brother asked, “And to what village shall we go to have the iron struck?”
Dorobe replied, “We shall go to the village called Across-the Stream.”
And his brother said, “What day?”
He replied, “Monday.”
The hunter heard this arrangement and set off for home. When he came home, he told the headman of Across-the-Stream the news, namely, what he had heard when he had gone to the bush. And the hunter said to the headman of the village, “Let the children go and cut logs and bring them, and when, on Monday, the bush pigs change themselves into people and come, we shall take them and fasten them to the logs.”
The children went and cut the logs and brought them. The headman of the village went and told the village blacksmith to beat out iron staples for him. And the blacksmith asked the headman, “And all this quantity of iron staples which you say I must beat out – what are you going to do with them?”
And he told him the news – how a hunter had gone to the bush and come back to report that on Monday certain beasts would turn themselves into people in order to come to his forge to have tools forged. The blacksmith ran off to beat out the iron staples quickly. As soon as the chief had finished collecting the logs and staples, he caused the town crier to beat the iron gong, saying, “On Monday, be it woman, or be it man, no one must go anywhere.”
Monday arrived, and in the morning an old woman said to the hunter, “Go and grind peppers, salt, and onions at the place where the beasts will peel off their skins and lay them down. Do you also, when you go there, take the peppers and rub them on. When the beasts come there, and we catch them, should some scape and go to take their skins again and out them on, then the peppers will hurt them, and they will throw the skins off and will become people again.
The hunter went home, and the chief called the people gathered round the blacksmith’s forge and made them come to his house. When these people came to the chief’s house, they inquired of the chief, “Why have you called us?”
The chief said, “You were once my men, and you ran away to settle elsewhere. Today you have come back – that is the reason I say you must come, for I will not permit you to go away any more.”
The beasts said to the chief, “What you have said we have heard. But we know that the Creator’s hunter came and told you all about us. However, that does not matter. We and you will live together, although we know that what you say is false. Nevertheless that, also, does not matter; we thank that hunter. So we and you will live together. But there is one thing which we taboo, namely, that you disclose our origin, or that any of your subjects should disclose our origin. Should that happen, we shall break up this, your tribe, and depart.”
Now at the time the chief went to call them, the medicine-man and some others ran away. And the medicine-man went to take his skin and he escaped; but the rest turned back. That was because they could not find their skins. The chief agreed to the conditions laid down by the beasts, and the human beings and the beasts lived happily together.
After a while the men of the village married some of the beasts’ women-folk and they bore children. Now one day one of the beasts and one of the villagers were fighting with their fists. Thereupon the villager said to the beast, “Take yourself off from there – an animal like you who belongs to the bush-pig tribe! No sooner had he said this than the eyes of all the beasts became red, and they went to the chief’s house to tell him, saying, “The possibility about which we told you you has now actually come about, so what are you going to do?”
The chief made them go and call the people who had caused the dispute. The chief looked closely into the matter and gave judgement that the beasts should drop the charge because, he said, it was a long time since they had come and this, moreover, was the first occasion on which anyone had ever said anything to them about their origin.
But the beasts said, “We do not agree.”
And the chief said, “You will not listen, and you think that what this man said is a lit. And you not bush pigs?”
And the beasts said, “Oh! We have heard.”
Thereupon the beasts and the Across-the-Stream people fought. The beasts destroyed the village until there remained only about ten people. These begged for mercy and told the beasts that they had right on their side. The beasts listened, and then informed the people, saying, “A case already stated is not difficult to understand. Now if you and we are to live together, we taboo all allusion to out origin. If you ever think of or mention it again, then we will ask you to point out to us the very thicket whence we came to this place, that we may return thither.”
And the people said, “We will never do such a thing again. What we have done has caused a public proclamation to be made by beating the odawuro gong to the effect that no one should ever tell of another person’s origin, lest the disclosure should cause the town to be ruined.
We ARE connected to all of humanity, past, present and future. We ARE composed of holographic material that experiences consciousness everywhere at all times. The collective manifestation of this material is All That Is. This is our working model for the creation of human beings everywhere, at all times, by evolutionary consciousness. Given this, can You-The Blog-Reader sense how it may be possible to assume the perspective of ANY human, living or dead, simply by using your Intent, your Divine Will? Indeed, I must say that this procedure is at the base of all of our explorations in the new Blog material.
The explorer of the personal consciousness Intentionally goes out into the Unknown Reality and allows this Intent to zero-in on the desired Gestalt of Consciousness, Light Body, Dimension, or what have you. So, yes indeed, Dear Blog Reader, you have the potential to embody the perspective of any number of transitional human Souls, famous or otherwise.
Now in these instances of contact with, for example, Egyptian Pharaohs, or famous movie actors from the 30s the reasons are obvious: the explorer knows of the famous person, they have read about the famous person, seen their movies, retained information about the famous person, that then acts spontaneously as the directive influence in the Past Lives experimentation.
The remembered material as the directional coordinates to the traveling Soul Self of the experimenter. When contact is made, there is often a great deal of surprise, excitement, and personal satisfaction experienced. It is good for the Soul to have these nurturing experiences of contact.
IDEAS – are mental transformations of energy by an entity into physical reality.
IDEA CONSTRUCTIONS – are transformations of ideas into physical reality.
SPACE – is where our own idea constructions do not exist in the physical universe.
THE PHYSICAL BODY – is the material construction of the entity’s idea of itself under the properties of matter.
THE INDIVIDUAL – is the part of the entity or whole self of which we are conscious in daily life. It is that part of the whole self which we are able to express or make “real” through our idea constructions on a physical level.
THE SUBCONSCIOUS – is the threshold of an idea’s emergence into the individual conscious mind. It connects the entity and the individual.
PERSONALITY – is the individual’s overall responses to ideas received and constructed. It represents the emotional coloration of the individual’s ideas and constructions at any given “time.”
EMOTIONS – are the driving force that propel ideas into constructions.
INSTINCT – is the minimum ability for idea constructions necessary for physical survival.
LEARNING – is the potential for constructing new idea complexes from existing ideas.
IDEA COMPLEXES – are groups of ideas formed together like building blocks to form more complicated constructions in physical reality.
COMMUNICATION – is the interchange of ideas by entities on the nonphysical level.
ACTION – is idea in motion. The senses are channels of projection by which ideas are projected outward to create the world of appearances.
ENVIRONMENT – is the overall idea constructions with which an individual surrounds himself.
PHYSICAL TIME – is the apparent lapse between the emergence of an idea in the physical universe (as a construction) and its replacement by another.
THE PAST – is the memory of ideas that were but are no longer physical constructions.
THE PRESENT – is the apparent point of any idea’s emergence into physical reality.
THE FUTURE – is the apparent lapse between the disappearance of one idea construction and its replacement by another in physical reality.
PSYCHOLOGICAL TIME – is the apparent lapse between the conception of ideas.
AGING – is the effect upon an idea construction of the properties of matter of which the construction is composed.
GROWTH – is the formation of an idea construction toward its fullest possible materialization following the properties of matter.
SLEEP – is the entity’s relative rest from idea construction except the minimum necessary for physical survival.
THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE – is the sum of individual idea constructions.
MEMORY – is the ghost image of “past” idea constructions.
Currently we have the former situation I have just described. The threat of nuclear annihilation hangs heavy in the air. This we call the “Worst-Case-Scenario,” as presented to us by the religious groups that desire an Armageddon, by the producers of motion pictures and other media, who hope to frighten us into buying their products, by the average citizens of the world who have become accustomed to focusing on the creation of negative realities.
The collusion of these negative influences – the thoughts, images and emotions generated in the minds of vast populations of humans – creates a potential for the manifestation of this collective vision. Witness the Earth Changes such as the earthquakes, storms, tsunamis, erupting volcanoes, and so on. There are all the products of this focus on the negative. You may include our collapsing institutions, the Gulf Oil Disasters, and every other negative outcome in this analysis, as the fruit, in a sense, of this world tree of negativity.
Now conversely, the assemblage on the etheric levels of the positive ideas, images, emotions and other creative ephemera, builds the potential for the manifestation of the positive collective vision. The former is powered by fear, anger, envy, mistrust, and so on. The latter is powered by the virtues of humanity: Love and Courage, compassion, and others.
All physical matter is idea construction. We only see our own constructions. So-called empty space is full of constructions not our own that we cannot perceive. Our skin connects us to other physical constructions, and through it we are involved in the complicated fabric of continuous matter. The action of each one of the most minute of these particles affects each other one. The slight motion of one grain of sand causes a corresponding alteration in the distribution of the stars and in all matter’s fabric, from an atom in a man’s skull down to the slightest variation in a microbe’s action.
All matter is idea construction, woven together; each construction is individual and yet cohesive to the whole. The smallest particle is necessary to the whole, forming part of matter’s design.
The matter of the universe can be conceived of as a physical body, an organism of individual cells (objects) held together by connective tissue (the chemicals and elements of air). This connective tissue is also alive and carries electrical impulses. Within it, as within the connective tissues of the human body, there is a certain elasticity, a certain amount of regeneration and a constant replacement of the atoms and molecules that compose it. While the whole retains its shape, the material itself is being constantly born and replaced.
Children actually try out in dreams the various courses open to them. We may act out probabilities within dream reality and try out alternatives, and not necessarily short-term ones. For example, you would have made an excellent doctor. In your terms, you worked out this possibility by weaving, over a period of three years, a dream framework in which you learned exactly what your life would have been, had you gone into medicine.
This was more than imaginative. You examined one probability and chose another. The individual, then, chooses which probabilities he/she desires to actualize physically. In one such episode, for example, you followed your present course through; therefore, you are subconsciously aware of your own ‘future’ – since you chose it. There are always new choices, however. You foresaw the future possibilities within the main choice system.
In your present life, the same process continues. Most of these dreams are very disconnected from the ego and will not be recalled. The self who pursues these divergent paths is actual, however. The doctor you might have been once dreamed of a probable universe in which he/she would be an artist. He continues to work out his/her own probabilities. He/she exists in fact. You call his/her system an alternate system of probability, but this is precisely what he/she would call yours.
Now you will have some experiences that are shared in the dream state. They will be involved with episodes familiar to you both before you went your separate ways. You are like two limbs from the same tree. You recognize the same mother.
Now you will have some experiences that are root dreams. They serve as a method of maintaining inner identity and communication. Projections can also occur from these – that is, you may, for example, project into the life of the doctor. (I am using you and the doctor as an example. Art, you see, is also closely connected with healing. The projections of which I spoke happen occasionally and spontaneously on both your parts.)
Reincarnation is but a part of this probability system, the part that falls within our particular universe. There are also root dreams shared by the race as a whole. Most of these are not as symbolic as Jung thought them to be but are literal interpretations of the abilities used by the inner self. For that matter, as your know, flying dreams need not be symbolic of anything. They can be valid experiences, though often intermixed with other drea elements. Falling dreams are also simple experience in many instances, representing downward motion. or a loss of form-control during projection.
As mental genes are behind the physical genes, so to speak, so are Mental Enzymes behind the physical stuff we can examine on our plane. Chlorophyll is such a Mental Enzyme, and there are more which I will describe to you at a later date.
In a sense, any color or quality of that nature could be considered a Mental Enzyme. There is an exchange of sorts between the mental and physical without which, for example, color could not exist. I use color here as an example because it is perhaps easier to understand how this could be a Mental Enzyme than it is to perceive the same thing about chlorophyll. Chlorophyll is green in more than color, incidentally.
Nevertheless, there is an interaction here which gives Chlorophyll its properties. I hope to make this clearer to you, but it involves part of a larger concept for which you do not how have the proper background…. Chlorophyll is a Mental Enzyme, however, and it is one of the moving forces in our plane. A variant exists in all other planes. It is a mental spark, so to speak, that sets everything else into motion.
This also has to do with feeling, which is also a mover. You must try not to categorize things in old ways, but when you open your mind, you will see a similarity between Chlorophyll, as a Mental Enzyme or mover, and emotion which is never still. Emotion’s ‘solidified’ is something else again and is perhaps a framework of other worlds.
Perhaps I may be able to make Mental Enzymes clearer….. In your own experience, you are familiar with steam, water and ice. These are all manifestations of the same thing. So can a seemingly physical Chlorophyll be also a part of a seemingly immaterial emotion or feeling, but in a different form – and, of course, directed into this form or caused to take various forms in response to certain laws – as your ice will not exist of itself in the middle of our summertime. And I am not to be compared to a symphony, but you must admit that I do well with a figurative baton.
Why do you find the phrase ‘solidified emotion or feeling’ outlandish? You understand now that our plane is composed of solidified thought. When our scientists get through with all their high fiddle-faddle, they will also discover that this is the case.
When I told you in earlier Blog to imagine the wire structure penetrating everything that is, I meant you imagine these wires as being alive, as I am a live wire myself. Joking aside, I will now ask you to imagine these wires as being composed of the solidified emotion of which I have just spoken. Surely you must know that the words feeling or emotion are, at best, symbols to describe something else, and that something else comes extremely close to your mental enzymes.
Actually, a counter-action within a mental enclosure occurs. A mental enclosure divides itself in two, splits up, multiples, acts upon its own various parts, and this produces a material manifestation. The ‘material’ is material, yet it is mentally produced. The Mental Enzymes within the enclosure are the elements that set off the action, and – listen to this – they are also the action itself.
In other words, the Mental Enzymes not only produce action in the material world, but they become the action. If you will read over the above three or four paragraphs, you will come close to seeing where mental and physical become one.
You know what love and hate are, but as I told you earlier, try to think in new ways. Love and Hate, for example, are action. They are action and they both imply action in physical bodies.
These Mental Enzymes, to go back to them, are solidified feeling, but not in the terms that you usually use….. I have said that our imaginary wires that seem to permeate our model universe are alive; and now if you bear with me, I will say that they are Mental Enzymes of solidified feelings, always in motion, and yet permanent enough to form a more or less consistent framework. You could almost say that Mental Enzymes become the tentacles that form material – though I do not find that a very pretty phrase.
The framework, again, is only for convenience, as our physical walls are not there as such, but we had better act as if they were or suffer a possible broken neck. I must still respect many like frameworks in my own plane, but my understanding of them renders them less —- Opaque.
Intellectual truth will not make you free, you see, though it is a necessary preliminary. If this were the case, our walls would fall away, since, intellectually, you understand their rather dubious nature. Since feeling is often the cohesive with which mind builds, it is feeling itself which must be changed if you would find freedom from our particular plane of existence at our particular time. That is, changing feeling will allow you to see variants. These discussions now are, of necessity, of a simple and uncomplicated nature. If it speak in analogies and images, it is because I must relate with the world that is familiar to us.
Consciously, you didn’t know what you were up to; unconsciously, you know very well.
The state of dissociation that you reach can be used most effectively. You blundered into it all unaware and unprepared, however. For shame.
The fact that you slip so easily into this frame should remind you of abilities that you had at one time in another life; then misused them. But without their previous experience, you would not have entered such a state so quickly, with so little knowledge and preparation.
If you recall, part of your mind was conscious in usual terms. You were capable of normal conversation; another part of your psyche was completely dissociated and waiting for your commend. It floundered like a wet rag in a foul wind. Since you were unaware of causing the dissociation to begin with, you were unable to find your blundering way out.
Schizophrenia is caused by a personality fragment that is broken off, so to speak, from the primary acting personality, operating often in direct opposition to it, but in any case, operating as a secondary personality.
Looking into a bottle you may not be able to form these images outside of yourselves, and so endow them with some physical reality, you might very well have turned yourself into schizophrenic personalities instead.
Many people are unable to endow fragments with such physical reality, and thus shove them more or less harmlessly away at arm’s length. Instead, the dissociated part of the personality dons another personality and battles with the dominant one for control. Many cases of so-called ‘possession’ can be laid to this alone.
Actually, the dominant personality, in our terms, can be compared to the dominant entity. Please understand that I am using an analogy here. As the personality on our plane actually changes, expands and grows to its potentialities, as it presents at various times varied images to the world (such as – if you’ll forgive me for using cliches – a smiling face, a sorrowful face), but is still basically the same personality, so on another level does the entity present at various times a varied appearance and speak in a different voice. AS the smiling and sorrowful faces also express and expand the personality, so, too, do the various reincarnated personalities express and expand as a whole.
Without the stages of childhood, adulthood and old age, the personality could not expand to its fullest degree, and without various incarnations, the entity cannot expand.
In dreaming, such a dissociated state reached, of course, the rule, only the ability is used to form dream images. But these dream images work for the entity as a whole and serve as a means for the various personalities to communicate; that is, in many cases, the previous personalities communicate with the present one. This is a means of acquainting the present personality with its ‘past’ and also of reminding it of its goals, without disturbing the blatant awake ego.
Young explorers
The entity never dominates a previous personality. Sometimes these personalities also travel divergent ways for their own benefit and with the entity’s full consent.
There is no such thing as division as far as the personality is concerned. Even a fragment can turn into an entity in certain cases. There are no rules that hold any living thing down to one form or one kind or existence.
The strange thing, incidentally, about our UFOs is not that they appear, but that we can see them. As science advances on various planes, the inhabitants learn to travel between planes occasionally, while carrying with them the manifestation of their home station.
As I mentioned, they carry their own particular camouflage with them. We recognize it as not our own. Taking off at right angles involves another of our natural laws which are not actual laws but only seem to be from where we are. When science progresses on various planes, then such visitations become less accidental and more planned. However, since the inhabitants of each plane are bound by this particular materialized patterns of their ‘home,’ they bring this pattern of camouflaged vitality with them. Certain kinds of science cannot operate without it.
When the inhabitants of a plane have learned mental science patterns, then they are to a great degree freed from the more regular camouflage patterns. The UFO appearances came from a system much more advanced in technological sciences than ours. However, this is still not a mental science plane. Therefore, the camouflage paraphernalia appears, more or less visible, to our astonishment.
So strong is this tendency for vitality to change from one apparent form to another, that what we have here in our UFOs is something that is actually not of our plane nor of the plane of its origin.
What happens is this: When the UFO starts out toward its destination, the atoms and molecules that compose it (and which are themselves formed by vitality) are more or less aligned according to the pattern inflicted upon it by its own territory. As it enters our plane, a distortion occurs. The actual structure of the craft is caught in a dilemma of form.
It is caught between transforming itself completely into earth’s particular camouflage pattern, and retaining its original pattern. The earthly viewer attempts to correlate what he sees with what he supposedly knows or imagines possible, in the little he/she understands of the universe.
What he/she sees is something between a horse and a dog and resembles neither. The craft retains what it can of its original structure and changes what it must. This accounts for much of the conflicting reports as to shape, size and color. The few times that the craft shoots off at right angles, it has managed to retain functions ordinary to it in its particular habitat.
I do not believe we will have any UFOs landings for quite some while – not physical landings in the usual sense of the word. These UFOs cannot stay on our plane for any length of time. The pressures that push against the vehicle itself are tremendous. It is literally caught between two worlds. To conform to the laws of a particular plane is a practical necessity, and at this time, the ‘UFO” cannot afford to stay betwixt and between for any indefinite period.
What they do is take quick glimpses of our plane – and hold in mind tha the UFO or cigar shape seen within our system is a bastard form having little relation to the structure at it is at home base.
People from other systems appear in ours, sometimes on purpose and sometimes by accident. In some cases, our people have blundered through the apparent curtain between our past and present, and so have others blundered into the apparent division between one plane and another. Usually, they have been invisible to our plane, as the few who fell into the apparent past were invisible to the people of the past.
This sort of experience involves a sudden psychic awareness that all boundaries are for practical purposes only. There are many kinds of science, however, besides our own. There are many, for example, just dealing with locomotion. Had the human race gone into certain mental disciplines as thoroughly as it has explored technology, then its practical transportation system would be vastly different and far more efficient.
A plane is not necessarily a planet. A plane may be one planet, but a plane may also exist where no planet is. One planet may have several planes. Planes may also involve various aspects of apparent time. Planes can and do intermix without the knowledge of the inhabitants. A plane may be a time, or only one iota of vitality that exists by itself. A plane may cease to be. Plane is formed for entities as patterns for fulfillment along various lines. It is a climate conducive to the development of unique and particular capabilities and achievements…….an isolation of elements.
It is often practical that entities or their various personalities visit one plane before another. This does not mean that one plane must necessarily be visited before another. You could say also that an entity visits all planes simultaneously as it is possible for us to visit one particular state, country and city at one time. Also, we might visit the state of sorrow and joy almost simultaneously and experience both emotions in heightened form because of the almost immediate contrast. In fact, the analogy of a plane with an emotional state is much more valid than the analogy between a plane and a geographical state, particularly since emotional states take up no room or space.
The cat focuses upon one thing at a time even though it has no strong ego. It is not the ego which is concentrating. You get a subconscious focus different in many ways from conscious concentration. In this state the attention is focused inward rather than outward, and it is the inner rather than the outer senses that are being exercised. The cat is doing the same thing, in his/her way. Its inner senses were focused in one direction.
As far as light being a mental enzyme, this is true. Mental enzymes create senses on the physical plane in order that they may be recognized and appreciated by the physical being. The mental enzymes are the same, Basically, throughout the universe, but the properties inherent in the plane itself.
The quality called light on this plane could just as well appear as sound in another; and for that matter, even on this plane, light can be changed into sound, and sound into light. It is always interaction which is important. Even the mental enzymes themselves are interchangeable, as far as the principle behind them is concerned, though for practical purposes they maintain separate and distinct qualities in their materializations in one plane.
That is why it is possible for some human beings to experience sound as color or to see color as sound. Granted, this is not a characteristic experience, but if the mental enzymes were not interchangeable in principle, then the experience would not be possible. Light would never be heard, for example, and sound would never be seen.
In practical terms, these mental enzymes must – and do – give a predictable, more or less dependable, result. The thing to remember, though, is that thus interchangeability can occur, and is, therefore, a property of mental enzymes in general. On our plane, the action of these mental enzymes appear to be more or less inflexible, static, irreversible and permanent. Of course, this is not the case.
Because mental enzymes seem to give the same effects most of the time in our system, our scientists, blithely label these as laws of nature; that is, the apparent laws of cause and effect. If you’ll forgive my pun, because a certain cause will usually give a certain effect in our physical universe, we may be justified in saying that the apparent results are laws that operate within our system. But stay in your own backyard.
What I am trying to say, is that there are apparent rules of cause and effect, but the same causes do not always give the same effect. There is much more i want to say along these lines. Please consider again our wires and mazes. I have said, if you’ll forgive the brief reminder, that these are composed of solidified vitality.
They are the living stuff of the universe, even as they form its. boundaries and seem to divide it into labyrinthian ways, like the iside of a honeycomb. The planes within the tiny wires – that is, the planes formed by the connections and interconnections of our imainary wires – come into the sphere of each different plane and take on the form inherent in the plane itself.
Therefore, these wires, continuing our analogy, will grow thick or thin, or change color completely, like some chameleon-like animal constantly camouflaging its true appearance by taking on the outward manifestations of each neighboring forest territory. Then too, the inhabitants of any particular plane are themselves chameleon-like.
The inhabitants see only the camouflage. They then accept it as a definite rule of nature, never realizing that just beyond their eyesight and just beyond their outer senses, this familiar tamed animal of a law changes appearance completely. So complete, in fact, is this transformation as to be in some cases unrecognizable. However, by seeing beneath the camouflage in any one case, you can see beneath all camouflage.
What these wires are, then, that seem to divide our planes and appear so differently in one plane than they do in another, is solidified vitality, whose camouflaging action is determined by mental enzymes. Now, perhaps, you will understand why I said earlier that sound can be seen and color can be heard. There are many diverse examples along this line.
If you’ll forgive me I would like to repeat: Mental enzymes allow the solidified vitality to change form. Light is a mental enzyme. Needless to say, mental enzymes and solidified vitality are dependent upon eah other in many ways. The enzyme part of our little equation permits vitality to operate successfully under diverse mental and physical situations and forms the basis for each particular system of existence.
The inner senses are actually the channels through which the entire composition of any plane is appreciated and maintained. The mental enzymes act upon the vitality, which is, as I told you, the structure of the universe itself. The inner senses, then, are the means. The mental enzymes are the tools, and the vitality is the actual material that forms the universe as a whole, the apparent divisions within it, the apparent boundaries between the systems and the diverse materials within each division. These diverse materials, again, are only camouflage formed by inner senses upon the ‘material’ itself.
What we have here is latent energy, vitality and capacity, with much of it withheld or suspended momentarily. The tree is dissociated in one manner. In some ways, its living forces and consciousness are kept to a minimum. It is in a state of drowsiness on the one hand; and on the other, it forces the usable portion of its energy into being a tree.
The state of consciousness involved here is dull as compared to the highly differentiated human ability in many ways. However, in other ways, the experiences of the tree are extremely deep, dealing with the inner senses which are also properties of treedom.
The inner senses of the tree have strong affinity with the properties of the earth itself. They feel their growing. They listen to their growing as you might listen to your own heartbeat. They experience the oneness with their own growth, and they also feel pain. The pain, while definite, unpleasant and sometimes agonizing, is not of an emotional nature in the same way that we experience pain. In some ways, it is even a deeper thing. The analogy may not be perfect, far from it, but it is as if your breath were to be suddenly cut off – in a manner, this somewhat approximates pain for a tree.
The tree makes adjustments just as we do. It listens to its growth up from the earth and to the manner of the growth of its roots beneath. It adjusts each root ending according to what impediments might lie in its way. Without the conscious mind of man/woman it nevertheless retains this inner consciousness of all its parts, above and below the ground, and manipulates them constantly.
The tree is also ware of its environment to an astonishing degree. It maintains constant awareness and the ability to adjust itself in two completely different worlds, so to speak – one in which it meets little resistance in growing upward and one composed of much heavier elements into which it must grow downward. Man/woman needs artificial methods to operate effectively on land or in water, but the so-called unconscious tree manages nicely in two worlds as diverse, certainly, as land and water, and makes itself a part of each.
And as far as motion is concerned, the tree moves upward and downward. It is quite unfair to say that it caannot transport itslef, since it does so to an amazing degree; the roots and limbs moving in all directions. The inner senses of all plant life are well attuned, alert and very vital. All of these fragments have consciousness to a rather high degree, considering that man/woman holds them is such low repute.
If you remember what you know of the trance state – in a light trance, you are able to maintain awareness of self, your environment and your place in it. You simply behave somewhat differently, not bestirring yourself in any direction unless the suggestion to do so has been given. The awareness of plant life lies along these lines
Now, in a deep trance the subject, though fully aware of what is happening in the trance, may remember nothing of it afterward. The awareness of plant life is also somewhat like that of the subject in deep trance. Except for the suggestion and stimulus received by regualr natural forces on our plane, the plant life does not bestir itself in other directions. But like tha trance subject, our plant is aware. Its other abilities lie unused for the time, and latent, but they are present.
The awareness is focused along certain lines. The tree lives through its inner senses, experiencing many sensations and earth tremors,, even the motion of small abts about its lower trunk – these are recognized and experienced. Such invisibilities as humidity, radioactivity and all electrical values are felt as quite real things to our tree.
A tree knows a human being also, by the weight of a boy upon its branches, by the vibrations in the air as adults pass, which hit the tree’s trunk at varying distances, and even by voices. You must remember what I said earlier about mental enzymes and my remark that color can sometimes be heard. The tree recognizes a human being, though it does not see the human being in our terms. It does not build up the image of a man/woman, but it builds up a composite sensation which represents, say, a given individual. And the tree will recognize the same man/woman who passes it by each day.
As your own body senses temperature changes, it also senses the psychic charge, not only of other individuals, but of plant and vegetative matter. Our tree builds up a composite of sensations of this sort, sensing not the physical dimensions of a material object, whatever it is, but the vital psychic formation within and about it.
Size is sensed by a tree, however, perhaps because of its inherent concern with height. The table around which I walk senses me, even as I sense it.
Man’s/woman’s causes him/her to interpret everything else inlight of himself/herself. He/she loses much in this manner. The ego can be compared to the bark of a tree. The bark is flexible, vibrant, and grows with the growth beneath. It is a tre’s contact with the outer world, the tree’s interpreter and, to some degree, the tree’s companion. So should man’s/woman’s ego be.
When man’s/woman’s ego turns instead into a shell – when instead of interpreting outside conditions, it reacts to violently against them, then it hardens and becomes an imprisoning form that begins to snuff out important data and to keep enlarging information from the inner self. The ego’s purpose is protective. The ego is also a device to enable the inner self to inhabit the physical plane.
If, for example, our tree bark grew fearful of stormy weather and began to harden itself against the elements, in a well-meaning but distorted protective spirit, then the tree would die. This is what the ego does when it reacts too violently to purely physical data. As a result, it stiffens, and then you have, my well-meaning Blog friend, the cold detachment with which you at one time faced the world.
The tree’s bark is quite necessary and cannot be dispensed with.
The idea od dissociation could be liekened to the slight distance between the bark and the inside of the tree. Here we do not have a rigid bark, as you should not have a rigid ego. We have instead a flexiablle bark, cahnging with the elements, protecting the inner (or inner self), but flexible, opening or closing in rhythmic motion.
The inner tree can continue to grow because the bark is resilent. It bends with the wind. It does not bend when there is no wind, nor does it stiffent, stopping the flow of sap to the treetop for fear that the dumb tree, not knowing what it was up to, would bump its head against the sky.
Neither should the egoreact so violently that it remembers and reacts to past storms in the midst of clear and sunny weather. You can understaand the anaolgy. You know that such a tree bark would be death to the tree. What you must understand is that the same apllies to any individual and the ego. It applies to us all. And we must learn that it is equally ridiculous to act as if it is a summer day in the middle of wintertime. the tree has enough sense not to show blossoms in a blizzard.
At times, we have not trusted our ego’s ability to protect us. We have forced it into anxiety so that it over-compensated, trying to protect us, and ended up half choking us to death.
The Midplane is indeed an excellent description of the semi-plane. It is a waiting plane for personalities at certain stages of development.
The midplane contains a conglomeration of fragments….. who have not attained sufficient knowledge or manipulability to progress further at this point. They may be at various stages of development, but, usually, they have attained only a fair level of achievement. They have not excelled, neither have they ‘failed.’ They are working out problems of their own. They are not as yet committed to the next plane of their advancement.
They can be of benefit along certain lines. The validity of their information may be excellent. On the other hand, it may be less than trustworthy at times, simply because their achievement level is not high. If they err, they do so through ignorance.
The ego entire is the tool by which the hidden self manipulates in the physical universe. For example, it enables the artist to focus ability along lines necessary to make it effective on our plane. However, when the ego becomes involved with fears, it ceases to be an effective tool and becomes instead a hammer hitting us incessantly over the head.
When he/she becomes overly concerned, it becomes overly conditioned to negative responses. The creative energies build up their thickly-dimensional pseudo-realities of pain. For a certain amount of time, according to our condition, they automatically create the patterns of fear that belongs to the ego.
These fears do not belong to what we think of as the subconscious. Then these materializations of panic and pain play about the physical body, projected by the ego, and steal the powers of the subconscious mind from their natural constructive tasks. In other words, the ego becomes a tool to disrupt rather than to create.
Our own subconscious is the fountain of our individuality and personality; from it springs our talent. Where the ego becomes to concerned with daily matters, with worry, then it becomes less effective. The freely working subconscious – or the inner you – is completely capable of taking care of all practical considerations and will use the ego as a tool to do so.
Dissociation puts the power back where it belongs. Daily methods of dissociation are extremely practical….. You will notice within a few weeks’ time an added energy. So-called impulses on your part are often blocked because you do not consider them practical. But the subconscious knows its own meat and its own sauce and the best means for its nourishment.
Our scientists are correct in supposing that the universe is composed of the same elements that can be found in our plane. However, the elements that they know are, of course, camouflage patterns, that may show themselves in a completely different from somewhere else.
The elements – those that you now know and those you will create – are camouflages of the basic stuff or vitality which you cannot discover with your outer senses. Our scientists will find their tools are no longer adequate. Because man/woman have such a senses of curiosity, scientists will be forced finally to use the inner senses. Otherwise they will be dealing with camouflage only and find themselves in a blind alley – not because their eyes are closed, but because they are not using the right set of eyes.
The camouflage is necessary at this stage of development – intricate, complicated, various and beyond the understanding of the outer senses, which are the preceptor of the camouflage itself, peculiarly adapted to see under particular circumstances. It is only the inner senses that will give us any evidence at all of the basic nature of life.
Since very often the vitality or stuff of the universe seems as innocuous as air, then look for what we do not see. Explore places that seem empty, for they are full. Look between events. What we see clearly with the outer senses is camouflage. I am not suggesting that you take all this on faith. I am saying that what seems vacant lacks camouflage, and, therefore, if this is explored, it will yield evidence.
Effects would seem to be evidence. In concrete terms, if a tree branch moves, then we take it for granted that something blows it. We know wind by its effects. No one has seen wind, but since its effects are so observable, it would be idiocy to say that it did not exist. Therefore, we will come up against the basic stuff of the universe and feel its effects, though our physical senses will not necessarily perceive it.
Granted, camouflage is, in itself, an effect. If we look at the observable world we can learn something about the inner one, but only if we take into consideration the existence of camouflage distortion. There is so much to be said here, and we have so much to learn, that sometimes I have to admit the I’m Appalled.
My own experience with creativity should help here. When I paint a picture, my dear BlogReader, I am dealing with a transformation of energy and transformation of camouflage pattern. There is a brief but vital moment when I am dealing with the underlying vitality of which I have spoken.
I am forced to transform this creative energy into another camouflage pattern because of our earthly situation. There is nothing else we can do. But for this moment, I pluck this vitality from the inner senses. Then I transform it into a somewhat different, more evocative, new camouflage pattern that is, nevertheless, more fluent, more fluid than the usual pattern, and gives greater freedom and mobility to the vitality itself.I approach a transmigration of plane.
A certain distortion must be expected. The painting, however, achieves a certain freedom from camouflage, although it cannot escape it, and actually hovers between realities in a way that no thoroughly camouflaged object could do. Music and poetry also can achieve this state.
Our scientists can count their elements, and while they are on the wrong track, they will discover more and more elements until they are ready to go out of their minds. And while they create instruments to deal with smaller and smaller particles, they will see smaller and smaller particles, seemingly without end. As their instruments rach further into the physical universe, they will see further and further into the physical universe, they will automatically and unconsciously transform what they apparently see into the camouflage patterns with which they are familiar. They will be, and are, prisoners of their tools.
More galaxies will seemingly be discovered, more mysterious radio stars perceived, until, the scientists realize that something is wrong. Instruments designed to measure the vibrations with which scientists are familiar will be designed and redesigned. All kinds of seemingly impossible phenomena will be discovered with the instruments.
The trouble is that the instruments will be designed to catch certain camouflages, and they will perform their function. They themselves transform data from terms we cannot understand into terms that we can understand. This involves a watering down of data, a simplification that distorts the original information out of shape. The original is hardly discernible when they are done. We are destroying the meaning in the translation. When we decipher one phenomena in terms of another, we always lose sight of whatever glommer of understanding that may have reached us.
It is not a matter of inventing new instruments any longer, but of using the ‘invisible’ ones we have. These may be known and exmained. This material itself is evidence. It is like the branch that moves, so that we know the wind by its effect; and a windbag like me by the billowing gale of my dialogues.
Scientists realize that the atmosphere of the earth has a distorting effect upon their instruments. What they do not understand is that their instruments themselves are bound to be distortive. Any material instrument will have built-in distortive effects. The one instrument which is more important than any other is the mind (not the brain), the meeting place of the inner and outer senses.
The mind is distributed throughout the entire physical body, and builds up about it the physical camouflage necessary for existence on the physical level. The mind receives data from the inner senses and forms the necessary camouflage.
The brain deals exclusively with camouflage patterns, while the mind deals with basic principles inherent on all planes. The brain is, itself, part of the camouflage pattern and can be interpreted and probed by physical instruments. The mind cannot. The mind is the connective. It is here that the secrets of the universe will be discovered, and the ind itself is the tool of discovery.
We might say that the brain is the mind in camouflage. Imagination belongs to the mind, not the brain. Instruments may be used to force imagination to move along in terms of its owner’s personal memories, but it cannot be forced to move along the lines of conceptual thoughts because the imagination is a connective between the physical individual and the non-physical entity.
Mental enzymes, by the way, have a chemical effect or reaction on our plane, but the effect itself is, of course, distortion. On the other planes. the distortion effect may not be chemical at all.
Mental enzymes transform vitality into the particular camouflage patterns. A chemical imbalance in a physical body will also show itself as a corresponding distortion of sensual data. That is, when the chemical balance is disturbed, the physical world will appear to have changed. For the individual involved, the camouflage actually has changed.
The subconscious is a property of mind and is, to a large degree, independent of camouflage. While part of the subconscious must deal with camouflage, for example, the deeper portions are in direct contact with the basic vitality of the universe. When we wonder if this material comes from our subconscious, we take it for granted that the subconscious is personal, dealing exclusively with matters of our past. We are sometimes willing to concede that perhaps some element of racial memory might enter in.
The subconscious, however, also contains the undistorted material of the mind, which is uncamouflaged and which operates between planes, knowing no boundaries
The sense of sight, mostly concentrated in our eyes, remains fixed in a permanent position in our physical body. Without moving away from the body, the eyes see something that may be far in the distance. In the same manner, the ears hear sounds that are distant from the body. In fact, the ears ordinarily hear sounds from outside the body more readily than sounds inside the body itself. Since the ears are connected to the body and part of it, it would be logical for an open-minded observer to suppose that the ears would be well attuned to the inner sounds to a high degree. This, we know, is not the case.
The ears can be trained to some degree into a sound-awareness pertaining to the body itself. And breathing, for example, can be magnified to an almost frightening degree when one concentrates upon listening to his/her own breath. But, as a rule, the ears neither listen to nor hear the inner sounds of the body.
The sense of smell also seems to leap forward. A man/woman can smell quite a stink, even though it is not right under his/her nose. The sense of touch does not seem to leap out in this manner. Unless the hand itself presses upon a surface, then we do not feel that we have touched it. Touch usually involves contact of a direct sort. You can, of course, feel the invisible wind against our cheek, but touch involves an immediacy different from the distant perceptions of sight and smell. I am sure you realize these points yourself.
The outer senses deal mainly with camouflage patterns. The inner senses deal with realities beneath camouflage, and deliver inner information. These inner senses, therefore, are capable of seeing within the body, though the physical eyes cannot. As the senses of sight, sound and smell appear to reach outward, bringing data to the body from an outside observable camouflage pattern, so the inside senses seem to extend far inward, bringing inner reality data to the body. There is also a transforming process involved, much like the moment that we have spoken about in the creation of a painting.
The physical body is a camouflage pattern operating in a larger camouflage pattern. But the body and all camouflage patterns are also transformers of the vital inner stuff of the universe, enabling it to operate under new and various conditions.
The inner senses, then, deliver data from the inner world of reality to the body. The outer senses deliver data from the outside world of camouflage to the body. However, the inner senses are aware of the body’s own physical data at all times while the outer senses are concerned with the body mainly in its relationship to camouflage environment.
The inner senses have an immediate, constant knowledge of the body in a way that the outer senses do not. the material is delivered to the body from the inner world through the inner senses. This inner data is received by the mind. The mind, being uncamouflaged, then, is the receiving station for the data brought to it by the inner senses. What we have here, are inner nervous and communication systems, closely resembling the outer systems with which we are familiar.
I am repeating myself, but I want to be clear. This vital data is sent to the mind by the inner senses. Any information that is important to the body’s contact with outer camouflage is given to the brain.
The so-called subconscious is a connective between mind and brain, between the inner and outer senses. Portions of it deal with camouflage patterns, with the personal past of the present personality, with rcial memory. The greater portions of it are concerned with the inner world, and as data reaches it from the inner world, so can these portions of the subconscious reach far into the inner world itself.
Time and space are both camouflage patterns. The inner senses conquer time and space, but this is hardly surprising because time and space do not exist for them, There is no time and space. Therefore, nothing is conquered. The camouflage simply is not present.
I want to give more detailed information about inner realities themselves. Actually, they do not parallel the outer senses; and this will sound appalling to some, I’m afraid, simply because there is nothing to be seen, heard or touched in the manner in which we are accustomed. I don’t want to give the idea that existence without our camouflage patterns is bland and innocuous because this is not the case. The inner senses have a strong immediacy, a delicious intensity that our outer senses lack. There is no lapse of time in perception, since the is no time.
Camouflage patterns do, or course, also belong to the inner world, since they are formed from the stuff of the universe by mental enzymes, which have a chemical reaction on our plane. The reaction is necessarily a distortion. That is, any camouflage is a distortion in the sense that vitality is forced into a particular form. Mental enzymes are actually the property of the inner world, representing the conversion of vitality into camouflage data which is then interpreted by the physical senses.
Imagine a man/woman looking at a tree in the near distance on an ordinary street, with intervening houses and sidewalks.
Using the inner senses, it would be as if, instead of seeing the various houses, our man/woman felt them. He/she would be sensitive to them, in other words, as we feel heat or cold without necessarily touching ice or fire.
He/she would be using the fist inner sense. It involves immediate perception of a direct nature, whose intensity varies according to what is being sensed. It involves instant cognition through what i can only describe as inner vibrational touch.
This sense would permit our many to feel the basic sensations felt by the tree, so that instead of looking at it, his/her consciousness would expand to contain the experience of what it is to be a tree. According to his/her proficiency, he/she would feel in like manner the experience of being the grass and so forth. He would in no way lose consciousness of who heshe was. and he/she would perceive these experiences again, somewhat in the same manner that we perceive heat and cold.
This sense would permit our many to feel the basic sensations felt by the tree, so that instead of looking at it, his/her consciousness would expand to contain the experience of what it is to be a tree. According to his/her proficiency, he/she would feel in like manner the experience of being the grass and so forth. He would in no way lose consciousness of who heshe was. and he/she would perceive these experiences again, somewhat in the same manner that we perceive heat and cold.
The inner senses are capable of expansion and of focus in a way unknown to the outer ones, and the inner world, of course, is a part of all realities. It is not so much that it exists simultaneously with the outer world, as that it forms the outer world and exists in it also.
When we receive more information on the inner senses, we will begin using them to a much higher degree than we are now. Of course, the inner senses can be used to explore reality that does not yield to the physical senses.
Some part of the individual is aware of the most minute portions of breath; some part knows immediately of the most minute particle of oxygen and other components that enter the lungs. The thinking brain does not know. Our all-important ‘I” does not know. In actuality, my dear Blog reader, the all-important ‘I’ does know. We do not know the all-important ‘I’, and that is our difficulty
It is fashionable in our time to consider man/woman as the product of the brain and an isolated bit of the subconscious, with a few other odds and ends thrown in for good measure. Therefore, with such an unnatural division, it seems to man/woman that he/she does not know itself.
He/she says, ‘I’ breathe, but who breathes, since consciously I cannot tell myself to breathe or not to breathe?’ He/she says, ‘I dream.’ He/she cuts himself/herself in half and then wonders why he/she is not whole. Man/woman have admitted only those things he/she could see, smell, touch or hear; and in so doing, he/she could only appreciate half of himself/herself. And when I say half, I exaggerate; he/she is aware of only a third of himself/herself.
If man/woman dot not know who breathes within him/her, and if man/woman does not know who dreams within him/her, it is not because there is one self who acts in the physical universe and another who dreams and breathes. It is because he/she has buried the part of himself/herself which breathes and dreams. If these functions seem so automatic as to be performed by someone completely divorced from himself/herself, it is because he/she has done the divorcing.
The part of us who dreams is the ‘I’ as much as the part of us who operates in any other manner. The part of us who dreams is the part of us who breathes. This part of us is certainly as legitimate and necessary to us as a whole unitis, as the part who plays cards or dominos. It would seem ludicrous to suppose that such a vital matter as breathing would be left to a subordinate, almost completely divorced, poor-relative sort of a esser personality.
As breathing is carried on in a manner that seems automatic to the conscious mind, so the important function of transforming the vitality of the universe into patter units seems to be carried on automatically. But this transformation is not as recognize, and so it seems as if this transformation is carried on by someone even more distant than our breathing and dreaming selves.
We form the world of appearances as effortlessly and unconsciously as we breathe.
Because we know that we breathe, without being consciously aware of the mechanics involved, we are forced to admit that we do our own breathing. When we cross a room, we are forced to admit that we have caused oneself to do so, though consciously we have no idea of willing the muscles to move, or of stimulating one tendon or another. Yet even though we admit these things, we do not really believe them.
In our quiet unguarded moments, we still say, ‘Who breathes? Who dreams? Who moves?’ How much easier it would be to admit freely and wholeheartedly the simple fact that we are not consciously aware of vital parts of oneself and that we are more than we think we are.
Man/woman, for example, trusts himself/herself much more when he/she says, ‘I will read,’ and then he/she reads, than he/she does when he/she says, ‘I will see,’ and then he/sees. He/she remembers having learned to read, but he/she does not remember having learned to see, and what he/she cannot consciously remember, he/she fears.
The fact is that although no one taught him/her to see, he/she sees. The part of himself/herself that did ‘teach’ him/her to see still guides his/her movements, still moves the muscles of his/her eyes, still becomes conscious despite him/her when he/she sleeps, still breathes for him/her without thanks or recognition and still carries on his/her task of transforming energy from an inner reality into an outer one. Man/woman becomes trapped by his/her own artificially divided self.
It is true that, as a rule, we are not aware of our whole entity. There is no reason, however, why we must be blind to the whole self of our present personality, which is part of the entity, and which can be glimpsed in terms of the breathing and dreaming ‘self’ of which I have spoken.
It is convenient not to be consciously aware of each breath we take, but it is sheer stupidity to ignore the inner self which does the breathing and is aware of the mechanics involved. I have said that the mind is a part of the inner world, but we have access to our own minds, which we ignore; and this access would lead us inevitably to truths about outer the outer world. Working inward, we could understand the outward more clearly.
Physical time is a camouflage. Psychological time belongs to the inner self, that is, to the mind. It is, however, a connective, a portion of the inner senses which we will call, for convenience, The Second Inner Sense. It is a natural pathway, meant to give easy access from the inner to the outer world and back again.
Time to our dreaming self is much like ‘time’ to our waking inner self. The time concept in dreams may seems far different than our conception of time in the waking state when we have our eyes on the clock and are concerned with getting to some destination by say, 12:15. But it is not so different from time in the waking state when we are sitting alone with our thoughts. Then, I am sure, we will see the similarity between this alone sort of inner psychological time, experienced often in waking hours, and the sense of time experienced often in a dream.
I cannot say this too often – we are far more than the conscious mind, and the self which we do not admit is the portion that not only insures our own physical survival in the physical universe which it has made, but which is also the connective between oneself and inner reality. It is only through the recognition of the inner self that the race of man/woman will ever use its potential.
The outer senses will not help man/woman achieve the inner purpose that drives him/her. Unless he/she uses the inner senses, he/she may lose whatever he/she have gained.
Psychological Time is so a part of inner reality that even though the inner self is still connected to the body, we are, in the dream framework, free of some very important physical effects. Now, as dreams seem to involve us in duration that is independent of clock time, so can we achieve the actual experience of duration as far as our inner visions are concerned.
Clock Time was invented by the ego to protect the ego, because of the mistaken conception of dual existence; that is, because man/woman felt that a predictable, conscious self did the thinking and manipulating, and an unpredictable self did the breathing and dreaming. He/she set up boundaries to protect the ‘predictable’ self from the ‘unpredictable’ self and ended up by cutting the whole self in half.
Originally, Psychological Time allowed man to live in the inner and outer worlds with relative ease, and man/woman felt much closer to his/her environment. In prehistoric times, mankind/womankind evolved the ego to help him/her deal with camouflage patterns that he/she had, himself/herself, created. This is not contradiction, as will be explained later. He/she did the job so well the even when he/she had things well under control, he/she was not satisfied. He/she developed at a lopsided level. The inner senses led him/her into a reality he/she could not manipulate as easily as he/she could physical camouflage, and he/she felt what he/she thought of as a loss of mastery.
It is a natural connective to the inner world. As we can experience days or hours within its framework inthe dreamstate and not age for the comparable amount of physical time, so as we develop, we will be able to rest and be refreshed within Psychological Time even when we are awake. This will aid our mental and physical state to an amazing degree. We will discover an added vitality and a decreased need to sleep. Within any given five minutes of Clock Time, for example, we my find an hour of resting which is independent of Clock Time.
We can look through psychological time time at Clock Time and even use clock time then to our greater advantage; but without the initial recognition of Psychological Time, Clock Time becomes a prison. A proper use of Psychological Time will not only lead us to inner reality but will prevent us from being rushed in the physical world. It provides quiet and peacefulness.
From its framework we will see that that clock time is as dreamlike as we once thought inner time was. We will discover that ‘inner time’ is as much a reality as we once considered outer time to be. In other words, peeping inwards and outwards at the same ‘time’ we will find that all divisions ae illusion and all Time is One Time,
Referring to the point at which self-consciousness entered into so-called inert form. We know know, now, that all form has consciousness, and so there was no point at which self-consciousness entered with the sound of trumpets, so to speak. Consciousness was inherent in the first materialization upon our plane.
Self-consciousness entered in very shortly after but not what we are pleased to call human self-consciousness. I do not like to wound your egos in this manner, and I can hear some yell ‘foul,’ but there is no actual differentiation between the various kinds of consciousness.
We are either conscious of self or we are not. A tree is conscious of itself as a tree. It does not consider itself as a rock. A dog knows it is not a cat. What I am trying to point out here is this supreme egotistical presumption that elf-consciousness must of necessity involved humanity per se. It does not.
So-called human consciousness did not suddenly appear. Our porr maligned friend, the ape, did not suddenly beat his/her hairy chest in exultation and cry, ‘I am a man/woman.’ The beginnings of human consciousness, on the other hand, began as soon as multi-cellular groupings began to form in field patterns of a certain complexity.
While there was no specific entry point as far as human consciousness was concerned, there was a point (in our terms) where it did not seem to exist. The consciousness of being human was fully developed in the cave man/woman, of course, but the human conception was alive in the fish.
We have spoken of mental genes. These are more or less psychic blueprints for physical matter, and in these mental genes existed the pattern for our human type of self-consciousness. It did not appear in constructed form for a long period.
Human self-consciousness existed in psychological time, and in inner ‘time’ long before we, as a species, constructed it. Human consciousness was inherent and latent from the beginning of our physical universe.
The inner senses, are the impetus behind the physical formations. The inner senses themselves, through the use if mental enzymes, imprint the data contained in the mental genes onto the physical camouflage material.
I become impatient, though I shouldn’t, with this continued implied insistence that evolution involves merely human species – or, rather, that all evolution must be considered some gigantic tree with humanity as the supreme blossom.
Humanity’s so-called supreme blossom seems to be the ego, which can be, at times, a poisoning blossom, indeed. There is nothing wrong with the ego. The point remains, however, that man/woman became so fascinated with it that he/she has ignored the parts of himself/herself that make the ego possible, and he/she ignores those portions of himself/herself that give to the ego the very powers of which he/she is so consciously proud.
Why do mankind/womankind insist that an inner experience such as telepathy or premonition does not exist because they cannot hold it in both hands? And yet, in many instances, such cases can be corroborated by others in a way in which many psychological experience cannot be.
There is now way of measuring inner experience, or the psychological experience, rather, of someone who has lost a friend in death, but we do not deny that such an experience happens. Yet, if two people see the same ‘apparition,’ then instantly twice the evidence is required.
You can experience many days while no corresponding amount of physical time passes. It seems as if you travel far in the flicker of an eyelash. Now, condensed time is the time felt by the entity, while any of its given personalities live on a plane of physical materialization. To go into this further, many have said that life wa a dream. They were true to the facts in one regard, yet far afield as far as the main issue is concerned.
The life of any given individual could be legitimately compared to the dream of an entity. While the individual suffers and enjoys his given number of years, these years are but a flash to the entity. The entity is concerned with your dreams. As you give inner purpose and organization to your dreams, and as you obtain insight and satisfaction from them, though they involve only a portion of your life, so the entity to some extent directs and gives purpose and organization to his personalities. So does the entity obtain insights and satisfactions from its existing personalities, although no one of them takes up all of its attention.
And as your dreams originate with you, rise from you, attain a seeming independence and have their ending with you, so do the entity’s personalities arise from him/her, attain various degrees of independence and return to him/her while never leaving him/her for an instant.
You are familiar through your reading with so-called secondary personalities. Now, this idea comes close to the relationship between the entity and its personalities. They are independent to various degrees, and they operate various planes of existence for purposes of overall fulfillment and development.
To a lesser degree, you function along these lines in varying roles when you exist simultaneously as a member of a family, a community and a nation ans as an artist or write. As you attempt to use your abilities, so does the entity use its abilities, and he organizes his various personalities and, to some extent directs their activities while still allowing them what you could call free will.
Your own dreams are fragments, even as you are fragments of your entity. An unrecognized unity and organization lies within all your dreams, beneath their diversity. And your dreams, while part of you, also exist apart.
The dream world has its own reality, its own ‘time’ and its owninneroragnization. As the entity is only partially concerned with its personalities after setting them into motion, so you are unconcerned with this dream world after you have set it into motion. But is exists.
To a different degree, it is filled with conscious semi-personalities. They are not(asa rule) as developed as you are, as you are not as developed as your entity is. That dream world experiences its own continuity. It is not aware of any break, for example, when you are waking. It does not know if you sleep or wake. It merely exists to a fairly vivid degree while you dream of cleep, and it sleeps but does not ‘die’ when you waken.
The entity itself does not have to keep constant track of its personalities because each one possesses an inner self-conscious part that knows its origin. This part, for now, I will call the self-conscious beyond the subconscious. I mentioned that some part of you know exactly how much oxygen the lungs breathe, and this is the part of which i spoke. It receives all inner data.
This portion of the personality translates inner data and sifts it through the subconscious, which is a barrier and also a threshold to the present personality. I told you also that the topmost layers of the subconscious contain personal memories and beneath – racial memory. The personality is not actually layered, of course, but continuing with the necessary analogy,beneath the racial memories you look out upon another dimension of reality with the face of this self-conscious part of you.
This portion is ‘turned toward’ the entity. When such abilities as telepathy are used, this function is carried on continually by this other self-conscious part of you. But as a rule, you act upon such data without the knowledge of the ordinary conscious self.
There is also a corresponding, but ‘lesser’ self-consciousness that connects your present personalities with the dream world, which is aware of its origin and communicates data from you to dream reality.
This information is correct in its bare essentials. Any such inner communications are basically the same in that they are picked up by the inner senses, whether the information seems telepathic or clairvoyant in our terms.
The actual communication is not in words or pictures. Material from the inner senses is seldom experienced in its true form. What we get is a hasty twisting of channels, a rather inept and sometimes rather disastrous attempt to pick up such information with the outer senses.
Part of the subconscious fantasy in the dream world is valid, representing a watered-down version of the actual communication.
The conscious mind cannot be aware of such critical inner decisions.
There is a period of adjustment after leaving any plane, although ours involves the most difficulty since our camouflage pattern is usually rigid.
The shock of birth is worse. The new personality is not entirely focused, and it must make immediate critical adjustments of the strongest nature. Death in our terms is a termination but does not involve such immediate critical manipulations. There is ‘time’ to catch up, so to speak. The vital core of awareness appears on another plane.
The personality soon will be fully materialized on another plane before he/she dies in this one. In a sudden death however, this can be more upsetting to the personality involved, and since new materialization is simultaneous, it can lead to confusion.
If you will use psychological time as I have told you, you will get immediate first-hand experience with many facets of reality which take me pages to explain with the use of words. All entities are self-aware portions of the energy of All That Is. They are self-generating, and if you understand this, you will stop thinking in terms of beginnings and endings.
The Inner Senses operate on all planes and under all circumstances. The outer senses vary according to plane and circumstances. The outer senses are dependable only in terms of the definite system of reality for which they were constructed. Their purpose, of course, is to enable the conscious personality to recognize as valid, camouflage patterns that are only valid under certain conditions.
Entities create stages upon which to act out their problems. The point is that once the play begins, the actors/actresses are so completely engrossed in their roles that they forget that they themselves wrote the play, constructed the sets or are even acting.
The reason is rather apparent: If you know that a situation is ‘imaginary,’ you are not going to come to grips with it. This way, you have your actors/actresses taking the situation as it seems to be but looking about in amazement now and then to wonder how they got where they are, who constructed the sets, and so forth. They do not realize that the whole thing is self-created, nor should they in the main, since the urgency to solve problems would dissolve.
I’m not worried that I’m going to disturb the balance. Far from it. The fact is that the realization can, and often does, comes after the play is well under way, and at this point, the camouflage action is so involved that the realization itself appears in the framework of the camouflage and is often indistinguishable from it.
It goes without saying that a bird’s death is inevitable, but a cat killing a bird does not have to juggle the same sort of values with which a man/woman must be concerned. For now, suffice it to say that to kill for self-protection or food on our plane does not involve us in what we may call for the first time, I believe, Karmic Consequences.
To kill for convenience, or for the sake of killing involves rather dire consequences, and the emotional value behind such killing is often as important as what is killed. This involves value judgments of a very important type, and I will not go into them now.
Dream locations that represent places familiar to you in your present daily life.
Dream locations that represent places (such as foreign countries) to which you have never really traveled.
Dreams locations that represent definite places that appear as they were in the past. If you dream of your childhood home as it was, not as it is now, then the location would belong in the category.
Dream locations that represnt places that no longer exist physically.
Strange, completely unfamiliar, dream locations.
Indistinct dream locations.
Strange dream locations to which you keep returning.
We will be involved with a study of the characteristics of the dream world in general and attempt to isolate it as a separate reality for the purposes of examination. Then we shall regard it in its relation to physical reality, using comparisons and dissimilarities.
This will then allow us to proceed into the relationship between the waking and sleeping personality and discover the many ways in which the personality’s aims and goals are not only reflected but sometimes achieved in and through the dream condition.
Usually the dream state is considered from a negative standpoint and compared unfavorably with the waking condition. Emphasis is laid upon those conditions present in the waking state but absent from the dreaming experience. We shall consider those aspects of consciousness which are present in the dream environment and absent in the physical one. No study of human personality can pretend to be thorough that does not take the importance of dream reality into consideration.
In some discussions we will state the ways in which conscious goals can be achieved with the help of the dreaming self. All of this material will be reinforced with experiments that, I hope, you will conduct yourselves.
It is amazing how man/woman regrets the hours spent in sleep. He/she does not realize how hard he/she works when the ego is unaware. We hope to make this clear. We hope to let you catch yourselves in the act of doing so. You will realize how productive dream experiences are and the ways in which they are woven into the tapestry of your entire experience.
As mentioned previously, we will also deal with the nature of space, time and distance, as they appear in the dream environment. Some of our experiments along these lines will be most Illuminating. Here the ego cannot go, but it can benefit from the information, and perhaps in time, even a shadow of the ego may pass through that strange land and feel in some small way at home.
As there is in actuality no beginning or end to a dream, so there is no beginning or end to any reality. A dream does not then begin or end; only your awareness of a dream begins and ends. You come into awareness of a dream, and you leave it, but in our terms of time, the dreams that you seem to dream tonight have been long inexistence. They seem to begin tonight because you are aware of them tonight.
You do create your own dreams. Nevertheless, you do not create them during a specific point in time. The beginnings of dreams reach back into ‘past’ lives of which you are not aware and beyond even this; the origins are part of a heritage that was before our planet existed.
For every consciousness existed simultaneously and in essence, even before what you may call the beginnings of our world. And what you are yet to be existed then and still exists now – and not as some still unfulfilled possibility but in actuality.
What you will be, you are now, not in some misty half-real form but in a most real sense. You simply are not aware of these selves on a conscious level any more than you are aware of ‘past’ lives. But each of you creates a dream world of validity, actuality, durability and self-determination, in the same way that the entity projects the reality of its various personalities. As there is usually no contact between the entity and the ordinary conscious ego, there is usually no contact on a conscious level between the self who dreams and the dream world which has its own independent existence.
And in the same way that the dream world has no beginning or end, neither does the physical universe with which you are familiar. No energy can be withdrawn, and this includes the energy used in the continuous subconscious construction of the dream world. You continually create it – have always created it. It is the product of your own existence, and yet you can neither consciously call it into existence nor destroy it.
The dream world is, then, a natural byproduct of the relationship between the inner self and the physical being – not a reflection, but a byproduct – involving not only a chemical reaction, but also the transformation of energy from one state to another.
In some respects, all planes or fields of existence are byproducts of others. For example, without the peculiar spark set off through the interrelationship between the inner self and the physical being, the cream world would not exist. But conversely, the dream world is a necessity for the continued survival of the physical individual.
This point is extremely important. As you know, animals dream. What you do not know is that all consciousness dreams. Atoms and molecules have consciousness, and this minute consciousness forms its own dreams even as, on the other hand, it forms its own physical image. As in the material world, atoms combine for their own benefit into more complicated structures, so do they combine to form such gestalts in the dream world.
I’ve said that the dream world has its own sort of form and permanence. It is physically oriented, though not to the degree inherent in our ordinary universe. In the same way that the physical image is built up, so is the dream image. You can refer to our previous discussions on the nature of matter to help you understand, but the dream world is not a formless, haphazard semi-construction.
It does not exist in bulk, but it does exist in form. The true complexity and importance of the dream world as an independent field of existence has yet been fully impressed upon us. Yet, while our world and the dream world are basically independent, they exert pressures and influences one upon the other.
The dream world, then, is a byproduct of your own existence (from your standpoint). It is connected to you through chemical reactions and this leaves open the entryway of interactions. Since dreams are a byproduct of any consciousness involved with matter, then trees have their dreams. All physical matter, being formed about individualized units of consciousness of varying degrees, also participates in the involuntary construction of the dream world.
I mentioned the Crucifixion once, saying that it was an actuality and a reality, although it did not take place in our time. it took place where time is not as we know it, in the same sort of time in which a dream takes place. Its reality was felt by generations and was reacted to. Not being a phyusical reality, it influenced the world of physical matter in a way that no purely physical reality ever could.
The crucifixion was one of the gigantic realities that transformed and enriched both the universe of dreams and the universe of matter, and it originated in the world of dreams. It was main contribution of that field to our own and could be compared physically to an emergence of a new planet within the physical universe.
The Ascension of the Christ is, also a contribution of the world of dreams to our own universe, representing knowledge within the dream system that man/woman was independent of physical matter.
Many concepts, advancements and practical inventions simpl wait in abeyance in the world of dreams until some man/woman accepts them as possibilities within his/her frame of reality. Imagination is waking man’s/woman’s connection with the world of dreams. Imagination often restates dream data and applies it to particular circumstances or problems within the physical system. Its effect may appear within matter, but it it itself not physical. Often the dream world possesses concepts which will one day completely transform the history of our field, but a denial of such concepts as actualities or possibilities within reality hold these back and put off breakthroughs that are sorely needed.
Such developments would mean the releasing of added energy into your field. Ideas and concepts are nonphysical actualities that attract unaligned energy, direct and concentrate it. The dream world exists more closely in that spacious present of which the inner self is so aware. It is not as involved with camouflage.
It might be said, then, that in many ways the dream universe depends upon us to give it expression, in the same manner that we also depend upon it to find expression.
The impact of any dream has physical, chemical, electromagnetic, psychological and psychic repercussions that are actual and continuing. The type of dream or the types of dream experienced by any given individual are determined by many different factors. I am speaking now of the dream experience as it occurs and not of the remnant of it that his/her ego allows him/her to recall.
As an individual creates his/her physical image and environment according to his/her abilities and effects, and in line with his/her expectations and inner needs, so does he/she create his/her dreams; and these interact with the outer environment.
However, with the ego at rest in sleep, the individual often allows communications and dream constructions through – past the ego barrier. For example, if his/her present expectations are faulty, when the ego rests, he/she may recieve a time when expectations were high. The resulting dream will partially break the circle of poor expectations with their shoddy physical constructions and start such an individual along a constructive path. In other words, a dream may begin to transform the physical environment through lifting inner expectation.
We have seen that all experience is retained in electrically coded data within the cells and that the material of the cells forms about this coded experience. We have seen that the ego begins, sparked into being by the inner self, greatly influenced by heredity and physical environment; and that thus ego, as it continues to exist, builds up an electrical reality of its own and forms its experiences, into the coded data within the cells.
At any given ‘point,’ the ego is complete within electrical reality as it is psychologically complete within the physical universe. This includes the retention of its dream as well as the retention of purely physical data.
the electrical system is composed of electricity that is far different from our idea of it. electricity, as we perceive it, is merely an echo emanation or a sort of shadow image of these infinite varieties of pulsation which give actuality to many phenomena with which we are familiar, but which do not appear as tangible objects within the physical field.
This electrical system is vastly dense. this is a denseness that does not take up space, a denseness caused by an infinity of electrical fields of varying ranges of intensity. Not only are no two of these electrical fields identical, but there are no identical impulses within them.
the gradations of intensities are so minute that it would be impossible to measure them, and yet each field contains in coded form the actual living reality of endless eons; contains what we would call the past, present, and future of unnumbered invierses; contains the coded data of any and every consciousness that has been or will be, in any universe; those that have appeared to vanish, and those which, seemingly, do not yet exist.
this density is extremely important, for it is a density of intensities. And it is the infinite variety and gradations of intensity that makes all identities possible and all gestalts, all identities in terms of personalities and fields and universes. It is this density, with this infinite variety of intensity, which allows for both identity and change.
The electricity that is perceivable within our system is merely a projection of a vast electrical system that we cannot perceive. So far, scientists have been able to study electricity only by observing the projections of it that are perceivable within their terms of reference. As their physical instruments become more sophisticated, they will not be able to explain it within their known system of references, many curious and distorted explanations of reported phenomena will be given.
Yet the inner self offers so many clues. It operates outside of physical references. It is, of itself, free of the distorted effects peculiar to the physical system. A study of dreams, for example, would make many of these points clear, yet many scientists consider such work beneath them.
Why has no one suspected that dream locations have not only a psychological reality but a definite actuality? A study of dream locations is most important. Dream locations are composed of electrical mass, density and intensity. Here is another point: Definite work may be done in a dream, but the physical arms and legs are not tired. This would seem contrary to our known laws, but no one has looked into this.
It is most difficult to even hint at the myriad complexity and dimension of the electrical actuality as it exists. When we consider that each of our own thoughts is composed of a unique intensity of impulse, shared by nothing else; that the same may be said for every dream we will have in our lifetime; and that all our experience is gathered together in particular ranges of intensity, again completely unique; and that the summation of all that we are exists in one minute range or band of intensities, then you will see how difficult this is to explain.
This not only applies to your physical field but also to others. Your field is contained within its own range of intensities, a tiny band of electrical impulses a million times smaller than one note picked at random from the entire mass of musical composition that has ever been written or ever will be written. I am not going too deeply into this now because you are not ready. But because of the infinite range of intensities available, each individual has limitless intensities within which he/she can move.
All motion is mental or psychological motion, and all mental or psychological motion has its electrical reality. The inner self moves by moving through intensities. Each new experience opens a new pulsation intensity. To move through intensities within the electrical system gives the result, in the physical field, of moving through time. We will also discuss this later, in connection with so-called astral travel.
I would like to discuss dreams in relation to action. We mentioned earlier that all action does not necessarily involve motion that is apparent as such to us. To one extent or another, all actions are unfoldings. The action of dreaming itself is partially a physical phenomena. There is, then, the outside action that makes dreaming possible, the action that is dreaming.
Then there are the endless varieties of actions within the dream which is, in itself, a continuing act. The images within a dream also act. They move, speak, walk, run. There is, at times, a dream within a dream where the dreamer dreams that he dreams. Here, of course, the dimensions of action are more diverse.
Many of these actions performed by dream images are muscular ones, physical manipulations. But many of these actions are also mental manipulations or esthetic realizations and even aesthetic performances. These dream images are not one-dimensional cardboard figures by any means. Their mobility, in terms of perspectives and within space, is far greater than our own.
You perceive but a small portion of these images which you have yourself created. You cannot bring them back into the limited perspectives of your present physical field and are left with but glimpses and flimsy glimmerings of images that are as actual, vivid and more mobile than normal physical ones.
I have said before that the dream world is composed of molecular structure, and that it is a continuing reality, even though your own awareness of it is usually limited to the hours of your own sleep. There is a give-and-take here. For if you give the dream world much of its energy, much of your own energy is derived from it.
Nor is the dream world a shadow image of your own. It carries on according to the possibilities inherent within it, as you carry on according to the possibilities in the physical system. In sleeping, however, you focus your awareness in altered form into another world that is every bit as valid as your physical one. Only a small amount of energy is focused into the physical system during sleep, enough simply to maintain the body within the environment.
In many respects, actions within the dream world are more direct than your own. It is because you remember only vague glimmerings and disconnected episodes that dreams appear often chaotic or meaningless, particularly to the ego which censors much of the information that the subconsciousness retains. For most people, this censoring process is valuable, since it prevents the personality from being snowed under by data that it is not equipped to handle. The ability to retain experience gained within other fields is the trend of further developments. Nevertheless, every man/woman intuitively knows his/her involvement here
Some dream events are more vivid than waking ones. It is only when the personality passes out of the dream experience that it may seem unreal in retrospect. For (upon waking) again, the focus of energy and attention is in the physical universe. Reality, then, is a result of focus of energy and attention.
I used the term, pass out of the dream world purposely, for here we see a mobility of action easily and often accomplished – a passing in and out that involves an action without movement in space. The dreamer has, at his/her fingertips, a memory of his/her ‘previous’ dream experiences and carries within him/her the many inner purposes which are behind his/her dream actions. On leaving the dream state, he/she becomes more aware of the ego and creates, then, those activities that are meaningful to it. As mentioned earlier, however, dream symbols have meaning to all portions of the personality.
The dream world has a molecular construction, but this construction takes up no space as you know it. The dream world consists of depths and dimensions, expansions and contractions that are more clearly related, perhaps, to ideals that have no need for the particular kind of structure with which you are familiar. The intuitions and certain other inner abilities have so much more freedom here that it is unnecessary for molecules to be used in any imprisoning form. Action in the dream world is more fluid. The images appear and disappear much more quickly because value fulfillment is allowed greater reign.
The slower physical manifestation of growth that occurs within the physical system involves long-term patterns filled by atoms and molecules which are, to some extent, then imprisoned within the constructions. In the dream world, the slower physical growth process is replaced by psychic and mental value fulfillment which does not necessitate any long-range imprisonment of molecules within pattern. This involves a quickening of experience and action that are relatively unhampered by the sort of time necessities inherent within the physical universe. Action is allowed greater freedom.
This is not to say that structure does not exist within the dream world, for structures of a mental and psychic nature do exist. But structure is not dependent upon matter, and the motion of the molecules is more spontaneous. An almost unbelievable depth of experience is possible within what would seem to you a fraction of a moment.
One of the closet glimpses you can get of pure action is action as it is involved with the dream world and in this mobility as the personality passes into and out of the dream field. Within the physical world, we deal with the transformation of action into physical manipulations – but this involves only a small portion of the nature of action, and it is my purpose to familiarize you with action as it exists, more or less, in pure form. In this way, you will be able to perceive the ways in which it is translated into other fields of actuality that do not involve matter as we know it.
Within the reality of the dream world, fulfillment and dependence, then, are not dependent upon permanence in physical terms. Bursts of developments are possible that have matured in perspectives that are not bound up in time.
These developments are the result of actions that occur in many perspectives at once and not developments that happen as within the physical system through a seeming series of moments. Basically, even the physical universe itself is so constructed, but for all practical purposes, as far as perception and experience is concerned, time and physical growth apply. As a result, the ego portion of personality is, to a large extent, dependent for its maturity and development upon the amount of time that the physical image has spent within the system.
A certain portion of physical growth, in terms of a series of moments, is, therefore, necessary for value fulfillment to show itself within a physical organism. But in the dream world, ‘growth’ is a matter of value fulfillment which is achieved through perspectives of action – through traveling within any given action, and following it and changing with it.
Now, you experience action as if you were moving along a single line, each dot on it representing a moment of your time. But at any of these ‘points,’ action moves out in all directions. From the standpoint of that moment-point, you could imagine action forming an imaginary circle with the point as apex. But this happens at the point of every moment. There is no particular boundary to the circle. It widens outward indefinitely. Now, in the dream world, and in all such systems, development is achieved not by traveling your single line, but by delving into that point that we call a moment. Basically the physical universe is at the apex of such a system itself.
The reality of dreams can be investigated only through direct contact. REM sleep or no REM sleep, your dreams exist constantly beneath consciousness, even in the waking state. The personality is constantly affected by them. It is impossible to deprive a person of dreams even though you deprive him/her of sleep (as in certain dream laboratory experiments). This function will be carried on subconsciously.
The eye movements moted in the beginning of REM sleep are only indications of dream activity that is closely connected with the physical layers of the self. These periods mark not the onset of dreams but the return of the personality from deeper layers of dream awareness to more surface ones. The self is actually returning to more surface levels to check upon physical environment. There is a transference of main energy in deeper dream states from physical to mental concentration.
Quite simply, the self travels to areas of reality that are far divorced from the physical areas of mobility. The muscles are lax then because physical activity is not required. The energy that is not being expended physical is used to sustain mental actions. The chemical excesses built up in the waking state are automatically changed as they are drained off, into electrical energy which also helps to form and sustain dream images.
Our scientists would learn more about the nature of dreams if they would train themselves in dream recall. Again, the very attempt to deprive an individual of sleep will automatically set into mechanism subconscious dream activity. The tampering will then change the conditions. The direct experience of the developing dream is what we should be concerned with.
This could be studied if proper suggestions were given to an individual that he/she would awaken at the exact point of a dream’s end (as in our own experiments). The dream state and conditions could also be studied legitimately using hypnosis. Here, you are working with the mind itself and merely suggesting that it operate in a certain fashion. You are not tampering with the mechanics of its operation and automatically altering the conditions.
Using hypnosis, you can get good dream recall with a good operator. You can suggest ordinary sleep and dreaming and then suggest that without awakening, the subject give a verbal description of his/her dreams as he/she experiences them. Another alternative is to suggest that the subject under hypnosis repeat the dreams of the night before.
Using these methods, the dreams of the mentally ill could also be studied if the affliction was not too severe. The dreams of children could be investigated in this way and compared with those of adults. children dream vividly and more often.They return more frequently, however, to periods of near wakefulness in order to check their physical environment, since they are not as sure of it as adults are. In deep periods of sleep, children range further away, as far as dream activities are concerned.
The ego allows them more freedom. For this reason, they also have more telepathic and clairvoyant dreams than adults. They also have greater psychic energy; that is, they are able to draw upon energy more easily. Because of the intenseness of their waking experience, the chemical excesses build up at a faster rate. Therefore, children have more of this ‘chemical propellant’ to use in dream formation. they are also more conscious of their dreams.
I have said often that any action changes that which acts and that which is acted upon; and so in the sort of experiments that are currently being carried on to study dreams, the acts of the investigators are changing the conditions in such a way that it is easy for them to find what they are looking for. The investigator himself/herself, through his/her actions, inadvertently brings about those results for which his/her looks. The particular experiment may see, then, to suggest conditions which are by no means general, but may appear to be. Under hypnosis a subject is not as much on guard, as is the subject of an experiment who knows in advance that he/she will be awakened by experimenters, that electrodes will be attached to his/her skull and that laboratory conditions are substituted for his/her nightly environment. It is impossible to study dreams when an attempt is made to isolate the dreamer from his/her own personality, to treat dreams as if they were physical or mechanical. The only laboratory for a study of dreams is the laboratory of the personality.
Illnesses can be seen as impeding actions representing actual blockages of energy, action turned into channels that are not to the best interests of the personality. The anergies appear concentrated and turned inward, affecting the whole system. They represent offshoots; not necessarily detrimental in themselves, except when viewed from the standpoint of other actions that form the personality framework.
A certain portion of the energy practically available to the personality is spent in the maintenance of this impeding action or illness. It is obvious, then, that less energy is available for actions more beneficial to the personality system as a whole.
The situation can be serious in varying degrees, according to the impetus and intensity of the original cause behind the illness. If the impetus is powerful, then the impeding action will be of more serious nature, blocking huge reserves of energy for its own purposes. It obviously becomes part of the personality’s psychological structure, the physical, electrical and chemical structures, invading to some extent even the dream system.
At times, illness is momentarily accepted by the personality as a part of the self, and here lies its danger. It is not just symbolically accepted, and I am not speaking in symbolic terms. The illness is often quite literally accepted by the personality structure as a portion of the self. Once this occurs, a conflict instantly develops. The self does not want to give up a portion of itself, even if that part may be painful or disadvantageous.
For one thing, while pain is unpleasant, it is also a method of familiarizing the self against the edges of quickened consciousness. Any heightened sensation, pleasant or unpleasant, has a stimulating effect upon consciousness to some degree. It is a strong awareness of activity and life. Even when the stimulus may be extremely annoying or humiliatingly unpleasant, certain portions of the psychological framework accept it acquiescence to even painful stimuli is a basic part of the nature of consciousness and a necessary one.
Even a quick and automatic rejection or withdrawal from such a stimulus is, in itself, a way by which consciousness knows itself. The ego may attempt to escape such experiences, but the basic nature of action itself is the knowing of itself in all aspects. In a very deep manner, action does not differentiate between enjoyable and painful actions.
These differentiations come later, on another level of development. But because personality is composed of action, it contains within it all action’s characteristics.
These differentiations come later, on another level of development. But because personality is composed of action, it contains within it all action’s characteristics.
The ways in which various kinds of consciousness react to painful stimuli, ending up with a statement that at deepest cellular levels, all sensations and stimuli are instantly, automatically and joyfully accepted, regardless of their nature. At this level, no knowledge of threats exists. The “I” differentiation is not definite enough to fear destruction.
Here we have action knowing itself and realizing its basic indestructibility. It has no fear of destruction, for it is also a part of the destruction from which new actions will evolve.
The complicated organism of human personality with its physical structure has evolved a highly differentiated ‘I’ consciousness, whose very nature is such that it attempts to preserve the apparent boundaries of identity. To do so it must choose between actions.
But beneath the sophisticated gestalt are the simpler foundations of its being and, indeed, the very acceptance of all stimuli without which identity would be impossible. Without this acquiescence, the physical structure would never maintain itself, for the atoms and molecules within it constantly accept painful stimuli and suffer even their own destruction. They are aware of their own separateness within action and of their reality within it.
Now you should understand why even an impeding action can be literally accepted by the personality as a part of itself and why efforts must be made to coax the personality to give up a portion of itself, if progress is to made.
We are also helped, however, by several characteristics of the personality, in that it is ever-changing, and its flexibility will be of benefit. We merely want to change the direction in which some of its energy moves. It must be seen by the personality that an impeding action is a hardship on the whole structure and that this particular part of the self is not basic to the original personality. The longer the impeding action is accepted, the more serious the problem.
The whole focus of a personality can change from constructive areas to a concentration of main energies in the area of the illness. Now in such a case, often the illness represents a new unifying system. If the old unifying system of personality has broken down, the illness, serving as a makeshift, temporary emergency measure may hold the integrity of the personality intact until a new constructive, unifying principle replaces the original.
In this case, the illness could not be called an impeding action unless it persisted long after its purpose was served. Even then, without knowing all the facts you could not make a judgment, for the illness could still serve by giving the personality a sense of security, being kept on hand as an ever-present emergency device in case the new unifying principle should fail.
Unifying principles are groups of actions about which the whole personality forms itself at any given time. There may change and do change in a relatively smooth fashion when action is allowed to flow unimpeded. When action is not allowed to follow the patterns or channels for its expression that have been evolved by the personality, then blockages of energy occur.
These must be understood not as something apart from the personality, but as a part of the changing personality. Often, they point out the existence of inner problems. Often, they serve temporary functions, leading the personality from other more serve areas of difficulty. I am not saying here that illness is good. I am saying that it is a part of the action of which any personality is composed, and, therefor, it is purposeful and cannot be considered as an alien force that attacks the individual from without.
The personality is simultaneous action; it is composed of actions within actions. Portions of it are conscious of its awareness as a part of action, and portions try to stand aside from action. This attempt forms the ego, which is itself action.
If illness were thrust upon action or upon the personality from the outside, then the individual would be at the mercy of outside agencies, but it is not. Personality is affected by outside agencies, but in a most basic manner, it chooses those actions which it will accept.
An illness can be rejected. The habit of illness can be rejected. When action is allowed to flow freely, then neurotic rejections of action will not occur. An illness is almost always the result of another action that cannot be carried through. When the lines to the repressed action are released and the channels to it opened, such an illness will vanish. However, the thwarted action may be one with disastrous consequences, which the illness may prevent.
Poor health is caused mainly by destructive mental and felling patterns that directly affect the body because of the particular range within the electromagnetic system in which they fall. Bad health, for example, does not happen first, resulting in unhealthy thoughts. It is the other way around.
Illness must be treated primarily by changing the basic mental habits. Unless this is done, the trouble will erupt again and again in different guises. The system has the ability to heal itself, however, and every opportunity should be given to allow it to do so.
In most cases the stimuli (toward healing) come from deeper levels of the self, where they may be translated into terms that the personal subconscious can use. In such cases, these perceptions may find their way to the ego, appearing as inspirations or intuitive thought.
Many such intuitions appear when the personality is dissociated or in a dream state. The effect of any thought is quite precise and definite and set into motion because of the nature of its own electromagnetic identity. The physical body operates within certain electromagnetic patterns and is adversely affected by others. These effects change the actual molecular structure of the cells, for better or worse, and because of the laws of attraction, habitual patterns will operate. A destructive thought, then, is dangerous not only to the present state of the organism but is also dangerous in terms of the ‘future.’
We have not spken about the inner senses in some time. By now, you should realize that they have an electromagnetic reality also and that the mental enzymes act as sparks, setting off inner reactions. In the dream state, these reactions are easily triggered. This is the result of the lowering of egotistical guards, for the ego sets up controls that act as resistances to various inner channels (during the waking state).
A destructive attitude of mind has been changed overnight in the dream state to a constructive situation in many instances, and the whole electromagnetic balance has been changed. In such a case, negative ions form an electrical framework in which healing is possible. Such healing dreams come most often when the self feels a sense of desperation and automatically opens up channels to deeper layers of personality.
Often we find an almost instant regeneration, a seemingly instant cure, a point from which the organism almost miraculously begins to improve. The same happens in less startling cases where, for example, a merely annoying health condition suddenly disappears.
Through self-suggestion, these therapeutic dreams can be brought about with practice. The suggestion (being action) has its own electromagnetic effect and already begins to set certain healing processes into action, while sparking the formation of others.
Such inner therapeutics may occur at various other levels of consciousness, where they may be sparked by external stimuli of an aesthetic or pleasing nature. Other exterior conditions also have an effect. To involve oneself in large groups, for example, is often beneficial not simply to take attention away from the self for a change, but because of the larger range of electromagnetic ranges readily available.
The overall health of the individual is important, as is the delicate balance of electromagnetic properties. When the organism is set deeply in destructive patterns, then this is sometimes felt in the dream state, so that destructive dreams then add to the entire situation. For this reason, the use of self-suggestion in bringing about constructive dreams is of great benefit.
As the personality is changed by any action, so it is changed by its own dreams. As it is molded by the exterior environment, so it is molded by the dreams that it creates and which help form its interior world. To the whole self, there is little differentiation made between exterior or interior actions. The ego makes such distinctions. The core of the personality does not. As an individual changes his/her physical situation through reacting to it, so he/she changes his/her interior or psychic situation in the same way.
In dreams, you give freedom to actions that cannot adequately be expressed within the confines of normal waking reality. If the personality handles his/her dream activities capably, then problem actions find release in dreams. When the ego is too rigid, it will even attempt to censor dreams, however, and freedom all action is not entirely permitted, even in the dream condition.
If this solution fails, the impeding action will then materialize as a physical illness or undesirable psychological condition. If an individual has strong feelings of dependency that cannot be expressed in daily life, he/she will express these in dreams. If he/she does not, then he/she may develop an illness that allows him/her to be dependent in physical life. If he/she is aware of difficulties, however, he/she may request dreams that will release this feeling.
The individual would not necessarily remember such a dream. Psychologically, however, such an experience would be valid, and the dependency expressed. I cannot stress this too strongly: To the inner self, the dream experience is as real as any other experience.
It follows that (by) using suggestion, various problems can be solved within the dream state. The inner ego of which we have spoken is the director of such unifying activities. It is the ‘I’ of your dreams, having somewhat the same position within the inner self as the ego has to the outer physical body.
Upon proper suggestion, the personality then will work out specific problems in the dream state, but if the solution is not clear to the (conscious) ego, this does not necessarily mean that the solution was not found. There will be cases where it is not only unnecessary but undesirable that the ego be familiar with the solution. The suggestions will be followed by the sleeping self in its own fashion. The solutions may not appear to the conscious self in the way it expects. The conscious self may not even recognize it has been given a solution, and yet it may act upon it.
Both psychological and physical illnesses could largely be avoided through dream therapy. Rather harmlessly, aggressive tendencies could also be given freedom in the dream condition. Through such therapy, actions would be allowed greater spontaneity. In the case of the release of aggressiveness, the individual involved would experience this within the dream state and hurt no one. Suggestions could also be given so that he/she learned to understand the aggressiveness through watching himself/herself while in the dream state.
This is not as far-fetched as it might seem. Much erratic anti-social behavior could be avoided in this way. Crimes could be prevented. The desired but feared actions would not build up to explosive pressure. If I may indulge in a fantasy, theoretically you could imagine a massive experiment in dream therapy, where wars were fought by sleeping, and not waking, nations.
(In practice, however,) there are many considerations to be understood. If aggressiveness is the problem, for example, then the preliminary suggestion should include a statement that in the dream, the aggression will be harmlessly acted out and not directed against a particular individual. The subconscious is quite capable of handling the situation in this manner. This may seem like a double censor, but in all cases it is the aggressiveness itself that is important and not the person or persons against whom the individual may decide to vent his/her aggressiveness.
When the aggressiveness is released through a dream, there will be no need for a victim. We do not want an individual to suggest a dream situation in which he/she is attacking another person. There are several reasons for this, both telepathic realities which you do not yet understand and guilt patterns which would be unavoidable.
We are not attempting to substitute dream action for physical action, generally speaking. Here we are speaking of potentially dangerous situations in which an individual shows signs of being unable to cope with these psychological actions through ordinary methods of adaptation. No one can deny that a war fought by dreaming men/women at specified times would be less harmful than a physical war – to return to my flight of fancy. There would be repercussions, however, that would be unavoidable, (for again, basically, the personality does not differentiate between sleeping and waking events).
Again, if the personality is fairly well balanced, then his/her existence in dream reality will reinforce his/her physical existence. You are involved in a juggling of realities. It is necessary to see the personality as it operates within both, if you are interested in understanding its whole experience.
What is the point of it all? For one thing, records of your own precognitive dreams will convince you that you can perceive segments of the future. This personal knowing is far more vital than a bland intellectual acceptance that precognition may exist or is generally possible.
You don’t have to take precognition on faith. If you keep careful dream records, sooner or later you’ll find your own evidence of it. Each of my own precognitive dreams made a significant impression on me at the time and represented proof that I was moving in the right direction. Now I am much more interested into dream experience.
Each recaptured dream is not only a highly personal document but a clue into the nature of dream existence. Precognitive dreams are most evocative from this standpoint. The dreamer is baffled at his/her own ability to foresee a future event, and this makes him/her more than ordinarily curious about the nature of dream life in particular.
Even this intense interest waxes and wanes, however, in the ordinary sequence of events. My students and I both go through periods when we forget to remember and wake up for weeks at a time with only a few dream fragments. Often, months go by without a precognitive dream, and then there is that odd sense of discovery – always fresh – of an event foreseen. Then the excitement hits again – of spying out the dreaming self and charting the strange environment in which it has its experience. Once more, I’m up at all hours, scribbling down my latest dream notes, checking them eagerly against daily happenings.
In such dreams, the physical future event is often perceived opaquely, distorted in at least some aspects, just as dream events are when seen from the viewpoint of waking life.
For those of you who want to conduct your own experiments, remember: A precognitive dream is one in which you receive future information that you could receive in no normal manner. The dream should be recorded and dated. Write everything down, no matter how trivial. If you remember only dreaming about person or name, record that. When you awaken, do not make intellectual judgements concerning the relative importance of a dream or decide it is not pertinent enough to record. We often foresee very trivial events that seems to have no particular meaning to us. But as you’ll see, association can be at work, relating such experience in an intuitive rather than logical manner.
If possible, read your dream records at night, checking them against the day’s happenings. Once a week, check the whole series. Remember that symbolism is important. Often, you must learn your own way of handling dream symbolism to make sense of dream. Not every dream is precognitive, nor is there any reason to waste much time with interpretations that seem too nebulous. Some procognitive information will be in symbolic form. However, if you do not know the meaning of a symbol, give yourself the suggestion that it will be made clear to you intuitively – thus trust your answer.
You will discover definite correlations that exist between the incidence of precognitive dreams and data having to do with the temperature and weather. I don’t believe it is possible for you to carry your dream experiments far enough to discover certain other factors that exist between various layers of the subconscious and falling temperature rates in the body; therefore, I mention it here.
It would be necessary to take your temperature many times during the might and to correlate the findings with the levels of the subconscious as they showed themselves within the dream series. It should ne noted, hwoever, that with the exception of several other circumstances, these various subconscious levels fall within definite temperature ranges. To some extent, this can be ascertained through hypnosis. However, suggestion to the effect that the subject’s temperature rise or fall would tend to obscure the effect.
This correlation, is observable only when the personality is in an inactive state. suggestions of motion or excitement would change and affect the temperature reading, so that this characteristic temperature range would go unnoticed. Illness can also obscure the effect.
Sometimes precognitive information will appear to be wrong. In some cases, this is because a different probable event has been chosen by the self for physical materialization. I have access to the field of probabilities, and, egotistically at least. To me, past, present and future merge into one.
On the other hand, as I have told you, our past itself continually changes. It does not appear to change to some, for you change with it. The question of precognition, however, is not at issue with information concerning the past. Our future changes as the past does. Since precognition deals with future events, it is here that the issue (of changing time) shows itself.
In such cases, it is necessary that the correct channel of probable events be perceived; ‘correct’ meaning the channel which will ultimately be chaosen in our terms. The choice is dependent upon our choices in both past and present. These choices, however, are based upon our changing perceptions of past and present. Some have a greater scope of perception than us, and can predict what may happen with better facility. But this is still dependent upon prediction of a choice we will make.
Predictions, per se, do not contradict the theory of free will, though free will is dependent upon much more than the freedom of the ego alone. If the ego were allowed to make all the choices, with no veto power from other layers of the self we would all be in a sad position, indeed.
The field of probabilities is quite as real as our physical universe. The experience encountered there by other portions of the self are used by the whole self. The knowledge gained there is invaluable, not only in terms of overall experience, but as a means of training the ego and subconscious to choose between various activities.
All of this data is instantly available; only the ego is unaware of this field of reality. It would be snowed under. from this field of probabilities we choose patterns of thought which we will weave into the physical matter of our universe. The dreaming self sees both fields and operates in each. It should be realized that the probable self also has its own dreams.
This probable field seeds many other systems beside our own. It is composed of thought images, not physically materialized in our terms, but vivid storhouses of energy. Here is the material from which all pasts, presents and futures are made. It is far from a closed system. Not only does it feed the physical universe, but in it, many aspects of our own dreams become actual. Do you dream of an apple? the apple appears in the field of probability.
Association is not clearly understood, because psychologists, at present, believe that it works only in connection with past events. They also underestimate dream events, for many associations are result of events that happen in the dream state, where the mind continues its associative processes.
Any given personal association may originate from a dream event, as well as from a past waking one. Psychologists, generally speaking, have not yet accepted the theories of our own physicists, and they continue to consider time as a series of moments. The inverted time system recognizes the actual nature of time. There is room in it for a rather complete explanation of mind’s associative processes. The mind, as opposed to the brain, perceives in terms of a spacious present. Therefore, it draws its associations not only from our present and past but also from our future.
Take an example: David D. becomes ill whenever he smells a certain perfume. He does not know the reason. A psychologist might explain the reaction by presuming that some unpleasant event from the past was connected with his perception of the perfume. The explanation is a good possible one; however, it is often the only one that would be considered.
David may be reacting to an unpleasant event experienced in the dream state in which the upsetting situation was accompanied by the particular odor. (But) he could also be reacting to a future event of the same nature, for again, the mind does not break time into a series of moments. This is done by the physical brain.
The ego, as a rule, is not aware of this broader time experience, but the subconscious often is; and associative processes of the mind can and do react to the future. Therefore, it is possible for our David to become ill this year at the smell of a particular perfume because, say, subconsciously he knows that in 2024 his mother will be wearing it when she dies. The associative processes work both forward and backward.
I have told you that each individual creates physical matter, including objects and his/her own image. Coherence, illusion of permanency, placement in space, mass and color are all arrived at and agreed upon in the ways already explained. Telepathic communication is one of the methods by which such agreement is reached.
Long ago, primary and secondary constructions were explained. I emphasized that each individual perceives only his/her own physical constructions. Basically, there is no difference between telepathy and clairvoyance. The apparent difference is the result of an inadequate understanding of the nature of time. The important fact in both cases is that information is received that does not come through normal channels.
When an individual clairvoyance ‘sees’ an event, this is what happens First he/she forgets the concept of continual moments that usually hampers perception. His/her perception changes focus so that he/she is aware of an event that otherwise would seem to be in the future. Unconsciously, as always, he constructs material objects in line with the available data.
It goes without saying, then, that he/she helps to form the clairvoyantly perceived event, just as he/she helps construct any event in the present. The agreement as to physical dimensions is reached in the same manner as usual.
Sense data is not basically dependent upon the physical body. The mind can bypass the senses and receive data in a more direct manner, translating what it perceives automatically, as it translates ordinary sense data.
Under ordinary circumstances, data is received through the physical senses and then interpreted by the brain. When a clairvoyant event is perceived, the data is received by the mind, then given to the brain which interprets it. The physical body becomes aware of it, but the senses have actually been bypassed. The interpretation is made, however, in the same way as it usually is. Otherwise, the information would not register for the physical organism.
Actually. of course, much information perceived directly by the mind does bypass the physical organism completely. In some such cases, the subconscious does receive the data. In other cases. it is not recorded in any way within the physical system but is recorded at deeper layers of the self.
Even this data is available to the subconscious, however, if the need for it arises. Before it can be used by the physical organism, it must(first) be taken from the deeper layers to the brain for interpretation, as if it were new sense data.
In the dreamstate, you smell odors that aren’t in the physical room. The memory of these is imprinted and registered by the body as faithfully and realistically as any ‘real’ odor. The experience becomes a part of (buried)memory and may be recovered through hypnosis. Sometimes it may arise spontaneously.
There are many kinds of mass or shared dreams. For now, we will be concerned with the mass dreams that have an almost universal nature; that is, dreams that are shared at one time or another by the majority of living persons on our planet.
This particular kind of dream is concerned with working out certain problems concerning physical reality. The dreams usually are not precognitive, although they might appear to be, since many of the dream events will later occur. They are not precognitive, however, because in a larger measure they bring about or cause the later events.
They occur, comparatively speaking, just above that layer which Jung refers to as the collective unconscious. If you could tune into these dreams, you would have a good idea of the main events of the future because you would see them being born. They are concerned with significant events, that affect many countries. They represent deep intents, wishes and purposes.At times thay have immense power to bring about world-shaking changes of beneficial or destructive nature.
One individual is more important that you have ever dreamed, however, for the intensity and intent are important. One man/woman passionately willing good or evil can overbalance literally a hundred men/women. And in the dream state, also, leaders can be and make themselves known. The people already know them in mass dreams before they are recognized in physical reality.
Great as these things are, there is a totality of experience and sensation that includes them all, a vortex that contains and transform these infinite parts. I know that of which I speak. Yet, each minute event immeasurably increases not only itself but all other events, bringing into birth by its own actualization an infinitude of novus actions and events, an unfolding or multi-dimensionalizing of itself, an initiation into dimensionalization. For all versions and possibilities of each event must be actualized in the limitless multiplication of creativity.
And warping outward from each act are a million openings, roads traveled and experienced by the soul, naturally and spontaneously following its attributes.
Any one moment in physical time then is a warp, opening into these other dimensions of actuality, and any one moment can be used as a passageway or bridge. The act of crossing will be reflected in a million other worlds, but these reflections will be themselves alive and the act of perceiving itself will create still another vortex of actualization.
Attention can be shifted from any physical moment to any probable moment by a sideways parallel imaginative thrust – a sideling off of…
Each probable event os changed by each other probable event. There is constant simultaneous interaction. These ‘separate’ probable systems do not operate isolated from each other, then, but are intimately connected. All systems are open. The physical moment is transparent, though we give it a time-solidity. We see it as opaque.
Attention can be shifted from any physical moment to any probable moment by a sideways parallel imaginative thrust, a aideling off of focus, if the mind can get over its fear of dying to itself.
In what other worlds, for example, do I sit writing these Blogs?
Slide imaginatively into a world where you do not perform the net small action you will perform in this world. Cough, smile, sneeze – in some other actuality your actions are non-actions and your non-acts are realized.
Greet the now-realization of all of your dreams, for they also participate in the probable system. As your dreams bleed into your normal conscious life, so do they bleed into other probabilities. A dream act is actualized by a waking you, as a waking you is actualized by a dreaming self.
The soul is too great to know itself, yet each individual portion of the soul seeks this knowledge and in the seeking creates new possibilities of development, new dimensions of actuality. The individual self at any given moment can connect with its soul. There is initially a sidereal movement of consciousness, a dropping away sensation.
We attempt to save the shadows of ourselves, and we create light in even the darkest recesses of our own hidden fragments. To the extent and in those terms, we are our own redeemers.
Communications do not just operate in a vertical, ascending or descending fashion, but horizontal, in those terms.
Because we are born physically into our system, we take it for granted without thinking of it that we are born in the same manner into other systems. This may or may not apply, but it is definitely not applicable to the system of probabilities as a whole.
Now, in life of each personality there are, of course, moments of deep crisis and decision, where a personality decides upon one if various possible choices. These moments are not necessarily conscious at all, and the choices are not necessarily conscious, though often they rise to consciousness. But by then, the inner work and decision has been done.
The next line of our development, however,. We clear away debris. We give ourselves psychic breathing space so that our creative abilities can rise.
It’s one thing to accept the idea of probable systems and probable selves as an exciting intellectual concept, and quite another to accept the practical considerations involved if you think of probabilities as plain facts of existence.
We mentioned that the dreaming self has its own memories. It has memory of all dream experience. To you, this might mean that it has memory of its past, and, indeed, to you, memory itself is dependent upon a past or the term seems meaningless. To the dreaming self, however, past, present and future do not exist. How can it be said to have memory?
All experience is basically simultaneous, as I told you. The dreaming self is aware of its experience in its entirety. You obviously, are not. You are hardly familiar with your dream experience and barely aware of its significance.
The dreaming self is to some considerable degree aware of the probable self. There is give-and-take between the two, for much data is received by the dreaming self from the probable self – the self that experiences what the ego would call probable events.
The data is often wound by the dream self into a dream drama which informs the subconscious of dangers or of probable success of any given event which is being considered by the subconscious for physical actuality.
This probable self has operated in each reincarnation, in each materialization of the personality, and has at its command literally millions of the probable situations and conditions upon which to make value judgments. Of itself, however, it does not make the decision as to whether or not a particular event will be made physical. It merely passes on the information that it has received through experience.
This information is sifted often through the dreaming self to the subconscious which has intimate knowledge of the ego with which it is closely connected. The subconscious makes its own judgments and passes these on with the data. Then the ego makes its decision. In some cases, the ego refuses to make the decision, and it is done by the subconscious. On occasion, when an unwise decision is made by the ego, the subconscious will change it.
The probable self can be reached through hypnosis but only with excellent subjects and operators. Often it will not be recognized, however, for there will be no evidence of its experience in physical reality to back up its statements. Its data will agree when considered within its own framework. Reaching it in this manner would be highly difficult in any case. To my knowledge, it has not as yet been reached through hypnosis. It has been glimpsed but not recognized as a separate part of the self – in dream recordings and analytic sessions.
Again, these portions of the self exist in each reincarnation. In the materialization of personality through various reincarnations only the ego and layers of personal subconscious adapt new characteristics. Other portions retain their experience, identity, and knowledge. The ego, in fact, receives much of its stability because of this retention. Were it not for experiences in other lives on the part of deeper layers of the self, the ego would find it almost impossible to relate to other individuals, and the cohesive nature of scoiety would not exist.
If you would have some idea of what the probable universe is like, then examine your own dreams, looking for those events which do not have any strong resemblance to the physical events of waking existence. Look for dream individuals with whom you are not acquainted in normally conscious life. Look for landscapes that appear bizarre or alien, for all of these exist somewhere. You have perceived them. They do not exist in the space that you know but neither are they non-existent, mere imaginative toys of the dreaming mind, without substance.
You may not be able to make sense from what appears to be a chaotic jungle of disconnected images and actions. The main reason for your confusion is the inability of an egotistical identity to perceive order that is not based upon continuity of moments. The order within the probable system is based upon something that could be compared to subjective associations or intuitive flashes of insight – experiences that can combine ingredients that could appear to the ego as disconnected. Here they are combined into whole integrated patterns of action.
The probable system does not achieve its order through subjective association, but the term is the nearest I can use to approximate the basic casues for this order. Ther events within it are, indeed, objective and concrete within their own field of reality, for example. Our own system is real and concrete only within its own field, remember.
In sleep not only do we withdraw from the physical field of actuality but we also enter other systems.
Again, as I have stated in past Blogs, these beings, though certainly quite ” primitive” in appearance, in that they were covered in long hair, wore no clothing, and expressed themselves in a series of grunts and “animal” noises, were of fairly high intelligence. The eyes, you see, expressed this capacity for knowledge, and the expression of intelligence. We could see this potential in the eyes of these beings.
Now they were tool-makers of high sophistication. Though they were not to reach the great heights achieved by other civilizations, they were quite adept at creating from the natural environment in which they found themselves. Comfortable structures in which to live, raise their families, and so on.
IT IS SAID that once there was a female eagle and that in her wanderings she came upon a certain old woman who had a sore on her leg. And the eagle said, “Gracious me! That is an unusual kind of sore. With a sore like that, however hard you try, are you able to walk?”
The old woman said, “Oh, just a very little.”
The eagle said, “You people! Nowadays, if I were to do something good for you today, tomorrow you would do something bad to thank me.”
The old woman said, “Oh! I would not do that.”
The eagle said, “If you will not behave like that, I will help you.” After a pause the eagle commanded, “Shut your eyes, and then open them.”
And the old woman shut her eyes and opened them.
The eagle then said, “look at your sore.”
And the old woman stooped to look – not a trace of it remained. Then the eagle made her close her eyes again; she opened them, and she saw that all the forest had been cleared.
The eagle said, “Close your eyes again.”
The old woman closed them and then opened them, and she saw that houses were firmly built there. And the eagle made her close her eyes again. She opened them to see a town of large size. There it was – huge!
The eagle said, “Old woman, it’s yours.”
The old woman said, “Thanks, thanks! I give you thanks! What must I give to thank you?”
The eagle said, “I do not want even a trifling thing. As for me, all that I desire is that silk-cotton tree that stands there.”
The old woman said, “This thing you ask for – it is nothing – take it.”
Then the eagle flew off, alighted on the tree, and wove a nest and laid two eggs which she deposited in it. And she hatched the two eggs, and went off to seek for something for her children to eat.
Then the old woman’s grandchild, who lived with her, began to whimper: “Ehe! Ehe!”
The old woman said, “What’s the matter?”
The child said, “Let me chew an eagle’s child.”
The old woman said, “Where am I to get an eagle’s child?”
The small grandchild commenced again – “whimper! whimper!”
The old woman said, “What’s the matter?”
The child said, “Let me chew an eagle’s child, for if I non’t have one to chew I shall die.”
The old woman said, “Ah! Must this my grandchild die for want of an eagle’s child to chew? Go, take axes, and strike the silk-cotton tree and bring me the eagle’s children.”
The village folk went there, the axes sounded pinpin! pinpin! pinpin! It was just when the tree was going down, that the elder of the eagle’s children jumped up and stood on the edge of the nest and raised a cry. It called the mother:
“Sango, the bird e!
Sango, the bird, the eagle’s child!
Snago, the bird e!
Sango, if she went to eat, come back!
Sango, the bird e!
Sango,o! o!”
The mother heard that her child was crying; she rose up and the sound of her wings flapping was fa! She came, she said “Sanguri!” And the silk-cotton tree, which was nearly severed, came together again, and all the people who had been striking it were swallowed up. The eagle took the food which she had brought and gave it to her children. Then she bade them good-bye and said, “I am going. If the old woman comes to take you away, let her take you.”
And the old woman said, “Go and strike down the tree and bring the creatures for my grandchild to chew.”
And they went there a second time. Pinpin! pinpin! pinpin! It was just as the tree was to go to the ground that the eagle’s child came out and stood on the edge of the nest, and called its mother:
“Sango, the bird e!
Sango, the bird, the eagle’s child!
Sango, the bird e!
Sango, if she went to eat, come back!
Sango, the bird e!
Sango, o! o!”
It called its mother, and called, and called, and called – there was no answer – and now the tree spoke as it hit the ground. “Brim!” it said.
They took away the eagle’s children. They gave one to the old woman, but the one that remained flew away and alighted on a wawa-wawa tree. The first one the old woman roasted and gave to her grandchild, who added it to the roasted plantain she was eating
Not long afterward, the eagle came. When she reached the tree which they had felled, she saw one of her children sitting there. She asked it what had happened, and it told her the news. The eagle set off for the old woman’s village. When she arrived there, the old woman’s grandchild was eating one of her children. She said, Old woman, I congratulate you.” Then she came out from the old woman’s house and commenced her magic at the outskirts of the town. She said “Sanguri!” and every person disappeared; and again she said “Sanguri!” – the village once again became the forest. “Sanguri!” and the old woman’s sore came back. And the eagle said, “Old woman, you have seen.” That is why the elders say, “If some does good to you, thank him by doing good to him and do not return evil to thank him.”
THERE WAS ONCE a certain woman, and she bore three children. The younger among them was suffering from yaws.
The eldest of the brothers asked their mother to let them have gold dust that they might go trading. The youngest of them said he would like to go too, but they decared that he should not go with them. The mother, however, said that they and he must go together. Then their mother gave the elder sons gold dust to the value of five pounds and the youngest son gold dust to the value of two pounds. When things became visible, they set out.
The elder brothers went in front and left the child to follow behind. The child came along slowly. The elder ones met a certain man who was bringing fish. He said to them, “Buy!”
They answered, “Go on and you will meet a certain child. Make him buy. If he refuses to buy, take him and return with him to his mother.”
The fellow went on and, sure enough, he met the child. He said, “Some elders whom I met said you are to buy this fish.”
The child said, “Must I buy when those who are my elders did not buy?”
The fellow said, “They say if you will not buy I must beat you and must take you back and give you to your mother.”
The child said, “How much is it?”
The fellow said, An osua’s weight of gold dust.” The child paid for it and received it.
He went on and overtook the elder brothers at a certain village. They had cooked vegetables but they did not have any meat to go with them. The child said, “Here is a fish which I bought.” They put it in the soup-stew. When they had finished cooking, the elders gave him the head of the fish. When the child was about to break it, he saw red gold within, and he tied it up in the edge of his cloth.
The next day, when things became visible, the elders set out, and they went along, they met a man, and a rooster rested on the top of things which he was carrying. As soon as he came up with the elders, he said, “Buy this rooster.”
They replied, “Go on, and you will meet a child. Make him buy it and, if he will not buy it, beat him.”
Of a truth he met the child. He said, “Your elder kinsmen said that you are to buy this rooster, and that if you do not buy it, I am to beat you and take you and give you to your mother.”
The child replied, “Here, take what I have.” The fellow, on his part, handed him over the rooster.
After a while they reached a village. In the whole village there were no roosters to crow. The next morning, when things became visible, the rooster, which belonged to the child, crowed. The headman of the village said, “Child, bring the rooster and let me buy it.”
The child said, “The price is an osua-and-suru’s weight of gold dust.”
The headman paid the amount. The next day, when things became clear, they started off again.
As they were going along, the elders met a man carrying a cat. He said, “Buy this cat.”
The elders said, “Take it along, and you will meet a certain child. Make him buy it. Should he say he will not buy, beat him and take him back to his mother.”
The fellow passed on and met the child. He said, “Your elders say that you are to buy this cat and that if you do not buy it, I must beat you and take you back to your mother.”
The child said, “How much?”
The fellow said, “An osua-and-suru’s weight of gold dust.”
The child paid the price. He went on and came up with his elders at another village.
Now the mice used to nibble the feet of the headman there whenever he attempted to sleep. When the child with the cat arrived at this village, he went to the chief’s house and the cat caught the mice which were there. The headman said, “I will buy this cat from the person to whom it belongs.”
The child said, “It is mine.”
The headman said, “How much?”
The child said, “An osua-and-suru’s weight of gold dust.” the headman picked up the gold dust and put it in the child’s hand.
The next day, when things became visible, they again set out. The elders went ahead and on the way they met thieves who had stolen the corpse of a certain chief. The thieves said, “You must buy this corpse.”
The elders said, “Take it, and go on and you will meet a child. Give this corpse to him to buy. If he says he will not buy it, beat him, and take him and give him back to his mother.”
The thieves went on and they met the child. They said, “Your elders say that you are to buy this corpse.”
The child said, “Eh! What should I buy a corpse for? I could not carry it. Whatever i do with it, it will not be of any good use to me.”
The thieves said, “Your elders said that if you do not buy it, we must beat you and take you and give you back to your mother.”
The child said, “How much?”
They said, “An osua-and-suru’s weight of gold dust.”
The child paid the price, took the corpse, and laid it in the bush.
Then he set off and came to a certain village and went to a house to beg for food. The master of the house said, “There is none.”
The child said, “Grandfather, I implore you!”
The master of the house said, “There is none.’
The child said, “Grandfather, I implore you!”
The master of the house said, “Why does this child trouble me like this? Our chief is dead. We are fasting, and this is the eighth day, but, search as we may, we cannot find his corpse.”
Then an old woman sitting nearby said, “Give him some food.”
Thereupon a woman gave the child food and meat. When the child had finished eating, he said, “Master of the house, I have seen the chief’s body yesterday as I was coming, some thieves made me buy it for an osua-and-suru’s weight of gold dust.”
The woman ran off. Yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! was the sound of her running, and she told the village elders the news. They took the child and he went and showed them the body. Then they brought it and buried it properly. They said, “Now you will succeed the chieftaincy.” So the child became chief.
Now when his elder brothers heard about him, they came and claimed blood relationship with him. The child, however, said, “Clear out! I don’t know you! Be off!” And he made his slaves drive them away.
That is why we say, “If you are going anywhere, and if your younger brothers says he will go with you, take him along.”
THEY SAY that once upon a time Arlum Silla, the sky-god, cleared a very large plantation and planted okras, onions, beans, garden-eggs, peppers, and pumpkins. The weeds in the garden became thick and nettles grew up. The sky-god then made a proclamation by odawuro to the effect that his plantation was overgrown with weeds and that anyone who could weed it without scratching himself might come forward and take his daughter, Kuse, in marriage. The first one who went to try scratched himself where the nettles tickled, and they hooted at him. The next one who tried was also hooted at. All men went and tried and all failed.
Now Spider, said, “As for me, I am able to do it.” The sky-god’s plantation was situated on the side of the path, and the path was the one people used to take when going to the market every Friday. The spider, because he knew this fact, used only to go and clear the weeds every Friday. When he was hoeing, the people who passed by used to greet him, saying, “Hail to you at your work, Father Spider!”
Then he would answer, “Thank you, Aku.” They would continue, “A plantation which no one has been able to clear – do you mean to say you are weeding it?”
The spider would answer, “Ah, it’s all because of one girl that I am wearing myself out like this. Her single arm is like this.” And he would then slap and rub his arm where it was tackling him, and when he did so, he would get relief from the irritation. Then another person would pass there and hail him at his work, and he would again slap the place that was itching. For example, if it was his thigh, he would say, “That single girl! They say her thigh is like this,” and he would slap and rub his own thigh.
In this manner he finished clearing the plantation. Then he went off to tell the sky-god how he had finished the weeding of his farm. The sky-god asked the messenger, “Has he really finished?”
The messenger said, “Yes.”
The sky-god asked him, “Did he scratch himself?”
He said, “No, he did not scratch himself.”
Then the sky-god took Kuse and gave her to Spider in marriage.
One night Spider and his bride went to rest and the bride questioned him, saying, “However was it that you of all people were able to clear father’s plantation of weeds? A plantation like that – from which everyone who tried turned back! However were you able to clear it?”
Then the spider said, “Do you suppose that I am a fool? I used to hoe, and when anyone passed by and said to me, ‘Spider, are you clearing this farm which no one else has ever been able to clear?’ I would thereupon slap with my hand any place on my skin that was tickling me and scratch it, and declare to the person that your thigh, for example, was like the thigh of a buffalo, and that it was beautiful and polished. That is how it came about that I was able to weed the plantation.”
Thereupon Kuse, the ninth child, said, “then tomorrow I shall tell father that you scratched yourself after all.”
But the spider spoke to her, saying, “You must not mention it. This is a sleeping-mat confidence.”
Kuse, the ninth child, said, “I know nothing whatever about sleeping-mat confidences, and I shall tell father.” Kuse took her sleeping-mat away from beside Spider and went and lay down at the other end of the room.
Now Spider’s eyes grew red and sorrowful, and he went and took his sepirewa, and he struck the strings and sang:
“Kuse, the ninth child, this is not a matter
About which to quarrel.
Let us treat it as a sleeping-mat confidence.
‘No!” she says. She has a case against me,
But some one else has a case
which is already walking down the path.”
Then the spider went and lay down. After Spider had lain there for some time, he rose up again. He said, “Kuse.” Not a sound save the noise of the cicada chirping dinn! Spider said, “I’ve got you!”
He took a little gourd cup and slashed it full with water and poured it over Kuse’s sleeping-mat. Then Spider went and lay down. After he had lain there a while, he said, “Ko!” Kuse, whatever is this! You have wet the sleeping-mat, you shameless creature! Surely you are not at all nice. When things become visible, I shall tell everyone. It was true then – what they all siad – that when anyone went to your father’s plantation, he would say, ‘A girl who wets …. ! I am not going to clear a nettle plantation for such a person.’ “
Then Kuse said to him, “I implore you, desist, and let the matter drop.”
But spider said, “I will not leave it, for my case came first. You said you would tell your father. I said, ‘Desist’; but you said, ‘No.’ Because of that I will not drop the case.”
And Kuse, the ninth child, said, “Leave my case, and your case, too about which I spoke. I shall drop it, for if you do not leave mine, my eyes will die for shame.”
Then Spider said, “I have heard. Since you so desire, let it be a sleeping-mat confidence. So the matter ends there.”
That is how the elders came to say, “Sleeping-mat confidences are not to be repeated.”
THEY SAY that once upon a time a great famine came, and the Father Spider, and his wife Wan, and his children, Diakhu, Mandara (Thin-Shanks), Kau Kau (Belly-Like-to-Burst), and Tikonokono (Big-Big-Head), built a little settlement and lived in it. Every day the spider used to go and bring food – wild yams – and they boiled and ate them.
Now one day, father Spider went to the bush and he saw that a beautiful dish was standing there. He said, “This dish is beautiful.”
The dish said, “My name is not beautiful.”
The spider then asked, “What are you called?”
It replied, “I am called ‘Fill-Up-Some-and Eat.'”
The spider said, “Fill up some so that I may see.”
The dish filled up with palm-oil soup, and Spider ate it all.
When he had finished, he asked the dish, “What is your taboo?”
The dish replied, “I hate a gun wad and a little gourd cup.”
The spider took the dish home, and went and placed it on the ceiling. He went off to the bush and brought food, and Wan, when she had finished cooking, called Spider. He said, “Oh, yours is the real need. As for me, I am an old man. What should I have to do with food? You and these children are the ones in real need. If you are replete, then my ears will be spared the sounds of your lamentations.”
When they had finished eating, Spider passed behind the hut, and went and sat on the ceiling where the dish was. He said, “This dish is beautiful.”
It replied, “My name is not Beautiful.”
He said, “What is your name?”
He said, “I am called ‘Fill-Up-Some-and-Eat.'”
Spider said, “Fill up some for me to see.” And it filled up a plate full of ground-nut soup, and Spider ate. Every day when he arose it was thus.
Now Mandara noticed that his father did not grow thin in spite of the fact that they and he did not eat together, and so he kept watch on his father to see what the latter had got hold of. When his father went off to the bush, Mandara climbed up on top of the ceiling and saw the dish. He called his mother and brothers and they, too went on top. Mandara said, “This dish is beautiful.”
It said, “I am not called ‘Beautiful.'”
He said, “Then what are you called?”
It said, “My name is ‘Fill-Up-Some-and-Eat.’ “
He said, “Fill up a little that I may see.” And the dish filled up to the brim with palm-oil soup.
And now Diakhu asked the dish, “What do you taboo?”
The dish said, “I hate a gun wad and a small gourd cup.”
Diakhu said to Kau Kau, “Go and bring some for me.”
And he brought them, and Diakhu took the gun wad and touched the dish and also the little gourd cup and touched the dish with it. Then they all descended.
Father Spider mean time had come back from the bush with the wild yams. Wan finished cooking them. They called Spider.
He replied, “Perhaps you didn’t hear what I said – I said that when I come home with food, you may partake, for you are the ones in need.” Wan and her children ate.
Father Spider washed and then climbed up on the ceiling. He said, “This dish is beautiful.” Complete silence! “This dish is beautiful!” Complete silence! Father Spider, “Ah! It must be on account of this cloth not being a beautiful one; I shall go and bring the one with the pattern of the Oyo clan and put it on.” And he descended to go and fetch the Oyo-pattern cloth to wear. He put on his sandals and again climbed up on the ceiling. He said, “This dish is beautiful.” Complete silence! “This dish is beautiful.” Complete silence! He looked round the room and saw that a gun wad and a little gourd cup were there.
Spider said, “It’s not one thing, it’s not two things – it’s Diakhu.” Spider smashed the dish, and came down. He took off the Oyo-pattern cloth, laid it away, and went off to the bush. As he was going, he saw that a very beautiful thing called Mpere, the whip, was hanging there. He said, “Oh, wonderful! This thing is more beautiful than the last. This whip is beautiful.”
The whip said, “I am not called Beautiful.’ “
The spider said, “Then what are you called?”
It said, “I am called ‘Abiridiabrada,’ or ‘Swish-and-Raise-Welts.’ “
And spider said, “Swish a little for me to see.” And the whip fell upon him biridi, biridi, biridi! Father Spider cried, “Pui! pui!’
A certain bird sitting nearby said Spider Say ‘Adwobere, cool-and-easy-now.’ “
And Spider said, “Adwobere, cool-and-easy-now.”
And the whip stopped beating him. And Spider brought this whip home; and he went and placed it on the ceiling.
Wan finished cooking the food and said, “Spider, come and eat.”
He replied, “Since you are still here on earth, perhaps you have not a hole in your ears and don’t hear what I had said – I shall not eat.” Spider climbed up above and went and sat down quietly. Soon he came down again and he went and hid himself somewhere.
Then Diakhu climbed up aloft. He said, “Oh, that father of mine has brought something home again!” Diakhu called, “Mother, Mandara, Kau Kau, come here, for the thing father has brought this time excels the last one by far!” Then all of them climbed up on the ceiling. Diakhu said, “This thing is beautiful.”
It replied, “I am not called ‘Beautiful.’ “
He said, “What is your name?”
It said, “I am called ‘Swish-and-Raise-Welts.’ “
He said, “Swish a little for me to see.” And the whip descended upon them and flogged them severely.
Spider stood aside and shouted, “Lay it on, lay it one! Especially on Diakhu, lay it on him!” Now when Spider has watched and seen that they were properly flogged, he said, “Adwobere, cool-and-easy-now.” Spider came and took the whip and cut it into pieces and scattered them about.
That is what made the whip come into the tribe. So it comes about that when you tell your child something and he will not listen to you, you whip him.
THERE WAS ONCE a hunter. After he got up in the morning he used to go to the bush to seek for game to kill so that he might get some to eat and some to sell.
Now one day he went to the bush and he heard Kokotee, the bush pig, call out to its kinsman, “Kokotee Asamoa!”
He replied, “Yes, brother, yes.” Kokotee again called, “The time for work on our farms has arrived. Let us go to the blacksmith’s forge that he may fashion the iron and put an edge on our cutting tools, so that, if we have to cut down any trees, we may be able to do so.”
When the bush pig called to his brothers, the hunter crouched down and hid, and he heard all the conversation. Now Kokotee’s brother asked, “And to what village shall we go to have the iron struck?”
Kokotee replied, “We shall go to the village called Across-the Stream.”
And his brother said, “what day?”
He replied, “Monday.”
The hunter heard all this arrangement and set off for home. When he came home, he told the headman of Across-the-Stream the news, namely, what he had heard when he had gone to the bush. And the hunter said to the headman of the village, “Let the children go and cut logs and bring them, and when, on Monday, the bush pigs change themselves into people and come, we shall take them and fasten them to the logs.”
The children went and cut the logs and brought them. The headman of the village went and told the village blacksmith to beat out iron staples for him. And the blacksmith asked the headman, “And all this quanity of iron staples which you say I must beat out – what are you going to do with them?”
And he told him the news – how a hunter had gone to the bush and come back to report that on Monday certain beasts would turn themselves into people in order to come to his forge to have tools forged. The blacksmith ran off to beat the iron staples quickly. As soon as chief had finished collecting the logs and staples, he caused the town crier to beat the iron gong, saying, “On Monday, be it woman , or be it man, no one must go anywhere.”
Monday arrived, and in the morning an old woman said to the hunter, “Go and grind peppers, salt, and onions at the place where the beasts will peel off their skins and lay them down. Do you also, when you go there, take the peppers and rub them on. When the beasts come there, and we catch them, should some escape and go to take their skins again and put them on, then the peppers will hurt them, and they will throw the skins off and will become people again.”
The hunter went off to the bush and he hid there. And he heard the bush pigs calling, “Kokotess Asamoa, Monday has arrived, let us go.” So they all came. They peeled off their skins and put them down. Now one of the pigs, who was a doctor of herbs, was among them and let them go away. He went and took all the skins and rubbed on them the peppers which they had mashed, and then took the skins and pout them in the stream, letting the water take them away. The skin of the medicine-man, however, which had been out aside from the rest, the hunter did not see.
The hunter went home, and the chief called the people gathered round the blacksmith’s forge and made them come to his house. When these people came to the chief’s house, they inquired of the chief, “Why have you called us?”
The chief said, “You were once my men, and you ran away to settle elsewhere. Today you have come back – that is the reason I say you must come, for I will not permit you to go away any more.”
The beasts said to the chief, “What you have said we have heard. But we know that the Creator’s hunter came and told you all about us. However, that does not matter. We and you will live together, although we know that what you say is false. Nevertheless that, also, does not matter; we thank that hunter. So we and you will live together. But there is one thing which we taboo, namely, that you disclose our origin, of that any of your subjects should disclose our origin. Should that happen, we shall break up this, your tribe, and depart.”
Now at the time the chief went to call them, the medicine-man and some others ran away. And the medicine-man went to take his skin and he escaped; but the rest turned back. That was because they could not find their skins. The chief agreed to the conditions laid down by the beasts, and the human beings and the beasts lived happily together.
After a while the men of the village married some of the beasts’ women-folk and they bore children. Now one day one of the beasts and one of the villagers were fighting with their fists. Thereupon the villager said to the beast, “Take yourself off from there – an animal like you who belongs to the bush-pig tribe!” No sooner had he said this than the eyes of all the beasts became red, and they went to the chief’s house to tell him, saying, “The possibility about which we told you has now actually come about, so what are you going to do?”
The chief made them go and call the people who had caused the dispute. The chief looked closely into the matter and gave judgement that the beasts should drop the charge because, he said, it was a long time since they had come and this, moreover, was the first occasion on which anyone had ever said anything to them about their origin.
But the beasts said, “We do not agree.”
And the chief said, “You will not listen, and you think that what this man said is a lie. Are you not bush pigs?
And the beasts said, “Oh! We have heard.”
Thereupon the beasts and the Across-the-Stream people fought. The beasts destroyed the village until there remained only about ten people. These begged for mercy and told the beasts that they had right on their side. The beasts listened, and then informed the people, saying, “A case already stated is not difficult to understand. Now if you and we are to live together, we taboo all allusion to our origin. If you ever think of or mention it again, then we will ask you to point out to us the very thicket whence we came to this place, that we may return thither.”
And the people said, “We will never so such a thing again. What we have done has caused our tribe to be ruined; we shall never do so again.”
So they caused a public proclamation to be made by beating the odawuro gong to the effect that now one should ever tell of another person’s origin, lest the disclosure should cause the town to be ruined.
THERE WAS ONCE a certain man called Hate-to-Be-Contradicted, and because of that, he built a small settlement all by himself and went to live in it. And the creature called the duiker went to visit him, and he walked with him and sat down at the foot of a palm tree. Then some of the palm nuts fell down. The duiker said, “Father Hate-to-Be-Contradicted, your palm nuts are ripe.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “That is the nature of the palm nut. When they are ripe, three bunches ripen at once. When they are ripe, I cut them down; and when I boil them to extract the oil, they make three water-pots full of oil. Then I take the oil to Bantu to buy an Bantu old woman. The Bantu old woman comes and gives birth to my grandmother who bears my mother who, in turn, bears me. When Mother bears me, I am already standing there.”
The duiker said, “As for that, you lie.”
And Hate-to-Be-Contradicted took a stick and hit the duiker on the head, and killed it.
Next the little antelope came along. Hate-to-Be-contradicted went off with it and sat under the palm tree, and the same thing happened. And thus it was with all the animals. Finally, the spider, went and fetched his cloth and his bag, slung the bag across his shoulders, and went off to visit Hate-to-Be-Contradicted’s kraal. He greeted him: “Father, good morning.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted replied, “Y’aku, and where are you going?”
He replied, “I am coming to visit you.”
And he took his stool and placed it under the palm tree.
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “Cook food for the spider to eat.”
And while it was cooking, Spider and Hate-to-Be-Contradicted sat under the palm tree. Some of the palm nuts fell down, and Spider took them and placed them in a bag. This he continued to do until his bag was full. The food was brought, and Spider Ate. When he had finished eating, some of the ripe palm nuts again fell down, and Spider said, “Father Hate-to-Be-Contradicted, your palm nuts are ripe.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “It’s their nature to ripen like that; when they are ripe. When they are ripe I cut them down, and when I boil them to extract the oil, they make three water-pots full of oil and I take the oil to Ashanti to buy an Ashanti old woman.. The Ashanti old woman comes and gives birth to my grandmother who beats my mother so that she in turn beat me. When Mother beats me. I am already standing there.”
The Spider said, “You do not lie. What you say is true. As for me, I have some okras standing in my farm. When they are ripe, I join seventy-seven long hooked poles in order to reach them to poles them down, but even then I cannot reach them. So I lie on my back, and am able to use my penis to pluck them.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “Oh, I understand. Tomorrow I shall come and look.”
The Spider said, “Surely.”
While the spider was going home, he chewed the palm nuts which he had gathered and spat them out on the path. The next morning, when things began to be visible, Hate-to-Be-contradicted set out to go to the spider’s village. Now when the spider had arrived home the day before, he had gone and said to his children, “A certain man will come here who hates to be contradicted, and when he arrives and inquires for me, you must tell him that yesterday I had to take it to a blacksmith to be repaired and, as the blacksmith could not finish it at the time, I have now gone to have the work finished.”
Not long afterward Hate-to-Be-Contradicted came along. He said, “Where has your father gone?”
They replied, “Alas, Father went somewhere yesterday, and his penis got broken in seven different places. So he took it to a blacksmith, but he could not finish the job at the time, and Father has gone to have it completed. You, father, did you not see the blood on the path.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “Yes, I saw it.” He then asked, “And where is your mother?”
The spider’s child replied, “Mother, too – yesterday she went to the stream, and her water-pot would have fallen and broken had she not saved it from doing so by just catching at it in time. But she didn’t quite finish saving it from falling and has returned today to do so.” Hate-to-Be-contradicted did not say anything.
Now Spider arrived. He said, “Cook some food that Hate-to-Be-Contradicted may eat.” As the children were cooking the food, they used only one single little perch but an immense quantity of peppers. They made the soup-stew very hot. When they had finished, they set it down before Hate-to-Be-Contradicted. Hate-to-Be-Contradicted ate. Now the peppers pained him; he wanted to die. He said to one of Spider’s sons, Kanfari, where is that water?”
Kanfari said, “Ah, the water which we have here in our water-pot is of three different kinds. That belonging to Father comes first, that of mother’s co-wife is in the middle, and that belonging to my mother is at the bottom of the pot. I must draw for you only the water belonging to my own mother and if i do not take great care when drawing it, it will cause a tribal dispute.”
Hate-to-Be-Contradicted said, “You little brat, you lie.”
Straightway Spider said, “Beat him so that he dies.”
Hate-to-be-Contradicted said, “Why should they beat me so that I may die?”
The spider said, “You say you hate to be contradicted, and yet you have contradicted some one. That is why I say they must beat you so that you may die.’
So they beat Hate-to-be-contradicted until he died. The Spider cut up his flesh in little pieces and scattered them all about.
That is why many persons who hate to be contradicted are to be found in the tribe today.
I believe that normal dreams are the outside shell of deeper inside experience. The interior reality is clothed in dream images as, when we are awake, it is clothed in physical ones. Dream objects and physical objects alike are symbols by which we perceive – and direct – an inner reality that we do not seem able to experience directly. In certain states of consciousness, particularly in projections from the dream state, we achieve a peculiar poise of alertness. This lets us briefly examine the nature of our consciousness by allowing us to view its products – the events and experiences that it creates when released from usual physical focus.
Consciousness forms its own reality, physical and otherwise. I think there is a “mass” dream experience, however, as there is a collectively perceived physical life and definite interior conditions within which dream life happens. Only inner experimentation will let us discover this interior landscape. Perhaps one day we will move freely within it, alert, conscious and far wiser than we are now.
It is a dimension native to consciousness, I believe, at whatever stage of being, physical or nonphysical. We have our primary existence in it after death and spend a good deal or physical time wandering through it, unknowingly, in sleep. Clues as to our creativity and the nature of our existence can be found there and from it emerges the organizational qualities of normal consciousness as we know it.
I do not believe that there are any more dangers facing us in the interior universe than there are in the physical one. We should explore each world with common sense and courage. The interior universe is the source of the exterior one, however, and traveling through it we will encounter our own hopes, fears and beliefs in their ever-changing form.
THERE WAS ONCE UPON A TIME an old man who lived in a kraal with his neighbors. And this old man had a wife and a small child, and he possessed a very fine ox.
One day he said to himself, “How shall I slaughter my ox?” And he said aloud to his wife, “My child! I will call the men and tell them that I am going to move. We can then slaughter our ox all by ourselves.”
His wife agreed and, in the evening, the old man blew his horn as a signal to his friends that he had something to tell them. His neighbors came together, and he told them that he wished to move, as the air did not agree with him. The others consented, and in the morning he saddled his donkeys, separated his cattle from the rest, and started off, accompanied by his wife, who was carrying the child.
When they had gone some distance, they halted and erected their kraal, after which they rested.
At dawn on the second day the old man called his wife and asked her why they had not yet slaughtered their ox. The woman replied, “My husband! How shall we manage to slaughter the ox? There are two things to be considered – the first is that we have no herdsman and the second that I am carrying the baby.”
The old man then said, “Oh, I know what we will do. I will stab the ox in the neck, then I will leave you to skin it, and I will carry the child to the grazing ground. But when you have skinned the animal, roast some meat so that it will be ready on my return.”
The old man then killed the ox, after which he picked up his bow and grass, and went to drive back the cattle, for they had wandered far. But when he returned to the spot where he had left the child, he was unable to find it, so he decided to set fire to the grass. “When the fire reaches the child, it will cry, ” he thought, “And I will run to the place and pick it up before it is burned.”
He made a fired with his fire-sticks, and the fire travelled to where the child was . He ran to the spot, but when he reached it, he found that the child was dead.
The old man had left his wife in the morning skinning the ox. And while she was skinning it – she had just reached the dewlap – the knife slipped, and she stabbed herself in the eye. She went and lay down, and the birds came and finished the meat.
After the child was burned, the old man drove the cattle to the kraal, and when they were opposite to the gate, he heard his wife weeping, and saying, “Oh my eye!’ He therefore asked her who had told her the news.
“What news?” she inquired.
“The child has been burned,” he replied.
The woman exclaimed, “Oh, my child!”
The old man then asked where his meat was, and his wife informed him that the birds had eaten it, whereupon he cried out, “Oh, my meat!”
They both wept, the old man crying, “Oh my meat!” and the woman, “Oh, my child! Oh my eye!”
Look well at these people. It was for their greed that they were punished. They lost their child and their ox, the woman lost her eye, and they had to return in shame to their former home.
There were two brothers, the Intelligent Man and the Fool, and it was their habit to go out shooting to keep their parents supplied with food. Thus, one day, they went together into the mangroves swamp, just as the tide was going down, to watch for the fish as they nibbled at the roots of the trees. Fool saw a fish, fired at it, and killed it. Intelligent Man fired also, but at nothing, and then ran up to Fool and said, “Fool, have you killed anything?”
“Yes, Intelligent Man, I am a fool, but I killed a fish.”
“Indeed, you are a fool,” answered Intelligent Man, “for when I hit the fish that went your way, so that the fish you think you killed is mine. Here give it to me.”
The fool gave Intelligent Man the fish. Then they went to their town, and Intelligent Man, addressing his father, said, “Father, here is a fish that your son shot, but Fool got nothing.”
The mother prepared and cooked the fish, and the father and Intelligent Man ate it, giving none to Fool.
Then they went again; and Fool fired, and with his first shot killed a big fish.
“Did you hear me fire?” said the Intelligent Man.
“No,” answered Fool.
“No?” returned Intelligent Man. “See, then, the fish I killed.”
“All right,” said Fool, “Take the fish.”
When they reached home they gave the fish to their mother and , after she had cooked it, Smart Man and this father ate it, but gave none to Fool. As they were enjoying the fish, a bone stuck in the father’s throat. Then Intelligent Man called to Fool and bade him go for a doctor.
“No,” said Fool, “I cannot. I felt that something would happen.” And he sang:
“Every day you eat my fish,
You call me, Fool,
And would let me starve.”
“How can you sing,” said Intelligent Man, “when you see that our father is suffering?”
But Fool went on singing:
“You eat and eat unto repletion;
A bone sticks in your throat;
And now your life is near completion,
The bone is still within your throat.
“So you, Intelligent brother, killed the fish,
And gave the fool to eat?
Nay! but now he’s dead perhaps you wish
You’d given the fool to eat.”
While Fool was still singing, the father died. Then the neighbors came and joined the family circle, and asked Fool how it was that he could go on singing now that his father was dead.
And Fool answered them saying, “Our father made us both, one intelligent man, the other a fool. The Fool killed the food, and they ate it, giving none to the Fool. They must not blame him, therefore, if he sings while they suffer. He suffered hunger while they had plenty.”
And when the people had considered the matter, they gave judgment in favor of the Fool, and departed.
The father hied, and so had been justly punished for not having given food to the Fool.
He who eats fish with much oil must suffer from indigestion.
You will sometimes automatically translate this reality into physical terms. Such images will be hallucinatory, but it may take awhile for you to distinguish their true nature. It must be understood, however, that all physical objects are hallucinatory. They may be called mass hallucinations.
There is constant translation of inner reality into objects in the waking state and a constant translation of ideas into pseudo-objects in the dream state. Within a certain range of dream reality, ideas and thoughts can be translated into pseudo-objects and transported. This is what happens when you adopt a pseudo-form in projection, though I am simplifying this considerably.
When you travel beyond a certain range of intensities, even pseudo-objects must vanish. They exist in a cluster about, and connected to, our own system. The lack of these, obviously, means that you have gone beyond your own camouflage system. If it were possible, you would then travel through a range of intensities in which no camouflage existed. Then you would encounter the pseudo-camouflage of the next sytem. This would or would not be physical matter, according to the system. You would then encounter the heart of the camouflage area. The completely uncamouflaged areas at the outer edges of the various systems should remind you of the undifferentiated areas between various life cycles in the subconscious. This is no coincidence.
As a rule, you see, there is little communication within the uncamouflaged areas. They act as boundaries, even while they represent the basic stuff of which all camouflage is composed. (Without the camouflage, you would perceive nothing with the physical senses.)
The sentence is really meaningless, however, because the physical senses are themselves camouflage. There would be nothing to translate. It is only the inner senses that will allow you to perceive under these circumstances. Theoretically, if you can bridge the gap between various reincarnations, then you can bridge the gap between our system and another.
Once more: The undifferentiated layers are composed of the vitality that forms the camouflage of all systems. Such an area is not really a thing in itself, but a portion of vitality that contains no camouflage, and is therefore unrecognizable to those within any given system. We are in touch with infinity in such areas, since it is only camouflage that gives us the conception of time.
Now, during some projections, you may be aware of nothing as far as surroundings are concerned. There will only be the mobility of your own consciousness. If this occurs, you will be traveling through such an uncamouflaged area. You could then expect to encounter next a more differentiated environment, that seems to become clearer as you progress toward the heart of another system.
The completely uncamouflaged layer would be rather bewildering. You might automatically be tempted to project images into it. They would not take, so to speak, but would appear and disappear with great rapidity. This is a silent area. Thoughts would not be perceived here, as a rule, for the symbols for them would not be understood.
If a certain intensity is reached, however – a peak of intensity – then you could perceive the spacious present as it exists within your native system. You could, from this peak, look into other systems, but you would not understand what you perceived, not having the proper root assumptions. I have used the idea of neighboring systems for simplicity’s sake, as if they were laid out end to end. Obviously, such is not the case. The systems (of reality) are more like the various segments of a tangerine, with the uncamouflaged boundary areas like the white membrane between the tangerine sections.
The tangerine, then, would be compared to a group of many systems, yet it would represent in itself but one portion of an unperceived whole. The tangerine would be but one segment of a larger systems. You can see, then, why some projections would lead you in a far different direction from our linear sort of travel and why time as we know it would be meaningless.
Nor do such projections necessarily involve journeys through space as we know it. There are systems, vivid in intensity, that have no existence in physical reality at all. It is now thought, I believe, that time and space are basically one, but they are both a part of something else. They are merely the camouflage patterns by which we perceive reality. Space as we perceive it in the dream state comes much closer to the reality.
Projections within our own system will, of course, involve us with some kind of camouflage. If none is present, you will know you are out of the system. The dream universe is obviously closely connected with our own, since pseudo-objects are present. Even there, we are to some extent free from the space-time elements of our own system. Within the dream state, then, we are in the ‘outward’ areas of the physically oriented universe.
One point: There are other systems all about and within our own. The undifferentiated areas move out like spirals, through all reality. Little resistance is encountered within them. They represent inner roads that connect systems, as well as divide them. The traveler must leave his/her own camouflage paraphernalia behind him/her, however, or he will get nowhere.
It is possible, theoretically, to travel to any system in this manner and bypass others, you see. Such a traveler would not age physically. His/her body would be in a suspended state. Only a very few individuals have traveled in this manner. Most of the knowledge gained escapes the ego, and experiences cannot be translated by the physical brain.
However, it is possible to travel under such circumstances and some of the data would be retained by inner portions of the self. In a creative individual, some of this information might be symbolically expressed in a painting or other work of art.
Each brushstroke of a painting represents concentrated experience and compressed perceptions. In a good painting, these almost explode when perceived by the lively consciousness of another. The observer is washed over by intensities. The excellent work of art recreates for the observer inner experience of his/her own, also, of which he/she has never been aware. As you know, paintings have motion, yet the painting itself does not move. This idea should help you understand experience in terms of intensities and projections of the movement of consciousness without necessarily motion through space.
True motion has nothing to do with space. The only real motion is that if the traveling consciousness.
A MAN CALLED THIEP, who was native of Sango, a town in the Oyo country, admired a girl called Lith very much. She lived in Oyo and he wished to marry her, as she was the finest girl in her kraal.
It was the custom in those days for the parents to demand such a large amount as dowry for their daughters that if, after they were married, they failed to get on with their husbands and could not redeem themselves, they were sold as slaves.
Thiep paid a very large sum as a dowry for Lith and she was put in the fatting-house until the proper time arrived for her to marry. Thiep told the parents that when their daughter was ready they must send her over to him. This they promised to do.
Lith’s father was a rich man. After seven years had elapsed and Lith came out of the fatting-house to go to her husband, her father saw a very fine girl, also just out of the fatting-house, whose parents wished to sell her as a slave. He therefore bought her and gave her to his daughter as her hands-maiden.
The next day Lith’s little sister, being very anxious to go with her, obtained the consent of her mother, and they started off together, the slave girl carrying a large bundle containing clothes and presents from Lith’s father. Thiep’s house was a long day’s march from where they lived. When they arrived just outside the town, they came to a spring where people used to get their drinking water. No one was allowed to bathe there. Lith, however, knew nothing of this. The women took off their clothes to wash close to the spring, where there was a deep hole which led to the water juju’s house. The slave girl knew of this juju and thought that, if she could get her mistress to bathe there, her mistress would be taken by the juju and she would then be able to take her place and marry Thiep. So they went down to bathe and, when they were close to the water, the slave girl pushed her mistress in, and Lith at once disappeared.
The little sister began to cry, but the slave girl said, “If you cry any more I shall kill you at once and throw your body into the hole after your sister.” She told the child that she must never mention what had happened to anyone, particularly not to Thiep, as she was going to take her sister’s place and marry him, and that if she ever told anyone what she had seen, she would be killed at once. She then made the little girl carry her load to Thiep’s house.
When they arrived, Thiep was very disappointed at the slave girl’s appearance, as she was not nearly as pretty and fine as he had expected her to be; but as he had not seen Lith for seven years, he had no suspicion that the girl was not really Lith for whom he had paid such a large dowry. He then called his society together to play and feast and, when they arrived, they were much astonished and said, “Is this the fine woman for whom you paid so great a dowry and whom you told us so much about ?” And Thiep could not answer them.
The slave girl was then for some time very cruel to Lith’s little sister and wanted her to die so that then her position would be more secure with her husband. Every day she beat the little girl, and she always made her carry the largest water-pot to the spring. She also made the child place her finger in the fire to use as firewood. When the time came for food, the slave girl went to the fire and took a burning piece of wood and burned the child all over her body with it. When Thiep asked her why she treated the child so badly, she replied that she was a slave whom her father had bought for her.
Now when the little girl took the heavy water-pot to the river to fill it, there was no one to lift it up for her, so that she could not get it up on her head. She therefore had to remain a long time at the spring and at last began calling for her sister Lith to come and help her.
When Lith heard her little sister crying for her, she begged the water juju to allow her to go and help her, so he told her she might go but that she must return to him again immediately. When the little girl saw her sister she did not want to leave her and asked to be allowed to go into the hole with her. She then told Lith how surely she had been treated by the slave girl, and her elder sister told her to have patience and wait, that a day of vengeance would arrive sooner or later.
After seeing her sister, the little girl went back to Thiep’s house with a glad heart, but when she got to the house, the slave girl said, “Why have you been so long getting the water?’ and took another stick from the fire and burned the little girl and starved her for the rest of the day.
This went on for sometime, until, one day, when the child again went to the river for water. After all the people had gone, she cried out for her sister, but for a long tIme she did not come. There was a hunter from Thiep’s town hidden nearby, watching the Lith hole, and the water juju told Lith that she must not go. When the little girl went on carrying so bitterly, Lith at last persuaded the juju to let her go to her sister, promising to return quickly. When she emerged from the water, she looked very beautiful with the rays of the setting sun shining on her glistening body. She helped her little sister with her water-pot and then disappeared into the hole again.
The hunter was amazed at what he had seen, and, when he returned, he told Thiep what a beautiful woman had come out of the water and had helped the little girl with her water-pot. He also told Thiep that he was convinced that the girl he had seen at the spring was his proper wife. Lith, and the water juju must have taken her.
Thiep then made up his mind to go out and watch and see what happened. So in the early morning, the hunter came for him, and they both went down to the river and hid in the forest near the waterhole.
When Thiep saw Lith come out of the water, he recognized her at once, and he went home and considered how he should get her out of the power of the water juju. He was advised by some of his friends to go to an old woman who frequently made sacrifices to the water juju, and consult her as to what the best thing to do.
When he went to her, she told him to bring her one white slave, one white goat, one piece of white cloth, one white chicken, and a basket of eggs. Then, when the great juju day arrived, she would take them to the water juju and make a sacrifice of them on his behalf. On the day after the sacrifice was made, the water juju would return the girl to her, and she would bring her to Thiep.
Thiep then bought the slave and took all the other things to the old woman and, when the day of sacrifice arrived, he went with his friend, the hunter, and witnessed the old woman make the sacrifice. The slave was bound up and led to the hole, the old woman called to the water juju, and she then cut the slave’s throat with a sharp knife and pushed him into the hole. She then did the same with the goat and the chicken and she also threw the eggs and cloth on top of them. After this had been done, they all returned to their homes.
The next morning at dawn the old woman went to the hole and found Lith standing at the side of the spring. She told her that she was her friend and was going to take her to her husband. She then took Lith back to her own home and hid her in her room and sent word to Thiep to come to her house and to take great care that the slave woman knew nothing about the matter.
So Thiep left the house secretly by the back door and arrived at the old woman’s house without meeting anyone.
When Lith saw Thiep, she asked for her little sister, so he sent his friend, the hunter, to bring her from the spring. The hunter met the child carrying her water-pot to get the morning supply of water and brought her to the old woman’s house with him.
After Lith had embraced her sister, she told her to return to Thiep’s house and to do something to annoy the slave woman, and then she went to run as fast as she could back to the old woman’s house where, no doubt, the slave girl would follow her. There she would meet them all inside the house and would see Lith, whom she believed she had killed.
The little girl did as she was told, and as soon as she entered the house, she called out to the slave woman, “Do you know that you are a wicked woman and have treated me very badly? I know you are only my sister’s slave, and you will be properly punished.” She then ran as fast as she could to the old woman’s house. When the slave woman heard what the little girl had said, she was quite mad with rage and seized a burning stick from the fire and ran after the child; but the little one got to the house first and ran inside, the slave woman following close upon her heels with the burning stick in her hand.
Then Lith came out and confronted the slave woman, and she at once recognized her mistress whom she thought she had killed, and she stood quite still.
Then they all went back to Thiep’s house, and when they arrived there, Thiep asked the slave woman what she meant by pretending that she was Lith and why she had tried to kill her. But, seeing she was found out, the slave woman had nothing to say.
Many people were then called to play and to celebrate the recovery of Thiep’s wife, and when they had all come, he told them what the slave woman had done.
After this, Lith treated the slave girl in the same way as she had treated her little sister. She made her put her fingers in the fire and burned her with sticks. She also made her beat fufu with her head in a hollowed-out tree and, after a time, she was tied up to a tree and starved to death.
Ever since that time, when a man marries a girl, he is always present when she comes out of the fatting-house and takes her home himself, so that such evil things as happened to Lith and her sister might not occur again.
ONCE A MAN MADE, a double marriage, one with a superior and one with an inferior wife. The inferior one then prepared a drug and caused the death of her mate, the owner of the hut.
When she was dead, the people said, “Let us bury her in the village.”
But the guilty woman said, “No, not in the village. That would no do, rather at the back of it. I feel the loss of my mate too much.”
The mourning was kept up for a long while. At last the chief said, “Let them eat, otherwise they will die.”
When this word was uttered, the women folk said, “Let us go to do field work.”
So they dispersed in order to go to the fields. But the guilty woman went up to the granary and took out some ears of corn. She then called to the dead woman, Saying, “Come and shuck this.” So saying she went and dug her mate out until she came forth from the grave in which she had been covered with earth, in order to go and shuck the corn.
When the dead wife had finished shucking it, she winnowed and sifted it, then took it to the grinding stone, and began to prepare this stone for use by beating it with a smaller one.
Mean while in the hut the living woman was cooking porridge. When she had finished stirring it, she said, “Come and have some food.”
Go into the hut! That is what her mate would not do. So the living wife said, “Then go and grind. You are a fool.”
The dead woman went to the stone and ground, singing all the while:
“First let me hand over to you little things,
my lady.
Lady Kois, let me hand over little things.
Kois, I have left you the husband;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the cowries;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the children;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the slaves;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the cotton goods;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the chickens;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the wild guinea chickens;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the baskets;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the fire;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you everything;
break me in two, yes.
Let me hand over all the rows.”`Let me hand over all the rows.”
She disappeared before the people came to the village.
The following day the people again dispersed in order to go to the fields. The woman also went, but soon came back and went to the granary and began to take out grain. All of a sudden she started toward the place where she had covered her mate with earth, saying, “Now, now! Come, shuck and grind; the sun is sinking.” And she went and dug her out.
The dead woman shucked and shucked. When she had finished shucking, she took the grain to the grinding stone, then once more began to beat it with another stone.
“Come along! said her mate, “come and have some food.”
“No,” she said, “I do not want any. Food is not what is in my heart.”
“Well!” said the other. “Where are the people who are going to look at you the whole day long? You died long ago.” Then she added, “What, eat! That is what you will do…. Then go and grind, dear, the sun is shining.”
Then the dead woman bent over the stone and began to grind, singing:
“First let me hand over to you little things,
my lady.
Lady Kois, let me hand over little things.
Kois, I have left you the husband;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the cowries;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the children;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the slaves; break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the cotton goods;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the chickens;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the guineas-chickens;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the baskets;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you the fire;
break me in two, yes.
Kois, I have left you everything;
break me in two, yes.
Let me hand over all the Kois.”
Meanwhile everyone left the fields and came back to the village.
The next morning people said, “Let us go to the fields.” After having gone to the field, the woman once more came back before the sun was high and went up to the granary. After that her mate again shucked, took the grain to the stone, and began to grind, singing the same song as on the previous days.
At dawn the next morning people said once more, “Now let us go to work.” But this time a number of people remained hidden in the grass. Then, fancy their surprise, they saw the woman go up to the granary, start taking some ears of corn and, on coming down, go and unearth her mate. Seeing that, they said, “This time it is plain, this is the woman who killed her mate.”
Then, as they saw the dead woman shuck the grain and go and bend over the millstone and heard her saying, Let me begin to grind,” and when they further heard the song, “First let me hand over… ” then, by the ghosts! They were all in suspense.
“Now,” said the dead woman, “let me move away from the stone.”
At this moment they got hold of the murderer…. “Let me go,” she said, “first hold a court of inquiry.”
But they just went and dug up a poison and mixed it and made her drink it by force. Meanwhile her dead mate had vanished.
Bakoo! They made a heap of firewood, dug her heart out, and burned her over the fire.
Now, little iron, my little story stops. Little iron, the end.
A MAN HAD TAKEN a wife, and now she had the joy of being with child, but famine was acute in the land.
One day, when hunger was particularly severe, the man, accompanied by his wife, was dragging himself along in the direction of there mother’s home in the hope of getting a little food there. He happened to find on the road a tree with abundant wild fruit on the top. “Wife,” he said, “get up there that we may eat fruit.”
The woman refused, saying, “I, who am with child, to climb up a tree!”
He said, “In that case, do not climbe at all.”
The husband them climbed up himself and shook and shook the branches, the woman meanwhile picking up what fell down. He said, “Do not pick up my fruit. What! Just now you refused to go up!”
And she: “Bana! I am only picking them up.”
Thinking about this fruit, he hurried down from the top of the tree and said, “You have eaten some.”
And she: “Why! Of course, I have not.”
Then, spear in hand, he stabbed his wife. And there she died on the spot.
He then gathered up his fruit with both hands. There he sat eating it, remaining where the woman was stretched out quite flat.
All of a sudden he started running. Run! Run Run! Without stopping once, he ran until he reached the rise of a hill.
There he slept, out of sight of the place where he had left the woman.
Meanwhile the child that was in the womb rushed out of it, dragging its umbilical cord. First, it looked round for the direction which its father had taken, then it started this song:
“Father, wait for me,
Father, wait for me,
The little wonmbless.
Who is it that has eaten my mother?
The little wombless….!
How swollen are those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes.”
That gave the man a shake… “There,” he said, “there comes the thing which is speaking.” He listened, he started in that direction…. “This is the child coming to follow me after all that, when I have already killed its mother. It had been left in the womb.”
Then rage took his wits away, and he killed the little child!…. there he was making a fresh start, and going on. Here, where the little bone had been left: “Little bone, gather yourself up…. Little bone, gather yourself up.”
Soon it was up again, and then came the song:
“Father, wait for me,
Father, wait for me,
The Little wombless.
Who is it that has eaten my mother?
The little wombless….!
How swollen are those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes.”
The father stopped…. “Again the child that I have killed! It has risen and is coming. Now I shall wait for him.”
So he hid and waited for the child, with a spear in his hand. The child came and made itself visible at a distance as from here to there. As soon as it came, quick with the spear! He stabbed it! Then he looked for a hole, shoveled the little body into it, and heaped branches up at the entrance.
Then with all speed he ran! with all speed!
At last he reached the kraal, where the mother of his dead wife lived, the grandmother of the child.
When he came he sat down. Then his brothers and sisters-in-law come with smiling faces…. “Well! Well! You have put in an appearance!”
“We have,” he says, “Put in an appearance.”
And a hut was prepared for him and his wife, who was expected.
Then the mother-in-law was heard asking from afar, “Well! And my daughter, where has she been detained?”
Said he, “I have left her at home. I have come alone to beg for a little food. Hunger is roaring.” “Sit down inside there, father.”
Food was procured for him. So he began to eat. And when he had finished, he even went to sleep.
Meanwhile, the child, on its part, had squeezed itself out of the hole where in it had been put and, again, with its umbilical cord hanging on:
“Father, wait for me,
Father, wait for me,
The little wombless.
Who is it that has eaten my mother?
The little wombless…!
How swollen are those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes.”
The people listened in the direction of the path… “That thing which comes speaking indistinctly, what is it?…. It seems to be a person…. What is it?…. It looks, man, like a child killed by you on the road…. And now, when we look at your way of sitting, you seem to be only half-seated.”
“We do not see him distinctly…. It cannot be the child, Mother; it remained at home.”
The man just got up to shake himself a little. And his little child, too, was coming with all speed! It was already near, with its mouth wide open:
“Father, wait for me,
Father, wait for me,
The little wombless.
Who is it that has eaten my mother?“
The little wombless….!
How swollen are those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes!”
Everyone was staring. They said, “There comes a little red thing. It still has the umbilical cord hanging on.”
Inside of the hut there, where the man stood, there was complete silence!
Meanwhile the child was coming on feet and buttocks with its mouth wide open, but still at a distance from its grandmother’s hut. “Straight over there!” noted everyone. The grandmother looked toward the road and noticed that the little thing was perspiring, and what speed! Then the song:
“Father, wait for me,
Father, wait for me,
The little wombless.
Who is it that has eaten my mother?
The little wombless….!
How swollen are those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes.”
Bakoo! It scarcely reached its grandmother’s hut when it jumped into it…. and up on the bed:
“Father, wait for me.
Father, have you come?
Yes, you have eaten my mother.
How swollen those eyes!
Wait till the little wombless comes.”
Then the grandmother put this question to the man: “Now what sort of song is this child singing? Have you not killed our daughter?”
She had scarcely added, “Surround him!” when he was already in their hands. His very brother-in-law tied him. And then…. all the spears were poised together in one direction, everyone saying, “Now today you are the man who killed our sister.”
Then they just threw the body away to the west. And grandmother picked up her little grandchild.
Root assumptions represent the basic premises upon which a given existence is formed. These are the ground rules, so to speak. Your physical mechanisms are equipped to function in such a way that reality is perceived through the lens of particular root assumptions, then. Using the physical senses, it is almost impossible for you to perceive reality in any other way.
Physically speaking, you will find nothing to contradict these assumptions, since they are all that you can experience or perceive physically. These root assumptions are the framework of the camouflage system. As you explore other realities, you almost automatically interpret such data in terms of the root assumptions of your own system.
This highly falsifies such information. The inner senses are not bound by those assumptions, however. This is why so many psychic or subjective experiences seem to contradict physical laws. You must learn the ‘laws’ that apply to other systems.
The root assumptions that govern physical reality are indeed valid, but within physical reality alone. They do not apply elsewhere. There is a natural tendency to continue judging experience against these assumptions, however. With experience, the habit will lose much of its hold. Inner experience must be colored to some extent by the physical system, while you exist in it. In order for such data to rise to conscious levels, for example, it must be translated into terms that the ego can understand, and translation is bound to distort the original experience.
The whole physical organism of the body has been trained to react to certain patterns, these based on physical root assumptions. The nervous system reacts definitely to visual block images. Such images are received through the skin, as well as through the eyes. The whole system is highly complicated and organized. This is obviously necessarily for physical survival.
The organization however is, biologically speaking, artificial and learned. It is no less rigid for that reason. This organizational structure of perception can be broken up, as recent LSD experiments certainly show. This can be dangerous, however. The fact that this does occur shows that the systems of perception are not a part of over-all structure biologically, but learned secondary responses. It is disturbing to the whole organism, however, to break up the strong pattern of usual perception. Inner stability of response is suddenly swept away. Changes that are not yet known occur within the nervous system under these circumstances, both electromagnetic and chemical.
The inner senses alone are equipped to process and perceive other reality systems. Even the distortions can be kept at a minimum with training. Indiscriminate use of the psychedelic drugs can severely shake up learned patterns of response that are necessary for effective manipulation within physical reality; break subtle connections and you disturb electromagnetic functions. Ego failure can result.
Development of the inner senses is a much more effective method of perceiving other realities, and, followed correctly, the ego is not only stronger but more flexible. Even consciousness of physical reality is increased. Such development becomes an unfolding and natural expansion of the whole personality.
These root assumptions are so a part of your existence that they cloud your dreams. Beneath them, however, portions of the self perceive physical reality in an entirely different fashion, free of the tyranny of objects and physical form. Here you experience concepts directly, without the need for symbols. You have knowledge of your ‘past’ personalities and know that they exist simultaneously with your own.
The practice of psychological time will allow you to reach these portions of the self. The ego is not artificially disorganized by such practice. It is simply bypassed for the moment. The experience gained does become a part of the physical structure, but there is no massive disorganization of perception, since the ego agrees to step aside momentarily.
It is not bombarded, as with the drug experiments, and forced to experience chaotic and frightening perceptions that can terrify it into complete disorder. Survival in our system is dependent upon the highly specialized, focused, limited but specific qualities of the ego. It should not be rigid. Neither should it be purposely weakened.
The root assumptions upon which physical reality is formed represent secure ground to the ego. We always operate with the ego’s consent. It interprets the inner knowledge gained in its own way, true, but it is immeasurably enriched by so doing.
The ego can exist only within the context of these assumptions. The primary dream experience is finally woven into a structure composed of these assumptions, and it is these you remember. These serve you as basic information but the information is in symbolic form. Objects, you see, are symbols. Dream objects are often symbols of realities that the ego could not otherwise perceive.
We agree to accept certain data in the physical universe. We agree to form this into certain patterns, and we agree to ignore other data completely. These now, called root assumptions, form the main basis for the apparent permanence and coherence of our physical system.
In your journeys into inner reality, you cannot proceed with these same root assumptions. Reality, per se, changes completely according to the basic root agreements that you accept. One of the root agreements upon which physical reality is based is the assumption that objects have a reality independent of any subjective cause and that these objects, within definite specific limitations, are permanent.
Objects may appear and disappear in these other systems. Using the root assumptions just mentioned as a basis for judging reality, an observer would insist that the objects were not real, for they do not behave as he/she believes objects must. Because dream images may appear and disappear, then, do not take it for granted that they do not really exist.
There is a cohesiveness to the inner universe and to the systems that are not basically physical. But this is based upon an entirely different set of root assumptions and these are the keys that alone will let you manipulate within other systems or understand them. There are several major root assumptions connected here and many minor ones:
Energy and action are basically the same, although neither must necessarily apply to physical action.
All objects have their origin basically in mental action. Mental action is directed psychic energy.
Permanence is not a matter of time. Existence have value in terms of intensities.
Objects are blocks of energy perceived in a highly specialized manner.
Stability in time sequence is not a prerequisite requirement for an object, except as a root assumption in the physical universe.
Space as a barrier does not exist.
The spacious present is here more available to the senses.
The only barriers are mental or psychic ones.
Only if these basic root assumptions are taken for granted will your projection experiences make sense to you. Different rules simply apply. Your subjective experience is extremely important here; that is, the vividness of any given experience in terms of intensity will be far more important than anything else.
Elements from past, present and future may be indiscriminately available to you. You may be convinced that a given episode is the result of subconscious fabrication, simply because the time sequence is not maintained, and this could be a fine error. In a given dream projection, for example, you may experience an event that is obviously from the physical past, yet within it there may be elements that do not fit. In an old-fashioned room of the 1700’s you may look out and see an automobile pass by. Obviously, you think: distortion. Yet you may be straddling time in such an instance, perceiving, say, the room as it was in the 1700’s and the street as it appears in your present. These elements may appear side by side. The car may suddenly disappear before your eyes, to be replaced by an animal or the whole street may turn into a field.
“This is how dreams work,” you may think. ‘This cannot be a legitimate projection. ‘Yet you may be perceiving the street and the field that existed ‘before’ it, and the image may be transposed one upon the other. If you try to judge such an experience with physical root assumptions, it will be meaningless. As mentioned earlier, you may also perceive a building that will never exist in physical reality. This does not mean that the form is illusion. You are simply in a position where you can pick up and translate the energy pattern before you.
If another individual under the same circumstances comes across the same ‘potential’ object, he/she can also perceive it as you did. He/she may, however, because of his/her own make-up, perceive and translate another portion of allied pattern. He/she may see the form of the man/woman who originated the thought of the building.
To a large extent in the physical system, your habit of perceiving time as a sequence forms the type of experience and also limits it. This habit also unites the experiences, however. The unifying and limiting aspects of consecutive moments are absent in inner reality. Time, in other words, cannot be counted upon to unify action. The unifying elements will be those of your own understanding and abilities. You are not forced to perceive action as a series of moments within inner really, therefore.
Episodes will be related to each other by different methods that will be intuitional, highly selective and psychological. You will find your way through complicated mazes of reality according to your own intuitional nature. You will find what you expect to find. You will seek out what you want from the available data.
In physical experience, you are dealing with an environment with which you are familiar. You have completely forgotten the chaos and unpredictable nature it presented before learning processes were channeled into its specific directions. You learned to perceive reality in a highly specified fashion. When you are dealing with inner, or basically non-physical realities, you must learn to become unspecialized and then learn a new set of principles. You will soon learn to trust your perceptions, whether or not the experiences seem to make logical sense.
In a projection, the problems will be of a different sort. The form of a man/woman, for example, may be a thought-form, or a fragment sent quite unconsciously by another individual whom it resembles. It may be another projectionist, like yourself. It may be a potential form like any potential object, a record of a form played over and over again.
It may be another version of yourself. We will discuss ways of distinguishing between these. A man/woman may suddenly appear, and be then replaced by a small girl/boy. This would be a nonsensical development to the logical mind; yet, the girl/boy might be the form of the man’s/woman’s previous or future reincarnated self.
The unity, you see, is different. Basically, perception of the spacious present is naturally available. It is your nervous physical mechanism which acts as a limiting device. By acting in this manner it forces you to focus upon what you can perceive with greater intensity.
Our mental processes are formed and developed as a result of this conditioning. The intuitive portions of the personality are not so formed, and these operate to advantage in any inner exploration.
We are basically capable of seeing any particular location as it existed a thousand years in your past or as it will exist a thousand years in your future. The physical senses serve to blot out more aspects of reality than they allow you to perceive, yet, in many inner explorations you will automatically translate experience into terms that the senses can use. Any such translation is, nevertheless, a second-hand version of the original – an important point to remember.
Now, there are ‘objective’ realities that exist within the astral system. There are more than your own thought forms, in other words. Your own thought-forms can be definite aids when you are in the proper mental condition, and they can impede your progress if you are not. For example, a man in a desperate frame of mind is more apt to emphasize the unpleasant aspects of the news and to see bitterness rather than joy in the faces of those he/she meets. He/she will ignore a contented child playing on one side of the street and notice, instead, a dirty ragged child, even though he be further away. So your frame of mind when projecting will largely determine that kind of experiences you have.
The original intensity behind the construction determines its duration. Left alone, any such construction will eventually vanish. It will leave a trace, however, in electromagnetic reality where it can then be activated by anyone when certain conditions are met or are favorable.
Denying energy to such a construction can be like pricking a balloon. Then all attention must be taken from it, for it thrives on attention.
She was then living in the bush, never showing herself to anyone. She had living with her just one daughter, who used to pass the day in the fork of a tree making baskets.
One day there appeared a man just when the mother had gone to kill game. He found the girl making baskets as usual. “Here now!” he said. “There are people here in the bush! And that girl, what a beauty! Yet they leave her alone. If the king were to marry her, would not all the other queens leave the place?”
Going back to the town, he went straight to the king’s house and said, “Sire, I have discovered a woman of such beauty that, if you call her to this palace, all the queens you have will make haste to go away.”
The following morning people were called together and set to grind their axes. Then they started for the bush. As they came in view of the place, they found the mother had once more gone to hunt.
Before going, she had cooked porridge for her daughter and hung meat for her. Then only had she started on her expedition.
The people said, “Let us cut down the tree on which the girl is.”
So they put axes to it. The girl at once started this song:
“Mother, come back!
Mother, here is a man cutting our shade tree.
Mother come back!
Mother, here is a man cutting our shade tree.
Cut! Here is the tree falling in which I eat.
Here it is falling.”
The mother dropped there as if from the sky:
Many as you are, I shall stitch you
with the big needle.
Stitch! Stitch!”
They at once fell to the ground…. The woman left just one to go back and report.
“Go,” she said, “and tell the news.” He went….
When he came to the town the people asked, “What has happened?”
“There,” he said, “where we have been! Things are rather bad! “
Likewise, when he stood before the king, the king asked, “What has happened?”
“Sire,” he said, “we are all undone. I alone have come back.”
“Bakoo! You are all dead! If that is so, tomorrow go to the kraal over there and bring more people. Tomorrow morning let them go and bring me the woman.”
They slept their fill.
The next morning early, the men ground their axes and went to the place.
They, too, found the mother gone, while the porridge was ready there, and the meat was hanging on the tree….
“Bring the axes.” Forthwith they went at the shade tree. But the song had already started:
“Mother, come back!
Mother, here is a man cutting our shade tree.
Mother, come back!
Mother, here is a man cutting our shade tree.
Cut! Here is the tree falling in which I eat.
Here it is falling.”
The mother dropped down among them, singing in her turn:
“many as you are, I shall stitch you
with the big needle.
Stitch! Stitch!”
They were dead. The woman and her daughter picked up the axes….
“Olo!” said the king when he was told. “Today let all those that are pregnant give birth to their children.”
So one woman after another straightway brought forth her child. Soon there was a whole row of them.
Then the whole band departed, making a confused noise.
When the girl saw that, she said, “There is no joke about it now. There comes a red army with the umbilical cords still hanging on.”
They found her at her own place in the fork of the tree.
“Let us give them some porridge on their heads, but the children did not eat it.
The last-born then climbed up the shade tree, picked up the baskets which the girl was stitching, and said, “Now bring me an axe.”
The girl shouted once more:
“Mother, come back!
Mother, here is man cutting our shade tree.
Mother, come back!
Mother, here is a man cutting our shade tree.
Cut! Here is the tree falling in which I eat.
Here it is falling.”
The Mother dropped down among the crowd:
“Many as you are, I shall stitch you with the big needle.
Stitch! Stitch!”
But thee was the troop already dragging the girl. They had tied her with their umbilical cords, yes, with their umbilical cords. The mother went on with her incantation:
“many as you are, I shall stitch you
with the big needle.
Stitch! Stitch!”
In vain! The troop was already in the fields and the ngururu went up as far as God’s abode, and soon the children were in the town.
As they reached it, the mother said, “since you have carried away my child, I must tell you something. She is not to pound in the mortar, nor to go to fetch water at night. If you send her to do one of these things, mind you! I shall know where to find you.”
Then the mother went back to her abode in the bush.
The following day the king said, “Let us go hunting.” And to his mother he said, “my wife must not pound mortar. All that she can do is to stitch baskets.”
While the husband was away there in the open flat, the other wives as well as the mother-in-law said, “Why should not she also pound in the mortar?”
When the girl was told to pound in the mortar, she said, “No.”
A basket of corn was brought to her.
The mother-in-law herself took away the meal from the mortar, and then the other women in their turn brought corn and put it all there.
So the girl pounded, singing at the same time:
“Pound! At home I do not pound,
Here I pound to celebrate my wedding.
Yepu! Yepu!
If I pound, I go to God’s.”
She began to sink into the ground but she went on singing:
“Pound! At home I do not pound,
Here I pound to celebrate my wedding.
Yepu! Yepu!
If I pound, I go to God’s”
Soon she was down as far as her neck. Now the mortar went on by itself pounding the grain on the ground, pounding on the ground. Finally the girl disappeared altogether.
When nothing more was seen of her, the mortar still pounded as before on the ground. The women then said, “Now what shall we do?”
They went and called a crane, and said, “Go and break the news to her mother. But, first, let us know, what will you say?”
The crane said, “Wawani! Wawani!”
They said, “that has no meaning, go back. Let us send for the crow.”
The crow was called, “Now what will you say?”
The crow said, “Kwa! Kwa! Kwa!”
“The crow does not know how to call. Go, quail. How will you do?”
The quail said, “Kwalulu! Kwalulu!”
“The quail does not know how to do it either. Let us call the doves.”
They said, “Let us hear, doves, what will you call to her mother?”
They they heard:
“Kuku! Ku!
She-who-nurses-the-sun is gone,
You who dig,
She-who-nurses-the-sun.”
They said, “Go, you know how to do it , you.”
The mother went when she heard the doves. There she was going toward the town. She carried medicines on a potsherd, also tails of animals with which she beat the air.
While she was on the road, she met a zebra:
“Zebra, what are you doing?
–Ullimidden.
The wife of my father is dead.
–Ullimidden.
O Mother! You shall die.
–Ullimidden.”
The zebra died. The woman went on, went on, went on, and then found people digging:
“You who dig, what are you doing?
–Ullimidden.
The wife of my father is dead.
O mother! You shall die.
–Ullimidden.”
When she reached the town there:
“Let me gather, let me gather
The herd of my mother.
Nakomse, get up.
Let me gather the herd.
“Let me gather, let me gather
The herd of my father.
Nakomse, get up.
Let me gather the herd.”
She then heard the mortar still sounding right above the child.
So she sprayed one medicine, then another.
There was the child already pounding from under the ground. Little by little the head came out. Then the neck, and the song was heard again:
“Pound! At home I do not pound,
Here I pound to celebrate my wedding.
Yepu! Yepu!
If I pound, I go to God’s”
The child was now in full view. Finally she stepped outside. The end.
THERE WAS ONCE an old woman who had no husband, and she lived for many days in trouble. One day she said to herself, “Why do I always feel so troubled? It is because I have neither children nor husband. I shall go to the medicine-man and get some children.
She went to the medicine-man and told him she was unhappy owing to the fact that although she had now grown old, she had neither husband nor children. The medicine-man asked her which she wanted, husband or children, and she told him she wanted children.
She was instructed to take some cooking pots – three, or as many as she could carry – and to search for a fruit-bearing sycamore tree, to fill the pots with the fruit, to put them in her hut, and to go for a walk.
The old woman followed these instructions carefully. She gathered the fruit, filled the pots, placed them in her hut, and went for a walk until the evening.
On arriving near the kraal, she heard the sound of voices and asked herself, “Why does one hear the voices of children in the kraal?” She went nearer, and found her hut filled with children, all her work finished, the boys herding the cattle, the hut swept, by the girls, the warriors singing and dancing on the common, and the little children waiting to greet her. She thus became a rich old woman, and lived happily with her children for many days.
One day, however, she scolded the children, and reproached them for being children of the tree. They remained silent and did not speak to her; then, while she went to visit her friends in the other kraals, the children returned to the sycamore tree, and became fruit again. On her return to her own kraal, the old woman wept bitterly when she found it empty, and paid another visit to the medicine-man, whom she taxed with having spirited away her children.
The medicine-man told her that he did not know what she should do now, and when she proposed to go and look at the sycamore tree, he recommended her to try.
She took her cooking pots to the sycamore tree and climbed up into it. But when she reached the fruit they all put forth eyes and stared at her. This so startled her that she was unable to descend, and her friends had to come and help her down.
She did not go to the sycamore tree again to search for the children.
ONCE UPON A TIME there were a brother and sister who lived together. The mother had died leaving many goats, and the brother looked after the goats in the daytime, but in the evening he went away from home, for he was very handsome, and had many friends. The name of the girl was Nasere, the name of the brother Tunka Menin.
Now one day when the brother returned Nasere said to him, “Two men were here yesterday, and if you go away and leave me they will carry me off.” But he replied, “You talk nonsense.” She insisted, “I am speaking the truth. Now when they take me I will bear with me a gourd full of sap which is like fat, and I will let it drop along the path so that you can follow my trail.” That night when Tunka Menin brought the goats home, Nasere made a great feast and gruel, but again he went away. When Tunka Menin came back the next morning he found the homestead empty, for his sister had been carried away as she had said. However, he saw the track where drop by drop she had let fall the sap which was like fat. And Tunk Menin followed over hill and down dale, and ever and again he heard her voice crying from. the opposite hillside, “Follow after where you see the trail.”
The following day the sap began to take root and to spring up into little plants, but he did not see his sister. At last, he returned to his home to herd the flock. He took them out to feed, but he had no one to prepare food for him when he returned home at night, and if he himself prepared the food there was no one to care for the flocks. So he slew a goat and ate it and, when it was finished, he slew yet another, and so on till all the goats were finished. Then he killed and ate the oxen one by one. They lasted him months and years for the flock was large but, at last they were all gone, and then he bethought him of his sister.
Now the plants which marked the way she had gone were, by this time, grown to trees, and so he journeyed on for one month and half a month and at the end of that time he came to a stream and by the stream were two children getting water. Then he said to the younger, “Give me some water in your gourd,” but the child refused. The elder child spoke to the younger and said, “Give the stranger to drink, for our mother said if ever you see a stranger coming by way of the trees he is my brother!” So he and the children went up to the homestead, and he waited outside, and Nasere came out, and he knew her at once. However, she did not know him, for he was not dressed as before with ochre and fat. He came into her hut and she gave him food, not in a good vessel, but in a potsherd. Then he slept in the hut, but on the floor, not in the bed.
Now the next day he went out with the children to drive away the birds from the crops and as he threw a stone he would say, “Fly away, little bird, as Nasere flew away and never came back any more.” Soon another bird would come and he would throw another stone and say the same words again. This happened the next day and the next for a whole month.
The children heard this, and so did others, and they said, “Why does he utter the name Nasere?” So they went and told their mother. At last she came and waited among the grass and listened to his words, and said, “Surely this is my brother Tunka Menin, and she went back to the house and sent for a young man and told him to go and fetch Tunka Menin to come to her, for she said, “He is my brother.” And the young man went and told Tunka Menin the words of his sister, and she has given me no cup for my food but a potsherd,” and he would not go in. Then the young man returned to Nasere and told her the words of her brother, and she said, “Take ten goats and go again and bid him to come to me.” So the young man took ten goats and said, “Your sister has sent these ten goats.” But again Tunka Menin refused, and the young man returned. So Nasere said, “Take ten oxen and give them to my brother.” However, Tunka Menin owuld not come. Nasere then sent him ten cows, and another ten cows, but still Tunka Menin refused to come in. Nasere thereupon told her husband how she had found her brother and how he would not be reconciled to her, and her husband said, “Send him still more animals,” so Nasere sent ten other cows and again ten more, till Tunka Menin had received forty cows besides the goats and the oxen which Nasere had sent at the first. And the heart of Tunka Menin relented, and he came into the house of his sister. And she killed a goat, and took the fat and dressed his hair and his shoulders, for she said, “I did not know you, for you were not adorned as before.
After Tunka Menin had been reconciled to his sister, he asked that eight wives should be given him. So the husband of Nasere sent to all his relations round about, and they brought in goats, and Tunka Menin bought eight girls, some for thirty goats, some for forty. Other relations all came and built eight huts for the wives near to the dwelling of Nasere, so Tunka Menin and his wives dwelt near the homestead of his sister.
A BIG DANCE was once held at which many warriors and girls were present. Toward evening the dancers dispersed, and each warrior selected one or more of the girls to accompany him home.
One of these men, a particularly handsome and well-built fellow, went away with three sisters. On leaving, he asked the girls where they would like to go, and they told him they wished to accompany him to his kraal. He said that it was a long way off, but they replied that that did not matter.
They started off, and after walking some distance, they approached the kraal. The girls noticed some white things scattered about on the ground and asked the warrior what they were. He said that they were his sheep and goats; but when they reached destination, the girls saw that they were human bones. They entered the warrior’s hut and the girls were surprised to find that he lived quite alone.
It transpired later that this warrior was in reality a devil who ate people, but it was not known because he concealed his tail under his garment. He had even eaten his mother and had thrown her bones into a heap of grass which formed the bed.
Shortly after their arrival at the hut, the warrior went outside, leaving the girls alone. A voice, which came from the bed, startled them by asking them who had brought them there. They replied that the warrior had brought them, whereupon the voice told them to open the mattress. The girls threw off the top layer of grass, exposing the bones to view. The voice, which came from the bones, then related that she had been the warrior’s mother and that he had become a demon and had eaten her. The girls asked the bones what they should do, and the voice answered, “The warrior will come presently and bring you a sheep. Accept it. He will then go outside again and, having shut the door, sit down there. Make a hole in the wall and pass out. If you are asked what the knocking is, say that you are killing the sheep.”
Everything took place as the voice had predicted, and the girls made a hole in the wall of the hut through which they predicted, and the girls made a hole in the wall of the hut through which they passed and escaped. When they reached the road, however, one of them suddenly remembered that she had left her beads behind. Her sisters told her to go and fetch them while they waited for her. She returned to the hut but met the warrior, who asked her if he should eat her or make her his wife. She thanked him for giving her the choice and said that she preferred the latter.
They lived together for a considerable period and, after a time, the woman presented the demon with a son, whom they named Tezamet. From the day of his birth Tezamet accompanied his father on his journeys to the forest in quest of people to devour; and, while the man and the boy ate human beings, they took home with them for the woman goats and sheep to eat and cows to milk.
One day one of the woman’s sisters came to the kraal to visit her. As Tezamet and his father were both absent she arrived, the two women sat and talked until it was time for the visitor to depart. The weather looked threatening as she rose to take her leave, and Tezamet’s mother cried out to her not to go to the tree in the middle of the plain, should it rain, for it was the custom of her husband and son to rest there on their way home. But the woman hurried away without paying attention to her sister’s warning, and when it came on to rain a little later, she ran to the tree in the middle of the plain, which was a baobab tree, and climbed up into it. She had not been there long when Tezamet and his father arrived and stood beneath the tree to get shelter from the rain. Their appearance recalled to the woman her sister’s words and she was greatly alarmed.
Tezamet gazed up into the tree and remarked that there was something peculiar about it, but his father said it was only because it was raining hard. Shortly afterward, however, Tezamet saw the woman and called out, “There is my meat.” The woman was forced to descend, and she gave birth to twins.
Tezamet picked up the children and said, “I will take these kidneys to mother to roast for me.
When it stopped raining, the two returned home and Tezamet asked his mother to roast his kidneys for him. But the woman knew at once that her sister had been out to death, and she hid the children in a hole in the earth, roasting instead two rats. When they were ready, Tezamet went to the fire, picked them up off the stones and ate them, grumbling at the same time because they were so small. His mother pretended to be very annoyed at this and, turning to her husband, complained of what their son had said. The old man told her not to mind the boy as he was a liar.
The woman fed and tended the children, who were both boys, and gradually they grew up. One day she asked her husband to bring her an ox which she said, she wished to slaughter and eat. Tezamet on hearing this request at once pricked up his ears and remarked, “It really amuses me to hear of a woman who wants to eat an ox all by herself. I think those kidneys of mine have something to do with this matter.” However, the two men searched for an ox which they procured and brought back with them. They slaughtered the animal and left the meat with the woman, after which they went for a walk in the forest.
As soon as they had departed, the woman let the children out of their hole and gave them the ox to eat. They ate until sunset, when she sent them back again to their hiding place.
Tezamet and his father returned shortly afterward, and the former, being very sharp, at once noticed the small footmarks on the ground. “I wonder,” he said, “what those small and numerous footmarks are. They are certainly not mine.” His mother, however, stoutly insisted that the marks had been made by herself or by the two men, and in this she received her husband’s support. Being annoyed with Tezamet on account of the way he treated his mother, the old man killed and ate him, but he immediately came to life again and cried out, “There, I have come back again.”
As time passed, the children grew up, and their aunt asked them one day if they knew that the people who lived in the same kraal with them were in reality demons and cannibals. She also inquired if, in the event of her being able to obtain weapons from her husband, they could put Tezamet and his father to death. The boys replied that they could, but asked the woman what she would say if her husband wanted to know why she required the weapons. She told them that she would say she wanted them to protect herself against any enemies who might come.
When Tezamet and his father next returned home, the woman asked her husband if he would procure two spears, two shields, and two swords for her. “For I am always here alone,” she said, “and if enemies come, I wish to be able to fight with them.” Tezamet remarked that he had never before heard of a woman who wanted men’s weapons and said he thought that those kidneys, which he had brought to his mother to roast for him, must have something to do with this request.
Notwithstanding Tezamet’s protest, the old man obtained for his wife the weapons that she required. When he had given them to her, she fetched an oxhide, and asked the two men to lie down on the ground while she stretched the hide over them and pegged it down. She told them that when she was ready she would cry out and would see if the enemy came, in which case they could assist her. She pegged the oxhide down securely and asked them if they could get out. Tezamet found a hole and began to crawl out, but his mother told him to get in again, and she pegged it down once more. She then raised her voice and called to the children, who came from their hiding place and killed Tezamet and his father.
As Tezamet was dying, he said to his parent, “Did I not tell you so, and you said I lied?”
The boys, after killing the two devils, took their aunt away to their father’s kraal.
THERE ONCE LIVED a man named Battuda, the weed smoker. One year there was s serve drought, and the weed did not grow. He said to his children, “What am I to do? I have no weed.”
They answered, “If you wish it, send us that we may search for some.”
Thereupon he sent the eight sons and three daughters, and said, If you secure weed, leave the girls with the man from whom you got it.”
They walked for a long time, nearly two months, but they did not find weed. They said to each other, “As we have not found that which we seek, it is best that we return.”
On their return they met two men, wanderers, who asked them what they sought. “We seek weed. We were sent by our father who is in great need of it, and we fear he will be dead by now.”
The wanderers replied, “Very well. Come with us, and we will take you to a man who has lots of it.”
Thus they travelled together, and when they arrived at one man’s village they met his son, who asked, “What do you seek?”
They replied, “Weed.”
“Only weed?” he asked.
“Yes, indeed,” they replied.
“If it should be offered to you, what would you give for it?” he asked further.
They answered, “Father said to us if you find a man with weed, leave all the girls with him.”
The man who owned the weed, and who was also named Battuda, rejoiced when he heard this and killed a goat for them. The next morning he filled eight bags with weed and gave them to Battuda’s sons. He also sent his four sons and two daughters, and said to his sons, “When you come to the man who desires the weed and find that his village is a pleasant place, leave the two girls with him.”
When Battuda’s eight sons returned with the weed, he rejoiced and praised them for what they had done and killed a goat for them. They said, “The man from whom we got the weed has also sent his four sons and tow daughters to see your abode and whether it is a pleasant place.”
He replied, “It is well.”
The next morning the four sons returned to their home and left their two sisters ar Battuda’s village.
The two families thereafter became friends and visited each other.
Some time later, Battuda said, “I am old. Take me to my friend that I may see before I die.” To this his children agreed. They went ahead, and he followed, until they arrived at Battuda’s village.
When Battuda heard the greetings and clapping of hands, he asked, “Whom is it you greet?”
One of his sons said, “It is the father of the girls who were left here – he who sought weed.”
He answered, “I am ashamed to meet him, as I married his daughters before I met him. Go and tell him that his friend Battuda is ill.” The sons went and told the man as they were desired to do by their father.
Thereupon the eldest son of the other said, “My father is also ill. I brought him, as he wished to see his friend who supplied him with weed. You say he is ill, therefore both are ill.”
The son of the other replied, “It is as you say. Enter the hut. We shall see tomorrow.”
They prepared food and, when they were about to take it to the visitors, there suddenly arose shouting and wailing, and the people of the village cried out, “Father is dead.”
Thereupon the visitors also set up a wailing and shouting, crying, “Father is dead. He died at the village which was not his home.”
Then all the people said, “We shall see tomorrow when we bury them.”
The next morning the people of the village said to the visitors, “it is daybreak. Go and choose a spot where you may bury your father; we shall do likewise for our father.”
But the sons of him whoo came on the visit replied, “Speak not thus. Let them be buried together, because they had become friends.”
Those of the village answered, “Have people ever been buried together?”
The visitors said, “You say people are not buried together. Have you known of a case where one man went to visit his friend and it was said, ‘He is dead,’ and that the other also died, thus both dying at the same time? Where did you ever see this?”
Thereupon they agreed to bury the bodies together.
They dug a deep grave for the two and carried the bodies thither. First they lowered into the grave the body of the man of the village and then that of the visitor. They then called out, “Bring stones that we may fill up the grave.”
When they were about to throw in the stones, the man who was lowered first called out, “I am not dead, take me out, and do not cover me with stones.” Then the body of the visitor said, “I am on top, I want to get out first.”
Thus both came out.
They went and killed a goat of which all ate. Then the old men called their sons together and said to them, “We wish to instruct you, our children. Do not do this: do not marry a girl before you ask her in marriage of her father.”
Then the old man of the village, whose name was Battuda, said to his sons, “I thought I would be clever. I did not wish to see the man whose daughters I had married without telling him. Therefore I said I was sick, hoping he would go home.”
Thus the custom arose that when a man desires to marry, he first informs the girl’s father of what he desires to do, for at the beginning this was not done.
A GIRL, it is said, once went to seek for onions. As she arrived at the place where they grew, she met several men, on of whom was half-blind, having only one eye. As she dug, the men helped her, digging also. When her sack was full, the men said to her, “Go, tell the other girls, that many of you may come.” So she went home and told her companions, and early the next morning they started. But a little girl followed them. The other girls said, “Let the little girl go back.”
Her elder sister protested, saying, “She runs by herself; you need not out her into your awa skin.”
So they all went on together and, having reached the onion field, began to dig. Now the little girl saw traces of feet, and she said to the one who had guided them thither, “Wonderful! Whence so many traces? Were you not alone here?”
The other replied, “I walked about and looked around; therefore there must be many of my foot prints.”
The child, however, did not believe that if the other girl had been alone the traces could be many, and she felt uneasy, for she was a wise little woman. From time to time she rose from her work and peeped about and once, while doing this found by chance an anteater’s hole.
Still further spying about, she perceived some men, but they did not see her. She then returned and continued digging with the other girls, without, however, saying anything; but in the midst of the work, she always rose and looked about her.
So the others asked her, “Why do you always spy about you and leave off digging? What a girl!” But she continued her work in silence. When she rose from it again, she saw the men approaching. As they drew near, the one-eyed man blew through a reed pipe the following:
“Today blood shall flow, blood flow, blood flow!”
The little girl understood what was blown on the reed. She said to the elder ones, while they were dancing, “Do you understand the tune that is blown on the reed?”
But they only said, “What a child she is!”
So she mixed in the dance with the others, but managed while so doing to tie her sister’s kaross to her own. In this manner they danced until the merriment became very noisy. Then the two sisters found an opportunity to slip away.
On their way out the little sister asked, “Do you understand the reed – I mean what is blown on it?”
The elder one answered, “No, I do not understand it.”
Then the little girl explained to her that the tune on the reed said, “Today blood shall flow!”
While they walked along, the little girl let her elder sister go first and she herself followed, walking backwards and carefully stepping in her sister’s marks, so that thus they left only one set of footprints, and these going in a contrary direction. In this manner they arrived at the anteater’s hole.
The men killed all those girls who had remained dancing with them. When the elder of the two who had escaped heard their wailing, she said, “Alas, my sister!”
But the younger one answered hr, “Do you think you would have lived if you had remained there?”
Now the one-eyed man was the first to miss the sisters, and he said to the other men, “Where may the two handsome girls be who danced with me?”
The others replied, “He lies. He has seen only with his single eye.” But the one-eyed man insisted that two girls were truly missing.
Then they went to find their tracks, but the footmarks had been rendered indistinct enough to puzzle them.
However, the men finally arrived at the anteater’s hole. They could not see that the foot marks went farther, and they peered into the hole but saw nothing. Then the one-eyed man looked also, and he saw the girls and cried, “There they sit!”
The others now looked again, but still saw nothing, for the girls had covered themselves with cobwebs.
One of the men then took an spear and, piercing through the upper part of the hole, hit the heel of the older girl. The wise little woman took hold of the spear, however, and wiped off the blood. The elder sister was about to cry, but the little one warned her not to make a sound.
When the one-eyed one spied again the little girl made big eyes at him. He said, “There she sits.”
The others looked too, but as they could see nothing they said, “He has only seen with his one eye.”
At last the men became thirsty and said to the one-eyed one, “Stay you here and let us go to drink, and when we have returned you may go also.”
When the one-eyed man was left alone there, the little girl said, conjuring him:
“You dirty son if your father,
Are you there? Are you alone not thirsty?
Oh, you dirty child of your father!
Dirty son of your father!”
“I am indeed thirsty,” said the one-eyed one and went away.
Then the two girls came out of the hole, and the younger one took her elder sister on her back and walked on. As they were going over the bare, treeless plain, the men saw them and said, “There they are, far off,” and ran after them.
When they came near, the two girls turned themselves into thorn trees, called “Wait-a-bit,” and the beads which they wore became gum on the trees. The men then ate of the gum and fell asleep. While they slept, the girls smeared gum over the men’s eyes and went away, leaving them lying in the sun.
The girls were already near their kraal, when the one-eyed man awoke and said, “Oh, the disgrace! Fie on thee!”
“Our eyes are smeared over; fie on thee, my brother!” said the others.
Then they removed the gum from their eyes, and hunted for the girls, but the two sisters reached home in safety and told their parents what had happened.
Then all the people lamented greatly, but they remained quietly at home and did not search for the other girls.
Projections actually involve a change of atomic structure. Consciousness simply changes its form. When projection is first accomplished, there is a strong charge of adrenaline in the body and high activity of the thyroid gland. There is a charge of sexual hormones which are also utilized in projection.
After projection is accomplished, however, there is a marked decline in chemical activity and hormone action, a drop in body temperature and a drop in blood pressure. The rapid eye movements noted by dream investigators cease entirely. The eye muscles are not used. The normal muscular activity that usually occurs in sleep vanishes. The physical body is in a deep trance state. The trance may also be masked by sleep, if the projection happens from a dream threshold.
According to the intensity of the projection and to the systems visited, the body may become more or less rigid when consciousness returns to it. This is a subtle difference in the way sugar molecules are utilized. Momentarily, the body uses less sugar. However, the sugar is important in fueling the consciousness on its journey. It also aids in connecting the consciousness to the body.
In other words, there is indeed a connection that is and must be partially physical, between the body and the traveling consciousness, and it is based upon a certain sugar molecule in a form not normally seen. Before conscious projections I would therefore recommend that you take a small amount of starchy or sugar food. A small snack before bed is a good idea from this viewpoint. Alcohol is of some benefit, though not to any great degree. Excellent results can be achieved in a dream-based projection during the day, in a nap.
Certain chemical changes must come about in the physical organism before projection can occur. Were it not for those, we would still be imprisoned within the corporeal image. You know that dreaming has a definite chemical basis, that chemicals built up during period of waking experience are released through dreams. Not only are these released, but they form a propelling action that allows energy to flow in the opposite direction. As chemical reactions allow the body to utilize energy and form physical materializations, so the excess built up becomes, then, a propelling force, allowing action to flow in what we would call subjective directions.
This same chemical reaction must also occur, only more strongly, before a legitimate projection can occur. This is one of the main reasons why deliberate projections are not more numerous. Usually the chemical access is used in normal dreaming. In periods of exuberant energy and well being, a more than normal excess accumulates. This can trigger a projection. In periods of momentary indisposition, however, the dreaming process may be blocked and the chemical excess accumulated. Again, a good time to try projection.
These chemical excesses are a natural byproduct of consciousness that is bound up in physical materialization. The more intense the characteristic experience of reality, the greater the chemical excess that is built up. Consciousness itself, when physically oriented, burns up the chemicals. The more intense the individual, the hotter the fire, so to speak, and the greater the chemical excesses released.
Released they must be, or the organism would not survive. Periods of intense activity may also generate this additional chemical propellant. Although this is generated through activity, it is released, making projections possible, in alternating periods of quietude and rest. There must be a disciplined focus, therefore, of this propellant. Periods of heightened sexual activity of a strong and deep nature will help. Periods of no sexual activity will also help, however. On the one hand, the chemical excess is built up as a result of great intensity, and in the latter case it is built up because psychic and sexual release has not been granted.
Eggs and asparagus are helpful as far as diet is concerned. I am obviously not suggesting a whole diet of eggs and asparagus. These plus fish oils are beneficial, however, but not when taken with acid foods.
I still suggest a more thorough examination of your dreams for many of them contain spontaneous projections. They are most apt to occur in the early hours, between 3:00 and 5:00 A.M. The body temperature drops at such times. Five in the afternoon is also beneficial from this standpoint. The drinking of pure water also facilitates projection, although for obvious reasons, the bladder should be empty. The north-south position is extremely important, and, indeed, is a necessity for any efficient dream recall. Energy is most easily utilized in this position for one thing, and this cuts unnecessary restrictions to a minimum.
There is vast difference between ordinary dreams and projections, whether or not the projections occur from the dream threshold. Dreams are constructed and sent upon their way. As you know, they maintain an independence within their own dimension.
Projections involve many more aspects of the whole self and are a mark that the personality is progressing in important ways. The inner senses are allowed their greatest freedom in projection states, and the self retains experience that it would not otherwise. When this knowledge becomes apart of the ordinary waking consciousness, then we have taken a gigantic step forward.
An almost automatic determination must be established, however, if conscious projections are to be anything but rare oddities. With some, the problem is somewhat different than it might be with others. These chemical excesses are used up, for one things, in creative work. You do this automatically. It goes without saying that your own work will gain immeasurably through the extended experience of projection. The yoga exercises allow you to draw an abundance – indeed, a superabundance – of energy. This energy, also, in chemical excesses that can be utilized in projections, without drawing energy away from your other work.
The expectation and knowledge that you are a part of all energy will allow you to realize that all the energy you require will be given. Your attitude toward what is possible determines what is possible for you in very definite terms.
Now, there are also electromagnetic changes (during projections) that can be perceived with instruments. Certain electrical fields will make themselves known under these conditions. The fields have always existed, but they will become apparent to physical instruments only when they are being crossed – in other words, at the very act of projection.
Other hints: A cool body temperature but with room temperature between 73.8 and 75.9 High humidity is poor. The colors of a room is important. Cool colors are best. Too warm colors are detrimental, being to closely allied with earthly conditions. In your climate, October, February and March are best. August can be beneficial, according to the weather. Too warm weather is detrimental.
MANY YEARS AGO There was a Calabar hunter named Effiong who lived in the bush. He killed plenty of animals and made much money. Every one in the country knew him, and one of his best friends was a man called Okun, who lived near him.
Effiong was very extravagant and spent much money in eating and drinking with everyone until at last he became quite poor, and he had to go out hunting again. But now his good luck seemed to have deserted him, for although he worked hard and hunted day and night, he could not succeed in killing anything.
One day, as he was very hungry, he went to his friend Okun and borrowed two hundred rods from him. He told him to come to his house on a certain day to get his money, and he told him to bring his gun, loaded, with him.
Now sometimes before this, Effiong had made friends with a leopard and a bush cat whom he had met in the forest while on one of his hunting expeditions; and he had also made friends with a goat and a rooster at a farm where he had stayed for the night. But, though Effiong had borrowed the money from Okun, he could not think how he was to repay it on the day he had promised. At last, however, he thought of a plan. The next day he went to his friend the leopard and asked him to lend him tow hundred rods, promising to return the amount to him on the same day as he had promised to pay Okun. He also told the leopard that, if he were absent when he came for his money, he could kill anything he saw in the house and eat it. The leopard was then to wait until the hunter arrived, when he would pay him the money. To this the leopard agreed.
The hunter then went to his friend the goat and borrowed two hundred rods from him in the same way. Effiong also went to his friends the bush cat and the rooster and borrowed two hundred rods from each of them on the same conditions, and told each one of them that if he were absent when they arrived, they could kill and eat anything they found about the place.
When the appointed day and left the house deserted. Very early in the morning, soon after he had begun to crow, the rooster remembered what the hunter had told him and he walked over to the hunter’s house but found no one there. On looking around, however, he saw corn on the ground and, being hungry, he commenced to eat.
About this time the bush cat also arrived, and not finding the hunter at home, he too looked about and very soon he espired the rooster who was busy picking up the grains of corn. So the bush cat went up very softly behind and pounced on the rooster and killed him at once, and begun to eat him.
By this time the goat had come for his money; but not finding his friend, he walked about until he came upon the bush cat who was intent upon his meal off the rooster that he did not notice the goat approaching; and the goat, being in rather a bad temper at not getting his money, at once charged at the bush cat and knocked him over, butting him with his horns. This the bush cat did not like at all, so as he was not big enough to fight the goat, he picked up the remains of the rooster and ran off with it to the bush; and so he lost money, as he did not await the arrival of the hunter. The goat was thus left master of the situation and started bleating. This noise attracted the attention of the leopard, who was on his way to receive payment from the hunter. As he got nearer, the smell of goat became very strong and, being hungry, for he had not eaten anything for some time, he approached the goat very carefully. Not seeing anyone, he stalked the goat and got nearer and nearer until he was within springing distance.
The goat, in the meantime, was quietly grazing, quite unsuspicious of any danger, as he was in the compound of his friend the hunter. Now and then he would say “Ba!” But most of the time he was busy eating the young grass and picking up the leaves which had fallen from a tree of which he was very fond. Suddenly the leopard sprang at the goat and, with one crunch at the neck, brought him down. The goat was dead almost at once, and the leopard started on his meal.
It was now about eight o’clock in the morning, and Okun, the hunter’s friend, having had his early morning meal, went out with his gun to receive payment of the two hundred rods he had lent to the hunter. When he got close to the house he heard a crunching sound. Being a hunter himself, he approached very cautiously and, looking over the fence, he saw the leopard only a few yards off busily engaged eating the goat. He took careful aim at the leopard and fired, whereupon the leopard rolled over dead.
The death of the leopard meant the four of the hunter’s creditors were now disposed of, as the bush cat had killed the rooster; the goat had driven the bush car away, who thus forfeited his claim; and in his turn the goat had been killed by the leopard, who had just been slain by Okun. This meant a saving of eight hundred rods of Effiong, but he was not content with this. As soon as he heard the report of the gun he ran out from where he had been hiding all the time and found the leopard lying dead with Okun standing over it. Then in very strong language Effiong began to upbraid Okun and asked him why he had killed his old friend the leopard. He said that nothing would satisfy him and that he would report the whole matter to the king, who would no doubt deal with Okun as he thought fit. When Effiong said this, Okun was frightened and begged him not to say anything more about the matter, as the king would be angry; but the hunter was obdurate and refused to listen to him. At last Okun said, “If you will allow the whole thing to drop and will say no more about it, I will make you a present of the two hundred rods you borrowed from me.” This was just what Effiong wanted; but still he did not give in at once. Eventually, however, he agreed and told Okun he might go and that he would bury the body of his friend the leopard.
Directly Okun had gone, instead of burying the body, Effiong dragged it inside the house and skinned it very carefully. The skin he put out to dry in the sun and covered it with wood ash, and the body he ate. When the skin was well cured, the hunter took it to a distant market where he sold it for much money.
And now, whenever a bush cat sees a rooster he always kills it and does so by right, as he takes the rooster in part payment of the two hundred rods which the hunter never paid him.
Moral: Never lend money to people, because if they cannot pay they will try to kill you or get rid of you in some way, either by poison or by setting bad jujus for you.
Or seem to waken – in the middle of the night, try to get out of the body. Simply try to get out of bed without moving the body and go into another room.
This is a pleasant and easy method. With some experience you will discover that you can maintain control, walk out of the apartment and outside. You may then attempt normal locomotion or levitate. There is little strain with this method. Keep it in mind so that you are alert to the initial favorable circumstances. You may be half awake. You may be in a false awakening. The method will work in either case. You can, if you want to, look back at your body.
You must want to do this, however. Often, you do not want to see the body by itself, so to speak, and so choose methods that make this more difficult. Just this one exercise will sharpen your control greatly. It is an ABC. This experience is also less startling to the ego than a more abrupt projection, and the ordinary nature of the activities – walking into the next room, for example – will be reassuring. You are more calm in your own surroundings.
Now it is possible for someone within the body to perceive someone who is not, but it is not usual. The perceiver must be a person of strong psychic abilities or the projecting personality must be driven by high emotional intensity to make himself/herself known.
A young man of early race once ascended a hill in order to hunt. As he looked around for game, However, he became sleepy – so sleepy, in fact, that he decided to lie down. What had happened to him? He wondered, as he stretched himself out on the ground, near a water hole. Never before had he been thus overcome by sleep.
As he slept, a lion, exhausted by the noonday heat , came to the pool to quench its thirst. The lion espied the boy lying there asleep and seized him. Startled, the boy awoke and, realizing that he had indeed been seized by a lion, he decided that it would be best not to stir, lest the lion bite and kill him. So he waited to see what the lion would do, for it was clear that the animal thought he was dead.
The lion carried him to a zwart-storm tree. There it laid him in the tree, in the lower branches however, and in such fashion that his legs protruded. Apparently the lion thought he would continue to be thirsty if he consumes the boy’s body immediately and that it would be better first to go down to the pool and drink some more water.
Before leaving, the lion pressed the boy’s head firmly between the branches of the zwart-storm tree.
No sooner had the lion left than the boy moved his head ever so little. The lion noticed the movement, however, as he looked back, and was puzzled. How could the head move after it had been forced so firmly between the branches of the tree? Perhaps he had not fastened the boy securely enough.
Just then the boy fell over. So the lion returned and, once again, pushed the boy’s head into the middle of the branches of the zwart-tree. As he did so, tears came into the boy’s eyes and the lion licked them away.
The boy lay there in pain, for a stick was pressing into the hollow at the back of his head. He faced the lion steadily with closed eyes and turned his head just a little. To the lion it seemed again as if the boy had moved, and again he licked away the tears from the boy’s eyes. Puzzled, the lion trod once more upon the boy’s head and pressed it down in order to be certain that the head might have moved because the body had not been properly confined, and not from any other reason.
The boy, now fearing that the lion suspected that he was not dead, remained absolutely motionless, in spite of the fact that the stick was cruelly piercing his head.
The lion, finally satisfied that the body was now firmly and properly secured, moved a few steps away. Then he looked back. The boy opened his eyes ever so little and through his eyelashes watched what the lion was doing.
The lion then ascended the hill and was about to proceed down to the water on the other side.
The boy, on his part, turned his head gently, in order to see if the lion had really departed. But, as he did so, he saw the lion peering from behind the top of the hill. He had comeback to take one more look at the boy, for he had suspected that the boy might possibly be only feigning death. That is why he had reascended the hill to take one more look. Since, however, the boy still lay there immobile, the lion thought he might quickly run to the water hole, drink his fill, and return without delay to consume the body. The lion was hungry enough but also not a little thirsty.
All this time the boy lay there quietly watching to see the lion what the lion was going to do next. He saw its head and shoulders finally turn and disappear; but, before he made the slightest movement, he wanted to be absolutely certain that the lion had really gone and would not return to peer again over the hill. He knew that the lion is a thing of cunning and that the animal had been suspicious of the movement which his head had made.
The boy lay there a long time without moving, and only when he was positive that the lion had truly gone did he arise and spring forward to a different place. But he did this circumspectly, running in a zigzag direction, so that the lion could not smell him out and know where he had gone. That is why he ran this way and that and did not run straight toward his own house. He knew that when the lion returned and missed him, he would immediately seek for him, following this spoor.
As soon as the boy came to the top of the hill, he called out to his people that he had just been “lifted up” – while the sun had stood high, he had been “lifted up.” More he would not say. They went therefore to gather together all the many harte-beest skins they possessed so that they might roll him in them, for he had just been “lifted up,” while the sun had stood high. He wanted his people to do this, for he was certain that the lion, when it returned and missed him, would seek and track him out. It is the way of a lion, with anything it has killed, not to leave it until he has eaten it. So insistently the boy besought his people to get the harte-beest skins and the mats and roll him up in them.
The people thereupon did this for the young boy, for it was their hearts’ young boy who had made the request and they did not wish the lion to eat him. Accordingly, they hid well, in suck fashion as to prevent the lion from getting hold of him. Indeed, they loved this young boy greatly and they announced that they would cover him over with the huts’ sheltering bushes: all this they would do, to prevent the lion, when he arrived, from seizing their hearts’ young boy.
Everyone now went out to look for some kuisse and when they found some, they dug it up, took it hime, and baked it.
At just about this time, and old Bushman, who had gone out to get some wood for his wife so that she might make a fire with which to cook the kuisse, espied the lion as he came over the top of the hill at the exact place where the young boy had appeared. Immediately he told his house folk about it. Speaking, he said, “Do you see what it is that stands there yonder on the top of the hill, at the place where the young boy came over?”
Thereupon the young boy’s mother, looking, exclaimed, “Not on any account must you permit that lion to come into our huts! You must shoot it and kill is before it ever comes that far!”
So the people slung on their quivers and went to meet the lion. Again and again they shot at him, but he would not die.
Then another woman addressed the people, saying, “In what manner are you shooting at this lion that you cannot manage to kill him?”
Bout one of the older men replied, “Can you not see that this lion must be a sorcerer? It will not die despite our shooting at it, for it insists upon having the young boy that it carried off.”
The people now threw children for the lion to eat, but the lion merely looked at them and left them alone.
Again and again the people shot at the lion but all to no avail. The lion remained unharmed and kept looking for the young boy. After a while, some of the people said, “Bring is some assegais, so that we can spear it.” So they began spearing it while continued shooting. But, despite the shooting and the spearing, the lion remained unharmed and continued its search for the young boy, for the young boy whose tears it had licked. It wanted that boy, none other.
Coming upon the huts, it tore them asunder and broke them to pieces, seeking for the young boy. The people addressed one another in terror saying, “Do you not see that the lion will not eat the children we have thrown him? Can you not see that he must be a sorcerer?”
But some people answered, “Give the lion a girl. Perhaps it will eat her and then go away.”
The lion, however, did not touch the girl. It wanted the young boy it had carried off, none other.
Everyone was now completely bewildered, for no one knew in what manner to act toward the lion to persuade it to leave. It was late in the day and the people had been spearing and shooting at it since the morning; yet the lion remained unharmed and would not die. It kept walking about, searching for the young boy.
“We no longer know what to do to induce it to leave,” the people said.
‘We have offered children and a young girl but the lion has always refused them. It desires only the young boy it carried off.”
Finally, in desperation, some of the people said, “Tell the young boy’s mother what is happening. Tell her that, despite her great love for the young boy, she must take him and deliver him to the lion, even though he be the child of her heart. She herself must realize that the sun is about to set and the lion is still threatening us, that it will not depart. It insists upon having the young boy.”
The mother heard and answered, “Be it so. Give my child to the lion. In no wise, however, must you allow the lion to eat him, in no wise must you allow the lion to continue walking about here. You must kill him and lay him upon my child. Let the lion die upon my son.”
When the young boy’s mother had thus spoken, the people unwrapped the young boy from the harte-beest skins in which he had been rolled and gave him to the lion. The lion immediately seized him and bit him to death, but as he was thus biting him to death, the people shot and stabbed the lion.
Finally the lion spoke and said that he was ready to die, for now he had secured the boy he had all the time been seeking; he had got hold of him.
And so the lion died, and both the boy and the lion lay there dead, next to each other.
There are some notes I wanted to give you concerning dreams in which you feel certain you are normally awake. When these dreams are unusually vivid, then the ego is aware and participating, but generally it is not using its critical faculties. As you know, you can become critically alert, but when you do so, you realize that you are not in your normal waking condition.
In awake-seeming dreams you are indeed awake, but within a different psychological framework , indeed, within a different framework of reality. You are operating at a high level of awareness, and using the inner senses. These enable you to perceive an added depth of dimension which is responsible for the vividness and sense of exhilaration that often occurs within the kind of dream. The next step, of course, is to allow the ego to awaken its critical faculties while within this state. You are then able to realize that while you are indeed awake as you seem, you are awake while the body is asleep.
When this occurs, you will be able to use your normal abilities in addition to those of the dream condition. You will be certain of your identity, realize that the physical self is sleeping or in dream state and that the inner self is fully awake. This represents a definite increase in the scope of consciousness and a considerable expansion over the usual limitations set by you upon yourself.
Only then can you fully begin to manipulate the conditions that exist and communicate this knowledge that you receive to the ego. For the time, you see, the ego becomes a direct participator in such experience, at least to a degree.
Almost all; of our dream experiences do involve projection of one kind or another. These vary in intensity, type and even duration as any other experience vary. It takes a good deal of training and competence to operate with any real effectiveness within these situations.
All in all, the intellect plays some part, but the intuitional qualities are most important. There are chemical changes, also, that occur with the physical body when projections happen, and electromagnetic variations. These vary according to the form in which the projection occurs.
The projected form does make some impression upon the physical system. It is possible for it to be detected. It is a kind of pseudo-image, materialistically speaking, but it has definite electromagnetic reality and chemical properties. Animals have sensed such apparitions. They react to the chemical properties and build up to the (perception of) the image from these.
These chemical properties are more diffused in such an apparition than in a physical form, however. The chemical composition of a storm, perhaps, will give you an idea of what I mean. They cause small disturbances in the physical system. As a rule, they are not solid, in the same way that clouds are not solid, and yet they have shape and to a certain extent, boundaries and movement. They definitely have a reality, though you cannot usually perceive it with the physical senses.
Perhaps this diffused quality is the important difference(from your point of view) between an apparition and a physical form. There is an atomic structure, but in some ways it is less complete than the physical one. There is always a minute difference in the body’s weight when the individual is projecting.
THERE ONCE LIVED a certain man called Akwasi-the-Jealous-One, and his wife was Aso. He did not want anyone to Aso or anyone to talk to her, so he went and built a small settlement for Aso to live in. No one ever went into that village.
Now he, Akwasi- the-Jealous-One, could not beget children. Because of that, if he and his wife lived in town, someone would take her away. Now the sky-god advised the young men, saying, “Akwasi-the-Jealous-One has been married to Aso for a very, very long time. She has not conceived by him and borne a child; therefore he who is able, let him go and take Aso and, should she conceive by him, let him take her as his wife.” All the young men tried their best to lay hands on her, but not one was able.
Now Kwaku Ananse, the spider, was there watching these events and he said, “I can go to Akasi-the-Jealous-One’s village.”
the sky-god said, “Can you really do so?”
Ananse said, “If you will give me what I require.”
The sky-god, “What kind of thing?” Ananse replied, “Medicine for gun and bullets.” And the sky-god gave them to him.
Then Ananse took the powder and bullets to various small villages, saying, “The sky-god has bade me bring powder and bullets to you, and you are to go and kill meat, and on the day I shall return here I shall take it and depart.” He distributed the powder and bullets to receive all the meat which they had killed. Father Ananse took the meat and palm-leaf basket, set them on his head, and set out on the path leading to Akwasi-the-Jealous-One’s settlement. When he reached the stream from which Akwasi and his wife drank, he picked out some meat and put it in the stream.
Ananse strode hard, carrying the palm-leaf basket full of meat, and passed through the main entrance leading into Akwasi-the-Jealous-One’s compound. Aso saw him. She said, “Akwasi-e! Come and look at something which is coming to the house here. What can it be?”
Anase said, “It is the sky-god who is sending me, and I am waery, and I am coming to sleep here.”
Akwasi-theJealous-One, “I have heard my lord’s servant.”
Aso said to Ananse, “Father man, some of your meat has fallen down at the main entrance to the compound.”
The spider said, “Oh, if you happen to have a dog, let him go and take it and chew it.” So Aso went and got it and gave it to her husband. Then Ananse said, “Mother, set some food on the fire for me.” Aso put some on, and Ananse said, “Mother, is it fufuo that you are cooking or etol?
Aso replied, “Futuo.”
Ananse said, “Then it is too little; go and fetch a big pot.”
Aso went and fetched a big one, and Ananse said, “Come and get meat.”
There were forty hindquarters of great beasts. He said, “Take only these and out them in the pot. If you had a pot big enough, I would give you enough meat to chew to make your teeth fall out.”
Aso finished preparing the food, turned it out of the pot, and placed it on a table, splashed water, and out it beside the rest of the food. Then Aso took her portion and went and set it down near the fire, and the men went and sat down beside the table. They touched the backs of each other’s hands and ate out of the same dish. All the time they were eating, Kwaku Ananse said, “There is no salt in this fufuo.“
Akwasi said too Aso, “Bring some.”
But Ananse said, “Not at all. When the woman is eating, you tell her to get up to bring salt. Do you yourself go and bring it.”
Akwasi arose from the table, and Ananse looked into his bag and took out a pinch of purgative medicine and put it in the fufuo. Then he called Akwasi, saying, “Come back for I have brought some with me.”
When Akwasi came Ananse said, “Oh, I shall eat no more; I am full.” Akwasi, who suspected nothing, continued eating.
When they had finished their meal, Akwasi said, “Friend, we and you are sitting here and yet we do not know your name.”
Ananse replied, “I am called ‘Rise-Up-and-Make-Love-to-Aso.'”
Akwasi said, “I have heard, and you, Aso, have you heard this man’s name?”
Aso replied, “Yes, I have heard.”
Akwasi rose up to go and prepare one of the spare bedrooms and to make everything comfortable. He said, “Rise-Up-and Make-Love-to-Aso, this is your room, go and sleep there.”
The spider said, “I am the soul-washer to the sky-god and I sleep in a open veranda-room. Since mother bore me and father begat me, I have never slept in a closed bedroom.”
Akwasi said, “Where, then, will you sleep?”
He replied, “Were I to sleep in this open veranda-room here, to do so would be to make you equal to the sky-god, for it would mean that I was sleeping in the sky-god’s open veranda room. Since I am never to sleep in anyone’s open room except the of a sky-god, and since that is so, I shall just lie down in front of this closed sleeping-room where you repose.”
The man took out a sleeping mat and laid it there for him. Akwasi and his wife went to rest, and Ananse, too, lay down there. Ananse lay there and he slipped in the crossbar of the bedroom door. Ananse lay there and took his musical bow and sang:
“Akuamoa Ananse, today we shall achieve something, today.
Anase, the child of N sia, the mother of N yame, the sky-god, today we shall achieve something, today.
Ananse, the soul-washer to N yame, the sky-god, today I shall seesomething.
Then he ceased playing his sepirewa, and he laid it aside and lay down. He had spelt for some time when he heard Akwasi-the-Jealous-One calling. “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! Akwasi-the Jealous-One was dying. The medicine had taken effect on him, but he called, “Father man!” Not a sound in reply except dinn! At last he said, “Rise-Up-and-Make-Love-to-Aso!”
The spider said, “M! M! M!”
Akwasi Siad, “Open the door for me.” Ananse opened the door, and Akwasi went out. And the spider rose up and went into the room there.
He said, “Aso, did you not hear what your husband said?”
She replied, “What did he say?”
Ananse replied, “He said I must rise up and make love to you.”
Aso said, “You don’t lie.”
And he did it for her, and he went and lay down.
That night Akwasi rose up nine times. The spider also went nine times to where Aso was. When things became visible next morning. Ananse went off.
It would be about two moons later when Aso’s belly became large. Akwasi questioned her saying, “Why has your belly got like this? Perhaps you are ill, for you know that I who live with you here am unable to beget children.” Aso replied, “You forget that man who came here whom you told to rise up and make love to Aso. Well, he took me and I have conceived by him.”
Akwasi-the-Jealous-One said, “Rise up, and let me take you to go and give you to him.” They went to the sky-god’s town and Akwasi went and told the sky-god what had happened, saying, “A subject of yours whom you sent slept at my house and took Aso, and she has conceived by him.”
The sky-god said, “All of my subjects care roofing the huts. Go and point out the one you mean.” They went off, and the spider was sitting on a ridge-pole.
Aso said, “There he is!” Then Ananse ran farther on.
And again Aso said, “There he is!” Then Ananse fell down from up there where he was sitting.
Now that day was Friday. Ananse said, “I, who wash the sky-god’s soul – you have taken your hand and pointed it at me, so that I have fallen down and got red earth on me.” Immediately the attendants seized hold of Akwasi-the-Jealous-One and made him sacrifice a sheep. When Akwasi-the-Jealous-One had finished sacrificing the sheep, he said to the sky-god, “Here is the woman; let Ananse take her.” So Ananse took Aso, but as for the infant, they killed it, cut it into pieces, and scattered them about.
Whatever information I can give you will be of great practical benefit. I do not want you traveling about unless you know what you’re doing. Again I want to mention the matter of subconscious fabrications. Initially particularly, you will meet with them. You must remember that you are wandering in completely different dimensions, and the rules with which you are familiar simply do not apply.
You may, then, encounter images that are subsciously formed, quite valid images that belong in another dimension; or constructions created by others in other systems. For any control at all, you must learn to distinguish one from the other. Again, if you meet a disturbing image, you must first will it to disappear. If it is a subconscious construction of your own, it will vanish. But if you do not will it to disappear or realize its nature, then you must deal with it.
I have told you that the form in which you are traveling can be a tip off to you. If your levitation experience seems to carry you outside of the solar system, then you know that you are in the third form and that your abilities for the time are almost limitless, comparatively speaking. Any image you see here must be accepted. It does no good to call these forms hallucinations, for they are no more hallucinations than the chair in which my wife Dorian now sits. Respect physical reality. ‘Whether or not the automobile is a sensory hallucination, it can kill you.’ And I tell you that whether or not these projection images are hallucinations, they can be dangerous and you must respect the reality in which they exist. I want to be sure that you realize that some of these constructions will belong to other systems. You are safe as long as you do not meddle. You may explore, and freely, and that is all.
Now, here are my instructions. You may induce a medium trance in whatever way you choose. On occasion, this will be almost spontaneous, as you know. For best results in the beginning, make a projection attempt when you feel slightly drowsy, but pleasantly so. When you have induced the trance state, then begin to examine your own subjective feelings until you find recognition of the inner self.
This involves a recognition of yourself as distinct from the flesh fibers in which you reside. Then, begin to imagine this inner self rising upward. You should experience at this point an internal sense of motion. This motion may be from side to side as you gently shake yourself loose.
It may, instead, be a rushing upward. Whichever motion you experience, there will be a moment when you feel your identity and consciousness definitely withdrawing from the physical organism. Before you begin the experiment, the suggestion should also be given that the physical organism will be well protected and comfortable.
When you feel you consciousness withdrawing, the first step is this: Forget the physical body or what you are to do with it. Will yourself out in a quick motion. There is no need to experience the hallucinations mentioned by Fox ( in his book, Astral Projection). If the projection is a success, you will instantly lose contact with the body using this method. You simply will not be in it.
It will be far from lifeless, of course. Its maintenance is being controlled by the consciousness of the individual cells and organs of which I have spoken. I will give you alternate methods of projection, but I will be concerned now with what you can expect the first few moments after leaving the body.
Once you are out of the body, then you are dealing with a different kind of reality, but the experience is as valid as any other. You may or may not have the sensation of traveling through doors or windows. This is dependent upon the kind of projection involved. The molecular structure of the projecting self is of a different nature than that of the physical body. There is no change in the physical nature of the door, for example. The molecular structure of the traveling self changes.
There is no danger of not returning to the body, generally speaking. If in your projection you seem to be flying past treetops, then you are doing so…. You can meet and speak with others on some of these excursions. It is possible, with training, to arrange such meetings. For any kind of scientific proof, of course, this would be a necessary preliminary.
Remember that I told you, you may visit not only the past, present or future as it exists or will exist in your terms, but you may also visit realities that never existed physically. In our Blogs, I mentioned that intensity regulated the ‘duration’ of experience. Now, many events that were only imagined never took place physically, yet they exist. They simply are not a part of your definition of reality. You may, therefore, visit a museum that was planned in the sixteenth century but never built. Such a museum has a reality as valid as the house in which you live.
I have been speaking of projection from the trance state. Projection from a dream is something else again, and when executed successfully, you have a fine example of the self as it changes the focus of awareness. Here the critical consciousness can be fully alert while the body sleeps. Spontaneous. Unrecalled projections of this kind happen often. It is beneficial that they be carried out by the conscious wish of the projector. You learn, therefore, to manipulate your own consciousness and to experience its mobility. Quite simply, such projections allow you practice in dealing with realities that you will meet when you no longer operate in the physical system.
You remember that I listed briefly the three forms used during projections. In the first form, you usually use certain inner senses. In the second form, you use more of these, and in the third form you attempt to use all of them, though very rarely is this successful. You should notice the overall form of perception that you seem to be using. You automatically shield yourselves from stimuli that are too strong for your own rate of development. This kind of balancing can lead to an unevenness of experience, however, in any given projection.
As you know, it is almost impossible for you to be aware of the full perceptions possible, for the ego would not stand for it. Often, even in simple dreams, however, you will feel concepts or understand a particular piece of information without a word being spoken. In some projections, you will also experience a concept, and, at first, you may not understand what is happening. In these, you experience as actual the innermost reality of a given concept.
Dorian ( in the dream the night before) was in the third form, and she did project beyond our solar system. This was still a projection within the physical universe, however. She was given information that she did not remember. When you explore the inside of a concept, you act it out. You form a temporary but very vivid image production. If Dorian’s experience had been only this, it still would have been pertinent, for when you understand a concept in such a way the knowledge is never forgotten. It becomes part of your physical cells and your electromagnetic structure.
I want to make this clearer, however. Suppose that you suddenly understand the concept of oneness with the universe, and that this inner sensing of concepts is to be used. You would then construct dream images, a multitudinous variety of shapes and forms meant to represent the complicated forms of life. You would then have the experience of entering each of these lives. You would not think of what it was like to be a bird. You would momentarily be one. This does involve a projection. A normal projection would involve one of the three body forms.
Some experience, then will be simple attempts to use the inner senses more fully. They may appear to be projections, and as we go along, I will tell you how to distinguish between them.
You will be able to look back and see your physical body upon the bed on some occasions, and in other cases you will not be able to do this. In the first body form, for example, you can look back and see the physical body. If you project from this form into the next, in order to intensify the experience, then from this second form you will not see the physical one. You will be aware of it, and you may experience some duality. In the third form, you will no longer be aware of the physical body, and you will not see it.
In the third form, your experiences will be most vivid. They may involve you in other systems beside our own, and you will have little contact with the physical environment. For this reason, projections in the third form are the most difficult to maintain. There are dangers that do not exist when the other two forms are used.
Using the third form, there could be a tendency for you not to recognize your own physical situation. It would be difficult to carry the memories of the present ego personality with you. This third form is the vehicle of the inner self. The disorientation that it feels is the same that it will feel when the physical body is deserted at the point of death. This disorientation is only temporary, and when at death the form is severed from the physical body, then all the memories and identity within the electromagnetic structure become part of the inner self. This form is sometimes used for purposes of instruction, however, or to acquaint the whole personality with the circumstances that strongly affect it.
Most of your projections will be in the first and second form, in any case. Usually you will project from the physical body into the first form and then, perhaps, into the second. Occasionally, this will happen and you will not know it, despite all your attempts to ascertain your circumstances.
There are ways of knowing when you switch forms, of course, and we shall see that you get this information. You should have several projections within the first and second forms in the following months if your development continues at present rate.
I want to mention the difference in experience and sensation between projections from a dream state and those from the trance state and also what I call awake-seeming dreams, for there are many things here that you do not know, and they are fairly important.
An Elephant fell madly in love with a Zulu woman Cisse and married her. Cisse’s two brothers came to visit her secretly but, for fear of him, she told Elephant she wanted to fetch some wood and then went and hid the two brothers in the firewood.
Then she said, “Since I have married into the kraal, I beg you to tell me, has the one-without-hair-at-the-knees been slaughtered for me?” {That would be a fully grown ram.} The blind mother-in-law answered her, “Things that were not spoken about of old, these she now speaks of and the smell of a Cisse is present.” Thereupon the woman answered her mother-in-law, “Should I not anoint myself in the old way and sprinkle myself with incense?” And the mother-in-law said, “Hum, things are being said by my son’s sweetheart which she did not say of old.”
Just then, Elephant, who had been in the field, came home and behaved as though he had found out that the woman’s two brothers had come. He rubbed himself against the house. Then the wife said, “What I did not do of old, now I do. Which day did you slaughter for me the ram lying far back in the kraal, and when did I anoint myself and sprinkle myself with my incense? Thus the woman spoke to him. Thereupon the mother-in-law said to him, “Things which were not spoken about of old are spoken now; therefore grant her her desire.”
So the one-without-hair-at-the-knees was slaughtered. And the woman herself fried it. That night she asked her mother-in-law, “How do you breathe when you sleep the sleep of life, and how do you breathe when you sleep the sleep of death?” And the mother-in-law said, “Hum, this is an evening rich in conversation. When we sleep the sleep of death, we breathe sui sui, and when we sleep the sleep of life, we breathe choo awaba, choo awaba.”
Then the woman prepared all her things as well as herself, while the others just slept. When they snored heavily and slept the sui sui sleep, she rose and said to her brothers, “The people are sleeping the sleep of death, let us make ready!” So they rose and went out, and she uncovered the mat-house and took all the necessary things and said, “Any noice that is made means that someone wants me to die.” So all things were done in silence. Then with the two brothers, who stood ready to go, she went among the flock, leaving her husband just a cow, a sheep, and a goat. Then she instructed the cow, “Do not cry as though you were only one, if you do not desire my death.” She spoke to the sheep and the goat in a like manner. Then they moved on with all the flock behind them. Now, the animals that had been left behind, cried out and cried out noisily in the night, as though all of them were still there, and Elephant thought all of them were really there. When he arose at daybreak, he saw his wife had left with everything, so grabbed a stick and said to his mother, “If I fall, the earth will resound with a thud.” And he pursued them.
When his wife and her brothers saw him coming close, they turned aside bout could not penetrate a rock which barred the way. Thereupon the woman said, “We are people behind whom a big company of travelers is following, so, rock of my forefathers, spread out to both side for us!” And the rock parted and then, when all had gone through, closed again.
Elephant, too, soon arrived and said to the rock, “Rock of my forefathers, cleave yourself for me too!” Then it spread itself and then he had entered, closed again. There Elephant died. The earth resounded with a thud. His mother at home said, as it was predicted by my oldest son, so it has happened. The earth has just resounded with a thud.”
I want to give you some idea of the conditions you may expect to meet in any successful projections, so that you will be prepared to some extent. For simplicity’s sake, we will call the body forms discussed in our last Blog forms one, two and three.
Form one will spring out of an ordinary dream state. In spontaneous projections, you may become conscious in form one, project, return to the ordinary dream state and from there project again several times. You can expect these particular projections to be difficult to interpret now, though you may find the experience intact in the middle of any given dream record.
Your excursions with form one will be within our own system, largely connected to the earth, although past, present and future may be involved. You may, for example, visit New York in the year 3000.
The projections here are fairly short in duration, though exceptionally clear. You may encounter phantoms from your own subconscious, however, and they will seem exceedingly real. If you realize that you are projecting, you may simply order any unpleasant phantoms to disappear, and they will do so. You may banish a nightmare also, if you realize that it is a product of your own subconscious. If you treat it as reality, however, then you must deal with it as such until you realize its origin or return to the ordinary dream state.
In form two you will not, as a rule, encounter any subconscious phantoms. Ordinary dream elements will not be as frequent, not will they intrude as much. A longer duration of projection is possible. The vividness is extraordinary. Here you will begin to perceive quite clearly constructions that are not your own, where earlier these are but dimly glimpsed. A certain period of orientation will be necessary, simply because these other constructions may seem bewildering. Some will exist in your future. Some may have existed in your past, and some were thought of, but never materialized.
But the reality of all of these constructions will be equally vivid, you see, for they are, indeed, equally real. I will give you a simple example. You may find yourself in a room with certain people. Later, upon awakening, you realize that both the people and setting belong to a particular sequence in a novel. You think then: ‘This was no projection, then, but only a dream.”
It may, however, be a valid projection. The room and people exist but not in a way that you endorse as reality. They exist in another dimension, but as a rule you cannot perceive it. (To Dorian:) The paintings that you will paint exist now. It is possible for you to project yourself into one of your own future landscapes. This would not be an imaginative projection. This is what I am trying to tell you.
You may find yourself, for example, in the middle of a battle that was once planned in some general’s mind, a battle that never materialized in physical reality. In such case, incidentally, you were not a part of the battle and could not be harmed. However, you might be attracted enough to project yourself spontaneously into the body of one of the soldiers, in which case you could experience pain until your own fear pulled you back. As you learn control, such mistakes vanish.
There are various situations you must learn to handle, attractions and repulsions which could pull you willy-nilly in any direction. Experience will teach you how to handle these. What is needed is a steady maintenance of identity under conditions which will be new as far as your conscious awareness is concerned. I cannot emphasize too strongly that projections into other dimensions do occur. Many such instances are often considered chaotic dreams because there is no way to check them against physical events since they did not occur in physical terms.
It is possible for you to project to a future event in which you will be involved and by an act that you make in the projection, alter the course that this future will take. Such an action would therefore appear to happen twice, once in your present and once in your future. But in the future, you would be the one whose course is altered from this traveling self from the past.
Let us take an example: While asleep, you project into 3082. There you see yourself considering various courses of action. For a moment you are aware of a sense of duality as you view this older self. You communicate with this other self; and we will go into this sort of thing more deeply in another Blog. In any case, your future self heeds what you say. Now in the actual future you are the self who hears the voice of a past self, perhaps in a dream, or perhaps in a projection into the past.
Gulari once found some snakes fighting. As he came near and looked at them he saw that one snake had been killed. He reproved them. He said, “Go away.”
One snake gave him a charm, saying, “By means of this charm you will hear all things. When the rat talks, you will hear it. When the cow talks, you will hear it. You will hear everything that is said.” The man passed on. He came to the village.
At night Gulari’s wife Wadda locked the house so that there was no open place. All was quite dark. She and her husband Gulari lay down to sleep. A mosquito came to the door. It examined the house and found no way in. The mosquito exclaimed, “They have locked the house very tightly. How can one get in?”
The Gulari understood and laughed.
“What are you laughing about?” asked Wadda his wife.
“Nothing,” said Gulari.
Later, a rat came. He examined the door. He found it fast closed and left it. Then he tried the eaves of the house and got in. He searched everywhere. He wanted butter but he found none. He said, “Oh, where has that woman stored her butter?” Gulari laughed.
His wife Wadda asked him, What are you laughing at?”
He answered, “Nothing.”
In the morning Gulari went to his barn. He let the cattle out. When it was nearly milking time his wife Wadda came to milk. When she arrived the cow said, “Of course you come, but you will not milk me today. I shall withhold my milk. My calf will drink it afterward.” Gulari laughed.
Wadda asked him, “what are you laughing at?”
He answered, “Nothing.”
Wadda left the cow. She returned to the village. Then the calf sucked its mother.
The next day Wadda again came to milk. The cow again with held its milk. In the afternoon Wadda’s child was ill for want of milk. She brought it to the barn and she talked to Gulari. She said, “That calf will kill my daughter.”
The cow interrupted, “What! My daughter will kill your daughter?”
Gulari laughed.
Wadda asked him, “What are you laughing about?”
He answered, “Nothing.”
When it was nearly sunset his wife said, “I shall get a divorce.”
She called all the people. They came to her husband’s place. They seated themselves. They said to the wife:
“You Wadda and your husband Gulari talk. We will listen.”
Wadda talked. She said to the people, “When we lie down to sleep, my husband Gulari always laughs at me without any reason. When I ask him why he does it he hides the reason from me. That is why I object to him?”
Then they asked Gulari, “Why do you laugh at Wadda? Tell us.”
He answered, “Nothing.”
They said again, “Tell us.”
He answered, “Men, if I tell it, I will die.”
They said, “Tell it Gulari! Do not hide it.”
He replied, “Oh, men, I will not tell it. I will surely die if I do.””
They urged him. When he was worn out he told them. Gulari said to the people, “This is the reason why I laughed when we were lying down in the house. After a while at night the mosquito would talk. It would say, “Who is this woman that has locked up her house so tightly?’ Where can one get in?” That is why I laughed.”
Gulari died, as he had said. The people cried. Some of them dug a grave. As they were about to bury the body a certain snake hastened to the desolate spot. It wrapped itself around the body. It stuck its tail in the nose of the dead man Gulari. He sneezed. the people were amazed. Some of them said, “Is it his god?”
Others replied, “Why ask who it is?”
When Gulari stood up the snake left.
When Guklari had quite recovered he travelled through the desolate places. He found the snake under a tree. The snake said, “But why did you tell? Long ago when I gave you that charm I told you it would make you hear all things.”
Gulari replied, “They urged me, so I told them.”
The snake said, “Oh!”
Then the snake gave him another charm, saying, “You will hear the words of the birds which eat the corn, if another bird came near, the first one would say, “Bird! Do not come. We shall be seen. I am eating quietly. This is my place. Let us separate. The field is large.”
After a while another bird would reply, “What! I shall be found out?” A third would break in, “How will you get out? Perhaps they will find us.”
“Let him go.” cried one bird.
“I am not going,” said another. Gulari laughed there in the corn field.
It is said that there was once a great town in a certain place which had many people living in it. They lived only upon grain. One year there was a great famine.
Now in that town there was a poor man, by the name Mbenque, and his wife. One day they went in their garden, and they continued digging the whole day long. In the evening, when the digging gangs returned home, they returned also. Then there came a bird which stood upon the house which was beside the garden, and it began to whistle and said:
“Mbenque’s cultivated ground, mix together.”
The ground did as the bird said. After that was done, the bird went away.
In the morning , when Mbenque and his wife went to the garden, they were in doubt, and said, “Is this really the place we were digging yesterday?”
They saw that it was the place by the people who were working on each side of them. The people began to laugh at them, and mocked them, and said, “It is because you are very lazy.”
They continued to dig again that day, and in the evening they went home with the others.
Then the bird came and did the same thing.
When they went back next morning, they found their ground altogether un-dug. Then they believed that they were bewitched by some of the others.
They continued digging that day again. But in the evening when the digging gangs returned, Mbenque said to his wife, “Go home, I will stay behind to watch and find the thing which undoes our work.”
Then he went and laid himself down by the head of the garden, under the same house on which the bird always perched. While he was thinking, the bird came. It was a very beautiful bird. He was looking at it and admiring it, when it began to speak.
It said, “Mbenque cultivated ground, mix together.”
Then he caught it, and said, “Ah! it is you who eats the work of our hands!”
He took out his knife from the sheath and was going to cut off the head of the bird.
Then the bird said, “Please don’t kill me andI will make some milk for you to drink.”
Mbenque answered, “You must bring back the work of my hands first.”
The bird said, “Mbenque’s cultivated ground, appear,” and it appeared.
Then Mbenque said, “Make the milk now,” and behold, it immediately made thick milk, which Mbenque began to drink. When he was satisfied, he took the bird home. As he approached his house, he put the bird in his bag.
After he entered his house, he said to his wife, “Wash all the largest beer pots which are in the house.”
But his wife was angry on account of her humger and she answered, “What have you to put in such large pots?”
Mbenque said to her, “Just listen to me, and do as I command you, then you will see.”
When she was ready with the pots, Mbenque took his bird out of his bag, and said, “Make milk for my children to drink.”
They commenced to drink, and when they were finished, Mbenque charged his children, saying, “Beware that you do not tell anybody of this, not even one of your companions.”
They swore to him that they would not tell anybody.
Mbenque and his family then lived upon this bird. The people were surprised when they saw him and his family. They said, “Why are the people at Mbenque’s house so fat? He is poor, but now since his garden has appeared he and his children are so fat!”
They tried to watch and to see what he was eating, but they never could find out at all.
One morning Mbenque and his wife went to work in their garden. About the middle of the same day the children of that town met together to play. They met just before Mbenque’s house. While they were playing the others said to Mbenque’s children, “Why are you so fat while we remain so thin?”
They answered, “Are wet hen fat?” We thought we were thin just as you are.”
They would not tell them the cause. The others continued to press them, and said, “We won’t tell anybody.”
Then the children of Mbenque said, “There is a bird in our father’s house which makes milk.”
The others said, “Please show us the bird.”
They went in to the house and took it out of the secret place where their father had placed it. They ordered it as their father did, to make milk, and it made milk, which their companions drank, for they were very hungry.
After drinking they said, “Let it dance for us,” and they loosened it from the place where it was tied.
The bird began to dance in the house, but one said, “This place is too confined,” so they took it outside the house. While they were enjoying themselves and laughing, the bird flew away, leaving them in great dismay.
Mbenque’s children said, “Our father will this day kill us, therefore we must go after the bird.”
So they followed it and continued going after it the whole day long, for when they were at a distance it would sit still for a long while and, when they aproached, it would fly away.
When the digging gangs returned from digging, the people of the town cried for their children, for they did not know what had become of them. But when Mbenque went into the house and could not find his bird, he knew where the children were, but he did not tell any of the other parents. He was very sorry about the bird, for he knew that he had lost his food.
When evening set in, the children wanted to return to their homes, but there came a storm of rain with heavy thunder, and they were very much afraid among them was a brave boy, named Sombwa, who encouraged them and said, “Do not be afraid. I can command a house to build itself.”
They said, “please command it.”
He said, “House appear!” and it appeared, and also wood for a fire. Then the children entered the house and made a large fire, and began to roast some wild roots which they dug out of the ground.
While they were roasting the roots and were merry, there came a big cannibal, and they heard his voice saying, “Sombwa, give me some of the wild roots you have.”
They were afraid, and the brave boy said to the girls and to the other boys, “Give me some of yours.”
They gave some to him, and he threw the roots outside. While the cannibal was still eating, they went out and fled. He finished eating the roots, and then pursued them. When he approached, the children scattered more roots upon the ground, and while the cannibal was picking them up and eating, they again fled.
At length they came among mountains, where trees were growing. The girls were already very tired, so they all climbed up into a tall tree. The cannibal came there and tried to cut the tree down with his long sharp fingernail.
Then the brave boy said to the girls, “while I am singing you must continue saying, “Tree be strong, Tree be strong!”
He sang this song:
“It is foolish,
It is foolish to be a traveller,
And to go on a journey
With the blood of girls upon one!
While we were roasting wild roots
A great darkness fell upon us.
It was not darkness,
I was awful gloom!”
While he was singing, there came a great bird which hovered over them, and said, “Hold fast to me.”
The children held fast to he bird and it flew away with them, and took them to their own town.
Was midnight when it arrived there, and it sat down at the gate of Sombwa’s mother’s house.
In the morning, when that woman came out of her house, she took ashes and cast them upon the bird, for she said, “This bird knows where our children are.”
At midday the bird sent word to the chief, saying, “Command all your people to spread mats in all the paths.”
The chief commanded them to do so. Then the bird brought all the children out, and the people were greatly delighted.
For all practical purposes, of course, you will usually find yourself in some sort of body form in your out-of-body experiences. These are a necessary camouflage, for you cannot yet think of identity without some kind of body, so you project in such a form. It varies according to your abilities, and without it, you would feel lost indeed. The form itself is not important, but it can tell you something about the dimension in which you are having the experience.
The dream body is the one with which you are most familiar. It has been called the astral body. It strikes us as being physical when we are in it, But we can do things with it that can’t be done ordinarily. You can levitate, for example. As a rule, however, we do not go through walls with this body. This is the body we use for ordinary dreams. Levitation is possible with it but on a limited basis.
When we enter a different dimension, the abilities of the body form change, and for all intents and purposes, it is a different body form – which we will now call a mind form. It still seems physical in shape, but we can walk through physical matter with it. we can levitate much more freely, traveling within the solar system. But we cannot go further with it.
In the first form, it is possible to perceive the past, present or future on a limited basis. In the second form, this perception is increased, the scope of consciousness widened. This is the form we will use if we meet by appointment with others in the dream state.
The third we may call the true projection form. In it, it is possible to travel beyond our solar system, and to to perceive the past, present and futures of other systems as well as our own. The various forms that we use do not dictate our experience, however. We may begin in one form and change to another – or go from the first to the third. On such occasions we must pass through in reverse direction (on returning). The forms merely represent stages of consciousness.
At physical death, after the last reincarnation, then the normal form is the dream body, and excursions are made from this point. It is possible, as mentioned, to suddenly switch from the third form to the dream body, but with a considerable jolt to consciousness.
There are indeed, others who can help in such experiences, and they can be of great assistance as guides. We will find projections much easier if our head is to the north.
Now, when we project from the dream body, consciously we are already outside of the physical one. We have already made the initial change away from physical focus. The mass of valid projections are made from the dreaming body. When the excursion is over, the return to the dream body is made with no strain, you see, for the ego is little concerned. In many such cases, however, the knowledge is not available to the waking self.
As we become more accustomed to the experience, the waking self will recall more and more and not become frightened. When we panic, from the waking condition, the experience ends. If the waking self had not been taken along in this particular manner, the journey could continue.
We use probabilities like blocks to build events. This presupposes inner knowledge and calculations, for you must be aware of the probabilities in order to choose from them. The inner self, therefore, has this knowledge. These probabilities include webworks, probable actions and reactions involving not only yourself but others. Computers are toys compared with these inner workings.
The majority of events do not ‘solidify’ until the last moment, in our terms. According to our understanding and interpretation of the world events, none are predestined or predetermined by sources outside of yourselves. Your childhood environment, for example, was determined by you before physical birth. Within this framework, you also give yourself the freedom to manipulate and change. The main events of a civilization are chosen by its people, but because a course is begun, this does not mean that it cannot be changed at any point.
Events, then, are materialized in our time from their origins in ‘no time.’ there is no end to the source or supply of probabilities, therefore ‘no time’ is not a static, completed storehouse. Each event you form from any set of probabilities automatically gives rise to new probabilities.
The nature of any given probable action does not lead to any particular inevitable act. Probabilities expand in terms of value fulfillment. One given act does not necessarily lead, then, to act A,B, and C, onward to some concluding action. Instead, it has offshoots in infinite directions, and these have offshoots.
This is what I know of reality. There is far more to be known. Outside of the realities of which I am aware and others are aware, there are systems that we cannot describe. They are massive energy sources, cosmic energy banks, that make possible the whole reality of probabilities.
They have evolved beyond all probabilities as we understand them yet, outside of probabilities, they still have existence. This cannot be explained in words. Yet, none of this is meant to deny the individual, for it is the individual upon whom all else rests, and it is from the basis of the individual that all entities have their existence. Nor are the memories or emotions of an individual ever taken from him/her. They are always at his/her disposal.
All of these probable systems are open. In our system it seems as if we chose one course, one main line of probabilities, and that is the end of it. In our system, only one ego predominates and we think of ourselves as that ego. In other systems, this is not necessarily the case. In some, the inner self is aware of having more than one ego, of playing more than one role at a time. As an analogy, this would be as if you lived, say, the life of a rich man/woman of great talent, the life of a poor man/woman and the life of a mother/father and career man/woman. You would be aware of each role and find abilities being developed in each. This is an analogy, and in several respects it could lead you astray if taken too literally. In such a system, there would be no breakup of time, you see.
HONEY-GUIDE and Capped Wheatear lived together in one place at first and ate out of one dish. Honey-Guide was the elder, Wheatear the younger. They set their minds on going to hunt for honey, and it happened when they arrived in the vicinity of the honey that Honey-Guide said, “Smile, Wheatear, when you see where the honey is.” Wheatear smiled, but he did not see the honey. When Honey-Guide smiled he had really seen it. That is what they did, and then they returned home leaving the honey behind, but Wheatear quietly disappeared and went off to steal the honey.
Next morning Honey-Guide said, “Let us go to our honey.” There they found a bit of bare honeycomb mangled and thrown about, so he asked Wheatear about it, and Wheatear replied, “My brother, I have seen neither it nor him who has stolen the honey. Since we came out yesterday nobody has come back here to demolish the honey in this way.” And once again Wheatear said to Honey-guide, “As for me, I could not eat any of this honey unless you had given it to me.”
So then Honey-Guide said no more, and they went out again looking for honey. Once more they found some honey. Honey-Guide say it before Wheatear did, and he tested Wheatear by saying, “Smile.” Wheatear said, “I cannot see the honey, smile yourself, my brother.” Honey-Guide: “No, child, smile.” So Wheatear smile and he saw the honey; then Honey-Guide asked him, “What do you see?”
Wheatear said, “It looks as if it might be flies fluttering before your eyes.”
Honey-guide said, “Haven’t you seen it?”
But Wheatear was deceiving him, for he saw the honey all the time. When Honey-Guide was about to smile, he saw the honey and said, “Let us cut down the tree to get it.”
Wheatear refused, saying, “No, as you said yesterday that I stole the honey, well, I am Wheatear! Let us bring some bird-lime and set a trap beside the honey, then if it be I who steal the honey you will catch me.”
“Good business,” replied Honey-Guide.
They went off to get some bird-lime from the human beings. Then when they arrived at their village, Honey-Guide said, “We will come tomorrow to set the trap.” But after a time Honey-Guide quietly disappeared and went off to set the bird-lime at the honey. Said Wheatear to himself, “Let me go quietly and eat the honey.” But the bird-lime was set already, although he did not notice it. When he thought of sitting down beside the honey, he sat on the bird-lime. Said he, “I will strike it with my wing,” but he stuck to it. And when he struck with his tail he stuck to it. When he wanted to draw back his right wing, it was stuck fast. He tried to strike it with his breast but he stuck. When he attempted to bite it with his beak, he bit the bird-lime. Then he simply died for lack of breath.
When Honey-Guide appeared on the scene, after he had looked for him at the village, he found him already dead. Then he mocked him, saying, “Wheatear, smile!” As he was dried up, he said that was the reward of thievery. “From today you will not steal any more. The chieftainship is mine over honey and to be extolled by the people! As for you, from today your portion shall be bird-lime already spread, and thus will you be killed by people.”
Now since they separated there on account of thievery, Wheatear belongs to bird-lime and Honey-Guide is still extolled. While he talked like this, Honey-Guide was standing upon the corpse of Wheatear. they became distinct in other directions, while their cry remained the same and, to this day, Wheatear’s portion is bird-lime and to be entrapped by men.
In the olden Days all cattle, sheep, and goats lived in the forests. Then, one day, Tarikhes called all the animals before him at a place in the jungle, and he lighted a large fire there. And when the animals saw the fire they were frightened and fled away back into the forests. There remained only cattle, sheep, and goats who were not frightened. And Tarikhes was pleased with these animals and bless them, and he decreed the henceforth they should always live with man and woman who would eat their flesh and drink their milk.
The ego structure remains, of course. The responsibility of dealing with physical reality remains, but in some respects the nature of this manipulation changes. It becomes more direct. Physical properties are manipulated more and more at a mental level. The ego becomes more like the inner ego and less like its old self, comparatively speaking. It accepts large portions of reality that it previously denied. Structurally, it remains intact, yet it has changed chemically and electromagnetically. Now it is far more open to inner data. Once this freedom is achieved, the ego can never return to its old state.
I have told you that the ego is self-conscious action that attempts to set itself apart from action and to consider action as object. Now this altered ego retains its highly specialized self-consciousness, and yet it can now experience itself as an identity within and as a part of action.
This is a cornerstone for consciousness and for personality. It is only a first step, however. Without it, no further development of consciousness can occur. It is not attained by all within our system. We are at this point now.
The next step is taken when identity is able to include within itself the intimate knowledge of all incarnations. Yet in this state, the independence of the various reincarnated selves is not diminished. Each of these steps of consciousness involve identity with the inner recognition of its unity with All That Is.
As each separate identity then seeks to know and experience its other portions, then All That Is learns Who and What It Is. Action never ceases its exploration of itself. All That Is can never know itself completely, since action must always act and each action creates a new unknown. Action must travel through itself from every conceivable point, and yet the journey, being itself action, will create new paths.
Mr. Tortoise, who was married to Mrs. Tortoise, Had in Vulture a friend who was constant in visiting him. But, having no wings, Tortoise was unable to return the visits, and this upset him. One day he bethought himself of his cunning ands aid to his wife, “Wife!’
Mrs. Tortoise answered, “Hello, husband! What is it?”
Said he, “don’t you see, wife, that we are becoming despicable in Vulture’s eyes?”
“How despicable?”
“Despicable, because it is despicable for me not to visit Vulture. He is always coming here and I have never yet been to his house – and he is my friend.”
Mrs. Tortoise replied, “I don’t see how Vulture should think us despicable unless we could fly as he does and then did not pay him a visit.”
But Mr. Tortoise persisted: “Nevertheless, wife, it is despicable.”
Said his wife, “Very well, then, sprout some wings and fly and visit your friend Vulture.”
Mr. Tortoise answered, “No, I shan’t sprout any wings because I was not born that way.”
“Well,” said Mrs. Tortoise, “what will you do?”
“I shall find a way,” he replied.
“Find it then, ” said Mrs Tortoise, “and let us see what you will do.”
Later Tortoise said to his wife, “Come and tie me up in a parcel with a lump of tobacco and, when Vulture arrives, give it to him and say it is tobacco and, when Vulture arrives, give it to him and say that it is tobacco to buy grain for us.” So Mrs. Tortoise took some palm leaf and made him into a parcel and put him down in the corner.
At his usual time, Vulture came to pay his visit and said, “Where’s your husband gone, Mrs. Tortoise?”
“My husband has gone some distance to visit some people, and he left hunger here. We have not a bit of grain in the house.”
Vulture said, “you are in trouble indeed, not having grain in the house.”
Vulture said, “you are in such trouble as human beings never knew.” And she went on: “Vulture, at your place is there no grain to be bought?”
“Yes,” said he, “any amount, Mrs. Tortoise.”
She brought the bundle and said, “My husband left this lump of tobacco thinking you would buy some grain with it for us and bring it here.”
Vulture willingly took it returned to his home in the heights. As he was nearing his native town he was surprised to here a voice saying, “Untie me, I am your friend Tortoise. I said I would pay a visit to you.”
But Vulture, in his surprise, let go his hold of the bundle and down crashed Tortoise to the earth, Pididi-pididi, his shell smashed to bits, and he died. And so the friendship between Tortoise and culture was broken: and you can still see the cracks in Tortoise’s shell.
They say that once a great hunger came, and that Kwaku Ananse, the spider, said he would go and search for meat and vegetable food and bring it that his wife Aso might eat. He went into a certain stream and there he met certain people. Now these people whom he met, excuse my saying so, were spirits. When Ananse met the spirits, they were standing in the water and splashing the stream-bed dry to catch the fish. Kwaku Ananse said, “Brothers, may I come and splash a little too?”
The spirits said “Come.”
Ananse went, and he saw that they were using their skulls to splash the stream dry. The spirits said to Ananse, “You have seen that which we take to splash the stream dry. Will you allow us to remove your skull in order that you may splash too?” Ananse said, “I will permit you, take it off for me.”
Of a truth, the spirits removed it and gave it to him. Kwaku Ananse and the spirits joined together in splashing the bed of the stream dry. As they splashed, the spirits raised a song:
“We, the spider, when we splash the river-bed
dry to catch fish, we use our heads to splash the water.
O spirits, we are splashing the water.”
Since the Creator made things,
do we take our heads to splash the water?
O the spirits, we are splashing the water.
I take my head to splash the water dry today O,
O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”
Ananse finished singing, and the spirits told him, saying, “We have splashed, we have got fish, your share is a basketful. Take it and go and eat. Take your skull, join it on your body, and go off. But what we have to say most particularly is this – the very day you sing any of that song, your skull will open and fall off.”
The spider said, “Fish in abundance, which you have given to me, is all that I desire, and as for a song – for what reason should I sing it?”
The spirits said, “That is well, go off.”
So the spider set off. The spirits, too, got everything together and they, also, went away. When the spirits had reached yonder, as it were, then they raised their song:
“We, the spirits, when we splash the river-bed dry
to catch fish, we use our heads to splash the water.
O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”
And the spider heard the song and he, too, took it up:
“Since the Creator made things
Have we taken our heads to splash the water?
O the spirits, we are splashing the water.”
No sooner had he finished than his skull opened and dropped off. Ananse lifted it up and held it against his chest. He said, “spirits, spirits, my head has fallen off.”
The spirits heard, and they said “That’s the spider. He hasn’t listened to what we told him, and he is calling us. Let us all go back and hear him.”
Almost immediately, Spider came hastening along. He said, “Puo! Children of my father! My head has opened and fallen off, so I beg of you, if I have done you any harm, forgive it. You are in the right, but take my head and put it in its place for me.”
The spirits took it, and replaced it. They said to him, “Now, if you sing this song again and your head falls off again, we shall not answer when you call us. So get along with you!” The spirits set off again.
As they were going they sang their song. Then Ananse began to sing again, and his head became detached and fell off, kutukum! And he lifted it and, excuse my vulgarity, clapped it against his anus, and leaped to the side of the path. Sora! was the sound of the grass parting as he entered it. He said, “Path, save me! When the day dawns that I am rich, I shall give you some.”
That is why you will see Ananse with a small head and a very big bottom. It all comes from the hardness of his ears.
They say that there once was a certain woman who was so unfortunate that whenever she gave birth to a child it died. So she set out to consult one of the lessor-gods about it and to tell him that she desired a child. The lesser-god said, “I shall give you one, but as for the child, all the work he will ever do will be to get you into debt, but nevertheless, some day he will repay you.”
It was not two days, it was not three days after consulting the lessor-god, when the woman conceived. She gave birth to a child – a spider-story child it was, for it was not long in growing up. The infant grew into a comely youth. One day he was with his mother and he said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go to the Edge-of-the-Sea-Country and buy salt.”
The mother said, “How much do you want?”
He said, “An asuanu.” And the mother took it and gave to him, and he set out on the journey.
Now, as he was going, he met a certain man and his spotted dog. He said, “bring it that I may buy it.”
The dog’s master said, “You cannot buy it.”
The youth said, “How much is it?”
The dog’s master replied, “An asuanu’s weight of gold dust.”
The youth said, “What’s that to me! Take this asuanu.” He received the dog and brought it back home.
When he returned, his mother said, “Why did you not reach your destination?”
He replied, “I used the gold dust to buy a dog.”
His mother said, “Ho!”
Now they were living there, it would be for about one moon, when the youth said, “Mother, give me gold dust that I may go trading.”
She said, “As for you, as is your wont, you will only take the gold dust and throw it away again, but how much do you want?”
He replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”
She said, “Take it, then.” So he set out along the trade road.
As he was going along, he met a certain man carrying a cat. He said, “Man, bring that animal that always falls on its feet, that I may buy it.”
The man said, “When I lie down in my room, the mice gnaw my feet; for that reason I bought it.”
He said, “I beseech you, ; let me have it.”
The man said, “You cannot buy it.”
The youth asked, “How much will you take for it?”
The man then replied, “An asuanu-and-suru’s worth of gold dust.”
The boy said, “So that’s why you say I cannot buy it! Here, take it.” The boy received the cat and went off home with it.
When he reached home, he said, “Mother, look here at what I have brought.”
She replied, “Ah, that is just what they said would happen.” The child remained there at home.
It would be about forty days later when the son again addressed his mother, saying, “Give me gold dust that I may go trading.”
The mother said, “All the money I have about me is finished with the exception of an asuasa’s weight of gold dust. If I give you this, and you go, and you do not buy goods with it, that’s the end of this business.”
The boy said, “I have heard.”
The next morning, when things became visible, the youth took up his bag and was off, pa! As he was going, he met a certain Ashanti fellow who was carrying a pigeon. He said, “Friend, bring that creature of yours that I may buy it.”
The Ashanti replied, “I am not selling it, for I amuse myself with it.”
The youth said, “I shall buy it.”
The bird’s master said, “I will not sell it, for I know what it may do for me.”
The boy said, “Oh, give it to me.”
He said, “Will you be able to buy it?”
The boy said, “How much?”
He replied, “An asuasa’s weight of gold dust.”
He said, “Do you suppose because of that I would not buy it?” Here is the sum.”
The boy brought the bird home. His mother said, “This has turned out no better than before. So this is what you have brought?” He replied, “Nevertheless, this is what I have brought.”
Now one day the boy was living there at home, when the pigeon called to him, saying, “Come.” When he went up to it, the pigeon informed him, saying, “In my own village I am chief, and I was about to go on a journey when a certain fellow came and seized hold of me. Then you, out of your kindness, bought me, and now I beseech you, if you will only take me back to my town, the people will take you greatly.”
The boy said, “You are telling me lies. You will run away. “
The pigeon said, “If you can’t see your way to do as I ask, then take a string and tie it to my leg, and take me along.
The boy took a string and fastened it to the pigeon’s leg, and it followed slowly behind him until they arrived at the pigeon’s town. When they reached the outskirts of the town, the children were playing nte marbles. As soon as they saw the bird they said, “Here is the chief! Here is the chief!” one of the children ran to tell the Korenti chief, but they seized him and cut his throat, saying, “You are causing us to call to mind our late sorrow.” But another one went again with the same tidings.
And now the Akwamu chief said, “You, Gyase chief, do you yourself go and see what this is all about.”
He went and looked, and returned. He said, “Oh, it is true!” Then they got a hammock and the regalia and went to bring the chief to his house. The whole tribe was told the news – how he was setting out on a journey, and how a certain fellow had caught him, and how this youth by his kindness had bought him, and how today he had brought him home.
Elders and young people all rose up and thanked the youth. The queen mother brought a water-pot full of gold dust, and all of the elders also each gave a water-pot full of gold dust. The chief himself looked on his hand and slipped off a ring and gave it to the youth. And he said, “Take this ring, and whatever you desire this ring will give you.”
He said, “I have heard.” And he went off with the ring to his village, and he showed the gold dust and the ring to his mother.
Then the mother said, Welcome Aku, welcome Aku!”
Formerly, when the boy, having burned up his gold dust and returned from his journeys, would salute his mother, she used not to answer him. And he gave his mother the news, saying, “You have seen this gold dust and this ring; I shall go and build a great village for us to live in.”
The mother said, “Press your eyes hard; try your best to do so.”
The youth set out and went and stood in the bush. He slipped off the ring and placed it on the ground and said, “Ring, clear all this land of forest and of bush for me.” And the whole of the place became cleared. He said, “Collect all which you have cleared into heaps for burning.” And it did so. He said, “Set up houses.” And it set up many houses. He said, “Ring, let people come and inhabit these houses.” And people came.
The youth made his mother the queen mother and he became chief.
Now, Ananse, the spider, was his best friend. One day, when he was living there in his new home, Kwaku Ananse set out to come to this youth’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Oh, little mother’s child, little father’s child, you have been fortunate and successful and you don’t care any more about me or to look after me. But what has happened to bring all this about?”
Then the youth told him all the news. The spider replied, “I shall go to my village to get something and return.”
Ananse went off to his village. He said to his niece, “I shall send you to my friend yonder, and when you go you will take this white wine for him, and pay attention and do whatever he orders, and you must try secretly to lay your hands on that ring.”
The girl set out and went to the youth’s village. The youth said to her, “As for this, I shall see to it that you do not go back again, for you must stay with me three days before you return..”
The girl said, “I have heard.”
Now he and the girl were there together, and the youth went to bathe.
He slipped off the ring and placed it on a table, and the girl took it and went off with it to her uncle, Kwaku Ananse. As soon a Ananse laid his hands upon it, he made use of the ring to build a big town.
Now, the youth, when he came to look for his ring, could not find it. He came to hear that the spider had built a big town which was greater than his own. Then he went off to consult one of the lesser-gods yonder. The lesser-god told him, “Ananse’s niece who came there to you has taken your ring and gone and given it to her uncle.” The spider also went to consult the lesser-god, and it was revealed to him that Okra, the cat, and Okraman, the dog, would be sent to recover the ring. Therefore he went and got medicine with which to treat the meat he was going to place on the path, so that when the animals who were walking there took some to eat, they would be unable again to go anywhere at all.
The youth who had lost his ring came home and told the cat and the dog: “The time has now come for me to tell you the reason I bought you, and it is this: something belonging to me has been lost, and they say it is in the possession of the spider, but that it lies in a box which is in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. They say he has taken medicine and mixed it with that flesh of the sheep and placed it on the path. So when you reach there, don’t eat it but jump over it.”
The dog said, “Cat, have you heard? You are the one who will chew it.”
The cat said, “Oh, go along, you who every little while take your nose to sniff and sniff!”
Then they began to talk a lot, and their master said, “That’s all right, be off.”
The two animals set out and were going along the path. Now there remained only a short time for them to reach the place where the meat was, when the dog detected the smell of it. He said, “Cat, I have a pain in my stomach and I cannot go on.”
The cat said, “Come, come! Let us go on, the business in hand is important.”
The dog said, “Cat, I am unable.”
The cat on alone. The dog then went to where the meat was, and he chewed up the whole of the meat. There he lay! He was unable to go on any more. And the cat reached Ananse’s village, and lay down in Ananse’s sleeping -room, on the ceiling above the room. As he lay there, he saw a mouse passing. Squeak! as he landed on its head. The mouse said, “Don’t catch me, what is the matter?”
The cat replied, “My master’s ring has been lost and they say it lies in Ananse’s box, which stands in the middle of all the rest of his boxes. If you are able to go and bring it to me, then I shall let you go.”
The mouse said, “I am able.”
The cat said, “Suppose I let you go, and you go off and don’t bring it but run away?”
The mouse said, “If you wish, fasten a string around my waist.”
The cat took a string and tied it around the mouse’s waist. Then the mouse went off into the spider’s room and gnawed a hole in the box which stood in the middle of all the rest. Little by little he made an opening, and soon it become large. He passed through it to go and get the ring to take to the cat. No sooner did the cat lay his hands upon it, than he ran off and came across the dog. He was lying just where the cat had left him. The cat said, “You are still lying here! And where is that meat?”
The dog said, “Oh, I did not see what became of it. Perhaps the people to whom it belonged came and removed it. But where is this ring?” The cat said, “here it is.” The dog said, “They say that the river which lies in the path is in flood, and as you, Cat, walk on the bottom when you cross water, it might be that the ring would fall down, so give it to me, for as for me, you know, I pass on the surface of the water.”
The cat said, “That’s so; you take it.”
They reached the river, and the dog jumped in – so did the cat. At once the cat crossed over. The dog reached the centre of the stream and became tired and, as he was about to take a deep breath, the ring fell out if his mouth into the water. He crossed over and came to where the cat was.
The cat said, “Where is that ring?” He said. “It fell out of my mouth into the water.” The cat ran and entered the water; he saw a great fish passing. The cat caught it. The fish said, “What is it?”
He said, “My ring has just fallen into this river, so unless you want trouble, give me what belongs to me at once. If you don’t give it to me I shall kill you immediately.”
The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”
The fish said, “Let us go to the river bank that I may give you what belongs to you.”
When they both reached the bank, the fish vomited and the ring came out.
The cat took it and came and showed it to the dog. The dog said, “Father, I beg of you, when you go, don’t speak about what has happened.” The cat remained silent. They reached home and the cat told his master all that had happened, saying, “Because of the meat which the dog chewed as we were going along, he became unable to go farther. And again, when I had gone and got the ring and brought it back, the dog said to me, as he crossed a river on its surface, that I must hand over the ring to him. I gave it to him, and he threw it away in the river. It was only after a little while that I laid my hands on it again.”
All the people who were present said, “You, Cat, whatever kind of food I am eating, I will see to it that I break some and place in your little dish. Whatever mat I sleep upon, I shall only lie upon it provided you lie on some of it. As for you, Dog, you will only lie on the smoldering embers of the dead fire when the chilly might comes. Only with floggings, the folk will flog you.”
That is why you will always see the cat sleeping nowhere but on the best mat; also, if you cast come food down on the ground for him, he will not eat it unless it is on a plate. But as for the dog – we shall always see him sleeping in the courtyard on the dead ashes of the day’s fire; also you will see him there being beaten, he will yelp “Kao!”
It is all because of the time when the cat and the dog were sent on this business of the ring.
Hare, that will trickster, went to live with Grey antelope. One day he said to her, “suppose we go and till our fields and plant some bean!” So off they went and set to work. Antelope stole Hare’s beans, and Hare stole Antelope’s beans, but did most of the stealing.
Hare set a trap in his field, and Antelope was caught by the leg. In the early morning the cunning rascal went out and found Antelope caught in the trap. “Don’t you think you deserve to be killed,” said he, “now that I have found you out?”
“No! No!” she cried. “Let me go, and we will go back to my house where I will give you a hoe.” So he let her go, and she gave him the hoe.
Hare then packed his beans, harvested all his fields, and made ready to be off. Good-bye,” he said to Antelope, “I won’t stay with you any longer. You are a thief!”
Hare soon came across the great lizard, Varan, lying at the edge of a water-hole. It was the chief’s water-hole, where they drew their water, and he had been placed there on guard to find out who it was that was continually disturbing it and making it muddy. “What are you doing here?” said Hare.
“I am watching this hole to see who it is that muddies the chief’s water.”
“I’ll tell you what,” said Hare, “we had much better go and till a field together.”
“How can I dig?” said Varan. “I can’t stand on my hind legs and hold the hoe in my forepaws.”
“That doesn’t matter! Just come long. I will tie the hoe to your tail and you will be able to dig beautifully.”
So the hoe was tied on, but when this was done Varan could not move. Then Hare ran back to the hole, drank his fill of water, and finished by stirring it up well, making it as muddy as possible. After this he walked all over Varan’s fields and regaled himself on his groundnuts. In the heat of the day he came back and said, “Ho! An army has passed through the country. I hear that the warriors have dirtied the water in the hole. I hear, too, that they have ravaged all your crop of groundnuts!”
“Untie me!” said Varan. “I can’t budge.”
“All right, but only on condition that you don’t go and accuse me, Hare, of having stirred up the water.”
“But who told you this story about those soldiers who did all the mischief?”
“Don’t ask me so many questions. If you do, I won’t untie you!”
“Very well! I’ll be quiet, but take away this hoe. It hurts me!”
“Listen! First of all, I’ll go and draw some water for you. You must be thirsty.”
“No, I’m not thirsty. Only let me go!’
“If you are not thirsty, all right! I won’t untie the hoe.”
“Oh, very well, I am thirsty. Hurry up, and come back as fast as you can.”
Hare went to Varan’s village, took the wooden goblet from which he always drank, drew some water, and once again stirred up the hole. He took a drink to Varan, and said to him, “If anyone asks you whether I have disturbed the water, you must say that you did it. If you don’t promise me this, I won’t untie you.”
“All right. Very well.”
Then Hare ran to call the chiefs – Lord Elephant, Lord Lion, and the rest. They all came and asked Varan, “Who has been drawing our water and making it muddy?”
“It is I, said Varan.
And Hare, the rascal, added, “Yes, I found him committing this crime and I tied him up to a hoe, so that he couldn’t run away.”
The chiefs congratulated Hare. “Ah! you have been very clever! You have discovered the villain who has been muddying our pool!” And they immediately killed Varan.
The wily trickster, Hare, took the hoe and then went to look for Grey Antelope. She was on sentry duty, on the edge of a pool, for guards were placed at all the pools to prevent anyone from approaching, as the water still continued to be muddied during the night. Hare, not being able to get anything to drink, said to antelope, “What are you doing there so close to the water?”
“I am guarding the chief’s pool.”
“You will get thin and die of hunger, if you stay like that at the edge of the pools. Listen! You would do much better to come with me and till a field. Then, in time of famine, you would have something to eat.”
“Let us go!” said Antelope.
Hare set to work in grand style. He gave Antelope a hoe and told her to dig. “I can’t get on my hind legs,” said she, “and hold the hoe with my forelegs.”
“Let me have a look at your forelegs. I’ll tie the hoe to them, and you will be able to did all right.”
Antelope tried, but she couldn’t do it.
“Never mind,” said Hare. “Wait a minute.” He ran back to the pool, quenched his thirst, and muddied the water. Then he filled a calabash and hid it in the bush. On returning to Antelope, he said, “Hello! Haven’t you done any hoeing yet?”
“No, I can’t manage it.”
“Would you believe it! An Army has passed by, and they have stirred up the pool.”
“No!” Truly? Untie me, Hare!”
“I won’t untie you unless you swear that what I said is true.”
“Very well! Untie me.”
Off Hare went to get the calabash to give her a drink, and made her promise to confess that it was she who had disturbed the water. Then he called the chiefs, who killed Antelope.
But there was one creature that outdid Hare in cunning and that was Tortoise. She mounted guard at the pond. Hare arrived there. “You will die of hunger, if you stay at the edge of the pool with nothing to do. We had much better go and till a field together.”
“How can I hoe with short legs?” asked Tortoise.
“Oh! That will be all right. I’ll show you how to do it.”
“Eh! No. thank you! I think not!”
“Well then! Let’s go and help ourselves to some of the wild boar’s sweet potatoes.”
“No,” said Tortoise uncompromisingly, “No pilfering!”
However, before very long Tortoise began to feel hungry, so much so that, when Hare again proposed a marauding expedition, she overcame her scruples and they went off together to root up the sweet potatoes. Then they lighted a fire of grass in the bush and roasted them.
“Tortoise,” said Hare, “just go and see if the owners of these fields are anywhere about, as we must not let then catch us.”
“Yes, but let us both go. You go one way and I’ll go the other.”
Off went Hare, but Tortoise, instead of following his example, stayed behind and crawled into Hare’s sack. Hare soon came back, filled up his bag with sweet potatoes, threw it over his back, and ran away to escape the proprietors, shouting at the top of his voice, “Hi, Tortoise! Look out! They will catch you! I’m off! Fly”
He ran as hard as he could to escape capture. Tortoise, inside the sack, ate the sweet potatoes. She picked out all the best ones and finished the lot. She said, being satisfied, “Kutlu.” After a while Hare was tired out and lay down quite exhausted. He felt the oangs of hunger.
“Aha! Said he to himself. “I will have a good feed!” He sat down in a shady spot, opened his sack, out his hand inside, and pulled out one very small sweet potato. “This is much too small for me,” said he, and putting his hand in again, felt a nice big one. “Oho! here’s a beauty! When he had pulled it out of his bag, what was his surprise to find that his potato turned out to be Mistress Tortoise!
“Hello! Why! It’s you!” he cried in disgust and threw her on the ground. She scuttled away as fast as she could. Then Hare began to wail, “When I think that I have been carrying her all this time!” He felt very crestfallen.
Continuing his travels. Hare next met King Lion, surrounded by his courtiers. He at once asked permission to swear allegiance to the king and to settle in that country. But every day he went out to steal other folk’s groundnuts. When the owners of the fields came to look at their crops, they exclaimed, “Who can it be that digs up our groundnuts?”
Hare went off to find King Lion, and said to him, “Sire, your subjects are not what they should be, for they are in the habit of stealing.”
“Indeed!” said Lion. “Go and keep watch, and if you discover anyone stealing, catch him.”
Hare went off to take up his position in the fields, but Lion followed him and surprised him in the very act of feasting on groundnuts. “Ha! Ha! You tell me that my subjects are not honest folk, while it is you who do the thieving!”
“Not at all! I was only keeping a look out! Come here, and I will show you the footprints of your subjects, for I know them well!”
So they went to a large shady banyan tree. Hare made a strong string of one of the long tendrils and said to Lion, “As you think I don’t speak the truth, just sit down here and you will soon see the thieves passing by. I shall while away the time by making you a crown of wax.”
“All right,” said Lion, “make me a crown.”
Hare began by parting Lion’s mane down the middle and arranging the hairs carefully, one by one, on either side of his neck, as if he were preparing a spot on the top of his head for a crown. Then he made holes through the bark of the tree, on both sides of the trunk, and passed the hairs of the mane right through them, some on one side, some on the other. This done, he tied all the hairs securely together at the back of the tree with the string he had made, and he said to Lion, “I’ve finished the job. Jump up quickly and you will see one of your subjects stealing in the fields!’
Lion tried to jump up. He couldn’t! He had half killed himself struggling to get to his feet!
Hare ran to the village. “Come,” he shouted, “And see who it is who ravages your fields! He had previously torn up a lot of groundnut leaves and thrown them down close to the Lion. The villagers hurried to the spot.
“There! Don’t you see him?” Haven’t I found him out, eh?” Lion didn’t dare to say a single word.
Then his subjects cut great staves and beat him to death. “Ah! Hare, You are very clever, and we are grateful!” they said.
Hare cut Lion up into pieces. Then he took the skin and wrapped himself in it. Thus disguised, he went to Lion’s village and entered the queen’s hut. He said, “I am not well,” and shut himself up, refusing to see anyone. he gave orders to servants to kill an ox because he was ill. Then he had a second one slaughtered, then a third.
The women said to him, “Are you going to move to another place, since you are killing all your oxen?”
“No,” said Hare, “I have no intention of moving any more. I am killing them because I know very well that I shall never get over this illness.” So he had a general slaughtering of all Lion’s oxen, goats, and sheep, to the very last head of cattle. When all were killed, he said to the queen, “Haven’t you got my money in your keeping?”
“Yes,” she replied.
“Well, bring it all out and put it together with my royal mat and all my valuables on the village square.”
The lion’s skin had now acquired a rather loathsome odor, the flies were settling upon it in swams, and Hare was by no means comfortable inside of it.
“What sort of complaint have you got?” asked the queen. “It is something that smells very nasty.”
“Oh! I have only got some sores. I must go and find a doctor. Good-by, I shall start at once.”
Lion’s wife replied, “Then I will go with you, my husband.”
“No,” said he, “No occasion for that, for I know exactly where I must go.”
He went out to the square, picked up the mat in which all the money and valuables had been packed, and then, throwing off the lion’s skin, he tore away as fast as his legs could carry him with all the village in pursuit.
Hare came to a burrow, and in he ran. The pursuers got a hooked stick to pull him out. They tried to hook him and managed to get hold of his leg. “Oh, pull away!” cried he. “Pull away! You’ve only got hold of the root of a tree!”
So they left off pulling. They tried again, and this time they really hooked a root.
“Hi! hi!” he yelled. “Hi! hi! Take care! You’re hurting me! You’re killing me! Ow! Ow!”
They pulled as hard as they could, and they pulled and pulled until the hook broke and they fell over backward. They said, “Qaa.” Finally they were tired out and said, “Oh! Let us give it up and leave him where he is!” So they stopped up the burrow with a bunch of grass and went away.
The south wind no sprang up and blew the grass deeper into the burrow.
“I am done for,” said Hare to himself, as he fancied they were succeeding in getting nearer to him. He was suffering the pangs of hunger and was terribly thirsty, but not dare to leave the burrow, supposing his enemies to be close at hand. At length he cried out, “Have pity on me and let me go, my good fathers, I beseech you!” He crept cautiously toward the entrance of the burrow, and found only a bunch of grass. Then he made off at once, leaving all his treasures behind him, not even giving them a single thought.
He ran on and on. He became thin and ill. He ate grass, but it did not remain in his insides; it passed through him immediately. He came to the home of Grey Antelope. “Say, Antelope, suppose we sew one another up! You stitch me up, but not completely, you know! It will keep the grass much longer in our insides when we browse, and we shall get much more nourishment out of it.” Antelope consented, and partially stitched up Hare. Hare sewed her up entirely. Antelope swelled and died. Fortunately for her, however, she fell in a field belonging to a woman who picked her up, put her in her basket on the top of her head, and carried her to the village to be eaten. She gave her to her husband to cut up. He set to work and began by cutting the stitches that Hare had sewn. All that was in Antelope’s interior at once came out, she jumped to her legs, and galloped away.
She met Hare, and she said to him, “All right! I’ve found you out now! Never again do I call you my friend!”
Hare, being thirsty, was looking for a pool but could not find one. At last he came to one where no one was on guard. Tortoise was really in charge, but she was in the water. Hare walked in. “What luck! How nice and cool it is!” said he, quenching his thirst and swimming about. Tortoise snapped at one of his legs, then at another.
“Hello! Let me go! I’ll promise you a goat if you will let go!”
They came out of the pond together, and Hare said to her, “Come along to my house, and get your goat.” They reached his home, but no goat! Nothing! Hare did not give her anything. Then he remembered the money that he had left in the burrow and said, “Let us go and see chameleon. He has my valuables, for he borrowed a lot of money from me. I’ll just run round and fetch my brother; he knows all about the business and will be my witness.” Having said this, Hare ran off. Tortoise arrived at Chameleon’s abode and said, “Give me Hare’s money which he says you have!”
“What! I haven’t anything belonging to Hare!” Whereupon Chameleon blew into Tortoise’s eyes. She swelled, and died.
THE HARE ONCE MET the hyena and proposed that they should go for a walk. They went for a walk together and then separated, after which the hare went to the lioness’s cave and found it closed. She cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled away from the mouth of the cave. She entered and said, “Stone close,” and the stone returned to its place. She then proceeded to the room where the lioness stored her fat, after which she went to the room where the meat was kept, and having had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance, told the stone to open, and when she had passed out, to close once more.
Feeling hungry again later she returned to the cave. On the road she met the hyena, who asked her where she came from and why her mouth was oily. The hare denied that her mouth was oily, but as the hyena persisted in his statement, she told him to rub ashes on his mouth and it would become as beautiful as hers. The hyena did as he was recommended, but no change took place in his appearance. The hare next suggested washing it with water and afterwards with urine; but although the hyena tried both, his mouth remained as dry as before. The hyena said, “Please tell me where you go and feed.” At first the hare refused to comply with his request and said, “You are so foolish whenever you go anywhere and are sure to be caught.” But as the hyena would take no refusal, she consented to allow him to accompany her and told him about the lioness’s cave. “There are,” she said, “five rooms. In the first the ashes are kept; in the next, the bones; in the third, the tough meat; in the fourth, the tender meat; and in the last, the fat.” The hyena cried, “Get out of the way, take me there,” and off they started.
When they arrived at the cave, the hare told the hyena that when he wanted the cave to open he must say, “Stone, open,” and when he wanted it to shut, “Stone, close.” The hyena cried out, “Stone, open,” and the stone rolled aside. When they were inside, the hare said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.
The hyena at once started on the ashes, while the hare went to the room where the fat was kept. When the latter had had enough to eat, she returned to the entrance and said she was going away. The hyena remonstrated with her as he was not nearly satisfied. After telling him how to get out of the cave, the hare went up to the stone and said, “Stone, open,” and again, when she was outside, “Stone, close.”
When the hyena was alone, he went to the place where the bones were kept, after which he proceeded to the next room, where the tough meat was stored, and ate until he was satisfied. He then returned to the entrance and said to the stone, “Stone, close,” instead of “Stone, open.” He repeated the words “Stone, close,” several times and could not understand why nothing happened.
At this point the lioness, the owner of the cave, returned and said, “Stone, open.” When the hyena heard, he cried, “Ah! Woe is me! That is what I wanted to say. Poor fellow that I am! Stone, open! Stone, open!”
The lioness entered and said, “shall I eat you, or shall I make you my servant?”
Then Hyena asked to be made her servant and was told to look after the lioness’s cub. He was also given a bone and instructed to break it when the lioness had crossed four rivers. The hyena counted the lioness’s footsteps and, when he calculated that she had crossed the four rivers, broke the bone. A chip flew, fracturing the cub’s skull. Fearing that the lioness would kill him on her return, he searched for some hornets and stuffed one up each of the cub’s nostrils so that it might be supposed that it had been stung to death.
The lioness returned to her cave a short while afterwards and called to the hyena to bring her cub. The hyena told lies for some time and invented several excuses for not doing as he was told, but the lioness was firm, and the hyena had to pick up the cub and bring it to its mother. The lioness at once saw that it was dead and told the hyena to take it outside. While he was doing this, he ate one of the cub’s legs.
A little later he was again ordered to bring the cub to its mother and then to take it away once more. He devoured another leg while carrying it away, and when the lioness called out to him a third time to bring the cub to her, he said the birds had eaten two of its legs. He then ate up the cub.
The lioness intended to punish the hyena for his misdeeds, and after tying him to a tree, went to get some sticks with which to beat him. As he was standing there, bound to the tree, some other hyenas bent on a raiding expedition passed close by, and one of them, seeing him, asked him why he had been tied up in this manner. He replied that he was being punished for having refused to drink some oil which had flies in it. The other hyena suggested that they should exchange places and, after untying the knots, he allowed himself to be bound to the tree instead, while the first hyena followed in the wake of the raiding party.
After a time the lioness returned, and commenced to flog the hyena, who cried out, “Stop! I will drink it now.”
“Drink what?” said the lioness, and she commenced to flog him again.
“Oh! Oh!” the hyena cried, “I will drink the oil with the flies in it.”
The lioness then saw that this was not the hyena that had killed her cub.
The next morning the hyenas on their way back from their raid passed the cave, and the one who had killed the cub saw on the ground some strips of bark, which the lioness had spread out in the sun to resemble meat. “I will go to my mistress’s kraal,” quoth he, “For I see there has been a kill.” On reaching the spot, however, he was seized by the lioness, who bound him to the tree once more and then beat him to death.
After this the lioness returned to her cave and said, “Stone, open.” When the stone had rolled aside and she had entered, she said, “Stone, close,” and it closed again.
It has been broadly suggested by some, in a very sensationalist manner, that God is dead. This phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents that triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness.
However, in truth quite literally, if we are alive, God is not dead. We are the creator of our world. With All That Is we individually create our Personal Reality Field and collectively do we co-create our Consensus World Reality.
So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if we were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.
Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Consciousness Unit(CU) or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?”
Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here. Particularly in our monotheistic practices, it is of course the churchgoers and student of the religious texts who remains in the subservient role. The God with a capital G is the almighty one. No one or thing comes before this God.
Now humility is achieved through the observance of this sacred relationship. Thus we have the humility expressed by the saints and by the disciples in our Christian religion.
Yet may I suggest that the great majority of the practitioners of the Christian faith take it much too far, so far indeed that the average Christian in actuality SEPARATES themselves from the Godhead. Through praise of the almighty God, the one and true King of Heaven, the power and spirituality of the practitioner is often overcome and finally forgotten.
The original words of The Christ, if I may be so bold, asked the observer of these fundamental Teachings to participate AS AN EQUAL.
As the new religion found followers, and the inevitable rise to power within the church structure of priests and other leaders occurred, this egalitarian relationship with God was not discussed. Eventually, as the priests consolidated their power, this brotherly and sisterly relationship between the Creator and the created was deemed blasphemous.
Those who spoke in terms of their equality with God were punished. We are attempting to change this relationship with these blog writings. We are reminding the spiritually-minded person of their original relationship with the Godhead.
For our next project i will create The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational blog on the creative source for all or our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that blog series, now in this current blog series, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from The Entity.
The therapeutic exercise that has many of the “demons” from the past faced, and in a sense, taken “into the light” and disempowered in that way. In these new blog series of mine, we are presenting the blog reader with the exercise and experimentation required to pursue a similar course of study.
Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of our Personal Reality? I have advised over these many years that it is indeed YOU the blog reader of this blog who creates our Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment…
To begin, you Dear Blog Reader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the (CUs) Consciousness Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units we may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the CUs as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.
This All That IS we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic titles, is it not? Yet at the same time, being ALL that is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we have discussed in these blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.
We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian islanders. Different divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.
We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with Soul Evolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice.
In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by ” working on themselves” to the degree that they have no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experience growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole. I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative.
This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume, ” you see, on the negative inner dialogue, and “turn up the volume” on their self-created positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.
Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why do we assume that the blog readers of our new blogs are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”
To begin, the blog reader of my blogs, as I have observed them over the many years since I first begun, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would de drawn to other Teachings.
Now it is true that the older blog material were quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continuously offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the blog who creates the blog in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the blog.
These new blog manuscripts are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the old blog material. If you are a student of The Entity, to complete our studies we would do well to attend to the spiritually-based blog material contained in these new blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, we would do well to study both aspects of reality.
The path to Soul Realization may be thought of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As we examine our expanded reality, we most definitely will be experiencing some of our lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances. If we tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy ,may help to motivate you to continue your studies.
Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlined in my previous tow blog series.
Many years ago there was a great famine throughout the land and all the people were starving. The yam crop had failed entirely, the plantains did not bear any fruit, and the corn never came to a head; even the palm-oil nuts did not ripen, and the peppers and okras also failed.
The leopard, who lived entirely on meat, did not care for any of these things, and although some of the animals who lived on corn and the growing crops began to get rather skinny, he did not really mind very much.
However, in order to save himself trouble, since everybody was complaining of the famine, the leopard called a meeting of all the animals. He told them that, as they all knew, he was very powerful and must have food, that the famine did not affect him, as he lived only on flesh, and that as there were plenty of animals about, he did not intend to starve. He then told all thew animals present at the meeting that, if they themselves did not wish to be killed, they must bring their grandmothers to him for food, and that when the grandmothers were finished, he would feed off their mothers. The animals might bring their grandmothers in succession, and he would take them in turn, so that, as there were many different animals, it would probably be some time before their mothers were eaten. By that time it was possible that the famine would be over. But, in any case, the leopard warned them that he was determined to have sufficient food for himself and that, if the grandmothers or mothers were not forthcoming, he would turn upon the young people themselves and kill and eat them. For this, of course, the young generation, who had attended the meeting, had little liking, and in order to save their own skins why agreed to supply the leopard with his daily meal.
The first to appear with his aged grandmother was the squirrel. The grandmother was a poor decrepit old thing with a mangy tail, and the leopard swallowed her at one gulp and then looked round for more. In an angry voice he growled out, “This is not the proper food for me; I must have more at once.”
Then a bush cat pushed his old grandmother in front of the leopard, but he snarled at her and said, “Take the nasty old thing away; I want some sweet food.”
It was then the turn of a bush buck and, after a great deal of hesitation, a wretchedly poor and thin old doe tottered and fell in front of the leopard, who immediately dispatched her and, although the meal was very unsatisfactory, declared that his appetite was appeased for that day.
The next day a few more animals brought their old grandmothers, until at last it became the turn of the tortoise; but, being very cunning, he produced witnesses to prove that his grandmother was dead, and so the leopard excused him.
After a few days all the animals’ grandmothers were exhausted, and it was necessary that the mothers be sacrificed to supply food for the ravenous leopard. Now, although most of the young animals did not mind getting rid of their grandmothers, whom they had scarcely even known, many of them had very strong objections to providing their mothers, of whom they were very fond , as food for the leopard. Among the strongest objectors were the squirrel and the tortoise. The tortoise had thought the whole thing out. As everyone knew that his mother was alive, she being rather an amiable old person and friendly with all, he was aware that the same excuse would not avail him a second time. He therefore told his mother to climb up a palm tree, and he would provide her with food until the famine was over. He instructed her to let down a basket every day and said that he would place food in it for her. The tortoise made the basket for his mother and attached it to a long string of tie-tie. The string was so strong that she could haul her son up when ever he wished to visit her.
All went well for some days, as the tortoise used to go at daybreak to the bottm of the tree where his mother lived and place her food in the basket. Then the old lady would pull the basket up and have her food, and the tortoise would depart on his daily round in his usual leisurely manner.
In the meantime, the leopard had to have his daily food. The squirrel’s turn came first, after the grandmothers had finished, and as he was poor, weak thing and not possed of any cunning, he was forced to produce his mother for the leopard to eat. The squirrel was, however, very fond of his mother, and after she had been eaten he remembered that the tortoise had not produced his grandmother or his mother for the leopard’s food. He therefore determined to set a watch on the movements of the tortoise.
The very next morning, while he was gathering nuts, the squirrel saw the tortoise walking very slowly through the bush and, being high up in the trees and able to travel very fast, he had no difficulty in keeping the tortoise in sight without being noticed. When the tortoise arrived at the foot of the tree where his mother lived, he placed the food in the basket which his mother had already let down by the tie-tie and, having got into the basket and given a pull at the string to signify that everything was right, was hauled up and after a time was let down again in the basket. The squirrel was watching all the time and, as soon as the tortoise had gone, he jumped from branch to branch to branch of the trees and very soon arrived at the place where the leopard was napping.
When the leopard woke up, the squirrel said, “You have eaten my grandmother and my mother, but the tortoise has not provided any food for you. It is now his turn, and he has hidden his mother away in a tree.”
Hearing this, the leopard was very angry and told the squirrel to lead him at once to the tree where the tortoise’s mother lived.
But the squirrel said, “The tortoise only goes at daybreak when his mother lets down a basket; so if you go early in the morning, she will pull you up, and you can then kill her.”
To this the leopard agreed, and the next morning the squirrel came at cockcrow and led the leopard to the tree where the tortoise’s mother was hidden. The old lady had already let down the basket for her daily supply of food. The leopard got into it and gave the line a pull, but except for a few small jerks nothing happened. as the old mother tortoise was not strong enough to pull a heavy leopard off the ground. When the leopard saw that he was not going to be pulled up, being an expert climber, he scrambled up the tree. When he got to the top he found the poor old tortoise whose shell was so tough that he thought she was not worth eating, so in a violent temper he threw her down on the ground and then came down himself and went home.
Shortly after this, the tortoise arrived at the tree and, finding the basket on the ground, gave his usual tug at it but there was no answer. He then looked about and after a little while came upon the broken shell of his poor old mother who by this time was quite dead. The tortoise knew at once that the leopard had killed his mother and made up his mind that for the future he would live alone and have nothing to do with the other animals.
The gazelle said to the leopard, “It is now the dry season, and we should be cutting down the bush, so our women may plant as soon as the first rain come.”
“Well,” said the leopard, “I cannot go today, but you may as well go.”
The gazelle went; and all that hay he cut the bush, and cleared the ground for planting, and the next day he also went alone.
On the third day the leopard called on the gazelle and asked him to go to the plantation with him. But the gazelle said he was sick and could not go, so the leopard went by himself.
The next day the leopard again called for the gazelle, but he was not in.
“Where’s he gone?” inquired the leopard.
“Oh, he has gone to another part.”
And each day the leopard called upon the gazelle he was either sick or out of town; so that the leopard had nearly all the hard work himself.
When the women had planted, and the harvest was ripe, the gazelle went to look at the plantation. He was greatly pleased to find so much planted, and thought how pleased his friends would be if he invited them to a feast; so he called in all the antelopes and other beasts of the field, and they had a splendid feast.
By and by the leopard thought he would go and see how his plantation was getting on, and no sooner had he arrived there he exclaimed, “Hullo, who has been feeding on my plantation and eaten up my corn? Surely I will set a trap for them and catch the thieves.”
The next day the animals, led by the little gazelle, came again; and he warned them, saying, “Be careful, for the leopard will surely set a trap for us.” But the antelope became careless, and finally fell into the leopard’s trap. “There,” said the gazelle, “I told you to be careful. What shall we do? They have all run away and left us, and I am not strong enough to release you.”
Then the leopard came, and rejoiced greatly at having caught the thief. He took the antelope to his town. “Please, sire, the gazelle told me to go,” cried the antelope. “Don’t kill me! Don’t kill me!”
“How am I to catch the gazelle?” The leopard replied. “No, I must kill you.” And so he killed the antelope and ate him.
When the gazelle heard what the leopard had done, he was greatly annoyed, and declared that as the leopard was their chief, the animals were quite right in eating the food he had provided for them. Was it not the duty of the father to provide for his children? “Well, well, never mind, he will pay us for this.”
Then the gazelle made a drum, and beat it until all the animals came as if to a dance. When they were assembled, he told them that they must be revenged upon the leopard.
The leopard heard the drum, and said to his wife, “Let us go to the dance.” But his wife said she would rather stay at home, and did not go. The leopard went; but no sooner had he arrived than they all set upon him and killed him. And when the dance was over, the leopard’s wife wondered why he had not return. The gazelle sent her the head of her husband, skinned, as her part of the feast; and not knowing that it was her husband’s head, she ate it.
“Oh, for shame,” said the gazelle, “you have eaten your husband’s head.”
“Nay, sir, the shame rests with you; for you gave it to me to eat, after having murdered him.” And she wept and cursed the gazelle.
ONCE UPON A TIME a caterpillar entered the house of a hare when the owner was absent. On his return the hare noticed the marks on the ground, and cried out, “Who is in my house?”
The caterpillar replied in a loud voice, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!”
The hare went away, saying, “What can a small animal like myself do with a person who tramples an elephant under foot like cow’s dung?”
On the road he met the jackal and asked him to return with him and talk with the big man who had taken possession of his house. The jackal agreed, and when they reached the place he barked loudly and said, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”
The caterpillar replied, “I am the warrior son of the long one whose anklets have become unfastened in the fight in the Kurtiale country. I crush the rhinoceros to the earth and make cow’s dung of the elephant! I am invincible!’
On hearing this the jackal said, “I can do nothing against such a man,” and left.
The hare then fetched the leopard, whom he begged to go and talk with the person in his house. The pLeopard, on reaching the spot, grunted out, “Who is in the house of my friend, the hare?”
The caterpillar replied in the same manner as he had to the jackal, and the leopard said, “If he crushes the elephant and the rhinoceros, he will do the same to me.”
They went away again, and the hare sought out the rhinoceros. The latter, on arriving at the hare’s house, asked who was inside, but when he heard the caterpillar’s reply, he said, “What! He can crush me to earth! I had better go away then.”
The hare next tried the elephant and asked him to come to his assistance, but on hearing what the caterpillar has said, the elephant remarked that he had no wish to be trampled under foot like cow’s dung, and he departed.
A frog was passing at the time, and the hare asked him if he could make the man who had conquered all the animals leave his house. The frog went to the door and asked who was inside. He received the same reply as had been given to others, but, instead of leaving, he went nearer and said, “I, who am strong and a leaper, have come. My buttocks are like the post and God has made me vile.”
When the caterpillar heard this, he trembled, and as he saw the frog coming nearer, he said, “I am only the caterpillar.”
The animals who had collected nearby seized him and dragged him out; and they all laughed at the trouble he had given.
ONCE ON A TIME, A king married the daughter of another king; he loved her very much. His other wives were troubled on account of his love for her. She became pregnant, and gave birth to a girl: the father loved her exceedingly. The child grew, and when she was a fine handsome little child, the other wives formed a plot against her; they said, “Since her father is not at home, let us go and cut fibre.” They told the children not to agree to carry the child. The mother called the little girl who nursed her child. She refused to carry her. The mother put her on her back, and went with her.
They cut fibre, and went on continually. It came to pass in one of the valleys they sat down and took snuff. The mother made a bundle of fibre, and gave it to the child: the child played with it. They set out again and cut fibre. They went on continually. the mother forgot the child. They went on continually cutting fibre; they tied it up in bundles, and carried it home.
When they came home, they called the children’s nurses: they all came. But hers came without the child. She asked, “Where is my child?” They said, “you took her with you.” She was troubled, and cried, and ran to find her. She did not find her, and came back.
There was a great lamentation. The other wives said, “How is it now? We have destroyed the father’s darling. The pet wife is confounded.”
A messenger was sent to tell the father; it was said, “King, your child has been lost, while we were cutting fibre.” The father was greatly troubled.
In the morning an old woman of the royal household of another nation went to fetch water: she heard the child playing; she heard something saying, “Ta, ta, ta.” She wondered and said, “Ah! what is this?” She went stealthily along, and found the child, sitting and playing. She went home, and left both her and the water-pot. She called the king’s chief wife, and said, “Come here.” The queen went out of the house. She said, “Let us go; there is something by the river which you will see.” The queen said, “Take her.” She said so with joy. The old woman took her. They came to the river. The queen said, “Wash she.” She washed her. The queen took her, and placed her on her back, and went home.
She suckled her, for she had given birth to a boy. The queen brought her up. She grew and the queen’s own child walked. She grew and became a great girl. She was appointed chief of the girls, when a great feast was made. Many cattle were slaughtered, and all the people rejoiced.
After that the chief men said to the boy, “Marry this girl.” The boy wondered, and aid, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is she not my sister? Did we not suck together at my mother’s breast?” They said, “No, she was found in a valley.” He denied, and said, “No, she is my sister.” The next morning they said, “It is proper you should take her to be your wife.” He refused, and was greatly troubled.
On another occasion an old woman said tot he girl, “Do you know? She answered, “What?” She said, “You are going to be married.”” She inquired, “To whom?” She said, “the young man of your own house.” She said, “O! what is the meaning of this? Is he not my brother?” The old woman said, “No, you were taken from a valley, and brought up by the queen.” She cried, being much troubled.
The girl took a water-pot, and water to the river, and sat down and wept. She filled the water-pot, and went home. She sat down in the house. Her mother gave her food; she did not like it, and refused. The mother asked, “What is it?” She said, “Nothing. There is a pain in my head.” So it was evening, and she went to lie down.
In the morning she awoke and took the water-pot, and went to the river; she sat down and wept. As she was crying, there came out a great frog, and said, “Why are you crying?” She said, “I am in trouble.” The frog said, “What is troubling you?” She replied, “It is said that I am to become the wife of my brother.” The frog said, “Go and take your brother things, which you love, and bring them here.”
She rose and took the water-pot, and went home. She took another pot, and fetched her things, and out them in the pot; she took her brass rod, and her ubenthle kilt, and a petticoat with a border of brass balls, and her fillet, and her brass, and her beads. She took these things, and went to the river, and threw them on the ground.
The frog inquired, saying, “Do you wish me to take you to your own people?” The child said, “Yes.” The frog took her things and sallowed them; he took her and swallowed her; and set out with her.
On the way he met with a string of young men: they saw the frog. The one in front said, “Just come and see: here is a very great frog.” The others said, “Let us kill him, and throw stones at him.” The frog said:
“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.
I am taking Umbhlubu to her own country.”
They left him. They said, “Hau! How is it that the frog speaks, making a prodigy? Let us leave him.” They passed on, and went their way.
And so the frog too went on his way. Again he met with a string of men. The one in front said, “O, come and see a huge frog.” They said, “let us kill it.” The frog replied:
“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.
I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”
They passed on, and the frog went on his way.
He fell in with some boys herding cattle: they saw him, and he was seen by a boy of the damsel’s father. He had said, “W au! By Umdhlubu the king’s child! Come and kill a great frog. Run and cut sharp sticks, that we may pierce him with them.” The frog said:
“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.
I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”
The boy wondered, and said, “O, sirs, do not let us kill him. He calls up painful emoptions. Leave him alone, that we may pass on.” They left him.
The frog went on his way and came to others. He was seen by the girl’s own brother: he said, “By Umdhlubu the king’s child! There is a very great frog. Let us beat it with stones and kill it.” The frog said:
“I am but a frog; I will not be killed.
I am taking Umdhlubu to her own country.”
He said, O, leave him alone. He speaks a fearful thing.”
He went on and came near her home: he entered a bush below the kraal: he placed her on the ground with her things. He put her in order: he cleansed her with udonqa: he anointed her, and put on her ornaments.
So she set out. She took her brass rod, and went and entered at the gateway, and she passed across the cattle enclosure: she went in the middle of it: she came to the opening, she went out, and entered the house of her mother. Her mother followed her into the house and said, “Where do you come from, damsel?” She said, “I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Tell me.” She said, “There is nothing, I am merely on a journey.” The mother said, “Women are satisfied who have such fine children as you. For my part, I am in trouble: my child was lost: I felt her in the valley: she died there.” The child answered, saying, “No; the queens made me forget her; they would not allow the nurse to carry her.” The girl said in answer, “No! there is no woman who can forget her own child.” She said, “No; it happened through my not being accustomed to carry a child; for she used to remain with the nurse.” Umdhlubu said, “Yes, you did it because you did not love me.” She began to look very earnestly at her; she saw that it was her child.
When she saw her she rejoiced. She praised with the praise-giving names of her child. The mother took her role, and girded her herself; she took her head-ornament, and put it on her head; she took her petticoat, and put it on; she took her staff, and went out; she leaped for joy, and halala’d; she went into the cattle-pen; she played leaping about with joy. The people wondered and said, “What has happened to Untombinde today? Why does she rejoice so much? Since the time her first-born died, she has never rejoiced, but has constantly been in sorrow.”
One from her side went out, and said, “Just let me go and see what is in the house? Why do I hear the queen praising with the praise-giving names of her dead child? So she went, and entered the house, and saw the girl. She went out, and shouted aloud, and gave thanks.
All the people went out. They ran to the house, hurrying to get there first. They crowded each other together at the doorway. They saw the child. All the people on her side rejoiced. All the others were troubled, and the queens of the other side said, “Ah! What does it mean? For we thought we had already killed this child. She has come to life again. We shall be confounded together with out children. The supremacy of our children is coming to an end.”
A messenger set out and went to her father; he arrived and said, “O king, your child that was dead is come to life again.” The king said, “Hau! Are you mad? Which is that child?” The messenger said, “Umdhlubu.” The father said, “Whence comes she?” He said, “I do not know, O king.” The father said, “If it is not she, I will kill you. If it is she, run, raise a cry in all places, that the people may bring together all the large oxen, and come with them.”
He went and raised a cry, and said, “The princess has come. Make haste with the oxen.” The men asked, “Which princess?” He replied, “Umdhlubu, the child of the king, who was dead.”
They rejoice; they took their shields; they took the oxen, and drove them; they took also their presents to gladden the princess; for she had risen from death; they found her when they no longer expected it. They came; they slaughtered many cattle, even in the paths, in order that the old men and the old women and the sick might eat, who were not able to reach the home where the princess was.
The father came and said, “Come out, my child, that I may see you.” She did not answer. He slaughtered twenty oxen. She made her appearance at the doorway, and stood still. He slaughtered thirty; she came out. The father said, “Go into the cattle-kraal; let us go to dance for you, for our great joy; for I used to say, you are already dead, but in fact you are still alive.” She stood still. Again he slaughtered forty oxen. Then she went, and entered into the kraal.
They danced for her very much. But the other side of the kraal did not rejoice; it did not dance together with the children and queens of that side. They left off dancing.
The father went with her into the house, and sat down with her. He said, “Let a fat young ox be taken, that we may eat and rejoice, for she was dead, and had risen from the death.”
So All the people rejoiced. The child returned to her royal position. Her father did right, royally; he returned to his former habits, and loved at that kraal, for he had ceased to be there much, because he remembered his child which had hied. Her mother and the children of her house rejoiced together.
Her father asked her, “How did you come here?” The child said, “I was brought by a frog.” The father said, “Where is he?” The child replied, “He is yonder in the bush.” The father said, “Let oven be taken, that he may be danced for, and come up to our home.” So they went and danced for him.
They brought him home. They brought him into the house and gave him ,meat, and ate. The king inquired, “What do you wish that I should give you as a reward?” He said, “I wish some black hornless cattle.” He took many cattle and people, and said, “Go with him.” So they went and came to his country.
The frog built a great town, and became a great chief. He slaughtered cattle continually; and men came to ask for meat. They inquired, “What is your chief who built this town?” They said, Uselesele.” They inquired, “Whence did he obtain so large a town as this?” They said, “He got it because he brought out princess to the king; so he gave him cattle and men.” They answered, saying, “Are you then the people of Uselesele?” They said, “Yes. Do not speak disrespectfully of him; he will kill you, for he is a great chief.”
Uselesele took many people under his protection. They revoked from their chiefs through seeing the abundance of food at Uselesele’s. So Uselesele reigned and become a king.
Unkosi-yasenthla heard it said, “Unkosi-yasenzansi has a beautiful daughter, named Umdhlubu.” He said to his people, “Go and see what kind of damsel it is.” They went, and came to Unkosi-yasenzansi, and said, “King, we have seen sent by Unkosi-yasnthla, that we might select a beautiful damsel from among your children.”
He summoned them, and they came. At length they saw only one damsel which excelled all the others in beauty. For they remembered, that if a king has sent people to go and choose a beautiful damsel, it is proper that they should look very earnestly; for those people are the king’s eyes, because he trusts them. They look earnestly, that they may not be reproved when the damsel is brought home. When they see she is ugly, not like aa damsel which has been chosen for a king, they find great fault, saying, “Why have you disgraced the king by choosing an ugly thing for him?” The honor of those men is ended; they are removed from their honorable office, because they are not trustworthy. therefore they chose Umdhlubu for her beauty’s sake, saying, “It is she only who is fit to be the king’s queen above all the others.”
Therefore those who were left were ashamed; and their mothers were ashamed; and their brothers were ashamed. There was rejoicing in the house of Umdhlubu. The joy began with Umdhlubu, who was conspicuous for beauty among many other damsels and in the eyes of them all, for it was said, “There is a beautiful woman indeed!” Her mother rejoiced in her heart, saying, “I did well when I gave birth to my child!” And the children of her house were exalted, although their mother had been long ago exalted by the king, through being loved. there, then, was the hatred which increased towards that house of Umdhlubu, as her mother also was loved very much by the father of Umdhlubu. There was a very great hatred in the hearts of the other queens, on account of the beauty of Umdhlubu, which was admired by the king of another people above all their own children. They were ashamed for ever.
So they looked, and chose Umdhlubu. They departed to tell the king. They arrived home, and said, “King, we have seen the beautiful damsel; her name is Umdhlubu.” The king said, “Aye; it is well. We must set out and go thither, and take a thousand head of cattle. ” So they set out.
Unkosi-yasenzansi, as he was sitting in the shade within the cattle-pen with his people, said, “What is that yonder? There is a great dust which rises to heaven.” They were afraid. He said to his soldiers, “get ready to fight, for we do not know what is coming.” After that the cattle appeared coming with the king and his people. Unkosi-yasenzansi went to meet them.
But the chief said, “I am Unkosi-yasenthla; I come to see Umdhlubu. Then they all went to her house. When they arrived, they asked her to have Umdhlubu given them. Her father rejoiced when he heard that.
They had cattle slaughtered for them. They spoke with the father. Unkosi-yasenthla said, “I come to you, Unkosi-yansenzansi, I being desirous of taking your daughter; if you assent, it is well. I come with a thousand cattle.” The father assented, saying, “It is well.”
He assembled all the girls, and all the men, the young men with head-rings, and the youth; he set apart men for the purpose of working for Umdhlubu. He took out brass and beads for her marriage, and five hundred oxen, and said, “Now it is right. Set out with her. There is an officer for the purpose of conducting the wedding ceremonies.”
So they all went with him, and reached the king’s home. As they were coming into sight, a great cry was raised, and the people appeared in all directions, shouting, “The quee n of Unkosi-yasenthla has come.” They rejoiced.
They retired to rest. In the morning, when the sun had risen, and it was hot, the damsels went out with the young men and youths, and went into the bush; they sat down there. When the time for dancing arrived, they danced; they fetched the damsel from the bush; she went to the kraal to dance.
So they ended the dance. She took brass, and placed it before her father, and prayed, saying, “Sire, take care of me forever, for now I am in thy hand, preserve me.”
The whole marriage party sat down. They danced for them. They ended the dance. In the morning the damsel had ten bullocks killed and they ate and rejoiced.
The officer of the ceremony said, “Sire, we now wish to set out to return home, for the work is done.”
The king took five hundred head of cattle, and sent them as a present to his mother. The men returned home.
And the damsels remained. Umdhlubu’s father had said that they were not to return, but stay with her, and work for her; and many people, both male and female, remained there to build her town.
The king said, “Now build the town of the queen, where she may live with her people.”
So the town was built and completed. The king visited it; many cattle were killed, that the soldiers might eat, and complete the queen’s town. The king also went to live there at the new town. Thus he took Umdhlubu to be his wife.
The people of Umdhlubu’s father reached their home, and said, “O king, we have done all things very well. There are cattle for Umdhlubu’s mother; they are given to her by her son. He told us to give his respects to both his father and mother.”
Two beings, Elephant and Rain, had a dispute. Elephant said, “If you say that you nourish me, in what way is it that you do so?” Rain answered, “If you say that I do not nourish you, when I go away, will you not die?” And Rain then departed.
Elephant said, “Vulture! Cast lots to make rain for me!” Vulture said, “I will not cast lots.”
Then Elephant said to Crow, “Cast lots!” and Crow answered, “Give the things with which I may cast lots.” Crow cast lots and rain fell. It rained at the lagoons, but then they dried up, and only one lagoon remained.
Elephant went hunting. There was, however, Tortoise, to whom Elephant said, “Tortoise, remain at the water!” Thus Tortoise was left behind when Elephant went hunting.
There came Giraffe, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Zebra, who said to Tortoise, Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Gemsbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Wildebeest, and said, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Roodebok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise answered, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Springbok, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
there came Jackal, and said to Tortoise, “Give me water!” Tortoise said, “The water belongs to Elephant.”
There came Lion, and said, “Little Tortoise, give me water!” When little Tortoise was about to say something, Lion got hold of it and beat it. Lion drank of the water, and since then all the animals drink water.
When Elephant came back from the hunting, he said, “Little Tortoise, where is the water?” Tortoise answered, “The animals have drunk the water.” Elephant asked, “Little Tortoise, shall I chew you or swallow you down?” Little Tortoise said, “Swallow me, if you please,” and Elephant swallowed it whole.
After Elephant had swallowed little Tortoise, and it had entered his body, it tore off his liver, heart, and kidneys. Elephant said, “Little Tortoise, you kill me.”
So Elephant died, But little Tortoise came out of his dead body and went wherever it liked.
Once upon a time there was a wolf and a fox. The wolf was the master and the fox the servant.
One day both were grazing their flock in the pasture and, as they were thus grazing, the wolf and the fox wandered off into the plains to dig up some wild onions. The sheep scattered in pasturing and then lay down. Wolf and Fox were in the plains eating wild onions; in this way they lost sight of the sheep. After a while, the wolf said to the fox, “Companion, go and bring back the sheep!”
The fox found the wild onions very much to his taste, but he got up and bound two sheep together, a ram and a ewe, and then returned. Again the wolf and the fox wandered over the plain to dig up wild onions. After a while the wolf again said to the fox, “Go and bring back the sheep once more!”
The fox, however said, “Companion, look, the sheep are pasturing quietly.” Thereupon the wolf himself got up and looked after the sheep, and there he found the two sheep which had been bound to the tree by the fox, a male one and a female one. He grew very angry when he saw what roguish trick the fox had played on him, and when he returned he asked the fox, “Rascal, where are the other sheep?” and he broke off some branches and struck the fox hard. The fox, thereupon, went to look for the sheep, but, as he was crying, he held his arms up to his head.
Then he looked into the distance and saw two cattle, a white one and a black one, and said, “Those cattle there are mine.” And the wolf questioned him, saying, “Where are they? And the fox said, “Was it not you who just beat me so severely?” And the wolf said, “Well, come and beat me now!” Thereupon the fox looked around for branches from a thorny bush, braided them together, and said to the wolf, “Lie down!”
Then he beat him hard, and the wolf’s blood began to trickle down. And the wolf said, “By the blood of my mother! Did I beat you that hard?” So the fox said, “Come, just look at my back; it is all torn up.” So the wolf said, “Go ahead then, beat me!” When he stopped beating him, he looked out into the distance and saw the two cattle. And the fox said, “The black one is mine.” Then they raced toward the two cattle. The wolf seized the white one and the fox seized the black one. The wolf pierced his cow first, the fox pierced his last. The fox’s cow showed fat in the wound, and the wolf’s nothing bot foam. Then the wolf grew angry and said, “The cow that you have given me is emaciated.” And the fox said, “All right then; take mine.” Then both pierced their cows again, the wolf that belonging to the fox, and the fox that belonging to the wolf. And when the wolf pierced the cow, foam once more appeared in the wound, whereas the wound that the fox made showed fat. So the wolf said, “Let us slaughter them together so that we may eat in common.”
As they were slaughtering them, the wolf said to the fox, “now that we have slaughtered a thing of this kind, why, in truth, are we eating? Let us therefore kill our mothers, so that we can grieve for them.” thereupon the fox said, “Yes.” merely out of roguishness. So they arrived, the wolf led his mother into the field and killed her. But the fox led his mother away and seated her in a cave by the road to the spring and then returned. Thereupon they fetched the meat. The wolf sent the fox out and said, “Get out the cooking-pot and go fetch some water.” So the fox took the vessel and went.
On the road he rubbed some meat around his mouth and then went into the cave where his mother was and said, “Mother!” calling her. And the mother said, “Uooo!” answering him. Then he gave her the meat and went to draw water.
Upon his return he went to the village of the wolf, and the wolf was full of grief because he had really killed his mother. But the fox was joyful, because he had not really killed his mother. And so they put the meat on to cook. Then the wolf said, “Fox, go fetch me some water. Take some meat and go; you can eat on your way.” And since his mother was hidden near the road, he eagerly hurried on.
One day the wolf said, “Today I shall go to fetch water.” The fox said, “I beg you, I have an aunt there, and the road is bad, let me fetch water.” Nut the wolf said, “It is my turn to go and fetch water.” The fox was disturbed because the wolf would not yield. Now the wolf took the water pail and went and fetched water, and he had not taken any meat along. On his way he came close to the cave, and the fox’s mother called saying, “Fox, my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf stayed still and listened to determine where the voice came from.
Then the fox’s mother called again, saying, “my child, have you abandoned me?” So the wolf realized that the fox had deceived him and had not killed his mother. Then he went to the cave and stabbed the mother with the spear and laid her down in the opening. Then he went to fetch water and came back to the village.
The next morning the wolf sent fox saying, “Go, fetch me some water.” Thereupon the fox took some meat and his pail and started out. When he came close to the cave, he called and looked in, thinking she was asleep. And he said, “Mother, mother!” Then he touched her foot. “The poor creature is not sleeping, she only sleeps on one eye, the other is open.” But the mother did not stir, so he got an ant and placed it on her eye, so that it could bite her and wake her up. But she did not wake up; no, she was dead. Then he went into the cave and looked around. And then he saw the wound; and he sat down and cried very hard.
Thereupon he fetched some water and went home and did not want to return to the water any more. The wolf noticed that the fox had become angry. In the evening, when they set the meat to cook and sat by the fire to warm themselves, the fox was crying very hard. Thereupon the wolf questioned him, saying, “What are you crying about?” And the fox said, “I am bleary-eyed, that is all, perhaps it is the smoke.” Yet, when he had taken his seat there, he continued crying. Then the wolf said, “Yonder is your aunt, your mother, whom I have killed and for whom you are weeping. Is that not so? Now I am bewailing both my mother and your mother, my friend.”
The next day dawned. The wolf went to graze his flock, but the fox stayed in the village. The wolf said to him, “Stay here and cook me a good meal!” Thus it was. The wolf went to graze his flock, and the fox stayed in the village and put meat in the pot to cook. As the meat was cooking, the fox took all of it out, scooped up the fat, gathered together some dung of dogs, cattle, and human beings and some pieces of leather for the pot and departed.
When the wolf came back in the evening from driving his flock, he found that the fox had disappeared. Under the fur blanket the fox had placed an insect and told it, “If the wolf calls, answer!” And the wolf came in and called saying, “There is the aunt.” Thereupon the insect said “Uooo!” and the wolf was very pleased and said, “There is the aunt of yours; just put her in, she is boiling.” He was very pleased.
He stepped up to the pot and took a stick and stirred with it, saying, “The fox has played a roguish trick again, he has eaten all the meat, the fat as well and then he has disappeared.” Then he grew very wroth and took the fur and beat it thinking that the fox was inside. But the fox had gone long ago. He was far away. This the wolf discovered, so he pursued him and stayed on the spoor, till he found him on a rock. At this he was very well pleased, for now he would be able to kill him. He tried to climb up. Hew climbed part way but then slid back. Then he climbed again but again slid back and said, “Fox, how did you climb up?” But the fox had smeared the rock with tallow, and he said, “Yonder is the aunt; take this pebble, and I shall tell you where I climbed up. Take it and let me see!” Then he continued: “Do show me your teeth that I can see whether they are good or bad, whether they are filed out or whether they are not filed out yet.” So the wolf opened his mouth and the fox threw the rock into the wolf’s mouth and broke all his teeth.
Then the fox ran away. The wolf cried out but not turn back; indeed, he did not. He continued his pursuit of him. Now the fox was at a woman’s house in the village, so when the wolf arrived, he said, “Grab that fox.” He went closer and closer and shouted, “Do not let him get away!” But the fox said, “People, you hear what he is saying: “Let him get away!’ ” So the people went away.
Thereupon the wolf went to the lion and said, “Have pity on me and do seize that fox, do not let him get away!” and the fox said again, “Do you hear? There he says it again: ‘Let him get away!’ “
Finally the fox went into a cave and plucked out all his hair. The wolf caught up with him and said, “How this one resembles the fox with his thick tail and his long muzzle!’ But the fox said, “How the man talks! Have I not plucked myself bare as a Hill Damara, and now he says, you resemble the fox!” And so the wolf went away.
A very long time ago there was a king who called Walukaga, chief of the smiths, and gave him a great quantity of iron and said, “I want you to make a real man for me, one who can walk and talk, and who has blood in his body, and who has brains.”
Walukaga took the iron and went home, but he was at a loss what to do, and no one could advise him how to set about making the real man. He went about among his friends telling them what the king has said, and asked what he had better do. No one was able to give him any advice. They all knew that the king would not accept anything short of an honest trial, and would punish the man for not carrying out his commands.
On the way home one day Walukaga net a former friend who had gone mad, and who lived alone on some wasteland. Walukaga did not know that he was mad until he met him. When they approached each other, Walukaga greeted his old friend, and the madman asked him where he had come from. Walukaga reasoned for a moment and then said to himself, “Why should I not tell him my story? Even though he is mad, he used to be my friend.” So he answered, “I have come from some friends where I have been trying to get advice.”
The madman asked what advice he wanted, and Walukaga told him all the king had said, and about the work he had given him to do, and how he had given him the iron, and then added, “What am I to do?”
The madman answered, “If the king has told you to do this work, go to him and say that, if he really wishes to have a nice man forged, he is to order all the people to share their heads and burn the hair until they have made up a thousand loads of charcoal, and he is to get one hundred large pots of water from the tears of the people with which to slake the fire and keep it from burning too fiercely.”
Walukaga returned to the king and said to him, “My lord, if you wish me to make this man quickly and well, order the people to shave their heads and burn their hair, and make a thousand loads of charcoal out of it for me to work the iron into the man. Further, make them collect a hundred pots full of tears to act as water for the work, because the charcoal from wood and the ordinary water from wells are of no use for forging a man.”
The king agreed to the request and gave the order to all the people to shave their heads and burn their hair into charcoal, and to collect all the tears. When they had all shaved their heads and burnt their hair, there was scarcely one load of charcoal, and when they had collected all the tears there were not two pots full of water.
When the king saw the results of his endeavors, he sent for the smith Walukaga and said to him, “Don’t trouble to make the man, because I am unable to get the charcoal or the tears for the water.”
Walukaga knelt down and thanked the king. He then added, “My lord, it was because I knew you would be unable to get the hair for charcoal and the tears for the water that I asked for them; you had asked me to do an impossible thing.”
All the people present laughed and said, “Walukaga speaks the truth.”
Mantis once did as follows: Kwammang-a had taken off a part of his shoe and thrown it away, and Mantis picked it up and went and soaked it in the water, at a place where some reeds grew. Mantis went away, then he came back again, went up to the water, and looked. He turned away again, for he saw that the Eland was still small.
Again he came, and found the Eland’s spoor where it had come out of the water to graze. Then Mantis went up to the water, while Eland went seeking the grass which it eats. He waited, sitting by the water, he was upon the water’s bank, opposite Eland’s assegai, and soon Eland came to drink there. He saw Eland as it came to drink. He said, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And young Eland walked up as when its father thrilled to him. Mantis called, making his tongue quiver, as Bushmen still do in springbok hunting.
Then Mantis went to find some honey; he went to cut some honey. He came back and put the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Then, before the sun was up, he came back to pick up the bag. He approached while Eland was in the reeds. He called to it, “Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!” And Eland got up from the reeds and walked up to its father. Mantis put down the bag of honey. He took out the honeycomb and laid it down. He kept picking up pieces of it, he kept rubbing it on Eland’s ribs while he splashed them, making them very nice.
Then he went away and took the bag to seek for more honey to cut. When he came back he again laid the bag of honey down near the water and returned home. Once more he returned and picked up the bag, once more he went to the place and called Eland out of the water, saying, “Kwammang-s shoe’s piece.”
Then Eland stood shyly in the water and walked up to its father, for he had grown. His father wept, fondling him. He again rubbed Eland’s ribs making nice with honeycomb. Then he went away, while Eland walked back into the water, went to bask in the water.
Mantis did not come back for a time, and for three nights. Eland grew, becoming like an ox. Then Mantis went out early. The sun rose, as he walked up to the water. He called Eland, and Eland rose up and came forth, and the ground resounded as it came. And Mantis sang for joy about Eland; he sang:
“Ah, a person is here!
Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!
My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!
Kwammang-a’s shoe’s piece!
My eldest son’s shoe’s piece!”
Meanwhile he rubbed Eland down nicely, rubbed down the male Eland. Then he went away and returned home.
The next morning he called young Ichneumon, saying that young Ichneumon should go with him and that they would be only two. Thus he deceived young Ichneumon. And they went out and reached the water while Eland was grazing. They sat down in the shade of the bush by which Eland’s assegai stood, where he kept coming to take it.
Mantis spoke: “young Ichneumon, go to sleep!” for he meant to deceive him. So young Ichneumon lay down, as Eland came to drink, because the sun stood at noon and was getting hot. Meanwhile young Ichneumon had covered up his head, because Mantis wished him to do so. But young Ichneumon did not sleep; he lay awake.
The Eland walked away, and young Ichneumon said. “Hi, stand! Hi, stand, stand!”
And Mantis said, “What does my brother think he has seen yonder?”
And young Ichneumon said, “A person is yonder, standing yonder.”
And Mantis said, “You think it is magic; but it is a very small thing, it is a bit of father’s shoe, which he dropped. Magic it is not.” And they went home.
Then young Ichneumon told his father Kwammang-a about it. And Kwammang-a said that young Ichneumon must guide him and show him Eland; he would see whether Eland was so very handsome after Mantis had rubbed it down. The young Ichneumon guided his father, while Mantis was at another place, for he meant to go to the water later on. Meanwhile they went up to Eland at the water, and Kwammang-a looked at it and he knocked it down while Mantis was not there. He knocked Eland down and was cutting it up before Mantis came. So when Mantis arrived, he saw Kwammang-a and the others standing there cutting up his Eland.
And Mantis said, “Why could you not first let me come?” And he wept for Eland; he scolded Kwammang-a’s people, because Kwammang-a had not let him come first, and let him be the one to tell them to kill eland.
And Kwammang-a said, “Tell Grandfather to leave off. He must come and gather wood for us, that we may eat, for this is meat.”
When Mantis came, he said he had wanted Kwammang-a to let him come while Eland was still alive, and not to have killed it when he was not looking. They might have waited to kill Eland until he was looking on. Then he himself would have told them to kill it. Then his heart would have been comfortable. Now his heart did not feel satisfied about Eland whom he alone had made.
Then, as he went to gather wood, he caught sight of a gall there, it was Eland’s gall. And he said to himself that he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. And the gall spoke: “I will burst, covering you over.”
Just the young Ichneumon said, “What are you looking at there, that you do not gather wood at that place?”
So Mantis left the gall, brought wood, and put it down. Then he again looked for wood at the place where the gall had been. He went up to the gall and again said he would pierce the gall open and that he would jump upon it. The gall again said it would burst, covering him all over. He said he would jump, and that the gall must burst when he trod on it and as he jumped.
Young Ichneumon scolded him again and asked, “What can be yonder, that you keep going to that place? You do not gather wood, you just keep going to that bush. You are going to play tricks and not gather wood.”
And Kwammang-a said, “You must make haste and let us go when you have called Grandfather, for the gall lies there; Grandfather has seen it. So you must make haste. When Grandfather behaves like this about anything, he is not acting honorably; he is playing tricks with this thing. So you must manage that we start, when you have called Grandfather, that we may leave the place where the gall is.”
Then they placed the meat into the net, while Mantis untied his shoe and put the shoe into the bag. It was an arrow-bag which he had slung on next the quiver. And so they carried the things and went along homeward. On the way Mantis said, “This shoestring has broken.”
Then young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe away.”
And Mantis said, “No, no the shoe must really be laying there where we cut up Eland. So I must turn back and go fetch the shoe.”
But young Ichneumon said, “You must have put the shoe in the bag. You must feel inside the bag, feel in the middle of it and see whether you cannot find the shoe.”
So Mantis felt in the bag, but he kept feeling above the shoe. He said, “See, the shoe is really not in it. I must go back and pick it ip, for the shoe is truly yonder.”
But young Ichneumon replied, “We must go home, we really must go home.”
Then Mantis said, “You can go home, but I must really go and get the shoe.”
Thereupon Kwammang-a said, Let Grandfather be! Let him turn back and do as he wants.”
And young Ichneumon said, “O you person! I do wish Mantis would for once listen when we speak.”
Mantis only said, “You always go on like this! I must go and get the shoe.”
Then Mantis turned back. He ran up to the gall, reached it, pierced it, and made the gall burst. And the gall broke, covering his head; his eyes became big and he could not see. He groped about, feeling his way. And he went groping along, groping along, groping, until he found an ostrich feather. This he picked up, sucked it, and brushed off the gall from his eyes with it.
Then he threw the feather up and spoke: “You must now lie up in the sky; you must henceforth be the moon. You shall shine at night. By your shining you shall lighten the darkness for men and women, until the sun rises to light up all things for men and women. It is the sun under whom men and women hunt. You must just glow for men and women, while the sun shines for men and women. Under him men and women walk about; they go hunting; they return home. But you are the moon; you give light for men and women, then you fall away, but you return to life after you have fallen away. Thus you give light to all people.”
That is what the moon does: the moon falls away and returns to life, and he lights up all the flat places of the world.
I often tell of Kimanaueze, who begat a male child. The child grew up, and he came to the age of marrying. His father said, “Marry.”
He said, “I will not marry a woman of the earth.”
His father asked, “Then whom will you marry?”
He answered, “I!” If it must be, I shall marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.”
But the people asked, “Who can go to the sky where the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon lives?”
He simply said, “I, indeed; I want her. If it is anyone on earth, I will not marry her.”
Thereupon he wrote a letter of marriage and gave it to Deer. But Deer said, “I cannot go to the sky.”
Then he gave it to Antelope. Antelope also said, “I cannot go to the sky.”
He gave the letter to Hawk. Hawk, too, said, “I cannot go to the sky.”
He gave the letter to Vulture, but Vulture also said, “I can go half way to the sky; however, All the way I cannot go.”
Finally the young man said, “How shall I do it?” He put his letter in his box and was quiet.
The people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon used to come to get water on earth, and one day Frog came and sought out the son of Kimanaueze and spoke to him.
“Young master.” he said, “give me the letter that I may take it.”
The young master, however, said, “Begone! If people of life, who have wings, gave it up, how can you say, “I will go there?” How can you get there?”
Frog said, “Young master, I am equal to it.”
So Kimanaueze gave Frog the letter, saying, “If you cannot get there and you return with it, I shall give you a thrashing.”
Frog started out and went to the well where people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon were wont to come to get water. He put the letter in his mouth and got into the well and kept very still. In a little while, the people of Lord Sun and Lady Moon came to get water. They put a jug into the well, and Frog got into the jug. After they got the water, they lifted it up, not knowing that Frog had entered the jug. They arrived in the sky, set down the jug in its place and departed.
Then Frog got out of the jug. In the room where they kept the jugs of water, there was also a table. Frog spat out the letter and placed it on top of the table. Then he hid in the corner of the room.
After a while, Lord Sun himself came into the room where the water was; he looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He took it and asked his people, “Where comes this letter?”
They answered, “lord, we do not know.” He opened it and read it. It ran thus: “I, the sun of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, a man of earth, want to marry the daughter of Lord Sun and Lady Moon.” Lord sun thought to himself in his heart: “Na Kimanaueze lives on earth; I am a man who lives in the sky. He who came with the letter, who is he?” He put the letter away into his box and said nothing.
When Lord Sun finished reading the letter, Frog got into the jug again. After the water had been emptied out of the jugs, the water girls lifted them and went down to earth. They again arrived at the well and put the jugs in the water. Frog then got out and went under the water and hid himself. After the girls had finished the filling of the jugs they left.
The Frog came out of the water and went to his village. There he kept quiet and said nothing. When many days had passed, the son of Kimanaueze asked Frog, “O fellow, where did you take the letter, and how?”
Frog answered, “Master, I delivered the letter, but they have not yet returned an answer.”
The son of Kimanauze said, “O man, you are telling a lie; you did not go there.”
Frog said, “Master, that same place where I went, that you shall see.”
After six days, the son of Kimanaueze again wrote a letter to ask about the former letter, saying: “I wrote to you, Lord Sun and Lady Moon. My letter was delivered but you returned no answer whatsoever to me, saying neither ‘We accept you’ nor ‘We refuse you.'” Having finished his letter, he sealed it. Then he called Frog and gave it to him. Frog started and soon arrived at the well. He took the letter into his mouth, got into the water, and squatted on the bottom of the well.
After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs into the water, and Frog got into a jug. When they had finished filling them, they lifted them up. They went up to the sky by means of a cobweb which Spider had woven. Soon they arrived there, and entered a house. There they set down the jugs and departed. Frog came out of a jug, spat out the letter, and laid it on the table. Then he hid in the corner.
After a while, Lord Sun passed through the room where the water was. He looked at the table and saw the letter on it. He opened it and read it. The letter said: “I, son of Na Kimanaueze Kia-Tumb’a Ndala, I ask you, Lord Sun, about my letter that went before. You did not return me an answer at all.”
Lord Sun said, “Girls, you who always go to fetch water, are you carrying letter?”
The girls said, “We, master? No.”
Then doubt possessed Lord Sun. He laid the letters in the box and wrote to the son of Kimanaueze, saying: “You who are sending me letters about marrying my daughter: I agree, on condition that you in person, the man, come with your first-present, so that I may know you.” When he finished writing, he folded the letter and laid it on the table and went away. Frog now came out of the corner and took the letter. He out it in his mouth and entered the jug. Then he remained very quiet.
After a while, the water was emptied from the jugs, and the girls came and lifted them up. Then went to the cord of Spider and descended to earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog got out of the jug and went to the bottom of the well. When the girls had completed the filling of the jugs, they returned to the sky. Frog then left the well and soon arrived in his village. He kept very quiet.
When evening came, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He spat it out and arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door, and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”
Frog answered, “I, Mainu, the frog.”
The son of Kimanaueze got up from his bed where he was reclining and said, “Come in.”
So Frog went in and delivered the letter. Then he departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter and read it. What Lord Sun announced pleased him. He said to himself: “Why, it was the truth Frog told me when he said ‘you shall see where I went.’ ” Then he went to sleep.
The next morning, he took forry macutas and wrote a letter, saying: “You, Lord Sun and Moon, here is the first-present; I remain on earth to seek for the wooing-present. You up there, you tell me the amount of the wooing-present.” He finished the letter and called Frog. When he came, he gave him the letter and the money, saying, “Take this.”
So Frog started. Soon he arrived at the well. He went to the bottom of the well and remained very quiet. After a while, the girls came down and put the jugs in the water, and Frog entered one of them. When the girls had finished filling them, they took them up. Again they went up to the sky by means of a cobweb. Soon they arrived in the room for the water. They set down the jugs and went away.
The Frog got out of the jug and put the letter in the table, together with the money. Then he hid in the corner. Some time later, Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter on the table. He took it with the money and read the letter. Then he told his wife the news that had come from the prospective son-in-law. His wife assented.
Lord Sun said, “Who is coming with these letters? I do not know. How shall his food be cooked?”
His wife, however, answered, “No matter, we shall cook it anyhow and put it on the table where the letters have been found.”
Lord Sun replied, “Very well.”
So they killed a mother hen and cooked it. When evening came, they cooked mush. They set these eatables on the table and shut the door. Frog came to the table and ate the victuals. Then he went to the corner and kept quiet.
Lord Sun now wrote another letter, saying: “You, son-in-law of mine, the first-present, which you have sent me, I have received. For the amount of the wooing-present, you shall give me a sack of money.” When he had finished the letter, he laid it on the table and left the room. Then Frog came out of the corner and took the letter. Shortly afterward, he entered the jug and went to sleep.
In the morning the girls took the jugs and went down to the earth. They arrived at the well and put the jugs into the water. Frog then got out of the jug. When the girls had finished filling the jugs, they again went up to the sky.
Frog now got out of the water and soon arrived at his village. He entered his own house but waited quietly until sundown. When evening had come, he said, “Now I will take the letter.” He started out and soon arrived at the house of the son of Kimanaueze. He knocked at the door and the son of Kimanaueze asked, “Who is it?”
Then Frog answered, “I, Manu, the frog.”
“Come in,” he replied.
Frog went in; he gave him the letter and departed. The son of Kimanaueze opened the letter, read it, and then put it aside.
Six days passed; then he was ready with the sack of money. He called Frog, and when Frog had come, the son of Kimanaueze wrote the following letter: “You, my parents-in-law, the wooing-present is enclosed. Soon I myself, I shall find a day to bring my wife home.” He gave the letter to Frog, together with the money.
Frog then started and soon arrived at the well. Again he went in under the water and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They put the jugs, as usual, in the water; Frog, as usual, entered a jug. When they had finished filling the jugs, they took them up, going up by means of Spider’s cobweb. Soon they arrived in the sky. There they set down the jugs in the regular room and departed. Frog then got out of the jug and laid the letter down on the table, together with the money. Then he went into a corner and hid.
Soon Lord Sun came into the room and found the letter and the money. He took both and showed the money to his wife, Lady Moon.
Lady Moon thereupon said, “It is good.”
Then they took a young hog and killed it. When they had cooked the food, they set it down on the table and shut the door. Frog came in then and ate it. When he had finished, he entered the jug and went to sleep.
The next morning the water carriers took the jugs and again went down to earth. They soon arrived at the well and dipped the jugs in the water. Frog then got out of the jug and hid. When they had finished filling the jugs, they again returned to the sky. Then Frog left the well and soon arrived at his village. He entered his house and went to sleep.
The next morning, he said to the son of Kimanaueze, “Young master, I gave them the wooing-present, and they accepted it. They cooked me a young hog, and I ate it. Now, you, yourself, shall choose the day to fetch the bride home.”
The son of Kimanaueze said, “Very well.” Then twelve days elapsed.
Now the son of Kimanaueze spoke to Frog: “I need people to fetch the bride for me, but I cannot find them. All those to whom I speak say, ‘We cannot go to the sky.’ Now, what shall I do Frog?”
Frog said, “My young master, be at ease; I shall find a way to go and bring her home for you.”
But the son of Kimanaueze said, “You cannot do that. You could indeed carry the letters, but bring the bride home – that you are unable to do.”
But Frog again said, “Young master, be at ease; be not troubled for naught. I indeed will be able to go and bring her home. Do not despise me.”
The son of Kimanaueze said, “Well, I will try you.”
Then he took some victuals and gave them to Frog.
Frog thereupon started. Soon he arrived at the well. Again he got into the well and hid. After a while, the water carriers came down and arrived at the well. They dipped the jugs in the water. Frog entered one of them. When they had filled them, they went back. Arriving at the proper room, they set down the jugs and departed. Then Frog got out of the jug and hid in a corner. When the sun had set and it was evening, Frog left the room of the water jugs and went to seek the room where the daughter of Lord Sun slept. He found it and saw her asleep there. First, he took out one of her eyes and, then, the other. These he tied up in a handkerchief and went back to the room where the jugs were. He hid in a corner and slept.
In the morning, all the people got up, but not the daughter of Lord Sun. So they asked her, “Why do you not get up?”
And she answered, “My eyes are closed; I cannot see.”
Her father and mother said, “What may be the cause of this? Yesterday she did not complain.”
So lord Sun called for two messengers and said to them, “Go to Ngombo to divine about my child who is sick, whose eyes are sick.”
They started immediately and soon arrived at the Ngombo-man’s. They gave him presents and Ngomobo took out his paraphernalia. Not the people who came did not let him know anything about the disease; they simply said, “We have come to be divined.”
Ngomobo looked into his paraphernalia and said, “Disease has brought you. The one who is sick is a woman. The sickness that ails her concerns her eyes. You have come, being sent; you have not come of your own will. I have spoken.”
The people said, “True. Now tell us what caused the ailment.”
Ngombo looked again and said, “She, the woman is sick, is not yet married. She is only chosen. Her master, who bespake her, has sent a spell, saying, ‘My wife, let her come; if she does not come, she shall die.’ You, who came to divine, go, bring her to her husband, that she may escape death. I have spoken.”
The messengers agreed and get up. They went to Lord Sun and reported to him the words of Ngombo.
Lord Sun said, “All right. Let us sleep. Tomorrow they shall take her down to the earth.”
Frog, being in his corner, heard all that they were saying. Then all slept.
The next morning, Frog got into the jug. Again the water carriers came. Again they took up the jugs. Then they descended to the earth and soon arrived at the well. They put the jugs in the water, and Frog came out of one of them. He hid under the well. When the jugs were fill, the water carriers went up to the sky.
The Lord Sun told Spider, “Weave a large cobweb, down to earth, for this is the day when my daughter will be taken down to the earth.” Spider wove and finished the web. thus time passed.
Frog now got out of the well and went to his village. He found the son of Kimanueze and said to him, “O young master! Thy bride , today she comes.”
The son of Kimanaueze said, “Begone, man, you are a liar.”
Frog answered, “Master, this is the truth itself. This evening I will bring her to you.”
Frog then returned to the well and got into the water and was silent.
Now the sun had set, and the daughter of Lord Sun was taken down to the earth. They left her at the well and then went back.
Frog now got out of the well and spoke to the young woman, saying, “I myself will be your guide. Let us go immediately so that I can bring you to your master.” Then Frog returned her eyes to her and they started. Soon they entered the house of the son of Kimanaueze. Frog exclaimed:
“O young master! Your bride is here.”
The son of Kimanaueze said, “Welcome, Mainu, the frog.”
And so the son of Kimanaueze married the daughter of Lord Sun and lady Moon, and they lived on.
Vulture, Fish-Eagle, and Crow were without fire, for there was no fire on earth. So, needing fire, all the birds assembled and asked, “Whence shall we find fire?”
Some of the birds said, “Perhaps from God.”
Thereupon Mason-Wasp volunteered, saying, “Who will go with me to God?”
Vulture answered and said, “We will go with you, I and Fish-Eagle and Crow.”
So on the morrow they took leave of all the other birds, saying, “We are going to see whether we can get fire from God.” Then they flew off. After they had spent ten days on the road, there fell to earth some small bones – that was Vulture; later, there also fell to earth some other small bones – that was Fish-Eagle. Mason-Wasp and Crow were left to go on alone. When the second ten days were ended, there fell other small bones to earth – that was Crow. Mason-Wasp was left to go on by himself. When the third ten days were over, he was going along, reposing upon the clouds. Nevertheless he never reached the summit of the sky.
As soon as God heard of it. He came to where Mason-Wasp was; And, answering God’s question as to where he was going. Mason-Wasp said, “Chief, I am not going anywhere in particular. I have only come to beg some fire. All my companions have dropped by the way; but nevertheless, I have persevered in coming, for I had set my heart upon arriving where the Sky-God is.”
Thereupon God answered him, saying, “Mason-Wasp, since you have reached Me, you shall be chief over all the birds and reptiles on earth. To you, now, I give a blessing. You shall not have to beget children. When you desire a child, go and look into a grain-stalk and you will find an insect whose name is Ngongwa. When you have found him, take and carry him into a house. When you arrive in the house, look for the fireplace where men cook, and build there a building in the house for your, child Ngongwa. When you have finished building, put him in and let him remain there. When many days have elapsed, just go and look at him. And one day you will find he has changed and become just as you yourself are.”
So it is today: Mason-Wasp, before he builds a house, looks for the fireplace, just as he was commanded by God.
Mantis was speaking: “Now I want you, Ichneumon, to catch some fat sheep for my father to cut up for us and hang up to dry near the house. I do not feel like cutting any up, as I am still writhing with pain. The swelling must first disappear, then I, too, can cut them up, then I too. shall hang meat to dry at my house. Because I, too, want the sheep’s fat to be dry, that the women may render it, so that we may moisten the dry meat which we have been crunching. For the quagga’s meat was white with age and not tender. Now I want to cut up the old sheep, and let the young ones wait a little, for we shall not finish all these sheep; they are too many. I, furthermore, want Porcupine to go out tomorrow, when she has cooked and out aside the meat which she has dried. The Man yonder shall come and eat with me of these sheep, because I haver counted them and I see that they are plentiful.
But Porcupine said, “Do you really want me to go to the Man yonder, who eats bushes? He will come and swallow all the sheep, as they stand in the kraal. You need not think that even these bushes will be left, for we shall be swallowed with the sheep. A Man who devours things as he does – walks along eating the very bushes among which he walks!”
Mantis replied to her, “You must go to your other father, the All-Devourer, that he may help me eat up these sheep, and drink this soup. I have already poured away some of the soup, because I feel that my heart is upset. Fat has taken hold of my heart; I do not want to drink more soup. I want the Old Man yonder to come to drink it up. Then I can talk, for I do not talk now. Do you, therefore, fill the sack with cooked meat and take it. Then he will come; otherwise he might refuse.”
Porcupine protested again: “People do not live with that Man. He is alone. People cannot hand him food, for his tongue is like fire. He burns people’s hands with it. You need not think that we can hand food to him, for we shall have to dodge away to the sheep opposite. The pots will be swallowed with the soup in them. Those sheep will be swallowed up in the same way, for yonder Man always does so. He does not often travel, because he feels the weight of his stomach which is heavy. See, I Porcupine, live with you, although he is my real father, because I think he might devour me, and you will not devour me. Nevertheless, I will fetch him tomorrow, that he may come. Then you will see him yourself with your own eyes.”
Porcupine went on the morrow, carrying cooked meat. She arrived at her real father’s, the All-Devourer. There she stopped and set down the sack of meat. She said to he father, “Go! Cousin yonder invites you to come and help eat the sheep yonder, for his heart is troubling him. It is he who wants you to come. I have told you. Now I will go on in front, for I do not walk fast.”
She shook the meat out of the bag upon the bushes. The All-Devourer licked up the meat and the bushes with it; he just gulped down the bushes too. Porcupine slung on her empty bag, and went forward quickly. While she walked she gave directions: “You must climb up to that place from which I came; you will see the sheep standing there.” She went ahead in great fear of the All-Devourer, and was the first to reach the hut.
Mantis asked her, “Where is your father?”
Porcupine answered him, “He is still on his way. Look at that bush standing up there, and see if a shadow comes gliding from above. Watch for the bush to break off, then look for the shadow; when you see that, the bushes up there will have disappeared, for his tongue will take away the bushes beforehand, while he is still approaching from behind the hill. Then his body will come up and when he arrives the bushes will be gone all along the way to us. We shall no longer be hidden. Now I want Ichneumon to eat plenty, for of that meat he will never eat again and when the Man yonder comes, the bushes will be finished and the sheep likewise be swallowed up.”
The All-Devourer followed Porcupine’s spoor. As he went he ate up the bushes. He climbed up, finishing off the bushes, while his shadow glided up to Mantis’s hut. The shadow fell upon Mantis. Mantis looked at the sun. He asked where the clouds were, for the sun seemed to be in clouds.
Porcupine said to him, “There are no clouds there, but I want Ichneumon to go and hide this pot away for me, for the truly feels the shadow of the man coming yonder. It altogether shuts us in. The sun will seem to have set when he reaches us. His mouth sits black along there; it it not shadow, it is what the trees go into.”
Then mantis saw the All-Devourer’s tongue. He asked Porcupine, “Is your father holding fire in his hand, for a fire is waxing red yonder?”
Porcupine answered, “It is the Man coming there, whose tongue is red. He is night, therefore you see his tongue. We will get out of the way here. We will not hand him anything ourselves, but put down something for him, for his tongue would singe our hands if we held anything out to him. Therefore I want Dasse to hide the other pot that she may still have soup. For now she herself sees the stomach, it truly extends to either side of us. We do not hear the wind, because he comes; the wind does not blow, for he always makes a shelter when he stands. He does not sit down, he stands; he will first eat up the things around him for they are still plentiful. He has put a layer of bushes in the bottom of his stomach and he has partly filled it, but he has not filled it up yet. Therefore he is still seeking food. He is a Man who fills himself to his trunk. If he looks round and finds no food, he will swallow these people, for they invited him to come to food which was not sufficient to his hunger.
The All-Devourer arrived, and Mantis placed food for him. The All-Devourer gulped it quickly down. Then Mantis took soup and poured it into a bucket. The All-Devourer swallowed the bucket. A pot was still keeping warm. Now Mantis took meat which had been put away in a bag, he put it into a bucket, and pushed the bucket toward the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer put out his tongue and licked and scorched Mantis’s hands. Mantis pulled his arms quickly away and sprang aside, knocking against Dasse.
Dasse said, “Why does Mantis spring aside from the Man whom he invited to come? Porcupine told him not to give anything with his hands, but to put meat for the All-Devourer on the bushes.”
Mantis took meat and put it in the pot. He said to young Mantis, “O child, make a good fire for the pot. My hands are burning and keep me sitting where Grandfather scorched me. You can feel his breath which is hot. His tongue feels like that, too.”
Then Dasse said to him, “You ought to ladle out sheep’s meat and put it on the bushes.” But Mantis dod not hear, he sat spitting on his hands to cool them. He ladled out another bucketful. He again pushed the bucket to the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer licked his hands again. Mantis sprang aside, losing his balance, and tumbled into the hut. He got up, and sat licking, cooling his hands. He spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, give me meat to cook, for you see it is as Porcupine told us, the buckets seem to have vanished.”
But Ichneumon said to Mantis, “Mother told you that it would be like this. You would not listen; you invited the big cousin whom people know, whom no one invites, because his tongue is like fire.”
Now Mantis called to young Mantis, “Go and fetch me the meat which Porcupine hid, for you see this bucket of meat has been devoured. You must look at the stomach.”
Mantis brought two buckets and ladled out the meat. Dasse nudged him, and he winked at her. He slung a bucket forward with meat in it, then he slung another bucket forward alongside of it. The All_devourer’s tongue licked his ear, and he tumbled into the hut.
Dasse spoke to him and he winked at her. She said, “O Mantis, leave off winking at me! You must feed cousin, whom you invited. You must give him plenty to eat; Porcupine told you that she did not want to fetch him, because his tongue is always like this.”
The All-Devourer gobbled up both buckets, he licked up the meat which was on the bushes of the hut and devoured it, together with the bushes.
Mantis then said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, you must cook at that other place, and bring the meat which is on the bushes, for the buckets here are all swallowed. I will give the Old Man a pot which is hot to swallow, for you see the bushes are all gone. I shall no longer sit and cook in the bushes, and when the wind blows.”
The All-Devourer stepped backward, he licked up Kwammang-a’s home bushes, he devoured them quickly with the meat on them.
Mantis spoke to Ichneumon: “O Ichneumon, quickly bring another sheep, you must cut it up quickly, for you see that the bushes have all been swallowed with all the meat.”
The All-Devourer asked for water. Mantis lifted up a whole waterbag and set it before him. The All-Devourer’s tongue took up the waterbag; he swallowed it with the water in it. He licked up a thorn bush.
Mantis then spoke to young Mantis: “You see, we shall not eat, for that thorn bush has been devoured, even though it has thorns.” Again mantis said to Ichneumon, “O Ichneumon, fetch that water there which is in the waterbag, for you see the other waterbag has been swallowed. Grandfather turns his head seeking for more water. He himself has devoured all the other things, he still seems likely to gobble up our beds. I shall truly sit upon the ground, if Grandfather eats up all the things in my hut.
The All-Devourer licked up Porcupine’s things; he swallowed them quickly. Then Mantis said to his son, young Mantis, “See, sister’s things there have been devoured; sister sits there on a bare place. All the sheep will soon be devoured.”
The All-Devourer looked toward the sheep, his tongue took up all the sheep, he swallowed them quickly, while they were still alive.
Mantis exclaimed, “Have no the sheep been quickly swallowed, even before I had cut them up as I meant to do? Alas, the bushes have vanished, swallowed up! We are sitting on a bare place. Alas! Now I lack my things which I brought, that I might possess them.”
Porcupine winked at Ichneumon. “O Ichneumon, I tell you, your younger brother must spring away. Father will be swallowed, if he goes on acting bravely like this; and Grandfather Mantis, the one who is talking, he will certainly be swallowed.”
The All-Devourer called out his name, He-Who-Is-a-Devourer-of-Things, whom Mantis had called to come to him. He said to Mantis, “O Mantis, bring out the things to which you invited me, the real things which I, a devourer of things should eat.” He advanced and burned Mantis with his tongue.
But Mantis said, “I who am Mantis who invited You-Who-Devour-Things to my home. You came and finished off my things.. You should not ask, seeking the real food to which I invited you, for those sheep which you have devoured were the food. There is no food.”
Thereupon the All-Devourer quickly devoured Mantis and Mantis was quiet. Young Mantis spring away and took up the bow. The All-Devourer looked toward Kwammang-a. Young Kwammang-a sprang aside and ran away. Mantis was quite silent, because he was in the stomach of the All-Devourer. The All-Devourer stood opposite Kwammang-a and said that he was really going to swallow his daughter Porcupine’s husband, even though he was handsome, yet he would swallow him, for he felt inclined to do so. He advanced and quickly swallowed his daughter’s husband with the bed on which he was sitting. All-Devourer’s stomach now hung almost down to the earth.
Porcupine wept; she stood sighing. The children came from afar. Then Porcupine asked young Mantis, “Are you a fierce man?” He was silent. She asked him, “Are you angry?” Young Mantis was silent, because he felt angry. She also questioned her son, young Kwammang-a. She turned as she sat, heated a spear, and asked her son, “Are you angry?” You must remember that Grandfather’s tongue resembles fire. I do not want you to flinch, if your heart is like father’s heart, ” Young Kwammang-a sat still; they agreed to cut his grandfather open.
She took the spear out of the fire and drew it, burning hot, along her younger brother’s temple. The fire burnt his ear; he sat still. She reheated the spear, it became red hot. She put the spear burning hot into her younger brother’s nose. Tears slowly gathered and stood in his eyes. She said to him, “A mild person is this, whose tears slowly gather.”
She reheated the spear and laid it, burning hot, on her son’s ear-root. Her son sat still. She heated the spear again, and said to her son, “Grandfather’s tongue is like this; I don’t want you to flinch from him, if your heart is like your father’s heart.” She took out the spear when it was red, and out it into her son’s nose. Then she looked at his eyes. They were dry. She said to herself, “Yes, a fierce man is this; that one is a mild man. This one if fierce; he resembles his father. That other one is a mild; he resembles his father Mantis. He is a runaway.” She said to her son, “Remember, Grandfather’s tongue is like this. You must sit firmly when you go to Grandfather.”
The children went in wrath to their Grandfather; they approached him as he lay in the sun. He arose, stood up, and waited. Young Kwammang-a said to the other, “Mother wished me to sit on one side of Grandfather, and you to sit on his other side. Because you cut with the left hand like your father, you must sit with your left arm, in which you hold the spear, outward. I will sit opposite on this side, so that I may have my right arm, in which I hold the spear, outside.”
The All-Devourer scorched young Mantis’s temple with his tongue. He walked forward, he scorched with his tongue the ear-root of his grandson, young Kwammang-a. He said that this little child really seemed very angry. He walked forward, and scorched the root of young Mantis’s ear with his tongue. Young Mantis sat still. All-Devourer went forward, and scorched young mantis’s other ear with his tongue. Young Kwammang-a looked hard at the other and signed to him to hold his spear fast, and he held his own well. The other also held his spear well, because he had said beforehand, “You must cut one side, while I cut the other side. Then we must run away, while the people pour out.”
He sprung forward and cut the All-Devourer; and the other cut him too. Then they ran away, while fathers poured forth. The sheep also poured forth, the buckets poured forth; his father sat on his bed; the pots poured forth; all things poured down. His grandfather doubled up and died.
Then the children said, “O bushes, we have cut you out. You shall truly become bushes; you shall again grow in your place; you shall be what you were before. The place shall be right again and these sheep shall wander over it. They shall graze over it, and again return to the kraal, which shall be as it was before. For that Man who now lies here, who ate up the bushes, shall utterly perish and disappear, so that the people may get dry bushes and be able to warm themselves.” Thus young Mantis spoke. He felt that he truly resembled his father, that his speech resembled his father’s speech. And it all came true.
Now Dasse gave Mantis water but said to him, “O Mantis, you must drink only a little!”
Mantis replied, “I am dying of thirst, I must drink up the egg-shell-ful.” He gulped all the water down and sank to the ground. Kwammang-a waited.
Porcupine said to Dasse, “Take that long stick lying there; you must beat your husband on the shinbone with it until he gets up, you must hold his face fast and rub it.” So Dasse took up the long stick and hit Mantis on the shin. He started up quickly and sat shivering.
Dasse reproved him: “I told you to drink only a little, because you would be like this, if you gulped down all the water; but you would drink nearly all, thus killing yourself, so that you fell down.”
Now porcupine gave Kwammang-a some water and said to him, “O Kwammang-a! You must drink only a little. You must put the water down soon – when you have just wet your mouth. You must sit down then and wash yourself a little, for you have just come out of the stomach in which you were. Then presently you can drink plentifully, when you feel that your body is warm.”
Kwammang-a drank a little, he put down the water quickly, and did not gulp it all down. He washed himself, drank again, and then drank plentifully.
His wife cooked the meat for him which she had kept hidden away. She had told Ichneumon to hide some for her, so that they could eat it after the children had dealt with the Man who was devouring them, and he lay dead. “We must eat here, for he lies yonder, where the children have slain him. Then we will travel away, leaving him lying outside the hut. We will move away and seek a new home, because the Man lies in front of this home. We will live in a different hut which we will make our home.”
Then they travelled away to a new home, and left the hut at which the Man who had devoured the people was lying. In this new home they always lived in peace.
Now there lived Kwaku Anase, the spider, and he went to Nyankonpon, the sky-god, and said, “Grandsire, take your sheep called Kra Kwame, the one which you keep to sacrifice to your soul on a Saturday, and let me kill and eat it, that I may go and bring you a beautiful girl in exchange.”
The sky-god gave him the sheep, and Ananse set out and returned to his village and killed the sheep and ate it. The spider then went to a certain village. In that village there was not a single male – all were women. Ananse married them all and he and they lived there.
One day, a hunter came and saw them. When he left, he went and said to the sky-god, “As for Ananse and the sheep of yours which he received, he has killed it and given it to some women to eat and then married them.”
The sky-god said, “Is it true?”
The hunter said, “Grandsire, it is the truth.”
The sky-god then sent messengers, telling them to go to that village and bring to him all the women who were there.
The messenger went off, met the women, and, with the exception of one woman who was ill, took them all to the sky-god.
Ananse said, “You who remain, what can I do with you?” You can’t do anything for me?”
The sick woman said, “Go and bring me a gourd cup.” Ananse went and brought a gourd cup.
She said, “Bathe me, and take the water you have used and pour it into the gourd.”
Ananse bathed her body and poured the water he had used into the gourd.” She then became very beautiful; there was no woman like her in the tribe. Then Anase married her again, Although she was already his.
Now the hunter came again, and he saw this woman. He went off and reported to the sky-god, saying, “Ananse has made a fool of you, he sent you the ugly women and has kept the beautiful one for himself.”
The sky-god sent messengers and directed them to go to the village where the spider was and to bring the woman to him.
They delivered the message of the sky-god to Ananse. He said, “Would he not like me to come also?”
The messengers said, “The sky-god said we must take the woman to him.” Ananse said, “That is she sitting there, take her away.”
After she had been taken, Ananse went and got the gourd into which all the diseases he had taken from the woman had been poured, and he stretched a skin over the mouth of it. Then he stretched a skin over another gourd and gave it to his child, Ntikuma, and Ananse beat on the drum he had made and sang:
“Y’ odende dende den,
Y’ odende den.
Aso Ya-e!
Y’ odende den.
Your eyes are red in vain!
Y’ odende den,
You are bandy-armed!
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.
Is that Aso Ya?
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.
You are knock-kneed!
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.
Your nose is a lump on your face!
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.
Your feet are large as paddles,
like those of a slave!
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.
Your head is like a cow!
Y’ odende den,
Y’ odende den.”
Ntikuma drummed and sang:
“Beautiful maiden,
Beautiful maiden!”
And Afudotwedotwe or Belly-Like-to-Burst and Nyiwankonfwea of Thin-Shanks, Ananse’s children, danced. Ananse, the crow, ran with speed and told the sky-god,” Ananse has a dance which is fitting for you but not for a spider.”
Immediately the sky-god sent messengers there to Ananse to go and bring him this dance.
Ananse said, “this dance of mine, we perform it only in the harem, and if the sky-god agrees then I shall bring it along.”
The messengers returned and told the sky-god. The sky-god said, “That is nothing, let him, bring it to the harem.” Ananse went with the drums to the harem, and the sky-god came and danced, and all his wives danced.
Now, there remained the one who had been sick. When she saw that Ananse had stretched a skin over the gourd in which were all her diseases, because of that she said she would not dance. And now the sky-god forced her, and she came; and when she was about to dance. Ananse lifted up the gourd and struck the woman with it, and the diseases scattered with a sound like a tese!
That is how syphilis, stomach-ache, headache, leprosy, Guinea worm, small pox, yaws, fits, diabetes, and madness came among the tribe. Once there was no sickness among mankind/womankind. It was the sky-god who was the cause of Ananse’s bringing diseases among the tribe.
It is God who created men. And since God had pity, He said, “I do not wish men to die altogether. I wish that, men having died, should rise again.” And so. He created men and placed them in another region. But He stayed at home.
And then God saw the chameleon and the weaver-bird. After He had spent three days with the chameleon and the weaver-bird, He recognized that the weaver-bird was a great maker of the words compounded of lies and truth. Now of lies there were many, but of the words of truth there were few.
Then He watched the chameleon and recognized that he had great intelligence. He did not lie. His words were true. So he spoke to the chameleon, “Chameleon, go into that region where I have placed the men I created, and tell them that when they have died, even if they are altogether dead, still they shall rise again – that each man shall rise again after he dies.”
The chameleon travelled on, and when he had arrived at his destination, he said, “I was told, I was told, I was told…” But he did not say what he had been told.
The weaver-bird said to God, “I wish to step out for a moment.”
And God said to him, “Go!”
But the weaver-bird, since he is a bird, flew swiftly, and arrived at the place where the chameleon was speaking to the people and saying, “I was told…” Everyone was gathered there to listen. When the weaver-bird arrived, he said, “What was told to us? Truly, we were told that men, when they are dead, shall perish like the roots of the aloe.”
Then the chameleon exclaimed, “But we were told, we were told, that when men are dead, they shall rise again.”
Then the magpie interposed and said, “The first speech is the wise one.”
And now all the people left and returned to their homes. This was the way it happened. And so men become old and die; they do not rise again.
The moon, it is said, once sent an insect to men/women, saying, “Go o men/women and tell them, ‘As I die, and dying live, so you shall also die, and dying live.'”
The insect started with the message, but, while on his way, was overtaken by the hare, who asked, “On what errand are you bound?”
The insect answered, “I am sent by the Moon to men/women, to tell them that as she dies, and dying lives, so shall they also die and dying live.”
The hare said, “As you are an awkard runner, let me go.” With these words he ran off, and when he reached men/women, he said, “I am sent by the Moon to tell you, ‘As I die and dying perish, in the same manner you also shall die and come wholly to an end.’ “
The hare then returned to the Moon and told her what he had said to men/women.
The Moon reproached him angrily, saying, “Do you dare tell the people a thing which I have not said?”
With these words the moon took up a piece of wood and struck the hare on the nose. Since that day the hare’s nose has been slit, but men/women believe what Hare had told them.
Long, long, ago there was a great famine in the world, and a certain your man, while wandering in search of food, strayed into a part of the bush where he had never been before. Presently he perceived a strange mass lying on the ground. He approached and saw that it was the body of a giant whose hair resembled that of white men in that it was silky rather than woolly. It was of an incredible length and stretched as far from Krachi to Salaga. The young man was properly awed at the spectacle, and wished to withdraw, but the giant, noticing him, asked what he wanted.
The young man told about the famine and begged the giant to give him some food. The latter agreed on condition that the youth would serve him for a while. This matter having been arranged, the giant said that his name was Owuo, or Death, and he then gave the boy some meat.
Never before had the latter tasted such fine food, and he was well pleased with his bargain. He served his master for a long time and received plenty of meat, but one day he grew homesick, and he begged his master to give him a short holiday. The latter agreed, if the youth returned to his village and there persuaded his brother to go with him into the bush, and he gave him to Owuo.
In course of time the youth became hungry again and longed for the meat which Owuo had taught him to like so much. So one day he made up his mind to return to his master, and, leaving the village, he made his way back to the giant’s abode. The latter asked him what he wanted, and when the youth told him that he wanted to taste once more of the good meat, the giant bade him enter the hut and take as much as he liked, but added that he would have to work for him again.
The youth agreed and entered the hut. He ate as much as he could and went to work at the task which his master set him. The work continued for a ling time and the boy ate his fill every day. But, to his surprise, he never saw anything of his brother, and when ever he asked about him, the giant told him that the lad was away on business.
Once more the youth grew homesick and asked for leave to return to his village. The giant agreed on condition that he would bring a girl for him, Owuo, to wed. So the youth went home and there persuaded his sister to go into the bush and marry the giant. The girl agreed, and took with her a slave companion, and they all repaired to the giant’s abode. There the youth left the two girls and went back to the village.
It was not very long after that he again grew hungry and longed for a taste of the meat. So he made his way once more into the bush and found the giant. The latter did not seem over pleased to see the boy and grumbled at being bothered a third time. However, he told the boy to go into the inner chamber of his hut and take what he wanted. The youth did so and took up a bone which he began to devour. To his horror he recognized it at once as being the bone of his sister. He looked around at all the rest of the meat and saw that it was his sister and her slave girl.
Thoroughly frightened, he escaped from the house and ran back to the village. There he told the elders what he had done and the awful thing he had seen. At once the alarm was sounded and all the people went out into the bush to see for themselves the dreadful thing they had heard about. When they drew near to the giant they grew afraid at the sight of so evil a monster. They went back to the village and consulted among themselves what they had best do. At last it was agreed to go to Salga, where the end of the giant’s hair was, and set a light to it. This was done, and when the hair was burning well they returned to the bush and watched the giant.
Presently the latter began to toss about and to sweat. It was quite evident that he was beginning to feel the heat. The nearer the flames advanced, the more he tossed and grumbled. At last the fire reached his head and for the moment the giant was dead.
The villagers approached him cautiously, and the young man noticed magic powder which had been concealed in the roots of the giant’s hair. He took it and called the others to come and see what he had found. No one could say what power this medicine might have, but an old man suggested that no harm would be done if they sprinkled some of it on the bones and meat in the hut. This idea was carried out, and to the surprise of everyone, the girls and the boy at once returned to life.
The youth, who had still some of the powder left, proposed to out it on the giant. But at this there was a great uproar as the people feared Owuo might come to life again. The boy, therefore, by way of compromise, sprinkled it into the eye of the dead giant. At once the eye opened and the people fled in terror. But alas, it is from that eye that death comes, for every time that Owuo shuts that eye a man dies, and, unfortunately for us, he is forever blinking and winking.
Once Long Ago, a daughter was born to Obassi Osaw, and a son to Obassi Nsi. When both of them had come to marriageable age, Nsi sent a message and said, “Let us exchange children. I will send my son that he may wed one of your girls, and you send your daughter down to my town, that she may become, my wife.”
To this Obassi Osaw agreed. So the son of Nsi went up to the heavens, carrying many fine gifts, and Ara, the sky maiden, came down to dwell on earth. With her came seven men slaves and seven women slaves whom her father gave to work for her, so that she should not be called upon to do anything herself.
One day, very early in the monring, Obassi Nsi said to his new wife, “Go, work on my farm!”
She sanswered, “My father gave me the slaves, so that they should work instead of me. Therefore seend them.” Obassi Nsi was very angry and said, “Did you not hear that I gave my orders to you? You yourself shall work on my farm. As for the slaves, I will tell them what to do.”
The girl went, though very unwillingly, and when she returned at night, tired out, Nsi said to her, “Go at once to the river and bring water for the household.”
She answered, “I am weary with working on the farm. May not my slaves at least do this while I rest?”
Again Nsi refused and drove her forth, and she went backward and forward many times, carrying the heavy jars. Night had fallen long before she had brought enough.
The next morning Nsi made her do the must menial services, and all day long kept her at work, cooking, fetching water, and making fire. That night, again, she was very weary before she was allowed to lie down to rest. At dawn on the third morning Nsi said, “Go and bring in much firewood.” Now the girl was young and unused to work, so she went she wept, and the tears were still falling when she came back carrying her heavy burden.
As soon as Nsi saw her enter crying he called her. “Come here and lie down before me… I wish to shame you in the presence of all, my people.” Thereupon the girl wept still more bitterly.
No food was given her until midday on the morrow, and then not enough. When she had finished eating all there was, Nsi said to her, “Go out and bring in a great bundle of fish poison.”
The girl went into the bush to seek for the plant, but as she walked through the thick undergrowth a thorn pierced her foot. She lay down alone. All day long she lay there in pain, but as the sun sank she began to feel better. She got up and managed to limp back to the house.
When she entered, Nsi said to her, “Early this morning I ordered you to go and collect fish poison. You have stayed away all day and done nothing.” so he drove her into the goat-pen, and said, “Tonight you shall sleep with the goats; you shall not enter my house.”
That night she are nothing. Early next morning one of the slaves opened the door of the goat pen and found the girl lying within with her foot all swollen and sore. She could not walk, so for five days she was left with the goats. After that her foot began to get better.
As soon as she could walk again, Nsi called her and said, “Here is a pot. Take it to the river and bring it back filled to the brim.”
She set out, but when she reached the waterside, she sat down on the bank and dipped her foot in the cool stream. She said to herself, “I will never go back; it is better to stay here alone.”
After a while one of the slaves came down to the river. He questioned her: “At dawn this morning you were sent to fetch water. Why have you not returned home?”
The girl said, “I will not come back.”
When the slave had left her she thought, “Perhaps he will tell them, and they will be angered and may come and kill me. I had better go back after all.” So she filled her pot and tried to raise it upon her head, but it was too heavy. Then she lifted it on to a tree trunk that lay by the side of the river and , kneeling beneath, tried to draw it in that way upon her head; but the pot fell and broke and , in falling, a sharp shard cut off one of her ears. The blood poured down from the wound, and she began to weep again, but suddenly thought,”My father is alive, my mother is alive; I do not know why I stay here with Obassi Nsi. I shall go back to my own father.”
Then she set out to find the road by which Obassi Osaw sent her to earth. She came to a high tree and from it saw a long rope hanging. She said to herself, “This is the way by which my father sent me.”
She caught the rope and began to climb. Before she had gone halfway she grew very very weary, and her sighs and tears mounted up to the kingdom of Obassi Osaw. Midway on her climb, she stayed and rested a while. Afterward she went on again.
After a long time she reached the top of the rope and found herself on the border of her father’s land. Here she sat down almost worn out with weariness, and still weeping
Now, one of the slaves of Obassi Osaw had been sent out to collect firewood. He chanced to stay from his oath and came to a place near where the girl was resting. He heard her sobs mixed with broken words and ran back to the town, crying out, “I have heard the voice of Ara. She is weeping about a mile from here.”
Obassi heard but could not believe, yet he said, “Take twelve slaves, and, should you find my daughter as you say, bring her home.”
When her father saw her coming he called out, “Take her to the house of her mother.”
There she was resting, Obassi killed a young kid and sent it to Akun, bidding her to prepare it for his daughter. Akun took it and, after she had washed it, cooked it whole in a pot. Obassi also sent a great bunch of plantains and other fruits, and these, too, were arranged in orderly fashion upon a table before the girl. Then they poured water into a gourd and brought palm wine in native cup, and bade her to drink.
After she had eaten and drunk, Obassi came with four slaves carrying a great chest made of ebony. He bade them set it before her, opened it and said, “Come here; choose anything you will from this box.”
Ara chose two pieces of cloth, three gowns, four small loincloths, four looking glasses, four spoons, two pairs of shoes, four cooking pots, and four chins of beads.
After this Obassi Osaw’s storekeeper, named Ekpenyon, came forward and brought her twelve anklets. Akun gave her two gowns, a fufu stick, and a wooden knife.
Her own mother brought her five gowns, richer than all the rest, and five slaves to wait upon her.
After this Obassi Osaw said, “A house has been made ready for you; go there that you may be its mistress.”
Then he went out and called together the members of the chief society of the town. This was named Angbu. He said to the men, “Go, fetch the son of Obassi Nsi. Cut off both his ears and bring them to me. Then flog him and drive him down the road to his father’s town, with this message from me: ‘I had built a great house up here in my town. In it I placed your son and treated him kindly. Now that I know what you have done to my child, I send your son back to you earless, in payment for Ara’s ear and the suffering which you put upon her.'”
When the Angbu society had cut off the ears of the son of Obassi Nsi, they brought them before Obassi Osaw and drove the lad back on the earthward road, as they had been ordered.
Osaw took the ears and made a great juju, and by reason if this a strong wind arose, and drove the boy earthward. On its wings it bore all the sufferings of Ara and the tears which she had shed through the cruelty of Obassi Nsi. The boy stumbled along, half blinded by the rain, and as he went he thought, “Obassi Osaw may do to me what he chooses. He has never done any unkind thing before. It is only in return for my father’s cruelty that I must suffer all this.”
So his rears mixed with those of Ara and fell earthward as rain.
Until that time there had been no rain on the earth. It fell for the first time when Obassi Osaw made the great wind and drove forth the son of his enemy.
EBOPP, the LEMUR, and MBAW, the dormouse, were making a tour in the bush. They looked for a good place to make a farm. When they found one, they cut down the trees and took two days to clear enough ground. After this, they went back to the town where the other animals lived.
The next morning Ebopp said, “Let us go to our new farms and build a small house.”
They did. Ebopp made his, and Mbaw his.
Now, before a new town is begun, a little shed called ekpa ntan is always made where the Egbo house is to stand. Ebopp and Mbaw accordingly set to work and built an ekpa ntan. Then they went back to their old town and rested for two days.
On the third day they went to work again. Ebopp worked on his farm, Mbaw on his. That night they slept in the huts they had built and at dawn started to work once more. When night came, Ebopp lighted a lamp and said:
“I do not want to sleep here. If we sleep here we shall sleep hungry. Let us go back to our old town.”
When they got there their wives cooked for them. Ebopp said to Mbaw, “Come and join together with me in eating.” So his friend came and ate with him.
Afterwards Mbaw said, “Let us now go to my house and have food there too.” So they went tither.
After they had eaten all that Mbaw had cooked, Ebopp went home.
The next morning he went to call for his friend and said, “Go and get young plantains to plant on the farm.” Both of them collected a great basketful and went to the place where the new farms were – Ebopp to his, and Mbaw to his. They worked hard.
At midday, Ebopp said, “Let us rest a little while and eat the food we have brought.” To this Mbaw agreed, and after some time they set to work again.
About five o’clock Ebopp called, “Let us go back now to the old town, for it is very far off.”
So they left off working and went back, but before they could get there night fell.
The next morning they took more young plantains and, again, worked hard all day. When it was time to go back, Ebopp asked, “How many of the young plantains remain to be planted?”
Mbaw answered, “About forty.”
Whereupon Ebopp said, “Of mine also there remain about forty.”
At dawn, the next day, they went to their old farms to get some more plantain cuttings. Then they went back to the new farms and began planting.
As soon as Ebopp had finished, he said, “I have finished mine>”
To this Mbaw replied, “Mine also are finished.”
Ebopp said, “My work is done. I need come here only for the harvest.”
They they both went back to their old town and told their wives. “We have finished setting out the plantains. We hope that you will go and plant koko-yams tomorrow. Try, both of you, to get baskets full of koko-yams for the planting.”
To this the women agreed and, when they had collected as many as were necessary, they set out for the new farms.
When they arrived, Mbaw’s wife asked the wife of Ebopp, “Do you think we can finish planting all these today?”
Ebopp’s wife answered, “Yes, we can do it.”
All day they worked hard, and at night they went home and said, “We have finished planting all the koko-yams.”
Ebopp said, “Good, you have done well.”
Now the name of Ebopp’s wife was Akpan Anwan. She and her sister, Akandem, were the daughters of Obassi Osaw. When she got home she started to cook the evening meal for her husband. As soon as it was ready, she placed it upon the table, set water also in a cup, and laid spoons near by.
They were eating together when a slave named Umaw ran in. He had just come from the town of Obassi Osaw. He said, “I would speak to Ebopp alone.” When Akpan Anwan had left the room, the messenger said, “You are eating, but I bring you news that Akandem your sister-in-law is dead.”
Ebopp cried out aloud in his grief and sent a messenger to call his friend Mbaw.
As soon as the latter heard, he came running and said, “What can we do? We are planting new farms and beginning to build a new room. There is hardly any food to be got. How then can we properly hold the funeral customs?”
Ebopp said, “Nevertheless, I must try my best.”
When Umaw got ready to return, Ebopp said, “Say to Obassi Osaw, ‘Wait for me for six days, then I will surely come.”
The next morning he said to Mbaw, “Come now, let us do our utmost to collect what is necessary for the rites of my sister-in-law.”
They went through the town and bought all the food which they could find. Then Ebopp went back and said to his wife, “I did not wish to tell you before about the death of your sister, but today I must tell you. Make ready. In five days’ time I will take you to your father’s town to hold the funeral feast.”
Akpan Anwan was very grieved to hear of this and wept.
Ebopp said to Mbaw, “We must get palm wine for the feast, also rum for the libations. How can we get these? I have no money, and you also have none.
Mbaw said, “Go round among the town folks and see if any of them will lend you some.”
Ebopp said, “Good!” He then began to walk up and down, begging from all his friends, but none would give to him, although it was a big town. At last he went down to the place where they were making palm oil by the river. Quite nearby lived Iku, the water chevrotain. Ebopp told him his trouble and begged help, but Iku said, “I am very sorry you, but I have nothing to give.”
Ebopp was quite discouraged by now and, full of sorrow, turned to go away. When Iku saw this he said:
“Wait a minute, there is one thing I can do. You know that I have ‘four eyes.’ I will give you two of them, and with them you can buy all that you need.”
From out of his head he took the two eyes with which he had to see in the dark. They shone so brightly that Ebopp knew they were worth a great price. He took them home and showed them to his wife and his friend Mbaw.
The latter said, “From today you are freed from all anxiety. With those you can buy all that is needed.”
The next morning they gathered together all that had been collected, the plantains and the two shining eyes. Ebopp. Mbaw, and Akpan carried the loads between them. They set out for the dwelling place of Obassi Osaw.
When they arrived at the entrance of the town, Akpan Anwan began to weep bitterly. She threw down her burden and ran to the spot where her sister lay buried. Then he went back and got his wife’s load which she had left behind.
The townsfolk said to Ebopp, “You have come to keep your sister-in-law’s funeral customs today. Bring palm wine. Bring rum also for the libations, and let us hold the feast.”
Ebopp said, “I have brought nothing but plantains. All else that is necessary I mean to buy here.”
Now there was a famine in Obassi Osaw’s town, so Ebopp put all of his plantains in the Egbo House. The next day he sent a message to Obassi Osaw to bring his people. so that the food might be divided among them. Each man received one plantain.
Then Osaw said, “All that you have brought is eaten. Of you cannot give us more, you shall not take my daughter back with you to your country.”
Ebopp went to find his friend and told him what Obassi had said.
“Shall I see the two eyes?” he asked. “They are worth hundreds and hundreds of plantains and many pieces of cloth, but if I sell them now, the people are so hungry they will give a small price.”
Mbaw said, “Do not mind. See, I will teach you how to get more sense.
“You hold me one in your hand, and it is a big thing like a great shining stone; but if you put it in a mortar and grind it down, it will become, not one, but many stones, and some of the small pieces you can sell.”
This Ebopp did. He ground up the geat bright stones which had been Iku’s eyes until they become like shining sand.
Then Ebopp and Mbaw went and procured a black cap which they filled with the fragments.
Mbaw said, “Now go and look the town till you find someone who can sell what we need.”
Ebopp did so, and in the house of Effion Obassi he saw great stores hidden – food and palm wine, palm oil in jars, and run for the sacrifice.
Ebopp said to Effion, “If you will sell all this to me, I will give you in exchange something which will make all the town folk bow down before you.”
Effion said, “I will not sell all, but half of what I have I will sell you.”
So Ebopp said, “Very well. I will take what you give me, only do not open the thing I shall leave in exchange until I have returned to my own country. When you do open it, as I said before, all the town folk will bow down before you.”
So the funeral feast was prepared, and the people were satisfied.
When the rites were finished, Obassi said, “It is good. You can go away now with your wife.”
So Ebopp said to Mbaw and Akpan Anwan, “Come, let us go back to our own town. We must not sleep here tonight.”
When they had reached home once more, Ebopp sent a salve named Eder to Effion Obassi with the message:
“You may now open the cap. I have reached my town again.”
It was evening time, nut Effion at once called the townspeople together and said, “I have a thing here which is worth a great price.”
They cried, “Let us see it.”
He answered, “My thing is a very good thing, such as you have never seen before.
He brought the cap outside and opened it before them. All the shining things fell out. As they fell, a strange breeze came and caught them and blew them all over town. They lay on the road and on the floors of the compounds, each like a little star.
All the children came round and began picking them up. They gathered and gathered. In the daytime they could not see them, but every night they went out and sought for the shining things. All that they picked up they put in a box. At length many had been gathered together and they shone like a little sun in the box. At the end of about a month nearly all had been collected. They could not shut down the lid, however, because the box was too full, so when a great breeze came by it blew all the shining things about again. That is why sometimes we have a small moon and plenty of stars shining around it, while sometimes we have a big moon and hardly any stars are to be seen. The children take a month to fill the box again.
When the sparkles were scattered about the town, Effion sent a messeneger to Ebopp to ask: “Can you see the things shining from you town?”
At the time earth and sky were all joined together, like a house with an upstairs.
Ebopp went out and looked upward to the blue roof overhead. There he saw the small things sparkling in the darkness.
The next day he went to Iku and said, “Will you please do into a deep hole? I want to look at your eyes.”
Iku went inside the hole. Ebopp looked at his eyes. They were very bright, just like the sparkles which shone in the sky.
The cause of all the stars, therefore, is Enbopp, who took Iku’s eyes to Obassi’s town.
Iku’s eyes are like the stars.
The moon shines when all the fragments are gathered together. When it shine most brightly it it because the children have picked up nearly all the fragments and put them into the box.
The son of the wind was once a man. When he was he used to go shooting and to roll a ball but later he became a bird and flew, no longer walking as he used to do when he was a man. When he had changed into a bird, he flew up and dwelt in a mountain hole. The mountain hole was his dwelling, and out of it he would fly every day and later on, return. In this hole he slept and, awakening in the morning, he would leave in order to seek food. He sought it everywhere and he ate, ate, ate, until he had his full. Then he would return to his mountain hole to sleep.
But when he was rolling his ball, he called out to Nakati, “Nakati, there it goes!” And Nakati exclaimed, “O comrade, truly there it goes!” He called him comrade because he didn’t know the other’s name. Yet it was truly he who is the wind, who had said, “Nakati, there it goes!”
Not knowing his name, however, Nakati went to his mother to question her. “Mother,” he said, “do tell me the name of our comrade over there. He calls me by my name but I do not know his and I would like to know it when I am rolling the ball back to him.”
“No, I will not at this moment tell you his name, that I will only do and let you utter it after Father has made a strong shelter for our hut. And Then, when I tell you his name, the moment I have uttered it, you must at once scamper away and run home, so that you can seek the shelter of the hut.”
Again Nakati went over to play with his campion and to roll the ball. When they had finished, Nakati again went once more to question his mother, and she exclaimed, “He is erriten-kuan, he is gau-gaubu-ti!”
The next day Nakati again went to roll the ball with his companion. He did not, however, utter his playmate’s name, for his mother had cautioned him to be silent on that matter, even when he was called by name. She had said, “When the time comes for you to utter his name, you must run hime at once.”
Now once more Nakati went to roll the ball with his friend, hoping and hoping that his father would finally finish making the shelter for their hut. At last he saw that his father sat down, that he had indeed finished. Therefore, when he held this, he exclaimed, “There it goes, O erriten-kuan! There it goes, O Gau-gaubu-ti!” No sooner had he uttered it than he scampered away and ran home. His companion thereupon began to lean over, and then fall down. As he lay there he kicked violently upon the vlei. As he kicked, huts blew away, bushes vanished and the people could not see because of the dust. Thus was the wind blowing.
When the mother of the wind came out of her hut to grab him and set him on his feet again, he struggled with her for he wished to continue to lie down. However his mother took hold of him firmly and set him on his feet.
And so, because of all this, we who are Bushmen are wont say, “The wind seems to be lying down, for it is blowing fiercely. When the wind stands on its feet then it is quiet and still. Thus it acts. This noise it makes comes from its knee; that is what makes the sound. I had wished that it might blow gently for us, that we might go out, that we might ascend the place yonder, that we might behold the river bed yonder, standing behind the hill. For we have driven the springbok from this place. They have gone to yonder dry river bed standing behind the hill.”
Let me answer this pertinent question to the best of my ability.
Now first, the amount of time you spend in your meditations is up to you. We suggest at least 15 minutes per day, as early in the day as possible. This sets you up for an active day of conscious manifesting. And remember, your Sanctuary if “intact” at ALL times during your waking period. You may even bring it into the dreamstate by ritually focusing on it prior to sleep.
The key here, for you and others, I believe, is to bring the Sanctuary with you out into the world and bring this meditative state and its contents and energies into the world with you. This is your expectation, you see. This is your attempt to continuously, or at least intermittently. Intentionally create your Personal Reality.
The expectation is felt in the demonstration, your faithful anticipation – in the small moments of awakening from the Common Trance – of the manifestation you are considering. Not to repeat myself too much here, but you seek to Embody the Feeling-Tone of your anticipated creation. If you read my Blogs you will get this message as well as the subtext, if you are open to it. I have provided numerous Strategies for belief change in this and other Blog Series. The simplest is to identify the limiting belief – identify its Feeling-Tone – and then Embody, once again, its opposite, or its improved condition with gusto! You are not merely begging for a miracle, here. You are the Reality Creator in league with All That Is.
If you are examining painful material form the past – childhood abuse, let us say – assume the Observer’s Perspective and disentangle yourself from the drama you are witnessing. If you are in the Trance State and you are meditating on the Abundant Universe, yes, you would Embody that image, emotion, thought as completely as you could, within the safety of your Sanctuary.
In conclusion, if you are feeling guilty being materialistic and you are experiencing Lack, I would suspect religious conditioning is at fault. As you know from the current manuscript, you are already living in an Abundant Universe. Perhaps your unnecessary feelings of guilt act like walls around you that prohibit your perception of this Universe. You might attempt to practice our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise in which the student focuses on finding something positive in each moment. That becomes the focus over time until you are seeing, for yourself, this prosperous lifetime, for you are creating it.
Again, 15 minutes per day is a good start, but the magic happens when you bring all your waking faculties to bear on this project. Each moment of your day, then, becomes an opportunity for experiencing the transcendent moment, the moment of awakening to the Abundant Universe.
The sky-god begat three children, who were Esum (Darkness), Osrane (Moon), and Owia (Sun). When his three children grew up, the sky-god made them go to separate villages. The first one built his village, the second one also built his village, and the third one, he too, built his village. And there they lived.
Now their father loved Sun most. And while the sky-god was reigning there, he blackened a stool and said to his attendants, “Who knows what my thoughts are?” Ananse, the spider, said, “As for me, I know them.” At the time when he said, “As for me, I know them,” the sky-god made all the attendants rise up. There and then the spider also rose up, saying he was going to the village of the sky-god’s children.
When Ananse reached the path, he said to himself, “I do not know his thoughts and yet I said, ‘I know them.’ ” And he plucked some feathers out of every bird, stuck them on himself and flew off, alighting on a gyedua tree in the sky-god’s village. And when the people saw the bird, they all made a great commotion which sounded like “Y-e-e-e-e!”
And the sky-god came out of the house and came under the gyedua tree and said, “Were Ananse here, he would have known the name of this bird. I had decided that Owia, Sun, is the one I wanted to make a chief, so I asked who knew what was in my head and Ananse said that he did. Now I have gone and pulled up the yam known as ‘Kintinkyi,’ and he who knows its name and utters it, to him I shall give it, my blackened stool. That is why Ananse has gone off to bring my children. Had he been here, he would have known the name of this bird.
Then the bird flew off, and Ananse pulled out the feathers and threw them away, and set out till he reached the village of Night. To Night he said, “Your father said that you must come with me.” And Night replied, “It is well, I and you will go.” Then Ananse said, “I am going on to fetch Moon and Sun.” But Night said to him, “Let me first seek for something to give you to eat.” Spider replied, “Ho!” Night thereupon went out and brought some roasted corn and gave it to Ananse. When he had finished chewing it, he set out for Moon’s village. When he reached it, he said, “Your father says you must came along with me.” And Moon replied, “It is well, I shall go.”
How did it happen? A wife was pregnant, shoe bore a child, Moon, to begin with. She returned, became pregnant again, and this time bore Sun. Far in the wilderness was a man, and he had a pretty daughter.
Sun and Moon grew up and one day went for a stroll. In the wilderness they came upon the pretty daughter, and they asked her, “Where have you got your house? We live in that wilderness,” they said to the girl. “Show us exactly where you live.”
She replied to them, “We live in that wilderness. And there a great many dangerous animals.”
Moon, the elder one of the brothers, said to the girl, “Do you like us? Shall we woo you?”
She said to them, “Yes, I am capable of liking you but may not.”
Sun then asked, “Who is it that does not like us?”
She said, “It is my father.”
Moon said to the girl, “Well, then, we shall wait for two days, and on the third we shall come to your village. We shall send our father’s children.”
They waited for two days, and on the third they sent the children, then they started out for the wilderness. And when they were quite close, they caught sight of the girl far off at the other edge of the jungle. They went to meet her and asked her, “Well, where is your village?”
She said, “Our village is here in the wilderness.”
They asked her, “I, I! Are there people that live in the place where is no hut?”
She said, “Yes, we live in the wilderness, we have no hut.”
They said, “We wish that you would show us where you live.”
The girl said, “All right, then.” And she went on ahead to show them the way.
A big snake then appeared. Sun and Moon said, “Let us not be afraid!” They were not frightened, but went along on their way. When they had got as far as the foot of a certain tree, they found a number of snakes confronting them; but they went farther along and came upon a place full of hairs like horsehair, forming a sort of darkness before them. Nowhere were they able to see any path to take.
Sun said to the girl, “You! Have you brought us here so we should die at your place?”
She said to them, “No, but we have not yet arrived at our village.”
And he, Moon, said to Sun, “Brother Sun, what are we to do now?” They said to the girl, “Tell us if you like us, and whether we are to woo you? We now wish to return home.”
They girl said to them, “Go, and come back the day after tomorrow!”
They went away and returned home.
They reached their home. And Moon loved the girl very much, more than Sun did. The following morning Sun went to herd their father’s cattle, and Moon hid himslef from Sun and went alone into the wilderness to seek the girl and take her to wife.
When he had got there, someone said to him, “Who is it?”
He said, “It is I”
He was asked, “Who are you?”
He answered, “It is I, Moon.”
He was asked, “Whither are you going?
He said, “I am coming hither.”
The other one asked him, “From where have you come?”
Moon said to him, “I come from our village.” And he added, “And you, what are you doing here?”
“I am not doing anything in particular,” said the stranger.
And I, neither am I doing anything in particular – I am just out for a walk,” answered Moon.
The other asked him again, “Why have you come here?”
“Not for anything special.”
The other mad said to him, “I, I? Not for anything special?”
Moon replied, “I, I! I did not come here for anything special! I have come here without any purpose.”
The strange man said, “Why do you ask me what I am seeking, but conceal and refuse to reveal your own business?”
Then Moon was frightened and said to himself, “I do not know these people, and they do not know me. I will return home!”
He returned home and said to Sun, “Brother, when I left you I saw a lot of queer things.”
Sun said to Moon, “Well, lets go some day and you shall show me those things; just now I am busy tending cattle.’
Their mother said to them, “Go ye and find the girl, I will do the hearding.”
They went, and when they got to the wilderness, they saw swords appearing. They fought against the sword but saw no human being. The swords disappeared, and they went on farther and saw trees which grew so densely before them the there was no path. Sun drew his sword and cut down some threes. The trees then disappeared altogether, and they did not see them again. They went farther ahead altogether, and they did not see them again. That went farther ahead and came to a pond; they were close to it. They saw teeth coming up out of the interior of the pond. They approached quite near. Two teeth passed right between them, one passed them to the left and another to t he right. Moon fell back behind Sun; he was frightened.
Sun said to him, “I, I Moon! Are you afraid? You are the elder one, go on ahead, let us walk on!”
“Yes, let us go on then! We are equally brave.”
Then teeth returned into the pond, and Sun and Moon walked on. When they had not got very far, they saw hairs coming up out of the pond. Moon looked at the girl’s father, for it was he, and said to Sun, “My brother, here we shall perish!”
“It cannot be helped!”
The hairs returned, however, into the pond. When they had got close to the pond, again Sun sat down on a tree at the edge of the pond together with Moon. The beard of the girl’s father came up to them but returned into the pond. Bones of dead people came up.
Moon said, “Oh! I am dying!” and suddenly he ran away.
Sun was left behind, alone there, sitting on the tree. The water rose, part of it came on one side of him and part of it on the other; it flowed all around him. He was sitting in the midst of the water, which presently returned to the pond. Sun did not budge from the spot. The water, however, returned to the river. Then smoke rose up out of the water. Sun said, to himself, “I do not intend to die here, although my brother got frightened and ran away. I am going to remain, so that I may see the girl” The smoke ceased, and the water flamed like fire. The fire, however, soon went out.
After that there came out of the water a human being – it was the girl! She came and took the young man by the hand and said to him, “Now we will go home to our place, and I shall give you food.”
The girl said to the pond, “Get out of the way for this man! I am going to cook food for him.” The water drew off the side of the pond, went over to one side.
The girl went and cooked food which she brought and gave the young man, and he ate. She said to him:
“I, it is you that is to take me to wife, because you are a man who is not afraid of anything. And you, now you are my husband because you are not afraid of all the things that were shown you, but your elder brother ran away.”
Then the girl’s father said to Sun, “Take the girl. When you have gone home you are to tarry there with her for five days, and then you yourself and your father are to bring the girl back here!
They started off. Moon had returned and sat down in the compound. He had a sword, and he said, “When Sun comes along with that girl, I shall kill him.”
Then the girl approached, and Sun was walking in the front of her. They came and found that Moon was in the compound. They asked him, “Moon, is there anyone at home in our village?”
“Sun, come here!”
Sun carried a sword. He went forward, and sat down. The mother came out and Sun said to her, “Mother, go and take the girl and conduct her into the village!”
The mother asked him, “This girl, is it you that have taken her to wife, or is it Moon?”
“She is my wife, Moon ran away.” Sun repeated: “Moon ran away.”
The latter grasped his sword. Sun looked up and saw the sword quite close to him, for Moon gave him a cut. And he, Sun, who also carried his sword, slapped Moon, and they fought. Sun was badly cut by Moon.
The mother cried a great deal. She took millet and all kinds of provisions and spoilt them for Moon. And she threw millet and all the other foodstuffs on the fire, saying, “You, Moon, have damaged Sun in this way. May you be destroyed in the same way! And the mother took some milk, and she and her husband poured it into a calabash bowl with millet and beer. Thereupon they blessed Sun, that he would shine brightly for mankind. The girl remained on in the village as Sun’s wife, but Moon had no wife, and he who had formerly been more brilliant than Sun no longer was so.
Ever since that time and even now Moon avoids Sun; they will not agree to approach each other at the same fire, nor to eat food together. When Sun goes down, Moon comes out; when Sun comes out of the village, Moon rapidly runs away. Is not that a curse? Moon has become small, and Sun has become big.
Before I attempt to answer this question, first allow me to set the stage here a bit. Now remember, you are a Reality Creator. You are a manifester. So you are already, as we speak, resonating your Personal Reality Field into being, into existence, you see. The problem may be that you are manifesting unconsciously. As you do, you create reality through the templates of your Issues. These are your beliefs about yourself and your world. This expression of your unconscious in the physical world may not be to your liking, therefore. You may in fact find yourself always making the same mistakes, and so, always creating less-than-satisfactory realities.
These are synchronicities also, the negative events, the negative realities. They are showing you that you are on a path of development and that you must change your ways. The negative reality creator looks around them and says to themselves, perhaps: “Why do I always create the same failed relationships?” “Coincidentally,” this person has, once again, established a relationship with a new person, within a different environment, also, possibly, in a different context entirely, that eventually becomes the “failed” relationship they feared. Might I suggest that the resonance in this case, the Feeling-Tone created here that resonates within consciousness, is of a negative nature? You may also refer to it as a series of ongoing harbingers of negative events; omens warning you of future negativity. But you are creating unconsciously and so you are not consciously aware. Your conscious perceptions overlook this data, they deny this information, they intellectualize and “explain away” these harbingers.
Your consciousness is unconsciously, automatically resonating your failed relationship into existence, just as it always does, just as it always will, unless you wake up to what you are up to.
Now additionally, because we are being precise and brief in our new Blog Series…. synchronicity is a perception, and thus, a state of consciousness in which connections are made by the coincidental connections, perfectly unextraordinary perceptions of the brain as it attempts to “make sense” of seemingly similar sensory input. This is true to a degree. However, let us provide our own definition with my theory of Reality Creation in mind. Synchronistic sensings are signals from the Soul-Self to the ego/intellect. They are meant to draw you into the moment. They are the basis of awakenings, the momentary awakenings we speak of in the new Blog material. I often suggest to you, that these coincidental experiences are telling you that you are on a path of awakening, even though you may not admit it. Indeed, if you were to observe and honor the synchronistic connections being made within your consciousness, you may possibly discover that everything is connected. The deeper you go, the more that is revealed. Over time, when you have learned how to “ride” these synchronous moments into the “future,” you find that you are awakening to your greater creaturehood. The sensings of your simultaneous Lives, the workings of the Universe, the secrets of Reality Creation become your habitual, ingoing experience.
First, we are awakening now. I believe I may safely say at this time. You are reading this Blog material because you are interested in the Unknown Reality and other metaphysical concepts. You are of this type, quite probably, that honors the sacred within consciousness. You look for it, you find it sometimes, and allow it to transform you, to wake you up. As this occurs within the consciousness of, let us say, a production worker in an automobile plant, you may feel prompted to tell others about your experiences. As you share your findings with others you catalyze the awakening experience in them. Each of you in this collective of awakening humans becomes YOUR OWN leader. You are leading yourself away from authority and to your own truth.
This is the Visionary Leader: the one who learns how to access their truth, teaches it to others, and then leads by example, you see. The Virtues of Humanity are their leadership principles. The highest good for all concerned is their focus of creation, of manifestation. The awakening human, in short, Resonates their improved reality into existence, by allowing these inner Precepts we call the Ancient Wisdom to replicate themselves in the Third Dimension. The etheric is physicalized through this process of Resonance. The sacred is established in the physical world for the greater improvement of all that exists in our world.
Now, your primary Lesson in this reality concerns how you, as an individual with your own aspects of personality, will respond to negativity. You are on Earth to experience negativity and your reactions will determine how long you will stay in the physical body in any particular incarnation, as well as other particulars of physical existence, such as when and if you shall return to a human form to experience the opportunity to deal with your Issues and Lessons: those experiences you have avoided or not dealt with properly.
I do not wish to compare this phenomenon with the stories from our world scriptures. For the most part, these stories quite literally HIDE FROM VIEW the essential meaning of the reincarnational journey. That is quite simply because these Blog manuscripts were written by human beings with an agenda, an agenda of the ego. What we are here discussing is the Soul’sAgenda. The Soul sends out particles of itself, of its energy, into human babies to grow with the human and experience the Lessons.
Beyond your initial Lessons of reacting appropriately to negativity come the Lessons particular to individuals. Your focus, your perspective, your orientation, the lenses of belief through which you create your reality, determine to the most minute detail the presentation of your Personal Reality Field before you. It is feedback, it is a recapitulation, it IS a replication of the interior processes of consciousness. The reality constructs of your world assemble into solidity at the bequest of ALL consciousness involved.
Now as you refuse from authority figures, you quite naturally learn how to trust YOURSELF. Again, this is a learned habit, like anything else in your reality. What you focus on habitually, whether subconsciously or consciously, you tend to create. The Courageous step of relying on your Inner Self to provide the information you seek, becomes a faithful expectation that you will receive what you desire and need. Over time it does indeed become second nature. You might also call it a faithful, trust-filled precognition that what you ask for is being provided.
This is the Ancient Wisdom, in fact, and this communication stream arrives from your greater Gestalt of Consciousness. It is personalized, this stream of data, for your perception. It is tuned to your frequency, specifically, to the frequency of your awakening Spirit. Thus, the awakening human becomes an expert on their own unfolding consciousness. And simply because you are connected to everyone/thing in the Universe, you are also mastering a perception of the macrocosm here: the greater gestalt you may call All That Is.
Now remember that this metaphor for the projection of All That Is into our system. Lessons is our Essential Metaphor for why the human comes to the physical plane. We suggest it is to experience the Lessons of Value Fulfillment, as the Virtues of Humanity are endorsed and Embodied, or perhaps denied and vilified. However, the lessons is a Lesson BECAUSE you are noticing it and interpreting it as a Lesson. You create your own reality, and as you do YOU are the value-fulfiller, whether it is the fulfillment though behavior, emotion, imagery and thought of physical violence, as in a perpetrator of violence upon others, or as is the case with a do-gooder type, who bestows goodness, Love, compassion on others. In both cases values are fulfilled. In both cases Lessons are learned.
Now let us look at the two examples in terms of frequency of vibration. We have suggested that negative emotion holds a lower vibration than does positive emotion. This is our premise upon which we build our theory of Resonance. In one example, the subject builds negative Reality Creations with negative emotions. This low frequency resonates with negative emotions everywhere. Within the collective gestalt of emotion, within the Collective Unconscious, your negative emotions resonate with other similarly-created negative emotions of humanity. You could say that this amalgam of negative emotion that is seeking out other “like” emotions within the consciousness field, eventually, through resonance, finds a home for itself. These “homes” we call the Gestalts of Consciousness, the foundational elements of Reality Constructs of all types, including of course, Reality Constructs of air, of ideas, of soil and stone, and so on. But again, these theorized activities of consciousness are simply metaphors for the exceedingly complex activities of the Consciousness Units.
Our changing roles as awakening humans reflect this learning of Lessons through FACING our Issues. Let me explain. Now you begin where you are. You are not yet awakened but you are getting there. You have discovered that you have Issues, spiritual Issues that are DEMANDING your attention. There is no room for denial. There is no time left for intellectualizing away these basic Issues. You are compelled to take to heart, for example, the admonishments of your friends, family, and colleagues. This advice may range from the negative through the positive, as in, “You are a walking ego. You harm others through your insensitivity,” to “You should really get out more. You could find a great partner if you were to make the gesture, go out, meet people.” As you act on the advice of others, or perhaps on promptings from other sources, such as the nonphysical beings, you are expanding your boundaries, your beliefs, your societal role.
In this case, your collective consciousness is Resonating with the ancient civilizations. In those prototypical cultures the highest good for all concerned was practiced in all endeavors. These important life-sustaining, healing messages enter your awareness as impulses, impulses, perhaps, to do good, give to others, to work on yourself and become a better human being. As your personal consciousness Resonates with these messages, you are connected to the collective through your thoughts, through your images, and so on. Thus you achieve your particular state of Resonance with the Ancient Wisdom even as you contribute to the collective state of Resonance by your CHANGING of behaviors, emotions, imagery, “Waking up,” we call it. You are waking up to your responsibilities to create for the highest good.
As you claim this responsibility as your own, your “personal credo, “so to speak, you quite naturally, again, assume a leadership position within your family, your town, your state, country and world. You are modeling for others this assuming of the awakened experience. You then Resonate with other visionary leaders. You come together to make plans for the future. You work as a collective for the betterment of your collectives, large and small.
Yes, it is cyclical. The Changing of the Guard is underway. The Shift in Consciousness transforms all. Specifically, for the interested citizen, those of you who are waking up, it is this Resonance in action, once again. Now the cycle of domination is changing. The idea that you must conquer the Earth, that to succeed you must dominate others, that the proper way to raise a child is to punish them when they misbehave, these concepts are giving way during this cycle of change. A cycle, a natural cycle of manifestation, implies that changes occur quite naturally, in the natural order of things, you might say. This is the case with The Shift. The dominators have had their say for many generations on Earth. They have created a crisis situation worldwide with their selfish behaviors. In the natural order of things, do you see how this Shift brings up the Ancient Wisdom that contains NEW ideas, NEW images, NEW and positive means of creating, behaving, Loving in the world?
I hope that you sense my irony, once again, as we speak in terms of the NEW ideas that the Ancient Wisdom brings. They ARE new to many of us, for we have practiced over these manys years, the way of forcing ourselves on others and on our environment. It is, from my perspective, completely and utterly expected that the “season” of the dominators would give way, in time, to the era of the Lovers of Earth, of humanity.
There this unhappy person perhaps scowls at their less-then-attractive form in the mirror. Defects of appearance are noted and perhaps amplified to muse over later. As this person attempts to begin their day, they are already drawing negative correlations between the things they see in their environment and what they are experiencing inside, in the consciousness, in the personal identity. They will then spend the rest of the day validating their negative state of consciousness by noting other negative correlations that they discover in the home, on the job, everywhere they go. Thus you could say that the ego notes the perceived negative characteristics within the Personal Reality as the intellect proves them to be quite true; a fact of life, as it were. This is how beliefs are formed.
What would you expect to be the probable outcomes of the Reality Creation projects of an unhappy, spiteful, angry human? Can you name some specifically? I would suggest a few that come to mind. Let me speak about them If I may:
This human would probably experience unhappy, unfulfilling outcomes. Because they were creating through the emotional templates of anger, spite, unhappiness, they would experience probable outcomes that veritably ring with these negative states of consciousness. They would be choosing, probably unconsciously, from this pool of negative emotion, the particulars of emotional nuance with which they would color their Reality Creation efforts.
As this person awakens from sleep, then, perhaps it is automatic for them. They have experienced days, weeks, months and perhaps YEARS of unhappy, spiteful, and angry states of consciousness. They have become an expert at creating these states, simply because they have been at it now for quite some time. So rather than bounding out of bed, eager to approach the day, perhaps they are pulling the covers over their head, to attempt to keep the day at bay. Then, as they are forced to react to the alarm that they have programmed into their alarm clock, they begrudgingly roll out of bed and trudge into the bathroom.
Now you get what you focus on, whether it is subconscious or conscious focusing. So assume that you ARE remembering in this moment that you are magically engaged in creating what you want. You are focused consciously on the goal. You are perhaps visualizing the object or state of consciousness in detail, here moment-to-moment. But what if you are losing this focus as you become engaged in taking care of a mundane matter that seeks attention? What often occurs at these times is an appearance by one of these stimulants, one of the Resonance Factors, that encapsulates, in a sense, the creative project for you up to the point of departure, so that you can remember where you left off when you return after the distraction with no loss of momentum.
Again, it is a Feeling-Tone. It has imagery, it has emotion, it has circular thought attached to it. Then, you might take care of the distraction and afterward return to your project of manifestation. You might do this by remembering the Feeling-Tone, the summation from the Best Case Scenario, the Resonance Factors that engaged you directly before you broke your state. Embody those Factors and begin again on your creative project. This is a simple way to keep your manifestation projects on track, in spite of the inevitable distractions in physical reality.
We create our reality. Each moment you create your part of the manifestation and allow others to participate. As a collective of manifesters – and this includes the elements and other non-living constructs – you create within your Personal Reality Field this ongoing drama: the world. Because you do this unconsciously, for the most part, it does entail an investigation to get to the bottom of these processes. For example: Consider that You-The-Blog-Reader are perhaps engaged in a creative project of the type we are describing. You are focusing on something, attempting to manifest an improved reality for yourself or others, or perhaps you are attempting to Resonate into existence a useful object, such as a new car, appliance, or some such thing.
Thus the evolving experience of the awakening student represents these continually updated projections of the Essential Identity into the Third Dimension. This is our life. As a human on this trajectory of Soul Evolution, your awakening consciousness is reflected in the ongoing products of your consciousness: your body, your environment, your life.
Dear Blog Reader, you are always in-tune with your creations, your Personal Reality. You are always getting what you ask for. But you may ask, “I am certainly not getting what I want. I am poor, sickly and quite unhappy. How can you say that?” In my presentations to you in physical reality we rely on a basic assumption that you are the creator of your world. As I said, you create your reality, your Personal Reality Field. You are connected to everyone and everything else in the created Universe through the Consciousness Units. Thus, as a collective of humans, we create our consensus realities. On the basic level, then, you look out in front of you and see your part of this Universe: your home, your friends and family, your job site, and so on. Now on the collective, progressed level of perception, the Visionary State, you might call it, when you look out in front of you, you may be witnessing your multidimensional reality. Visions of other lives may play out before you or upon the inner screen of your creative imagination. So let us here differentiate between these two states of consciousness perception and thus Reality Creation.
Let us cover probable effects of consciousness in the Third Dimension. To begin, as we know, our individual and collective realities are created from limitless probabilities. These probable thoughts, images, emotions, and so on, exist within the etheric, what we also call the pre-manifestation domain. It is from this dimension that our Earthly dimension emerges.
Now all probable effects have a singular charge. This tendency to appear in the particular way of the proposed effect, has, as I said, bioelectric and electromagnetic properties. In our terms, everything in the etheric domain. With your imagination, with your consciousness, you consistently add to this repository of potential. By thinking about the goodness of humanity, for example, you positive imagery, emotions, thoughts and other elements seek out their likeness in this pre-manifestation domain, as well as their opposites. The opposites serve to give depth and counterpoint. Through Resonance these correlations are energized, amplified, supported, given life, you see.
In a sense, the negative is inferred through the positive expression, in contrast, you see, in relative contrast. If you wish to think in terms of dynamics within a system, a system of reality, you could theorize that through Resonance, both the positive and the negative, in addition to all expressions in between these two polarities, are expressed to the nth degree throughout the past, present, and future. Value Fulfillment occurs simultaneously with this expression.
You are connected to everyone and everything else…
Feel You Power
Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,: creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all you see in front of you.
Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.
When Kintu came first to Ugnada he found there was no food at all in the country. He brought with him one cow and had only the food with which the animal supplied him. In the course of time a woman named Nambi came with her brother to the earth and saw Kintu. The woman fell in love with him and, wishing to be married to him, pointedly told him so. She had to return, however, with her brother to her people and her father, Gulu, who was king of the sky.
Nambi’s relations objected to the marriage because they said that the man did not know of any food except that which the cow yielded, and they despised him. Gulu, the father, however, said that they had better test Kintu before he consented to the marriage, and he accordingly sent someone to rob Kintu of his cow. For a time Kintu was at a loss what to eat, but he managed to find different kinds of herbs and leaves which he cooked and ate. Nambi happened to see the cow grazing and recognized it, and complaining that her brothers wished to kill the man she loved, she went to the earth and told Kintu where his cow was, and invited him to return with her to take it away.
Kintu consented to go, and when he reached the sky he was greatly surprised to see how many people there were with houses and with cows, goats, sheep, and fowls running about. When Nambi’s brothers saw Kintu sitting with their sister at her house, they went and told heir father testing to see whether he was worthy of their sister. An enormous meal was cooked, enough food for a hundred people, and brought to Kintu, who was told that unless he ate it all he would be killed as an impostor. Failure to eat it, they said, would be proof that he was not the great Kintu. He was then shut up in a house and left alone.
After he had eaten and drunk as much as he could, he was at a loss to know what to do with the rest of the food. fortunately, he discovered a deep hole in the floor of the house, so he turned all the food and beer into it and covered it over so that no one could detect the place. He then called the people outside to come and take away the baskets. The sons of Gulu came in, but would not believe that he eaten all the food. They, therefore, searched the house but failed to find it.
They went to their father and told him that Kintu had eaten all the food. He was incredulous, and said that Kintu must be further tested. A copper axe was sent to Kintu by Gulu, who said, “Go and cut me firewood from the rock, because I do not use ordinary firewood.”
When Kintu went with the axe, he said to himself, “What am I to do? If I strike the rock, the axe will only turn its edge or rebound.” However, after he had examined the rock, he found that there were cracks in it, so he broke off pieces of it, and returned with them to Gulu who was surprised to get them. Nevertheless, he said that Kintu must be further tried before they could give their consent to the marriage.
Kintu was next sent to fetch water and was told that he must bring only dew, because Gulu did not drink water from wells. Kintu took the water-pot and went off to a field, where he put the pot down and began to ponder what he must do to collect the dew. He was sorely puzzled, but upon returning to the pot, he found it full of water. So he carried it back to Gulu. Gulu was most surprised and said, “This man is a wonderful being; he shall have his cow back and marry my daughter.
Kintu was told to pick his cow from the herd and take it. This was a more difficult task than the others, because there were so many cows like his own that he feared he would mistake it and take the wrong one. While he was thus perplexed a large bee came and said, “Take the one upon whose horns I shall alight; it is yours.”
The next morning Kintu went to the appointed place and stood and watched the bee, which was resting on a tree near him. A large herd of cows was brought before him, and he pretended to look for his cow, but in reality he was watching the bee which did not move. After a time, Kintu said, “My cow is not there.” A second herd was brought, and the bee at once flew away and rested upon a cow which was a very large one, and Kintu said, “This is my cow.” The bee then flew to another cow, and Kintu said, “This is one of the calves from my cow,” and the bee went on to a second and a third cow which Kintu claimed as the calves which had been born during the cow’s stay with Gulu.
Gulu was delighted with Kintu and said, “You are truly Kintu, take your cows. No one can deceive or rob you, you are too clever for that.” He called Nambi and said to Kintu, “Take my daughter who loves you, marry her, and go back to your home.” Gulu further said, “You must hurry and go back before Walumbe, or Death, comes, because he will want to go with you and you must not take him; he will only cause you trouble and unhappiness.”
Nambi agree to what her father said and went to pack up her things. Kintu and Nambi then took leave of Gulu, who said, “Be sure, if you have forgotten anything, not to come back, because Death will want to go with you and you must go without him.”
They started off home, taking with them, besides Nambi’s things and the cows, a goat, a sheep, a fowl, and a plantain tree. On the way Nambi remembered that she had forgotten the grain for the for the fowl, and she said to Kintu, “I must go back for the grain for the fowl, or it will die.”
Kintu tried to dissuade her, but in vain. She said, “I will hurry back and get it without anyone seeing me.”
He said, “Your brother Death will be on the watch and will see you.”
She would not listen to her husband, but went back and said to her father, “I have forgotten the grain for the fowl, and I have come to take it from the doorway where I put it.”
He replied, “Did I not tell you that you were not to return if you forgot anything, because your brother Walumbe would see you and want to go with you?” Now he will accompany you.”
Nambi tried to steal away without Walumbe, but he followed her. When she rejoined Kintu, he was angry at seeing Walumbe, and said, “Why have you brought your brother with you? Who can live with him?”
Nambi was sorry, so Kintu said, “Let us go and see what happen.”
When they reached the earth Nambi planted her garden, and the plantains grew rapidly, and she soon had a large plantain grove in Manyagalya. They lived happily for some time and had a number oif children, until one day Walumbe asked kintu to send one of the children to be his cook.
Kintu replied, “If Gulu comes and asks me for one of my children, what am I to say to him? Shall I tell him that I have given her to be your cook?”
Walumbe was silent and went away, but he again asked for a child to be his cook, and again Kintu refused to send one of his daughters, so Walumbe said, “I will kill them.”
Kintu, who did not know what he meant, asked, “What is it that you will do?” In a short time, however, one of the children fell ill and died, and from that time they began to die at intervals.
Kintu returned to Gulu and told him about the deaths of the children, and accuse Walumbe of being the cause. Gulu replied, “Did I not tell you when you were going away to go at once with your wife and not return if you had forgotten anything? But you allowed Nambi to return for grain. Now you have Walumbe living with you. Had you obeyed me you would have been free of him and would not have lost any of your children.”
After some further entreaty, Gulu sent Kaikuzi, another brother, to assist Nambi, and to prevent Walumbe from killing the children. Kaikuzi went to the earth with Kintu and was met by Nambi, who told him her pitiful story. He said he would call Walumbe and try to dissuade him from killing the children. When Walumbe came to greet his brother they had quite a warm and affectionate meeting, and Kintu told him he had come to take him back, because their father wanted him.
Walumbe said, “Let us take our sister too.”
But Kintu said he was not sent to take her, because she was married and had to stay with her husband. Walumbe refused to go without his sister, and Kaikuzi was angry with him and ordered him to do as he was told. Death, however, escaped from Kaikuzi’s grip and fled away into the earth.
For a long time there was enmity between the two brothers. Kaikuzi tried in every possible way to catch his brother Walumbe, but he always escaped. At last Kaikuzi told the people to remain in their houses for several days and not to let any of the animals out, and he would have a final hunt for Walumbe. He further told them that if they saw Walumbe they must not call out or raise the usual cry of fear.
The instructions were followed for two or three days, and Kaikuzi got his brother to come out of the earth and was about to capture him, when some children took their goats to the pasture and saw Walumbe and called out. Kaikuzi rushed to the spot and asked why they called, and they said they had seen Death. Kaikuzi was angry, because Walumbe had again gone into the earth. So he went to Kintu and told him he was tired of hunting Death and wanted to return home. He also complained that the children had frightened Walumbe into the earth again. Kintu thanked Kaikuzi for his help and said he feared nothing more could be done, and he hoped Walumbe would not kill all the people.
Form that time Death has lived upon the earth and killed people whenever he can, and then he escapes into the earth at Tanda in Singo.
Now the truth is, that you as a Reality Creator may expect an infinite variety of outcomes i,e,; creations. The possibilities are limitless with regards to what you can and do create. In this Practice we speak of these outcomes as a form of feedback of your mentality. What you are thinking about is reflected quite directly back to you from your creations, your Personal Reality. You have thus had a hand in the creation of all that you see in front of you.
Admittedly, you are far more responsible for the creation of your body, shall we say, and your immediate surroundings, than the neighborhood or the city in which you live. Your creative powers are most effective within a 50 foot radius. Feel your power, then, as the creator of realities standing within the magical arena of your Personal Reality Field. Sense it. “Own it,” as we say.
Further information may be gathered in the Trance State, as we said earlier. You may find it is easier to receive unbiased information in Trance rather than trying to circumvent the agenda of the ego/intellect. Do what works best for you in your Practice.
Also, carry a recording device with you or a simple notebook to document discoveries in the field. Especially note Resonance Factors, those aspects of consciousness that seem to precognate the manifestation. In other words, these glimpses into your future represent your progressed self – the one that enjoys the Best Case Scenario – sending back clues and suggestions from the future. True, this is high-etherics we are suggesting to you in the Practice. However, consider that you are now reading a Blog dictated by a non-physical being who has been dead for quite some time. I suggest to you that you are ALREADY submerged in the etherics of the Unknown Reality, Dear Blog Reader. You may as well enjoy it.
So you would write down these impulses from the future – the messages from the BCS – and your successes, most assuredly, and also note instances of non-success. Simply note them, however, without berating yourself. This information is crucial to your redirection of energies in your Regimen. Now you know what NOT to do. Now you may do the opposite, in fact. So as you school yourself in this system, be a good reacher, be a kind teacher, be a teacher who models Love for the student
In this exercise you are taking hold of your Reality Creation in the moment of assessment. You are then including the Felt Difference – the Feeling-Tone of what is missing – in your creative efforts. Using your Intent, allowing your personal power to come forward in that moment, impress this Blog material into your activities, into your perception of your Personal Reality Field.
The Felt Difference is that Feeling-Tone of thought, imagery and emotion that is missing from the BCS (Best Case Scenario). You have assessed your current status quo reality and found some things lacking. You would like to include this Blog Material, in other words, in your CURRENT reality. Write down what you have noticed that is missing.
Now imagine what BCS would look like when it is finally manifested. Write your BCS on the lines below. Use just a few words to capture the essence, the Feeling-Tone of this construct. I believe that it is important to start this process now. You have the tools to be gin. You are ready now to start creating your heart’s desire.
Your first project begins in earnest when you create Current Feeling-Tone Assessment of the state of the domain of living that you have selected. Do that next
What areas of your life need improving? What projects are you willing to devote your time and energy to in order to get results? List in order of importance the areas in your life that need this attention. I do think that it is counterproductive to be shy about this, to be fearful that someone may read this Blog material and wonder about your sanity. However, write this in a diary that is secure if you feel that it is necessary.
Now do personalize the protection Ritual. Put your personality and your personal energy in it. Also it helps to link this creative state of consciousness to a memory, a thought, an image or gesture. In this way you may immediately create a felt sense of protection, security, Love while you are out in your waking world with a mere snap of your fingers. Or perhaps you carry a card in your pocket with the word “Sanctuary” printed on it. Every time you take it out of your pocket and look at it. Sanctuary is created automatically. Again, why does it occur? It occurs because you create your reality.
When I provide ongoing support for clients, I proceed in a particular way. This may help you to create your own program and help you avoid problems.
Now when a client asks me for my insight into a particular Issue that they might have, I remind them that THEY themselves have the solutions. I am only an intermediary here, you see. I am able to observe what the client has in store for themselves as probable trajectories of development, probable realities. Therefore, as you create your Regimens keep this truth in mind, Dear Blog Reader. You already know the answers. You already have created success in your Practice. You are even now quite successful in a probable future from which you may pull inspiration. In other words, please understand this Best Case Scenario that we speak of in this Blog Series is real. It is quite apparent to me, and I am certain it will become quite certain to you as you complete your studies.
Secondly, use your Guides as you would a coach or knowledgeable confidante. As we have reminded you before in our second Blog Series, the genie of literature and myth is the Energy Personality, the Spirit, the Guide. Knowing this, act as if your guides have all the answers and it will be so. This can be considered an adjunct Precept to YCYR. Perhaps I would state it thus: “Your Source has all the answers you need to help you manifest your heart’s desire.” Then, as you Embody this Precept, the Guides will make themselves known to you and make the information available, the information you require, you see, to create your world the way you want it.
Your basic demeanor in these practices, is this: the adult persona presented by the ego/intellect is out to the side, and the child, the magical child, the Wondering child, is allowed to be present.
The Skill-Set
Please gain some proficiency in your Practice before you put together your first Regimen. The Practice is a skill-set that you develop through proving to yourself, in the physical world, that you have the power and knowledge to create. I suggest you do not set yourself up for failure here. Particularly if this is one of your favorite dysfunctions, to create failure. Please take it slow. Methodical and slow is the best way to go to get your positive results. Then remember, even though the positive feedback from your Ritual is small, perhaps insignificant in comparison to what you see as your Best Case Scenario, do acknowledge this signal with true gratitude and humility. For it is an indicator that you ARE moving toward your goal. The Universe is responding to your overtures. You are on your way.
Transformation – An example: You area a bully, let us pretend, and you enjoy picking on people, making them miserable. You rationalize your behavior by blaming it on your father, who was also a bully, per the reports from your mother. However, the truth comes out that your father was far from being a bully and was quite Loving and nurturing. He made his Transition at an early time in your life. You were not able to feel fathered completely by this human.
What do you do now? You have an opportunity to change your behavior, to in fact change it to its opposite. You can attempt to Embody the Virtues of Loving Understanding, nurturing, and so on. You will be working on a negative reality you have created for you have found proof that it is based on falsehoods. You have it within you to create these Virtues, as do we all. And so you practice Embodying these opposites of the bully.
Will this practice make an angel out of you, a profoundly Loving and spiritual person? Perhaps. Yet if you do continue this practice of polarizing the Feeling-Tones you have used to create the bully persona, you will undoubtedly improve, in Soul sense, in the sense of creating progress in your Soul’s Evolution.
Now here is a time for everything, here, in your Ritual processes. Let me go on a bit about just what I mean with this statement…
Just as this Resonance exhibits both the attractive and repulsive principles, and finds cohesion and momentum “over time,” you may find it advantageous to, in a sense, ride this wave of manifestation with your awareness. There is a time for holding on and letting go, resisting/assessing and “going with the flow.” You cannot have one without the other in this natural process. It is not “wrong” or “bad” to favor one over the other. It is quite fruitful to embrace both in this practice.
In a very natural way, the student attends to the current moment, for example, with focus and energy. In the next moment, however, you might relax and let go, you see: Distraction. The natural distractions of living will occur for you, taking your focus off of your creative enterprises. Simply let go of your focus in that moment and ride the wave of manifestation. The next moment may call for a return to your focus on the matter at hand. Simply do so, not abandoning the distraction but simply diverting your attention back to the Regimen. This is multitasking. The more you practice, the more proficient you become.
If you feel as though you are experiencing Lack, you have a perspective Issue. You exist within an Abundant Universe, however your Issues act as barriers between you and prosperity. Your beliefs, you see, are actively obscuring your perception of this Abundant Universe.
Let me explain the activity of Resonance at it applies to the Victim. Now Resonance is a dynamic process. It is composed of Light energy fluctuations achieving balance within electromagnetic influences. The Consciousness Units flash on and off, creating different realities in different time-frames. On the basic level, what you focus on consciously, or unconsciously, has a particular vibratory frequency that attempts to replicate itself in physical reality.
On the unconscious level, for example, let us suppose that you have a tendency to create just enough prosperity to sustain yourself, yet never enough to relax and enjoy your life. This is how you view it, your manifestation of your person reality.
This is a type of victim stance, in that, you see yourself as “trying to get ahead,” as we say, but it never quite happens.
In my terms, your prosperity evades you for you are creating unconsciously according to less-than-best case scenarios created in your past. These scenarios may have been developed by you in your response to perceived stress, trauma, negative experiences, you see. These are protective strategies that serve to protect you at THAT STAGE of your development: the point in your growth as a Soul in which you sustained the emotional injuries, the damage, you might say, to the Emotional Body. The ego/intellect, the conscious mind attempts to protect you in this way. It keeps from you this negative material. It represses it.
This resonance phenomenon is actively working within your subconscious to match the vibratory frequency of you victim strategy to people, places and things in your physical world. Subconsciously, then, you are creating your reality through this resonance effect, that seeks a match of outside to inside energies.
This reasoning also applies to any attempts at body conditioning through exercise and other physical activities. The important piece here is this: “What do you think of your physical body NOW in this moment?” Now in the moment is when you create your future, you see. Now in the moment is when you must Love yourself, Love your body. If you can see the potential trim and fit physical body beneath the chubby exterior, then you have the right idea. That is your focus, from my perspective. That positive image, that positive Feeling-Tone of Love and success is what may drive your manifestation activities over the course of the Regimen.
Obviously, if what you see before you as you look in the mirror repulses you, you have some important changes to make in your self-assessment activities. That is where you begin, then, to appreciate the body you now have while also anticipating the improvements.
On this Regimen you will be Loving your body into fitness. You Love how you are in this moment, first, and then you move toward the creation of an improved reality moment-to-moment, as you, for example, eat healthy foods, exercise regularly, and all the while you are keeping this Loving Understanding of self intact.
In my past Blog Series, I suggested to you that in matters of diet, as in the eating of specific foods, that it was more important what the eater THOUGHT of the food. What matters most are the images, circular thoughts, essential ideas that you-the-eater entertain within your mental environment before, during, and after eating food. These influences have a very direct effect upon the digestion. So for example, if you eat a small piece of chocolate, say, that is on your FORBIDDEN list of foods, you would have, perhaps, a quite negative reaction to the food. “Chocolate makes me fat,” you may say to yourself as you eat it. That statement is a profound suggestion to your subconscious that you immediately, upon eating any chocolate, must begin the process of turning it into fat. Your digestive system will obey dutifully this suggestion as you reinforce it with negative imagery, negative emotion, and so on. In addition, this sets up an unfortunate dis-empowering dynamic in which you play the naughty child that must be punished with obesity by the punitive subconscious.
Now here in this section we will demonstrate how a sense of Good Humor, as in clever punning, may help us initiate a manifestation scenario of positive realities. You already are familiar, I am guessing, with the modern aphorisms regarding the past: “Don’t dredge up the past. What’s done is done. Look forward.” Generally, the past, particularly the past of negative events, traumatic events shall we say, is indeed best forgotten. “Just don’t dwell on it, ” the saying goes, “and it will lose its power over you.”
There is some truth to these statements, from my perspective. You do indeed create through a focusing of your energies on the subject matter. And so I do not advise the student who has had a traumatic childhood, for example, to continuously TRY to remember the traumatic events. Without proper preparation, they may make matters worse for themselves. Yet I DO believe that a return to the scenes of the trauma in the imagination, from an Objective Observer’s perspective, may be quite healing. Again, this is not done willy-nilly, without regard for the safety of the human. Great preparation is made before the return to master this Observer’s Perspective.
Once this is done, the student may safely visit these unfortunate memories, and observe the going-on objectively, without Embodying these negative memories, in other words. Here is where we use humor to neutralize the negative Feeling-Tone that marks and identifies the traumatic events. Change the past and the present will take care of itself. It has a sense of the absurd to it yet it is literally true. Over time the Objective Observer creates safety in this retrieval process. The negative emotion loses its sting, its power to wound.
Now having been neutralized, the event may safely be studied, assessed, and TRANSFORMED. The student is quite literally changing their past. When they return to surface awareness from the Trance State they may well experience the cathartic healing of consciousness. In this sense the student recovers, as in going back to retrieve the lost aspects of Soul, rather than recover in the sense of again covering up the negative past. Please note the activity of the double meaning within consciousness.
ESSENTIAL METAPHOR – You are on a path to your past, to your birth. As you go back in time on this path you see on the side of the road, events, places where you split off parts of yourself and left them. The idea is to collect these aspects or parts of self and integrate them into your personality through Intent. You go all the way back to your birth. When you have done this adequately, you can go back beyond and before your birth to the time in between lives, in the Home Dimension and into other lives.
Now if you have issues of abuse from childhood, these issues may be healed from the present. As you walk this path you see different events being recreated on the side of the road. You see where you have left parts of yourself at different stages of development in your life. The idea is to collect these Feeling-Tones and bring them back to the present. This is healing the Soul. It allows you to integrate all of this material and navigate the developmental phase that was interrupted by the trauma.
It is quite common for the human who has been traumatized in childhood to experience these flashbacks in adult life. The volatile material has been repressed successfully over the years, but now the images and other content force themselves upon the waking mind. The Reality Creation is disrupted violently during these events, as the human, usually referred to as “the victim,” re-experiences the Feeling-Tone of the Traumatic event or events.
It seems to me, that what must change here is the felt sense or Feeling-Tone of the traumatic past that comes to visit. One then revisits the traumatic memories in the Trance State, with an eye toward altering them; altering in memory and thus altering the effects in the flashbacks. One observes the traumatic material as an Objective Observer, without becoming emotionally involved, you see, as though one were watching a movie. Important information is carried out of the Trance State and then documented. Each time the scene is revisited in memory, the Objective Observer notes the particulars with cool detachment. Eventually the flashbacks will be experienced in this Observer Perspective, rather than the traumatized “victim” perspective. It is a case of tuning down the high emotionality and trauma of the event. The cascade of negative emotion will be prevented, as the disturbing material is observed in the cool light of day, you might say. Again, this is simply a change of perspective and so change of realities.
Now, many of my Blog Readers, because they are human, because they are learning Lessons, they experience emotional injuries. These learning experiences occur in the younger years, primarily, but obviously one may experience the negative emotions throughout life. The habitual re-creation of negative emotion within consciousness creates these emotional injuries we speak of in the new Blog Series. These injuries may be seen within the Emotional Body of the individual, in the dream state, or in other altered states of awareness, such as in Trance, during prayer, during the Guided Visualization, and so on. It is therefore, to the altered states that we go, as explorers, as Scientists of Consciousness, to discern the specifics of your own emotional injuries.
These events from the past protect themselves. They hide from your view, in a sense, for the content is often so negative, as in shameful, you see, that the ego/intellect cannot handle it. This material is continually forced back into the subconscious, or the underworld, if you prefer, by your conscious mind. Over the years there may be brief attempts by the Soul Self to reveal to the conscious mind these emotional injuries, yet they are most often denied, “repressed,” as we say. This continual denial of these secret volatile elements of consciousness serves to give this information more explosive power. This dark side of the human consciousness is thus relegated to the Unknown Reality, where it festers over time.
Now the brief interludes of perception in which this material is accessed by the conscious mind may be appropriately called “flashbacks,” using the term from our english vernacular. In a flash, in an instant, the images, thought, emotion and other data is served to the present conscious mind for appreciation, for healing, you might say. These breakthroughs into consciousness you might call “the curse of memory,” for they do arrive unbidden by the human experiencing them. So in an attempt to re-define these experiences and thus heal them, we may begin to call the Healing Signals of memory. They are indeed signals from the interior of consciousness as to what MUST be addressed. Let us have an example here to illustrate what we mean.
When examining negative realities, such as traumatic events from the past, the Practitioner does not Embody the perspective but looks on dispassionately, objectively, without fear, anger or any emotion whatsoever.
The depressed person ritually creates negative value, the fuel for negative, unconsciously-produced realities. In so doing, they incur a muted sense of satisfaction. They have Issues, you see. They are feeling as though they are fulfilling their roles as a depressed person by creating the depressed state. But imagine that they are now receiving guidance from an awakening human. They are changing their thoughts, emotions, imagery, and finding that this accent on the positive has results in the physical world. They are producing positive value and it is becoming habitual. Soon they are free from depression. Indeed, soon they are ecstatically co-creating their Personal Reality through their Higher Centers of Awareness.
As you address what you feel are probable Issues that you would like to resolve with regards to your health, please think in terms of Signals from the Emotional Body rather than the very loaded term symptoms. Conduct the Reading the Emotional Body Exercise from earlier in the Blog Series. Ask your Inner Self what might receive are often literal descriptions of the Issue or perhaps symbolic representations. These readings contain the necessary information for healing and transforming the Issue. Use your own judgement and Inner Senses assessments as you diagnose and treat your malady. Additionally, we have given you hundreds of pages of material on healing in our new Blog Series. I refer you there for more specific information.
First it is a good idea to determine what you will be creating. In this simple exercise we will explore which of the realms of human experience you would like to improve with your Ritual practices. Now there are the obvious choices for exploration that include the domains of health, wealth, spiritual understanding, and so on. The Techniques and Strategies that we offer you in this Blog Series may be successfully applied to any reality improvement projects you may devise. As we go through the following material, please keep in mind what we have given you thus far. These are simply some generaly directions on how to go about creating your own Regimens.
For purposes of this discussion, a Feeling-Tone of Love and a desire for the highest good for all concerned. This construct has power for it is being continuously endorsed with positive energy by the Practitioner.
Now in their most simplified form, the Regimens entail Embodying the Precepts after you have personalized them, and, if you are the spiritual sort, after you have invoked your Higher Centers Awareness. You might describe the Regimens as a type of “test drive.” You are taking your new reality out for a ride to see if you enjoy the effects. If you like what you see, what you are making, continue the Embodiment. Soon it will become a positive habit, replacing the mundane or negative realities you were working on.
Now obviously you can be both: awake and un-awakened. If you are just starting out, it will take some time to master the practices. You will be moving from the realms of the uninitiated into those of the Master Practitioner. As you improve your Technique you are continually getting what you want, in a positive sense. Positive Value Fulfillment is what I am describing here.
This is the edge of creation in which you are beginning to see positive effects in your world. It comes after consistent use of the Techniques and Strategies offered in this Blog. In essence, you are the one who must be convinced of the efficacy of this Teaching. How you go about assimilating it in physical reality will determine your success and also the timing of your success. Again, I suggest you courageously and with Loving regard for all, move forward in your existence, manifesting what you Love.
This accent on the positive has results in the physical world…
RITUALS OF MANIFESTATION
The Regimens are in fact Rituals, as we define that term in my new Blog Series. They are extended Rituals that the student conducts throughout their waking reality. Now you already know that in this practice we think of the average human in the Common Trance as also conducting a Ritual. The un-awakened human is using their Reality Creation energies in the same ways each moment of each day, day-after-day, to create their mundane reality. This is unconscious creation.
So let us again speak in terms of conscious and unconscious Reality Creation. The un-awakened human Ritually creates subconsciously their mundane realities, just as the awakening human Ritually creates consciously and with Intent their Positive Realities.
Again, this perspective we epouse is not the experiencing of the free flowing moment, the moment of no-attachment. Rather it is a FULL moment of understanding, Courage and transformation. An example: In this full moment I am describing, as you empower it with your Intent, you are engaged in quite the opposite behaviors as are most of your colleagues in physical reality. You are not stumbling forward in the Common Trance, the state of consciousness that supports consumerism and blind obedience to authority. You ARE, in fact, claiming, or perhaps re-claiming the sacred perspective honors the integrity and authority of the individual. Within this state of consciousness you are inner-directed and naturally abide by the suggestions of your greater creative personality. Do you understand this important difference?
Now it is true that I am giving you something more to do than simply fantasize about what breakfast cereal you might buy. Indeed, these practices supplant and spontaneously replace en masses the negative ruminations, self-limiting images and emotional content that tie you to the creation of mundane and negative realities. Choose the appropriate Dynamic according to circumstances.
These exercises may appear to be somewhat daunting to the Blog Reader. Yes, I am asking you to think about your moment-to-moment reality. I am suggesting that you keep certain principles in mind as you do. It may seem to be a lot of work to some, particularly to those who have been taught that the way awaken is to NOT focus on the current moment, but to, in a sense, “float” along without attachment. Yet, I believe that my systems also allows for a letting-go, a going with the flow in the moment. This occurs simultaneously with the engagement of these other Dynamics, these perspectives. You could almost say that it is in the theorized midpoint of these Dynamics that the release is experienced.
Between Remembering and Embodying, for example, there is an opportunity for release, for experiencing the flow of manifestation. It is in fact this release into the flow of Reality Creation that sustains all of these Dynamics of consciousness manifestation that we have identified. You might call this release, this surrender to the flow, as the experiencing of the Moment Point or the Point of Power that I have described to you in my Blogs. The current moment is all you have, dear Blog Reader. Surrender into this moment and feel your power.
These Resonance Dynamics yield greater positive effects when the Practitioner personalizes them with their own criteria, just as with the other Essential Metaphors. The process of adapting these potential states of consciousness to your own Journey of Awakening is exactly the same. For example: Suppose you are experimenting with the concept of Learning and Finishing-Up, the first Resonance Dynamic we cover, and perhaps the most important one generally for the student. You are “trying on” this Essential Metaphor to see if you can make some improvements in your life. In other words, whenever you have a full moment of clarity in your waking existence and you remember that you are on a Journey of Awakening, you Embody this Dynamic. So in this momentary awakening you might consider honestly the Lessons of your existence as you understand them.
Remember, your Lessons are easily available to you through asking your friends and family, “What is your opinion of me? What do you think I am here to learn?” Their honest assessments of you are the beginning of your awakening to the True Self. If you have done self-explorations and you know a bit about your Lessons from that investigation, go with that material. The point is, in this full moment of understanding in your waking world, you are asking yourself this question: “What can I do now in this moment to become more aware of my Lessons, and to, in some way, begin or continue to deal with them for the highest good of all?”
The second component, here, that of Finishing-Up, is a little more complex to negotiate. It entails having an awareness and appreciation for your eventual Transition, your own physical death. Having an ongoing appreciation for your Transition into the non-physical world has great value for you. This state of consciousness holds a quickening of perception, so that you are continually reminding yourself of what is important in your life, and what you must do during your time on the planet. This is not morbid thinking or gallows humor. Paradoxically there is often discovered through this perspective true ecstasy and enjoyment of life. Again, this is not negative thinking but a positive awareness for the truth of your existence.
Different than Wondering Assessments, this is practicing the Divine, walking, talking, acting, thinking, feeling, believing in a certain way. Resonance is created here as you juxtapose what you are when you are in your Issues with what you are when you are attempting to Embody your Precepts. Again, the difference, the Feeling- Tone you experience that is the difference between the two states of consciousness is the magical impetus to creating your heart’s desire.
PERSONALIZING
The true student is distinguished from the dilettante by this dedication to internalizing, physicalizing, and making real the Practice. The student invests all of their energies in these studies.
Now the awakening events themselves happens in a split second of perception. Though I ask you to engage in the ongoing assessment and transformation of your Personal Reality using these Strategies, the magic happens, if you will accept this cliche again, in this same moment that you read these Blog words.
Yes, you are asked to engage your Inner Senses in a complete assessment of what you are truly creating in your world. Yet it takes some time, usually, to master these Inner Senses perceptions as well as the multitude of exercises that I proffer to you throughout my new Blog Series. Again, the awakening occurs NOW. If you want to save yourself some time and effort, awaken NOW to the truth of your world. I am only being moderately facetious in this statement.
Now negative ruminations are the creative material for negative realities, as you know. Your Wondering assessments and other Techniques work to replace these negative ruminations with affirmative ruminations. These become the basis for the creation of positive realities. Your consciousness pulls from this material what it needs to create your heart’s desire.
You could say that the Practitioner moves from dissonance or resonance with a small “r,” that may also be described as static, lower frequencies, the Worst Case Scenario, unconscious creation… to Resonance, a state that is marked by congruence, higher frequencies, the Best Case Scenario, conscious creation, and so on.
Once some children, at their mother’s behest, very gently approached the sun’s armpit. As the sun lay sleeping. They went to lift up the sun’s armpit.
At the same time, another woman ordered her children to do the same thing. She told them that if they approached ever so gently and drew up the sun’s armpit, then the rice of the Bushmen would become dry, and the sun, as it proceeded from place across the sky, would cause everything to become bright. For this reason it was that the old woman, their mother, coaxed her children to do as she asked. “But, children,” she said, “you must wait for the sun, who is making us so cold, to lie down to sleep. Then approach him gently and, all together, lift him up and throw him into the sky.” Thus, indeed, did both of the old women speak.
And so the children approached the sun. They first sat down and looked at him in order to determine whether, as he lay there, he was looking at them. Finally they saw him lying there very quietly, his elbow lifted up so that his armpit shone upon the ground. Before the children prepared to throw him up into the sky they remembered what the old woman, their mother, had said: “O children, going yonder, you must speak to him when you throw him up. You must tell him that he must be the sun – the sun who is hot and who, as he passes along the sky, causes the Bushmen rice to become dry – the sun who is hot as he stands above in the sky.”
Thus had their mother, the old woman, whose head was white, spoken. They had listened and were going to obey her.
When all was in readiness, they took hold of the sun, all of them together, lifted him, raised him, even though he was hot to touch, and threw him up in the sky, addressing him as they threw him up: “O sun, you must altogether stand fast and you must proceed along your way – you must stand fast while you are hot.”
Then the children returned to their mother, and one of them went to her and said, “Our companion, who is here, this one, took hold of him. So did I. Then my younger brother and my still younger brother, they all took hold of him. ‘Grasp hold of him firmly,’ I said, ‘and throw him up. Grasp the old man firmly and throw him up.’ Thus I spoke to them. Then the children threw him up, the old man, the sun.”
Then another one of those who had been resent – a younger indeed – he also spoke to her and said, “Oh, grandmother, we threw him up, the sun, and we told him what you had told us, that he should altogether become the sun, the sun who is hot, for us who are cold. And we addressed him thus: ‘O my grandfather, sun’s armpit! Remain there at that place. Because the sun who is hot so that the Bushmen rice may dry for us, so that you may make the whole earth light, that the earth may become warm in the summer, that you may altogether make heat. For the reason, you must shine everywhere. You must take away the darkness. You must come indeed so that the darkness will go away.'”
And thus it is. The sun comes, the darkness departs; the sun sets, the darkness comes and, then, at night the moon comes. The moon comes out; it brightens the darkness and the darkness then departs. It has taken the darkness aways and now it moves along, continually brightening the darkness. And the the moon sets and the sun, following, comes out. The sun now drives away the darkness, indeed drives away the moon as it stands there. The sun actually pierces the moon with his knife and that is why it decays. Therefore the moon said, “O sun! leave the backbone for the children!” And the sun did so.
Then the moon painfully went away painfully returned home. He went home to become another, a moon which is whole. He again comes to life although is had seemed that he had died. He becomes a new moon and feels as though he had put on a new stomach. He becomes large; he is alive again. Then he goes along as night, feeling that he is the moon once more. Indeed he feels he is a shoe, the shoe that Mantis threw into the sky, and ordered to become the moon.
That is what the sun has done – made all the earth bright. And thus it is that the people walk while the earth is light. Then people can see the bushes, can we see other people. They can see the meat which they are eating. They can see the springbok, can hunt it in summer. It is when the sun shines, like wise, that they can hunt the ostrich. And so – because the sun brightens the earth, because he shines upon the path of men – the Bushmen steal up to the gemsbok, steal up to the kudu, travel about in summer, and go visiting one another. Because the sun shines hottest upon the path of men in summer, they always go shooting and hunting then, for they are certain to espy the springbok. It is in the summer that they lie contented in their little homes made of bushes, and they scratch up the earth. All day they do when the springbok comes.
The people of whom we speaking were the Bushmen, the men of the early race. It is they who first inhabited this earth and it was their children who worked with the sun, who threw the sun up and made him ascend so that he might warm the earth for them, and that they might be able to sit in the sun.
The sun, they say, was originally a man who lived on earth. In the beginning, he gave forth brightness for a space just around his own dwelling. As his shining was confined to a certain space just at and around his own house, the rest of the country seemed as if the sky were very cloudy – as it looks now, in fact, when the sun is behind thick clouds. This shining came from one of the sun’s armpits as he lay with one arm lifted up. When he put down his arm, darkness fell everywhere; when he lifted it up again, it was as if day came. In the the day, the sun’s light used to be white, but at night, it was red like fire. When the sun was thrown up into the sky it became round and never was a man again.
The same is true of the moon. He too, was once a man who could talk. But today neither the sun nor the moon talk. They just live in the sky. Then Spider said, “I shall go on to Sun’s village in order to bring him. ” Hut Moon said, “Let me first get you something to eat.” And Spider replied, “Ho!” So Moon masked up some yam for him to eat. Then Spider set out for Sun’s village. When he reached Sun’s village, he said to him, “Your father says you must come along with me.” And Sun said, “It is well, I and you shall go, but let me get you something to eat first.” Spider replied, “Ho!” So Sun went and caught a sheep. When he came back, he said to Spider, “I would have wished, had my father come here, that he should have seen what I was doing; if it were good, or if it were bad, in either case he would have seen. Since, however, he has not come and you have come, it is as if father had come. Therefore here is this, my sheep, that I shall kill so you may eat.”
And he killed the sheep and prepared it beautifully for Spider to eat. After the meal Spider said, “Let us go on a fallen tree.” When they got there, Spider said to Sun, “Your father has blackened a stool at his home. He wishes you to succeed to that stool, so he has pulled up a yam and if you know its name, he will take the stool and give it to you. Now this yam is called ‘Terminus.’ And in order that you may not forget its name, I shall cut a shirt drum for you, and make a mpintini drum to go with it, so that when they beat the short drum and the mpintini drum then you will never forget this word, for the shirt drum will speak out and say:
‘Firi bomo!
Firi bomo!”
Then the mpintini drum will say:
‘Kintini bomo!
Kintini bomo!”
So they set off to go to the sky-god’s town. First they reached Moon’s village and took him along; then they reached Night’s village and took him along. All the way they played the mpintini drum. When they reached the outskirts of the town Spider saw a man, and he sent him off to tell the sky-god that they were coming. There upon the sky-god called on assembly together, and soon Spider and the others arrived and saluted every one. Spider now gave the spokesman the news, saying, “The chief’s errand on which I was sent I have performed; I have brought them.” And the sky-god said, “My children, the reason I caused you to be sent for this: I have blackened the stool standing there and I have also pulled up the yam over there. I shall now take this stool and give it to him who sees and names the yam. Because my eldest child is Night, let him try first.” Then Night said, “It is called ‘Pona.” And all the people shouted, “Y-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My second child is Moon, therefore let him give its name.” And moon said, “It is the yam called ‘Asnate.’ ” The people shouted, “Y-e-e-e-e.” Again the sky-god spoke, “My child, the third one, is Sun, therefore let him name it.”
Now’ I forgot to say that the dance music was going on:
“Kintnkyi Bomo!
Kintinkyi bomo!”
and Spider was turning cart-wheels.
Then Sun rose up and stood there, and took hold of the yam, and he said, “Oh, as for this, since ever I began to walk beside my father and was very small, he used to tell me its name, and I have not forgotten; it is called ‘Terminus” And the tribe shouted three times, “E!E!E!”
Then his father rose up and stood there and said, “You, Night, you are the eldest, but the words which I told you you have allowed yourself to forget, because you did not pay attention to my words. Because of this, it it now decreed that wicked things only will be done during your time. And you, Moon, the words with which you and I walked and I told you, you too did not follow. It is decreed therefore that only children will play during your reign. As for you, Sun, when I said words to you, you did not forget; you listened to my advice, so you are to be the chief. Should any one have any matter to settle, let it be heard in your time. Household cases. however, may be heard in the evening.
“So take the path which I have set you and if Zeno wishes to trespass upon it, may Diawerigne, the circular rainbow seen at times around the sun, throw itself around you, so that Moon may not be able to come and touch you. Again, if the rainclouds gather, the sky-god’s bow will be cast on the sky that your children who are under you may see when I have cast it so that the waters will not overflow and carry them away.
“One more thing. These words which were formerly known as the “Sayings of the Sky-God.” now since the spider, has been able to read these words in my head, let them be known henceforth as “The Sayings of Spider.”
Different circumstances in waking reality call for a different focus on these Dynamics we are describing. The Visionary, through practice, begins to sense when a different perspective is appropriate. Ideally, it makes sense to continually go about with this appreciation for Positive Reality Creation what is exemplified in the five Resonance Dynamics. You proceed diligently until it becomes second nature. One day you find that you have internalized these Strategies for Intentional creation. At the same time, you might look around you to notice an improved reality.
This is an Intentional state of consciousness in which the student is attending to Issues and Lessons during the existence with Loving Understanding and Courage. One has an eye toward approaching the Transition – physical death – with a clean slate. Paradoxically there is positive emotion attached to this state. Death becomes a type of “graduation.” After your time of studies, of facing your Issues and learning your Lessons, you retire and consider your past existence. I am speaking literally again here. This is a simplified description of the Soul’s journey into the physical.
Learning and Finishing-Up entails this perception of LOOKING for the Lessons in your life, and when they are found, honoring them by admitting responsibility IN THE MOMENT. This would be the full moment of creation, the Moment Point, the potential Point of Power, if you will
Now the other side of this Dynamic, Finishing-Up, also is experienced in this same Moment Point. When you embrace both aspects of the Dynamic within the Moment Point you create a Point of Power. Within this Point of Power consciousness assembles the Essential Identity of You-The-Blog-Reader within physical reality as a Soul who is Learning their Lessons and Finishing-Up. This Essential Identity is then expressed in the Reality Constructs that permeate your Personal Reality Field.
2 – Remembering/Embodying
In this Dynamic you are Remembering your power as a reality creator. This is the primary Precept of the Ancient Wisdom,“You create your reality.” Knowing your power, then, you act, think, and imagine that truth. This Dynamic could also be used with any of the Precepts.
What occurs within this Dynamic is this… typically, the student is reminded through spiritual literature of some sort, that there are these considerations we call the Ancient Wisdom. Though there are, as I said earlier, instances of this material coming up to consciousness spontaneously, sometimes in quite dramatic ways. Spontaneous healings, spontaneous awakenings, epiphanies and sudden realizations of truth fall into this category. We refer to all of these awakenings, however, as appointments being kept by the participant. The life-changing awakenings are usually planned out ahead of time, as in Past Lives, or in the time before the incarnation in the Home Dimension. The Remembering process can be initiated and cultivated through some simple practices. In the Trance State you might ask of your Source, your Guidance,“What is the meaning of my life?” ” What are my Lessons?” There is a high probability you will get answers to your questions if you persevere. The answers may come to you in your waking reality. For example: Should you receive the message from your Guides – while you are washing the dishes or taking a walk – that you are here “to serve others with unconditional Love,” you might try Embodying this beneficial state of consciousness. The Project, “You are on Earth to Love one another,” may be Embodied by the student with great rewards forthcoming immediately. It is a pleasant state to Embody throughout your waking world.
3 – Wondering/Thriving
Here you are Wondering how the Best Case Scenario will unfold in the current moment, and being happily surprised and grateful when it does. Then you attempt to endorse and sustain the BCS on all levels moment-to-moment for as long as possible for the Highest Good for All concerned.
Resonance Dynamics is an energy conversation you have with yourself on how to improve realities, to create them more in line with your heart’s desire. Your wondering assessments throughout the day interact with your Reality Creation Strategies. What Resonates with the heart’s desire is not given creative energy. It is allowed to transform into energies that support the BCS. Please refer to The Box exercise for details on this Technique.
Whenever you check in with yourself on your creative endeavors, you are noticing the difference between what you are creating in the moment, and your heart’s desire. In that moment you Wonder about how your creation will improve. “How much time will it take to create with All That Is______?” These assessments of Wondering are done playfully, like a child wonders in their imagination.
Now simply asking yourself throughout the day: “What am I creating now?” establishes an emotional Resonance, a context for Intentional manifestation. You are wondering in a neutral way what is up in your world. It is from the Objective Observer perspective that you make these assessments. There is no ego/intellect involved. The subconscious is engaged also. “I wonder how I will improve this part of my life today?”
What does thriving mean in this context? Again, that is up to you. Might I suggest, however, that you attach the elements of healing, ecstasy, the Divine, prosperity, and so on, to your demonstrations? You determine how it rolls out in Third-Dimensional Reality, Dear BlogReader. Your perception creates Reality Constructs that you then behold and appreciate with pleasant surprise, with Loving gratitude, with positive emotion.
4 – Awakening/Speaking
In this Moment of Awakening you are aware of your reincarnational existences in multidimensional reality. The other part of this Dynamic entails expressing this greater reality to others through art, teaching, lecturing, writing, and so on. This practice of spreading the message we have called Speaking in my Blogs.
I began this Blog Series with a description of the Awakening Ones of our modern era and how they are expressing their visions of the Ancient Wisdom. In this Dynamic you have available a technology of perception that you may use to access and interpret visionary material. You needn’t be an “official” artist. The power and authority is in the work itself. This is the awakening phenomenon taken to its logical end, in the creative products of the visionary artist.
Now millions of us are awakening in this timeframe, as we well know. Perhaps you are wondering what to do with this information you are receiving in the Trance State, in the dreamstate, and in your times of reverie. Art forms and various media, from writing to painting and dance may be used successfully by the Practitioner to spread the message of awakening to others. Indeed, the community of awakening humans is formed in just this way. A case in point is this Blog work I am doing with others. The collective of visionary artists and Practitioners of various types is growing exponentially now. Through the Internet and other media the vision is shared with millions of humans from around the world. This is what I mean. This expresses the essence of the Awakening/Speaking dynamic.
5– Moment Point/Point of Power
This dynamic represents the empowerment of the moments of your life. First the Moment Point is acknowledged as your portal to a greater reality. Then you act on that empowering state of consciousness with your Intent to create what your heart desires.
This dynamic is at the heart of all others. Throughout my Blogs I have taught how the student of this Teaching may rouse themselves from the slumber of their robotic existence. It happens when you catch yourself “not sleeping.” The Moment of Awakening is brief in the beginning. It occurs because you are asking for it to occur, you are asking for magic to occur in your life. The experiencing of a full moment in which you have brief glimpses of your Simultaneous Lives, for example, or waking visions that turn out to be quite accurate predictions, comes as a very pleasant surprise to the novice Practitioner. It is often such a surprise that you miss the opportunity to revel in it, to extend it, to truly enjoy the ecstasy of this state. Be prepared, then, for these moments to represent themselves as you practice the Techniques.
We call the Point of Power. It becomes powerful because you say it is and because you believe it is. If you are a spiritual type, the Point of Power is powerful because you are at that time acknowledging your connection to a power greater than yourself. You may call this energy body God, Goddess, Tree Spirit or Fairy. The power that you Embody during these moments is the power of All That Is to create.
Resonance is the frequency of creation in our world..
MOMENT OF CLARITY
These Resonance Dynamics are states of consciousness, and so, potential self-created realities. They are ideas to consider while you are out and about in your waking world. Thus, you find yourself waking up in the moment, as we say, in that you notice that you are not in the Common Trance. You have a Moment of Clarity in which you say to yourself, “I AM waking up in this moment. I am not asleep now.”
You are in your state of Sanctuary, quite probably, for we do suggest you initiate it upon awakening in the morning, and then take it with you into your waking period. This is the baseline, then, this experiencing of Sanctuary with periods of coming out of your Common Trance to notice Moments of Awakening, or Clarity. In these moments I suggest you try-out one of the Resonance Dynamics as a way to extend the momentary awakening into the future.
Intermittent moments in your waking reality marked by an increase in existential awareness. Also called the Full Moment, the Moment Point, or Moment of Awakening.
Many years ago the sun and the water were great friends, and both lived on the earth together. The sun very often used to visit the water, but the water never returned his visits. At last the sun asked the water why it was that he never came to see him in his house. The water replied that the sun’s house was not big enough, and that if he came with his people he would drive the sun out.
The water then said, “If you wish me to visit you, you must build a very large compound; but I warn you that it will have to be a tremendous place, as my people are very numerous and take up a lot of room.”
The sun promised to build a very big compound, and soon afterward he returned home to his wife, the moon, who greeted him with a broad smile when he opened the door. The sun told the moon what he had promised the water, and the next day he commenced building a huge compound in which to entertain his friend.
When it was completed, he asked the water to come and visit him the next day.
When the water arrived, he called out to the sun and asked him whether it would be safe for him to enter, and the sun answered, “Yes, come in, my friend.”
The water then began to flow in, accompanied by the fish and all the water animals.
Very soon the water was knee-deep, so he asked the sun if it was still safe, and the sun again said, “Yes,” so more water came in.
When the water was level with the top of a man’s head, the water said to the sun, “Do you want more of my people to come?” The sun and the moon both answered, “yes,” not knowing any better, so the water flowed in, until the sun and moon had to perch themselves on the top of the roof.
Again the water addressed the sun, but, receiving the same answer, and more of his people rushing in, the water very soon overflowed the top of the roof, and the sun and the moon were forced to go up into the sky, where they have remained ever since.
The second part of this exercise entails going over your barriers and putting them in The Box. We spoke of this deceptively simple yet powerful exercise in a earlier Blog. You have already created your Box and suspended it around your neck. Now figuratively put the negative assessments and barriers, as you understand them, in The Box. As you go about your waking reality, figuratively put all negative material in The Box, material that holds you back from getting what you want. This material could be thoughts, images, emotions, people, places of things, you see. The Box neutralizes the negatives and allows your consciousness to put a positive spin on them.
The next step is to Wonder how these constructs will change so that when you open up The Box to see what has happened, it is filled with positives. This is Wondering in a gentle way, without judgement. It creates a neutral Feeling-Tone. The Wondering allows consciousness to make the appropriate changes to this content to suit you individually according to your Issues and Lessons.
Afterwards, you then Embodying these positives. Physicalize them by walking, talking, thinking, imagining them into existence. Please see the Blog on Resonance Dynamics for more information on Wondering. Document what your have learned.
By reading the Emotional Body – another of our theoretical constructs – you may test the Resonance of thoughts, images, emotions, people, places and things, to see what “comes up” for you, as in Issues and Lessons. What you may discover are reason, rationalizations, barriers that keep you from getting what you want. They possibly resonate with what you DON’T want and so assist in the creation of what you don’t want.
As before, simply relax. Achieve your light Trance state. You will be voyaging to the Inner Self with a purpose. The purpose is to discover the specifics of what is holding you back from creating what you want. You will have an assumption, then, that your subconscious does know the specifics about these barriers. As you relax into this state of consciousness, prepare to experience and perceive this data. It may come to you in various ways. Please think in terms of using your counterparts to the outer senses – the Inner Senses – to experience the Emotional Body. You may see it as an image projected onto your “inner eye,” so to speak. You may hear, smell and feel something. You will remember this material when you come back to surface awareness. Document what you have learned.
We have also described this process as first Embodying the Best Case Scenario probable future, and then back-engineering that felt sense, the Feeling-Tone, as best you can. Expectation and positive anticipation charge the whole endeavor. This charge we also call the Empowered Will.
As you continue this practice, you will begin to receive guidance from the Best Case Scenario of your future probable self. These impulses will tell you what to do to reach this advanced stage of development. This is the Technique we teach to our clients that enables them to do their own research.
Your faithful expectation that the Best Case Scenario will manifest CREATES it. You simply visit this probable future and interview your self as to the particulars of this advanced state of creation.
The expression of the BCS in physical reality will be governed by how we deal with Issues and Lessons. Thus, we are always approaching the BCS. The relative distance between the mundane and exalted is the creative edge for us, what we are use to improve our current Reality Creation.
In this way, as our current reality improves, our consideration of the BCS is altered. We may alter this conception in any way we choose. As Resonance alters our current manifestation, the BCS is changed precisely to that degree. Do you see this important point here? We are the creators. We bring together our world in a collaborative effort with ALL THAT IS. The Essential Metaphor we are calling Resonance accounts for the energetic transfers of Consciousness Units in the moment, from the current Point of Power to the proposed Best Case Scenario Realty. The Best Case Scenario Probable Future is therefore not a state. It is always mutating, changing frequency and form according to the inputs of Consciousness Units from our Essential Identity.
There once was a certain woman who bore eleven children. Every day when she got up and cooked food the children ate it all and the mother did not get any of it. She pondered long about the matter, and went off to the plantation and spoke to the silk-cotton tree, saying, “I shall send my eleven children to come beneath you here to pluck pumpkins; and when they come, pluck off eleven of your branches and kill those children of mine.”
The silk-cotton tree said, “I have heard, and I shall do it for you.”
The mother then went home and said to her children, “You must go to the plantation beneath the silk-cotton tree; there are pumpkins there. Go pick them and come back.”
The children set off. They went and reached the silk-cotton tree. Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, Stand still; and I Number Eleven, I have stood still.”
Number Eleven then addressed them saying, “Do you not know the sole reason why Mother said we must go and pick pumpkins?”
His brother’s answered, “No.”
Thereupon he said, “She has told this silk-cotton tree that, when we go there, he must pluck off branches and beat us. Therefore all of you cut sticks and throw them against this silk-cotton tree.”
They cut the sticks and threw them against the silk-cotton tree. Pim! pen! pim! pen! was the sound they made. The silk-cotton supposed that the children had come. He took off eleven of his branches and let them fall to the ground. Little Number Eleven said, “You have seen – had we gone on there, the silk-cotton tree would have killed us.”
They picked up the pumpkins and took them to their mother. She cooked them. And at once the children had eaten all! Their mother said, “Ah! as for this matter, I cannot bear it! I shall take these children and give them to the sky-god.”
The next morning, when things became visible, she went and told the sky-god all about it, saying, “The children to whom I have given birth eat so fast and so much that when I wish to eat, I can’t get anything. Hunger is killing me. Therefore, I implore you, let the children be brought and killed, so that I may get something to eat.”
The sky-god said, “Is that really the case?”
The woman said, “I am speaking with a head, the inside of which is white.”
So the sky-god picked out messengers, and they went and dug a large pit in which they placed broken bottles. The sky-god himself went and fetched a snake and a leopard, put them in the pit, and covered it over. And now the messenger went to call the children.
No sooner did they reach the place where the pit lay, than Number Eleven said, “Number One, stand still; Number Two, stand still; Number Three, stand still; Number Four, stand still; Number Five, stand still; Number Six, stand still; Number Seven, stand still; Number Eight, stand still; Number Nine, stand still; Number Ten, stand still; and I myself Number Eleven, I have stood still. You must pass here, but you must not pass there.”
His brothers said, “Why, when a wide path lies there, must we pass through the bush?”
Now, as they were going along, they all carried clubs. Number Eleven said, “Throw one of these clubs upon this path.” They threw a club upon the path, and it fell through into the pit. Yiridi was the sound of its fall. Number Eleven said, “There you are! You see! Had we passed there, we should all of us have died.”
So they took a bypath and went off to meet the sky-god. The sky-god had caused holes to be dug, covered over, and stools placed upon them, so that when the children came to sit on them, they would fall into the holes. Soon the arrived before the face of the sky-god. Hep spoke to them: “Stools are set there. You may go and be seated upon them.”
Then Number Eleven siad, “Who are we that we should be able to sit upon such very beautiful stools? So, sire, we are going to sit aside here.”
Thereupon the sky-god gazed at the children and he said to himself, “I shall send the children to Death’s village.”
The next morning, when things became visible, he called the children and said, “You must go to Death who lives yonder and receive from her a golden pipe, a golden chewing-stick, a golden snuff box, a golden whetstone, and a golden fly-switch.”
Number Eleven said, “You are our master, wherever you will send us, we shall go.”
The sky-god said, “Be off!”
So the children set out for Death’s village. When they arrived there, Death said, “Why, when no one must ever come here, have. you come here?”
They replied, “We were roaming. about and came here quite by chance.” Death said, “Oh, all right then.”
Now Death had ten children. With herself, they made eleven. When things began to disappear – that is, when it became dark – Death divided up the children one by one and gave one to each of her children, while she herself and Number Eleven went to rest. When it was dark, Death then lit up her teeth until they shone red so that she might seize Number Eleven with them.
Number Eleven said, “Death, I must not yet asleep.”
Death said, “When will you be asleep?”
Number Eleven said, “If you were to give me a golden pipe to smoke for a while, then I might fall asleep.”
And Death fetched it for him.
A little while later, Death again lit up her teeth in order to go and seize Number Eleven with them.
Number Eleven said, “Death, I am not yet asleep.’
Death said, “When will you be asleep?”
Number eleven said, “If you were to bring me a golden snuff box, I might go to sleep.”
And Death brought it to him.
Again, soon afterward, Death was going to seize Number Eleven.
Number Eleven said, “I am not asleep.”
Death said, “When will you asleep?”
Number Eleven said, If you were to go and fetch golden chewing-stick for me so that I might chew it for a while, then I might fall asleep.”
Death fetched it for him, A short time passed, and Death was about to seize him.
Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, I am not yet asleep.”
And Death said, “Then when will you be asleep?”
Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, if you were to go and bring me a golden whetstone, then I might sleep.”
And Death went brought it. Again, soon afterward, Death rose up once more.
Number Eleven said, “Oh, Grandmother, I said I was not yet asleep.”
Death said, “And what will be the day when you will be asleep?”
Number Eleven said, “If you were to go and take a calabash full of holes and go and splash water in it and boil some food for me to eat, then I might sleep.”
Death lifted up a strainer and went off to the stream. When she slashed the water into it, the holes in the strainer let it pass through. Now Number Eleven said to his brothers, “Rise up and flee away.” Then they rose up and fled, and Number Eleven went and cut a plantain stems and placed them where his brothers had lain and took cloths and covered them over.
Now Death was at the stream splashing water. And Male Death called to Female Death, saying, “Ho thee, Death!”
She replied, “Adwo.“
He said, “What are you doing?”
She replied, “Alas, is it not some small child whom I have got! When I am about to catch him, he says, ‘I am not yet asleep.’ He has taken all my things, and now he says, I must take a strainer and splash water.”
Male Death said, “Ah, are you a small child? If you pluck leaves and line the inside of the strainer and then splash water, would it not be all right?”
Female Death said, “Oh, how true!”
She plucked leaves, placed them inside, and splashed the water and went off. Number Eleven said, “Death, you have come already? Boil the food.” Death cooked the food; she lit up her teeth in order to kill Number Eleven’s brothers and cook them for food. When she went, she did not examine them carefully, and she herself killed all her own children.
The next day, very, very early, when things became visible, Death rose up and sat there by the fired. Number Eleven said, “Grandmother, a tsetse fly is sitting on your breast.”
Death said, “Fetch the fly-switch which is lying there and kill it for me.”
Number Eleven saaid, “Good gracious me! A person of your consequence – when a tsetse fly settles on you and a golden fly-switch lies there – you would use this only thing! Let me fetch the golden fly-switch and come and kill it.”
Death said, “Go and fetch it from the room.”
Number Eleven went and brought it. He purposely drove the fly away; he didn’t kill it. Number Eleven said, “Oh, today, where this tsetse fly will rest, there I shall rest with him.”
The number Eleven went to the room and took his bag in which lay the golden pipe and all the things. He said, “Grandmother Death, nothing will suffice save that I get the tsetse fly, put it in this bag, and bring it to you.”
Number Eleven set off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! He reached the end of the town and siad, “Ho, there, Grandmother Death! Pardon my saying so but if you were not a perfect fool, could I have found a way to escape, and could I have made you also kill all your children? As for me, I am going off.”
Death said, “You, a child like this! Wherever you rest, there I shall rest!”
Number Eleven leaped off – yiridi! yiridi! yiridi! and death, too, went to chase him.
As Number Eleven was going, he overtook his brothers who were sitting on the path. They were making a bird-trap. Number Eleven said, “Have you not gone yet? Death is coming, so let us find some way to escape.”
Now Death came upon them. Number Eleven took medicine and poured it on his brothers, and they went on top of a silk-cotton tree. And Death stood at the foot of the silk-tree. She said, “Just now I saw those children, and where have they gone?
Number Eleven was sitting above. He said to his brothers, I am going to make water upon her.”
His brothers said, “E! she is seeking us to catch us, and we have fled and come and sit here and yet you say, ‘I am going to make water on her.'”
Number Eleven would not listen, and he made water over Death.
Death said, “Ah, there you are! Today you have seen trouble.” Death said, “You, child, who are sitting up there, Kyere–he-ne, Kyere-he-ne!” Thereupon one of the children fell down. “Kyere-he-ne!” a second one fell down. Soon there remained only Number Eleven.
Death said, “Child, Kyere-he-ne!” and Number Eleven leaped and descended on the ground, kirim! And Death then went on top of the silk-cotton tree.
Number Elven said, “You, great big woman, you too, Kyere-he-ne!”
And death, also, came down, tum! She was dead.
Number Elven went and plucked medicine, rolled it between his palms, and sprinkle it on his brothers, and they rose up. Number eleven was going to throw the medicine awaye, when some of it dropped on Death, and Death awoke. She said, “You have killed me, and you have also awakened me. Today you and I will have a chase.”
They they all started to run off at once, kiri! kiri! kiri! Now Death was chasing them. As they were going, there lay before them a big river in flood. When Number Eleven and his brothers reached it, the brothers knew how to swim and they swam across. Number Eleven alone did not know how to swim. The children stood on the other side; they cried and cried and cried; their mouths became swollen up. As for Number Eleven, he turned into a stone.
Death reached the river. She said, “Oh, these children! You stand there! Let me get a stone and hit your swollen mouths.” Death, when she looked down, saw a stone lying there. She picked it up and threw it. As the stone was travelling, it said, “Winds take me and set me on the other side.” It alighted on the other side. Number Eleven said, “Here I am!”
Death said, “Ah, that child! I have no further matter to talk to you about. All I have to say to you is this: Go and remain at home and change into one of the lesser gods, and, if anyone whom I wish to take comes to where you are, do you inform me. If I so desire, I will leave him and make you a present of him; but what I wish in exchange you must receive it for me.”
That is how the Komba, the lesser gods, came into the world. They are descended from the small child Number Eleven.
Now the Ritual Practice I offer you is perfected over time, through practice, practice, practice… With mastery of these Techniques the student begins to awaken more fully. The Three Assessments, Filling in the Blanks, the Resonance Dynamics and the Regimens in the following Blogs are offered for your assistance in taking the next step by applying these principles in a very personal way. These may be considered self-improvement projects with an important difference: your reliance on the Ancient Wisdom technologies.
1- Assessing Your current Feeling-Tone
This is the first step in a four step process. In this Technique, you consider the Feeling-Tone that reflects your current state of Reality Creation. Remember that the Feeling-Tone has thought, imagery, emotions, and other sensory inputs. It is the energetic signature of a state of consciousness, an event, or even a lifetime. Here we are assessing your current Reality Creation to set a benchmark to compare against future improved realities. How do you feel now?
This is a perspective you might call Honest Assessment, Objective Discernment, or any other descriptive term that connotes prejudice-free sensing of the Personal Reality. You do this from an Observer’s Perspective that we have described. You project your consciousness into this aspect which sees You-The-Blog-Reader in your totality, in your environment, within your niche, as it were, of Third-Dimensional Reality. The information you receive in this assessment is expressed in your favorite medium.
You simply relax, again, as you have done in previous exercises, and go within briefly. The idea is to ask yourself for this information to be made available to your conscious mind. The sensory data that does come up is remembered upon coming out of Trance and is documented for analysis later. This is the Status Quo Reality Feeling-Tone.
2- Assessing the Best Case Scenario
In its most basic form, this entails delineating in detail your Ideal Objective, what we term the Best Case Scenario. This is done though writing down the specifies of what you want to create, without consideration, for now, of what you are currently creating. Your imagination is allowed full reign over your expressive powers. If you wish to paint or draw a picture to express this Best Case Scenario, do so. If you are a dancer and you wish to create a spontaneous dance to express this, do so. Express your Ideal Objective in whatever medium you wish.
To manifest the heart’s desire or any improvement, you may first consider what a successful creation looks like, sounds like, feels like, and so on.
Again, in the Trance State you visit a probable future in which you are experiencing this Best Case Scenario. This would be the visualized result of your manifestation activities. Some might call this image the perfected state. Others would assess it as merely moderately improved. You are the one who determined the specifics of this Best Case Scenario. Just as you have done before, you come up to surface awareness from your Trance State and document this idealized vision.
3- Assessing the Felt Difference
The third step in this analysis concerns going into the meditative state with this information you have gathered from the Status Quo Assessment and from the Best Case Scenario Assessment. You then ask yourself, “What is the difference here between these two states? What is missing in my current reality that is evident in the Best Case Scenario?” This Feeling-Tone of the Felt Difference will have multi-sensory effects within your consciousness, just as in the other two assessments. You will remember this Felt Difference when you come out of the Trance. You then document this as best you can.
4- Filling In the Blanks
This is another of our clever metaphors, one that has Good Humor attached to it. It is a manner of speaking, “at the other end” of Best Case Scenario. This step is one of getting together your Findings from experimentation. These Findings would be the Status Quo, the Best Case Scenario, and the Felt Difference Assessments. All of the assessments are documented and now is the time to make sure that you are truthful and sure in your documentation. If you find that all is well in these documents, you complete the final step of Filling In the Blanks. This exercise is first done in the waking state, after you examine the Findings. The Felt Difference will contain the elements that are missing from your Best Case Scenario. In other words, these are the elements that need to be Ritually added to the manifestation to make it more like the Best Case Scenario. First you do this on paper. Then you do it ritually in the Trance State through Guided Visualization.
This is, briefly what one does in this four step process. Eventually the Practitioner will be adept at this Ritual manifestation to the degree that they would easily do the assessments and Filling in The Blanks exercises throughout the day, wherever it occurred to them to intentionally create their Personal Reality, you see.
These additions to your Practice are also Essential Metaphors. They are visualized devices and important tools you may use to explore and work within the Unknown Reality. For example, you may use your creativity to create, in the Trance State, various modes of transportation to use in your experiments in consciousness. Or you may summon up a diagnostic tool of your own device, that you may use to test, to validate, to sharpen the manifestation.
As with the Trance State, I am assuming you are already a user of the Metaphorical Tools. You may not refer to them as such, but it does seem that most explorers have a strategy, a Technique, a way of going about preparing for and indeed, entering and studying the individual and collective consciousness.
In a related matter, I am quite able to act as a go-between you, Dear Blog Reader, and your Energy Personality and other Guides. This I offer as a service to my Blog Readers, to help you get connected. Therefore, use my Techniques, use this material, use my felt-presence as a bridge between your Earthly perceptions and your Guidance. You simply ask for the connections to be made in self-reflective states and when you are in nature. Because you are connecting with the entity through your Practice, you will receive this support.
Though this Practice is related to pretending, there is a great difference between conscious manifesting and pretending. Let me describe these differences briefly…
In conscious manifesting, at least in my view, the Highest Perspective is invoked throughout the Practice, throughout your Rituals, Regimens and studies. I submit that pretending does not require a connection to these Evolved Perspectives.
In pretending, there is also the playful approach that I see as a requirement in the Practice. However, this playful approach must be grounded, in my opinion, in the Higher Centers. The Divine Child or the Magical Child is invoked, as I have just said. This may most easily occur when you have an ongoing connection to your Guides, to your Energy Personality, to All That Is.
Additionally, in the act of pretending there is lacking a complete faithful expectation in the successful outcome, as I see it. You are not manifesting with Divine Intent the desired Reality Constructs or events. Pretending is a good start, in other words, however, please invoke the powerful non-physical beings if you are committed to conscious manifesting.
I do believe that some of my Blog Readers are neglecting the differences. The key here, is FIRST to connect with your Source, your Guidance, your Higher Consciousness. Then the Ancient Wisdom is revealed. Then you are indeed Guided to your destination. Then you are not alone; you have the resources of the Divine at your disposal.
Amon was married to Keti, the barn-door fowl, but after a while he took to himself four other wives. Keti, of course, retained her rights as head wife, and the other four wives obeyed her.
One day Amon called the four newcomers together and asked each one what present she would give in return for his raised her above other women in the tribe. The first one promised that she would always sweep his compound for him and keep the place neat and tidy; the second said she would always cook for him and never complain when there were many visitors; the third agreed to spin cotton for him and to bring him all the water he might require; and the fourth one said that she would bear him a child of gold.
This last promise pleased Amon, and every day he killed a sheep for this woman. But the child was long in coming. Just when Amon’s patience was giving out. the woman conceived, and Amon detailed Keti to tend and care for her.
So Keti took the woman into her hut and, when the time of delivery was at hand, Keti told her that, whatever else she did, she was to be sure to shut her eyes when the child was born and not to open them until she was told to do so. The woman obeyed, and Keti hurried out and brought back a big pot.
Now it happened that the woman bore twins. The first one to be born was made entirely of silver, and Keti at once took the babe and placed it in the pot. The second child of gold, and Keti placed it in the pot. The she hurried outside and found two frogs. Running with these, she placed them on the couch and then told the mother to open her eyes and see her children.
Then Keti hastened out of the hut with the pot and ran with it as fast as she could to the far, far bush, where she found a dead odum tree. There she hid the pot with the two babies and then returned swiftly to Amon’s compound, passing by his hut on the way. She told her husband that the children had been born and asked him to go with her to see his offspring.
Amon at once arose and went to the hut where the mother was lying. To his consternation and anger, he found two frogs instead of the expected child of gold. He gave orders that the frogs were to be killed at once and that the woman should be sent into the furthermost corner of his kingdom.
Now Amon has a certain hunter whose hut was situated in the far bush. He happened to be out hunting on the day the children were born and his chase led him to the odum tree. There his eye was attracted by the glitter of the golden child and he cried out, “Why, what is this?”
The children answered him, “We are the children of Amon” But he could not believe that.
He took some of the dust that had fallen from their bodies, however, and put it into his bag. Then he took up the children and carried them to his hovel. There he kept them secretly, not did he tell any man of what he had found.
And every time the hunter wanted money he would gather some of the children’s dust. Thus he became a very rich man. Instead of having a solitary hovel in the bush, he built a huge compound and round him there gathered a great town.
Now not very far away there lived Spider. One day he went into the bush to gather some white ants for his fowls and he came across the new town. He was astounded to see that in the place where he expected a hovel there was so much wealth and so many people. His curiosity aroused, Spider entered the town to learn how the change had come about. By sheer accident he espied the former hunter playing with the children. At once Spider knew that the latter were the lost children of Amon, and he hurried back home to send a message to their father. But the hunter has also seen Spider, and he knew full well that that busybody would betray his secret. Therefore he called the children and told them that, as they claimed they were the children of Amon, he proposed to take them to Amon.
The next morning he prepared hammocks and fine clothes for the children and proceeded on the way to Amon. On the road the children called their foster-father and told him that he must collect some stones withe which to play wari, as they themselves could not speak to their father, but that the stones would tell him the whole story.
The man did so, and they arrived before Amon. There the hunter placed stools and asked Amon if he would play a game of wari with him. Amon agreed, but the silver child said, no, he himself wished to play, that the stones would tell the story for which they had come.
Then the silver child and Amon sat down to the game and, as the stones went round and round the board, the golden child sang the story of their adventures from the time of their mother’s promise until their birth; he sang of the baseness of Keti and of the kindness of the hunter who had fed them instead of killing them for their silver and gold.
Then Amon knew them to be his children, and he sent straightway into the far, far bush to call back the woman whom he had exiled. When she arrived, she was dirty over and her hair was uncut and unkempt. Amon himself washed the woman, and when she was clean and nice again he sent for Keti.
Great was Amon’s wrath. He tied the evil fowl Keti, his first wife, by he foot to a stick and cured her. Then he threw her down from the sky and gave orders that every time the fowl wished to drink she would first have to raise her head to him and beg. Further, Amon gave orders that every man would in the future sacrifice fowls as the ordinary sacrifices to the gods.
Are not these things done to this day?
As for the children – once every year they are washed , and dust from them falls upon the earth. Some falls on men, and these are the lucky ones who become wealthy.
Your practice as an awakening human, one who is intentionally creating positive realities, entails putting into practice the Essential Metaphors. Again, for example: “I am the captain of my ship.” Are you? If you are the captain of your ship act as though you are the captain of your ship. Walk like a captain, talk like a captain, immerse yourself in the role of the captain. Create your reality with purposeful Intent. Do you see my meaning here?
I do not wish to be too hard on you in this Blog Series. However, if you wish to dramatically change your reality for the better, you must surely do something dramatically different in your existence. And even though I am being somewhat humorous in this example, please observe the subtext, here.
My ongoing students are well aware of my theory of Good Humor and its place in the creation of positive realities. Briefly, the Practitioner may use simple humor and a self-created sense of good will that may lead to the creation of improved realities.
One way to begin this is to assume the identity of the Magical Child. This is the Essential Identity of You-The-Blog-Reader, the child BEFORE you were frustrated, before you were spun off on a negative trajectory of development, perhaps, before you became socialized.
Playful innocence also describes this benign state of awareness. Your countenance glows with good will, here. You have a smile on your face and you are quite pleased with yourself and your world. Because you have not yet forgotten that you are a wonder-worker, you still know how to create what you want, what you desire. You even have within your mental environment memories of preceding lived. You have not been forced to forget this material. Am I getting through to you, Dear Blog Reader? This is the foundational state of your consciousness. This is Love. Begin here to create your positive realities.
Another Technique that has helped is The Box. This is an exercise from our Blog Series on Nine Eleven. Simply visualize a Box suspended around your neck. Now take all of the negative material you have discovered in your belief assessment and put it in The Box. The material is automatically transformed into its opposite. What does not support your heart’s desire, you see, is transformed into supportive energies for the creation of your heart’s desire. When you open up The Box at a later time you may be pleasantly surprised to see what you have created. No energy is lost, here, it simply takes another form.
Issues and Lessons come into play, also. As you change your beliefs, as you face your Issues and learn your Lessons, energy is released for creative purposes. The energy you once used to deny and intellectualized and repress Issues and avoid your Lessons becomes available for growth: spiritual growth.
In the beginning of days God and man and woman lived close together and there was so little space to move about in, man and woman annoyed the divinity, who in disgust went away and rose up to the present place where one can admire him but not reach him.
He was annoyed for a number of reasons. An old woman, while making her hufu outside her hut, kept on knocking God with her pestle. This hurt him and, as she persisted, he was forced to go higher out of her reach. Besides, the smoke of the cooking fires got into his eyes so that he had to go farther away. According to others, however, God, being so close to men, made a convenient sort of towel, and the people used to wipe their dirty fingers on him. This naturally annoyed him. Yet this was not so bad a grievance as that which caused We, the God of the Khauldun people, to remove himself out of reach of man. He did so because an old woman, anxious to make a good soup, used to cut off a bit of him at each mealtime, and We, being pained at this treatment, went higher.
Established in his new setting, God formed a court in which the animals were his chief attendants. Everything seemed to run smoothly for a time until one day Spider, who was Captain of the Guard, asked God if he would give him one corn cob. “Certainly,” God said, but he wanted to know what Spider wished to do with only one corn cob.
And Ananse said, “Master, I will bring you a hundred slaves in exchange for one corn cob.”
At this, Wati laughed.
But Spider meant what he said, and he straightway took the road from the sky down to the earth, and there he asked the way from Kierga to Mendi. Some men showed him the road and Spider set out. That evening he had gone far as Tarikh. There he asked the chief for a lodging, and a house was shown him. And when it was time to go to bed, he took the corn cob and asked the chief where he could put it for safekeeping. “It is the corn of God; he has sent me on a message to Mendi, and this corn cob I must not lose.”
So the people showed him a good place in the roof, and everyone went to sleep. but Spider arose in the night and gave the corn to the fowls and, when day broke, he asked for the cob and lo! It was all eaten and destroyed. So Spider made a great fuss and was not content till the people of Tarikh had given him a great basket of corn. Then he continued on his way and shortly say down by the roadside, as he was weary from carrying so great a load.
Presently there came along a man with a live fowl in his hand which he was bringing back from his field. Spider greeted him and they soon become friends. Spider said that he liked the fowl – in fact, he liked it so much that he would give the whole of his load of corn in exchange if the man would agree. Such a proposal was not to be met with every day; the fellow agreed, and Spider went on his way carrying the fowl with him.
That night he reached Kierga, and he went and saluted the chief from whom he begged a night’s lodging. This was readily granted and Spider, being tired, soon went to bed. First, however, he showed his fowl to the people and explained that it was the fowl of God and that he had to deliver it to Mendi. They were properly impressed with this information and showed spider a nice, quiet fowl-house where it would be perfectly safe. Then all went to bed.
But Spider did not sleep. As soon as he heard every one snoring, he arose and took his fowl and went outside the village and there sacrificed the poor bird. Leaving the corpse in the bush and placing some of the blood and feathers on the chief’s own doorpost, he went back to bed.
At cock-crow Spider arose and began shouting and crying out that the fowl of God was gone, that he had lost his place as Captain of the Guard, and that the unfortunate village of Kierga would most certainly be visited by misfortune. The hullabaloo brought everyone outside, and by this time it was daylight. Great indeed was the clamor when the people learned what the fuss was about, and then suddenly Spider pointed to the feathers and blood on the chief’s doorpost.
There was no use denying the fact – the feathers were undoubtedly those of the unfortunate fowl, and just then a small boy found its body. It was evident to all that their own chief had been guilty of a sacrilege too dreadful to think about. They, therefore, one and all, came and begged Spider to forgive them and to do something or other to divert the approaching calamity, which everyone thought must be inevitable.
Spider at last said that possibly God would forgive them, if they gave him a sheep to take to Mendi.
“Sheep!” creid the people. “We will give you any number of sheep so long as you stop this trouble.”
Ananse was satisfied with ten sheep and he went his way.
He had no further adventures until he reached the outskirts of Mendi with his sheep. He was a little tired, however, and sat down outside the village and allowed his sheep to graze. He was still resting when there came toward him a company of people, wailing and weeping. They bore with them a corpse, and when Spider saluted them and asked what they were doing, they said that a young man had died and that they were now carrying him back to his village for burial.
Spider asked if the village was far, and they said it was far. Then he said that it was more than likely that the body would rot on the road, and they agreed. He then suggested that they should give him the corpse and in exchange he would give them the ten sheep. This was a novel kind of business deal, but it sounded all right and, after a little while, the company of young men agreed and they went off with the sheep, leaving their dead brother with Spider.
The latter waited until nightfall and then walked into town, carrying with him the corpse. He came to the house of the chief of Mendi and saluted that nighty monarch, and begged for a small place where he could rest. He added:
“I have with me as companion the son of God. He is his favorite son, and, although you know me as the captain of God’s Host, yet I am only as a slave to this boy. He is asleep now, and as he so tired I want to find a hut for him.”
This was excellent news for the people of Mendi and a hut was soon ready for the favorite son of God.
Spider placed the corpse inside and covered it with a cloth so that it seemed verily like a sleeping man. Spider then came outside and was given food. He feasted himself well and asked for some food for God’s son. This he took into the hut where, being greedy, he finished the meal and came out bearing with him the empty pots.
Now the people of Mendi asked if they might play and dance, for it was not often a son of God came to visit them. Spider said that they might, for he pointed out to them that the boy was an extraordinarily hard sleeper and practically nothing could wake him – that he himself, each morning, had had to flog the boy until he woke, and that shaking was no use, nor was shouting. So they played and they danced.
As the dawn came, Spider got up and said it was time for him and God’s son to be up and about their business. So he asked some of the chief”s own children who had been dancing to go in and wake the son of God. He said that, if the young man did not get up, they were to flog him, and then he would surely be aroused. The children did this, but God’s son did not wake. “Hit harder, hit harder! cried Spider, and the children did so. But still God’s son did not wake.
The Spider said that he would go inside and wake him himself. So he arose and went into the hut and called to God’s son. He shook him, and then he made the startling discovery that the boy was dead. Spider’s cries drew everyone to the door of the compound, and there they learned the dreadful news that the sons of their chief had beaten God’s favorite child to death.
Great was the consternation of the people. The chief himself came and saw and was convinced. He offered to have his children killed; he offered to kill himself; he offered everything imaginable. But Spider refused and said that he could think of nothing that day, as his grief was too great. Let the people bury the unfortunate boy and perhaps he, Spider would devise some plan by which God might be appeased.
So the people took the dead body and buried it.
That day all Mendi was silent, as all men were stricken with fear.
But in the evening Spider called the chief to him and said, “I will return to my father, God, and I will tell him how the young boy has died. But I will take all the blame on myself and I will hide you from his wrath. You must, however, give me a hundred young men to go back with me, so that they can bear witness as to the boy’s death.”
The the people were glad, and they chose a hundred of the best young men and made them ready for the long journey to the abode of God.
Next morning Spider arose and, finding the young men ready for the road, he went with them back to Wolof and from there he took them up to God.
The latter saw him coming with the crowd of youths and came out to greet him. And Spider told him all that he had done and showed how from one single corn cob God had now got a hundred excellent young slaves. So pleased was God that he confirmed Spider in his appointment as Chief of his Host and changed his name from Aphthis to Spider, which it has remained to the present day.
Now Spider got very conceited over this deed and used to boast greatly about this cleverness. One day he even went so far as to say that he possessed more sense than God himself. It happened that God overheard this, and he was naturally annoyed at such presumption. So, next day, he sent for his captain and told him that he must go and fetch him something. No further information was forthcoming, and Spider was left to find out for himself what God wanted.
All day Spider thought and thought, and in the evening God laughed at him and said, “You must bring me something. You boast everywhere that you are my equal, now prove it.”
So next day Spider arose and left the sky on his way to find something. Presently he had an idea and, sitting down by the wayside, he called all the birds together. From each one he borrowed a fine feather and then dismissed them. Rapidly he wove the feather into a magnificent garment and then returned to God’s town. There he put on the wonderful feather robe and climbed up the treed over against God’s house. Soon God came out and saw the garishly colored bird. It was a new bird to him, so he called all the people together and asked them the name of the wonderful bird. But none of them could tell, not even the elephant, who knows all that is in the far, far bush. Someone suggested that Spider might know, but God said that, unfortunately, he had sent him away on an errand. Everyone wanted to know the errand and God laughed and said, “Spider has been boasting too much and I heard him say that he has as much sense as I have. So I told him to go and get me something.” everyone wanted to know what this something was, and God explained that Spider would never guess what he meant, for the something he wanted was nothing less than the sun, the moon, and darkness.
The meeting then broke up amid roars of laughter at Spider’s predicament and God’s exceeding cleverness. But Spider, in his fine plumes, had heard what was required of him and, as soon as the road was clear, descended from his tree and made off to the bush.
There he discarded his feathers and went far, far away. No man knows quite where he went, but, wherever he went, he managed to find the sun and the moon and the darkness. Some say that the python gave them to him, others are not sure. In any case, find them he did and, putting them into his bag, he hastened back to God.
He arrived at his master’s house late one afternoon and was greeted by God who, after a while, asked Spider if he had brought back something.
“Yes,” said Spider, and went to his bag and drew out darkness. Then all was black and no one could see. Thereupon he drew out the moon and all could see a little again. The last he drew out the sun, and some who were looking at Spider saw the sun and they became blind, and some who saw only a little of it were blinded in one eye. Others, who had their eyes shut at the moment, were luckier, so they lost nothing of their eyesight.
Thus it came about that blindness was brought into the world, because God wanted something.
Suppose you are using your Intent to “keep a good thought,” for you are challenged by negative thoughts and imagery that you have found in your belief assessment. As these positive thoughts are expressed within your consciousness, perhaps they also reflect positive imagery, positive emotion, and so on. This material literally seeks out within your personal consciousness and within the collective consciousness, validation. It tries to express itself. Do you see?
Now these expressions align in what we call the Pre-Manifestation Domain. This is a sort of “holding area” for Reality Constructs before they ” bloom” into our world. In arrays of potentiality, then, these etheric Gestalts of Consciousness are formed. As you continue your regimen of “keeping a good thought” – turning poison into medicine, another of our Essential Metaphors – your efforts strive to replicate themselves in the physical world. In time, improved Reality Constructs do emerge from the pre-manifestation domain into your Personal Reality Field. They Resonate into being through this process.
With this assessment of your beliefs I suggest you begin to experiment. In this exercise, you may polarize the negative Feeling-Tones that you have discovered in your belief analysis. By polarize, I mean you may create in your consciousness the OPPOSITE of the negative emotion, thought, and imagery you have discovered. In a sense, you are finding something good , something of possible value in even the negative material of consciousness. Let me go on…
Now, not only does every cloud have a silver lining, as the saying goes, but in my view, literally EVERYTHING in created reality has positive potential. Your focus on this positive potential CREATES it, you see. This is a re-statement of our Consecutive Positive Assessment Technique from previous Blogs.
It is not a matter of seeing and then believing, it is a case of believing AND THEN seeing. Your Personal Reality Field is a DIRECT reflection of your beliefs about what you think is possible. The task, then, is to determine what are your beliefs. Then you might attempt to condition these beliefs of yours so that they are enlarged, energized, modified to suit your awakening consciousness. In other words, you would want to change your beliefs to allow for a perception of your heart’s desire. This is entirely achievable, Dear Blog Reader.
Your beliefs are accessible to you in the form of Feeling-Tones. So rather than try to describe in detail what you believe your beliefs ARE, simply relax for a few moments and describe to yourself, in written or in another form, how you feel about the primary domains of existence. These domains might include relationships, prosperity, health, the spiritual, your sexuality.
As you express yourself honestly with regards to these aspects of your life, you may find that feelings arise for you to be noticed. You may then sense that there is imagery attached to the feelings as events from the past come to mind. There may also be other sensory information connected to this Feeling-Tone. Now as a sum of feeling, emotion, and other sensory material, you have this assessment of your beliefs. Document it in the medium of your choice.
Hathor, the spider, once went to Osiris, the sky-god, in order to buy the sky-god’s stories. The sky-god said, “I know I shall be able.” Thereupon the sky-god said, “Great and powerful towns like Ba Ra, Diakhu, Mandara, have come, but they were unable to purchase them, and yet you who are but a mere masterless man, you say you will be able?”
The spider said, “What is the price of the stories?” The sky-god said, “They cannot be bought for anything except Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy: and Ganges, the hornets.” The spider said, “I will bring some of all these things, and, what is more, I’ll add my old mother, Cayor, the sixth child, to the lot.”
The sky-god said, “Go and bring them then.” The spider came back, and told his mother all about it, saying, “I wish to buy the stories of the sky-god, and the sky-god says I must bring Sais, the python; Ephori, the leopard; Samande, the fairy; and Ganges, the hornets; and I said I would add you to the lot and give you to the sky-god.” Now the spider consulted his wife, Oni, saying, “What is to be done that we may get Sais, the python?” Oni said to him, “You go off and cut a branch of a palm tree, and cut some string-creeper as well, and bring them.” And the spider came back with them. And Oni said, “Take them to the stream.” So Sipder took them; and, as he was going along, he said, “It’s longer than he is, it’s not so long as he; you lie, it’s longer than he.”
The Spider said, “There he is, lying yonder.” The python, who had overheard this imaginary conversation, then asked, “What’s this all about?” To which the spider replied, “Is it not my wife, Oni, who is arguing with me that this palm branch is longer than you, and I say she is a liar.” And Sais, the python, said, “Bring it, and come and measure me.” Spider took the palm branch and laid it along the python’s body. Then he said, “Stretch yourself out.” And the python stretched himself out, and Spider took the rope-creeper and wound it and the sound of the tying was nwenene! nwenene! nwenene! until he came to the head.
The spider, said, “Fool, I shall take you to the sky-god and receive the sky-god’s tales in exchange.” So Spider took him off to Hathor, the sky-god. The sky-god then said, “My hand has touched it, there remains what still remains.” The spider returned and came and told his wife what had happened, saying, “There remain the hornets.” His wife said, “Look for a gourd, and fill it with water and go off with with it.” The spider went along through the bush, when he saw a swarm of hornets hanging there, and he poured out some of the water and sprinkled it on them. He then poured the remainder upon himself and cut a leaf of plantain and covered his head with it. And now he addressed the hornets, saying, “As the rain has come, had you not better come and enter this, my gourd, so the the rain will not beat you; don’t you see that I have taken a plantain leaf to cover myself?” Then the hornets said, “We thank you, Napa, we thank you, Napa.” All the hornets flew, disappearing into the gourd, fom! Father Spider covered the mouth, and exclaimed, “Fools, I have got you, and I am taking you to receive the tales of the sky-god in exchange.”
And he took the hornets to the sky-god. The sky-god said, “My hand has touched it; what remains still remains.”
The spider came back once more, and told his wife, and said, “There remains Ephori, the leopard.” Oni said, “Go and dig a hole.” Spider said, “That’s enough, I understand.” Then the spider went off to look for the leopard’s tracks, and having found them, he dug a very deep pit, covered it over, and came back home. Very early next day, when objects began to be visible, the spider said he would go off, and when he went, lo, a leopard was lying in the pit. Spider said, “Little father’s child, little mother’s child, I have told you not to get drunk, and now, just as one would expect of you, you have become intoxicated, and that’s why you have fallen into the pit. If I were to say I would get you out, next day, if you saw me, or likewise any of my children, you would go and catch me and them.” The leopard said, “O! I could not do such a thing.”
Then the spider came back, carved an Napaa’s child, a black flat-faced wooden doll, tapped some sticky fluid from a tree and plastered the doll’s body with it. Then he made eto, pounded some in the doll’s hand. Again he pounded some more and placed it in a brass basin; he tied string around the doll’s was it, and went with it and placed it at the foot of the odum tree, the place where the fairies come play. And a fairy came along. She said, “Napaa, may I eat a little of this mash?” Spider tugged at the string, and the doll nodded her head. The fairy turned to one of the sisters, saying, “She says I may eat some.” She said, “Eat some, then.” And she finished eating, and thanked her. But when she thanked her, she doesn’t reply.” The sister of the first fairy said, “Slap her crying-place.” And she slapped it, pa! And she struck there. She said to her sister, “My hand has stuck there.” She said, “Take the one that remains and slap her crying-place again.” And she took it and slapped her, pa! and this one, too, stuck fast. And her fairy told her sister, saying, “My two hands have stuck fast.” She said, “Push it with your stomach.” She pushed it and her stomach stuck to it. And Spider came and tied her up, and said, “Fool, I have got you, I shall take you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” And he went off home with her.
Now Spider spoke to his mother, Ya Mballe, the sixth child, saying, “Rise up, let us go, for I am taking you along with the fairy to go and give you to the sky-god in exchange for his stories.” He lifted them up, and went off there to where the sky-god was. Arrived there he said, “Sky-god, here is a fairy and my old woman whom I spoke about, here she is too.” Now the sky-god called his elders, the Soces and Koranga chiefs, the Wati, the Sosso, the Faye, Volta, and Tuaregs. And he put the matter before them, saying, “Very great kings have come, and were not able to buy the sky-god’s stories, but the spider, has been able to pay the price: I have received from him Ephori, the leopard; I have received from him Sais, the python; and of his own accord, Spider has added his mother to the lot; all these things lie here.” He said, “Sing his praise.” “Eee!” they shouted. The sky-god’s stories and I present them to you, kose! kose! kose! my blessing, blessing, blessing! No more shall we call them the stories of the sky-god, but we shall call them spider-stories.”
This, my story, which I have related, if it be sweet, or if it be not sweet, take some elsewhere, and let some come back to me.
This is, of course, the state of consciousness marked by relaxation, an inward focus, and what we might call a “tuneable” connection to the Unknown Reality. How you enter this state is up to you. Through practicing entering and exiting this state, you learn how to lessen or deepen at-will this Trance. I believe I will leave it at that, on the assumption that you are well-versed in achieving these states of scared awareness. You ARE awakening at this time…
Mouse goes everywhere. Through rich men’s houses she creeps, and she visits even the poorest. At night, with her bright little eyes, she watches the doing of secret things, and no treasure chamber is so safe but she can tunnel through and see what is hidden there.
In olden days she wove a story child from all that she saw, and to each of these she gave a gown of a different color – white, red, blue, or black. The stories became her children and lived in her house and served her because she had no children of her own.
Yes, only God can make a tree. I totally concur. However, in this Teaching of mine we are asking You-The-Blog-Reader to acknowledge your divinity. You are God and Goddess and you are All That Is. Observe through your particular perspective, therefore, your creations in the collaborative effort with your environment. Now when I ask you to look at what you are doing, see where you are going, take responsibility for your Reality Creation, this is what I mean. With the full appreciation of “What you are doing,” you are compelled by conscience to take responsibility and CHANGE YOUR CREATIONS FOR THE BETTER.
Additionally, I do believe that our connection to a Higher Awareness is imperative in these explorations. For in terms of states of consciousness – the various perspectives that the Practitioner Embodies in this method – would it not be of value to seek out the elevated perspectives of the non-physical beings, the Energy Personality, the Guides, the Gods and Goddesses, your own Higher Consciousness?
It makes sense, I think, to receive what we might call, a “second opinion,” here, moving forward with our studies. Yes, we are certain of what you the ego/intellect know and what you wish to find out. However, when we invoke the Higher Gestalts of Consciousness “the entire game plan changes,” to coin a phrase. All of our behaviors, all of our thoughts and emotions become understood in an entirely different way when we make these connections. It is indeed an altered state, a highly elevated and exalted state of consciousness when the student is connected to The Source.
The physics of this for those of you who would care to know, referring to my previous. The Percept creates the Reality Constructs from Consciousness UnitsAND THEN perceives it. Do not be confused by time in this discussion, therefore. The percept uses time as a structure for creative activity. In truth, outside of time in the Unknown Reality, everything happens at once. Thus, the Percept organizes, allots, schedules the creative efforts of consciousness, forming things and events from chaos
Now the Path of Awakening we offer is initially concerned with two very powerful perspectives: Loving Understanding and Courage. It is quite simple…
As you live your life, you go about your day confronting your Issues head-on, without denial and without intellectualization. If an associate tells you something negative about yourself, for example, you consider it, you muse upon it and wonder if this might be an Issue. Courageously you move forward with this information, asking the Universe, in a sense, “Is this true? Does this apply to me?” If the negative material is true, you begin learning your Lesson by taking responsibility for this Issue and the harm you have caused to yourself and others, perhaps. You are understanding your Issue in a Loving way, with humility, you see. So it is also quite profound, here, and let me tell you why…
BECAUSE YOU CREATE YOUR OWN REALITY. When you Embody these Precepts, when you learn your Lessons, it sets you up for creating Loving and Courageous realities. This becomes IntentionalReality Creation. You are transformed on this simple path.
Referring to the previous example… If you have taken to heart the criticism of your associate and you are working on yourself to clear this up, you will, after a length of time, experience the amelioration of the negative trait. You may then expect the associate to comment on it, having noticed the change.
If you are the captain of your ship act as though you are the captain of you ship…
The Quest
Why are you reading this Blog? As I stated earlier, I make an assumption that you are looking for something that is lacking in your life. So I am assuming that you are on a Quest of some sort. Perhaps you are on a Healing Voyage to correct a malady, or you are experiencing Lack in a quite profound way and wish to discover the Abundant Universe for yourself, or you may be lonely, looking for your ideal partner – Soul Mate – and wondering how to go about that. Are you a student of your own life, one who investigates the Personal Reality as a philosopher? Do you notice the mystical intrusion from the Unknown Reality, the anomalies of consciousness, and attempt to uncover their source?
These descriptions assume you are looking for your own answers to important questions in your life, as though Essential Metaphors denoting progress, learning, and adventure give a fullness of meaning to your activities in the Third Dimension?
This how it works, Dear Blog Reader…
Referring to our chart in Chapter One in this Blog Series: When you identify yourself as being on a Path of Awakening you catalyze the energies of awakening within you. When you Embody the Essential Metaphor called the Path of Awakening, you gradually see your world change to reflect this new perspective. Everything becomes a Lesson when you see you life in this way. Your Issues are revealed to you in the intimacy of daily living. You are indeed awakening to your greater reality as you Resonate your new world into being.
PERCEPT/PRECEPT
Perception (Percept) creates reality in the Third Dimension. Thus, when you habitually embody the essential Metaphors (Precepts) your perceived world begins to change to reflect the essences of these Precepts. Prove it to yourself.
For now, please read these Precepts and ask yourself which of them may be of the most help in your life. This is a beginning exercise in Resonance Dynamics. You simply achieve a light Trance, a relaxed inner-directed mental state. You are looking for a subdued state of consciousness that allows you to read this Blog material and internalize it – be affected by it – without falling asleep. Stretch your body, close your eyes, relax into a comfortable position. Do what you do when you meditate, Dear Blog Reader. Now read on….
You create your own reality.
Please take me literally. For you ARE the literal fabricator of your existence. With the energy of the cosmos – of All That Is – you co-create all that you see before you, as well as all that you indeed ARE in this moment, including your physical body. Does this remind you of something?
You are connected to everything in your world.
In this collaborative moment, within your Personal Reality Field, you are supported by, and, you do indeed support EVERYTHING around you. These energetic supports are observable to the nth degree. In other words, you could follow with your Inner Senses the strands of connective energy between you and everything in your world and find a part of you in everything else.
You can change the Consensus Reality from your Personal Reality Field.
Your individual consciousness energy goes out from your Personal Reality Field into the Consensus Reality Field to influence the manifestation of collective realities. In a sense, you could say that you vote within the collective with your thoughts, your images, and your emotions. They have effects on the global manifestation.
Emotion is the creative energy of All That Is in action.
Your thoughts and images are actualized according to the frequency of the emotion you give to them. Please note the suggestion of the Resonance activity in this definition.
Human consciousness is founded in Love.
Your primal condition at all times and in all lives is Love. We affirm the keynote of our world religions and most spiritual practices. Again, we are speaking literally, here.
Diversions from Love through Negative Emotions create Negative Realities.
By habitually diverting your attention to Negative Emotion from Love you begin to habitually create Lack, illness, and other Negative Realities.
All imbalances may be corrected through Love and Courage.
With Loving Understanding and Courage you can transform Negative Realities into Positive Realities. This is the primary practice of this Teaching.
You are the sum of your Simultaneous Lives within your current Moment Point.
Your essential Identity in this moment is created from the consciousness material within the mental environments of all of your Simultaneous Lives. Within the identified Moment Point, you have access to any and all of these Reincarnational Existences. Try it.
Your Inner Senses may be used to examine and change anything past, present or future.
In the Trance state, within your current Moment Point you can transform events from your past, present or future.
You are in telepathic rapport with everything in your world.
The Consciousness Units of which you are composed Resonate with the Consciousness Units of which everything else is made.
Reality Constructs are composed of Consciousness Untis of awarized energy.
Everything in our system is created out of Consciousness Units of awarized energy that are telepathic and holographic.
Coordinate Points permeate matter and space and modulate the activity of the Consciousness Units.
Coordinate Points in space and time hold the form of Reality Constructs created by consciousness.
Your intention, Emotions and Beliefs provide the energy and direction for Reality Creation.
By changing you focus, your emotions, and your beliefs, you change your reality. You will realize this as you complete the exercises in this Blog Series.
Everything exists initially as Gestalts of Consciousness, the non-physical “templates” of creation.
Thoughts, images, and emotions assemble in arrays of potentiality in the pe-manifestation domain. These assemblages act as the blueprints for Reality Constructs of all types.
I realize that I am being somewhat repetitive in these Precepts, “redundant,” as we say. I do this because repetition is the key to teaching, and it is the key to learning also.
Can you sense how some of these statements lend themselves quite naturally to certain projects rather that others? Can you also sense the phenomenon we identify as resonance active in the Precepts.
EXERCISE:
This is a writing exercise, primarily. Without thinking about it too much, choose those few Precepts that speak to you, that you feel may be true or useful to you. The personalize each of them by placing yourself at the center of the idea. You will be putting your personal energy into the Precepts as you do this, just in working with the Blog material. You will have the opportunity of using this Blog material later in this Blog Series.
These concepts were first presented in our Blog SeriesThought Reality. They represent some of my interpretations of the Ancient Wisdom Blog material. Once activated, they have the potential to assist you in the creation of what you Love. You may think of these statements as the foundational elements of your Practice and of the Regimens to follow.
Useful metaphors are those that effectively convey complex ideas or emotions in a relatable and understandable way. Here are some examples:
Life is a journey: This metaphor implies that life is a passage from one point to another, with various experiences and challenges along the way. It helps people understand that life is not just about reaching a destination but also about the experiences gained during the journey.
Time is money: This metaphor suggests that time, like money, is a valuable resource that should be spent wisely. It emphasizes the importance of time management and prioritization.
Love is a battlefield: This metaphor compares the ups and downs of romantic relationships to the challenges and conflicts of a battlefield. It conveys the idea that love can be tumultuous and requires effort and perseverance to overcome obstacles.
The mind is a garden: This metaphor likens the mind to a garden that requires cultivation and care. It emphasizes the importance of nurturing positive thoughts and ideas while weeding out negativity.
Knowledge is a treasure: This metaphor implies that knowledge, like treasure, is valuable and worth seeking. It suggests that acquiring knowledge can enrich and enhance one’s life.
Life is like a box of chocolates: This famous metaphor from the movie “Forrest Gump” suggests that life is full of surprises and uncertainties, much like the assortment of chocolates in a box. It conveys the idea that you never know what you’re going to get.
The internet is a vast ocean: This metaphor compares the vastness and interconnectedness of the internet to an ocean. It conveys the idea that the internet contains a wealth of information and resources, but navigating it requires caution and skill.
Time is a river: This metaphor suggests that time flows continuously, much like a river. It conveys the idea that time is constantly moving forward and cannot be stopped or reversed.
Hope is a light in the darkness: This metaphor compares hope to a guiding light that shines through difficult times. It conveys the idea that hope can provide comfort and motivation even in the darkest of circumstances.
Friendship is a sheltering tree: This metaphor suggests that friendships provide support and protection, much like a sheltering tree. It conveys the idea that friends are there to offer comfort and refuge during challenging times.
The oscillating emotional tone, the Feeling-Tone that also has thought and imagery attached to it, is this Resonance we are describing. Resonance is the frequency of creation in our world. It oscillates multi-dimensionally, also, to create perceived realities within all of our Simultaneous Existences. The specific frequency of oscillation or vibration is determined by the varying inputs of emotion, thought, and imagery. In each of our lives we exhibit the specific frequency of that life. No two are exactly the same.
Now that I have presented some introductory material we will now discuss the Essential Metaphor that is the subject of this Blog Series.Resonance: a very high concept indeed. It is a broad, overarching Essential Metaphor that may help you discover those aspects of your consciousness that can help you to create what you wish to create in our Blog Series on the Soul Family, we first defined Resonance in this way, ” What is created intentionally and with power on the inner world is manifest in the outer world through Resonance – the electromagnetic assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs.”This is Resonance with a capital R, you see. This is the activity that creates positive realities for the Practitioner.
Let me now add to this definition by expanding on the word “thoughtful.” By thoughtful what I mean is… Both subconscious and what you might call “intentionally” conscious thought create the reality that you then observe as feedback. The awakening student becomes aware of the particulars within the subconscious mind.
This accounts for the phenomenon of the Moment of Awakening in which the student realizes that they do indeed create their less-than-positive realities, and that they do so subconsciously, for the most part, through negative ruminations. This we may call resonance with a small “r,” if you don’t mind. These negative ruminations create negative realities. They are the opposites of the positive thought forms – the Precepts, for example – we suggest you use to create your positive realities. I am speaking of the positive circular thoughts that you create and then Ritually inculcate into your mental awareness.
RUMINATIONS
NEGATIVE REALITIES ARE GIVEN LIFE THROUGH REPETITIVE NEGATIVE THOUGHTS, IMAGES, AND EMOTIONS. POSITIVE REALITIES ARE CREATED BY REPETITIVE POSITIVE THOUGHTS, IMAGES, AND EMOTIONS.
WE ARE FINE-TUNING THESE ANCIENT AFFIRMATIVE STATEMENTS TO SUIT OUR OWN NEEDS AND DESIRES…
The Promise of Magic
This current Blog Series is quite similar, a cousin you might say, to earlier Blog work. The Magical Way. This IS the magical way I am offering , updated of course, to be agreeable to the modern sensibility. Notice how these empowering statements of mine offer you-the-Blog–Reader the promise of magic, of Soulful creativity, of manifestation of the heart’s desire.
Many of the statements I use in this Blog Series are Essential Metaphors; metaphors for the activity of consciousness in our dimension. They are essential, in the sense that they are necessary to this Teaching; they are required so that the student can comprehend the system. They are also essential in that they contain the essence of what they purport to represent. Let go on a bit concerning this very important idea.
Thinking back to my description of The Telepathic Network... This Essential Metaphor suggests a subtext or an intuition that we ARE in a reciprocal relationship with everything in our world. It is an idea that wants us to comprehend it. Do You grasp the meaning here? These essences are POTENTIALLY active. They are activated by our Intent, or what we may call our Will. Please keep this in mind as you make your way through this Blog Series.
SUBTEXT
THE UNSPOKEN TRUTH OF A STATEMENT THAT IS SENSED INTUITIVELY. IT CAN COME IN A BURST OF INTUITION OR QUITE SUBTLY, AS IN A GROWING UNDERSTANDING.
Now I hope I have not lost you with these discussions of ancient Precepts, Telepathy, and the Etheric World. I am laying the groundwork for our exploration of manifestation through Resonance and will be a passage through the Hidden World. It is the steady path I take when presenting this information to you in my new Blog Series.
Feel free to consult the previous Blogs Series’ if you are having trouble following my narrative. And please keep an open mind and do discount, at least for the time being, the admonitions of the ego/intellect to put this Blog aside and run away.
Just for fun, please joy down where you would place yourself on some of these trajectories of development. This will give us a benchmark that we will use to chart your progress as you diligently complete the exercise in this Blog Series.
For example, referring to our chart:
Are you on a Healing Voyage in your exercise? Or are you lurching forward in the Common Trance, oblivious to your surroundings, focused only on your subconscious desire to belong to the group?
Are you somewhere in between with the vast majority of humans?
The following descriptions of consciousness activity in the Third Dimension are framed in terms of polarity, trajectories of evolution, states of consciousness, and so on. Here we hope to portray the vast field of possible visionary experience in a concise form. These are terms we use when describing phenomenon such as: remembering the Ancient Wisdom, the Awakening, and the Healing Journey.
TELEPATHY
In the telepathic network the supports all activities in the Third Dimension, you are connected to everything via the Consciousness Units. This connectivity enables the emergence into your world of your day-to-day realities with some consistency.
Now this communication stream presents to succeeding generations a context for awakening to the inner world. But it is not obvious, at least at first. It is there in potential to be drawn-in to the personal consciousness. This occurs during the practices of your spiritual traditions, and also in your accidental visitations to the Unknown Reality. Here are some examples: When you are taken out of your body in nature as you witness the majesty of a natural event, such as a thunderstorm; or when you experience a deeply moving encounter with the animal kingdom; or when you encounter a “ghost” or other non-physical being; or when you experience extreme negative emotion or even pleasure. Though you may not be looking for it, you are finding Spirit, and you are thoroughly transformed during these moments of awakening.
What can you do when you’re faced with the numinous? My answer is this: “Change your behaviors, enlarge your beliefs, use your Intent to embrace the transformation you are witnessing. Embody it, my friend.” If you do, you will be altered to the core, ‘to nth degree,’ as we also say.
The New Age canon has a source that is as ancient as the Earth herself. We call this source the Ancient Wisdom. In great cycles of expression, at appropriate times in our history, this information rises up within the collective consciousness and insists on acknowledgement. Naturally it is the expressive among us who first heed this call. You are prompted by these impulses to express yourself, to express your vision. It is no coincidence, therefore, when the visionary content shows similarities across vastly different populations from all over our Earth.
Look around us at our modern media. In every country of the world we will find the visionary artists creating their works for the highest good of all. The essence of these works is the same regardless of the tongue or the territory. From the collective consciousness of All That Is, the ancient truths are finding a voice, right when material is needed the most.
All of these are indicators that we are experiencing The Visionary Perspective in our lifetimes. This perspective has a particular vocabulary associated with it as well as other elements that help to distinguish it from other perspectives. Here in this Blog Series we will discuss some of these Metaphysical concepts. We will remind that this information is timeless, for it is always there within our consciousness in all of our lives.
And we hope to demonstrate that we are all talking about the same thing, here. The spiritual authors from our personal timeframe, the metaphysicians from our past, ALL of us are presenting this Blog material in our own ways, in our own words, for the enlightenment of the average citizen of our world.
Another important aspect of this perspective is that of Awakening. We are creating this Blog Series for the person who is waking-up to their greater reality. Indeed, this Blog material will not make sense to you if you are otherwise.
How can you tell if you are one of these people? Take this simple quiz:
Do you find that you are deep in your Issues and Lessons, the reasons you came to Earth at this time?
Are you attracted to the various spiritual movements of your era?
Are you experiencing graphic demonstrations in your Personal reality of The shift in consciousness and other so-called “supernatural” phenomena?
Do you sense that time is somehow speeding up for you, as though you are quickly coming to the brink of a great transformation?
Our Free Will choices determine the specifics of how we create our reality. We also call this perspective Intent of Divine Will when it is informed by the Higher Centers of Awareness.
We are in our systems to learn how to use energy to create what we want…
The New Age Canon
” I am on Earth to be happy.” “It all works out for the best.” “There are no accidents.” “Everything happens for a reason.” “Each cloud has a silver lining.” ” There is an inner world that gives birth to the outer.” “You create your own reality.” These are some of our modern sayings from the New Age, metaphysical, and spiritual genres of literature. They each have sense of magic about them, do they not? The very notion that, “You create your own reality” holds within it the presumption of power, of fertile creative energy.
Now I have some good news for you. If you subscribe to these magical Precepts you are certainly on the right track in your evolution. For you ARE on Earth to be happy, Dear Blog Reader. This is quite true. And we do create our own reality, what we now call the Personal Reality Field in my Blogs. Specifically, we are in our system to learn how to use energy to create what we want, what we desire.
I speak to you from a particular perspective, one that is outside of our much theorized space/time continuum. I see that some may doubt this statement. Some will fear that you are in your dimension to suffer and experience pain and disappointment – at least for the better part of the journey – on the way to another highly theorized locale you call “heaven.” This limited perception is a gift from our ancestors and others who have taught us through religious conditioning the “benefits” and perhaps “Spirituality” of Lack.
We could say that these New Age concepts answer the question, “Why am I on Earth?” in a very affirmative fashion. This movement, indeed, is a response to the naysayers, those who have controlled us for many hundreds of years. The New Age emphasize the Virtues of Humanity, the experiencing of Love and pleasure by everyone, healthy self-esteem with an absence of shame, guilt, and the other detrimental states of consciousness. I think that we can immediately sense how this perspective – we shall call it the Visionary Perspective – challenges the status quo espoused by our governments, our mainstream religions, our military establishments, our Negative Media, and other authorities.
We are now referring to my new Blog material as a Teaching, as a Path of Awakening. It is a path toward independence, generally, away from authority figures and towards a realization that the answers to all questions are to be found within the personal consciousness: your personal consciousness. As a student of your own existence, you are expected to examine your thoughts, beliefs, and behaviors as a scientist would, a Scientist of Consciousness. Because you are studying yourself, objectively, Lovingly, you will observe instances of denial, intellectualization, cynicism, egoic pontifications, and so on. The negative emotions are noted, their origins identified, as plans are implemented to transform these negative states of consciousness into their opposites.
This is the crux of the matter. The student of the Personal Reality attempts to fine-tune the expression of Reality Creation for the highest good of all. Why “the highest good of all ?” When you make your Transition do you wish to die alone, or with the entirety of existence – the Universe – supporting you?
Now please observe that I am addressing you as a particular type of human. Obviously there may be Blog Readers who are not on-board with us in these arcane studies. These directions are not for this type. And this is where the concept of Resonance comes in quite profoundly. If this material does not Resonate with you on some level, if it does not pique your interest and compel you to read on, it is probably not for you. Resonance, you see. It is at the foundation of all activities in Reality Creation.
Let me remind you that we suggest continuous use of the Ritual of Sanctuary as you perfect your Practice and carry out your Regimens. The Ritual of Sanctuary is explained in previous Blogs.
Now we live many lives and those with whom we are experiencing our current life also live their many lives. And just as those humans with whom we interact in our current existence – our genetic family, our adoptive family, our colleagues, our acquaintances – are learning their individual Lessons with us now, so too are each of us in what we are calling the Soul Family, learning our Lessons together in other Lives. In all of our lives, in whatever era we are experiencing our lives – Renaissance Europe, for example, or perhaps within a tribal unit in our prehistoric past – we are also interacting with Soul Family members, the same group of people with whom we always interact, for they live their lives just as we do: in different bodies, in different times in different circumstances
Thank you for staying with us in our new Blog Project. To begin, as you very well know my friend. You create your own reality. This has been my primary refrain to humanity in my messages over several years, and I fervently hope that you remember. In this moment and in every moment of our life, we form the world that we know, even as everything else within our reality cooperates with us in this creation process.
Our world is made from Consciousness Units: awarized elements of energy that seek out the fulfillment of infinite values in the manifestation of Reality Constructs of infinite variety. This etheric substance – the stream of manifestation – literally travels outward from our body to create the world that we then experience. It is fantastic. It is unbelievable. It IS the way we create our reality, Dear Blog Reader. For in this endeavor of Reality Creation, everything that can happen does happen, all in the spacious moment of creation – the eternal moment of NOW.
Included in this construction project of the Soul is the creation of our own physical body within a context of multi-dimensional existence. We do indeed live countless lives; some are lived in our past, some are lived in our present, and some are lived in our future. We have referred to these as the Simultaneous Lives and also the Reincarnational Existences. These lives are our lives throughout time.
To simply, to distill, to bring forward out of darkness these ancient truths, we present a theory of reincarnation that will be understood by the average modern. You needn’t have an encyclopedic grasp of the information we are providing here, to read, to enjoy, and to employ the messages. A willingness, a desire, a rekindled memory is all that is needed to begin and sustain you in these Blog Studies.
And as I said before on other Blogs, the new theory is presented in hopes that you may come together as differences at the expense of our similarities. In the new Blog material I am rectifying that by drawing attention to this Oneness of the human consciousness. We are all one great expression of the Divine – All That Is. Now let me provide supporting material for this statement….
Let me answer that for you outright: to quicken your awakening. Now the longer explanation would entail divulging my secrets that I use to inspire my students and to transmit knowledge directly to the consciousness. Let me say this, however. on a superficial level, as you are engaged in experiencing the amnesia of the human in physical reality, it may appear to you as though I am relating pleasant stories for your entertainment. Please understand, though, that these examples are for purposes of catalyzing the awakening of your ” sleeping” memories – your memories of previous lives, for example, within Third-Dimensional Reality and in other dimensions. So do not be surprised when you may experience, upon reading one of my innocent examples, a reliving of experiences from one of your own Simultaneous Lives.
That is the purpose of my new Blog messages to you, after all, and so we would expect this types of phenomenon to occur in the life of the attentive Blog Reader. When these flashes of insight occur, I suggest you take a moment to write, down the sensory information that you are receiving. This data will be of use to you as you complete the exercises in this Blog Series, and indeed, as you continue with your awakening.
We have a saying:”There is a reason for everything.” This statement is quite close in meaning to another of my favorites: “There are no accidents.” Indeed, there ARE reasons for everything. There are spiritual reasons for each and every behavior, emotion, and thought created by the human being. Dear Blog Reader, this series, as well as all of the other Blog Series I have written since 2014, is a Blog on spirituality.
I hope I have not frightened you away with my revelation. I am quite aware that the term may bring up uncomfortable images and emotions for some of my Blog Readers. However, because there are no accidents, we simply assume that you are reading this Blog for very good reasons. Perhaps you were prompted by “impulse” to pick this particular Blog and read it online. Perhaps you were drawn to the image of this Blog in some search engine on the Internet or elsewhere. Perhaps you are a longtime Blog Reader of the current Blog material. Whatever the case with you, I realize that it is my job, as the host here, to catch your attention in the moment, and then hopefully keep your mental awareness focused in my direction long enough to get the message I am attempting to convey to you. I take my job quite seriously. The message is, also, of a serious nature.
Now whether you are just beginning to explore the non-physical world or whether you are an old hand at these adventures, I will know I am successful when you make the Courageous and Loving gesture toward learning the Lessons of physical reality in a conscious and deliberate fashion. Spirituality is just that, you see. It is really quite simple. That is why we call it waking up. We are waking up to our true reality: a reality of the moment-to-moment learning of Lessons.
Does this or that civilization, though, exist in fact, you may ask? Does our Western civilization or our American empire exist? These are philosophical propositions. For the more we explore our Personal Reality in an attempt to find proofs, the more we find that all is composed of consciousness.
Now consciousness, as we know, and as some of our more conscious scientists also know, is limitless. Being limitless it achieves any form. In this view, do you see that the possibility exists for not only these few theorized cultures we describe in this Blog to exist, but for ALL permutations into physical form, of any and all probable social, political, and spiritual constructs to exist? All possible civilizations exist. Period. All thoughts or images entertained by humans seek our fulfillment in the form of RealityConstructs, including civilizations.
We may take this as a disclaimer, if you wish. Yet it is, you must admit, an intensely empowering disclaimer. It is empowering for YOU the individual explorer of consciousness.
Now we ARE living all our lives at once, here. We are now musing on the possibility of a better life for ourselves, dreaming. However, with a slight altering of perception we could, if properly motivated, Tune-In on our life in a probable reality in which we are experiencing a predominance of the common good, everyone “winning,” and so on.
We are an authority on our current existence. We know more about it than any other being. In just this way, we are also an authority on this other existence that is playing out in a probable “field” of experiencing of a Less-Than-Perfect reality to this probable reality, is the emotional state we describe as dreaming. We might also describe it as a pleasant longing. These are simple techniques here… dreaming, longing: you are essentially using your self-generated Positive emotional state as a homing device to Zero-In on the probable reality you desire. Your emotional tone will become quite positive when you do this properly.
When you indeed reached this Best-Case-Scenario life that you are living in a probable reality – remember, all probable realities are explored by your consciousness, in Perpetuity, you might say – imagine yourself luxuriating in the influences that create this positive reality. Soak up these Positive feelings.
The Positive manifestation ALWAYS exists for you as a probability. When you conduct this exercise, you divert your attention from your current moment of creating Less-Than-Satisfactory Reality Constructs, to the creation of positive, life-affirming, ecstasy-filled Reality Constructs. It only takes a moment to improve your reality in this way.
HYPOTHESIS: We may explore Sumari consciousness in the Trance State.
Currently this is a highly-energized Idea construct within our collective awareness. These values of the Sumari – Love, courage, compassion, altruistic public service – resonate with the overall collective of humanity at this time, for the ideals of the Sumari are quite necessary for the healing of our Earth and the peoples that live upon Her. On the subtle levels, all of us are aware of this.
Additionally, by identifying with, by allying with, by embodying the Sumari code, so to speak, we become Sumari. What we focus on within our consciousness strengthens and develops in our reality. What may have begun as a simple interest in New Age practices, for example, representing a fragment of Sumari consciousness within our mental environment, and expand as the Sumari aspect strengthens.
Now the language of Sumari is the language of the post-Transition environment. As an etheric being, after our physical death, we use Sumari to communicate with others who have made the Transition and are considering their options as to what lives to explore next. Sumari is the language of the non-physical world. All of us are well-versed in this language, for we have all experienced many deaths, many Transitions, many opportunities to use this language. With this in mind…..
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
As in our explorations in this Blog Series, use our Intent to tune-in to that aspect of our consciousness we identify as Sumari. There is an assumption here that you are reading this Blog for a reason. It may be that you are keeping appointments that you have made in other lives. Consider what it would feel like to keep an appointment with an aspect of your greater consciousness, this Sumari. In essence, you are using your Intent to remember something here. When you feel you have experienced noteworthy Findings, come up to surface awareness. Document your experiences.
This movement in our time-frame represents a cyclical renovation of the world culture. It would not be over-simplifying too much here, to state that this movement is spurred by a bleed-through to the civilizations of our past that is being experienced by many millions of us. Again, the human race is at a very dangerous crossroads currently.
All of our structures that have previously held us together are disintegrating. The power elite that control our world’s resources are resisting any changes to their entitlement: their self-perceived ownership of our planet. As a collective, the Sumari family of consciousness is attempting to spread their influence throughout the world, allowing these potent ideas of change to energize the greater collective of humanity. It is a time of potential revolution we have before us, nationally and globally. We can sense this potential, can we not? The Ancient Wisdom is being remembered and honored. The rights of the individual are becoming paramount. The collective is becoming empowered as the inefficient social systems of the past regime fall away.
Remember here, this is how civilizations are created. It is always an inside phenomenon. Then non-physical world creates the outside physical world, always. The best practices, in a sense, that have created positive value for civilizations in our past, are being remembered. Therefore, go to our dreams and reveries and witness the Mystery Civilizations as they give birth to The New World. Help where you can, Dear Blog Reader.
However, specifically for our project here, we shall discuss the Sumari briefly. Because this group is primarily composed of the Vanguard we describe in the new Blog material – the Magicians, Shamans, Witches and Healers – I feel that we can once again speak of this group. It is germane to this discussion of the awakening of humanity, of The Shift in consciousness, of the remembering of the Ancient Wisdom, and other subjects we focus on in my new Blogs.
What has been called the New Age movement in literature, in the arts, in the social, political, and spiritual arenas, is being driven by the Sumari family of consciousness. We are always instigators of the beneficial and ENLIGHTENING movements of humankind. And so we are again gathering forces in our modern time frame to remember the Ancient Wisdom together.
Of course it is not enough to simply remember this material and reinforce it among ourselves in the Sumari collective. In order to be effective we must , as individuals and as a collective of do-gooders, see to it that our systems are transformed fo the highest good of all concerned. Simply: it is our duty to use Love with a capital in all of our behaviors to humanize all of the domains of human interaction and development. This is what we do, you see, this is our modus operandi,so to speak.
To this end, some of us will carry out our duties overtly, as in the practice of the New Agers. We will act in public under the flag, so to speak, of the Sumari: the Lovers of humanity. Others of us that are indeed the reincarnation of this Sumari family, will act covertly, undercover, without fanfare, without notice, really, yet certainly with the same precise agendas as our colleagues: to co-create a Loving world for ourselves, our families, and for all humanity.
Many of my Blog Readers have fallen in love with my theory of long ago, of families of consciousness. I did indeed separate out the various types of consciousness expression within humanity for teaching purposes. It was my wish that through describing our differences – I would point the way to deeper exploration of the self: The Soul Self of the reader.
I assume that some of the Blog Readers of my early Blog works have assessed from which of the families they have sprung, and have taken this designation to heart, identified with it, you see, in perhaps the same way that the lover of astrology identifies with the astrological sign and attributes of their birth date and time. How many though have taken the exploration further, to the discoveries that lie within the psyche, within the unknown reality?
Now this is precisely why I have returned with a simplification of my theories. We have dispensed with the families of consciousness and now propose an overarching concept of humans over time. The focus on the individual becomes a focus on the group: the Soul Family.
In our distant historical past, there did indeed exist this race of giant, in our terms, humans. They originated, not within any one specific region of Earth, but, if you can imagine this, in a generalized fashion. Again, it is difficult to explain this process of the simultaneous existence of all forms… We are suspended within the coordinates of a space/time matrix. It is difficult for us to step outside of this matrix – the illusion of linear time – and observe All That Is at it creates everything that can be created, including, you see, gigantic humans. In a sense, we could say that our scientific theories and explanations of human evolution, HOLD US BACK, Prevent us from witnessing our greater creaturehood.
The accepted trajectory of development for humans is quite limited by our myopic scientists. However, if we were to look at our theoretical researchers that have perfected the use of the Inner senses in their explorations, we would find evidence of this other reality: one inhabited by giants, indeed, as well as many other representatives of unknown that we currently refer to as the impossible, or perhaps, merely mythological beings. I hope that you notice that this is my disclaimer for the material that will follow.
Now the term “generalized”… all probabilities are explored by consciousness in the moment ” to the nth degree.” Everything exists spontaneously and eternally NOW. The races of humans, all living things, and even supposed inert substances, create themselves in the moment of eternity that exists now.
Let us anticipate your question: “If these other human forms exist now and forever, why do we not know more of them?” Answer: Perhaps it is because we are a modern human. We do not “believe” in these outlandish tales of giants, fairies, angels, and so on. We create our reality through our beliefs. Therefore, we have not participated in the creation of these beings. We have not assisted in their manifestation into our Personal Reality Field.
Now, before I lose you entirely, please remember that the various eras and epochs of time exist as dimensions. We refer to the era that witnessed the giants, therefore, as an alternate dimension, one that we may explore, if we wish, just as we may explore any dimension from within the Third Dimension. Enter into this moment of exploration, then, as I proceed.
The giants were a race of humans that existed simultaneously with all other races. Where all races and nationalities existed, the giants also existed. Thus our legends of gigantic humans who lived on the edge of the village, or in the mountains of regions around our Earth. All regions, all mythologies document the giants. Thus we have our stories of contact, that are in truth, dimensional- bleed-throughs.
I do realize that the “scientists” among us are now scoffing at these descriptions. Scoff if we must. The deniers merely exhibit their disbelief in these matters through denial and intellectualization: “scientifically impossible,” we might say. You may now be asking for proof. Let us then go directly to the exercise, where you may receive the proof you require.
EXPERIMENT – CONTACTING THE GIANTS
HYPOTHESIS: The giants of myth may be contacted through experimentation in the trance state.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The assumption in these new Blog Series of mine is that EVERYTHING that can be entertained in the mental environment can attain varying degrees of reality, either in our system or others. We create our own Personal Reality Field that comprises a radius formed about our physical body construct to about 50 feet. Everywhere we look we create realities there and we have the most “say” in what occurs in our reality within this 50 foot radius. Everything: every atom, every insect, every rock has a reality field in which it exists, for everything is alive. This we should know by now.
Before us, in front of us, right before our eyes in our Personal Reality Field, exist all of the dimensions of our physical reality that hold all of the humans, animals, trees, and what have you that have existed for eternity. We are speaking of eternity looking forward as well as backward, here. Past, present, and future manifestations of anything that can be imagined, exist right where we are, Dear Blog Reader.
I have described these dimensions as available to us in “layers” of reality. With this metaphor we might conceive of the dimension in which the giants exist as one that lies somewhat downward in front of us, looking into the earth at a 45 degree angle. Building on this metaphor, can we get a sense of the perspective of peering into other dimensions, by using our Intent now, and focusing the consciousness, the Inner Senses we are talking about now, to bring into clarity the dimension of the theorized giants?
We know from communications with our readers, that some of you have already made contact with these beings and have developed relationships over the years. So this experiment is possible and quite easy to do. It is one that has been used by explorers throughout the ages to perceive the giants and other so-called mythological beings. We are, therefore, taking on the role of visionary in this experiment. Our imagination will come into play, in the sense that we will be open to the images of these beings. We will use our Inner Sense of sight to tune-in to the dimension in which the giants exist, and then be open to accepting what we are viewing.
Here it is important to remember that we may have preconceived notions of what a giant looks like. My advice is to try to recognize these images as barriers to understanding. The truth of these beings is not romantic at all. Please attempt to look beyond the cultural stereotypes offered by our motion pictures, books, and other media.
Again, when you feel as though you have gathered enough information in our experiment, simply direct your consciousness out of the Trance State and up to surface awareness. Document your findings immediately, while the information is fresh in your mind.
In my Blog Series of long ago, I have made note of just this type of experimentation in the creation of the human form. Certainly there have been whole societies of gigantic, in our terms, human beings who were exploring probable evolutionary paths at literally “the same time” that what we would call primitive man. was developing on our African and other continents. I remind that ALL expressions of humanity, if human form within physical reality, do indeed occur. All possibilities are explored. True, many of these experiments take place on probable trajectories of development, and so are not acknowledged in our consensus reality. Yet through bleed throughs between these other dimensions, probable dimensions you see, representing other timeframes, past, present, and future, developing man and woman did experience glimpses of the divine ancestors, as we have used the term here, and other inhabitants of the adjacent dimensions.
These Seti, then exist in an adjacent dimension to our Third Dimension, where they developed through our so-called Ages – Iron, Bronze etc. These giants were, of course, thought of as gods by those fortunate enough to observe them within the visionary experience and other altered states. The stories of Sasquatch and other giant humanoids are actually referencing contacts with these extra-dimensional beings
The question as to why the world religions grew from the same locations on our Earth can be answered in this way…
In the original inception of energy from the Arcturian system, it was realized that the Middle East and Far East contained the most positive influences for the establishment of particular religious systems. The manifestation process was and is accelerated in these regions. The portals to the etheric, as I have referred to them in the past, were and are quite open there. Thought is transformed into physical reality constructs quite easily there through these portals of energy exchange: what we have called Coordinate Points. This has to do with peculiarities of the electromagnetic influences that “charge” the environment in this area of our planet. This becomes obvious, if we think about it. For a more comprehensive explanation of this process I refer to my earlier Blogs Seires.
Now as we know, both the Divine and the not-so-divine are manifested in our reality. Thus, we have the tendency for the negative gods, to be made manifest there as well. This area is a proving ground for the perceived negative and positive are made known in the physical dimension.
There existed at that time, hundreds of years before the birth of our Christ and other seminal religious figures, an affinity of consciousness, one human for the other, such that the Telepathic Network that connects all of consciousness was acknowledged and relied upon for the truth in any circumstance. The mental environment of the average human at the time, then, contained this vital connection to the Divine. Long before the growth of Christianity into a movement, the Semitic tribes relied upon this cohesive force of nature – the communication stream of The Christ Entity.
Now the disclaimer: We refer to The Christ Entity as having established on our Earth all of the religious movements. This includes those that grew into the world religions, as well as those that remained tribal-centric, being kept within smaller collectives. We refer to this Energy Body as The Christ, however, you could just as easily and correctly identify this influence as The Buddha Entity, or The Great Spirit Entity, and so on.
The question of why did the religions grow from particular regions on our Earth. Now the Niamennon are simply one identified tribe of our early settlers of the Middle Eastern parts of the planet. As is the case with all of us, however, these peoples have their origins on other planets. The Arcturus system and the planets surrounding this body, was the originating point for all of what we would call the Middle Eastern peoples.
Remember now my comments that linear time does not exist in the Soul’s perception? Consider then a Soul, an Entity, a Gestalt of Consciousness existing within this Arcturian system, that KNOWS it will have a direct hand in seeding the Earth with the sparks of Soul, the essence of itself, for a “future,” in our terms, Reincarnational Drama enacted within the collective consciousness of an entire civilization. These types of activities are conceived outside of times as we know it. In this way the Entity is allowed to witness the future manifestation upon the Earth, of the growth of a tribal collective from their original contribution.
This entity knew, therefore, that they were to contribute to the gestation of what would become several religious movements. This is delicate and difficult information that I am attempting to transmit. In the inception of Spirit into the babies being born in the initial transmission of energies from the Arcturian system, each human grew to adulthood, they knew that they were to be involved, either in the first incarnation or later ones, in the growth of these religious movements.
These Souls choose to incarnate on our Earth at that time SPECIFICALLY to become involved in these movements. If we can think of the The Christ figure, as I have represented this Energy Gestalt in my Blog writings, as being a part of an extended family, a Soul family, if you will, simply think of these sojourners to Earth as members of The Christ Entity. They were keeping appointments with one another on the physical plane to engage in the world of establishing movements.
Let me continue with “MU“. The citizens of this extensive network of city-states were avia dreamers and visionaries. This psychic aspect of consciousness was stressed over the practical application of physical energy and planning of real life amenities in the AHMNA culture As we know, realities are created in just this way. Reality constructs are “considered” into manifestation, beginning in the dream state, and then fleshed out in detail in the waking state. It was of course the same with the people of Ahmna with a critical difference. These humans were so entirely adverse to the feeling of emotions such as pain, frustration, anger and the like, that they almost completely neglected the creation of the vision – the idealized culture – within physical reality and sought to, as a group now, simply focus on the Astral template of an idealized culture. This idealized culture exists as a holographic entity in time within our collective awareness.
Again, the real life physical reality of the Ahmna civilization was quite mundane and unremarkable. There was a strict caste system. There was no slavery, as we know it, but “human capital,” to coin one of our humorous terms, was certainly employed by the ruling class. They were quite mystic, most of them – philosopher kings and queens, you see.
Now the idealized vision of this almost feudal system, we can easily imagine. The members of the lower castes would dream of an egalitarian political and social system, perhaps something of a true democracy. So this was entered into the mix. The philosopher king/queen rulers, in their moments of positive reverie, contributed to the vision with dreams of themselves as benevolent masters, loved and cherished by their subjects.
As for physical descriptions of these people, I may tell that they were similar in facial features to the Eskimo. The faces were quite darker, however, with flat cheeks small noses, large almond-shaped eyes. The hair was thick and black for the most part. Both men and women enjoyed adorning the hair with clay ornaments, jeweled barrettes and leather ties of various colors. They were a strikingly beautiful people. We may see the vestiges in, as I said, the Eskimo and the far northern Native American tribes
Mu is one of those lost civilizations that we as a race have created from several different civilizations. This Mystery Civilization existed as a prototypical culture within the collective of humanity’s imagination.
Now, every collective of humans, of animals, of insects and even of inanimate materials as we call them, every amalgam of Consciousness Units has a collective “vision” of itself. Of course, every conceivable vision of Mu exists within probable realities. For our purposes here in this explanation, let us think of the vision as just two fold: There is the “real time” vision, the idea on which is built the CURRENT “bedrock reality” that is experienced by the inhabitants, in this case, the humans of Mu. But it could as easily be the reality as experienced by the atoms that compose a rock upon our lawn. Anything and everything has consciousness and everything exists at once.
Now secondly, each collective, each Gestalt of Consciousness if you prefer, has a vision of the future – an idealized dream or vision of where they would like to be in a future manifestation of their present culture. This future vision or vision of the future is fed by the best case scenarios entertained within the mental environments of all participants in the collective.
Our Mu Civilization was just such an idealized society created on the mental plane of existence by the members of a civilization that existed in certainly a far less idealized manner, if I may say so.
Now let us assume for a moment that it is your fervent desire to connect with this ancient civilization. Perhaps it is a long-standing dream for you to make contact in some way. You have read stories in our history books and in our media about the civilization and the material resonates with you; perhaps it even evokes momentary bleed throughs that allow you to witness the activities within that civilization. If this is the case, we might also assume that you have lived one of several of your Simultaneous Existences within this period of history in this civilization.
You have an interest in the Mayan Civilization, then, because it is personal: you have experienced lives in that era and you wish to remember what you learned in that era. Perhaps you are responding to a call from the past life existence, therefore, to go back and relive some of your experiences. This is a common occurrence both forward and backward in perceived time. In this case, you could say that you are keeping an appointment, made perhaps in this lifetime of long ago, to meet up, and perhaps, in a sense, compare notes as to Lessons learned, or avoided, and so on.
Additionally, this civilization has effectively “seeded” our world culture with the elements necessary to experience the required sensory effects to get the message across to us, in a manner of speaking. This is The Shift that has been foreseen by our visionaries. Many books of material have been written on this civilization and the 2012 phenomenon. Our media had proclaimed the importance of 2012 to the world. The stage was set, therefore, within the world consciousness, for this reincarnational drama of humanity to unfold.
This Shift has been foretold in other practices, such as the Hopi way, and so on, such that the time is now right. The mass consciousness is tuned at this time for this particular presentation of the Ancient Wisdom to be remembered and endorsed by millions of awakening humans.
Now you may receive information on this culture and The Shift for yourself in the Trance State. This is a way to avoid the fear and sensationalism that follow these concepts in our modern media.
EXPERIMENT – Exploring the Mayan Civilization and The Shift of 2012
Hypothesis: You may experience in the Trance State what the Shift holds for you personally.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
It is best to let go of any preconceived notions of the Mayan Civilization and what The Shift may mean for you. Material that may have come from harrowing accounts of catastrophes that are “destined” to occur, should be intentionally blocked from your consciousness. One way to do this is to allow the negative images to float to the t”top” of your consciousness where they can be sifted out, or in some other way, visualized away from your ritual proceedings,
As you may know, we maintain in our new books that The Shift will bring a realization to the individual human of ALL of their Simultaneous Existences. Consciousness is becoming known to itself with The Shift. As that occurs, the individual explorer will begin to experience their other lives with a growing frequency. This exercise, therefore, may be one in which you may explore your personal stake in The Shift. You will be using your Intent here, to direct your consciousness to that divine perspective in which you may see, hear, touch, and so on, the activities within your other exietences.
There is a high probability that at least one of your lives was lived within this Mayan Civilization. However, be prepared to experience bleed-throughs into multiple existences that you are living in, while you, at the same time, live within your current existence, in this current timeframe.
The process for returning to normal wakefulness is the same as in all of your experimentations. Direct your consciousness to gently let go of your sensory experiencing within the Trance State. Direct you consciousness to come fully up to surface awareness. Document your Findings.
The bleed-throughs may be anticipated through a form of meditation or Trance. Simply, the researcher “takes hold” of their current Moment Point, creating a Point of Power as I have described it elsewhere. In this moment, the Inner Senses are activated to draw-in data of a visual, auditory, tactile nature, you see, to the Personal Reality Field. This anticipation, as we call it, sets the stage for a bleed-through event to occur.
Incidentally, this is the exact mental state of the archaeological researcher who makes tremendous discoveries intuitively. They are so engrossed in their studies that they are quite naturally activating the bleed-through “mechanism” and do indeed obtain the valuable insights into the culture being studied.
Here with the Mayan civilization, we again have a society that has been studied fairly thoroughly by our scientists. More is certainly revealed as our archaeologists discover new sites where religious observances were held, and so on. Yet from my perspective, again, as we so often remind the Blog reader, YOU would be better off to use our own Inner Senses to explore this civilization.
Therefore, I would ask you, Dear Blog Reader, to consider our concept of bleed throughs in this analysis. A bleedthrough is a momentary piercing of the dimensional-veil, that allows the human in our time frame to briefly observe the going-on in another time period, most usually for us, from within Past Timeframes. Remember however, that the future is just as easily accessible through the use of our innate perceptual lenses, these Inner Senses.
Now in so far as the development over time of the Lemurian expression is concerned, we must go back to the formative years of our world civilizations. As, for example, the European civilization developed from distinct, small tribal collectives into larger groups of humans, what we calling the Ancient Wisdom we kept alive and transferred to succeeding generations through myths, legends, song, and other social media. Each separate tribe, then, had their own particular expression within the mythological world, for the precepts of the Ancient Wisdom.
It must be said, that in these days of long ago, the mythological realm and the activities of the gods and goddesses, Spirits, and what have you, were quite well-known to the average citizen. The spiritual world was just a gesture away for most people, and all members of the group were steeped in the traditions, rituals, and other paraphernalia of their respective religious traditions.
Now compare this with our modern experience. The Divine is quite far removed from our everyday life. Indeed, the spiritual is divorced from our mundane existence. We are only allowed to practice our spiritual traditions on Sundays, for the most part, while setting aside the majority of our waking hours for work. It is often only during the dreamstate in sleep that we are allowed our explorations of the spiritual realms.
Fortunately for us in this exploration, it is to the altered state of the dream that we will turn to explore this non-physical Mystery Civilization. For this exercise, you would best be prepared by having mastered the Trance State, as we have presented it to you in our BlogSeries. For what you are doing in the deep Trance State, is in fact, bringing to you the sleeping-dreaming state of consciousness. This is the “foot in both worlds” phenomenon we speak of in the previous Blogs.
There is a peculiarity in the manifestation of this underworld for the individual. Often what you may find in your investigations is the appearance of the spiritual heritage of your lives. For example: if you are living a life within a mainstream religion currently, you may be presented with the symbols and other material of the religion’s history. If you are experiencing one of your other lives within another religion’s context, elements of the spiritual material may come to you through bleed-throughs.
The truth of manifestation in the physical world is apparent in the spiritual practices and imagery of the religious practices. The Ancient Wisdom, in other words, is there for you to observe and gain benefit from, if you can look beyond the additions and elaborations out upon it. Having said that, let us present our experiment:
EXPERIMENT – Lemuria is the underworld of the world civilizations
HYPOTHESIS: The repository of the mythological and religious practices of humanity may be accessed in the trance state.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
Your are emulating your tribal ancestors here in this experiment. The seeker of visions travels to the underworld through contact rituals enacted time-and-time-again, With your Intent, you simply direct your consciousness to travel in what you might call the non-physical vehicle, down into the Earth. You may visualize openings in the Earth that lead you to your desired destination. Using your Intent, simply means that you keep a simple focus on your destination within your consciousness.
Now you are of good, positive, divine Intent here. We have called this perspective the Divine Will in our blogs. It is a state of consciousness that is developed over time. Your intentions are good, in that, you are exploring the underworld of world consciousness, with a reverence for the beings that inhabit that dimension. You will find your own way with practice.
When you sense that you have gained sufficient information from this experiment, direct your Intent to take you up to surface awareness. Please document your findings.
And now a sideroad: If you were to think of the World Civilization as you are experiencing it now, what would come to mind for you? Many thoughts and images come to mind, I am sure. Now to get a feeling for Lemuria, simply consider the underside, the unspoken reality of our progressed modern culture. In other words, for every remarkable technological advance, let us say, in our modern world, there is a corresponding remarkable advance in this underworld with regards to the natural, non-synthesized, expressions of technological improvement.
You would have, for example, the proliferation of advanced forms of communication in this exterior world of the modern Earth, and on the interior, in the land of Lemuria, you might see the counterpart to this technological advance in form of superior expressions of telepathy, natural communications, you see, that do not require the sophisticated instruments developed by the modern human. This is a science of mind as compared to a science of machine, here. Another way we have described this is that what we see in the Third Dimension as the Underworld or non-physical reality, is in Lemuria, the ongoing physical reality: the only thing there is, you see. The outer world or 3D Reality is expressed inwardly in the non-physical world of Lemuria in every way, shape, and instance.
These are difficult concepts to express, however, I believe it would help if you would let go of the idea that the non-physical worlds or dimensions look exactly like the myths and other stories of the imagination expressed in our movies and other media. You might even have an advantage if you were to dispense completely with the name Lemuria, for this name is not the one accepted currently.
We maintain that this Mystery Civilization is one that exists as a “proving ground,” so to speak, for the mythological concepts and personalities of our world’s cultures. It does exist in the same sense that ALL, supposed, theorized, or visualized societies exist, in so far as they are given consistent thought energy by humans and other forms. This disclaimer applies to all of the theorized collectives we discuss in this BlogSeries. The civilizations exist first in the imagination, and then “fleshed out” with the manifesting energies of people everywhere.
We also referred to Lemuria as the “place” where the seekers of visions and meetings with the non physical beings go in their ritual journeys. The shamans, visionaries, and other seekers throughout our perceived past, journey to these uncharted territories of consciousness. Each journey to this underground of the imagination by human visionaries, adds to the storyline and the character development, you might say, of the Lemuria Legend.
May we now return to the Hunza to complete this essay? Certainly at about the same time – two thousand years ago in the Himalayas – the residents gave out a call to All That Is requesting a different system of thought, a different essence, you see, that would assist them in guiding their people down a more progressive avenue of creation.
Another aside here… In previous Blogs, I spoke of the TibetanBuddhism concepts as being the nearest description to the way reality is created by consciousness. The emissaries of The Christ incarnating within these collectives of the mountain peoples were successful, in that the concepts of Reality Creation were taken in as truth and embodied by the human practitioners “whole,” so to speak, without embellishments by priests and others. Because the people practiced in isolation, for the most part, from their colleagues in other parts of Asia, they were able to keep the teaching intact. You could say that the Tibetan Buddhist concepts are closer to the truth of the matter, therefore, than the practices of the mainland Buddhists. It was true then and it is true now.
Certainly the student may explore the Tibetan Buddhist path and see for themselves the obvious correlations between my theory over several decades and the concepts and practices espoused by this group, and kept without alteration over the centuries. That is as much as I will say on this matter for now.
During this time, the Earth was in upheaval in a social, religious, and political sense. The old ways were failing in all institutions, including remember, the basic structures within small tribal units. The cycle of development of humans upon the Earth was at a point in which more “information” was necessary from the Logos, you might say. A new energy, a new system of thought was required to take the place of the crumbling systems of order.
Because evolutionary consciousness – All That Is – does not seek its own annihilation, but rather a continuous development to all points of probability within all dimensions, these divine emissaries were sent into physical incarnation to “save” the planet, to save humanity. These rescue efforts of All That Is survive within our spiritual traditions in the documented mythological adventures of the rescuing gods and goddesses of the pantheons of the Greeks and Romans, for example, but also you see, within virtually ANY world religion from ANY of the thousands of collectives of humans throughout time.
As an aside, we are currently at just such a crossroad in our development, when we as a race are calling out to the Divine to be “saved;” saved from our own negative manifestations.
For the most part, these beings lived within other star systems, other dimensions of reality, before coming to the Earth plane to develop and grow. These other systems are Arcturian, the Sirius system, and the presently unknown undiscovered systems that will be identified by our astronomers in our lifetime.
Now can you imagine these separate, distinguishable repositories of spiritual essence – the Gestalts of Consciousness we are calling Light Bodies – as representing, not only the humans existing within the Asian continent, for example, but extremely well-defined “to the nth degree,” such that an emissary from the Divine was created from the collective human thought energy of members of individual small tribal units, as we have stated, and then, in a sense “summoned” to these individual territories around the globe?
If you are poetically inclined, you might say that a “call” was put out by humans everywhere around the world at that time two thousand years ago, to the specifically appropriate Light Body that held within it, again, the hopes, dreams, spiritual essence, of those particular people, to come to their aid.
We always have a choice, Dear Blog Reader. The great question for us as a physical being is this: when we awaken to our true reality, will we choose to create our life of Lessons consciously, or will we try to escape, play hooky from this dramatic enterprise of physical existence? Many of us well know what I am saying in these paragraphs, for we are well on our way to wakening fully.
Yet some of us may look on these new essays of mine with the all too critical eye of the ego. Fear, cynicism, competition rule the roost of the ego. I would ask you to pull back from this type of scrutiny and attempt to use the perspective of the “awakened one.” The heart is open as anger is transmuted into Loving Understanding. Fear is turned to Courage and faith.
The awakened or enlightened human may choose to be creative with the creation of events within their own reality. We may postpone the event of our physical death, for example, and undergo The Transition at a later date, perhaps learning more and gaining the Divine Knowledge from these additional months or years of living experience.
Of course the reason we are not as familiar with these other Masters, is that we are a product of our Western Civilization. We take as fact what we have learned in our Western schools. We have perhaps been brought up within a mainstream religion, such as Catholicism, and have not thought of what other just-as-powerful and valid demonstrations of the Divine there have been elsewhere, in other countries. We have tunnel vision here. I will attempt to rectify that somewhat.
For your information, at about the same time two thousand years ago, Masters and Teachers related to what we are calling The Christ in these Blogs, entered into the bodies of humans within our dimension. Their stories are the stories of the magic ancestors that we have documented in this Blog. Their stories are the legends of our gods and goddesses as well as Gods and Goddesses with a capital G. All of these beings began their lives around the same time, for they were observing great cycles of incarnation and development.
Again, without lapsing into the metaphysical and etheric too much here, let me just say that these beings were/are Light Bodies, essentially. They did and do now exist as the repository, in a sense, of the spiritual, arcane practices and potentials of humans throughout our perceived past.
The Hunza are technically NOT a MysteryCivilization, for much is known of this collective within the “historical record.” However please allow me to comment on this people as representatives of what might be called the “original” teachings of the Masters. The Masters are those Teachers who come into your reality every few thousand years on Earth.
Now it is well known to us that a personality known as Christ presented himself to the people of the Middle East some two thousand years ago. Also it is well known that, around that same time, other Teachers, other masters incarnated into the societies of the Asian continent and others. Muhammad was another Teacher incarnated about the same time. The Buddha and the Buddhist teachers are quite well known as having influenced the peoples in Asia. These are all known to us, no doubt, as a spiritual practitioner and as a student of religious generally.
However, please note that during this incredibly fertile period that witnessed the propagation of these various paths within the world community, OTHER Masters, OTHER Teachers, also came into physical reality to inform the members of thousands of other collectives upon our planet. We are speaking here of small tribal units on our African continent, as well as large congregates of spiritual practitioners within our aboriginal tribes in Australia, for example.
Let me use this exercise in a different way here in our discussion of the Mystery Civilizations. Now: you look in front of you wherever you happen to be. Dorian (my wife), for example, is looking in front of her desk table on which she writes on her computer in the room looking out to the woods behind our house. Dorian sees a beautiful landscape before her: the Sheep Mountains, many fir trees and some walnut trees, the other homes in the area as well as a glimpse of the beautiful lake that lies a mile or so away. This is what Dorian sees, and you Dear Blog reader, naturally are seeing something else in front of you. Now for my point….
What you see in front of you is your view of All That Is, interpreted through your Lessons, your beliefs, your issues. So you seeing what it is possible for you to see here, according to your beliefs. If you are of a modern mindset or cosmology, I would guess that your perceptions, do not include non-physical beings emerging from the trees, or gigantic crystal transmitters sparkling in the distance. Briefly, what we are saying is this: your perception of your current existence is a focus ON your current existence, yet it could just as easily become a focus on your existence within, for example, the Mystery Civilization of Atlantis, in which we assert there does indeed exist gigantic, black crystal transmitters and receivers. Or let us say you change your focus a bit and pick up on your existence in an aboriginal culture in which you did indeed perceive the Spirits of trees and other objects. You could see the personalization of the spirit energies and you communicated with them.
Now let me be blunt. We have suggested that space and time are mere conveniences for us in Third-Dimensional Reality. They are useful for those of us creating lives within the linear time conceptualization. Yet ALL of our existences are “out there in front of us,” right where we are now. In other words, you need not travel to France to tune-in to a life you lived in Paris in the 17th Century. Because of the telepathic holographic nature of the Conscious Units that comprise your reality, everything exists at once, and so all of our lives, including those lived in the Mystery Civilizations, exist at once, all in the same “place” at the same “time.”
This is a difficult concept to embody, perhaps, and so I shall go further here. Our world, your personal Reality Field, is an illusion, Dear Blog Reader. We create it out of “whole cloth,” to coin a phrase, through the energies of our Soul Self. Yet the life we are living does seem solid and convincing, does it not? Your life seems to be more than a group of ideas. It is convincing, it is authentic, it is a realistic portrayal of your Issues in dramatic form in physical reality.
It is convincing enough to keep us focused in the current existence and not spinning off into some Simultaneous Life we are living elsewhere in another time. Yet the boundaries of space and time are loosening with these practices we are teaching. Slowly, I am sure, most of us are learning how to keep a foot in both worlds. Now for some experimentation…
Not each and every single one of you, the Blog Readers of this new Blog material, have experienced lives in the GA society. However, most of you have done just that. Before we have an experiment that we first offered in our Blog material on Soul Evolution in general attempt to contact the Mystery Civilizations, consider this: do you tend to be a lover or a hater; a mystic or a cynic; a student or soldier; a helper or a taker? Are you intuitive or do you fancy yourself an “empirical” scientific observer of the event before you? Do you see where I am taking this? If you do, let us now have pour experiment, with the specific purpose of tuning-in on probable lives lived in the Mystery Civilization we are calling GA.
EXPERIMENT – TUNING ON THE GA CIVILIZATION
HYPOTHESIS: Using your Intent in the moment-point allows you to tune-in on other time frames.
Here we are using the term “tuning-in” in specific way. This relates to our suggestion in the last Blog. that the researcher in experimentation with the non-physical reality, use the essential metaphors. Tuning-in refers to the Radio Dial metaphor that we offer as a simple, powerful visualized device that will allow you to ritually bring in the frequencies of the non-physical beings, for example, in a sense, tuning-in on their waveband. This technique works quite well also with the Simultaneous Lives. It is simply a personalized metaphor that you may use to give some context to these metaphorical pursuits. Of course, you may use your own techniques, if that serves the purpose here. Let us begin.
Then simply relax. We are assuming you have, as my student, created a Ritual of Sanctuary for yourself, so that you may safely and without anxiety or fear or any kind, explore non-physical reality.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
If you have yet to create this Ritual, please envision golden, protective field around your physical body construct. Nothing harmful may enter this field. You are therefore protected, and you may even take this protective state with you in your outings in waking reality.
So relax and move your body in such a way as to elicit relaxation. You are in your state if Sanctuary. You may now surrender to the healing forces of your greater consciousness, your Soul Self. As you let go in this way, the good feelings build within you. You can feel the ecstasy below the surface that supports you in your Earthly existence. This quest is a very natural one for you. You have been doing these type of experiments for many lifetimes. You are the type of person that enjoys finding our about your unknown lives. And so you can easily use your Intent here to direct you.
Focusing on your goal, allow yourself to drift slowly and easily toward a recognition of the life you are living in GA. This is a matriarchy. The feminine principle, as you understand it, is accentuated within your personal consciousness. Tune-in that sense of affirmation for the feminine, perhaps visualizing a radio dial before you, and seeing the dial turn to making GA. As you turn the dial, images may come to mind. You may hear voices and feel a variety of emotions. Keep our Intent on traveling toward the good feelings generated in GA on your radio dial. The good feelings may now grow noticeably. This may signify that you have reached your goal. With your Intent, stop your voyage and rest within the good feelings.
If you have reached your destination: look down at your feet. What type of shoes are you wearing? Look around you. What do you see? Find a mirror or something else that will reflect your image and look at your reflection. Are you a male or female? What age are you? And what is your name? Do you remember the Sumari language?
You will have complete recall of all that you are experiencing. When you come up to surface awareness, you will easily be able to remember what you have experienced here.
You may certainly use this experiment when exploring any of the Mystery Civilization we have noted in this blog series. The techniques are the same. Simply focus with your Intent on the name of the Mystery Civilization and the feelings emanating from that Mystery Civilization. Each Mystery Civilization has a distinctive vibratory signature that you may tune-in to with your human consciousness. These energy signatures create their own distinctive emotional states. You will, of necessity, have to experiment with these states and follow your own Inner Guidance in these matters.
When you have finished your investigations for this experiment, gradually return to surface awareness. Document your Findings
The spiritual practice, the religion if you prefer, of the GA peoples was primarily what we called the Old Time Religion in our new Blog messages to humanity. It is the foundational structured religious practice that gave birth to, or you might say, served as the model for the practices of magicians, shamans, witches and healers that come with all established social orders. You do know that all cultures, all civilizations contain within the ideal manifestation of the Wonderworker, the magical ancestors, and so on.
All cultures throughout time, then, including the peoples developing in territories outside of GA during that epoch, were and ARE influenced by these magic principles, what many call in modern times “the perennial philosophy.” We have elaborated on these originating concepts in our Blog Series, Thought Reality, and I refer to that series for more information on this subject.
Now, though we have commented on the patriarchal energies in what may seem to be a critical fashion, please know, that within the original GA religious practices, the masculine energies of manifestation were given equal placement within the imagery and rituals of the GA religion.
We may see this egalitarian expression of the Divine within the practices of magicians, shamans, witches and healers in our current timeframe. These sacred concepts and images survive the ages intact, via bleed throughs, because of their truthful potencies. We sense the truth and power in these representations of the Divine with our Inner Senses. They resonate with the beholder. We are transported to the divine realms of understanding simply by observing the imagery and engaging in the ritual practices.
The Shift to the positive that is occurring in our dimension is largely a RETURN to the practices of the GA civilization. This is a cyclical manifestation that is being experienced by us as a people. Most of us have lived and living in GA thousands of years ago NOW. Most of us have consequently experienced lives of Loving Understanding and Courage: the hallmarks of the GA civilization. Most of us are conversant in Sumari, the predominant language in GA. The old ways, what we refer to as the Ancient Wisdom, are the ways of the GA civilization.
Additionally, GA was the source of many of our myths concerning the magicians, the divine kings and queens, and so on. Magic was practiced by the majority of the population and because everyone in the culture appreciated and condoned this practice, the magic “worked.” The cosmology of belief system of the average GA citizen, you see, supported magical practices and so the collective realities experienced by the citizens of GA comprised a magical reality: one in which miracles did happen; one in which healings of self and others did indeed occur; one in which Lack and other negative realities were, in a sense, “banished” from the collective experience of the people. Evidence of the GA civilization was destroyed by religious leaders. Practitioners of the patriarchal, vengeful god-centered religions were absorbed into the culture, and grew to influence the religions of GA.
The story of the decline of GA is quite similar to the accounts we read in our history books of the decline of an civilization. Forced to defend its borders from attack by less developed humans, less socialized humans, the governing body was obligated to divert resources to security matters, rather than education and the other perceived “healthier” concerns.It is an old story. Eventually, over several hundred years of matriarchal rule, the advantage was lost on the Northern borders of the territory. Though GA were fierce fighters when defending their land, once the boundaries were breached by the warring tribes, it became more common for the intruders to be taken into the culture and “forgiven.” Inter-marrying occurred quite naturally along the borders of GA. This tendency to absorb cultures from without continued until a homogenization of culture occurred.
Yes Dorian, connect the following to the previous post on untruthful histories.
Now continuing here… Without generalizing too extensively here, the tribes that infiltrated the GA borders were comprised of humans who practices a patriarchal religion. A wrathful vengeance-seeking god was favored by these warriors. The men were asked to support the patriarchal god of war as they went to war. As is usually the case, this was a system created to priests within the tribes, who sought political power to complement their perceived spiritual power. The GA forces were quite integrated. Men and women served in the country’s defense.
As GA absorbed surrounding tribes, the countries and peoples we know as present-day Europe were created. Much of what we know as Western Civilization is based upon a matriarchy, not the patriarchal concerns that predominate now.
Now GA did not exist as a pure matriarchy for the extent of its reign upon the European continent. The country was forced to defend their extensive borders from infiltration by warring tribes of various types and nationalities. This is the way it was, in fact. However, let me take a brief side road here in my explanation. I will ask you to conceive of what you know of human history, what you have read in books, learned in school and observed in your dramatic representations, as a highly subjective and romanticized portrayal of what actually occurred. You may know that the history of the world is the history of the victors. It is the winning tribe, country, civilization that “live to tell the tale,” so to speak. Typically, the historian has a cultural bias. They have created their “truthful” depictions according to their own perceptions within their individual Personal Reality Fields, you see. This is the way it has always been done. And so our written histories are lacking in truth, always.
Tp put it another way here: our history books and portrayals will NEVER be able to give us a comprehensive view of even one second of historical experiencing by an individual, much less a country or people. This is because, please remember, everything that has a probability of happening, does indeed happen. And so if we were to document the history if even one second of the world, to be comprehensive we would have to document the multitude of probable experiences, thoughts, images and emotions entertained by this single human. This is a fine point, to be sure, yet I trust I have given you some perspective here in our analysis.
Now GA did not exist as a pure matriarchy for the extent of its reign upon the European Continent. The country was forced to defend their extensive borders from infiltration by warring tribes of various types and nationalities. This is the way it was, in fact. However, let me take a brief side road here in my explanation. I will ask you to conceive of what we know of human history, what we have read in books, learned in school and observed in our dramatic representations, as a highly subjective and romanticized portrayal of what actually occurred.
You may know that the history of the world is the history of the victors. It is the winning tribe, country, civilization that “lives to tell the tale,” so to speak. Typically, the historian has a cultural bias. They have created their ” truthful” depictions according to their own perceptions within their individual Personal Reality Fields, you see. This is the way is has always been done. And so our written histories are lacking in truth, always.
To put it another way here: our history books and portrayals will NEVER be able to give us a comprehensive view of even one second of historical experiencing by an individual, much less a country or people. This is because, please remember, everything that has a probability of happening, does indeed happen. And so if we were to document the history of even one second of the world, to be comprehensive we would have to document the multitude of probable experiences, thoughts, imagines and emotions entertained by this single human. This is a fine point, to be sure, yet I trust I have given some perspective here in our analysis.
They spoke Sumari, for the most part. This is the same Sumari I described in my earlier Blogs. It is a language of Love, quite literally, as we have said. There is a “lightness” to it, and a sense that you understand the emotional content, as a modern observer now, even though you do not understand a word of what is spoken. The telepathic messages are received regardless of having any knowledge of the language itself.
In my earlier work, it was thought that an understanding of Sumari was attainable; now it can be told, that All of us have the potential to speak and understand this language in our current existence. It is the language spoken and understood in the non-physical worlds, for example. All of us know this language. Again, we have felt we must create amnesia around this fact, to protect our current reality creation. Please know that times have changed. We shall have an experiment shortly, to give you the Blog Reader a chance to “remember” our facility with the Sumari Language.
G for Gematri. A for Arssa. GA., the name is not stable at this time. It evolves as everything evolves. We are changing the past through our input in the present.
Now in the Sumari language the name Gematrie Arssa – Literally, Loving Land. However, the spelling is mutable. What we have there will suffice for now.
Sumari was the primary spoken language. The written languages was diverse and quite different across the continent, the European continent, as we know it today. The intentional telepathic communication we noted, involved images and emotions primarily with the capacity to trigger memories, even neuronal growth in the brain. Healing at a distance, as we now call it, was accomplished through this medium.
I mentioned earlier that GA was FIRST a matriarchy. Indeed, this was the most powerful and extensive matriarchy our world has seen. Our myths reflect the heritage of this ancient civilization, particularly the Greek and Roman mythologies. Though GA predominated on what is presently the European continent, through bleed throughs the Greek and Roman cultures were “seeded” with the matriarchal concepts: the idea of a strong, female goddess, the concepts of democracy as extolling the highest good for all concerned, and so on.
Now we may may discuss affecting the Consensus World Reality from the privacy of our own Personal Reality Field. Just as our advice to “keep a good thought” – a simplistic solution to transform negatives realities – was offered to you the Blog Reader, this technique of contributing to the Positive Manifestation within the Consensus World Reality from our Personal reality if offered with just as much surety that we will find success. The simplistic becomes the profoundly effective, as in other examples we have discussed.
Now what are we saying, in so much as we are describing the Positive Manifestation? First let me state empathetically that we are NOT describing the reality presented to us in the media. You well know by now that I am quite impatient with the purveyors of madness and violence and media would be the sensationalist newspapers, the war-mongering television programs presented as “news,” the violent controlling internet websites. These media present what we might call “the accepted” worldview of our deluded leaders and their business associates, the pillagers of our worldly goods, including our natural resources, the stores of our Mother Earth.
This is why we find ourselves prisoners of a quite toxic Consensus Reality, your see. Many of us are using the “templates” offered to us by these Negative Media, to create a negative fearful reality. In a sense, many of us believe it is our “civic duty” to do so.
For example: some of us believe with all of our might that we are a good citizen if we prepare for the “imminent” terrorist attack from our “enemies.” And so we stock up on the necessities of life in preparation for a few months or years underground, in our safe room. This is ridiculous my friend. Now I am certainly not speaking to you personally here, I am referring simply to those of us who have fallen under the spell of negative conditioning perpetrated by our leaders and the business interest that “rule” our world.
But let us examine what sort of Consensus Reality we help to create from the “safety” of our safe room. Are we contributing to a world based on Love and the acceptance of our fellow human beings without judgment of fear? I think not. In all probability, we are from our safe room, merely adding to the hatred, adding to the fear, helping to do our part in the perpetuation of negative realities.
Now the normal day would depend on the occupation of the inhabitant. Let us choose a female of moderate rank in the educational establishment. As we said, healthy, Loving relationships were the ideal to strive for in all realms of activity. In the average day, then this human would – taking her responsibilities quite seriously – prepare for the following day’s lessons with these goals in mind: whatever increases Loving Understanding among the students will be accentuated. Misunderstandings of any kind will be “healed” through interventions of various types, including telepathic assistance from teacher to student while in altered states. The uncommon trance, as we have described elsewhere in my new Blog material, was practiced by everyone in the society. Group cohesion was affirmed in this way.
Lessons – academic and social/ethical – were transmitted to students ongoing. During the dreamstate the teacher would present to the student’s dreaming consciousness, what you might call “coming attractions” describing future lessons Then, when the student attended the class in physical reality, they would again enter the uncommon trance and continue the Lesson. In this way knowledge was gained quite naturally in the waking, sleeping, and Trance states.
Please note that many of us are still involved in these types of instruction during altered states. However, for purposes of maintaining our focus in Third-Dimensional Reality, we must usually create amnesia around these experiences. As you may notice, the lines between sleeping, reverie, and waking were not as clearly defined for the GA residents, as for you, Dear Reader.
From star systems, predominantly Arcturus, and the life-sustaining bodies within that complex. This should not surprise you. We have many times affirmed that ALL of us are from outer space.
Let us first present for our Blog Readers a summary of what has gone before in our descriptions of the divine matriarchy.
This collective was first a matriarchal expression within human society. What we would in modern times call the “feminine” aspects of consciousness predominated in all social structures. Women took on the dominant leadership roles, for example, within families on the small level, as well as within the political organizations on the larger on the larger level, you might say. We have stated before that there was no competition in GA, as you might conceive of this concept currently. There was no “battle of sexes,” as we moderns refer to it. Cooperation was key, here, and ALL personal aspirations were sublimated towards the success of relationships within all the spheres.
The men were predominately builders and practitioners of various trades. Women took on leaderships roles in all relationships, modeled after the mothering role of mother-to-child. For this reason, the society in a business and personal sense was suffused with tenderness and an all pervasive sense of Loving Understanding.
Now the females modeled this unconditional Loving Understanding for the others. In a sense, you could say that when others saw the power, the grace, the extreme utility of this Love in action, they felt entirely justified in sublimating their own desires for the common good, the greatest good of all.
These are primarily dark-complected humans we are describing. If you may think of the current Romanian peoples, you may get a feel for the physical appearance of the GA peoples: Black curly hair, for the most part. Dark colored eyes. Stocky builds generally for men and women. Defined musculature. Indo-European characteristics.
Do you see how, even though in our current relationship, in our current family, in our current world culture we may be experiencing the predominance of the negative, that the OPPOSITES OF THE NEGATIVE most surely exist for us and our people with just as much potential for manifestation?
The Atlanteans, to get back to the question, were diverted en masse from their collective manifestations of peace, Loving Understanding, abundance for all, and so on, by the influences of the Negative Entities, our so-called Black Magicians. In a similar way, in our current timeframe, we as a collective of humans – world humans – are being diverted from our potential trajectories of positive development to the negative by these same Negative Entities.
The Atlantean were well versed in the manifestation process. They realized that they could individually use their creative mental apparatus to manifest desired objects, including breakfast. The average human was quite capable of materializing the breakfast with very little physical effort on their part. The cooperative network of ConsciousnessUnits that comprise breakfast were facilitated into their existence within physical reality by human consciousness. To an observer from our timeframe, this would appear as miraculous, magical and so on. Yet wait a few years and we will witness this phenomenon in our perceived future incarnations on Earth.
In our progressed future on Earth, it will be commonplace to materialize our thoughts instantaneously, just as the average Atlantean. Mass consciousness, in this instance, the collective consciousness of the Mystery Civilization of Atlantis, co-exists with the mass consciousness of our present and future timeframes and the mass consciousness manifestations that exist within these timeframes.
There are bleed throughs on all levels here. These occur in the moment, the spacious moment that connects all realities, all timeframes, you see. This is as much as I can tell about the recreation of past civilizations in our perceived present and future timeframes. There is more information on this matter to be obtained on the subtle levels using our Inner Senses. I direct you therefore to our meditations for further investigations.
Here we will speak briefly on a typical day within the Mystery Civilization.
Atlantis as a collective was in many ways further advanced than our present modern societies in the USA, Europe and elsewhere. Dorian is struggling here with her description. Let me simplify… Within the spacious moment, i.e., the eternal moment of the enlightened human, ALL civilizations exist. Simultaneous time is our baseline for experiencing all of our lives.
So for example Dorian, you are typing into your computer my messages, now, in your current existence as my collaborator. You are also, within this moment, utilizing communication technologies quite similar to our Internet and other computer services, within the life you lived and indeed I lived, within the Atlantean civilization. I repeat, there is a similarity of Reality Construction within ALL of your existences. You are typing into your computer NOW. In our Atlantean life, you are using a device we have mentioned before, that is powered by crystal technologies, to record your literal thought energies into a method for tuning-in to the subtle energies of thought, and recording this information stream. Typing into a computer was not necessary there, you see. The transcription of thought into manuscript was instantaneous with the use if these devices.
Now not only do your activities in physical reality reveal similarities on all levels of consciousness manifestation. In this Atlantean life, you Dorian are also a scribe for the non-physical beings. This is, in a sense, a “career path” for you over your many incarnations.
The correspondence are apparent to the nth degree. Anywhere you would care to look within your other life, you would notice the correspondences to your current life you are living within your current timeframe.
Now to continue, you are using your crystal device in Atlantean, even as you attend to other activities and obligations there. You Dorian currently are contemplating what to have for breakfast. You are hungry and you are visualizing possible combinations of foods to prepare, while you type into your computer. In this life, you are engaged in a similar visualization. However in this Simultaneous Life in Atlantis, the process is simplified also. The preparation of the desired foods in the preferred was is accomplished automatically, you might say.
The people of this civilization were of varied body types, of course, yet for the most part we would notice the Nordic features in these humans: fair skin, blonde and quite prominent noses. Blue eyes predominated yet there were also green and even hazel eyes here. This human form might be described as the prototype for the Nordic peoples who would come later, we are speaking now of some 20 thousand years and more before our Christ drama.
The Atlanteans existed then as fervent explorers of both the physical and non-physical worlds. They were, as a race now, quite intelligent in so far as the intellect is concerned. They also cultivated a sort of “natural” intelligence, an intuitive understanding of the way realities are created. This knowing sense was obvious in the countenance of the Atlantean citizen. The adults projected an intensity of personal power, we might say, to those around them. There was at that time, within the Atlantean culture, a mutual respect for the individual. There was not the prevalence of racial prejudice, hatred, anger, that sort of thing. These emotional complexes were to gain ascendance much later, in other civilizations on Earth.
The connections to whales and dolphins that have been dramatized in our consensus reality manifestations of the Atlantis “mythology,” were and are quite real connections. In our stories of Atlantis, particularly those told by our New Agers, the whales and dolphins are thought of as the present time-frame incarnations of the Atlantis people. In some way, the story goes, Atlantis was destroyed, but the people of Atlantis “live on” in the bodies of these sea creatures.
Let me explain how this particular relationship of man-to-animal first began and endures. In societies that predated Atlantis and most of the Mystery civilizations we are covering in these Blogs, the divisions between human and animal consciousness were not as clearly defined as those separations devised by modern man. The human consciousness was a great deal more fluid than currently. Modern man, the scientists among us, would describe this relationship of man to animal as imganial, created out of a need to hold some influence over the beasts of the Earth, so that they may better track these animals and take them for food. This symbiotic relationship between man and his prey and does exist for us in our collective awareness. In our tribal cultures it is given that the animals hunted to sustain life for the tribe are reciprocally aware of this “divine” relationshipî
The Atlantean were oriented outward into the surrounding seas and oceans. They were explorers and navigators of the world around them and developed fleets of sturdy vessels that they used to carry goods to trade with others in their cities and even much farther away, as in many hundreds of miles out to sea. These seagoing explorers and traders of Atlantis, having a certain “instinct” we might say, for ocean travel and an ingrained appreciation for the animals that live in the sea, developed communications with the sea animals, including the whales and dolphins, but also with other species, to assist them in navigating the waters, leading them to food sources for the voyages and to take back to their cities and a host of other practical purposes. This is really the Telepathic network at work here: the network of communication used by consciousness in the creation of realities.
If you can now refer to our discussions of consciousness evolution as more resembling a holographic continuum than a linear progression, you may perhaps see what I am driving at here.
The animal and the human are connected. In this case, the human and dolphin and whale are all on the same continuum throughout time, throughout space as we know it. We could say that a “fragment” of human consciousness of the Atlantean explorers exists within the collective consciousness of the dolphin and the whale. This was true then. This is true now. This is true in our perceived future. Our modern day admirers of the dolphins and whales as “teachers” within non-physical reality are remembering these linkages from their perceived past. Currently these essential relationships exist for us and may be used as gateways to greater understanding of our world and the world of the animal.
The crystal amplified and tuned human thought and emotion. For this reason, it was imperative that the operator be of the utmost integrity and emotional stability. I have stated that these crystals were used as communication and power transmitters. Imagine the consequences of allowing an unbalanced individual directing their emotional thought energy through a gigantic crystal transmitter. The results of these “mistakes” were documented in our mythologies as the wholesale destruction of populations through use of the “Death Ray.” For the most part, these tragedies were unintentional.
Now as a tidbit of intriguing data, to comment further on some of the other aspects of Atlantean culture we hinted at in previous sessions.
The manufacture of “spun” crystalline material that had the properties of creating, storing and transmitting energy was perfected by Atlantean scientists. Common materials from Earth were subjected to electromagnetic forces to facilitate the crystallization of these minerals into implements of various sizes and intensities. The catalyst in this manufacturing process was an element as yet undiscovered by our modern researchers. It is an unknown element that exists extra-dimensionally. When the Fourth-Dimensional Shift is completed, our scientists using their Inner Senses, will discover this element within the common sand and soil of our planet.
These crystals were grown to lengths of one or two inches to great heights of 50 and one hundred feet. The large crystals were often ten or more feet in diameter. They were a dark ashen color, almost black, with the threads of the crystal composition visible within.
We have spoken in our Blog Series about the similarities in Lessons faced by the Atlantean and by the modern developed nations. The use of Power; the manifestation of Spirit, spirituality within the culture; the ethical use of technology.
Our modern civilization and our mystery civilization of Atlantis are engaged in the learning of similar Lessons, for both collectives of humans are of the same Entity of consciousness. In this way, we and the other members of our nation, as well as others in their developed nations on our Earth at this time, have the opportunity to indeed LEARN all these valuable Lessons, to the degree that the cataclysmic effects of our negative thoughts do not result in a global thermonuclear war – as I have warned about in our new Blog writings – or a tragic FALL of the Atlantean empire through earth changes – calamities brought on by these same negative thoughts within our “past” incarnations.
It all happens at once. Each change of thought, emotion, and behavior toward the positive manifestation is reflected in ALL of our reincarnational existences, including those within the Mystery Civilizations. As you can see, I am being rather vague. I am not allowed to interfere with the learning of our primary Lessons. We will either learn our Lessons individually and as a group or we will not. We decide.
The past is just as fluid as the future. Anything can happen in the past just as anything can happen in the future, in our terms. It is easier for us to accept the future is more open to change than our past, for we are hypnotized by our consensus reality. However, if we would step out for just a moment, of our obsessively-created consensus reality, as I suggested, we would naturally begin to create independently.
Now to relate this to matters of Atlantis and its “fall.” Our civilization, the American empire shall we say, exists, grows, survives simultaneously with the “preceding” empire occupied by our Native American tribes, as well as countless physical and probable manifestations of civilizations that occurred and are to occur on our world. All manifestations of these civilizations exist at once. The past, the present, and the future civilizations exist now, in this moment.
Let me add that questions of locals and sites of ancient civilizations need not have a bearing on these discussions. For not only is time simply a convenience for us in 3D Reality, but space is also. Again, we decide as a collective of human creators, where, when, and how we will create our individual lives, in what timeframes, and in what groupings or civilizations. We decide as a collective where our civilization of Atlantis will develop and has developed as well as the particulars of every aspect of the society.
Now: it is well known by researchers that the Christian principles, imagery, and so on, were borrowed from preceding spiritual practices, including, if course, the GA religion. Obviously, the founding priests heavily elaborated on the original Christian ethics established by the Energy Body known as Christ. Before, I have reminded that the fundamental tenet of The Christ was all-important Love concept. That was it. It was a simple pronouncement; that with Love of self, of our colleagues in the world, a successful life could be experienced.
Now the priests ignored the original statements of The Christ and other founding energies, of the importance of the “multiple lives” concept. They rejected this foundational principle in favor of an “everlasting life” that the devotee was to experience upon their transition after having lived “a life without sin,” or at least a life that included atonement for sins committed.
The creative priests did not have to look far for the patriarchal elements to add to their model christian practice. The warring tribes that were inculcated into the GA culture brought with them several different pantheons based on vengeful patriarchal gods. These warring tribes were on missions from their territories to conquer the people and to obtain land. They were on the offensive, then, while GA, for the most part, merely attempted to defend herself against encroachment by the aggressive warrior tribes.
Now I would ask you Dorian, what would be the “result” of your directing an intense stream of emotional energy – of Love let us say – at this Atlantean life? Would you have an effect on the personality living this life? Let us assume for the moment that, yes you would have a subtle effect upon this life. Within the Gestalt of Consciousness that you participate in with all of your Reincarnational Existences, your thoughts may be intercepted by your Atlantean self. Then, also subtly perhaps, you might notice a change in behavior in this other life. Perhaps this other life is now musing upon the concept of Loving Understanding. Let us state here that, prior to the reception of this Loving thought complex, your Atlantean self was experiencing anger, perhaps hatred. Do you see how your etheric message from the future may assist a past existence in achieving a more positive state of consciousness?
Given this explanation, do you see how our current behaviors pave the way for altered realities within all of our Reincarnational Existences? cumulatively, you might say that our current behaviors have such an influence on the “future,” in our terms, manifestation of the Atlantean Civilization, that we could very well assist in redirecting the civilization from its catastrophic trajectory of development.
Now you change the past from the current moment. We do this naturally, subconsciously. We create BOTH past and future from within this spacious moment. Do you see how collectively, if the millions of us experiencing this current time-frame as well as the Atlantean existences, were to change our attitudes “all at once,” that the mythological outcomes of Atlantis might become positive rather than negative historically. If this were to occur, we might see a wholesale alteration in the depiction of this “myth” in our books and other media. As a collective, we would be recreating a more positive manifestation of Atlantean Civilization, just as we perhaps may be influencing our current civilization in positive ways.
Question: Regarding your explanation of Atlantis as being as much in our future as our past. Do you mean that it is largely a state of consciousness rather than , a particular place and time, in linear terms? – Dorian
A STATE OF CONSCIOUSNESS
Yes Dorian. We have discussed Atlantis. Let me explain. From the perspective of your greater multidimensional being.Dorian EVERYTHING is ultimately a state of consciousness. All Reality Constructs that compose our individual and collective realities are composed of Consciousness Units that are essentially thoughts, ideas, beliefs, emotions etc. “solidified,” in a sense, to create our world. So certainly, all of our created reality is a state of consciousness, a state of shared telepathic reality.
You cooperate with the Consciousness Units that compose not only your physical body but also do you cooperate with the Consciousness Units that compose the “stuff” that composes all that is NOT you. Do you see? The Telepathic Network is the fertile ground upon which we plant our seeds into their respective constructs.
Also let me say, that as a multidimensional being, one who lives many lives simultaneously, including some lives within the Mystery Civilizations, you are now in this moment contributing in very noticeable ways to the lives you are living everywhere. This is a delicate point I think. Let me go further.
Can you forget for just a moment here your infatuation with linear time and our camouflage reality? If you are able to do this, you will see the truth. You are Dorian, for example, a human living a life within the Mystery Civilization you know as Atlantis. You may prove this to yourself by using your Inner Senses to tune-in to this other life. Let us say that you have done so and you are now getting glimpses – bleed throughs – into this Simultaneous Life in Atlantis. You are experiencing the bleedthrough through the spacious moment – your current Moment Point.
In other words: yes you are a slave to consumerism and the agenda of the Negative Entities, but YOU ARE ENSLAVING YOURSELF. The responsibility for your choices resides with you personally. It does not do to blame our society or some distant negative figure: “The devil made me do it.” You are responsible.
In other words: yes we are slaves to consumerism and the agenda of the Negative Entities, but YOU ARE ENSLAVING YOURSELF. The responsibility for our choices resides with us personally. It does not do to blame our society or some distant negative figure: “The devil made me do it.” We are responsible.
The Annunaki may be thoughts of as the Gestalt of Consciousness that had the most influences on the Earth races with regards to the emotion of greed. This group is certainly not, strictly speaking, a Mystery Civilization, however the influence of these negative beings has been quite pronounced on all of Earth’s civilizations.
They are the inspiration for the negative gods within the religions of humanity, for example. There have been gods and goddesses representing the human virtues. These are in large part inspired by Beings of Light, Angels, and what have you. The gods and goddesses of darkness, of revenge, of hate and fear are always created from the idea constructs, images, and emotional content generated by the Annunaki energy gestalt.
As I said, this is not technically a Mystery Civilization we are describing. Yet this does demonstrate the reality of evolutionary consciousness – of All That Is. We are reminded that the path of development much more resembles a continuum than a staged series of phenomena with discrete nameable societies existing within separate time-frames.
The Negative Entities have informed humanity forever, in our terms. They exist currently, in this moment, as probable evolutionary paths for the Soul Self. We are a physical being, yet we also inhabit the non-physical world. We are in contact with Entities of all types. These Annunaki influences, then, are quite pronounced in our collective consciousness currently. The manifestation, of collective negative realities REQUIRES the direction and energetic support of this Gestalt of Consciousness. Through our free will choice, as we live our life in the modern world, we ally with different Entities. If you ally with the Negative entities through entertaining negative thoughts, images, and emotions within your psyche, you endorse and strengthen the Negative Entities.
Specifically here: if you accept the information stream of greed, of ruthlessness, of murderous intent, into your mental sphere, you are assisting the Annunaki in their agenda of fear, anger, domination, and despair.
With regards to the claim that these Negative Entities are enslaving mankind, I must concur. I have stated before that the modern human is a slave to consumerism, to the buying of shiny objects. The activities of the Annunaki are feeding this desire to consume. Yet this group is merely another Gestalt of Consciousness that exists for us in our mental sphere.. We could just as easily CHANGE OUR PATTERN and choose to ally our Reality Creation energies with Beings of Light.
Are we enslaved by the Annunaki? There is an author who says we were enslaved from the beginning. Is the Annunaki at it again?
Negative Entities
Certainly these beings exist within their own dimension of experiencing. These are the Negative Entities we speak of in our Blog work. This particular expression within physical reality, the Annunaki, was thought of as extraterrestrial in origin – “from another planet,” as we say – and indeed this was their genesis originally. Yet we well know that ALL OF US, all of the Earth beings, have come from other systems originally.
Our Earth is quite young compared to other planets and other environments that hold upon them the living organisms. These Negative entities, the Annunaki, are quite ancient.
Now this collective was not completely embodied within physical reality as we think of it. Their consciousness did not seek out complete expression within human form. The main expression was one of concerted influence upon the mental functioning of the residents of Earth in order to control “productivity.”
Over the generations, then, we have the influence of this Negative Entity exerting control over humanity through the Negative Emotions. The negative Entities, remember, thrive on the emotional states of fear, anger, anxiety, greed, ruthlessness. These negative Idea constructs – composed of Consciousness Units, again I remind – coalesce on the subtle levels where they act as blueprints for the fabrication of negative Reality Constructs.
Our star system is hidden from view by other systems. I commented on this in my Blog Series on Soul Evolution. Our North American tribes originated from this star system. Inter-dimensional travel is instantaneous, in that one moment, the subject is existing on their home planet and in the next, they are living their life upon Earth, many light years from home, in our terms. To extend this description somewhat: the subject here would not be surprised or traumatized by this event. The subject, as an Etheric Being, would know quite well what was instore for them. They would know that they were to travel to Earth as an envoy of the sacred. All That Is, to assist in the creation of civilization.
Some of these beings traveled to the Third dimension of earth to serve as members of the Spiritual Hierarchy. This group serves humanity as the intermediaries between the physical and non-physical worlds. They are the beings that have been personalized by humanity to act as various gods, goddesses, and sacred beings.
These sacred beings, then, served as the Gestalts of Consciousness – the energy blueprints – for the creation of the spiritual world of the Native American tribes and indeed for many of the tribes of the South American continent. This simply means that the origin myths of the aboriginal tribes are not “imagined” – they are not the product of the ingestion of herbs and other potent screments, though these have certainly assisted the psychic voyagers within these tribes in identifying and cataloguing the divine spirits – they are as real as any other perceived/created Reality Construct we care to name.
What is money in our system? Let us attempt a general definition for our program. Money is the currency that we trade for the materials needs of living. For the most part, we must earn the money in some way, through employment in an occupation, for example. Naturally I am aware in some way benefited by the work or efforts of others, without the need for employment themselves. There are myriad possibilities here. Money is obtained through countless means. Money acts as a medium of exchange, as we say.
Question: Anything concerning the Anizasi of the American South West and the origins of North American tribes…
Inter-dimensional Beings
This is an excellent question. Let me answer this question in a general way without naming names, as in specific tribes, for the list of civilizations that preceded the North American tribes would fill this Blog volume.
I am speaking of the probable manifestation of large human groups, here. This is how our consensus realities are crafted: through the selection of Reality Constructs from the limitless field of probable constructs by the people of a given area. The reality constructs are given life by individuals. The civilization is enlivened by large groups of individuals.
ANIZASI
Now let us talk about origins. The North American tribes are and were the descendants of inter-dimensional beings from beyond the solar system that includes Earth. The way this occurs is this: as in all manifestations of the individual human form upon Earth, the Soul Self of particular Entities of consciousness associated with All That Is, send out a seed to grow within the baby, the human baby. It is not productive to ask which came first, the human baby or the transmission of the spark of All That Is into the consciousness of the baby. Everything exists at once. Linear time is an Illusion. However, let me give you some background information on this process of birthing a civilization.
The Anizasi are noted for their wonderworking. They are the magic ancestors. In this case, the activities of these proto-scientists have been documented and are now part of the “historical” record. Yet I am not exaggerating when I tell you that EVERY group, every civilization from our perceived past, exists simultaneously with its magic ancestors manifesting at the same time. The magic ancestors exist in an adjacent dimension. This dimension is connected to the Third Dimension through portals of communication some of us call chakras. These doorways into other dimensions may be accessed by the interested explorer of non-physical reality through techniques perfected by magicians, shamans, witches and healers over the ages.
There is a reason we are interested in the Anizasi people. We are connected to these people and we are attempting to “find our way back home.” Home for us then would be a star system that is as yet unidentified by our scientists. This planetary system is quite similar to the solar system in which our Earth resides. An assortment of planetary bodies revolves around a nurturing star. Life of many forms exists upon these planets. I have referred to these other systems as simply “dimensions” to assist the reader in finding the necessary wherewithal to “visit” these domains in their meditations. I have defined extraterrestrial as extra-dimensional, for this is a truer assessment. We will not need a spaceship to visit these other systems, only our creative consciousness.
The myths of the North America tribes are quite often literal descriptions of what took place in their inception. The Star People figure large in these descriptions of tribal origins. These narratives describe events that occurred on the inner world of the unconscious – the Underworld. Thus you have the predominance of essential symbols of great power. Now the birth of civilizations entails a mass inception of a great many sparks of Soul into bodies of human beings – babies and otherwise.
The question of what existed before this mass inception can be answered quite simply: previous civilizations existed before this mass inception. In the same way, a multitude of after-occurring civilizations simultaneously before this mass inception. To illustrate: the current residents of North America, including the Native Peoples, the Americans, the Canadians and the Latin Americans, are the current manifestation of these Mystery civilizations. All of these civilizations exist simultaneously, outside of time as we perceive it.
I sense Dorian that you require some details of confirmation and validation. I will attempt to provide these elements for you. In all of the cultures of our world, there are noted within their ancient histories, the activities of the Magic Ancestors. To the modern scientist including the anthropologist and others, these stories are conceived as myths: symbolic narratives having no REAL, basis in physical reality. In my new Blog Series I have made the statement that everything conceived by consciousness has a very real reality, including these so-called myths. Consciousness, in the form of ideas, images, emotion-powered concepts, creates itself in physical form or in dimensions other than the physical.
There is much talk in our media about getting in touch with past lives. Dear Blog Reader, we are already in touch with our past lives. They inform each and every moment of our current existence. These past lives include lives lived within what we are calling the Mystery Civilizations, as well as other of our Simultaneous Existences that are ongoing throughout our past, Our present, and our future.
Not only are we asking you to accept this data as true within our Personal Reality, we are also suggesting to you that we may, with just minimal effort on our part, explore OUR contribution to some or all of the Mystery Civilizations. For it is our contention that we have spent several lifetimes within these unknown worlds. It was there that we learned firsthand the secrets of the universe. We learned, for example, that we do indeed create our own reality: that we have the creative energies of the Logos at our disposal, in other words.
Through these other lives, we are again-and-again reacquainted with our own power, in that we are always born with the amnesia that prevents us from remembering our other lives. Then, as we live the life of a seeker of knowledge, let us say, we “remember” these Lessons learned in our Simultaneous Existences. You may be in a familiar place here and now as you read these words. You may be remembering this Ancient Wisdom once again in this timeframe. If this is so for you, I suggest you take it with a grain of salt, as we say. From my perspective, this is merely another opportunity for us to seek out the mysteries of our existence and share our findings with others: humbly, you see, with Courage and Loving Understanding.
As do all of our exercises and experiments in this new Blog material, The Healing Regimen begins with the Ritual of Sanctuary. This act of protection and Sanctuary I suggest you perform in the morning as you rise for the day and at regular intervals throughout your waking day.
In the beginning I would also suggest that you use your Intention and perseverance to cut your affiliations – your metaphysical, psychic connections – to any Gestalts of Consciousness that feed to you negative information, such as symptom- creation strategies, dire predictions, negative prognosis information etc. The “voices” of these Energy Forms are the energetic supports onto which you fasten the body of your created reality. So it is very important for you, on your Healing Quest, to heed the voices of ONLY those Energy Bodies that may assist you in bringing balance to your physical, mental and spiritual being. These benign and beneficial energies are easy to recognize. As you attempt to find these “voices,” you may notice that your emotional state is transformed as you “tune-in” to the Loving energies.
I trust you have found something of value in our little Blogs. Certainly we have not explored the subject definitively. However, the complete expression of All That Is can be sensed inwardly as a Holographic Insert. Therefore, I now place this Idea Construct within these words. You may access this message at any time. Use your intent to guide your Inner Senses to the precise location within your mental environment. This construct has ecstatic emotion attached to it. This emotion will intensify as you approach it. You will know you have made contact when your emotional state becomes transformed to the positive. This is awakening, Dear Blog Reader. Good Luck with your studies.
Hypothesis: By embodying the opposite of the inflated ego/intellect humility is achieved.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
We have spoken in our Blogs on the value of a concept we call “the humble god or goddess.” The basis here is Love with a capital L. This Love is pervasive: for oneself, for others, also. Love predominates in all of our interactions.
Yet in this description lies an inherent dichotomy, for the humble human is also charismatic. The lover of humanity is a beacon to others. It is quite attractive this humility of spirit. To manifest both charisma and humility is the mark of the self-realized, the enlightened, the awakened ones.
No polarizing means embodying the opposite of the identified emotional state. You intentionally live the opposite of, for example, the egotistical state. The opposite might be described as a state of humility. Thus, you would visualize yourself as the humble one, and all that it might entail. Imagine how that would feel. Imagine your specific behaviors as the humble one and then embody them. Act them out in your waking reality.
During this experiment it may dawn on you that you are also polarizing your state of humility. The opposite of a state of humble awareness you might call charisma. In this way, you are holding together the poles of human emotion. Within the two extremes there exists a broad field of emotional experiencing for the awakening human.
Finally we are experiencing the visionary perspective…
We are awakening at this time. As we sharpen our Inner Senses and remember what we are calling the Ancient Wisdom, it may begin to occur that we are becoming quite powerful indeed. As we gain control over our Reality Creation energies, and we become a conscious co-creator with All That Is, the ego/intellect naturally becomes elevated at times, such that we may begin to feel superior to those around us. This emotional state we might call egotistical.
The following experiment is simply a focused application of our very basic technique of transforming the negative emotions into their divine opposites. Here we are assuming that some progress has been made in our visionary experiencing. We are getting brief glimpses of what we may call the Divine. This success may have come after many, many attempts to break through this veil that separates us from our greater consciousness expression. Naturally we would feel satisfaction. Finally we are seeing the value in these arcane practices. At last we are introduced to our guidance. Finally we are experiencing the visionary perspective, at least, perhaps, for a few moments in our waking day.
Now we have stated that after the preliminary steps are taken by the student, there is a momentum that is achieved, such that your results multiply in rapid fashion. What is occurring for you here is the natural habitual creation of the visionary state. Though your ritual practices of these techniques, you have made the visionary state habitual, so that you need only practice your techniques briefly before you encounter substantial results. You are mastering the work.
There is the accompanying element of ecstasy in these studies that keeps you moving forward. Indeed, you are induced to continue with your contact and communications with the Divine until a final enlightening episode that is charged with ecstatic emotions occurs.
Yet, what occurs when you are finished with your experiments for the day and you are at your job, or out in the field in your mundane existences? There may be a tendency to become quite “full of yourself” as the ego/intellect takes credit for these positive rewards. Within all spiritual practices the shrewd discerning student may identify those practitioners that have successfully achieved a spiritual awakening, yet have lost their gratitude and humility along the way. To avoid this pitfall on the path of awakening, we offer the following experiment.
The churches and the religious will become more democratic…
We have systematically over the generations given away our creative powers to those in perceived authority. Of these authorities the religious authority is perhaps the most powerful. It is not uncommon, for example, on our Sunday observance, for millions of humans to engaging in the obedience to religious authority. See what occurs in our communities in the Christian nations during our religious holidays. Whole peoples are seen enacting rituals of the holidays, celebrating the life of The Christ.
Now we’re here does the authority lie? Primarily, as the intermediary between humanity and the Divine, it is with the priest first, and then the members of the church hierarchy. The officials are entrusted with the powers of creation given by the practitioners.
Now we have spoken elsewhere of the necessity in this time of awakening, to think these power exchanges that the individual has with the intermediaries of the Divine. As this occurs, and many of us begin to take back power from religious figures, the churches and the religions will become more democratic. They will become humanized. The rituals will be transformed into more truthful demonstrations of the manifestation process.
All That Is represents in physical reality, the collective mentalities and energies of all forms on Earth and including the very Earth itself. We have stated before that there is no beginning nor any ending to our Universe. There is only the present moment of creation in which All creates All That Is.
We live under a necessary assumption of linear time and cause-and-effect, and so we take it for granted that everything has a beginning and ending. This assumption, however, when brought to an attempted understanding of spiritual concerns, can lead to mis-perceptions and confusion. We encourage the Blog Reader to momentarily abandon these preconceived notions and root assumptions as we attempt to further illustrate the truth of the matter. For when we can, even for the moment, release our hold on physical reality, and experience the timeless moment of the Now, we automatically gain a more truthful perspective of our reality.
When we let go, when we go with the flow of creation in the moment, we are centered within All That Is and we are participating as a co-creator with the Loving force. As many of us at the same moment in linear time, for example, conduct this experiment, we as a collective of researchers create a sub-group from all of humanity, whose focus in those moments is the recreation of Love with a capital L.
As we, perhaps at the same time each day conduct our investigations, a tendency is created within the greater collective of which our sub-group is a part, to defer to the positive Loving manifestation, rather than the mundane or the negative manifestations. This is the resonance phenomenon in action, if we care to identify it. This process of Loving our Earth through this multitude of sub-groups composed of visionaries, will be the critical factor in The Shift we are experiencing.
The “strength in numbers” phenomenon is demonstrated here as well. The Positive Manifestation is reaching the tipping point of inevitability, you see. I sense that you are receiving the messages I am attempting to convey.
It is often only on the deathbed that the disbeliever finds how very wrong they were…
In our Blog Thought Reality we gave the reader a review of this current material. In that Discussion we spoke of the “folly” of believing in the death of God. Some can sense this thought-form that was entertained by great numbers of us. You in the West were looking for something more, something less religious, something more easily grasped, I suppose.
The irony in this statement – God is Dead – is that it is often only on the deathbed that the disbeliever finds how very wrong they were. The ego/intellect dissolves abruptly during the Transition revealing only the Soul’s perspective. This perspective sees no duality with relation to the Divine. The Soul knows that it IS eternal, it is NOT separate, it IS both a part of and the complete whole of All That Is.
It is unfortunate that many, perhaps out of fear of being perceived as “weak” or perhaps “mentally challenged,” do not go on that inner journey. To these humans it is a surprise that they ARE God, they ARE eternal, they are NOT dying, but merely transforming their energy into something else.
This personalization process serves a purpose for the individual explorer…
This assemblage of masters, the Spiritual Hierarchy, do have names and have been identified by visionaries throughout our history. This is the personalization that takes place naturally in the human participation in divine perception. However, for our purposes, we will not go into the endless lists of names given to the Light Bodies. We are keeping it simple here, and direct to our own experiments for the names of these beings.
Thus, if we were to attempt contact with the divine beings, and we were sincere and focused, we would quite probably discover our own pantheon of gods and goddesses. We might obtain names for the divine beings that are unlike any others obtained by spiritual investigators in our perceived past. Yet I am certain that if we were to compare the Inner Senses assessments of the beings with descriptions from, let us say, our Christian bible, or the Koran, or the Buddhist texts, we would find that, though the names differ, the Light Bodies are indeed the same.
Throughout all investigations into their origins by human explorers. The personalization process serves a purpose for the individual explorer of the personal reality. It gives them “something to work with,” as they conduct their experiments: i.e. the ritual search for the Divine.
Our world is created in this current moment by spiritual beings of great power…
Let us describe the Hierarchy for you as an example of Gestalt of Consciousness, the etheric basis of the physical world. That is to say, every physical construct, every atom, molecule of air, every tree, human or insect has its origination in the etheric – the non physical world. If you are familiar with my new Blog works, you well know that I attribute every systems of reality such as our medical model, as having emerged from these complex etheric structure of propensity.
To us, as human existing within your specific coordinates of time and space – our linear time continuum – it appears that, for example, the world religions “grew” out of their separate foundational events. And if we are religiously- minded, that God was the literal creator of our Earth, most certainly, as well as the chief propagator and inspiration for the growth of these movements. This is how it looks inside the linear time illusion, with the basic assumption of cause-and-effect.
Consider now, however, the truth of the matter. If you are with us here on the spontaneous and simultaneous nature of Earthly existence, you may be able now to grasp this assertion of mine with your intuitive understanding, rather than the logical intellect.
Our world is created in this current moment by spiritual beings of great power. For our purposes, we refer to the creators as the Spiritual Hierarchy, yet we too, as a Reality Creator, have our place in this timeless moment of creation. We could even quite correctly assume that we are this Spiritual HIerarchy of world creators in the physical world, as they, as Bodies of Light, represent our interests in the etheric world.
Yes, you are you, Dear Blog Reader, as you read the words on this page or hear the spoken narrative, even as we are these evolved masters of creation, the members of the Spiritual Hierarchy. Previously we have noted that, as a Blog reader of my works, you ally with the Entity. You give the Entity energy. In a similar way, the masters of the Spiritual Hierarchy are informed, energized, and enlightened by your input, just as we may become so through the exchange of energies. In reading these works, in experiencing the Holographic Inserts I am transmitting to your consciousness, in opening yourself up to these benevolent communication streams, you are changed.
Again, fears of being drawn into an unwanted cultish relationship, may serve to repel the Holographic Inserts. However, if you are focused on yours studies, it is possible to transform it into Courage, then move on with your investigations.
You are spirit, my friend. You are composed of spiritual material…
This next section may contain material unsuitable for my older Blog Readers. These subjects were not discussed in earlier Blog works. We are having this discussion now, for I see that these issues have been neglected in studies of my Blog works, on our internet, in books and other media.
Now: we are Spirit, my friend; we are composed of spiritual material. Whether we wish to use our metaphor of the atomic structure of Reality Constructs, or my metaphor of the Consciousness Units, at the “beginning” of our self-created reality, including our body, is Spirit. We are an etheric being first and foremost, then.
I do realize that some of us may not wish to focus on this aspect, though we may grudgingly admit our spiritual basis. We may have a fear of being carried away on these far out theories, to a place where we may be, shall we say, coerced into taking on a particular set of beliefs, as in the missionary efforts of the world religions. I assure you that is not my intention here. In actuality, I encourage those of our Blog Readers who practice the tenets of the various religious faiths, to simply use our information that we offer as suggestions, clarifications, and so on.
We are now experiencing bleed-throughs to our other existences…
We are visionary. The vision we will perceive is wholly dependent upon our personal experiences, our thoughts, the images we have within our consciousness at any one time. It is a very personal thing, then, this vision. It is in truth an intimate portrayal of our momentary spiritual awakening.
We have said that the vision is often quite brief: a fraction of a second, usually. However, because these events exist outside of time for the most part, we may return to these visionary experiences and witness them in their full sustained glory. You do this in the Trance state or the meditative state, of course, in a ritual fashion. Using our Intent we revisit the visionary glimpse and we focus upon the various aspects of the event.
For example: suppose you are going about your business in your waking existence, and you quite suddenly have a powerful, yet brief epiphany, as we call it. Let us say that previously you were perplexed about the actions and hurtful behaviors of a loved-one. Now suppose that this loved-one “acted out of character,” and was intentionally cruel to you. You have been wondering why for many days or weeks. Then it occurs to you: because you are a researcher of your personal reality, and because you are now experiencing bleed-throughs to your other existences, you are finding correlations between the Issues and Lessons of your current existences and those Lessons you are learning in other existences, in your perceived past, let us say.
Now this will seem outrageous to those of us who are not doing the work in these Blogs of mine. Please bear with me…
The subtext of the reincarnational drama: the hidden meaning , in other words..
Suppose that, because you have found a similarity of behavior in a loved one from this past existence and the behavior of your current loved one, you are therefore receiving more information – background information, quite literally – concerning your current existence and the current problematic loved one. This we also call the subtext, as in the subtext of the reincarnational drama: the hidden meaning, in other words.
With this new information a threshold of understanding is reached subconsciously. Suppose you have a brief glimpse into your past-life and witness the counterpart to your current loved one experiencing harm at your hand. This could indeed be violent harm directed at this loved one from another life, by you in your past-life body, your Simultaneous Life.
Now in your current existence you are using an entirely different body than in the past and the human that you abused in the past-life is inhabiting the body of the loved one that has been intentionally cruel to you for no apparent reason. Yet now, after the epiphany, the moment of increased understanding, you have an apparent “cause” of the intentionally cruel behavior. This may be “pay back,” in a sense, in response to a relatively innocuous perceived slight experienced by the loved one in question. The loved one is responding to a much greater slight received AT YOUR HAND in the past-life.
The epiphany is quite productive and healing, here, if you take the time to meditate on it. It may allow you to take this behavior with a grain of salt, as we say. Yes, they are overreacting currently. However, in the past-life experience. YOU were the perpetrator of much greater abuse on this loved one. It is an opportunity, therefore, to not react with anger and fear but with Loving Understanding and Courage, having seen the bigger picture.
Gradually you gain some control over these bleed throughs…
You may at this time be sensing bleed-throughs from some of these lives in which you are experiencing negative emotional states. I have discussed this briefly in my Blogs of decades ago. The bleed-throughs begin spontaneously without any foreshadowing. The emotional materials, at first, is difficult to assess. One moment you may be in quite good spirits, and the next moment, though nothing has changed in your current existence, you are in quite low spirits. Your current mental environment has been contaminated by the past-life negative emotions.
It would be advantageous at these times to bring in your Sanctuary and protect your consciousness from further encroachment. Over time, using Sanctuary as a protective mechanism, the spontaneous connections to the negative past lives occur less often. Gradually you gain some control over these bleedthroughs, so that you can experience them on your terms.
For example: this type of information from your other lives may be necessary for your continued growth. Facing the negative aspects of your greater self may be a part of your awakening experience. Exploring these past-life sources of current negative experiencing may help you to achieve control in other areas of your life.
In this little essay we shall explore the concept of the human embodying certain perspectives, and so creating their realities through these blueprints, or Gestaltsof Consciousness. Now you literally have at your disposal access to unlimited perspectives or Gestalt of Consciousness, that you may embody, ally with, and proceed to create our world in tandem, you might say, with another consciousness manifestation. These templates of creation are limitless, for they include the varied aspects of personality embodied by humans over the millennia. These ways of behaving, of feeling, of thinking, and imagination exist within your collective consciousness as a reservoir of potential Reality Creation energy to which you may turn in your many existences.
Thus, for example, you might be a human engaged in creating a life for yourself in your ancient Egyptian era, perhaps as a slave. Many of us have done and currently doing just that. Can you imagine how fantastically different is the self-created existence of our Egyptian friend we are discussing, to the life you-the-Blog-Reader are currently creating for yourself? Utterly and completely different, I”m certain you would agree. For the ancient one is working from the perspective of a slave living in an ancient culture within a totally different confluence of influences – the social, religious, and others – than you, Dear Blog Reader. This human is observing through their unique vision, their world: the Personal Reality Field.
Let us take this further on the assumption that what I am telling you here is quiet true: that we are all living lives as slaves in some of our Reincarnational Existences, even though we may be currently reading this Blog through the eyes of a typical modern human, one who has access to all of the modern conveniences, one who is relatively free, and so on.
Some of my Blog readers may now be seeing where I am taking this discussion. Let me continue. All That IS is the creative medium in which consciousness, through physical form, expresses itself. These expressions include the physical bodies and existences of all our Simultaneous Lives.ALL OF EXISTENCE occurs simultaneously, in the present moment – the spacious moment, as we also call it.
Do you see how it is possible for you to embody this timeless perspective here and now, allowing your current experiencing consciousness to tune-in to the other life lived as perhaps an Egyptian slave? You are already doing so, however you are probably not yet proficient in the multitasking necessary to retain the memories of your other lives. Practice is necessary here. Practice until you can remember.
All values are fulfilled instantaneously in the spacious moment of creation…
We will now add to the blog material we have covered projections. In this metaphor we maintain that All That Is – which includes everything in our created reality including you, Dear Blog Reader – projects itself, its essence, if you will, into the Third Dimension. What results in this projection are Reality Constructs of all types. In a way, as you project your Personal Reality Field into the 3D Reality of Earth from within, you are responding to All That Is as it seeks Value Fulfillment in the creation of, again, all types of Reality Constructs. It all happens at once. All values are fulfilled instantaneously in the spacious moment of creation.
So from the this perspective it has many advantages for the student. For example: you may see the end results of any proposed Reality Creation agenda you might be considering. In the divine perspective of All That Is, there is no lag-time in the manifestation of realities, as you experience it.
This divine perspective can be yours if you wish. By embodying the Divine you gain a perspective that lies outside of linear time in the eternal moment. You needn’t wait for any proposed agenda to be implemented and experienced over days, weeks, or months, let us say. You would know instantly the outcomes of your proposed “projects” for Reality Creation.
The personal Reality of the visionary of old may shed light on this discussion. Now the demeanor of the visionary was one of complete absorption with the forces of nature. However, this was not a pass-time activity. This immersion in the in the natural elements – to the degree that the participant would experience their existence as an integral part of the world – was their normal waking experience.
We might say that the visionary was attending to spiritual matters on a moment-to-moment basis. They were, quite literally, in constant contact with their Guides, the Energy Personality and others, as well as the many Gestalts of Consciousness that represent the energetic supports of our systems on Earth. There are indeed Nature Spirits, for example, that may be contacted and with whom relationships may be cultivated by human beings. ALL of our Earthly reality is supported by spirit in various stages of complexity.
The visionary, then, was quite often enthralled with the experiencing of visions of various types, transmitted from their “pantheon” of sacred energy bodies into their opened or awakened consciousness.
All values are fulfilled instantaneously in the spacious moment of creation…
We will now add to the Blog material what we have covered on projections. In this metaphor we maintain that All That Is – which includes everything in our created reality including you, Dear Blog Reader – projects itself, its essence, if you will, into the Third Dimension. What results in this projection are Reality Constructs of all types. In a way, as we project Personal Reality Field into the 3D Reality of Earth from within, we are responding to All That Is as it seeks Value Fulfillment in the creation of, again, all types of Reality Constructs. It all happens at once. All values are fulfilled instantaneously in the spacious moment of creation.
So from the this perspective it has many advantages for the student. For example: you may see the end results of any proposed Reality Creation agenda you might be considering. In the divine perspective of All That Is, there is no lag-time in the manifestation of realities, as we experience it.
This divine perspective can be yours if you wish. By embodying the Divine you gain a perspective that lies outside of linear time in the eternal moment. You needn’t wait for any proposed agenda to be implemented and experienced over days, weeks, or months, let us say. You would know instantly the outcomes of your proposed “projects” for reality Creation.
There is certainly as much aggression and “thrust” within the feminine component…
Now our Earth is an entity unto herself. We call our world the Mother Earth, ascribing to this planet the feminine, nurturing qualities of life. However, there is also the counterpart to the feminine inherent in each atom of our physical existence. I have described to you before how this interplay of electromagnetic energies – the perceived opposites – servers to “light and power” our Reality Constructs. And so in our descriptions of the creation phenomenon, particularly with regards to the ascendance of the New World via the 4th-Dimensional Shift, we include and indeed honor the counter energies of manifestation.
For your better understanding, you might say that it is the feminine, nurturing, generative aspects of All That Is that serve to energize and support this thrust of physical reality into our system. The interested reader may reference my earlier blogs for discussions of natural aggression to further their understanding here of this phenomenon.
Still let us present our disclaimer, as must: there is certainly as much aggression and “thrust” within the feminine component of manifestation as in the so-called masculine. We are attempting to offer you simple descriptions of these deep issues so that you may grasp the meaning of the divine construct – Reality Creation.
Thus, in this birthing of the New World, all of us are playing our part. We are created from consciousness through the same process of manifestation as any other Reality Construct. If it helps, you could think of your Personal Reality Field as a reflection of your Inner Self, your Soul Self. The entire Universe, including our Mother Earth, is a projection from the Inner Self or Logos of All That Is. And so on, and so on, you see, down to the Personal Reality of an atom, for example, as it perceives its theoretical electrons spinning around it. And so on even further still, as far indeed as you would like to take this introspection: infinitely, if you have the patience.
We are allowing the Soul’s perspective to predominate…
In our new Blog Series we have given many words of explanation regarding the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. This transformative period in which we find ourselves, as a species and as a world, comes at the end of a long evolutionary cycle in physical reality. Many hundreds of thousands of years of consciousness manifestation have brought us here to the doorstep of a great awakening for humanity. We call it “consciousness becoming aware of itself, ultimately, to the nth degree.” Evolutionary Consciousness, or All That Is, has reached a culmination in the reality of the Third Dimension.
For practical purposes, for You-The-Reader, this Shift is having great effects on our Personal Reality as we speak. Undoubtedly we are “in our issues” with regards to the learning of our individual Lessons. So you do indeed know what I am speaking of here with The Shift, in so far as your personal relationship to it is concerned.
Now here is where our ego/intellect most probably will defend itself with “reasons” and “proofs” that we are different from the rest. We have no Lessons to learn. We are doing quite well and do not need personal critiques from someone who doesn’t even know us, from a discarnate being, no less. This we call intellectualization and denial in our Blogs. It is a normal response to these perceived allegations we proffer to the reader on a continuing basis.
However, if you continue to read the Blogs, you ARE looking for something of value, even as you somewhat deny the worth of these messages. So gradually you are making your way at your own pace, Dear Blog Reader. You are opening up slowly, on your own schedule. You are allowing the Soul’s perspective to predominate in your Reality Creation activities rather than the perspective of the ego/intellect.
Several years ago we predicted that soon great numbers of us would be empowered to use the multitasking “feature” of our awakening consciousness. We stated that it would be commonplace for us, in the middle of a conversation with our peers or family members, to pause and receive incoming information from our Higher Self. We would then resume our conversation and possibly incorporate the material we received from our Higher Self into our narrative. If this is the case with you, Dear Blog Reader, please take just a few seconds to pause in our reading, and open up to messages from your Higher Self. We are simply anticipating a response, here. Do not try to figure it out. Just relax and be open to what you are experiencing.
Please allow me to make my point here about being receptive to your higher centers, while referring to an incident that occurred in Dorian’s backyard. The experience of attempting to free the deer from her back yard may serve as an example of how NOT to interact with Mother Nature of All That Is.
White Tailed Deer Fawn in Meadow
Dorian panicked when she saw a trapped deer run into the deer fence several times in our back yard. She feared that the animal would possibly kill itself in the panic of attempting to escape. Dorian spontaneously called out in anger, further frightening the deer and sending it into a panic of escape.
Let us imagine a different intervention, then, for this example. Suppose that Dorian had projected Loving Understanding at the animal, assuring his solidarity with the animal kingdom and with all of Nature. If he/she were to have assumed a placid neutral demeanor and coaxed the animal toward the opened gate by which it had entered, the deer may have not panicked so dramatically and scaled the fence to escape.
As it was, the deer escaped uninjured. It could have been much worse, however, with Dorian experiencing a tragedy in which she participated. Now here, the proof is in the pudding, to coin a phrase. In the heat of the moment, when anger is making itself known, when frustration, fear and anxiety threaten to overwhelm your Reality Creation, that is precisely when you intervene with your thoughts of composure, Loving Understanding, Courage, and so on.
Here you already know how to create anger and act upon it. She is an expert, Dorian, as are many of us in physical reality. The trick is to GO BEYOND the old ways of thinking, emoting, and behaving. Indeed, the idea is, after having taken responsibility for the creation of the reality, to do the opposite with regards to thinking, emoting, behaving. It all occurs in the moment, Dear Blog Reader. In the heat of the moment is when we learn these valuable Lessons.
The small awakenings foreshadows the full awakening experience...
Currently the episodes are necessarily brief – fractions of a second in length – to allow our ego-consciousness to remain focused in the Third Dimension. But we are now awakening, we are now in the midst of The Shift. Our capacities, therefore, for understanding are increasing. Our inner Senses are becoming quite acute. Our skills at turning the negative into the positive are sharpening. For these reasons, our Holographic Inserts will intensify – in so far as sensory data is concerned – and lengthen in linear time.
The visions – perceptions of the visionary – are the HIs experienced in depth. These messages from oneself, from our future selves, from our awakened progressed consciousness, will become for us the common day-to-day experiencing in our current existence. In this way, the small awakenings foreshadow the full awakening experience that awaits us when we are ready.
I often use the phrase in these New Blogs, “from my perspective.” Let me speak a bit about what that might mean. Now please remember, here in our discussions it is perception that causes Reality Creation. The Percepts, as we have defined it in our Blogs, is that aspect of consciousness that simultaneously and instantaneously creates and perceives the Reality Construct. Therefore, can you see that from my perspective I am witness to our greater multidimensional experiencing? This enlarged perspective of mine includes the goings-on within our probable futures.
The mind reels here in contemplation of this perspective. However, if you are with us on this voyage, and you are attending to the exercises and experimentation we present to you, I would suggest that your mind may now be in the beginning stages of a new stability with regards to witnessing the multidimensional nature of the self that is quite commonplace to Light Beings.
That is what it is all about, this shift to 4th Dimensional Awareness. From my perspective, many of us are becoming quite expert at “holding” this state of awareness for extended periods of time. We are on the same wavelength, in a very literal way. We are focused on this same compelling subject of interest. We are all of us witnessing the divine creation of realities moment-to-moment.
Conscious co-creation entails the intentional learning of Lessons. The Lessons of physical existence are not denied nor are they intellectualized. This is also what we call Enlightenment or SoulEvolution.
For each second that we are consciously co-creating a Loving reality, we are also awakening in the spiritual sense; we are awakening to our Higher Self. Now, for each second that we co-create fear and anger we are being controlled by the negative Gestalts of consciousness. Thus we have this simple dynamic that I have described for you before: Loving co-creation is god–building; the re-creation of anxiety, fear, anger and cynicism supports the Negative entities. These Entities are the negative gods of our religious systems.
You see, each of us reacts differently – in a personalized manner – when we encounter the negative emotions. It is true that the emotional states of the human are easily recognizable, broadly speaking, in that an observer could easily surmise what are the emotional states currently of those before them. However, the internal manifestation of the emotional state is colored by characteristics of personality and individual temperament. It is in this arena of the personality consciousness of the individual where the “decision” is made to either meet and transform the emotional state or to recreate it without thoughtful input – subconsciously, you see.
In this realm of perception is where the student gains their findings in the exploratory venture as a Scientist of Consciousness. OUR consciousness is the laboratory here, to continue our quaint little metaphor. Our unswerving crystal-clear focus on the phenomena within our “mind” represents the requisite objective critical thinking aspect of the scientist: the empirical perspective. We are referring in this section the two Blogs from our last series, in which we outlined the path for the Scientist of Consciousness and made our case for the necessity of this approach at this critical time in our history.
HYPOTHESIS: We can reclaim and integrate the cumulative castoff aspects of Soul
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
I trust that you are convinced now that your mission in physical reality is to transform the negative into the positive, after first of course, analyzing the negative manifestation for origins, value, etc. Now when this is done consistently – habitually – there comes a time when the architect of these negative reality constructions become quite known to you. This aspect of your consciousness we refer to as the Negative Persona.
You identify it as a subject in order to study this subject. It remains the ultimate truth of our reality that we are complete and utterly whole, un-fragmented, good, and of sacred value unto oneself. However, let us examine this theorized Negative Persona here in an effort of self-understanding and propose an exercise to identify it completely, and then accept it into the consciousness in a ritualized fashion. This will be an “owning” of the personalized negative aspects of consciousness.
Now, as you wrestle with your Lessons, the theorized Negative Persona is created. In your personal underworld it can gain great power, over time, as the uncomfortable aspects of your personality are noticed by the ego/intellect and then intentionally ignored. The perceived negative is a personal opinion, therefore, and this evolving Negative Persona bears the characteristics of human existence that are thought of as shameful, inappropriate, fearful, and so on.
Each human is different in their respective creations of this aspect of consciousness. And because it is such a personal and intimate portrayal by the individual of everything that is perceived as “wrong” about them, it gains a certain treacherous and even potentially catastrophic potential. It is as though you feel that if this information ever comes to light – revealed to family, friends, colleagues – that you would not be able to bear it. You would be destroyed. You would possibly cease to exist.
This is that mythological “beast within” that seeks acknowledgment by the self, but seldom is granted this acknowledgment. Currently, because great numbers of us are awakening in our time frame, it is necessary for you to “take your medicine,” in a sense, with regards to acknowledging this Negative Persona. All of us are in our Issues at this time. All of us are deep within our Lessons. All of us are being called upon to accept responsibility for our negative selves, so that we will cease projecting our disavowed aspects of self onto others: mates, families, nations, collective of all types.
Your Negative Persona is best recognized in the negative remarks made to you by others concerning your personality and behavior. To be sure, some of these comments may have intrinsic value: they may be quite true, in other words. Your task is to determine the truth in these negative comments and own these comments. Take responsibility here. Then as you assess the negative comments that do not pertain to you, but were perhaps mere projections of fear and doubt from your friends and family, get a sense of this Collective Persona.
How does it feel to confront this aspect of your personality?
Is there a sense of familiarity here, as though you have been aware of this element, but were perhaps afraid to fully face it?
Now simply acknowledge this construct as a very important part of you, the other side of you, in fact. This is to be done with Courage and Loving Understanding as your primary operating perspective.
These words acted as a dramatic script for our example throughout your life…
There are Lessons of a Positive nature also for the Reality Creator. We often speak of the Positive Manifestation as it pertains to TheShift in consciousness for humanity. Our positive input fuels The Shift, quite literally. Now what of the Positive Manifestation within the Personal Reality Field of the individual? An example for our further understanding…
Consider the human engaged in creating prosperity for themselves and their family. Let us say that this group was previously “doing without,” for the most part. They were without the necessities of existence and were suffering Lack. Then it dawned upon the consciousness of our example – a woman – that she was sabotaging her financial growth subconsciously by obeying self-limiting scripts created in her youth. She was told as a child that she was incapable of creating anything of value, for she was a “”natural born loser.” She was told by her parents that she “destroyed everything she touched.”
Now these words acted as a dramatic script for our example throughout her life. Her parents knew what they were talking about, she assumed, and so she created a life of failure to corroborate her parent’s assessment of her. The script became subconscious over time, until now, as an adult, she wonders if she may be cursed. She wonders why her projects seem doomed to fail.
Then the example becomes aware of the momentary thoughts, images, and emotions within her consciousness. She identifies a common thread: “you are a born loser,” and rather than continue to accept that, she challenges it within her own experience. She proclaims to herself that she is a natural healer and has successfully facilitated the return to health with many friends over the years. She is successful in this area of her life. Perhaps she may transpose the positive states of consciousness she is experiencing when she is successful in healing to the task of creating prosperity. She discovers that she does have a circular thought that is common to her states of consciousness while being successful. The thought is a statement:”I can do this if I keep at it.” This thought fills her with motivation and positive emotion.
By noticing in her self-assessments in the moments of her waking reality, when and where she is creating through the internalized statement/belief that she is a born loser, she is able to respond to this negative assertion with her own positive statement: “I can do this if I just keep at it.” Over time, the negative belief is replaced by the positive assertion through the “habit” of ritually replacing the negative thought. Soon the example is experiencing an improved reality in the financial realm.
Obviously, for many of us, our emotional reactions are automatic. We experience something that “upsets” us, offends us in some way, let us say, and we automatically launch into an overt negative reaction. For example, we become “hot under the collar,” and “storm around the house, “re-creating automatically the negative emotional state. Let us call it anger or righteous indignation in this example. Someone or thing has “pushed our buttons,” and we are now acting-out our emotional drama on the stage of our existence.
At these times of passion it is good to remember that our automatic responses are simply habitual ways of acting. Over our life we have learned – from family and friends – “Typical” demonstrations of emotion. We have practiced re-creating these gestures and emotional states whenever we get an opportunity, and now we have become a master. The process has become habitual, automatic.
Fortunately, habits may be changed over time. We have proposed many interventions for you in my new Blogs. Here let us present a simple antidote to the re-creation of righteous indignation in the moment of our personal consciousness manifestation.
TECHNIQUE:A Message From Your Higher Self
This is a very simple technique here and we have covered it before. I believe you will have limitless opportunities to practice it in your waking reality.
Suppose that you ARE experiencing righteous indignation. You are using the research capabilities of the ego/intellect to re-create anger in your present moments. You are automatically finding reasons to be angry, and perhaps at the same time, denying thoughts and images that come to mind that refute your own negative assessment! Denial and intellectualization are occurring simultaneously, as they often do.
With this technique you divert your attention to the incoming message from your Higher Self. It is always the same message… “Love.” All is well in your world.” “Courageously Love others, “that type of thing. Allow the incoming message to “color” your Reality Creation strategy in the moment. Anticipate a positive outcome and then simply repeat as needed.
As you continually interject the new adaptation in your opportunities to re-create righteous indignation, you will find that, over time, you learn how to create Loving Understanding in these moments.
Humility is a very important Lesson to learn for all of us…
Suppose you are a fervent practitioner of the Christian faith. This is your perception. You see yourself as a devoted follower, one who practices the spiritual principles expressed by The Christ and others in our Bible. That is how you see yourself.. as an ideal, if you will. You are a “Good Christian, a God-fearing Christian,” let us say.
However, let me interject here with this observation: you are not… none of us are perfect. We all have Lessons to learn. And so our example has a blind spot, let us say, in their character that prevents them from seeing the variances from Christian practices they display in almost every moment of existence. Humility is absent from the consciousness of this human example. They look down on others they assess as not being Christian, or not their type of Christian. They place themselves above others on a regular basis, then, in the search for how they “measure up” to others in the spiritual domain.
Humility is a very important Lesson to learn for all of us. The religious practitioner who avoids the Lesson of humility is doing more harm than good. They are setting themselves up for another incarnational journey with the Lesson of humility paramount on the agenda. This is how it is for Soul experiencing human form upon your world.
Yet many if us do not stop at one disappointing experience…
Disappointment, frustration, rejection… all of these states of consciousness are self-generated, in that you create your Personal Reality to reflect your inner mentality, with all of its emotions, images, circular thoughts, and so on. Again, it is momentary, in that you create moment-to-moment these enduring states.”Why, however,” you might ask yourself, “do I create these negative states?” Again I remind you, your Issues guide you in the creation of the negative realities.
Disappointment, for example, is a very common state of consciousness for many of you, and so it follows that it is a very common negative reality created by many of us. You-the-blog reader may possibly identify with this state of consciousness, for you have been “disappointed” before in your experiences in physical reality. What does this entail? Simply that your expectations were not met to your satisfaction.
I might suggest that the ego/intellect is running things here, as it often does, and may have “set you up” for disappointment. There is an old saying that applies: “the only thing that pain teaches you is to stop creating pain.” Yet many of us do not stop at one disappointing experience. We create lifetimes of disappointment.
It would seem obvious, but an objective observer might comment on this tendency to not learn from your mistakes i.e. your unreasonable expectations. Learn from your mistakes. Learn your Lessons,Dear Blog Reader. If you find that you are becoming frustrated in your attempts at creating what you desire, fine-tune your Reality Creation strategies to more realistically reflect what it is you want.
We are not suggesting you lower your expectations, but merely adjust them to reflect what is possible for you considering your current experienced reality. Work the “edge” of manifestation, here, and redefine your frustration as “Learning”: a Soulful activity.
Our ego/intellect is a function of our belief system
We are on our Earth to learn a variety of Lessons: some pleasant, some certainly not pleasant, as you perceive it. This may reference that it is the human condition that we may very well experience humiliation and ecstatic awakening in successive moments of Reality Creation. The possibilities are limitless within each moment of our existence. Thus may assertion that All of created reality is available to us within each moment of co-creating with All That Is.
Everything that can exist, does, within the Conscious Units. We could say that the Conscious Units has this limitless potential to become anything imagined. Yet we ARE experiencing our Lessons. We ARE witnessing the feedback of our mentality that is our Personal Reality, that is, remember, constructed through “instructions,” we might say, from our ego/intellect. Our ego/intellect is a function of our belief system. This aspect of our consciousness believes that it is getting a “TRUE” picture of reality as it unconsciously creates the Reincarnational Dramas and comedies of our life.
They are co-creating their reality intentionally, with divine guidance..
As you learn your Lessons, consciously or unconsciously, you are aided and abetted by Soul Family members. Perhaps you already know of my theory of Soul Family: you incarnate together to learn your Lessons together. Consider the previous example. The challenging expert may well be a Soul Family member learning their Lessons with our subject, the male/female student on the spiritual path. Yet, suppose that the expert is NOT on a spiritual path of any sort. They are not aware of any subtext of Reincarnational Drama in their interactions with our student.
However, they are still learning their Lessons in this example. They are learning their Lessons by default. Suppose that this expert is arrogant but is continually experiencing opportunities to learn humility, as in our example. The expert has a choice of demeaning our student and learning their Lesson by default – essentially improving their arrogance and avoiding the Lesson of humility – or perhaps acknowledging the communication stream of the Divine within their consciousness. In this case they are relinquishing control, and allowing the higher centers – the higher powers – their involvement. Humility is achieved, thereby, and the expert is no longer learning by default; they are co-creating their reality intentionally, with divine guidance, you might say.
Similarly, for all concerned in this interaction, for all Soul Family members, there exists varying levels of participation in the Reincarnational Drama. Everyone is learning something here, either consciously or by default. In this way, even the simple representation of consciousness manifestation within this interaction between the expert and the student, is imbued with divine importance. For all involved have the opportunity to “do the right thing,” and co-create their existence from the divine perspective for the highest good of all , you see.
Honor these emotional constructs, AND THEN transform them…
Now: We are not here suggesting that the student repress, dismiss, or otherwise invalidate these Negative Emotions. We Are suggesting that the student NOT re-create the negative emotions unnecessarily, until a deep state of negative consciousness is achieved. Anger may become violence if accepted unchecked, unchallenged. Anger if turned inward – into the personal psyche – may fester and cause imbalances of all sorts. Fear may do as much damage, as you may already know.
And so… no, we are not advocating repression of the emotions. Feel the emotions; honor these emotional constructs; AND THEN transform them by assuming the positive perspective – that of the divine creator ALL THAT IS.
We are finding ourselves challenged, therefore, within our area of expertise…
Let me provide an example. Your Soul Self has set you up to have a life-changing encounter with a teacher of some sort, in your existence. Now this teacher challenges you, let us say, by exhibiting profound and superior information on a particular subject that you know quite well. And suppose that this human also possesses a persuading characteristic that “bothers” you. Perhaps they are charismatic.
Now for my analysis the behavior of this human bothers you because you are perceiving through the perspective of your ego/intellect. You are finding yourself challenged, therefore, within your area of expertise: art, let us say, or perhaps one of the trades. The ego is concerned with appearances, primarily, and so resists any diminishment of its power in these encounters. Indeed, the ego/intellect might often respond by entrenchment, intellectualization, denial, anger, envy, and so on. These emotional states are the common purview of the egoic perspective.
Unfortunately, the life-changing encounter will not be very profound for this subject if they remain entrenched within their limited personal reality manifestation. The continued demonstration by this challenging individual of their superiority, may have the effect of preventing the healing interaction from occurring. Our subject might, indeed, walk away in a huff of self-importance and righteous indignation.
Yet suppose that our subject, a young woman, for example, is on her quest for self-understanding as the result of a recent brush with death, or some other ominous catalyst. She is COMPELLED to look beyond her ego responses to the actions of the human before her, and assess the deeper meanings and opportunities here. Suppose that she has read one of my new Blogs and she is involved in living out her Divine Day experimentation.
She might well be successful in not succumbing to the forces of negativity, if only briefly. This brief respite from negative Reality Creation may be enough for her to gain some stability in the moment of creation, such that, she could switch her perspective from the ego/intellect to that of the Divine – the Soul Self. The ego is diminished in this moment.
The Divine is embodied, invoked, manifested. This new perspective may allow our student example to simply smile and learn from this challenging human. Indeed, she would be learning her Lessons here and contributing to the further evolution of her Soul.
It is as though the subconscious is helping us to face the music…
As a creator of realities we witness our mental and emotional material projected outward into physicality. Because this is, for the most part, a subconscious activity, as we have said, this feedback that is the Personal Reality field may contain some disagreeable elements as in fear and anger-inspiring events – the Reincarnational Dramas.
This material “slips out” from the subconscious through the censor that is the ego/intellect and into the rich medium of Consciousness Units that composes our little piece of the Universe. In these dramas, as we are presented our Lessons, we are, in a sense, “forced” to perceive these Issues. It is as though the subconscious, at least for the moment, is helping us to face the music and learn our Lessons.
We are thus challenged to react to transform. Yet many of us, again, with the aid of denial and intellectualization, sidestep this intervention by finding reasons to account for the dramas. We find reasons for the dramas or we refuse to even consider our contribution. This we call denial. We do have a choice, however, in each instance.
This multitasking may produce profound insights into thoughts and behaviors…
Do you notice the difference here between conscious and unconscious creation? In my new Blogs we discuss a valuable exercise for the student: Embodying the Observer Perspective. One simply creates a personality aspect or aspect of the personal consciousness that observes objectively the events within the life.
This multitasking may produce profound insights into thoughts and behaviors. You are experiencing and remembering in this perspective BOTH the unconscious creation of realities and the conscious creation of realities. The two merge in the beginning of your studies, as you learn how to distinguish the one from the other. Then as you master the technique, you find that you may easily embody the observer perspective for successive moments, minutes, and even hours. You are making the unconscious conscious in this way.
Put another way… the explorer voyages into and through the unknown reality and Courageously and Lovingly acknowledges ALL that is found within this underground of the personal psyche. A broader perspective is obtained in this exploration.
And another… the conscious is taken into the subconscious ritually. Over time the two perspectives meld one to the other. As awakening occurs the Observer Perspective becomes enriched by both conscious and unconscious material. The synthesis of the two perspectives creates the Enlightened or Visionary consciousness.
The ego/intellect is heavily invested in appearances…
How do you distinguish between these two vastly different perspectives, that of the Soul Self on the one hand, and the ego/intellect on the other? The emotional tone generated is quite different; the opposite, in fact, of the other. It is the difference, as we have stated to our Internet audience, between conscious co-creation and unconscious creation. It is the difference, particularly in matters of Lessons, between resisting in the Moment Point, and letting-go in the Moment Point.
It is obvious, is it not, that when you resist, when you attempt to control, when you attempt to intellectualize, rationalize, think-things-through, you are perceiving through a particular lens of Reality Creation? This we call the ego/intellect.
Conversely, when you let go, when you go-with-the-flow of manifestation, when you take your place within nature within the elemental forces, you are creating through the perspective of the timeless Soul Self. The differences are striking; unmistakable really.
For example: If you are angrily reacting to a conversation you are hearing on your radio or television and you are stomping around the room in a huff, what perspective are you embodying? If you are hiding behind the furniture when the bill collector knocks on the door, what perspective are you embodying?
The ego/intellect is heavily invested in appearances. The ego in particular has distinct preferences for how others should perceive it. There is much of perceived value that must be protected. In this process, whole aspects of the personality and Soul are drawn under, disavowed, and denied. These unpleasant facts of the personality assemble in the creation of the disowned self, what we refer to as the Negative Persona, which we shall discuss at the end.
I am responsible for both the negative and the positive in my world...
Now, intellectualization and denial are your friends here as you attempt to avoid your Lessons. We are all powerful. We have the capacity to experience our world as the Logos, the Creator, All That Is. We could have anything we want, potentially, anything we would wish to create.
However, you are a human experiencing a lifetime of Lessons on our world. You have forgotten – the necessary amnesia – your great powers, and now you see difficulties, Lack, all sorts of negative realities before you. So intellectualization helps you to find reasons for the negative realities you are creating. Denial helps you place the blame elsewhere for your negative states and your negative realities.
But look… an inkling of the truth beginning to pierce the veil of illusion that is our perceived reality. You are beginning to see the connections between your negative thoughts and the negative outcomes. Slowly you are formulating within your consciousness a new paradigm of understanding. Perhaps it goes something like this: I am responsible for both the negative and the positive in my world. All the reasons, in truth, point to my culpability in all instances of my existence,
What do You See In Front Of You? You see All That Is in front of you. Everything in created reality is in front of you for you to see. But we have lenses of perception that prevent us from seeing All that is. You must filter All That Is through these lenses – beliefs – so that you are not awestruck, dumbfounded, fascinated to the extreme, every time you look in front of you.
However, if you believe our assertion that great numbers of us are awakening at this time, you may also see what is required for you and your perception of our world. In a sense, you could say that you are being challenged to “look beyond” your limited beliefs of what is out there in front of you. You are being asked to, courageously now, challenge your own beliefs about our world.
So when I suggest that DORIAN, for example, as she observes her bird friends bathing, drinking water, and eating the seeds, is also experimenting with a perception of the larger view – TheMacrocosm – I am simply noting what many of us are now experiencing.
Specifically now… as DORIAN observes the birds, she may also fairly easily observe her Personal Reality Field through a “higher” perspective. This perspective is that of the Soul Self, the Energy Personality, the god within. Both perspectives – the mundane and the exalted – coexist without interference one from the other. In fact, each perspective envorses, and in a sense, “comments” upon the other, in a quest for further understanding, a clearer perspective, Enlightenment. Multitasking we call it. You are quite comfortably maintaining your Personal Reality Field through your ego/intellect perspective, while also achieving stability observing and creating through the Soul Self.
When you are in your Issues and succumbing to the forces of negativity, you are not consciously co-creating your world: you are being driven by the negative emotions to continue to create negative emotions and the negative realities that ensue when you focus on the negative. It is primarily a subconscious process, as we have said.
In my system, as in some others you might name, the process of change is quite simple; fear is transformed into Courage in the moment, anger into Loving Understanding. This is how we create positive realities.
Now there is spontaneously, “on impulse” as we say, re-create anger in your current moments? Over-and-over you create anger – second-to-second, minute-to-minute, and hour-to-hour – until you have created “spontaneously” a negative state of consciousness for yourself. From my perspective, this is not spontaneity nor is it acting on impulses. This is simply the habitual creation of negative states. It is irresponsible and it is largely counterproductive for the individual.
True spontaneity is not the robotic re-creation of the current emotional state. It is not reaction without direction. In the true spontaneous moment there is a brief pause of reflection that occurs. One responds to the positive, to the positive manifestation, rather than the negative. One responds to the divine emotions, you might say, rather than the baser emotions. The choice is made in this pause of reflection to do the right thing. And you do.
This is how you define all stimuli that comes to you through your physical senses…
As you read these Blog words what is taking place within your consciousness? There is only the momentary acceptance or denial of what you are perceiving/creating. second-to-second you create a cohesive reality that reflects your beliefs. But suppose that you read a sentence that is difficult for you to entertain as fact? In the moment there may be a split second of hesitation as you decide whether to incorporate this statement into your Personal Reality Field. If you accept it, the statement will be submitted as proof that All of the statements in this Blog have validity. Otherwise, You would know of the invalid nature of the statement.
You are the authority here, yet you are always attempting to prove to some “higher authority” within your consciousness that you are correct in your assumptions about the trivia within your self-created existence. If the material meets your standards of truth, it is accepted and incorporated into your reality Creation agendas. If it doesn’t meet your criteria for validity according to your beliefs, it is rejected.
Additionally, all corresponding and supporting data connected to the rejected field of information is also rejected. The belief system is kept intact through this process. The ego/intellect is supported and affirmed in its thoughts and behaviors in this way. Accepted or rejected: this is how we define all stimuli that come to us through our physical senses.
The ego skims the topmost surface of reality and awareness. This is not the result of any inherent egotistical quality. It is true that the ego’s responsibility is with the relationship between the self and the physical environment. It must necessarily focus within the confines of physical reality. Nevertheless, it is fully capable of perceiving far more than Western man/woman allows it to perceive. Fear, ignorance, and superstition limit its potentials and. therefore, limit even its effectiveness within the physical universe.
The ego itself cannot directly experience certain intuitions and psychological experiences, but it can experience them insofar as it can become aware of them on an intellectual basis. When training forces the ego to become too rigid and to limit its perceptions of other realities, then the intuitions will not be accepted by the ego because intuitional experience will not fit into the framework of reality that it accepts as valid.
The ego in that case will therefore fight against what it then considers an unknown threat to survival. Struggles are initiated then that are entirely unnecessary. We want to bring intuitional comprehension to a point where the ego will accept it. In our dream experiments, this is one of the purposes we hope to achieve. The ego is not equipped to delve directly into non physical realities, but if it is trained to be flexible, it will accept such knowledge from other wider horizons of the self.
And the ego must have its feet upon solid earth. It is marked and out of its element outside of the normal environment of physical existence. To some extent, its distrust of the dream experience is necessary for the overall balance of the personality. Physical reality is, after all, a rock to which the ego must cling: from it, the ego achieves its prestige and reason for existence. This provides necessary balance and control, and results in the sturdy anchorage of the personality in the environment in which is must presently survive. You have here one of the main reasons why you must request the subconscious to enable you to recall dreams. The ego would see no reason for such a memory and on general principles attempt to repress them.
Again, however, this excellent balance and these fine controls exist. The ego will accept knowledge derived from the dream state as a man/woman might accept a message from a distant land in which he/she does not care to dwell and whose environment would both mystify and astonish him/her.
In our dream experiments, then, we will allow you to bring such messages to the ego. We will attempt to map this exotic country in such a way that the ego can understand what is there in terms of resources that can be used for its own benefit.
Suggestions will allow you to awaken yourself as soon as a dream is completed. The dream will then be fresh. If your recorder is suitably situated with the microphone easily at hand, then you can speak your dream with less effort than is required to write it down. Of course records must be kept. The simplest part of this experiment will involve the use of suggestion to awaken yourself at the completion of each dream.
The number of remembered dreams should be much higher than your present system allows. I also suggest that the first recalled dream for any given evening be compared with the first recalled dream from other evenings, and that the second recalled dream from any one evening be compared with the second dream from other evenings, and so forth.
This should prove highly interesting, and if such experiments are carried on consciously over a period of years, then the results could lead to excellent evidence for the various layers of the subconscious and inner self, of which I have spoken for so long.
Particular notice should also be taken of characters and settings and the approximate period of history in which the dream action occurs. If the dream seems to happen in no specific location and in no particular time, then these facts should also be noted.
Unknown characters within the dream action, persons unknown to you in daily life, should be given careful attention also, and the roles which they play within the dream drama. The primary colors should be checked against physical reality so that any clairvoyant elements are clearly checked and recorded.
There are many ways in which you can approach these newer dream experiments. You may, if you prefer, begin by suggesting that you will awaken after each of the first five dreams. If possible, we want to get the dreams in order here.
Now, there is something else to be considered. The very self-suggestions that will enable you to recall dreams will also change their nature to some extent. This is all right, and the effect will be minimized when the newness has worn off. Again, we want the dreams in the sequence in which they occur. If you do not want to wake up after each dream on the evening, then the suggestion should always include ‘I will recall the first three dreams, of the first five dreams, or whatever.’
You may try two different wordings for a start, and now I am speaking of precise wording. The first: ‘I will wake up after each of my first five dreams and record each one immediately.” The second alternative wording would be the same as the one I have just given, but the ‘Wake up’ would be omitted. That is, it is possible for you to record the dreams, speaking into the microphone without awakening.
This is not only possible but by far the most convenient. You should try both methods and discover which one works the best for you. If at all possible, the recorder should be in the bedroom ( not in another part of the house.) It is the immediate dream recall we are after. We want you to record the dream at the instant of awakening or at the instant that the dream is about to dissolve.
The time involved in going from one room to another could result in the loss of dream content and vividness. The very motor responses demanded on the part of the body and the extra arousal tendency would force you to lose a good deal of valid material. I would prefer that you work less, if necessary, using the recorder in the bedroom, than work more intensely leaving the recorder in another room.
It is the dream we are after, the dream experience in all the vividness that we can capture, and if you are going to get a watered-down version in any case, then you may as well continue with your present method (of writing them down in the morning) and save your sleep.
With the method I have just given you, you will be able to capture as much of the whole dream experience as any investigators manage to do (in dream-labs) when the awakening is done by a mechanical device or by another person. You will also be gaining excellent discipline and training over your own states of consciousness and this, in itself, will be an important yardstick of progress for you.
Now, mankind/womankind uses but a portion of its capabilities. When you are well along in these experiments, you will find that you handle them very well, with no training of energies. Your sleeping hours are already productive. We shall also use them to give you training in the utilization of various stages of consciousness. Added to this, the training will give you valuable insight into the nature of dreams in general, the stages of the subconscious and the inner life of the personality when it is dissociated from its physical environment to some considerable extent.
Much later, there will be other suggestions for you in which you will direct your sleeping self to perform certain activities, visit certain locations and bring back information. This is obviously still very much in the future, but it is well within the abilities of the inner self.
There are serveral kinds of time that will appear within your dream, and you must sort these out carefully. While sleeping in your present time, you may have a dream that concerns your past, with events that you know to have occurred years ago. Nevertheless, you may experience these events (within the dream) as happening within the present.
The present within which you seem to experience the dream is not, however, the present in physical time – the present in which your body lies upon the bed. There is a fine distinction here and one that you will learn through experience as you go on, so I will not discuss it now.
It should be obvious also that within your dreams a special location that belongs to the present physical time can be experienced in the past or in the future within the dream framework, and again, there is much more here also than meets the eye; so watch out so that you can catch these developments.
I am particularly interested in these experiments, and as a preliminary for them, we will have you work with suggestion alone before you attempt to begin with your recordings. We shall have you working well in your sleep, for the dream will not be captured in a laboratory – by scientists who will not look into their own dreams.
The nature of reality can be approached only by an investigation of it as it is directly experienced in all levels of awareness: reality as it appears under dream conditions, under other conditions of dissociation and as it appears in the waking state. Even studies dealing with the conscious state are usually superficial, dealing only with ‘upper’ levels of egotistical awareness.
All layers of the personality are ‘conscious.’ They simply operate like compartments, so that often one portion of the self is not aware of other portions. As a rule, when you are awake you do not know your sleeping self; you know your neighbor far better, so your sleeping self seems mysterious indeed. When you are awake, you cannot find the dream locations that have been so familiar to you only the night before.
In your sleep, you may have greeted friends who are strangers to your waking self. But consider the other side of the coin. For when you are asleep, you usually cannot find the street upon which you live your waking hours, and when you are asleep, you do not know your waking self. The sleeping self is your identity.
There are connections between these two conditions, and there are definite realities that exist in both states, and these are what you are looking for. Only by finding these can you discover the nature of human personality and the nature of reality within which it operates.
We have also spoken of the dream as a drama, and you must discover the various levels within which these dramas take place. You will also find that the various levels of the ‘subconscious’ will yield their own characteristics, and as your records grow, this will become apparent. It is necessary, then, that dreams are recorded in consecutive order whenever possible.
The thoughts we think, the images we imagine, seek out fulfillment through manifestation in our system and other dimensions. As the mask of our camouflage reality is lifted, we will see this truth of our physical existence. We will notice with increasing frequency how our perceptions seem to support the notion that we create our own reality. It will become commonplace for us to marvel, perhaps, at the immediate manifestation of something we had hoped for, prayed for, or visualized. We will be receiving the proofs we require to change or expand our beliefs.
So now you know. You are the creator of your world, quite literally. Perhaps in these moments of awakening to your true nature, you will also sense a growing humility that parallels the growth of your new powers of perception. With the witnessing of your reality creation powers you may also realize your responsibilities – your responsibilities to yourself, your family, and to humanity. Acknowledging your responsibilities to create your world for the highest good, for the good of all, is often accompanied by a growing sense of awe, gratitude, and humility within the personal consciousness.
Hypothesis:You can reclaim and process your cast-off emotional contribution to the storm.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Consider these talking points for talking to storms.
You are connected to Mother Nature and the elements directly
You have a hand in the literal creation of storm activities.
This contribution is largely anonymous, as well as unconscious.
You may “remember” your subconscious contribution by considering what “comes up” for you during this storm.
Are your Issues triggered by the storm?
Are you attempting to keep something down, something buried beneath the facade of your public persona?
Would it be appropriate to write down what you are feeling now in this moment?
If so, write down what you are experiencing that you feel may be related to the storm
I do realize that it would most likely be inappropriate for you to engage in a cathartic moment of grief-full sobbing. Yet you may certainly make an appointment with yourself to do just that at another time, possibly when you are alone or with a trusted friend.
Do not be surprised when your cathartic acceptance of the repressed negative material gives way to celebratory emotions of joy, forgiveness, compassion, ecstasy. As the negative aspects of repressed emotion are realized, there is often great flood of emotion that is released. This creative energy may be used to advantage, particularly in your attempts to experience the communication stream of All That Is or in any other creative pursuits.
Participating in the storm by lending your subconscious emotional energies…
In the following experiment let us assume the opposite perspective. We are are not frightened, we are courageously engaging the storm. Now, just as you, Dear Blog reader, as an emoting human being, on occasion are subject to tears of distress and joy, so too is the emoting being your Mother Earth subject to the powerful displays of emotional energy called rainstorms. The correlations are available “to the nth degree,” as we say.
Consider the convulsive grieving and sobbing of the human after the loss of a loved one. Compare this momentous emotion-charge activity with a rainstorm. It is the same process in principle. The rainstorm is the collective manifestation of the thought and emotion-charged energies of thousands and hundreds of thousands of humans.
Now, you know that you create the weather with your thoughts and emotions. It may be an acceptable belief to you at this point. Can you then enlarge and deepen this belief You-the-Blog-Reader – The Scientist of Consciousness – and the storm? Yes, you are already participating in the storm by lending your subconscious emotional energies to the manifestation. Your repressed memories of grief, losses of various types, and frustration, enter into the creation of the storm.
There are several ways to make this participation conscious if you wish to gain the full healing potential of the dramatic storm event. If it is appropriate for you at this time, as you sit at your desk at work or otherwise out in the public arena, consider YOUR PART in the dramatic presentation of Mother Nature that we call “rainstorm.”
Using your Intent, you will gently probe the psychic climate initiated by the storm, and see your contribution. You will observe this in your personalized fashion, as you do in all of our experimentation that we do together. But let me suggest that you proceed in this way.
Make the preparations for physical and emotional Sanctuary…
We may co-create the visionary experience anywhere we happen to be at the moment. It does not necessarily require us to be in nature, but it does seem to be one of the only times that the modern human may take some time out to relax and go within.
Let us say, for the sake of experimenting, that you are in your workplace relaxing by yourself, or you are in a public place being observed by others around you, yet you are eager to make contact with the Divine and achieve some sort of visionary perception. You may do so with these cautions in mind: You will be vulnerable in the visionary state. Make the preparations for physical and emotional Sanctuary, therefore, before you begin.
You may also create the suggestion within your consciousness that you will be available for spontaneous disengagement from the visionary state if you NEED to be, as in an emergency situation that may arise. Also, if you find that your protected state is lessening due to circumstance mental or physical, and you are allowing yourself to become anxious, fearful etc., take your cue from the suggestion that you will be able to easily exit the Visionary State of Consciousness and attain fully alert and conscious use of your faculties.
Now suppose it is raining and storming outside, and you may see the effects through the window. You may hear the thunder and see the rain and the lightning. You may see the effects of the wind as it blows the leaves down the street. What are you observing, in fact? It is our understanding that you are witnessing the cathartic effects of the collective emotional energies of the consensus reality in which you live.
This is a very powerful and necessary demonstration of consciousness creation of the Collective, here. Yet many are frightened by the display of nature, some to the degree that they will stay indoors with the shades closed, trembling in fear of the potentially destructive power wielded by Mother Nature. But let us take advantage of these energies with a simple experiment.
In the new Blogs I often bow to the superior wisdom of our human ancestors, the native peoples of our continents, the aboriginals who came before, the First People. Much was lost when the developing human moved beyond the simplicity of existence that denoted tribal living.
Yet make no mistake here, I am not advocating a “noble savage” perspective. I am merely noting that our individual, pioneer mentality we won at great cost, as in the effects of splintering the collective gestalt that was the nurturing mental environment of our ancestors.
We are speaking of the magic ancestors here, and we are speaking of the time when ALL of us appreciated the magical approach. We were all visionaries then, and you each and every one were capable of wonder-workings of various types. Yet even now as we observe ourselves in the modern era, perhaps detached from a collective of any meaning, we are still quite capable of attaining the visionary state of our ancestors through some thoughtful, focused experimentation.
Now the power of nature is the power of our system of reality. Our Earth and Sky were formed by the powers of nature, and in the words of our visionaries, the “miracle of creation” was a participatory event. Much in the way that the modern sports enthusiast participants in sporting events by watching and becoming emotionally involved, the magic ancestors participated in the give-and-take of the natural energies as they observed Mother Nature creating the Earth and Sky. We have called this involvement in various gestalts of consciousness “embodiment.” This is our modern term for participatory engagement with the Divine, or co-creation as some of us call it.
You limit yourself if you believe you have limitations...
We limit ourselves if we believe we have limitations. In truth, there are no limits to what we may create. You may see this for yourself by observing what surrounds you in your personal reality. A true appreciation of your surroundings would convince you, that, as the creator of your world, you have great talents and energies at your disposal.
Of course it is also true that there may be for you the absence of what you truly desire within your self-created world. We call this Lack in the Blogs. If you are seeing the founding beliefs of that Lack?
Your beliefs create your reality. If you are seeing the absence of what you desire in front of you, you may trace that back to your own creative consciousness. It is there that you may receive an intuition of what is holding you back from creating abundance. The beliefs that you are using as a blueprint for the creation of your reality may be self-limiting. Look for where you limit yourself. Move beyond those self-imposed limitations and see the infinite creativity that is your birthright.
Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in…”
How does this intellectualization and denial fit in with our discussion of All That Is? In all of our existence, Dear Blog Reader, in each of our experienced moments in physical reality, there is the potential for awakening to the spiritual realm, the Divine, All That Is. We state this as fact even though we know that we may not consider oneself on a spiritual path. Perhaps you are reading this blog out of curiosity only. Perhaps you are somewhat cynical of these ideas, yet you are looking for “something to believe in.” Here is where our concept of denial enters the picture.
Let us assume that you are somewhat “cynical scientist.” You are perhaps of an atheistic bent or agnostic, and you are looking for “something,” something in the spiritual realm. You have led a life of spirituality, either by choice or chance, and you have reached a stage in your life, perhaps after a brush with death yourself, or after the death of a loved-one, when you are contemplating the validity of the spiritual life.
In the nomenclature of our system, we would say that “the denial is lifting for you.” You are no longer denying the spiritual within your existence. As you release your perceptions from the task of denying the obvious spiritual basis of reality, you immediately begin to find evidence for Spirit. Indeed, you may begin to see the spiritual in each moment of your life.
If this is the case, you may identify yourself as one of the Awakening ones of our timeframe. Millions of us are seeking out the spiritual within our lives. We are coming out of our denial and finding All That Is within our personal realities.
If I may, I would enjoy, providing for you an example of intellectualization as it pertains to a group we refer to as the naysayers. Members of this group of humans may be found within any collective, large or small. Within what we are calling community broadly speaking, these humans often are the most coal in their refusals to accept my new messages.
Now we have a sense of humor about these naysayers, for we know the truth here. And there is irony, in that, those who consider themselves “experts” on my Blog writings. Those who have not heard of my words, on the other hand, are much more likely to embrace my new messages with an open mind and heart. Perhaps they are not looking to authorities to tell them what to believe.
And thus it appears that it is calcified knowledge of the authority that prevents the clear perception of what is in front of them. However, we could also be speaking about any other authority that refutes what you might call “anecdotal” information from the common citizen.
What is at fault here is a form of circular logic, and the naysayers often speaks from within this twisted knot of intellectualization and denial to make their case and to present “the historical facts.” In essence they are saying, “My personal perceptions are the only reality here. What I believe and what the other authorities believe is what everyone must believe.”
The intellect proves the beliefs of the authority. Stability in the Reality Creation agenda of the individual is achieved in this way. If they feel as though they have proved their case adequately, there is then no need to expand the belief system to include the new data. The calcification of knowledge continues. The avoidance of Lessons is perfected.
The negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities…
To simply for you this awakening experience, we have described it as a matter of transforming the Negative Emotions into their opposites. We will now add to this with an example. Now the negative emotions are the creators of states of consciousness and thus personal realities. These emotions run the course from fairly harmless, such as mild irritation, shall we say, to murderous anger at the other pole of this comparison.
We are speaking of Anger here. However, with the emotion of Fear, we could also place it is scale, perhaps beginning with a subtle anxiety in the financial realms, as the negative media continually remind us of the treacherous state of the world through our television or radio. So we are a wee bit anxious on this side of our theoretical pole, but if we were to exist on the opposite end here, we would be experiencing aghast dread and fear for our existence, possibly. We may fill in the “reasons” for this ruinous state of affairs.
Let us then examine where your Intention of Will resides within this matrix of emotional experiencing. We have said before that if we are experiencing extreme anger or fear in any particular moment, we are no longer “in control” of your consciousness. We have relinquished control of our Reality Creation powers to the Negative Emotions. We are assisting in the re-creation, moment-to-moment, of these emotions through this shirking of responsibility.
As you, Dear Blog Reader, lay the blame for your negative states of consciousness on the doorstep of your neighbor, friends, family, or colleagues, not only do you dis-empower yourself, but you help to empower the negative spheres of influence, what we have called the Negative entities in these pages.
An awakening of your personal consciousness to All That Is is possible for you in any chosen moment in your waking reality. It becomes a matter of intentionally perceiving your world through the auspices, you might say, of the Divine. If you have mediated, if you have prayed, if you have experimented with your conscious Intent, you have already used your perceptions in this divine way I am describing.
Have you noticed while engaged in these common practices, that the moment of perception gains a fullness, an energized complexity? If you have noticed this pleasant “pressing in” of the energies upon your consciousness, you may also be adept at “tuning” this state to meet your requirements. The depth of your mediation may be increased or decreased, in other words. The profoundness of your trance may be increased or decreased, simply by using your Intent.
We refer to these empowered moments of Intent as Moment Points. They are essentially gateways to a broader perception of your world and your place in it. You are a researcher of your experience in your waking reality. Each moment holds the potential for revealing to you the answers to any questions you might have. It is up to you to focus on the business at hand – your awakening – and delve deeply within the moment. Briefly: it is your Moment Point if you say it is. Own your current moment therefore, and awaken to your greater reality.
This is our concept for discussion at this time. Now there exists a barrier to understanding for some of you that prevents your intellect from accepting the fantastic premise that you cooperate with All That Is in the literal creation of our physical world. This barrier is one of the last to fall as you approach your wakening. Let me set the stage, If I may…
You are in nature, in a forest, writing in your journal, and you are approached by a deer. You are motionless and quiet as the deer comes closer and closer to you, so close in fact that you could reach out and touch it. As you quietly contemplate this miracle of nature, a pair of quail walk onto the scene. They too are oblivious of you as they stroll past, again, within arm’s reach.
Then, as if to further impress you, Dear Blog Reader, the birds in the trees fly quickly past you to perch on nearby branches and to feed directly next to you. You are still here. You are quiet. You are ONE with nature. This is the perfect state for experiencing the Divine. The ego/intellect is off to the side, out of the way of your perception, as the Soul Self observers/creates your Personal Reality.
Ah, but then you make an abrupt motion with your hand to write down what you are experiencing. The ego/intellect has taken charge. The animals disperse in alarm. The fragile moment of appreciation has passed.
Now moments later the animals have again taken their places within nature, in that timeless moment beyond ego, beyond the intellect, beyond the rational mind. However, as you take your notes in your journal you are merely a reporter commenting on the preceding events. Your ego/intellect has taken you out of the moment. Whereas the “dumb” animals as you call them, for they lack your rationality, continue their precisely focused existences in the moment – the divine moment of creation.
Everything means something. Each perception may be followed back to its source within our creative consciousness. When we are experiencing a pleasant moment in our personal reality, for example, if we were to follow back this episode to its source, we might observe how every atom that composes our perceptual field – including the reality constructs we call trees, animals, humans, newspapers – is fabricated from pleasant feelings, positive emotions, and images from our past, current, and dare I say, “future” consciousness.
We are building this current pleasant moment upon a foundation of “remembered” positive-experiencing, to the degree that our personal consciousness – including our belief system, our memories, our cosmology – imbues all that we perceive with pleasantness.
Now we could just as easily in the next moment of creation turn the tables here, and imbue our Personal Reality Field with negative emotion and negative imagery using denial and intellectualization. It is up to you. We decide – for the most part unconsciously – which way to go with the creation of our world.
Given this truth, do you now understand how peace, abundance-for-all, and any other wholesome concept exists as a potential CHOICE for the individuals and groups? Our individual and collective realities result from the individual and collective choices of humans to create and perceive in the positive, in the negative, or in the vast area in between
This wind that we observe by its activity, its effects – as in moving the leaves and limbs of a great tree, for example – is an emotional response. Let me explain: You already know that everything in your world is conscious, as All That IS – of which you and your Personal Reality Field are composed – presents itself. All That Is – evolutionary consciousness – may be considered, then, in its totality as a sensing, emoting being. Each Consciousness Unit is also an emotional, sensing being unto itself.
We could compare the emotional life of, let us say, a bird, to that of a rock, or any other Reality Construct within your system, including the emoting human. If we were to do so we would find that EVERYTHING experiences emotion, the same basic emotion, in quite similar ways. This foundational emotion expressed by all within our world, we could call the Loving creative thrust of All That Is.
Again, we are presenting this material in fairly mechanical terms. I repeat: You are not a machine! Yet this metaphor of the student “pushing” the Reality Construct from the potential into the actual with their Intent, may once again assist us in our explanations.
Everything is composed of consciousness and everything is a reality creator. Each reality Construct expresses itself in the medium of divine energy some of us call God – The Spirit. The thrust is Love with a capital L. The energy for creation is Love.
The wind has been called “the breath of God.” You could also call it the “wake” of Spirit, as in the turbulence created by a vessel or airplane. The wind is the reciprocal emotional expression of the natural world. It is a response to the Loving creation of realities out of Consciousness Units.
Now this Love with a capital L is not evident until the moment of creation. When that moment occurs and All that Is expresses itself as whatever varied construct, Love becomes evident. You can see it.
Now, my wife Dorian here is just this moment observing the behavior of birds feeding from her sunflower seeds that she replenishes each morning. In a quite delightful fashion, the creatures swoop in to take what they need and fly out to eat their meal. There is great cooperation here, even when the larger doves squawk in defense of “their” food source. Even the dove, then, allows the smaller birds to take food.
As Dorian observed this activity, it occurred to her that there was a direct correlation, somehow, between the precise activities of the birds and her own mental activity. She sensed that the cooperative effort included her personal thought and images.
Let me elaborate… your Personal Reality Field is a cooperative effort or presentation involving the manifestation energies and agendas of each and every Consciousness Unit composing each and every bird, rock, tree, or human existing within this field of awareness. This synchronicity of creation, you see, is evident down to the detail.
Our universe is experienced by us, through us; through the physical body, the physical senses; and so we feel as though we are “taking in” our experience through our perceptions, from the outside in. Yet we know by now that it is just the opposite, in truth.
The Universe, All That Is, the entire creation of physical reality exists within us in the collaborative moment. In each moment we project our personalized “take” on the state of the Universe outward into the Third Dimension. So we could truly say that everything that exists on the Earth at any one time, first exists within our consciousness “before” it is projected out onto our world.
We have limited perception in the Third Dimension, however, and we do not see everything within our cozy little Personal Reality. Depending on our Issues or Lessons, we may see very little at all in this personalized world view. Yet the potential is there to use our Inner Senses to discover within our world, the answers to any questions we may have on any subject whatsoever.
The whole is found within the part. The world is found within the individual. We are a part of everything and everything is a part of us.
She is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type…
You are a part of everything. We continue to affirm this fact for you-the-Blog-reader, not to give you an elevated sense of your own worth, but to simply state for you the facts of existence.
What is reality? What is the truth of the matter? These are philosophical questions that drive the enquiring mind. Here we are making our case that you are both the creator and the experience of your reality.
An illustration is in order… My colleague Dorian has taken to riding the bus rather than driving her own car. She has found that it frees her up to do writing and to commune with other humans; something she both desires and needs, as in the basic human needs. As she was, moments ago as we write this, observing two large pine trees that stand at the entrance to the casino at which she was waiting for the bus, a huge beautiful hawk burst out of one tree, and effortlessly, silently, flew of to the surrounding countryside.
She did indeed marvel at this exhibition of beautiful Mother Nature, and she asked herself, as she often does now, “What does that mean?” It occurred to her that there was meaning in this event on many levels. However, there were two primary meanings or Lessons in this evocative scene:
First: She was reminded that she is a part of everything and everything is a part of her, for she briefly projected her consciousness into that of the hawk’s, and accompanied the animal for a short distance. She was able to do this for she is composed of Consciousness Units of the same generic type that the hawk is composed. So this was an endorsement from Spirit – All That Is – to her, of her current trajectory of Soul Evolution.
Second: She had a deja vu experience. She seemed to remember a conversation with a local Native American, in which the subject of the sacred hawk that lives in the Sheep Mountain area arose. It seemed to Dorian at the time that the fellow was quite urgent in his telling this tale of the hawk. Perhaps, thought Dorian, the fellow was setting the stage for her “future” experiencing of this hawk, the guardian of the Sheep Mountain. It did seem to Dorian that the experience was perceived “out-of-time,” in s dream-like encounter with the natural world.
Here in this moment rests our world, the Universe, the entirety of being. Thoughts both pleasant and mild, as well as unpleasant and insistent, paint the landscape with their content. Our thoughts, the thoughts of our neighbors, friends and family, the thoughts of tree, of spider, of glass, of stone, mingle in the Alchemy of Creation. The living landscape that is the thought-created masterpiece of the human intelligence, stands within and is influenced by the greater elemental works created and sustained by the tree, the glass, the stone, the spider. All is related in the cooperative venture of world realized.
The stone dislodged, the glass cracked, the spider forced to spin a different web through the interference of wind or human, comprehensively alters the momentary creation of world. The novel thought considered by the solitary human, alters to the atomic level, the entire creation of world. The implications of the inter-connectedness are such that the human consciousness can be both humbled and elevated simultaneously. Ecstasy.
SO IT IS NOT A MATTER OF “BRINGING” YOUR BODY ACROSS THE ROOM…
Dear Blog Reader, when you walk across the room, you are with each movement forward, re-creating your physical body according to your essential identity out of the Consciousness Units that exist as air in front of you; space, you see. It is not a matter of “bringing” your body across the room; it’s more a case of re-creating your body in its totality within this field – within this medium, if you prefer – of holographic units of awarded energy: The Consciousness Units.
Step-by-step, then, your sacred identity – this Soul Self – assembles the physical body of You-The-Blog-reader from the Consciousness Units “in front of it.” The Consciousness Units – identified as atoms, or molecules, or Consciousness Units of blood, flesh, and bone.
Now… in the same precise fashion, the birds as they swoop down to feed, are creating from the Consciousness Units of air before them, their bird bodies.
But what of the tree, the mountain, you might ask? As the tree sways in the wind, it recreate itself out of Consciousness Units of earth and air surrounding it. As the mountain endures the weathering forces of rain and wind, it retains its mountain identity and re-creates itself with minute or catastrophic alterations, according to the weathering over time.
As far as fifth dimension is concerned, It is space. I will have to try to build up the image of a structure to help you understand, but then I must rip down the structure because there is none there.
Consider, then, a network of wires somewhat like, though different from ” Idea Construction” – a maze of interlocking wires endlessly constructed, so that looking through them there would seem to be no beginning or end. Your plane could likened to small position between four very spindly and thin wires, and my plane could be likened to the small position in the neighboring wires on the other side.
Not only are we on different sides of the same wires, but we are at the same time either above or below, according to your viewpoint. And if you consider the wires as forming cubes… then the cubes could also fit one within the other, without disturbing the inhabitants of either cube one iota – and these cubes are also within cubes, which are themselves within cubes, and I am speaking now only of small particle of space taken up by your plane and mine.
Again, now think in terms of your plane, bounded by its small spindly set of wires, and my plane on the other side. These, as I have said, have also boundless solidarity and depth, yet in usual terms, to one side the other is transparent. You cannot see through, but the two planes move through each other constantly.
I hope you see what I have done here. I have initiated the idea of motion, for true transparency is not the ability to see through but to move through. This is what I mean by fifth dimension. Now remove the structure of the wires and cubes. Things behave as if the wires and cubes were there, but these are only constructions necessary, even to those on my plane, in order to make this comprehensible to our faculties, the faculties of any entity.
We merely construct imaginary lines to walk upon. So real are the wall constructions of your room that you would freeze in the winter time without them, yet there is no room and no walls. So, in a like manner, the wires that we constructed are real to us in the universe, although… to me, the walls are transparent. So, are the wires that we constructed to make our point about the fifth dimension, but for all practical purposes, we must behave as if the wires were there…
Again, if you will consider our maze of wires, I will ask you to imagine them filling up everything that is, with your plane and my plane like two small birds nests in the netlike fabric of some gigantic tree…. Consider, for example, that these wires are also mobile, constantly trembling and also alive, in that they not only carry the stuff of the universe but are themselves projections of this stuff, and you will see how difficult it is to explain. Now can I blame you for growing tired when after asking you to imagine this strange structure. I then insist that you tear it apart, for it is no more actually seen or touched than is the buzzing of a million invisible bees.
Beauty creates itself within the mind of the beholder first. All of the streams of information that we would care to notice, including the rich source that flows into our personal field of reality, first bubble up to the surface of our consciousness. Then they are displayed by us, for us to observe.
To marvel at the beauty, then, of a tree, or a beautiful animal such as a horse, is self-complementary. If you are having sunny weather and that is your favorite style of weather, then congratulate yourself; you have made the weather to suit your own needs and likes.
You create the weather as surely as you create everything within your personal world. Particularly within your immediate vicinity, your reality does spring into being in unison with the creative content of your mind.
Now with this description, questions of control may come to mind. Who is in charge? Who is the ultimate creator, the God of your world? These are questions best answered by the Blog Reader.
As The Shift unfolds in the coming years, our system will witness many more “opportunities” for negative manifestation. Thus, we may well see an acceleration in the manifestation of Earth Changes, such as natural disasters. There also exists at this time the potential for the creation of the Positive Manifestation in our reality. It seems as though it could go either way here, with the collective manifestation on our Earth. This is precisely why it is now more important than ever to attend to our positive thought-creation in our waking reality and also in our meditation practices.
In the final experiment for The Blog Trilogy, we will take a page from the practices of the New Agers on our Internet in the Social Media collectives.
EXPERIMENT – Heal the Earth and Humanity
Hypothesis: Through ritual meditation with people around the world the positive manifestation is strengthened.
This is a very simple experiment that you may conduct as part of your regular meditation practice or as a special adjunct to your practice. You may wish to conduct this meditation at a special time of day or on a particular day of the week, to keep in synch with the millions of other humans who are observing similar practices around the Earth. Your input into the collective stream of manifestation energy in these Ritual observances helps to empower and direct this flow of energy. Your individual contribution is felt in a very specific way within the collective manifestation of the ideal, the focus of the meditation, in this case, the healing of Earth and humanity. Through these energy transfers from the individual to the collective, you are directly influencing the Entity Mother Earth and the human species.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Conduct the experiment for 10 to 15 minutes at same time of day each week, perhaps on a Sunday at Noon or on another day of relaxation.
As in our other experiments… achieve your relaxed and focused Trance State as you usually do. By now you will have discovered ways to regulate the depth of your Trance, so that you may quickly achieve the desired state of consciousness.
Your focus here is on the collective of humanity as you exist on our Earth. You have many challenges facing you as a human in this era. Our Earth is under stress from development, from abuse. Your task is to embody a state of Loving peacefulness. This is an appreciation for all that is good in your human life and in your world. You are appreciating the good and you are potentiating that good with your Intent. Feed your positive Loving images, feelings, and sensations toward the healing of yourself, humanity and your world. Imagine all of humanity rising up in peaceful Loving cooperation for the highest good for everyone. See our Mother Earth returning to her natural state of peace and Loving Light. See the cessation of the tragic Earth Changes. Feel the healing vibration of Loving Understanding as it permeates all consciousness. Direct this thought-form to your fellow human beings and into the Earth herself. Slowly return to surface awareness.
Dear Blog Reader, you are ONE with all of humanity. Therefore, take care of one another. This is our best hope for continued survive as a species. There is a positive trend that I would like to note for you, in regard, as I have been witnessing it for several years as we promote our Blog work. Our internet,AI, and our various Social Media represent the exteriorization of the Telepathic Network we speak of in our Blogs.
This is to be expected, as the “interior” of consciousness expresses itself in the “exterior” as All That Is during The Shift in consciousness. The Social Media networks are proliferating as humans of like-mind and Spirit connect and make plans for the future. This global effort – in part by the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our era – represents the forces of healing, of conscious co-creation.
I am delights to see the efforts of the lightworkers and others combining forces in the millions to heal the planet and humanity. These movements are having positive effects on our world. The strategies for healing extolled in these varied groups hold the promise for the continuation of our species on Earth.
Each evolutionary change is preceded and caused by a new idea. As the idea is in the process of being constructed onto the physical planes, it prepares the material world for its own actually and creates the prerequisite conditions.
Evolution is energy’s movement toward conscious expression in the physical universe, but it is basically nonphysical. A species at any given time is the materialization of the inner images or ideas of its individual members, each of whom forms their own idea constructions.
At no point can we actually say the one construction vanishes and another takes its place, but artificially we adopt certain points as past, present, and future, for convenience. At some point, we agree that the physical construction ceases to be one thing and becomes another, but, actually, it still contains elements of the “past” construction and is already becoming the “next” one.
Though the construction of an idea seems to disappear physically, the idea which it represents still exists.
Sleep is the entity’s rest from physical idea construction. Only enough energy is used to keep the personal image construction in existence. The Entity withdraws into basic energy realms and is comparatively free from time since idea construction is at a minimum level. The Entity is in contact with other Entities at a subconscious area.
After death, the Entity will have its ghost images (memories) at its command, though their apparent sequence will no longer apply. Memories are properties of the subconscious Energy Entity and, as such, are indestructible (though they may be unavailable to the individual under various circumstances).
The next plane of Existence will involve further training in energy use and manipulation, since the energy of which the Entity is composed is self-generating and always seeking more complicated form and awareness.
Each material particle is an idea construction formed by the individualized bits of energy that compose it.
Each Entity perceives only his own constructions on a physical level. Because all constructions are more or less faithful reproductions in matter of the same basic ideas (since all individuals are, generally speaking, on the same level in this plane), then they agree sufficiently in space, time and degree so that the world of appearances has coherence and relative predictability.
WE ARE ONE WITH ALL OF HUMANITY. THEREFORE, TAKE CARE OF ONE ANOTHER.
The Westerner
These ideas that I bring to the table here are Westernized for your understanding. I have spoken, at least in our generation, primarily through English-speaking channels. This is because it is the Westerner who must now be convinced of the value of these spiritual ideas. The westerner, in the broad sense, is what is wrong with the Earth at this time.
If we were to look at humanity as the extended Soul Family of the peoples of Earth, you could very well make a case for this group of humans – Westerners in the industrialized nations – as creating the conditions for the utter downfall and demise of the entire Soul Family.
We are all connected one to each other. The behaviors, ideas, and images enacted and entertained by each of us are shared on some level by all of us. So please imagine what occurs when a belligerent nation of Reality Creators – one that wishes to bully other nations, wage war against them and take their resources – does so with impunity within our current timeframe. Let me say that, particularly when this warlike nation maintains a nuclear arsenal and threatens to use it against other nations, the stakes are very much higher here, of course, than if we were speaking of tribal nations waging battles with spears and other elementary weapons.
It is true: change the past and the present will take care of itself. We are not being flippant here. We have suggested before in this that through true forgiveness of yourself and others for the perceived mistakes of the past, you are actually changing those past realities. The molecular composition of the Reality Constructs is altered. The emotional charge is altered. The historical experience is altered, Dear Blog Reader.
With this fresh in your mind, we will move to this very powerful experiment. Your Imagined Death entails a visualization of what you might experience on your deathbed, directly before the transition to the Home Dimension. Your visualization will, of course, be different than others might create. The idea is to visualize the Death Scene to see what Lessons may have been avoided that are now in plain view with the imminent Death experience upon you. Please consider, then, this DeathScene as occurring in your very current reality: at the age you are now, in the home in which you now live, with the people around you who are in your life currently.
EXPERIMENT – Your Imagined Death
HYPOTHESIS: By imagining your death you remove the fear of death and bring your Issues into focus.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now simply relax, as usual, as you rest comfortably in a quiet room where you can remain undisturbed for 15 minutes. Breathe deeply. Close your eyes and imagine that you are on a beach somewhere or in another location that you have visited where you experienced complete calm and relaxation.
This is your imagination at work here and you have complete control over the activities in this experiment. You are, in fact, observing yourself from a vantage point near the ceiling of the room you are in. Imagine the particulars of your deathbed scene.
Feel the comfort of the sheets and blankets around you. Look at the room and notice the color of the walls, any pictures on the walls, any details you would care to notice about the room.
Now you allow memories to come to your consciousness, memories of painful events from your past. These memories you forgive and heal in the moment of remembering: Courageously, you see. Reenactments of experiences from your past when your were abused, neglected, unloved, or you were abusive to others may arise. In the moment of memory, forgive yourself and others immediately and the let that material fade away.
Courageous Forgiveness is your motto here as you imagine yourself surrounded by the people who have hurt you and those you have hurt in your life. One by one you look them in the eye, and with your boundless compassion you forgive them and yourself simultaneously. It’s exhilarating to be free of all that dead weight. You may feel like laughing out loud you are so completely cleansed of the trauma of the past. When you feel it is time to come out of Trance, slowly come up to surface awareness.
It is a fact of life that many of us postpone addressing our Issues until the moment of our Death. Often it is too late then, of course, and so we may be required to return to physical life to learn the avoided Lessons. Here we will help you avoid that possibility.
We will have more to say about Death in our forthcoming Blog on the Transition and the Afterlife. Now, however, we offer you an experiment in experiencing your own eventual Death imaginatively. This will not be morbid in the least, but a cathartic and indeed healing exercise for you.
The ongoing awareness of Death brings with it an ongoing awareness of what it is you need to do in each moment. The question, “What would you do now if you knew you were to die tonight?” enters here. What would you do, Dear Blog Reader? In our material in this Blog and others, we suggest that Loving Understanding and Courage are what you may do to best help create a positive reality for yourself and others.
Specifically here, if your Death is imminent, you would be in a perfect position to practice forgiveness: forgiving all perceived wrongs throughout your life. This is a two-way street here, then: forgiving others and yourself. Loving Understanding becomes complete forgiveness, powered by the relentless Courage that comes with this perspective
To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing…
Taking The Lead
In previous exercises we have identified tendencies to be afraid of the Other. The exercises in this Blog will heal those fears within all Simultaneous Lives. But first you may take the lead in matters of Soul Family healing, Dear Blog Reader. You see, in a sense, your mission with your Soul Family as an Awakening One, would be to encourage Lessons to be learned by all Soul Family members before the Death of the physical body. To have an ongoing awareness of Death is a healthy thing, in this context of study and experimentation.
An appreciation of Death and your ultimate demise, is also a celebration of your transcendence of Death. After Death, as you know, you transition to the Home Dimension, and then beyond into your multiple and varied Reinacanational Existences. With this in mind, to entertain Death as your companion, in a sense, in your waking existence, also motivates you to do your transformative practices, address your Issues without delay, learn your Lessons, and so on. Knowing that your time is limited in each incarnation, provides a focus and an intensification of perception and thus manifestation.
The realization, here, is that Love is all that is required in all circumstances. The fear of Death fades into the background when you realize this basic truth of our existence. Now it is easy to say this when you are experiencing it. When you are in Love, in a romantic way, let us say, it is easy to see the truth in this statement. It is easy to agree that Love makes the world go around, as they say. Yet what is required here, I believe, for the awakening student, is the recognition that Loving Understanding, for ourselves and our Earthly colleagues, is all that is required, despite whether we are in a romantic Loving relationship or not.
Certainly, the Soul Mate relationship is important to the developing human at this time in our evolution. However, your “embrace,” you might say, of everyone you meet with this Loving Understanding and Courage we have discussed here, is what is needed at this time to break the barrier, to tip the scale, to initiate the healing of humanity and the planet.
As you do engage in these Loving activities, Death takes a less prominent role in your Reincarnational Dramas. Fear of death is replaced by a Loving anticipation on your journey. From this perspective, Death is only difficult for the living, those who are left behind. For the Soul, however, it is the ultimate accomplishment: a celebration of the continuity of Loving consciousness
For example: as you focus on the Entity, through reading and conducting the experiments in our Blogs, you ally with this vast collection of Souls. You are nourished as the Entity is nourished, you see. What began as an affinity of ideas and feelings becomes a true collaboration. It is the same principle at work in spiritual literature of all types. You are inspired, moved, transformed by the ideas in the text. We have spoken of this before.
Now this intense identification with the famous deceased, can be quite productive and life-enriching if the time is taken to truly study and honor these lives. The information is out there in the Collective Consciousness for you to examine at any time. Anyone with the proper preparation and motivation can access and explore this material. And as I said, the more you research with respect and Love these Gestalts of Consciousness of the transitioned humans, the more your consciousness becomes a part of the greater Gestalt we call the Entity.
However, perhaps the explorer in focusing on the famous contacts forgets about the contacts with less-famous personalities. These would be the numerous lives lived as slaves, factory workers, tribal peoples, and so on. The majority of lives lived are not exceptional, by any means. The majority are normal, average, human lives, lived to varying degrees of Value Fulfillment for the further education of the Entity, the Soul Self, and All That Is.
But where is the romance in that? And so the glamour-seeking aspect of the human consciousness seeks out those experiences of Soul that have this high dramatic impact. This may indeed have positive results, as we shall explain in the next Blog.
You may be familiar with a phenomenon that occurs for the individual explorer within this Past Life experimentation. We call it Celebrity Effect, in that, it is almost mandatory for the Scientist of Consciousness to uncover Past Lives lived as various well-known personalities. Thus you have the discoveries that you have lived lives as famous leaders from our perceived past, movie stars who have made the Transition, and so on. Often this ages into the Unknown Reality. The reasons for this may become obvious to you as I explain this phenomenon from my perspective.
Often this celebrity effect exerts its influence in the first few voyages…
This Soul Family concept is another of my essential metaphors, nothingmore. We are attempting to teach you-the-student how to make sense of consciousness manifestation. Without these systems of thought and analysis, you may become quite overwhelmed with data, even on investigation of a single current existence only. And so we are again simplifying here, even as we delve more deeply into the subject matter.
As you attend to your studies and bring into conscious awareness the activities of your other lives, a detailed description of your greater Soul Self emerges. You will discover, for example, whether you have lived predominantly male or female lives. You will get a grasp of your Primary and Secondary challenges in those lives. You will witness the victories and defeats within those existences, and in so doing, increase the scope of your belief system. As your view of self becomes more comprehensive, there is often a corresponding growth in the ability to practice LovingUnderstanding and Courage towards yourself and others.
PRACTICAL VALUE
Now let us attempt to achieve some practical value out of this information, by charting the associations between these lives, in so far as Lessons are concerned.
Earlier in this blog series, we asked you to make lists of possible Soul Family members that you identify through experimentation and through the existence we offer you. In the last chapter we asked you to consider your Simultaneous Existences past and future. Please gather those Findings for their part of the project, whether they are extensive or quite minimal. Next we shall attempt to “connect the dots,” with regards to your greater Soul Family gestalt.
TALKING POINTS
ISOLATION VS ENGAGEMENT – What is your general relationship to the Other?
IDENTITY – What is your Essential Identity? What is your Negative Persona?
YOUR LESSONS – Primary and Secondary, Re: Love relationship, Re: Your Current Soul Family Gestalt, Re: Your Interdimensional Soul Family
LOVING AND UNDERSTANDING AND COURAGE – How are your skills in these practices?
HUBRIS AND HUMILITY – Where are you on the continuum?
Hypothesis: You may identify members of your Interdimensional Soul Family in the moment point
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
It is best to have some experience in working in the field before you attempt this experiment. These moments of high-emotionality, of joy and anger, are in themselves Moment Points for the explorer of consciousness. High emotionality is a form of Trance State, and so you only need to focus a bit on your objectives here, when you are within one of these experiences.
As you let go and relax into the feelings here, allow the emotions themselves to guide you to the other lives: the target lives you wish to study. Imagine that you are tuning-in on these theoretical existences with your thoughts, with your Intentions. You will know you have made contact when you sense an other-worldly element to your sensings in the moment of the experimentation.
You may feel somewhat disoriented as your travel interdimensionally to other existences. This is multitasking here, as you participate in the high-emotionality of the current lifetime experience, while simultaneously using your Inner Senses to peer into other lives in other timeframes.
You might ask yourself what are the Lessons being learned in the other existences. You might ask for the particulars of the Soul Family member you are encountering in this representation of the Soul Family member with whom you are currently interacting? Ask for as much corroborating data as you can to enable verification later.
The material may come as a bleedthrough – a brief multisensory experience. If this is the case, you will have full memories of this when you come to surface awareness.
What you are illuminating here in this experiment are your Soul Family Past Life and Future Life Issues. These are the Lessons you have worked on in other lives with these people.
When you feel the experiment is complete, return to surface awareness at your own pace.
FINDINGS – Document your Findings on the chart below. In the next blog you will combine these Findings with the material gathered earlier in the Blog Series.
We are multidimensional beings in a physical body. During our waking times we are constantly peeking into our other lives. This is how we come to an agreement about what to do here in our current existence. Then, paradoxically, the moment we make our reality, we forget how we came to that place of divine creativity.
We refer to these separate time segments or time frames in which we have our individual existences as dimensions. Our current existences takes place in the Third Dimension, as we know. Our past existences had occurred and ARE occuring in what we might call the Past Dimensions. The same can be said of our future existences: they are playing out in Future Dimensions.
You might remember that in my theory we hypothesize multiple existences that are lived by the Soul Self within this current timeframe in which we live. So there is indeed another human or humans, quite related to you via the Soul Self, living out their lives as your contemporaries.
As I have stated before, there are similarities in the experiences and behavior of ALL of our Simultaneous Lives. To be sure, these similarities are not obvious at first glance. In other words, the outwards manifestation, the physical countenance, for example, is entirely different in each instance of our existence.
We ARE living our other lives within vastly differing body types, of differing temperaments, and so on. Yet within the psyches of all of these representations of our singular Soul Self, note the similarities. These are similarities in thought, imagery, emotional content, and so on.
In this section of our Blog Series, we will show you how to use these attributes that you share with your other lives, as a method for honing-in on these lives while in Trance State. Because you are learning how to take this Trance State with you into your waking reality, you will also be able to do your research into your other existences outside of your home: “in the field,” as we say.
Hypothesis: You can receive advice from a future probable self who is succeeding in this project.
You exist within a Matrix of probability and potential. Every thought of yours attempts to prove itself in physical reality. Because all values are explored by consciousness in all cases, there exists for you personally a best-case-scenario with regards to your Soul Mate encounter. This ideal exists within the consciousness of a future probable self of yours that you may contact in the Trance State.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Achieve your Trance State as you usually do. Relax and enjoy this process of going deeper within. With your Intention as your guide, imagine your consciousness travelling, free, as in the Spirit Body, or perhaps within a visualized transport of some kind to the place where future probable realities exist for you personally.
When you sense that you have arrived, again use your Intention to tune-in on the Best-Case-Scenario probable life with regards to this Soul Mate project. You may notice it, in that, there is a pleasant aroma, image, sound, or tactile sensation associated with it.
Now conduct a brief interview with this future probable self of yours, to gather the information you require to replicate the behaviors, ideas, images and so on, upon which this ideal outcome is based. You will have total recall of this information you are receiving from this future probable self. Gradually return to surface awareness.
FINDINGS – Document your findings immediately.
SUCCESS AS YOU DEFINE IT
As you master the Techniques and you gain your personally Findings from Experimentation, you will experience the confidence that comes from co-creating your existence with the Divine. In time you will find your own success in this project: success as YOU define it. Keep at it with Loving Understanding, Courage and with faith in a positive outcome.
Hypothesis: Suggestions given in the Uncommon Trance can help you improve your reality.
We have presented this experiment to you in different forms in our new Blog Series. Here we shall present the same strategy to you with a focus on the Soul Mate encounter. However, you could also make the focus one of Business Soul Family Members, Spiritual Practice Soul Family Members, and so on.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Enter your Trance State as you usually do in these experiments. Relax. Go deeper and deeper into your state of relaxation. By now you have no doubt discovered the level of Trance that is most effective for you to achieve your goals. Please adjust your consciousness to enter into that state now. You may have a gesture or empowered thought that triggers the state of consciousness instantaneously. If so, use that trigger now.
The goal here is to focus on a stream of Inner Dialogue, such that the words become internalized. This means you carry this empowered statement with you throughout your waking day, and indeed, into the dream state at the end of your day.
Keeping it quite simple, you might consider the phrase, “I am looking forward to meeting my divine partner. It is inevitable. It is exciting. It is happening NOW!” Repeat this phrase or a phrase of your own making, in the Trance State until it is committed to memory, until it becomes a circular thought that is habitually repeated without much effort.
After about 15 minutes of this, gradually come up to the surface awareness. You may find that your mood is elevated, empowered, romantically inclined.
FINDINGS – Document your Findings Immediately after coming out of trance and after you notice effects in the field.
Hypothesis: The non-physical beings may assist you in this project
In all of our regimens we suggest the student enlist the powers of the non-physical beings. The Energy Personality, the gods and goddesses, Nature Spirits, and so on, all can be counted on to assist you. This experiment is a simple one.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Assume your trance state as usual. When you are completely relaxed and going with the flow of manifestation, imagine that your Spiritual Guides are coming to greet you in the non-physical world. You may have an imaginary playmate from childhood that makes an appearance. The saints and other religious figures may show up. Friends and family who have made the transition as well as Ancestors of various types may make themselves known to you in this experiment, which is really just a calling-out for assistance.
As you imagine your Helpers surrounding you, you might ask for help in a general way. Ask that your Guides contact you when you are in the vicinity of a potential Love and Romance support you on your quest. Your thought-energy and your Spirit literally energize these constructs and assist in their manifestation into your Personal Reality. Your fervent desire to have these beings assist you, is the main force behind these creation in your world.
Now please assign your various tasks to the Guides who have made themselves known to you. When you are certain you have gained as much information as you require in the session, slowly return to surface awareness.
FINDINGS – Document your findings from the experiment.
HYPOTHESIS: You may enrich your auric display with positive attributes
Let us try this experiment. Briefly, you track the changes in the Auric Display as you intentionally feed it with positive images, emotions, and so on, relative to the desired Soul Mate.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
First, you note the benchmark of Auric expression when you begin the exercise, as you did in the preceding Blog experiment. Then you would watch for beneficial changes as you feed the positive messages into your consciousness. These suggestions are built with affirmative statements that you energize with your self-generated positive emotions.
Thus, you might create a personalized mantra:
I anticipate an encounter with my Loving mate within the next two weeks time. I am filled with Loving Understanding and personal power…
As you turn over this mantra in your mind, open your eyes, if that is appropriate, and look in the mirror. You may notice with your physical eyes that your Auric Display brightens. Your energy expands.
Or if you would prefer to keep your eyes closed… get a sense of your Emotional Body, as we have described in Blogs, and look for changes on the perimeter of this image with your Inner Senses. You may also sense the improvements with your other Inner Senses, as in feeling a sensuous, even erotic intensification. You may hear voices of one kind or another. Aromas may come to you, suggesting romantic encounters, and so on.
Please notice how this Arua of yours brightens, and perhaps changes color with the thoughts of healing. This is the edge of manifestation we speak of in the Blog. When you first notice improvements you duly noted these changes without cynical denial, without self-deprecation. In this way, you firm-up your creation, your effects. Then, in the next few moments of creation you push this altered state of perception into the future by keeping cynicism at bay.
The next step is to emerge from your Trance and into your waking world. You will be taking this improved Essential Identity into your Personal Reality for experimental purposes. Follow-up equals noting Findings on Soul Mate Encounters that happen in the field.
FINDINGS- Document your findings, perhaps noting the personalized triggers we described earlier.
HYPOTHESIS: Your essential identity is visible in the auric display
Now all of us have the capacity to sense this Auric Display. It is sensed with the Inner Sense of sight, with the eyes open or closed, within a light Trance State.
Here you will be asking the question, “What am I really presenting to potential mates as my Essential Identity? You will be assessing your Essential Identity via the Auric Display and determining the precise quality and expression of your energy through your Emotional Body. This will allow you a benchmark for comparison with future assessments after remedial measures are instituted.
This is how you make progress in these practices. It is where the magic of these techniques is used to greatest advantage. By noting how a particular state of consciousness feels to you, in comparison to another, you get a sense of what is needed to progress further toward your goal.
The success lies in the difference between the two assessments. What is lacking that should be there is put into the mix for future experiments. It could be an image, a feeling, a memory that makes the difference here. These Findings are valuable, in that, they represent your personalized “triggers” that work for you in this project. They trigger the manifestation process for you personally.
If you think in terms of creating supernatural acts, as indeed, that is what you are doing in these experiments, these Findings represent the “magic words, gestures, emotions” that combine to facilitate the creation of the supernatural event.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now just as we have done in all of our experimentation… Relax. Breath deeply. Focus on your inner world for just a few moments, with the Intention of observing the Auric Display. This is the exact same procedure we have described to you in the past blogs with regards to viewing the Emotional Body. So simply carry your Intention with you into this Trance State for a few minutes please.
There may be resistance here, and this is quite normal. You are “looking for” those aspects of your character that you broadcast through your Auric Display, including those aspects that prevent you from meeting you ideal mate, your Soul Mate. Your ego/intellect may be reluctant to show you this authentic self. Persevere, then, for a few more minutes until you encounter the images and sensations we are describing.
You may witness a reliving of events from your past in which you experienced rejection or possibly triumph in the pursuit of Love relationships. There may come to you brief flashes of these events, giving you a taste, the essence you might say, of the events themselves. You may see lights of various colors that evoke emotional content. This is a common experience. Simply move forward with your investigation with the knowledge that you will remember this material even though it may contain some uncomfortable images and emotions.
When you feel you have received as much information as you need in this experiment, return to surface awareness, bringing with you this information on your Essential Identity.
FINDINGS – Document your Findings as best you can.
You have your personalized images, thoughts, and emotions on what constitutes the Soul Mate. We have previously determined what are your “true” personality aspects. You have taken a self-assessment and noted those parts of your personality that assist you and those that do not assist you in the attainment of Love. You are now intentionally empowering an Essential Identity that will contain within it, all of the Attributes that you will use to be recognized by your complementary partner.
Now you are being quite honest here, Dear Blog Reader. You are not hiding from your Issues, nor are you attempting to explain them to yourself in rational terms. You are not making excuses. Here you are using your powerful imagination to imagine a Soul Mate relationship.
Let me explain… As you visualize and empower the image of the Soul Mate you wish yourself to be, you also empower and are able to recognize the Soul Mate you desire. This is the Resonance Phenomenon in action, once again, as we have described to you previously. What is created intentionally and with power on the inner world is manifest in the outer world through Resonance– the electromagnetic assemblage of Conscious Units into Reality Constructs through thoughtful emotional creativity.
In this Trance State you not only envision your improved personality aspects – while, for example, picturing yourself as embodying your new alluring Loving attributes – but you also dramatize with emotion the attainment of the desired relationship in physical reality.
You would thus visualize what your Soul Mate looks like, insofar as physical appearance goes: body type, hair color, eye color, facial features, and so on.
What is the temperament of the desired partner?
What are the occupation and past-time activities of this human? I am certain you can come up with more relevant criteria to fill in the picture here.
Do you see how this unique perspective – the sensing of the Auric Display – may assist you in identifying Soul Mates and Soul Family members? This is the psychic mechanism for the phenomenon you know as “love at first sight.” It is a glimpse through the ego/intellect by the Soul Self. The perception is captured without censoring by the personality. Often prophetic material is presented to the mind’s eye, as in visions of a happy union years in the future when you are mated, perhaps having children, living successfully, and so on.
With this in mind, let us try some experimentation…
Now it is common lament among those of us seeking mates, “If only they could see what I am truly like, inside, they would be drawn to me; they would fall in love with me and be my Soul Mate.” This assertion assumes that those around you do not know what you are “really” like. In reality, everyone around you “pretends” that they do not know your thoughts and what you are really like, to create a formality and a distance between you. But you do know that in the Telepathic Network, everyone knows what everyone else is thinking. We are a psychic race, and we intuitively are aware of the thoughts of others, yet only on the subliminal level.
Knowing this, do you see others are quite often responding to your “true” nature, with all of its fears, anxieties, resentments, and so on, and not to the idealized romantic persona that you identify as your “true inner self?”
The solution here seems to be a simple one: if you wish to create the conditions for meeting your Soul Mate, you must incorporate the idealized romantic aspects into your Essential Identity. This would entail transforming your fears, anxieties, and resentments into their opposites, perhaps. In so doing you might create an empowered Essential Identity capable of co-creating this Soul Mate.
It is true that your Auric Field acts as a beacon, displaying all of the attributes of self – both inner self and outer self – to the interested observer, including potential Soul Mates. You cannot hide, in other words, the display of your Auric Field from others, particularly those who are practiced in the use of the Inner Senses.
Let me clarify this for you. You know that everything that can exist is created NOW, in the eternal moment that holds all. Yet you exist within the confines of a linear time construct that depends on these laws of cause and effect , and others. If it helps you, please think of this Resonance as a process THAT INCLUDES what we call the attractive principle, the principle stated in our so-called Law of Attraction. It exists within the activity of the Consciousness Units. The Consciousness Units are active multi-dimensionally, past, present, and future, in our terms. They express themselves as different Reality Constructs in different dimensions of time. As these units of energy come together through an affinity of shared attributes, THE OPPOSITES ARE ALSO PULLED TOGETHER, expressing what you might call the “glue” of consciousness: that which gives thought form.
This occurs in somewhat the opposite manner as when centrifugal forces separate out the constituents of a liquid substance with matter dissolved within it. Bioelectric forces, meaning, the energies that animate ALL substances, in league with natural cosmic magnetic forces, all at the same time, remember, in this spontaneous process, in a sense, “push and pull” the Consciousness Units into the desired form of consciousness manifestation: consciousness in action, evolutionary consciousness expressing itself in all ways, in all forms, at all times. There is a Holographic Insert attached to this message, if you would care to look for it in your mental environment. Please note my use of the word desired as a pun.
May we now contrast this situation with one in which the participant is well aware of their Issues regarding relationships? Perhaps they are working on themselves and building a spiritual life. They are becoming intuitively aware, possibly, and so they may have begun to learn the Lesson.
And so this person may well receive the beneficial information from the master computer of consciousness, but also they might receive further information in the form of images, ideas, and emotions illustrating instances of abuse, humiliation, pain, and suffering with this human in other lifetimes. These negative assessments may come in the form of subtle Intuitions that others might not sense. This human is using their Inner Senses to obtain a thorough assessment of the human before them: “warts and all,” as we say.
Given this negative assessment, the human may well take a pass on further exploring a relationship with The Other. The Lesson has been learned, in this case, and the human may go on to discover more fulfilling relationships elsewhere.
For example: suppose you are presented with an opportunity to recreate a failed relationship for a Past Life. The human presents themselves to you in your current timeframe. Upon meeting this person the “computer” does its Work and presents to you this succinct assessment: potential Soul Mate. And yet, suppose also that this person has subjected you – within countless lives, shall we say – to degradation, humiliation, pain, and great suffering. Then why would you make this beneficial assessment of the human? This is a rhetorical question however let me answer it for you… Lessons. You are being presented with an opportunity to learn your Lesson regarding selections of potential mates.
In other lives you have not chosen wisely and you participated in relationships of pain and great suffering. You have already learned all that you can about these states of consciousness within these other relationships. But perhaps you are a “glutton for punishment,” and you want to give it another go with this human in other circumstances.
In a sense, you could say that you are only listening to the beneficial messages given of you by your great computer here. You may be in denial of your Issues, then and you are setting yourself up for another lifetime of pain, suffering, humiliation.
Another example: You are in a department store shopping for clothing of some sort. You are drawn to a particular counter and to the clerk behind this counter. You are attracted by the energy this human displays, the Auric Display or Auric Field. You are using your Inner senses quite spontaneously to select from several counters with several different humans behind them, the clerk with whom you have the best “connection.” You make your choice intuitively.
Then as you strike up a conversation, you realize that you have much in common: a similar sense of humor, similar likes and dislikes, perhaps even the same acquaintances in physical reality. “What a coincidence,” you say to one another, “that we should meet.” It seems like fate or destiny, yet is it? You used your powerful InnerSenses quite subconsciously to zero-in on the human with whom you had the most in common, the best connection. Then you experienced surprise at your excellent choice.
Let’s say you made an appointment to meet with this human after work, for coffee or some such thing. You are setting the groundwork, for relationship here, within the course of a few minutes of conversation in a public place. Where will it end? You may, for example, create a business partnership with this human or perhaps some personal relationship of some sort. The possibilities are endless. It is not destiny, however. You were not fated to meet. You merely used your Intuitive Senses to meet each other.
Let me end this example by suggesting that you could have chosen ANY ONE of the clerks in that store and possibly co-created a Soul Family relationship with them, to some degree. You are connected to everyone in general and to your Soul Family in particular. Everyone is connected to you. Each of us has a “history” with everyone else, in that we have the potential to experience lives within many eras, throughout time, with the same group of humans. This group could be vast – thousands or hundreds of thousands – or relatively small – tens or hundreds. Lifetime after lifetime, however, ALL of us, all of the Soul Family, interact in different bodies in different ways learning different Lessons.
I repeat: you could have chosen any one of the clerks in that store and co-created with them a potential Soul Family member reunion. This is where your free will is involved, you see. You choose from all of humanity, at any given time, those you will associate with, those you will fall in love with, those that will become your enemies. I am attempting to make this a clear point of understanding.
For example: You are going about your shopping in a market somewhere. You are in your Uncommon Trance and you are signaling through the Auric Field that you are open to connecting with another human with particular characteristics. Your Auric Field is noticed by a passing human – the Resonance Phenomenon at work.
Let us say this human experiences a precognitive moment when they pass you and look into your eyes. They see themselves with you in an ideal relationship context, for instance. Or perhaps they simply think to themselves, “It’s funny, but I feel a strong attraction to this person. Perhaps I should start a conversation.” Resonance Resonance Resonance.
You could say that this instance of “Love at first sight” was the end result of weeks or months of intentional Reality Creation on the part of the attractor. When this occurs you might ask your Guide to alert you to this project. This is a very practical use of your Guides.
An example: You have begun your project in earnest and you are out in our community. You are keeping a positive thought regarding the Soul Mate encounter. Then suppose that a human – one that meets the Soul Mate criteria – look at you and smiles, or even openly flirts with you. Your issues may tempt you into ascribing these effects to coincidence or other factors: factors other than your Soul Mate Project practices.
The idea here is to not succumb to disbelief on your powers. Indeed, as you suspend disbelief in the moment of recognition of the positive effects. You are, in so doing, “making the dream real.” You are creating a positive future for yourself.
This technique ties in nicely with the previous Blog on the CPA exercise. By consciously diverting our attention to the Divine – our ongoing co-creation with All That Is of our Soul Mate encounter – we gain skill of successfully handling negative emotions, ideas, images, and so on.
In this technique, when we are being assaulted by the negative, and we are threatened by these forces, we distract our attention to the work at hand: the contact with the Divine. We have said before that we are already quite comfortable with this technique. The average human is usually skilled at diverting themselves – distracting their attention – from the Issues and Lessons of their existence, and to something else: to some shiny objects to buy, to an entertainment of some sort, to a more pleasant thought or image.
Here is where we can utilize this innate skill to your advantage. Dear Blog Reader, when your Lessons and Issues present themselves, focus on them, glean the information required to move forward in your evolution. And when we are tempted to succumb to the pull of negative Reality Creation, distract oneself to the Divine. Just by thinking it, we can begin to accomplish it.
We may think of our Consecutive Positive Assessments technique as a counter to the suggestions of our subconscious mind to recreate less-than-satisfactory relationships. Now in all of our regimens and systems we offer this simple moment-to-moment perception of the positive as the key to creating improved realities.
We literally find the good within each moment of perception. In this project… suppose you yourself attracted to a fellow human that you are quite certain would not be good for you, would indeed, be quite bad for you personally. Intuitively we feel it would be a bad match. The attraction is strong, however, out of nowhere, subconscious. You are in a sense, being “invited,” perhaps by a Soul Family member from a Past Life, to ignore your best interests in the matter, and again re-create a negative relationship.
If we are attending to the creation of the positive out of the negative, however, with our CPA technique, it becomes quite easy to not succumb to this negative Pull let us say, gives way to the positive creation modality. The more instances in which we successfully resist the pull to the negative and continue on our positive trajectory, the easier it becomes to resist.
Eventually it becomes habitual, as we master this art of living. Put another way… the Common Trance of subconscious reaction surrenders to the Uncommon Trance of conscious co-creation with the divine. I am certain you can see this. It becomes obvious when we experience it.
Let me refresh your memory concerning the Emotional Body. This electromagnetic construct is, in fact, the intersection of all of your Reality Creation energies from all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is visible to the Inner Senses in your Ritual assessments of yourself and others. The Auric Display we call it also, in that, these signatures of energy can be read within the human aura as it is understood in our spiritual literature.
Our Issues are evident within these energy structures. As we focus on them, they may indeed animate, enlarge, and begin to tell us a story. This would be the story of our life that we have perhaps been reluctant to see: the flip-side to our existence that contains the truth about our private life.
Dear Blog Reader, as you assess where you are in your development, an honest image of yourself begins to come into view. This assessment will have perceived assets and deficits within its makeup. The perceived deficits – this is your judgement call – shall be duly noted and a plan shall be undertaken to transform the personality in these areas, if that is appropriate.
This approach we call “interjecting new personality aspects into the Essential Identity.” You will be “trying on” these aspects to attempt a sort of “mix-and-match.” It is an attempt to embody a truer more integrated and empowered Essential Identity.
THE ALTERED ESSENTIAL IDENTITY WILL BE REFLECTED IN OUR AURIC DISPLAY: AND THIS IS IMPORTANT:
This broadcast of our attributes both identifies us to potential Soul Mates and they to us…
Now this is the way it usually works in human relationships: we meet in the Common Trance and subconsciously conspire to engage in a relationship to Learn Lessons. Often we are learning the same Lesson over-and-over. In our system we are describing now, however, we are co-creating consciously in the endeavor. We are not making the same mistakes over-and-over. We are learning our Lessons consciously. Do you see the difference? We are waking up together with the creation of these Soul Mate relationships. We are awakening to our mutual divinity.
I trust I am not overemphasizing these states of consciousness as I continually speak of their utmost importance in these practices. Loving Understanding and Courage are the primary tools we will utilize in this quest for the beloved mate.
Initially we will assess our own consciousness in a Courageously Loving fashion, perhaps practicing self-forgiveness along the way. Secondly we will go out into the world on a Courageous and Loving quest for our intimate partner, or as I said, we will identify our current partner as a potential Soul Mate.
The two attributes of consciousness also come in handy as we develop our relationship and live lives together. Thus, Courageous Intimacy: our term for the strategy used by partners who are awakening together.
These are the powerful manifesting tools that we create from our imagination to use for specific purposes in our investigative work. We are already familiar with the Radio Dial that we used in earlier Blogs to tune-in on the non-physical beings and other phenomena that exists at particular wavelengths of energy.
You may already have created your Etheric Vehicle that you use to travel anywhere in space and time. The more we use these tools, the more data we collect, the more effective the tools become as aids to manifestation. Be creative, therefore, in the creation of your personalized Metaphorical Tools.
This system for manifestation is similar to others in our Blogs. We present Techniques, Experiments, and Rituals for us to implement in our waking reality. Systematically, ritually, Loving observing these practices, leads to an eventual irresistible tendency to CONTINUE to carry out the practrices.
The system becomes habitual. Positive effects are anticipated and when they are manifest we are empowered. We master the practices through practice, practice, practice. This is the power of the Rituals of Healing.
Let me go on a bit here, to further explain how this works. Our bodies emits energy in the form of electromagnetic emanations. We have referred to this as the Auric Field or Corona in our blogs. This Auric Corona exhibits all of our personality characteristics and these characteristics may be “read” by interested observers via the Inner senses.
In fact, through Resonance the human exhibiting our preferred Soul Mate attributes recognizes us or tunes-in on us in physical reality. The Auric Fields in physical reality. However, because our signal through our Auric Field requests specific personality characteristics in a potential mate, our Auric Field will resonate with the Auric Field of the desired Soul Mate. When our potential Soul Mate is in our vicinity we may experience effects: synchronicities, deja vu experiences, swoons of ecstasy, and so on.
We resonate our world into being according to what we believe is possible. We are Spirit in Flesh. Our ideas and emotions congeal into Reality Constructs. This is Resonance in action.
And further, as a way to illustrate the Resonance construct: if we cultivate a belief in Angels – as many of my Blog Readers do, I am finding – we go a long way towards co-creating with our greater consciousness, the reality of Angels. If we believe that we will die at a certain age, we will possibly resonate that event into actuality.
Beliefs are the determinant values within all Reality Creation by human beings. They are the most powerful constructs in our system. Through the power of our beliefs – the assemblages of images, emotions, concepts, circular thoughts – the electromagnetic phenomenon we refer to as Resonance gains focus and sustaining energy.
We create our reality through the templates of our beliefs. Therefore, know your own mind, own your vision of the beloved Soul Mate. Then don’t be surprised by your creation; it is an exact representation of your true ongoing mental activities.
Soul Mates are co-created, rather than “found” or “attracted.” You co-create with ALL That IsAND your potential Soul Mate, the context for experiencing one another. When the meeting occurs, it has the underpinnings of the Divine supporting it. The co-creation of your Soul Mate can be described as an awakening experience, then: collaborations with ALL That Is.
Now let me ask the obvious question that arises here:
Can I co-create the Soul Mate relationship from a current relationship, one that may have problems of one kind or another.
The answer is a resounding YES! Indeed, you may have entered into such a relationship – one with problems – for the specific purpose of working out your Issues together, and thus attaining the fulfillment of particular values. You may already be experiencing a Soul Mate relationship yet you are not fully aware of it now.
Let me digress… this idea of asking for what you want in relationship is complicated, again, by your Lessons: the subconscious materialization of your Personal Reality. This is why we suggest you adopt the conscious co-creator perspective. It allows you more leverage in the moment, in that, you may experience a form of objectivity with regards to your unconscious projections onto others.
So yes, please do the exercises with this in mind and see if you are already connected with your Soul Mate. Then should you discover that you are, you may use this material to deepen your relationship.
Now this is an example of what the Blog is all about: changing consciously our behavior, thinking, imagining. We exist within the Moment Point as we assemble our identity from the various expressions of creaturehood within ALL of our countless Reincarnational Existences. At any one time, we will be drawing from some of our lives that ARE of a negative expression, on whole, let us say. This is often a hard fact of life to admit for the budding psychonaut.
We are all experiencing negative existences, abusive relationships, violent acts, somewhere in other timeframes. Now our strategy that we suggest, as we well know, is to immediately divert our attention to the positive when we are experiencing bleed throughs to the negative existences.
The attention is diverted to the Divine, always. As we consistently do this, our many lives improve, for we have a direct influence on these lives in our current experienced moment.
To illustrate: Our mate with whom we now experience our Lessons, may have been previously our child, our parent, our enemy. Yes, because we are learning Lessons of all types, the possibility exists for us to be experiencing a Love relationship with a former enemy.
What better way to experience the full gifts of living than to live the opposites with our Soul Family? That is a rhetorical question, however, let me add that with this rejoiner: we are not condoning abusive relationships.
Here I am illustrating the very common occurrence of the Soul Family member changing their behaviors of the Past Life existence, to their opposites: Loving, Courageous, Compassionate behaviors.
Of course, in our New Age Literature it is primarily the romantic relationship that is being referenced in these Blog discussions. So that we may be assured that the speaker is quite probably commenting on male-to-female, male-to-male, or female-to-female relationship, when they speak of Soul Mates.
There are also, quite often, the elements of destiny, synchronicity, and indeed, magic, attached to these Soul Mate discussions. In terms of these ideas, then the human does what they do best, in that they personalize these empowered images, concepts, emotions of the beloved Soul Mate with their own projections, their own criteria, their own personal needs in the matter of romantic fulfilling scared relationship.
Thus, we could say that the Soul Mate Gestaltof Consciousness includes each and every projection of every human who has ever fallen in love, for example, or wished, or hoped, or dreamed or visualized of an ideal Loving mate. The Soul Mate, in this way, exists as an evolving pool of opinion, desire, prejudice, dream and fantasy among other potent potentials.
Now there is an ideal in these matters. These are the basics regarding this theory of mine, and I shall elaborate for a bit, if I may… Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that anything that can occur within our system does indeed occur. ALL probable manifestations are explored by consciousness in terms of Value Fulfillment. All values are fulfilled in all cases.
With this in mind, the Soul Mate could be considered the ideal for the human relationship. As such it exists latently within the pre-manifestation domains: that ethic realm that contains the blueprints for all conceived reality. This ideal stands as an example of what YOU the human individual may co-create with All That Is with regards to the human Love relationship.
The concept of the Soul Mate is paramount in the minds of humans in our time frame. The search for the perfect partner occupies millions of moderns, who feel obligated I suppose, to seek out their most perfect match. It is somewhat of a biological imperative that drives so many of us on the quest for our Soul Mate, whatever that may imply for us.
The phenomenon is further complicated – or enriched, however we wish to see it – by the contributions of our popular media. This is not necessarily the Negative Media we speak if often and mystical genres. Through our daily horoscopes that have become popular, much of what was once material is being available to the public at large.
With this revelation of the Ancient Wisdom comes the inevitable degradation of these concepts by authors with an agenda based on the ego/intellect. And so we have a sacred concept transformed into some romanticized idea denoting the “must have” relationship for men and women in our era. We wish to acquire a Soul Mate as we wish to acquire a new car or furniture. Forgive me for making light of our lust for acquisition.
Now what Lessons were learned in our example? Perhaps one of the three response were made:
(1) You denied the person-in-distress entry to your home and refused to call for assistance to help them.
(2) You denied the person in distress entry to your home and did indeed call for assistance to help them, insisting that they wait outside for the help to arrive.
(3) You allowed them entrance to your home, allowed them to call for assistance on your phone, and perhaps made some tea for them to enjoy while they waited. Then suppose that in chatting with this unknown person, you felt that you were connected to them in some way, but you did not know how. Then, as you discussed your lives briefly, you discovered that this person was indeed connected to you in some way, such as a long-lost friend from childhood, or a friend-of-a friend, and so on. I’m sure you have had these types of coincidental experiences with people who come to you “out of the blue.”
Obviously, had you decided to respond in the first or second ways rather than the third, you would have never had the opportunity to discover your connection. Your fear would have prevented you from making this connection with another human being.
Now this is after-the-fact here, of course, this is after you have decided the person was of benign intent here and not a person out to do you harm. But I’m sure you get my point.
Trust but verify in all instances, Dear Blog Reader. Trust all but also verify all with your Inner Senses. Then, when The Other passes the test, so to speak, do not be surprised if you find yourself in just such a synchronistic coincidence of meeting as we have just described.
There are no accidents, after all. Everything happens for a reason. The once feared Negative Other turns out to be a potential friend or even Soul Mate. And that leads us to the next Blog.
Now, do you see how this example relates to our discussion of the development of the Negative other and the fear of The Other? The sense of protection and possibly suspicion that we inherited from our ancestors serves to inform this current existence of ours. We are making distinctions as to the dangers this human might present to us currently.
My point here is this: be safe, Dear Blog Reader. Do not leave yourself open to harm of any type in these practices. In fact, if you are attending to the exercises and experiments, you will by now have developed your Intuition to the point where you will be quite adept at “guessing” possible motivations and ethics of those you meet. You will also be able to “guess” at probable outcomes should you decide to carry your contacts further, as in relationships of various types.
In our day-to-day existence it is quite easy for us to lose track of time as we go about our duties on our job, within activities in our home, etc. Our routines are just that, as we keep to habitual patterns of behaving and experiencing. Then suppose that something unique happens in our life to break the Common Trance for us, if only momentarily.
Suppose, for example, while we are within our home attending to our tasks for the day, that the doorbell rings and we answer the call to meet a man or a woman on our doorstep who is in obvious distress. This human has perhaps run out of gas directly in front of our home and needs to use our telephone to get assistance from a family member.
Any unusual intervention would do here, you see. The human in distress has interrupted our routine and brought us back into the moment of experiencing. We are now focused within this moment as we decide what to do with this stranger. We are perhaps assessing them as to whatever dangers they may present to us. Or we may be already assured, by some internal response, that they are harmless, let us say, as we prepare to allow them into our home. Or perhaps we are only prepared to make the call for them as they wait on the other side of the locked door.
Because everyone we meet has something to teach us, and vice versa, we have no doubt found that perceived “strangers” may enter our life for intense interacting. Great emotionality is often experienced within these temporary relationships as the stranger may make themselves known to us on both the physical and the subtle levels.
Some of these relationships act as the catalyst to help propel us onto another path, another trajectory of experiencing. The partnership may last only a short time but the effects within the Personal Reality Field may well be quite powerful and lasting.
There are Lessons being learned here. The stranger who becomes known, if only for a brief time, is learning Lessons. We are learning Lessons also, as we participate in the interaction. An example is in order for the next blog here…
Each and every human we meet in our day-to-day activities has the potential to teach us something about our existence. This student must become aware of this potential in the moment, or risk losing the opportunity for learning. Now this statement implies a teacher/student relationship. What does the classic relationship of teacher-to-student bring to mind for you-the-blog-reader? Allow me to assist you in this analysis… Humility enters into this discussion at precise this point. There is no student without the willingness to be taught.
The student aspect we are describing here is a facet of the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is the personality or psyche that may be cultivated. It is marked by an openness to discovery, to the novel. In the case of these studies of the Soul Family, the student would be quite open, intentionally you see, to the learning of the facts of life, you might say, about their true identity, their true personality AS OTHERS SEE IT.
This point is extremely important, and so I will elaborate on it for just a moment… the student is not the teacher to the student in these descriptions of Soul Family analysis. Others are the teachers to the student. The student does know everything. The student enters into the relationship with the teacher to learn something, in this case, to learn something about themselves. The student must be open to learning both the positive AND the negative about themselves.
The ego/intellect will always give us a slanted view of our self-created world. At some point in our development we will be required to rely upon our Inner Senses for at least part of our awareness in our waking reality. When we allow these Inner senses to guide us as we discover our Soul Family, we are turning down the volume, in a sense, of this ego/intellect, and turning up the volume on the Inner Senses. When we begin to receive less-than-flattering information from Others – the teachers we are speaking of – listen with our Inner Senses to these messages. Do not let egoic concerns prevent us from “facing the music” and learning the Lesson,
With this in mind explore a simple experiment on which we will be asked to briefly experience our existence without the amnesia that “protects” us. Keep in mind, please, that this secret information about our identity and our experiences has the potential to heal us on many levels of understanding. It is, in fact, our ego/intellect – the persona – that is being protected with this protective shield.
Moving beyond this shield is a simple matter of embodying our two tried-and-true states of consciousness manifestation: Loving Understanding and Courage. This is painful and difficult material to apprehend. Therefore, Courage is necessary in the beginning. As the secret material is revealed. Self-Forgiveness becomes quite useful as an ongoing state of consciousness: Loving Understanding, you see.
EXPERIMENT:MOVING BEYOND THE AMNESIA
HYPOTHESIS – We can wake-up from the amnesia
We exist in a camouflage reality. This means that the true nature of our existence is hidden from us. Now Imagining what it might be like to view our world with full-disclosure, in a sense, of all that we know and have known in all of our lives.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Assume a comfortable position and relax you body. Breathe deeply and enter your Trance State. Because you are a student of your own experience and you are learning the facts on your own life, it is now possible for you to step further into the Unknown Reality of your own deep psyche.
With a recognition that you are prepared to accept more truthful information on the nature of your reality, let that courageous expectation guide you further into relaxation, dreaming, longing for contact with your deep self.
This is that aspect of your consciousness that knows of all your activities in all of your Simultaneous Lives. It is that central focus of consciousness that knows what will occur in any given day. It is that part of you that sees your world as you open your eyes from sleep, directly before your ego/intellect takes charge.
Now you are drifting, drifting, and gradually you are getting a feeling for this part of you. This part of you exists in a pure state, free from limitations of any kind. Free from the censorship and judgements of your ego/intellect, free from negative emotions. If you feel a sense of losing control, of descending into chaos, gently direct the unfolding of your sensations with your Loving perception.
You are guided by Love here and you are quite Courageous in your investigations. Feeling your way through this inner landscape, watch for dramatizations of various types that attempt to catch your attention. Note any sounds, visuals, or other sensations for documenting later.
The Soul Families, then, are the assemblies of Souls in human bodies keeping appointments in physical reality to learn their Lessons together. The Lessons are those attributes of consciousness we refer to as human virtues, and of course, their opposites, as well as the emotional and behavioral experiencing in between. Please note that this accounts for the whole of human existence.
Remember Dear Blog Reader, that Value Fulfillment requires the essential and fundamental learning of the Lesson to whatever degree we have agreed to experience it before coming into physical form. Our Soul Self observes these activities generally, and certainly notes where Lessons are learned or avoided.
In this way, a broad spectrum of life Lessons is experienced by the Simultaneous Lives for the Soul Self, for the Entity, and for All That Is.
I have an extensives Soul Family that is only now becoming apparent to me. As we create Blogs for the betterment of humanity, and I frequently have meetings with Soul Family members. It is obvious that these humans are connected to me. I sense it; they sense it. A reunion experience of great depth often occurs to further validate this phenomenon for all concerned. Synchronicities are noted; memories are evoked, and so on.
Hypothesis: By anticipating the positive future we create it.
Anticipation occurs in the spacious moment. In past Blogs I have defined for you the Moment Point and the Point of Power. These are terms that describe the current full moment in your present co-creation activities. Simply, it is your Moment Point if you say it is, Dear Blog Reader. You are bringing your Intention and power to bear on the manifestation phenomenon in the present moment.
Perform your Ritual of Sanctuary
Relax and attain your Trance State. You might experiment with achieving this through linking the Divine state of consciousness to sitting down in your comfortable chair or wherever you hold your meditations.
Now… you are in your Moment Point. Your Point of Power exists Now as your portal to affecting your future IN A POSITIVE WAY. Imagine before you all the positive realities you have related while working with this material. The ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness supports you. The contact with the Divine may be experienced as a tingling sensation between your physical eyes. All of your Guides and Helpers, known and unknown, surround you and support you. Bring all of your Inner Senses into this exercise to enliven it and strengthen the manifestation. Stay with it for a few minutes. Return to surface awareness.
FINDINGS – Document your experiences.
EXERCISE – Consolidate your findings.
While working with the many techniques and experiments provided for you in this Blog, you have no doubt had differing outcomes of success. You are an individual with individual educational needs. Hopefully you are taking what serves you best and incorporating it into your Reality Creation agendas.
In this final exercise we are asking you to make a list of those techniques and experiments that have helped you the most in the creation of positive realities and in the learning of lessons. Please take a few minutes to go over your notes and Findings and assemble the material that “speaks to you” most strongly and authentically here. This should be a pleasant and easy exercise. The material that did not work quite well enough for you may be saved for another day. For now, simple make your list of five to possibly ten relevant Findings and particularly successful outcomes of the techniques and experiments we have offered in these Blogs.
There is another cliché that is useful for us here in our Blog work – “speaking your truth.” This idea of speaking your truth is a very powerful Idea Construct. Indeed, it is revolutionary in its activity within our system. Here again is an example of a simple idea becoming quite profoundly effective when utilized by large groups of humans. The personal also becomes the political here, if you see my meaning. It is the ultimate political act of liberation to speak your truth, Dear Blog Reader. This act is the precise opposite of ceding your powers of Reality Creation to those in authority.
To remind you of my previously expounded upon thoughts on this matter, traditionally, the typical human cedes their powerful energies of Reality Creation to those in authority – parent, teacher, employer, politician, priest, scientist, movie star – in exchange for subtle gifts. These gifts are acceptance to the group, permission to keep employed, and so on. Now everything works quite nicely thereafter. The system – essentially a system of control – goes merrily along its way, the citizen believing that they are the “captain of their ship” of individual human consciousness. Obviously this is merely a dream that one hopes to be true.
Now on the other hand, it is true that there are many benefits you receive when you cede your power to those in authority. You receive all those benefits bestowed upon you by those in power. And it would be unwise to relinquish those benefits of association with the group. Let us see if we may devise a system of speaking our truth in such a way that we are not branded as a nonconformist of a witch. There are quite legitimate ways to speak authentically to those in power without threatening our place within the group. We shall cover this technique next.
In this transformation our Mother Earth is healing herself by “throwing off” the harmful parasites that have plagued her. The negative leaders, the corrupt business officials, the violent among us now being “processed” by the TRUE powers that be. These powers are the Higher Consciousness – the higher selves of these humans. Let me go further with this. This inspirational spiritual transformation that is well underway with many thousands of our fellow citizens who are members of mainstream religions.
Let me first say that ALL expressions of the Divine within human consciousness, are what we might call “legitimate” or “worthy” expressions. All That Is seeks to know itself through the spiritual expressions of human beings within their simple religious practices, that we might experience when we ask for help from the Divine in a simple personal matter, as in prayer that our operation will be successful, and through their more complex and obvious spiritual practices, such as we might see within the walls of our great churches, as hundreds join in the contemplation of the Divine in prayer and other rituals.
So it is all Divine, you see. Everything is born out of the Divine and Loving energies of All That Is. Now the key word here is Loving. Where there is devoted unconditional Loving powering these practices of the Divine, there will be Soul Evolution in these groups of practitioners. For as you well know as a Blog Reader of my works, what we are calling Love with a capital L is the veritable creative force of the Universes.
Wherever the path of devotion in any religious practice or “spiritual” practice if you prefer, takes a divergent path from the foundational energies of Love, there will be corrective measures instituted within the consciousness of the sole practitioner or within the group consciousness of the church members. These corrective energies serve to direct the spiritual expression back to one Love with a capital L.
In our new Blogs Series I have been critical of our priests and other leaders within our religious hierarchies for playing upon the fear and prejudices of the church members, particularly within our mainstream religions. Some of these leaders have knowingly led the people astray by bringing politics into the church. The cause of Love has been forgotten within these groups as the leaders seek to curry favor with powerful politicians and other secular leaders.
These religious leaders, as we add to this Blog manuscript, are engaged in a Turnabout also, just as the many of us who have been engaged in the negative practices – fear mongering, hatred – are engaged in a Turnabout. With the assistance of the Energy Personalities associated with individuals within these groups and within these hierarchies of control and power, these personalities are being directed back to Love with a capital L.
Currently we are just able to see a few of these Turnabouts in our media, as some journalists seek to report the truth of the matters at hand. By the time we publish this Blog of ours, This Turnabout will be well underway for many of us, with truly global – and need I say, multidimensional – implications.
My advice to you, if you feel that you are engaged in this Turnabout, is that you allow yourself to go back to Love. If you witness your Earthly associates obviously engaged in this transformation, assist them in finding their way back to Love. You do this by demonstrating within your own Personal Reality Field, the practice of Loving Understanding.
Now those among us who find ourselves called to act within our social groups, will find our paths are cleared of obstacles to progress. Soul progression is the order of the day, you see. This divine attitude is therefore reflected within our Personal and Collective Reality Fields. It is really as simple as “keeping a good thought,” as the saying goes. Is this simplistic New Age wishful thinking? Yes it is, simple and direct and extremely powerful.
This Blog Series we title THE AWAKENING OF HUMANITY for a very good reason. The simple act of keeping a good thought, when observed ritually by many thousands of humans, will lead to the creation of positive Loving realities that are the catalyst for the mass-awakening of humanity.
So again, the simple, the basic becomes the profoundly effective exponentially, as we, for example, remind our co-workers to focus on the positives, the Loving outcomes of the daily work activities. Or when we teach our young child the simple skill of focusing on the positives, as a basis for the creation of positive outcomes. The simple becomes the profound, my friend.
Now these groupings of humans engaged in concerted collective efforts, such as this Vanguard, exist over time. For purposes specific to the group, members will incarnate during the same timeframe, and experience the Value Fulfillment achieved through their activities.
For example: a group of religious devotees who incarnate in the time of the prophets to study and worship as a collective, may upon death of the physical form, go on a sabbatical of sort in the Home Dimension and others, and not obtain a physical body for hundreds of years. This group may then take a bodies as a group of scientists working on a problem in physics within one of our universities in our present timeframe.
Soul Family groupings exist at all “levels” of consciousness manifestation. Consciousness creates realities. What you might call “negative” or “cynical” or perhaps “regressive” consciousness, therefore, seeks out opportunities to create negative, cynical, regressive realities, again, for purposes of fulfilling these particular values. So at any one point in our history, you see, we may have unfolding many different mass movements of Reality Creation upon our planet.
Currently, for example, we have the movement of healers, lightworkers, our New Age who share the planet and our timeframe with the practitioners of the extreme opposites of these values. I trust I am not appearing unnecessarily vague. You know what I mean here, Dear Blog Reader. We have our work cut out for us, to coin a phrase.
Our gains in fulfilling values of Loving Understanding, Courage, compassion and the like, will of necessity come at a “price,” in or view of things. There is no good or evil, only our thinking makes it so, to again coin a phrase for illustration. Yet thinking and consideration and study are precisely what are required here. This means finding distinctions, marking off where we stand ethically, as perhaps “opposed” to other ethical standards.
Certainly we will be waging what appears to be a war against evil, of good against evil. Yet may I remind here, since all is one, we are in essence merely confronting our own “unacceptable” self. We are always reacting to our own projections. Here we are reacting to the projecting of our personality aspects out onto the world.
We are the Vanguard. As I have discussed previously, we have in all probability incarnated this time around to fulfill our obligations once again as advocate for our Mother Earth and for humanity.
Believe me when I say this…. it will take many hundreds of thousands of us to turn the tide of negativity and destruction on our world. Yet that is exactly what I propose in these Blog writings… that those of you who read my Blog words here and understand them, call upon your friends and family and business associates who may be of similar mind as you, to join us in this Research Project – the creation of positive realities.
Yet the majority of newly enlighten members of this family of ours will already be engaged on the subtle levels. Telepathy is the communication network on the Etheric Planes and all of us are well-versed in this system.
Additionally, of course, we also create worlds both probable and actual with our powerful thoughts. And so you see, this is the method. This is how we shall recreate the current Consensus Reality into one more attuned to the positive aspects of humanity: Love, Compassion, Courage.
Hypothesis: We may contribute to the positive manifestation of world realities.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax. Achieve your Trance State. You are a member of the Entity. You are in active alliance with the Entity through reading this Blog material. Knowing this, follow your Intention – your Divine Will – down into your personal Underworld with the full expectation of witnessing the creation of Global Consensus Realities.
If you encounter Negative Beings of any type, strengthen your Sanctuary of protection with your Intention. Pass through these domains of confusion and control. When you experience a sense of peace, Loving Understanding and a strong sense of the other Virtues of humanity, attempt to perceive with you Inner Senses the activities within this domain.
You may well have reached the Consensus Reality Field of the Positive Manifestation we speak about in these Blogs. If you receive confirmation that you have arrived, let your own positive ideas, images, beliefs and emotions serve to strengthen and validate this phenomenon.
See the New World of peace and Loving Understanding begin to solidify and materialize within Third-Dimensional Reality. Return to surface awareness.
The following experiment has as its objective, accessing the state of emerging reality we are calling the Consensus Reality Field. This is indeed a timeless experiencing, for we are within the webwork of creation in a pre-manifestation stage of awareness. Time as we think of it – linear time -does not exist.
In this state of awareness we will be cultivating, we will witness the emerging reality of the moment. As we know, the moment is all we have, Dear Blog Reader. The moment is all there truly is. It is only the emotional attachments to past, present and future moments that keep us tied to the wheel of life – the continuous unfolding of “events.” So this awareness we are asking to develop exists beyond time as we understand it. This state may be experienced through the use of the Inner Sense or Intuition.
This Reality Field is vast within our current Moment Point. For this reason, the researcher must narrow the focus of study to a simple line of inquiry. The World reality expressed in the “historical narrative,” you might say, includes the reputed “true” narratives of the various mass media of our planet. From this soup of converging “facts,” incidents, ideas and images, emerges what we are describing in this Blog as the status quo or Consensus World Reality.
So this Gestalt of Consciousness is largely a product of our Negative Media. Are you beginning to understand my point here? If we as a Scientist of Consciousness are to adequately access, understand and change for the better our perceived Consensus World Reality, we must certainly be at first very skilled in focusing on our subject. If we are not ultimately focused and strong in this endeavor, we will be “blown away” – a metaphor we have used before – by the energy, ideas and images we will face in this experiment.
We must be strong. The negative energies that seek to dominate our world are quite formidable, in that they are energized through the tapping into of fear within the population. Fear, hatred, anxiety, ruthlessness… these are the states of consciousness that feed the growth of the Negative Entities. So we must be fairly adept at transforming fear and anxiety into Courage, Loving Understanding and personal power. We must have reached an advanced state of self-awareness so that we will not be overcome when you enter the arena in which these Entities exist.
Now as we have also documented in these Blog writings, the Beings of Light, in a sense “riding” on a wave of benevolent energy – Love and Courage – are also active in the domain of Consensus World Reality creation. These Higher-Dimensional Beings and Spiritual Masters – Gestalts of Consciousness energized by the Loving energies of generations upon generations of “do-gooders” from our planet Earth and elsewhere – are actively confronting the Negative Beings on these levels of consciousness.
I trust you are with me so far. This may now all seem like a colorful fairytale for some of you in a fashion so that more are inclined to understand than deny.
Now this process begins with you. We are connected to everything in the created Universe through a divine relationship between the (CUs) Consciousness Units that make up our physical and etheric body and the CUs that combine to create those Reality Constructs that “seem” to reside outside of our consciousness. We only appear to be separate. We only seem to be disconnected from our environment. In actuality, our entire exterior world is first within us – within our creative consciousness or mind.
We have spoken of this essential within-ness of our world. Each and every physical Reality Construct is “born” from an idea within us that is cast upon our outside world, much as a motion picture projector casts the images onto a screen for our perception. This we already know.
Now these projections of physical reality serve a purpose for us individually, for others in our Soul Family and for those in our greater Soul Family – humanity. Much as we might learn a lesson from an educational film at our school, we learn our Life Lessons from the self -created “projections” of our ultimately creative human consciousness.
We might be thinking to ourselves, “Wonderful! I am connected to everything. This is a good theory to think about, but how can I use it practically in my daily life?” Of course, we are already using this knowledge in our everyday life. We are just doing so unconsciously in a rote fashion.
Knowing and accepting that we are the creator of our world may allow us to experiment with conscious creation. We will in fact be consciously co-creating our Soul’s agenda for learning. Victimhood falls away when such a perspective is established within our human mentality. Also, of course, we gain the great responsibility for creating positive Loving realities for the greater good of all.
Millions of us are assisted in our denial of the sacred by our leaders, by our nation, by our colleagues. This is why we continue to suffer the negative outcomes of our Consensus Reality creations. Excuse me for just one moment while I speak directly to those of you in the U.S.A. on the subject of “The UglyAmerican.”
It may well make you feel uneasy as I describe to you the shadow of our once great country. It is the negative counterpart to the positive expressions of our America. We will not hear of these discussions in our mass media, the Negative Media I have just described. This is the unofficial version of what has come from our actions as a nation upon the world stage.
With our very negative actions at this time, we are quite effectively preventing the manifestation of the New World – the Unity of Consciousness Dimension – within our collective awareness.
Our country, through our several wars, through our Negative Media and propaganda, through the tainting of our very culture with the evil of our leaders who have no sense for what is right for the people or the country, is preventing the perceptual breakthrough into the Fourth Dimension that I have been discussing in these Blog messages.
There are many of us who believe the lies told to us by our misguided leaders. It is true, often it is much easier to believe a lie. That is why many of us believe that all is well with our leaders and our country. For to question that authority would force us to acknowledge that the reality for us is just the opposite of the propaganda. Who wants to admit that they have been swindled? Who would easily admit that they were wrong on matters of such great importance?
It is a very, very important task to find and admit the TRUTH in these matters. For when the truth is found and acknowledged, only then does the work begin. All of the years of lies and manipulation have left us with a stagnant culture. The Soul’s evolution has been cut short. It is now time to begin our individual and collective transformation.
The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities.
Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in a manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going through. Yet for most of us, there will be a great change already underway on the subtle levels.
We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.
For this group of people the shift will take place over-night, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth,
To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us.
Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first couple Blogs of this Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware on an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the BlogReader.
Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual bullshit, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accidents or some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.
Now we may discuss affecting the Consensus World Reality from the privacy of our own Personal Reality Field. Just as our advice to “keep a good thought” a simplistic solution to transform negative realities – was offered to you the blog reader, this technique of contributing to the Positive Manifestation within the Consensus World Reality from our Personal Reality if offered with just as much surety that you will find success. The simplistic becomes the profoundly effective, as in other examples we have discussed.
Now what are we saying, in so much as we are describing the Positive Manifestation? First let me state emphatically that we are NOT describing the reality presented to you in the media. You well know by now that I am quite impatient with the purveyors of madness and violence and negativity that we refer to as the Negative Media.
These media would be the sensationalist newspapers, the war-mongering television programs presented as “news,” the violent controlling internet websites. These media present what we might call “the accepted” worldview of our deluded leaders and their business associates, the pillagers of our worldly goods, including our natural resources, the stores of our Mother Earth.
This is why we find ourselves prisoners of quite toxic Consensus Reality, you see. Many of us are using the “templates” offered to us by these Negative Media, to create a negative fearful reality. In a sense, many of us believe it is our “civic duty” to do so.
For example: some of us believe with all our might that we are good citizens if we prepare for the “imminent” terrorist attack from our “enemies.” And so we stock up on the necessities of life in preparation for a few months or years underground, in our safe room. This is ridiculous my friend. Now I am certainly not speaking to you personally here, I am referring simply to those of you who have fallen under the spell of negative conditioning perpetrated by our leaders and the business interests that “rule” our world.
But let us examine what sort of Consensus Reality we help to create from the “safety” of our safe room. Are you contributing to a world based on Love and the acceptance of our fellow human beings without judgment of fear? I think not. In all probability, we are from our safe room, merely adding to the hatred, adding to the fear, helping to do our part in the perpetuation of negative realities.
The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is “tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.
I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that you and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.
Now briefly, our world is in the middle of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. In our U.S.A. and other countries we risk succumbing to the forces of hatred and totalitarianism. As our election will again demonstrate, the system is broken. The will of the people is subverted.
It will take action on the part of many millions of us in the West to turn the tide. We do not have the numbers yet because we are complacent and afraid. But as the media gradually begin to present truthful stories for all to read, our numbers will grow. Act now to help make it happen. Participate in our community to encourage the truthful representation of reality within our media and within our communities.
We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you to something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of the knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non-physical reality, before your ” physical” birth into human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.
Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which we are engaged is this… bleed throughs – the perceptual breakthrough of our current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout our waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which our current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of our past, other current or future lives. This is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as we awaken to our multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog manuscripts.
On a basic level, we already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here.
The little bleed-throughs that we experience I hope will keep us motivated enough to continue the voyage. These are tools the non-physical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accepted it playfully and see where it leads us. This phrase may help us to wake-up to our greater reality.
Let us provide another example here. To recap for the Blog Reader, it is my suggestion that the great majority of human beings realize what are the Lessons they have come to Earth to learn. They are perceived as faint memories by most of us.
These distant perceptions are glimpses of the Soul Self as it attempts to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. These “memories” may indeed be “powered” by the Negative Emotions. That is precisely why we avoid thinking about these Lessons. It is a wholly natural response to the Negative Emotions: avoidance.
Now the example concerns a human in the throes of bringing up to the surface of consciousness their Wisdom Lessons. Perhaps they have avoided thinking about these issues for many years, perhaps the majority of the life lived. However, now it is time to confront this difficult material, come what may.
Specially, let us say that this human has avoided social contact with others to any degree out of fear of being criticized. Perhaps they were criticized relentless by others when they were young. This fearful approach has become a lifestyle, forcing the subject to live behind closed doors, in a sense, even though they secretly yearn for human contact.
As we have stated in The Healing Regimen Blog, the diabetic, for example, may be learning Lessons of appreciation and Love with this illness. They have not enjoyed the sweetness that life offers, such as perhaps the special contact so necessary to normal development for the human. To remedy this, it is suggested that one would intentionally LEARN how to appreciate the life being lived.
The human would do well to attempt to EMBODY appreciation, to BECOME appreciation. The next simple step would be to courageously transmit this LEARNED emotional state to others intentionally. The sweetness of life is sweet indeed, but only when we notice it and experience it and then “pass it along” to others, to use the vernacular.
I am certain that this message from The Entity is appropriate for many of us, beyond those who are “diabetic.” To embody the opposite of the Negative Emotions we are experiencing, is a very potent method of magical creation.
Now there are times for us, as researchers and learners of Lessons, when we may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating our reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that we perhaps feel as though we should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on us, so that we might relax and enjoy ourselves for a period of time. Yet let us say that we still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.
“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. We create our own reality. If we are feeling victimized, we are ultimately the tormentor. If we are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, we are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas.
We are composed of many personality aspects within our Personal Reality ego/intellect. But our greater personality or Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in our life. In this way, we are whole – the cosmos – and us are also the individuals living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for our ULTIMATE understanding.
The reason that we sense a familiarity in the scenes of our everyday life, as if all of the characters in these daily dramas of ours are our “relations,” is that everyone we meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed our relation. The relevant aspects of our Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of our individual, Soul Family and Entity Lessons.
Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity we know as physical reality. We act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with our cohorts, keeping our appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact our behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blog on Soul Family.
This is our life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is our life, for which we have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. We are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that we inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of our life.
With the proper attitude we may even experience our suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.
As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the broad spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who is daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world.
Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.
This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However , eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.
Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for perfection, but of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.
So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.
Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creature hood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here.
The second step entails understanding and the gaining of wisdom or Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by meditation or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct.
We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the New Blog material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.
The soul sees the truth of our existence; that all is Love…
Now what occurs here in the “disappointing” moment is this… our ego? Intellect creates a sense of Lack for our having experienced less than was expected. The ego intellect is motivated through the concerns of the personality. The Soul Self, on the other hand, is motivated from an expectation of Love, that is all. The egoic concerns do not concern the Soul Self. The Soul Self does not ever hold unreasonable expectations.
The Soul sees the truth of our existence: that all is Love. It is only through the misguided perceptions of the ego/intellect that we, for example, would become disappointed – “depressed” as we say – if we were expecting a lavish birthday cake, and received only a small cookie with a candle in it.
Now seeing through the eyes of the Soul Self, what do we suppose we would see in this gift of the cookie? We would see, from this divine perspective, only Love with a capital L. The gift would be appreciated for the bestowal of Love upon the recipient that it indeed was.
The Lessons of Negativity can be faced now. We have tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There are, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life.
We have noted previously in this Blog material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression. Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by most of us.
For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.
Dear Blog reader, we are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of “shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many would rather not consider our Lessons in physical reality, and would rather buy something we desire to feel good for the moment. If we are feeling anxious or depressed, we buy something. If we are grieving or in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”
As you know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and we may find ourselves purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.
I wish to make a point that All That Is encompasses all those names. The readers of this Blog should understand that their versions of god, whatever they call him or her, is encompassed in All That Is. All That Is is an infinite high-energy source. It is impossible for that mass of energy to contain itself into one specific life form. Not even for a minute is it capable of doing this.
We are all, extensions of All That Is in that we use this energy source to experience our lives and as we evolve so does All That Is. Every thought, every action, every feeling, every situation, every moment in time and space is different with each individual. No two people or beings will ever experience the exact situation in the exact same way. All That Is is experiencing what it has created in every way possible, thus expanding its abilities as well as ours, for All That Is is always acquiring more and more knowledge of itself through the existence of souls throughout the Universe, not just our limited little Universe that we are aware of but there are thousands of galaxies just like ours in the infinite amount of space.
Simply visualize. Make it as a fan that comes out in front of you when you are concentrating and send those energies to those lives. And don’t be overly concerned about whether they are received. Just do it and be done with it and move on with your day. It will be done as long as you do it. We interact telepathically with other portions of our energy day and night, were just not aware of it. There’s far more there than we can possibly comprehend in the third dimension but I’ve made it as simple as possible for the reader of this Blog. This is you, as you send the energies out to other portions of yourself.
“You visualize yourself. This is your self that you are focused in right now, in this point of power and you are sending healing energies to all of your lives. You then affect all experiences since they’re all related.”
It is only a past in our terms because of our linear thinking and the logic behind the time/space continuum. We are in a timeframe so we constantly consider the past over and done with. The past is not over and done with any more than the future does not exist, for they all exist together. They are all there. There are portions of our energy in each one of these lives, living these lives. Think of it this way: we have set up a variety of different lessons and scenarios with which we want to learn. We’ve picked various different lives and timeframes that we wish to be born into. For the timeframe of the Earth plane, we need only to enter within that portal of time to begin to focus on that particular life.
We are all focusing right now as we speak on this particular timeframe, the events of this part of our world’s experiences, the perceived reality of our world I should say without getting too technical here. I want this to be absorbed by the reader of this Blog in the most simplistic of terms. Now, we have in front of us, lets say, a dozen lives and we’ve said to oneself, “Ok I’m, going to choose this one now. Many others are going into this timeframe and I wish to go into this timeframe too. This is the life where I will go to learn the lessons I have set up for myself.” Based on our own point in evolution we may enter into that life more highly-evolved than others and use that knowledge to assist in the evolution of the others. We may have chosen experiences in other timeframes prior to choosing that one that were either farther into the future as we know it or farther back.
The point is that we choose what timeframes to enter into based on our own personal evolution and what we wish to bring to that timeframe from our base of evolutionary knowledge. Now all of the lives, as I said, are being lived simultaneously. When we are done focusing on one of those lives, we will go back to our home dimension, evaluate the life we have focused on and decide what it is that we needed to learn. Did we learn and experience that and do we need to go back and do it again or can we move on with another lesson in another life in another timeframe on Earth or wherever? We make those decisions. They are there, but because we only focus the greater ball of energy on one at a time, this is where our point of power is.
Now it’s not to say that we don’t have a point of power in all those other lives, for we do, but we are not aware of them in our present life. We are not aware that we are focusing on any of those lives because our focus is here and now in this timeframe. We are getting thoughts from all of ourselves all of the time, we are just not aware of it. The thoughts that we send out now are the thoughts that we wish to affect those personalities in those other lives, to help the evolution of our soul.
Now let me add one thing here. When we are in our home dimension preparing to enter into one of our lives and we did not or were not able to learn the lessons we had chosen, as in the case of suicide, we will go back into that period of time that we have just exited from almost immediately. There is a Universal Law involving suicides, which is only circumvented in very special cases where one was already scheduled to die because of terminal illness. In the case of unjustified suicides, we will go back and be reborn from the standpoint of a baby and you will still be within that perceived reality and belief system of the individuals of that time period from which we just came and we will have to re-experience all over again a life similar to the one we opted out on, until the lessons are learned and the contract fulfilled.
Because the evolution of mankind/womankind takes on what seems to be a slow process, we might miss out on a few years at best, but we will be right back in the same lessons with pretty much the same identical perceived realities. Due to the accelerated pace of our current evolution, for reasons that I won’t go into at present, there may be some changes as to what dimensional-level we we re-enter into. Since our planet is in the midst of a massive evolutionary change, many of us will not be returning into a three-dimensional reality. This is all predicated on how swiftly our citizens realign their consciousness.
The intense energy being poured into our world at this time by the forces of light is going to dramatically affect our entire world as our planet makes this necessary shift into the unity of consciousness dimension. Many of us will re-enter into that dimension because of this evolution. Many of the souls entering into our world at present through the birth process are already evolved to that level and will be assisting the rest of the world to make the transition and will also help with the restructuring of civilization.
We are evolving into Light Beings. In the fourth dimension our bodies will be lighter and more etheric than the dense physical bodies we have now, “light” also meaning information and knowledge. We will be aware of all our simultaneous lives and their experiences for we will be able to feel them and remember them. It is not to judge them though, but to go forth and acknowledge them for what they are, learning experiences that we wished to learn.
Our spiritual knowledge has been kept from us far too long. It is the knowledge that has been always been available to us but has been taken from us within our mass systems of belief, through our religions and our governments. I have not intended to put down the religious systems as they have their place in helping mankind/womankind, but they have also been great perpetrators of darkness. As you notice with the 9/11 event. The terrorists mask their actions and beliefs behind the label of god and religion. This is true in many aspects of government as well, for they try to keep us in the dark about other beings within the Universe for fear that they will be stepping on the toes of the religious leaders.
The forces that are trying to prevent us from gaining our soul’s knowledge are busily at work trying to keep us in the dark. They go to great lengths to feed off of our negativity. We can see how they have controlled our media. Unwillingly and unwittingly many souls fall prey to this belief system thinking that they are doing the right thing, when in actuality they are being manipulated by the forces of dark. They have handed over power of their thoughts to others thus serving up mankind/womankind huge plates of fear and negativity on a daily basis.
Our point of power is the sum of energy that empasses our current life as we now experiencing it. When we engage in sending thoughts of healing to our other lives we are using the energy available to us. Now to send messages to those other life experiences. Those other lives are not consciously aware of what we are doing but telepathically they are receiving the thoughts. This healing often affects decisions that we would be making thus altering our experiences. Our hope is that those experiences would be for the better and that the lessons chosen in those timeframe would be accomplished.
We are also altering our experiences in our now by the thoughts that we are sending to ourselves from other portions of those lives. As we raise the vibrational hum of our being through awareness, we affect the outcome of our future experiences. The raising of our vibrations also affects the rest of society and helps move the planet and its beings into its next level of consciousness. We are bringing that love-light energy to the future-light because we have the energy available in this point of power to send those thoughts. It is really not about a future life anyway because all chosen lives are based on our Soul’s evolution.
If we are to fully understand this one must move away from the time-constraint thinking for it is not relevant when not in incarnation. I know that you are confused as to how we can live all of these lives simultaneously, but I mentioned earlier they have all been chosen and set up for us to experience. There is no time as we know it in the home dimension of the Soul as well as many other dimensions. There are many probable realities involved in all of these lives.
The thoughts that we think now, the behaviors that we take on now, the ideas that we assume for our own personal reality affect all of these lives and our evolution. They are not consciously aware of it, however the effect is taking place because they are all part of the same energy essence of you-the-soul. Just as we are not consciously aware of them, they are not consciously are of us. But the messages that we send back and forth to each other do enter into the subconscious mind and are received, whether or not we are aware of it.
We are beginning the process with our thoughts. As our thoughts move toward the light, the vibrational hum of the beings on the planet and the planet itself will move into the change. As the beings move towards the light – the light being knowledge and information – the DNA within the human being will evolve from the double helix to the twelve strands, each twelve strands corresponding to the twelve chakras. This DNA evolution will affect the body. AS I talked about earlier in my Blog, the thoughts of our planet the energies of all of our beings, create the entire environment of our planet, the weather and all the perceived realities within that system.
When the vibrational hum of the masses is raised to its new level of awareness and into the light, the planet is able to evolve with its beings. If we move towards the dark or stay within the dark, no knowledge will be brought forth, because darkness does not allow for information and knowledge. We will remain the same of a lesser quality than we are presently, “quality” meaning we will not physically or spiritually evolve. We will stay within the confines of the third-dimensional reality.
Earth is moving forward. It is not in the throes of the backwards momentum. It is moving forward into its next phase on its evolutionary path. If we succumb to the dark forces, we will only succeed in relinquishing our soul’s evolution to the powers of those who wish to repress and confine the very nature of our being.
As we move into the light the knowledge that has always been there for us will start to show itself within our being. We will be aware of many things we thought impossible to comprehend. That is the process of moving towards the light, the evolution of mankind’s/womankind’s physical being as well as the evolution of his/her soul. We may be asking, “How do I move towards this light?” Our thoughts are what move us towards the light. If we constantly harbor thoughts of darkness then we will be in darkness. The power is ours. It has always been ours.
When we take back our power that we have generously relinquished to other forces and use it for the further evolution of our soul we will have started the process. It is no longer necessary to subscribe to the mass beliefs of the doctrines that have been systematically placed into our being for centuries. We are all starting to wake up, some of us quicker than others. Those of us who resist by your own free will still wallow in our greed and manipulation and stay within the realms of the Third Dimension, which I might add is going to be quite uncomfortable for us until we too seek the light. Those stubborn individuals will not be allowed to manipulate the minds of humanity much longer.
Let me begin, in the transition from one form of energy to another, for each life lesson that is completed, a symbol is chosen by us. This symbol is a reminder of the life experienced and generally it relates to the lesson or contract theme as it was completed. For instance, if we came into our life to perfect the experience of humility, and that experience was perfected, then the symbol would be chosen. The symbol is chosen by the individual, for you and is personal to one’s soul development.
The Council members for example have quite an elaborate array of symbols all together on one piece, which they wear around their necks. Since these beings have had many experiences, they are quite intricate. The same applies to you. Your symbol is your reminder. Now, when meditating often you will see these symbols, you may wonder what they are. If you look further, you will see that they have to do with the lessons learned in previous, past or future lives, since all lives are simultaneous. Now let me make this clear, that the present life as you see it is your current focus, however in meditation you are fully capable of focusing on lives that you deem to be past or future. Often when reviewing one’s life before entering into another, the soul will bring forth to the meeting with The Council the symbols of the previous life or lives, as a reminder of lessons learned.
All communication being telepathic, the Council will know what the symbols mean and will be better able to advise on a new life experience based on those symbols. The Council is always available to help in these matters in choosing the next group of lessons that are for you to learn. One life is not automatically predetermined to be the life following the previous. In other words, you may choose whatever lessons you are slated to learn in any order in which you want to learn them. Some lessons being very difficult. Other lessons may come in the form of an easy existence, thus explaining why some entities feel they are overwhelmed and have too much on their plate while others seem to skate through life without hardly a bruise.
It is all a matter if when you choose to participate in these lessons and their level of difficulty for your spiritual evolution. If you have had many seemingly trying lifetimes, you may then decide the next incarnation will be more peaceful to you. Now, keep in mind, not all incarnate on a variety of other existences. Solar systems and planets, however most of us will come back to Earth for this phase of our spiritual growth as most of our chosen experiences are part of Earth’s solar system and we are part of that Creator’s plan. The lessons that you have choose to learn and the stage of your soul evolution will determine the place in which you will manifest your energy.
The Earth’s third dimension encompasses your physical type of body which is usually chosen for the experience needed to evolve at the level. That is not to say that those on other planets do not have a physical body for they do. They are just different than ours because of some of the atmosphere conditions. Regardless, the symbols are many and there are multitudes of them.
When referring to the Council for guidance as to what group of lessons you wish to learn in your next incarnation (if you choose to do so) you will refer to your symbols. The more incarnations one takes on and the more lessons completed the more complex your symbols become. It begins to take on a complex personality of its own so to speak because it contains all your life lessons. It is worn as a medallion would be worn.
It is up to the individual as to how the soul makes the correlation between the lesson that was learned and the symbol that it chooses to associate that lesson with. For instance, you may have a tree or symbol of a tree if that reminds you of something that you learned in the previous existence. This is left up to you because it will make the most sense to you.
However we are very familiar with each other’s symbols as we see them because telepathically we are able to understand the evolution of each soul based on his/her symbols. When communing with other souls in our home dimension, as we recognize each other and identify with each other, we also know what each other has learned in our evolution based on our symbols. We visually can see these as if they were draped around our neck as in a large circular medallion.
THE NEGATIVE MEDIA
The world’s media – through television, movies and the printed word – all have some dark content to serve up to us on a daily basis. Most of the individuals presenting this information to us have no clue that they are being systematically controlled by negative energies. They merely think that they are providing a service of filling a need for the insatiable appetite of our society’s obsession with violence. The soul-you is not this kind of stimuli when not in incarnation, where everything in our home dimension is in harmony. This kind of stimuli is shocking to the soul and in a way we are curious as to the affects of what watching violence does to our physical body as it increases our adrenaline output, a purely physical sensation that itself is a high for us. As adrenaline increases, the natural reaction afterwards is a calming effect. Our society seeks this stimuli in an effort to “experience,” for our natural impulses to experience our life have been put to a halt, so we must seek other forms of stimuli to experience. All too often this comes in the form of negative, violent media productions.
If we will stop and take notice, a heartfelt movie or an experience where we have done something kind for a stranger will produce the same effects, but we ignore it, considering it not fashionable. We have succumbed to the will of the negative influences and our ego. It is not healthy for the mind, body and spirit of mankind/womankind to indulge itself in this kind of programming. We set ourselves up to fall into the belief systems of the negative influences. Take for instance our news stations. They rarely give us any good news and if they do, it is some human-interest story as filler for their regular programming. The brunt of the programming of our minds is in the negative arena, supporting our fears and outright encouraging them. Our media have very effectively turned our societies into fear-based societies. It seems as though no news is good news unless it’s bad news. We can change this. We do not have to accept a steady diet of negativity and fear. It is most detrimental to our psyche and our being as a whole to indulge in this kind of stimulation. It robs us if the true fulfillment of our soul’s purpose and interaction with the rest of humanity. It sets us up to distrust and fear the beings that we have incarnated with to experience our planet.
Our media could be used as effective tools with the right intentions to fight our war on terrorism without having to kill anyone. Given the right kind of information, humanity could elevate its consciousness quite willingly. I am often perplexed as to why this valuable invention of ours (television) has not been used to its greatest potential for the good of humanity instead of promoting negativity and fear. It is one of our greatest sources of power, yet it is used unwisely to convey messages that do not further the evolution of the soul in any way.
GOVERNMENT AND MAN’S GOD Let us talk governments and man’s/woman’s god. Man’s/woman’s consciousness has always identified itself with the physical body first. Somewhere along the line, in developing the awareness of his being, the perception of time, birth and death became somewhat distorted. In the beginning of his/her evolution, he/she was less aware of a time/space constraint. His/her natural relationship with the earth and his/her original awareness of his/her creator were all he/she needed. Eventually though, that awareness was replaced with his/her newfound beliefs. He/she had created for oneself a god of man/woman that would be the prime director of his/she life. He/she had been fully aware that his/her consciousness and that of animals were working in harmony towards their own individual evolution. For both understood that their actions, whether prey or aggressor, were fulfilling the needs of each other’s species and guaranteeing their survival. Again, I am using “he” and “she” here only as a reference to encompass all humans within the framework of these Blog writings, since the soul has no gender.
Mankind/womankind has always felt within his/her greater being he/she was to have some controls put upon him/her for whatever reasons. He/she was unable to accept the idea that his/her being would and could fully experience itself under its own power. His/her limitations set him/her apart from other creatures. Instinctively in the beginning of his/her soul’s evolution he/she was more aware of oneself. As time passed though, in his/her eyes he/she became frightened of himself/herself and his/her curious impulses. He/she felt the need to control his/her nature. Mainly through superstitious beliefs and then creation of his/her versions of god, he/she became further and further ensconced in the beliefs that there was some part of his/her nature that he/she could not control. He/she felt it was best to hand over the power to other authorities that would then oversess his/her life and ensure that he/she was keeping oneself in line with his/her ideals.
RELIGION AND GOVERNMENT
The religious organizations man/woman envisioned to feed his/her need for spiritual growth were unwilling to deal with society’s legal problems. It became easy for him/her to shift the blame onto a law and thus not have to deal with the issues personally. For it is the law and the law must be followed and so on it went, never realizing that he/she was systematically cutting himself/herself off from experiencing the nature of his/her being which is basically good. With all of his/her pent-up anger and frustration, he/she was starting to experience another side of oneself that he/she did not understand and became fearful. Of course even before his/her creation of a government, he/she had always aligned oneself with a God-force. The concepts of a God have always paralleled the ideals established within the governmental structures.
Mankind’s/womankind’s ego needed to feel that it was still in control of itself, so it imagined for itself a god of man/woman, a god that took on the characteristics of man/woman and would be a god of power. This concept was most important to mankind’s/womankind’s developing ego and ideals. Many nations have formed their own idealized version of god, and oftentimes the majority of their wars were fought in the name of God. With the emergence of this human-like god who was given the power to punish man/woman for his/her perceived good and evil, came various forms of religion, many using fear as a tool to gain control of mankind’s/womankind’s soul.
Governments also seized upon the moment and in an effort to control mankind/womankind began using similar tactics that man has willingly accepted enmasses. In the Western world and some other nations a democracy was formed that aligned itself with society’s religious beliefs. This was a cooperative effort in order to maintain an accepted equilibrium in society. For some time this system has worked for mankind/womankind, however with the awakening of his/her consciousness he/she is no longer able to accept the fables and fairy tales of his/her nature. With religion and its more intuitional knowledge and government with its more intellectual knowledge, mankind/womankind was now embarking on a journey of conflicting wills.
As our conscious knowledge became more and more available to us, our ego has had to grapple with the old system of beliefs. The realities that we have been ignoring, we can no longer pretend do not exist. As our governing institutions, scientists, medical establishments and reiglions all mount their efforts to suppress this knowledge, mankind will rise up and expose them one by one. Governing bodies in today’s civilizations are of a massive nature. For every infraction that humans have been able to perpetrate, a law has been put into place to stop it. There are always those acting out of their own frustrations that will look for ways to circumvent the system in order to try to regain their power. It has been a fruitless effort at best. However all that is about to change.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR YOUR ACTIONS
Life on our planet was intended to offer to mankind/womankind an abundance of diversity. It was not intended that individuals would try to stamp out by any means available what they did not understand or did not fit into their own perceived set of ideals. This applies not only to the destruction of other humans but all species that exist on the planet Earth. The different cultures were set in place as a stimulus for creativity for mankind/womankind. It was intended from the beginning that Earth would be the planet that would have beings with free will and that there would be much diversity within its cultures. Humanity has used their free will and often destroyed it at the same time.
Because of our own perceived inadequacies we have sought out someone else to blame for our failures. Civilizations are rife with individuals playing the blame game. We alone are responsible for our actions. We have consciously made the decisions. Whether they are positive or negative, our thoughts stimulated us into action and what we have acted out upon we must claim as our own. Mankind/womankind has conveniently sidestepped accountability for his/her actions using whatever forum available to pass the buck. We should certainly be able to recognize this observing the actions of our politicians, as they are masters of this game. Every being if they truly examine their life’s motivations will find themselves guilty of blaming others for their life’s mishaps. We would benefit greatly of we would rise up and admit our failures and move on without endlessly punishing others for our distorted ideas of our reality.
Each being is here, as I have said before, to spiritually evolve. It is my sincerest desire as you read this material that all of us will put down our grievances against each other and consciously start to respect the life that was given to us and to others. We are very fortunate to have been able to incarnate on our beautiful planet Earth. There are millions and millions of beings waiting to come to Earth that have not been able to because our planet is relatively small compared to some of the others. It can only sustain so much life at one time. Humans should be using this opportunity to enjoy and share the lavish benefits of the planet and interact and experience their soul’s existence with all the others who have chosen to come here. It is not one of the more evolved planets of the multitude of Universes, however it has a vast amount of learning experience for those who choose to incarnate on it.
Behaviors of greed, violence, hate and war will only suffice to eliminate our being from ever experiencing our planet when it evolves its consciousness. Planets are being prepared to receive those that do not wish to move into the peaceful harmonics. I am told that Pluto is certainly one of those more inhospitable planets with a magnitude of fear that we have never known. Given our limited perception of what I am saying, many of us deny what we are hearing, but the fact still remains. We will find out when we experience the transition of our energy upon death of our physical body, that the thoughts we create now will affect our next reality.
No one is justified in the destruction of anyone else’s culture or nation. WE are seeing examples right now, with the fanatical ideas of rogue governments and terrorists, that if not got in check, humanity will experience the destruction of many nations. We are to experience and learn from each other, not stamp each other out like mosquitoes. When humanity follows leaders that have taken individuals on a path of self-destruction, then they are only furthering their own annihilation. There are no rewards in that for the soul, none whatsoever. Those individuals will be made to experience what they have done to others in their next incarnation, only their experience will be much harder and it may not be on Earth. We have free will. We may move forward in our evolution or we may not, the choice is always ours.
DANGER ZONE
At this time on our planet there is a great war going on between beings: those that have positive intentions for peace and goodwill for mankind/womankind and those that are in pursuit of negative power for domination of mankind/womankind. The scales are weighing in evenly and that is a dangerous situation for our planet. There are many probable realities in play at this time and it is up to the individuals an masse to ensure that the survival of our planet is taken seriously. Our belief systems should be examined carefully and necessary changes made within those systems if we as a species are to survive.
Most of us still have many incarnations that we would like to experience and learn from whether it be on Earth or elsewhere. The point here is that elsewhere may not be a very nice option. Much of humanity over the last 30 years has started to raise their vibrational hum and move into alignment with the plan of our world and many of us are ready to receive divine knowledge. Knowledge can only be given to us as we evolve, due to the Laws of Non-interference. As we evolve our consciousness the knowledge is released. It is why I do not give specific solutions to problems, because we are here to learn from our experiences and the answers are not to be just handed to us. It is up to us to work out our beliefs on our own and come to terms with our soul’s purpose and evolution in our own way. Many mistakes have been made. Also much has been learned.
At this time though, our planet is in danger of experiencing some very serious events unless all of us consciously examine what we have been doing. Our thoughts and actions will greatly affect the survival of our nations and our world. Never before has there been so much conflict in so many areas of our world. Never before has humanity been so close to destroying itself with its weapons of mass destruction. The negative influences that wish to keep us from evolving will use whatever means necessary to accomplish their goals. The forces of light have been diligently pouring their energies onto our planet in an effort to seal off the negative forces in their own dimension. With those energies many situations will appear to be out of control, but rest assured that the walls of dark must crumble down before they can be rebuilt with light.
FREE WILL – NATURAL IMPULSES
Within the many Universes, Earth is a most beautiful planet. It is teaming with all sorts of life that was specifically created to enhance its eco-system and the experiences of its inhabitants. It is a most desirable place to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet to incarnate and experience life. It is also the only planet where there are no boundaries as to what humans can experience. Free will is pervasive on our planet as it was intended to be. Our stories of Adam and Eve were to help mankind/womankind understand that free will was the thrust of his/her existence. Within the framework of those biblical manuscripts the ideas for humanity’s behavior were set into place, knowing that with free will here would need to be some boundaries within societies. Nowadays the boundaries are so restrictive that we have almost lost the ability to experience the very essence of our soul, and in feelings of frustration many wars have been fought.
Humanity knows through natural impulses how to experience itself, but because we have been taught to ignore those impulses, we have suppressed the natural creature-hood of our being. If we would allow those impulses their freedom, a whole world of experience would open up to us. We would joyously be able to experience everything that The Creator had intended for us. We have been fighting with others and ourselves because we have not been experiencing those impulses. We have thrown them into one of the dark recesses of our mind for fear that they are bad and only fools act impulsively experiencing their existence. Animals do not suppress their impulses. They do whatever comes naturally to them. They do not question their motives for they instinctively know what they need to do to survive. Babies and small children are always using their natural impulses to develop their experiences in life. It is only they are taught not to trust those impulses that they stop experiencing them.
If we would allow ourselves the freedom to experience our soul’s journey, much could be learned and there would be no need for wars. If we would learn to just dominate ourselves and not others, our evolution would be swiftly forthcoming. I use the word dominate here, because it seems to be a method of ours to conquer and control everything around us. Everything around us is perfectly capable of controlling itself and does not need to have the interference of another to suspend its experience on our planet. Children are a perfect example of experiencing life to its fullest, that is until the peers and parents inject their beliefs into them. If left alone to experience for themselves the wonders of our planet we would see that they are quite capable of learning for themselves and experiencing life. Certainty I am not telling not to supervise our children and look out for them, but when our influence is so restrictive that our children cannot experience what come natural to them, then we are shutting down their creative impulses.
Humans have systematically suppressed the natural impulses of the species at a young age, thus spawning another generation of beings who are trapped into the belief systems of the generations before them. The same old indoctrination, drummed into their minds from generation to generation, eliminating any growth or wisdom obtained along the way. We have been systematically injecting our offspring with fear, our own fears, in an attempt to control.
If we are to evolve as a species, we cannot have societies in fear of their existence and afraid to experience their lives. We will end up with the negative forces claiming our planet as their home. These forces feed off of fear and negativity. They have an intrinsic way of filtering into our everyday way of life and our antiquated belief systems. They have had a hold on mankind/womankind for too long and as the fanatic, they will use whatever means available to them to subdue our consciousness and enslaves us to their negative way of thinking. The members of the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet and Beings of Light are releasing vast amounts of energy into our world at present to prevent this from happening. But it is all predicted on how we respond with our free will as to in what direction our planet will move.
OUR POINT OF POWER – NOW
These messages that I am giving are to enable us to know SELF, to be in touch with the essence of our being: you-the-soul. Because we are presently focused on this life in this time, the changes that we make in this point of power will affect all of our simultaneous lives. We are focusing a greater portion of our energies on this timeframe now, however there are portions of our soul’s energies living out those simultaneous lives as well. We are experiencing all of our lessons at once, we are just not aware of it.
When we experience the transition of our energy from this life to our home dimension, we will be given at some point another opportunity to focus a greater portion of our energy on another one or more of the many lives we have set up for experiencing our spiritual evolution. We will enter that life or lives as we have entered this one, in that point in time as we know it. We will focus a greater portion of our energy on those lives. Now, the messages that we send to those life existences from our current point of power will be received and will affect the life experiences of those lives. This is important because our planet’s survival depends on our thoughts. Moving our thoughts and beliefs into a peaceful, loving direction and carrying out those thoughts in our actions in essentially what is going to save mankind/womankind from its own self-destruction. We are in our point of power now. Now is the time to utilize it to benefit all of our existences, past, present and future. It does not do us any good to pass the buck shall we say and hope that someone else can figure things out for us. At the end of this Blog I will give you an exercise to help us in this point of power.
Since we are in the throes of a planetary evolution, what we focus on now – the ideas and beliefs that we have now – are what is going to assist us. Many of us are very familiar with the concepts about how our energies affect the planet and for those of us who are aware of this, we should be able to see that the effects of this are happening all around us. It does no good to dwell in the negative for this is not the time.
As we observe the planet Earth from our dimension, the swirl of energy around her has been quite disturbing. We have experienced many mass events both in nature and with the behavior of our citizens. Earth cannot sustain this kind of energy for much longer. If its citizens do not start to raise their vibrational hums, the planet itself will revolt against mankind/womankind with more and more natural disasters. Since our energies create the weather and all of the planetary problems, it would behoove us to start to take a serious look at what we have been doing. If the citizens of the planet surround themselves with an abundance of negativity, that negativity will and does create disturbing weather patterns around the planet. Everything in our eco-system is affected by our mind/thought energy whether we realize it or not. We can eliminate all of the disturbing weather patterns if we change our thoughts and move into a loving peaceful alignment with each other and the planet. If we could see it from another dimension we would be saddened to see the destruction of what was once a beautiful paradise where all creatures lived in harmony with each other. It is not too late to change.
EXERCISE: POINT OF POWER As I have mentioned before in other Blogs, focusing on your own point of power will allow you to know you: your soul. Take five minutes out of your day to focus on your emotional, spiritual and psychic abilities and nothing else. This is of great benefit and will enable you to bring your physical being in alignment with you-the-soul. Focus on you, your soul and nothing else. Bring to your thoughts a desire for an awareness of your being. Listen to the hum of you, feel the vibrational hum of your being. Again, do this and then forget about it. It’s that simple. Notice how you feel after the five minutes are up. For the human vehicle it can be almost intoxicating to suddenly become aware of the soul of self and the peacefulness that surrounds it when the ego is not involved. As you do this daily, you will start to increase your own vibrational hum and move your being into alignment with the planetary evolution.
All souls when not incarnated work harmoniously towards the evolution of all. There is no such thing as racial prejudice. When making the transition to our home dimension, in between lives where a body is not needed, many souls take on a persona that they are comfortable with whether it is male or female, dark or light, it makes no difference. Many will pick from an assortment of looks and mesh them together as a reminder of certain lives that they have incarnated into as a fond memory of those lives. Others will take on no special looks at all and simply radiate their love light. On this plane between lives we all recognize each other no matter what the current look is. We are able to change these looks at will and often do so. Our essences are well recognized by all that we know and always acknowledged by others that we do not know in a peaceful and harmonious manner. Our thoughts are read telepathically there. We are just coming into an awareness of this ability while incarnated in this phase of our evolution.
What I am getting at here is that this is the way we should learn to view others that are not of the same race or beliefs as oneself. We are all sprung from the same energy source and we are all connected as brothers and sisters in the Universe. It is our decision and ours alone to choose to incarnate into the type of body and belief system we choose, to further our soul’s growth and experience every kind of possible existence, whether it be male or female or a variety of skin colors available to us. We have all been members of the same races that we now hold prejudice against. Since we are living all our lives simultaneously, the thoughts that we have in this life will affect the others. Taking this to heart, it would appear to be that if mankind/womankind would get his/her act together the future would indeed look quite bright.
EVOLUTION OF RACE
There is a plan and a purpose with regards to the evolution of races. Now I am using the word race here because it is our term and I will stay within the framework of those ideas. What we consider to be races are not races at all, but variations on the same theme, themes that we have created. It was a combination of many factors much in the same way the planet was formed. The physical body types were created by The Creator to survive within the different climatic zones of the planet. That is it. Darker pigments were given to man/woman when he/she was exposed to higher levels of sun. Lighter pigments were used where the sun shone less frequently. The darker pigments were there to protect the skin. It shouldn’t come as any surprise to anyone and if we look at our hemispheres we will see the logic. We don’t see a bunch of pasty white people living in South America. That was the intention.
Now, some beings were brought here from other solar systems as well. They were transplanted for the greater diversity of mankind/womankind. We did not evolve from the apes or gorillas and even ancient man/woman were also transplanted here from other star systems. The physical bodies that we currently identify with in this solar system have all come from other star systems before being seeded onto Earth. Most of us now come from the Atlantean civilization and are intimately tied to beings of Sirius. Therefore it will be impossible for our scientists to trace the evolution of mankind/womankind until they open their eyes to the other dimensions of our experience.
We have been able to experience our lives, at least most of us, in one race or another, simultaneously learning as we go, one need fulfilling the other, and so on. Our preoccupation with good and evil has led us to believe that white is right and dark is bad. However this is such a distorted view of the real reason behind the different physical characteristics of mankind/womankind, that to us viewing these ideas it appears as insanity. As we observe our logic, it is most sad to see how we have distorted the beauty of this creation with our own ideas and fears. Again, taking something of great beauty and turning it into something ugly in our minds. We then are afraid of face the reality that we have manifested with our thoughts. We have let ourselves get carried away with our fear of other beings and our fear of good vs. evil. It is time for us to change the thinking that white is good and dark is bad. The same can be said for the dark races. It is time for us to change our thinking that white is evil and dark is good because we are all in this together, growing and evolving as one. It only hinders our soul’s evolution when we place these kinds of barriers on it.
Because of these distorted ideas, we have essentially locked ourselves into little boxes and thrown away the keys. Living in our separate societies, barricading behind our iron gates, fearful that someone of the wrong color might come in and see who we really are, or take some precious part of us away from us. We need only face our fears to end this perceived reality, for it truly does not even exist. Our perceived reality is only a manifestation of our mind. Our true reality is a manifestation of God’s mind. All else is an illusion. We have been quite astute at creating for ourselves roadblocks to our own evolution. As we begin to expand our awareness we will be able to learn to trust oneself and our own intuition and stop playing into the forces of negativity that wish to keep us locked in our box. It is time to unite as brothers/sisters and start living in harmony with each other. Without each other, we would not be, because we are all connected to each other from the same divine energy source.
It is time for us to start realizing the importance of our relationships with each other. Many of us do not like to think that the events of 9/11 were a wake-up call but I urge us to examine our feeling after the event. Did we not for a short while, (short because we see us waning away again) feel a sense of bonding with our fellow man/woman? Did we not feel the love and compassion for others that we have so long ignored? Look into the eyes of a stranger. We may just see ourselves. After the events of 9/11, we were seeing mankind/womankind take the necessary steps to move forward in the spiritual evolution of his/her soul. We were caring about each other. We were taking notice of our fellow man/woman and offering bits of our own wisdom and encouragement. Continue to do so. Just because it seems to be in the past, do not forget the revelations that we have experienced from this event. This event is part of our evolution and if we use the experience to grow and change our world, then those who perished will not have given up their lives in vain. We do not have to play into the hands of insatiable appetite for power and control of our world. Realign our energies to create a new and wonderful reality for our world, a world of peace and goodwill towards others. This is not hard to do. It just takes a sincere desire to do so. Below is another exercise designed to help us break down the barriers of fear towards our fellow man/woman.
EXERCISE: SPEAKING TO STRANGERS
Go out today and speak to a stranger. Do something kind and look into their eyes. You may recognize them, you may not, but remember you are connected. You are both part of the same essence of God’s divine energy. Try to speak to someone whom you would normally not even give a thought to. This will be the hard part, to see if you can break through the barriers of prejudice and fear. If you would try to do this on a daily basis, you will see how much joy it brings to your soul and you will then get a tiny glimpse as to what the true nature of your being is all about. You all may wear different packaging but that is only by choice. Just remember, you create your own fears. This exercise, if practiced daily, will enable you to remove those barriers.
CULTURES Let us talk about the cultures of our planet, for this seems to be another area of disillusionment for us. When humans created the various cultures on our planet we were delighted in the creations of our consciousness, the creation of various self-identities. Experiencing this creative ability gave us much freedom to express ourselves in ways that set us apart from everyone else. Many subscribed to those ideas and thus cultures were born. One sprung from the other and so on, each with its own certain characteristics that were uniquely its own. There was much diversity as different people decided to try variations on other’s beliefs as well as inventing their own. It became a territorial expression eventually as humanity migrated to different areas of the planet. They took with them their cultural ideas and added a few of their own, thus setting up entire civilizations that were then subscribing to different belief systems and cultural practices. It is an ever-evolving thing and we see it today in our societies. Many civilizations are now living in and sharing the territories and belief systems are changing and expanding. Bits and pieces of each culture will remain, some will be tossed and others saved as humanity moves further in its evolution. It was all designed to be part of our learning experience on our planet, to give us diversity, a variety of experiences from which to choose.
Unfortunately, we also see the conflicts arising all over our planet as these cultures try to meld into each other. There are strong territorial and cultural beliefs that various nations wish to hang onto. Societies are strained to the brink of war in some cases as they are seemingly being forced to accept the belief systems and cultures of others within their territorial domain. The United States, being the melting pot of all nations, has seen its share of racial and cultural wars. It is to soon to tell as to whether this experiment will fail or succeed. It will be determined by the choices we make and whether our enlightenment is swift or slow. It is all part of The Creator’s plan. The North American continent was to be an experiment to see if humanity would be able to live together as one. When entering into this experiment, oftentimes one is searching outside oneself for happiness. Happiness does not lie within the borders of another country, it lies within the borders of our mind. When entering into a nation that is comprised of multicultural belief systems, one will be faced with the challenge of learning from the experience of living together as one nation. Now in the melting pot these cultures are experiencing great difficulties as they perceive themselves to be under attack by others. But as man/woman moves further in his/her evolution, he/she will come to realize with the awakening of his/her soul that he/she is not under attack by anything other than his/her own set of perceived beliefs. The only difference is our perceived reality of the experience.
HATE AND ANGER
In this section let us touch upon hate and anger, as anger is the precursor to hate. With the emergence of the events of 9/11, there are many of us who are in the hate and anger mode against the perpetrators of the event and rightfully so given out current set of beliefs. The mass evil that was planned and executed was indeed a horrible event. As we express our anger, understand where it came from and let it go. By turning it into hate we are then forced to deal with the pent-up energies related to hate. The hate will eventually turn on us and leave us with either an illness or some other form of retaliation within physical and mental framework.
Our being’s natural aggression and feelings towards this event should be expressed, but in a way that does not cause harm to others or put us in violation of Universal Law. Anger is a natural expression of our being and should not be shoved away into the recesses of our minds where it can come back and attack us later. Look behind our anger and we will see a cry for help, either from oneself or others. Now while it is OK to hate the actions of others, it is only OK if we understand the feelings and motivations behind that hate and release them after we have analyzed them. I am not suggesting we suppress our emotions, for that in itself is not healthy. But what I am suggesting is, take a look at our anger, analyze it, feel it, express it within our creature-hood and then remove it. Know that the feeling is there, but do not dwell on it, for anger then turns into hate.
Many of us have much to learn about this subject since we seem to dwell on the idea that hatred of individuals is perfectly OK because we have allowed ourselves to feel this way through the manifestation of our perceived fears. We are running from our own fears and illusions. What are illusions? Illusions are the barriers of our knowledge. They create our fears. They are beliefs that are meaningless. They have no truth. Realize our truth, be one with oneself and we will have no fear. Break free of our illusions, change our reality and our mind will not be able to produce fear. We have the power to remove the illusions and stand in the path of love. Out of the ashes of fear will rise up love, our hidden truth. For when we remove the illusions, truth is always found. When we attack others, we only increase both our fears and the other person’s fears. If we help others, we release other our fears and the other person’s fears. As we face our fears our anger will subside and our hate will not be manifest.
Now we may say, “How am I going to do this, because I have such intense rage over the events of 9/11?” Having intense rage over the events of 9/11 is not going to do anything but further fuel the fires of the negative energies. It is not going to solve the global problem of terrorism. The energy of our hatred would be better off turned into understanding, to create a peaceful loving solution to help the people of the many nations of the world regain their sovereignty and independence and unite us back together as one.
MOVING FORWARD Look at the larger pictures as to why this happened and we will see that there were many global situations that led up to this event. I will be discussing them later in these Blogs. No one can hurt us personally unless we empower them to do so. Allow oneself to express our own feelings but then move on. If we harbor anger and hate we will in turn set our body up for disease of disaster. If we wish to remain healthy emotionally, physically and mentally, do not allow oneself to rationalize to oneself that these thoughts and feelings are legitimate. Although they have a legitimate place within our being, they are not legitimate with respect to manifesting another set of beliefs with anger and hate. We will only experience the domino effect.
Consciously be aware of what we have thought about our perpetrators, but at the same time understand that this is not a personal issue slated to go against our very nature. It is an event that took place, an event that involved many. Some of us were directly involved and are experiencing a loss with the transition of the energy of our loved ones to their home dimension. However, to harbor the hate and the anger only stifles the growth and the evolution of our soul. If indeed we want to walk through life angry at the world and the perpetrators of this event and others, we will only find oneself culminating these thoughts and events into a mass of frustration. It will only serve to confuse and alienate our being from itself. It is imperative for us to acknowledge what has transpired. If we cannot understand why it happened, do not dwell on the knowledge that we have not yet received and understanding of the events. Carry if forth as a memory to learn from and leave it as a memory.
Many good things will transpire from this event. Even though it does not seem to us that any good can come out of this, we will see humans waking up to the needs of each other. It will happen. I am not suggesting to the perpetrators that they have free rein to perpetrate their evil acts upon mankind/womankind. I am not suggesting that at all, for we have dealt and will deal with them separately. They are not free to run amok through society and create havoc on innocent beings who truly are trying to go to the light whether the are aware of it or not. The perpetrators will be put in check. They may try again and again. However we will not let them succeed with destroying our planet. It will not happen. They will be removed. Following is another exercise designed to assist us in evaluating the source of our anger and thus eliminating it.
EXERCISE: WORKING THROUGH YOUR THOUGHTS AND BELIEFS
I suggest to you that you examine one of those thoughts that produce your anger. Work the thought backwards and find out what actually transpired within your consciousness to allow the anger to manifest itself. Oftentimes you will find that you were expecting others to live up to your idealized goals. It is important to understand that others are experiencing their lives just as you are living yours. You are not all on the same level in your soul’s evolution. Therefore a situation that you may find offensive may appear to another to be the right thing. It is important to acknowledge those experiences without letting them turn into hate, anger and rage. There are many questions you could ask yourselves as to why you have stood firmly in your beliefs, but the object of this lesson is to find out if those thoughts are in alignment with the divine energies of The Creator. Ask yourself if you-the-soul will be able to evolve yourself towards the light with these beliefs. If not, then they should be abandoned and a more positive approach adopted. In breaking down old beliefs and barriers you will be able to receive new energies from the Hierarchy and move forward.
In a sense, we could truthfully say that the foundational tenets and energies of Christianity, and indeed of all of our World Religions, originated in the divine matriarchy. This makes sense, does it not? The cradle of civilization, then, including the religions of all of the world, was this matriarchy we are calling GA. It is the mother that gives birth to the child; it is the matriarchy the gives birth to society and the world’s civilizations as a whole. Period.
Quite naturally now, and conversely here if you follow my reasoning: within linear time, within the evolution of cultures, within this melting pot of GA, the patriarchy made itself known through the actions of humans who resisted the notion of the ascendancy of the feminine generally, but particularly in the religious and political domains.
Notice here that we are not ascribing competing values to the matriarchal and patriarchal concerns. Both occur within our system of reality. Both are valid expressions. However, if you remember our assertion that the human is born, quite literally, out of Love: the all encompassing Love of All That Is, you may also remember that the negative emotions and all emotions in between Love and hate are also experienced while living the life. In this same way, out of a desire to know itself to the nth degree – to the ultimate perimeters of consciousness, you see – All That Is sought to create “tension” within the creative domain of evolutionary consciousness manifestation, by embodying itself in the form of human behaving in ways different than Lovingly and Courageously. Thus, a different perspective was found within individual consciousness, within tribes, within the smallest most elementary forms of society. A choice was created. The choice was between Loving Understanding and Courage of fear, anger and everything else in between the two polarities. In the case of the GA civilization, it was quite abrupt, the transformation. There was a critical mass achieved within the population once a majority of patriarchal god worshippers was reached. Almost evernight, you might say, the change occurred, and it was experienced within the collective consciousness of the GA people that an era had ended. A paradise on Earth was no longer possible. I hope you sense my irony in this last statement.
The creation of positive realities is our responsibility. It is a personal issue. Because we are the creator in physical reality, it is a matter of how aware we become of our responsibilities. Now the great majority of us, it is true, will remain in a sleep state, in manner of speaking, right up until the time of the Dimensional Shift. On the surface it will appear as though we are unaware of the changes that our civilization is going though. Yet for most of us, there will be great changes already underway on the subtle levels. We are being prepared for the transformation in the dream-state. We are not aware of this, however, as we go about our waking reality. We prefer to “pretend” that life as usual continues to unfold, without any great upheavals to anticipate.
For this group of people the shift will take place overnight, quite literally. They will awaken one day and suddenly appreciate the vast changes they have undergone, as individuals and as parts of the collective. These are of the type of humans that wishes to “not think about” the future that much, for the future will “take care of itself.” This group comprises many millions of us on our Earth.
To pretend that business as usual is being experienced at this time in our history is a form of denial, a denial of the Soul Self. On the level of the Soul’s experiencing, we know full well that great changes are underway for us. Constantly we are reminded of this by Beings of Light as they transmit their messages into our mental sphere. It is a simple matter to ascribe these messages, as we stated in the first chapters of this Blog Series, to bad memories or other forms of “negative thinking.” Then we may go on our way, blissfully unaware of an ego/intellect level, of what our Soul most surely knows. Let us present an example to make this clear for the Blog Reader.
Suppose you are a typical human of the type I am describing. That is, you are one who discounts, perhaps as spiritual hogwash, the statements of your associates that describe the hearing of the voices of dead ancestors. Or else you deny accounts of those who describe the means to avoid a calamity they faced on the highway, as in an accident of some such thing, as coming from a nonphysical source. The intuitive voice is discounted here, you see. These humans may even ascribe the great luck of winners of various prizes or monies from the inside information given to them by their Angels or etheric advisers to mere coincidence. They deny the voice of the sacred in the lives of others, and so they must be consistent as they deny the voice of the sacred within their own lives.
The Consensus Reality Field is our term for the broader field of Reality Creation of which we are a part by virtue of our individually created world. Our Personal Reality Field serves us well within our niche in our environment. It is ” tailor made” according to our specifics, both conscious and unconscious. Now the broader field of Reality Creation may be thought of as comprising, for example, our neighborhood, our city, our state, our country, our hemisphere and finally our world – the planet Earth.
I will not bore you with more descriptions of how we create the Personal Reality Field. Suffice it to say that we and the others who live in our neighborhood, achieve a consensus while sleeping on what will be created, in so far as our neighborhood goes, upon awakening. Obviously this holds true for the manifestation of our city’s Consensus Reality, our state’s and so on.
It has been broadly suggested by some of you, in a very sensational manner, that God is dead. The phrase is quite actually a powerful suggestion. In a way, it represents the triumph of materialism and of science over the human consciousness. However, in truth quite literally, if you are alive, God is not dead. You are the creator of your world.
With All That Is you individually create your Personal Reality Field and collectively do you co-create your Consensus World Reality. So perhaps God with a capital G might also be described as the ensemble of humans, animals and elements on Earth at any one time. However, since the whole is to be found within the part in this holographic model of reality, even if you were the last person alive on Earth, God would STILL not be dead.
Our philosophical discussion begs the question, “If I am the creator of my world and All That Is is within each Conscious Unit or atom in physical reality, does this mean that I am also God or All That Is?” Here again, the issue is not merely one of semantics. Let me explain. Religious conditioning serves to disempower the religion practitioner. We are speaking in broad generalities here.
For the next project, The God Blog – the manuscript on All That Is. We hope to present for you an interesting and educational Blog on the creative source for all of our realities. However, I believe we would do well to provide you with some of the ideas and theories we will cover in that Blog, now in this current writing, so that you may better absorb and utilize these current messages from a Entity.
Obviously, because we are incessantly on the topic of Reality Creation here, the question of “who is the reality creator?” must arise just as incessantly. I do believe that it is more than a mere matter of semantics. Who is the creator of your Personal Reality? I have advised you over these many years that it is indeed YOU the Blog Reader of this Blog who creates your Personal Reality. Now where does God and where do the concepts of the Divine fit within this cosmology of a reality-creating human? Let us discuss this for just a moment.
To begin, you Dear BlogReader, are the epitome of All That Is. You are composed of divine energy constructs – the Conscious Units. In each and every one of the Consciousness Units you may find the holographic replica of EVERYTHING in all of our created realities. This EVERYTHING we are also referring to as All That Is. Now this metaphor of a holographic reality may serve us well here in this discussion. The simplified definition of a hologram for our purposes might be, “that which is everywhere all of the time.” This describes the fundamental nature of the Conscious Units as well as the multidimensional atoms theorized by some of our scientists. The researcher may make practical use of this theoretical construct by experimenting with experiencing the everywhere-all-the-time perspective. This perceptual vantage point is actually each and every Moment Point in space and time, so it does include past, present and future, in our terms.
This All That Is we have named to move beyond religious connotations of any kind. It is a safe generic title, is it not? Yet at the same, being All That Is, this construct would naturally hold within itself what we might call the Divine or the sacred or spiritual worlds. The visionary experience treats the researcher, or perhaps the accidental mystic, to the sensory extravaganza that is multidimensional existence. How does one then define this experience in retrospect? Invariably the human bows to authority in these matters, and again as we discussed in these Blogs, hands over their powers of Reality Creation to another higher, perhaps “more worthy” entity. Thus the gods and goddesses are born.
We do not intend to trivialize this god-making faculty of the human being. These self-created constructs are definitely “given a life of their own” through the ongoing support of “thought energy” through the prayers and other spiritual observances of countless Souls over the millennia. The personality aspects of the human are constellated “out” onto the physical world from “within.” Each of the separate Earthly cultures, then, creates their individual divinities according to the needs of their particular group. So that the Nordic peoples, for example, developed an entirely different pantheon than did the Indonesian Islanders. Different Divine beings evolve from the different cultural needs of the people who live in the collective. Now let us relate this to the individual researcher living in our current timeframe.
We have spoken before of the gratifying changes in consciousness that come with SoulEvolution. What we are really talking about here is a systematic approach to belief change. The example we used pertained to a change in belief regarding radial prejudice. In our example, the person had undergone a subtle transformation in consciousness by working on themselves” to the degree that they no longer feared or hated a particular race or group of people, but they were indeed experiencing growing affection for these people, for the race as a whole.
I described this feeling as a form of ambivalence, in that the person still harbored negative feelings for the group of people, but the positive feelings for the group were beginning to overtake the negative. This person was on the cusp of positive belief change. They were comfortable with the uncertainty they were experiencing, for as I said, they were working on themselves, trying to learn their Lessons, and they were, at least for the moment, able to resist recognizing the negative inner dialogue concerning the group of people. They were able to “turn down the volume,” you see, on their self-centered positive inner dialogue. So this is what belief change entails.
Let us discuss an issue that is quite obvious. Perhaps that is why we have neglected it thus far in these new Blog writings. The issue may be framed with a question: “Why assume my Blog Readers of our new Blog material are looking for spiritual understanding? If the path to Loving Understanding and Soul Evolution is so perilous and fraught with physical and psychological pain, why would anyone in their right mind want to pursue it?”
To begin, the Blog Readers, as I have observed them over the many years, are seekers. They are drawn to this work, I assume, because it “speaks to them.” Others of a different personality style and temperament, perhaps, would be drawn to other Teachings. Now it is true that the Older Blog material was quite barren of discussions of spiritual matters. This was an editorial decision. I have continually offered my spiritually-informed content to humanity. However, since it is the human co-creator of the Blog who creates in physical reality, it is the human co-creator who determines what they consider to be appropriate content for the Blog.
These new Blogs are the spiritual – you might say the divine – counterparts to the Old Blog material. If you are a student, to the spiritually – based material contained in these new Blogs. Now I have attempted to include weighty intellectual discussions in my new Blog work, to satisfy those of you who are focused on the physical dimension in which we live. The spiritual is merely the other side of this physical dimension. To become a well-rounded, educated human, you would do well to study both aspects of reality
The path to Soul Realization may be thoughts of as arduous by some. This is true. Certainly it is not for the meek and mild. It is easy to lose confidence and perhaps quit the journey before it has truly begun. As you examine some of your lifetimes within less than ideal circumstances . If you tune-in, for example, to a lifetime in which you are dying slowly from starvation or an illness of some kind, this witnessing may be so distasteful and shocking that you are thrown out of your meditative state. I would suggest that you remember in these cases, under these circumstances of harsh conditions, that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is the Soul Self. This ecstasy may help to motivate you to continue your studies.
Now suppose that you are experiencing negative realities within your current life. Should you attempt these explorations of your other Simultaneous Lives? Generally, I would suggest that you first gain some mastery over the exercises and conduct the various experiments I have outlines in my last two blog series.
We often use the phrase in these new Blog messages, “I am not telling you something you do not already know.” This is a statement of fact. We are merely reminding you the Blog Reader of that knowledge you have acquired in your many voyages into physical form. This information on the nature of reality and the use of energy, you first brought with you from your existence in non physical reality, before your “physical” birth into the human body. Now this knowledge also is a part of your FUTURE heritage, if you may understand this conundrum of mine.
Perhaps a better way to describe the relearning phenomenon in which your are engaged is this… bleedthroughs – the perceptual breakthroughs of your current self into other Simultaneous Lives – occur throughout your waking and dreaming periods. These are learning “field trips” in which your current conscious perception tunes-in on one or more of your past, other current or future lives. That is a function of the multitasking Soul Self as you awaken to your multidimensional experiencing. This is the acquiring of the Divine Knowledge we constantly refer to in these Blog writings.
On a basic level, you already know this material. That is why it seems so familiar to you. That is why it seems so true. You have perfected this system in your numerous future incarnations, again in your familiar terms, assuming the linear time illusion that is favored in our dimension. And so you see, I use the phrase “this you already know” as a device to hopefully trigger memories here. The little bleedthroughs that you experience I hope will keep you motivated enough to continue the voyage with us. These are tools the nonphysical beings use as we attempt to educate humanity. The phrase is a deep and empowered one, a profound suggestion. However, just accept it playfully and see where it leads you. This phrase may help you to wake-up to your greater reality.
QUESTION: If there were not the emotional complexes of hatred and anger in the consciousness of the Atlanteans, does this mean that the claims of some researchers that “Black Magicians” from Atlantis were instrumental in the down fall of the civilization and these beings currently exert an influence upon our world cultures are not true?
These effects of negativity are the results of the activities of the Negative Entities. These Entities exist out of time, they reside off of the space time continuum. In this way these influences are felt within any peoples, from whatever past, present, of future timeframe you are describing, when the human individuals recreate within their mental environments the negative states. Our media have named these Entities the Black Magicians of Atlantis, apparently, however, these Entities have also gone by the name Annunaki, as in our previous descriptions, and by, as I said , the multitude of names relating to the negative gods and goddesses, spirits, ghosts and what have you. It is all the same energy, however. The imagination of the individual marks this perceived energy with the particular attributes and characteristics of familial, tribal, country, world personalizations of these energy gestalts.
The Black Magicians of Atlantis, then, were inspired, enlivened, empowered by the same energy that drives the personifications of the devil gods, the goddesses of destruction, and so on, within our religions. It is all the same energy. It is all a part of All That Is – the great consciousness Entity exhibiting itself within physical reality through the activities of human and other beings.
Now with regards to the comments on anger, hatred, and the like.
I refer to our discussion of the best case scenario, the ideal of the individual, the society as a whole, the world culture, that exists within the pre-manifestation domains as a potential for those involved. You Dorian and your colleagues in physical reality exist within your collectives, of whatever type and stripe. You and your friend create your ongoing relationship according to Gestalts of Consciousness within your consciousness representing all of the “good” AND the “bad” that life has to offer.
Here, the good may be described as Loving appreciation for your friend, shall we say, and the bad may be described as thoughts and feelings of anger, denial, fear, and so on. These Gestalts of Consciousness assist the human in the creation of realities on all levels within all collectives. Your relationship, Dear Blog Reader, if it is of a wholesome Loving nature, reflects your reliance on these “good” aspects of consciousness.
Now if your relationship was one of hatred, constant negativity in thought and emotion and behavior, you might be said to be focusing on the negative Gestalts of Consciousness in your reality creations with regards to relationships. In the BIG relationships of society, country, global collectives, then, you also have your collective reliance on different Gestalt of Consciousnesses– negative, positive or somewhere in between, and of course these influences fluctuate throughout time.
Now there are times for us, as a researcher and a learner of Lessons, when you may seem to be engaged in ardently co-creating your reality in a very responsible fashion. We are “doing everything right,” let us say, and diligently attending to the transformation of Negative Emotions into their divine opposites. We are doing so very well in this endeavor that you perhaps feels as though you should be rewarded in some way, feeling that the Powers That Be could “have mercy” on you, so that you might relax and enjoy yourself for a period of time. Yet let us say that you still continue to experience a challenging existence with a series of quite negative events serving to “drive home” this harsh reality.
“Am I being singled out for punishment,” you might ask yourself. Now we must at times such as these, revert back to first principles. You create your own reality. If you are feeling victimized, you are ultimately the tormentor. If you are in the midst of painful, negative personal dramas, you are ultimately the director, the producer and also the cast of these dramas. You are composed of many personality aspects within your Personal Reality ego/intellect. But your greater personality of Higher Consciousness also participates through a lending of energy to the “dramatic flow” of the events in your life. In this way, you are the whole – the cosmos – an you are also the individual living component of the whole. I believe I must elaborate further on this phenomenon for your ULTIMATE understanding.
The reason that you sense a familiarity in the scenes of your everyday life, as is all of the characters in these daily dramas of yours are your “relations,” is that everyone you meet and interact with moment-to-moment is indeed your relation. The relevant aspects of your Higher Self are reflected through these other personalities relative to the learning of your individual, SoulFamily and Entity Lessons. Naturally there would be a familiarity in this dance of synchronicity you know as physical reality. You act in concert, then, at any one time and all of the time, with your cohorts, keeping your appointments with “perfect strangers,” to enact your behaviors in the quest for Value Fulfillment. We shall have more to say on this phenomenon in our forthcoming Blogs on the SoulFamily.
This is your life, you see. This dramatic and sometimes comedic performance in Earthly flesh is your life, for which you have PURPOSEFULLY incarnated. You are experiencing both the positive and the negative life has to offer. Yes it is true that you inevitably age and die, perhaps being subject to much pain and suffering; yet there is also joy in these sequential moments of your life. With the proper attitude you may even experience your suffering moments in what can be described as “joyful appreciation.” This may be difficult to comprehend for some of us. Let us have an example of how this paradox of feeling and behavior might be experienced by any one of us as we go about our meaningful lives.
As we awaken to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension, we will gradually become more aware of our Simultaneous Lives. Within these lives we are living the brand spectrum of existence. Thus, as we retain memories of a life lived within a society as a tortured being who daily subjected to painful living experiences, we may compare this life with our current existence in the modern world. Do you see how we might experience a sense of joyful appreciation for our current life? Relative to other lives we are living in the midst of great pain and suffering, our current existence may be regarded as joyful and complete.
We always have a choice, Dear Blog reader. The great question for you as a physical being is this: when you awaken to your true reality, will you choose to create your life of Lessons consciously, or will you try to escape? Many of you well know what I am saying in these paragraphs, for you are well on your way to awakening fully. Yet some of you may look on these new Blogs of mine with the all too critical eye of the ego. Fear, cynicism, competition rule the roost of the ego. I would ask you to pull back from this type of scrutiny and attempt to use the perspective of the “awakened one.” The heart is open as anger is transmuted into Loving Understanding. Fear is turned to Courage and faith.
The awakened or enlightened human may choose to be creative with the creation of events within their own reality. You may postpone the event of your physical death, for example, and undergo TheTransition at a later date, perhaps learning more and gaining the Divine Knowledge from these additional months or years of living experience.
This is how our Third-Dimensional system was “set up.” It is an arena for the experiencing of Negative Emotions. However, eventually we must face this aspect of our personality. We each are called upon to address the negative thoughts within our mental sphere and the negative events in our existence and the Negative Emotions that “appear” to be caused by the negative events. Briefly, it is a matter of addressing the negative in our momentary experiencing and “owning” it. The awakening human recognizes their responsibility in the creation of negative realities.
Wisdom Lessons, then, refer to this two-step activity. First the researcher, through experimentation and analysis in the laboratory that is the Personal Reality, arrives at Findings specific to their Life Lessons. These Findings may have been “hidden from view” for many years. They represent the hard truth of the developing personality over time. None of us are perfect. The human in physical incarnation may strive for protection, but that state of being is reserved for other dimensional-experiences.
So the truth is made known through experimentation. What we have been denying is revealed to us in all of its harsh and intense glory. Now what does the awakening human do with this information? In our system the method is clear: with the developing skills of creating Loving Understanding and Courage out of anger, denial and fear, the researcher transforms the difficult material into its divine opposite.
Now this Loving Understanding entails acceptance of the negative Findings on all levels of creaturehood. We are responsible, as I have said in earlier Blogs. We are the creator of our world and the events within our world. Accepting our responsibility for our creations is the necessary first step here. The second step entails understanding and gaining of wisdom of Divine Insight. This is accomplished by allowing the Soul Self to perceive our world. The ego/intellect is gently placed to the side and the Higher Consciousness is brought through the portal of creation – the Ajna center directly between the eyes. This may be accomplished by mediatizing or visualizing the Divine as coming through our physical body construct. We will naturally create our own imagery, thought and emotion for this exercise. Throughout the new material I have given many techniques to accomplish this.
In this Blog we shall hopefully provide you with the opportunity to address the most pressing and important Lessons for you in your current existence. Now truly ALL of your Lessons are “wisdom” Lessons, in that we experience Soul Evolution when you are engaged in learning these Lessons.
So that the gaining of prosperity within a life of perceived lack and poverty, may be considered the gaining of wisdom, as well as the facing of perceived extremely difficult, traumatic material from your past may be considered the gaining of wisdom. However, in this material we will attempt to provide you with the motivation you require to do what you must do in facing your most difficult Lessons – the Lessons of Negativity, pain and suffering.
For I trust you would agree that the positive Lessons – of Love, of experiencing prosperity, of developing friendships – need much less motivation for the average human to engage in and “do the homework” required, than do the Lessons of Negativity. The Lessons of Love will take care of themselves over time. Whereas with the Lessons of Negativity, the primary reason we have not yet learned these Lessons is that we are indeed avoiding them.
The Lessons of negativity can be faced now. We have the tools to deal with these Lessons. Now this is the way that it works for us with all types of behaviors: whatever elicits the perception of satisfaction or happiness is pursued relentlessly. Whatever seems to create the Negative Emotions is most usually avoided. There, of course, exceptions to this rule in every life. We have noted previously in this material the tendency for the “depressed” person to create Reality Constructs that perpetuate the state of depression, as though there were a certain muted satisfaction in depression.
Generally, however, the negative states are avoided by lost of us. For example: this is particularly true in the developed nations as we call ourselves. We are certainly “developed” in so far as access to material wealth is concerned. However, it is the rest of the world’s peoples who have the edge in matters of spiritual understanding, spiritual wealth. In the developed countries we are easily diverted from spiritual considerations by the many objects of mass consumption made available to us through our shopping centers, for example, through our mass media, and so on.
You Dear Blog Reader, are easily diverted in the moment by these requests from our creators of ” shiny things.” We are easily distracted for we are “waiting for an excuse” to avoid our Lessons. As we have suggested in these Blogs, like children, many of us would rather not consider our Lessons in physical or psychological pain, we buy something to “make ourselves feel better.”
As we know, it is the adrenaline and other substances released in our body that creates this “feeling better” state of consciousness. Over time we become dependent on this satisfied emotional state and you may find oneself purchasing more than we need or can afford to keep “happy.” The Lessons of Negativity are thus avoided.
Those that are experiencing these harsh conditions – that they have chosen these lives. Also, we are reminding that they may be on the end of their incarnational trajectories, and may be headed for the higher realms. This may be a good motivation for some to begin using our techniques to transform the negativity they are experiencing into Courage and Loving Understanding. This Soul work is necessary before one may progress to the higher-dimensional realms.
HYPOTHESIS: You may use the advice of your guides in games of chance.
With regards to availing yourself of the assistance of your Guides in matters of prosperity, monetary increase and the like, I must present to you this fact of existence: although you may certainly ask your guides for “divine guidance” as to what are the winning lottery numbers, or what are the winning machines at the casino, and so on, you still remain within the matrix of probabilities in your Reality Creation activities. This matrix includes the casino itself, if I may use this example, and everything in the casino.
Now let us use an example in a particular form of gambling here, to further this disclaimer. In this example, the subject is accessing their Guides while they are engaged in placing bets on the numbers of a roulette wheel game in a normal casino somewhere, in one of our gambling capitals in the U.S.A., in Europe or elsewhere. Let us say that the Guides are doing their best in assisting the student’s experiment in Prosperity-Creation and they are presenting possible winning numbers into the mental environment of the student telepathically.
As you know, there are innumerable probable permutations of events possible within each successive moment of the existence of this theoretical student. Additionally, the outcome of any roll of the dice or spin of the ball in these matters is not known and identified in “bedrock reality,” as we say, until the very last microsecond of the activity of the dice, the ball or the card in any particular instance. The outcome of any gambling event, then, is a cooperative effort human, every machine, every cubic foot of space, every piece of furniture within that casino.
Also, it is important to remember that each of us in physical reality, in whatever Reality Creation activities are involved, are doing so for the learning of particular Lessons. Our Guides are not allowed to present information to us that would interfere with the learning of these Lessons. Let me say that if you are to attempt these experiments in Prosperity Creation, that you first examine your issues with regards to prosperity – the monetary Lessons that you are to learn while in your current body in your current timeframe.
Now if you are to conduct your Prosperity Creation experiments in the field, you will have previously committed the particulars of this experiment to memory. You will also have done your belief work and your “homework” regarding Lessons for this lifetime concerning abundance. Because you will be out in the world conducting your research, it will be necessary to have perfected conducting the Ritual Sanctuary and the creation of the Trance State while in public.
This experiment is concerned with prophecy. You shall be predicting the momentary actives of the elements in a game of chance. Let us assume you are in a public setting somewhere, engaged in this game.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Enter your relaxed state and enter your Trance State. Now conduct your experiment of calling in your Guides. All of these preparatory activities can be an internal process for you, without any outward signs. As in our experiments, it may be wise to assume the playful attitude of a child in these endeavors. And overly-serious attitude may short-circuit the intuitive processes.
Now call upon your Inner senses, if entirely appropriate, to reveal that information you may require to “win.” To accomplish this, you might project your Auric Vision out onto the gaming table and allow your Inner Senses to create a visual representation of the winning numbers, cards, and so on. If you are oriented to sound, perhaps you could ask your Guides to whisper to you the information required. Whatever sensory input you are comfortable with, arrange for your Prosperity Guides and perhaps your Energy Personality to feed to you this information at the appropriate times.
The researcher may expect varying levels of good fortune – positive Reality Creation – to be made manifest in this experiment. You are challenging the “laws” of chance. Any wins beyond these laws, therefore, are an indication that you are on the right track. When you are successful, remember the state of consciousness you embodied immediately prior to the win and reproduce that state as best you can toward future wins. This game of chance is indeed a game. Have fun with it, just as I have suggested you have fun also in the creation of your life in the other domains.
FINDINGS – Remember for future reference the feeling tones and states of consciousness that signal a winning game.
HYPOTHESIS: You can receive advice from your future and probable selves.
Let us assume that you currently experiencing lack in some area of your life. Now the idea of lack is tied to a veritable field of multidimensional negative experiencing. Not only are you experiencing lack in your current Reincarnational Existence, then you are connected to these other lives so that each of the personalities experiencing these lives will sense their negative states of consciousness within yours
Fortunately, within your Simultaneous Lives, including your probable existences, there are also those who are experiencing the opposite of lack – abundance. You shall attempt to contact these lives in your meditations in order to gather information on how you may also create abundance within your own current life. It is a form of sharing within a family, in a manner of speaking, a family of consciousness. And just as you might in your current existence ask for and receive advice from an uncle or cousin on how to invest your money wisely, you may inquire on the subtle levels what your other lives are doing to create abundance.
If you have been with us in these Blogs of ours, trying out some of the exercises and at least attempting some of the experiments, by now you will have gained some glimpses into the unknown reality – the world inhabited by your Multidimensional Counterparts throughout space and time. For you this experiment may reveal information that will quicken your journey, as you look to expand your vistas of perception. If you are just joining us in these esoteric pursuits, this experiment may strike you as rather preposterous, entirely too farfetched to even consider attempting. I urge you to make the effort in spite of your doubt, in spite of your inexperience. You may be pleasantly surprised.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax your body and enter a fairly deep Trance State. The object in this experiment is to seek contact with your Simultaneous Lives and probable existences that are experiencing abundance. With this goal as the focus of your intent – your Divine Will – simply reflect on these words as you go deeper and deeper in your meditation. Now you are guided by your Intent here. The consciousness will naturally make those changes necessary to allow contact with the Souls experiencing abundance. It may be best not to force the issue. Trying too hard – attempting to direct the flow of energy – may be counterproductive. Let the mind wander, in other words. Remember, there is an assumption in these investigations that you are being watched over by nonphysical beings. You will be guided to your destination of you will only “go with the flow” of consciousness.
You know what an abundant feeling “feels like.” As you perceive with your Inner Senses the mental environments of your lives as they express these positive emotions, go toward these emotional expressions. Feelings of Courage and Loving Understanding may arise here. Confidence and self-assurance my be readily discernible. If you are sensing these emotional tones, you may be assured that you are on the right track. If you wish to go further with this exploration, ask for names and dates of these other lives. Go as far as you wish in your investigations seeking “proof” that you are making these connections. Return to full sensory awareness when you sense that you are done.
The information you requested in Trance may come to you in the form of impulses, as you go about your waking reality, just as we have suggested in our previous Blog Series. Might I suggest that the emotional tones that “carry” these impulses into your awareness are of the abundant, prosperous variety? That is how you will be able to identify their origin. A always, use your free will to either ignore or act on these impulses.
FINDINGS – Document impulses you have received from your other lives as a result of these enquiries.
HYPOTHESIS: Positive suggestions help to create prosperous realities.
As you may now be well advanced in your achieving of the Trance State, through participating in the exercises in this Blog, we will simply present this experiment as one of self-conditioning or self-hypnosis through reading positive affirmative statements or listening to recorded positive suggestions while in Trance. As we have discussed earlier in this Blog Series, your beliefs and their emotional underpinnings may be more readily accessible than you might think. After all, your beliefs are busy nonstop creating (on a subconscious level) your perceived reality. With the approach that this is not hard to do, it is possible to expect the Idea Constructs supporting your beliefs to be there in your mental environment, observable indeed, without attending years of therapy.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The preliminary work entails an exploration of the consciousness, seeking out those thoughts, images and emotional content that support the beliefs. Enter alight Trance and with pen and paper or through talking into a recorder, you might spontaneously have a discussion with yourself on what are the problematic beliefs. Document what first comes to your mind and go from there. There is an underlying assumption here that your Inner Self is primed to reveal this information to you. Your Soul Self is well aware of this voyage of yours and is undoubtedly waiting to assist you. Simply take down what this aspect of your consciousness is trying to tell you. Document without censoring. You may analyze later.
Come Back To Full Sensory Awareness.
After this initial stage of information gathering is complete, consider the opposites of the problematic beliefs or a positive adaptation of the beliefs and write them down or record these suggestions for playback. Enter your Trance State again and either read the suggestions to yourself or listen to the playback on your recorder.
For example: In your belief work you may have discovered that you have a circular inner comment that is consistently voicing the opinion of someone from your past: “You are stupid. You will never succeed.” Using our technique for revising this unfortunate comment without any true conviction behind it, you see – we might create the following; “You have a strong natural intelligence. A successful life awaits you.” You could then inscribe several different permutations of this message on a paper to read while in a light Trance. Or you could read the various suggestions into your recorder for playback while in a deeper Trance. The object here, which may seem obvious to you now, is to instill the positive suggestions into the mental awareness over time, until the historical comment is supplanted by the improved positive suggestions.
FINDINGS – Document in some form your belief work and your attempts to supplant problematic beliefs with positive suggestions.
Your beliefs have created the precise level of lack that you are experiencing. Your existence is a direct result of your Reality Creation activities according to beliefs that you hold. Any example of poverty or lack within your Personal Reality, therefore, can be traced back to a specific Idea Construct that you perceive as being quite true. In The Healing Regimen we presented an experiment in belief adaptation. In this new regimen we will present a similar experiment with a different focus.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Assume your Trance State through your preferred method. Now you are relaxed. Now you are focused on searching for “causes” within your mental environment for the lack you are experiencing. These causes are your beliefs, however you may wish to visualize this concept. What does a belief represent to you, in so far as symbols, feelings, sensations of various types are concerned? Again, it is often the case that the first thing that comes to mind may hold the most information. Your Inner Self is attempting to tell you something, you see, to reveal something of value to you. The information may be quite complex in construction, as in a profound revelation – an epiphany – or quite simple, as in a fleeting emotion of some kind.
For example: suppose that your first thought within the Trance State was the statement, “This is not going to work,” and what if this statement operates as a powerful loop – a rumination – within your consciousness. If this were the case, do you see how difficult it might be for you to approach these studies and experimentation and be successful to any degree? Now this is an extremely common first discovery for the explorer of nonphysical reality. This simple Idea Construct is quite powerful in its simplicity, when it is looped, you see, when it is repeated incessantly within the mental environment. It has the power to adversely affect the Reality Creation activities on all levels, not merely the financial.
Now what if you were to revise the phrase somewhat: “That may work.” Now there is hope. Now there is the opportunity for change. Here in this experiment, using your Intent, what we are referring to as Divine Will, you alter the negative rumination – the substance of negative belief – to make room for hope and opportunity. “This may work. This Spiritual Prosperity Program may work.” This is a positive rumination that may assist you in the creation of positive realities. As you witness your improving reality, your beliefs about what is possible are changed. You are opening up. You are accepting the possiblity of positive change in you world.
We covered Time Travel in my past Blog series. Now I shall add to that material in relation to the Atlantis civilization. The truth is, what we would call Time Travel was a common occurrence in the great civilizations of our perceived past. There are reasons for this, having to do with issues of shared spirituality, an appreciation for the natural forces of nature, and a cosmology shared by the people that allowed and even nurtured the exploring of non-physical reality. None of these features are shared by great numbers of us in our modern time frame. That is why Time Travel, for the most part, is thought of as an impossibility: a joke.
The Atlantean researchers of non-physical reality perfected the spinning of crystalline structures into vehicles. The researchers would, as we said, place themselves within the structure and allow their Inner Senses to be amplified and tuned by the crystal mass. In this way, the Intention of the researcher to visit a particular time frame was made manifest within their own mental environment. You may also compare this activity to the sacred voyages of Shamans and other seekers of visions in our many world cultures. The effects are the same here. The technologies are different, that is all.
HYPOTHESIS: The emotional body displays the causes and remedies of lack.
In this experiment you will use your Inner Sense of sight, your Auric Vision, to perceive the emotional elements within your consciousness that prevent you from experiencing The Abundant Universe. This vision of your emotional issues relative to prosperity may take the form of a dramatic vignette displayed for you as you close your eyes to relax.
Within this dramatic presentation you may witness, for example, a replay of an event from your perceived past, in which you experienced disempowerment in some form. Perhaps you were robbed by a bully when you were a child. Perhaps as adult had suggested to you that you would never be successful in your life, that you were “not good with money” or “irresponsible.”
The communication stream from your inner world may take the form of a narrative, perhaps a rumination of a series of words or sentences. The focus here is on “causes” of present lack in your reality, and so you may remember words and phrases that portray you as, in some way, incompetent or unable to ever succeed. You may have a sudden feeling of distaste, or fear, or other Negative Emotion that acts as a catalyst, allowing you to go deeper in your exploration to the roots of your current less-than-satisfactory life condition.
As in our previous investigations in this Research Project, the vision may have elements other than sight, i.e. smell, taste, hearing. And again, please be prepared to face some difficult material – ideas and images you may have kept undercover for many years.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax your physical body in the way that most pleases you. Close your eyes and breathe deeply for a few moments. Remember that the vision of the emotional issues may be perceived as existing within the torso of your body, within the heart region. The focus here is on causes, most probably from your past, of present financial insecurity. These are emotional injuries sustained during difficult Lessons learned usually in childhood in your current and your other lives. In your current life, these Negative Emotions have sustained themselves over time, preventing you from experiencing The Abundant Universe that is your birthright.
You may re-experience a specific event that occurred in your perceived past that represented a break from your innocent childhood experiencing and marked a new trajectory of development for you as a maturing “socialized” human. Perhaps you may view that point where you gave up some of your Reality Creation energies to authority figures: parent, teacher, relative. The feeling tone of your experiences will help you to determine where to go with this experiment. Ask for direction from your Guides. Use your Inner Senses as a compass. Your intuition will guide you if you are clear and persistent.
FINDINGS – Immediately document in some way your experiences with reading The Emotional Body.
HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist in the Spiritual Prosperity Program.
Can you see that you are pursuing these studies for a purpose? You are well into this description of the Spiritual Prosperity Program. I believe it is safe to say that you are concerned about the level of prosperity that you are currently experiencing. In other words, in the nomenclature of this teaching, one of your Lessons for your current existence might well be to investigate the possibilities for increasing abundance in your life.
Now you may have been drawn to this new Blog material for a variety of reasons. But can you accept the possibility that perhaps the main reason is that you were “prompted” from within to look at the new Blog material. If you can accept this premise, then perhaps you may take it one step further, and admit the possibility that you are already in touch with non-physical beings.
Inner prompting are often communications from non-physical beings. Whether you believe that it was you guide who has prompted you, or another Spirit Guide, or simply your individual human consciousness – the amalgam of “conversations” between you and your Reincarnational Existences – do you see that you are possibly already quite well along on your path of belief change? Many of the exercises, experiments and techniques in the new material are for the express purpose of belief change in the Blog Reader. Your belief in a non-physical reality populated by Beings of Light and other Gestalts of Consciousness is a prerequisite for our continued growth as a Soul.
There are specific non-physical beings available within your mental environment that may be enlisted in the achievement of Spiritual Prosperity. You may refer to these Light Bodies as Prosperity Guides, if you wish. They are specially gifted beings that have served as financial advisors to humanity. The Crystal Light Messengers. They exist just outside of our Earthly realm as Fifth-Dimensional Beings. Simply have the Intent that you will contact your Prosperity Guides while in your times of meditation within your sacred state of Sanctuary. Then you will meet with success.
The researcher may also use the EnergyPersonality and other Helpers in this program. Now this is assuming you have already made these connections. If you have not, please simply ” pretend” that you have made these connections and then conduct the following experiment.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax you body. Attain your Trance State. Here we are “opening the gates.” you might say, to your divine consciousness. Now you are protected; you are in your state of Sanctuary. As you open the gates you are doing so with the security that comes with divine protection. The Negative Emotions have no place here. Only the Divine is made manifest under of an opening gate or other portal, visualize your assistants in attaining prosperity and abundance crossing the threshold and coming into your awareness.
The non-physical beings of whatever stripe and purpose, emit Light according to the conditions of their particular existences. Vibration, you see, is their calling card. It is with your Inner Senses, also, that you may distinguish one Guide from another, procure their names, ask what services they offer, and so on. Use your Inner Senses in the Best way that suits you for this purpose.
Reality Face Virtual Wire Rack Mask Psyche
This experiment may take just a few minutes. As we have stated elsewhere, your Guides are Literally on the threshold of your awareness, waiting to be acknowledged. Now some of my Blog Readers are perhaps unaware of how easily this is done. They are expecting something difficult to accomplish. They are therefore quite surprised when they encounter one or more of these diving Guides on just the most cursory of exploratory voyages. So I suggest to you that you approach this experiment as one that is easily done. Here you are a child, you see, having some fun with your imagination. When you are done having fun with your nonphysical associates, give yourself the suggestion to return to full sensory awareness in Third-Dimensional Reality.
FINDINGS – Document the names of your Guides and the service they offer.
Hypothesis: You may manage soul family relationships in the Trance State.
We have stated before in these new Blogs series, that each and every human being that you meet – including the delivery person and the teller at the local bank – is in your life at the moment to teach you something. Many of the more intense relationships you create with these humans are Soul Family connections. Of this broad group of humans who are within your field of experiencing to interact with you in the learning of Lessons regarding the acquisition of money and the perception of the Abundant Universe.
This statement may bring to mind events from your own life in which you were quite intrigued with the good fortune that came your way, at hands of one of these mysterious extended family members. Or perhaps you were “taken for a ride” by one of your acquaintances, and relieved of some of your hard-earned money. Either way, you were learning Lessons from Soul Family members. These interactions often have an element of Fate attached to them, as though they were “meant to be,” to coin a phrase from our New Agers. However, as you know, you and your colleagues are making it happen. You are just currently unaware of the intricacies of this cooperative effort.
The perspective of experiencing Lessons from within a broad collective called the Soul Family can be learned. I suggest you conduct the following experiment with the idea that you are already embodying this perspective.
PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The first step here would be to identify those Soul Family members who may act as partners in the realization of abundance you require. Using your Inner Senses you may home-in on these personalities in your times of meditation. Some you may have already identified within your field of experiencing as potential allies. This is a form of communicating with the Energy Personality of another. You will be identifying specific characteristics of personality and Soul that will assist you in creating good fortune within the lives of all of you, everyone benefits, you see.
Now this group may be small in number or it may be quite Large. Either way, you will be working with these humans on the subtle levels. You might think of yourself as the business manager of this assembly, and you are working with their High Selves for mutually beneficial purposes. This is you Intent. You are grounded in your sense of Divine Will to communicate your interests to these humans via their Spirit Guides – their Energy Personalities. If EP of the Soul Family member resists, do not press further. You are not to force yourself on others in any way. This is a sacred form of communication. If you meet with resistance, move on to another potential partner. In the mundane world, there may be no signs that you are interacting with these people in any special fashion. “Business as usual,” as we say. However, do note the attainment of group goals that could have never been realized had these secret connections not been made.
FINDINGS – Document the establishment of connections with Soul Family members and the realization of Soul Family goal in matters of abundance.
Perception creates reality in the Third Dimension. When you visualize and embody The Abundant Universe, you are CREATING and SUSTAINING this Gestalt of Consciousness. You are withdrawing from this template of creation, the highly personalized elements in the form of Conscious Units that you require to create the reality of abundance within your Personal Reality Field. You can’t help yourself, you see. Your thoughts are composed of Conscious Units. All Consciousness seeks manifestation of itself. By simply thinking of something you lend your efforts towards creating it.
Now we each have our idealized view of the perfect world. You know quite well what objects, what types of people, and what behaviors would exist in this world. For your own reasons, however, you choose not to put your energies towards manifesting The Abundant Universe. As I have said to you, your “reasons” for doing something or not doing something in your life – the denials. The intellectualization – serve to aid you in encountering and experiencing your Lessons.
For example: consider a human that finds themselves within a precious financial situation. All is lost financially for whatever reasons in physical reality. Additionally, this human makes matters worse by continually blaming themselves for the financial loss. It is a personal issue. They feel as though they have failed personally as well as financially.
Now this negative assessment of the Personal Reality, as you may remember, serves to perpetuate it. The person is trying all of the domains of existence into one know. They are in effect saying, “I have failed financially because I am a failure personally. I am a bad person, an undeserving person.” The entire existence is colored with this negative assessment.
How does this person perceive and create The Abundant Universe under these drastic conditions? Remember, this is an unconscious process. If you wish to this Gestalt of Consciousness that is your personalized Abundant Universe, then you must go to the unconscious and explore. It would be wise to use the emotionally neutral state of Trance. In the Trance State the subject may gain a broader view of the life and the conditions of existence. The Agenda of negative Reality Creation is easily interrupted by the Trance. The opportunity for introducing changes into the reality creation strategies is made available.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Attain your Trance State. If you are in your quiet meditation area, relax your body, breathe deeply, rest upon the floor or do whatever behaviors assist you in creating the Trance. If you are out in the world, you may, as we have suggested in the last Blog, tie the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture such as snapping the fingers, rubbing a good-luck piece or whatever suits you.
In this experiment we will assist the researcher in withdrawing from the negative reality of lack and “waking up” in The Abundant Universe. This has a distinctly magical quality to it.
As you are resting comfortably, out in the world or in your meditation area in your home, within your Trance State, embody the perception of entering the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling The Abundant Universe in this Blog. A playful approach here may be best. As child would, imagine yourself in your inner world, coming into a kingdom, perhaps, in which all of the desired Reality Constructs that populate your personalized Abundant Universe are displayed. You are venturing out and away from your normal world to visit this inner world where the outer world is created.
As we have suggested in our other experiments in using the Trance State, the information stream may be sensed in various ways. The Gestalt of Consciousness may present itself to you “full blown” as in an intense, multisensory visionary experience. Or you may get your “glimpse” of this idealized state as though you were receiving a Holographic Insert or other inspirational missive from the nonphysical world. You may hear sounds and voices that represent abundance and good fortune for you personally. You may also simply experience a “good feeling,” a pervasive sensation of grace, a feeling that all is well with you in your world.
As you receive you data, note the information for documenting later, then proceed to go deeper into you relaxed state and uncover more Findings. Typically, because the emotions experienced in perceiving The Abundant Universe are so positive, you will be motivated to continue your explorations. When you feel as though you have enough information from the session, return to full sensory awareness of Third Dimensional Reality, bringing with you The Abundant Universe that you have perceived/created into existence on the subtle levels. If you are out and about, on a park bench let us say, snap your fingers, rub your good-luck piece. If you are indoors in your meditation area, give yourself the suggestion that you will return to your normal awareness with the full memories of The Abundant Universe intact.
Of course you may use all of the Metaphorical Tools we have described in our series of new Blogs. An Important addition you might consider is the creation of TheWell of Good Fortune, or some other metaphor tailored to your own sensitive. Here the object is to call your symbols of wealth, good fortune, havingness, and combine them into one powerful image, phrase, song, object or what have you.
Give the Metaphorical Tool a fitting name. Empower it with your thoughts and your limitless energies. In my example, you might empower with your energies a visualized well, perhaps somewhere in a beautiful forest. Within this well is the abundance and good fortune you desire. Going to TheWell of Good Fortune, then, might be a simple matter of imagining yourself entering a forest, observing The Well, and visualizing the desired Reality Constructs coming up and out of the well, perhaps as you turn the crank. The Metaphorical Tools are easy to create. They are most effective when you can feed them your divine energy. Personalize these tools and make them your own.
The Radio Dial Metaphor may also be ably used in Spiritual Prosperity. Just as you perhaps used this tool to tune-in the healing elements and tune-out the disease-producing Gestalts of Consciousnesses in The Healing Regimen, here you may use your Radio Dial to tune-in on the impulses from your Simultaneous Lives, for example, that seek to direct your vision toward The Abundant Universe. You would then, at the same time, tune-out the impulses and influences from Negative Entities, other existences that are experiencing lack and those Negative Emotions that hamper your attainment of Spiritual Prosperity.
Now for some experimentation in Spiritual Prosperity.
The technique of suspending disbelief will assist you in creating further moments of prosperity after you are successful in creating a “glimpse” of The Abundant Universe. For example: suppose you have completed your investigative work, you have gone within to examine your personal conceptualization of The Abundant Universe. Your idea of abundance, for the time being, might involve, perhaps, receiving an unexpected windfall, a sum of money, several hundred dollars let us say, in the mail. Now you have done your work here. You have attached Love to all of your though-forms. You have magically anticipated this gift and now you are witnessing the manifestation.
At the moment of realization, when you connect the windfall to your Spiritual Prosperity behaviors and thoughts depending on your “issues” – self-image. Experiencing of Negative Emotions – you may find it difficult or quite easy TO ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY for this creative work. If you have doubts and ascribe the gift to coincidence, you diminish your power in the moment. However, if you confidently express your gratitude, Loving Understanding and Courage in that moment, you are adding to your powers of manifestation. You are suspending disbelief – the negative assessment of the act of manifestation – for just the moment. Then you would successively suspend disbelief in your growing powers, moment-to-moment in the “future.”
Suspending disbelief is a form of silencing the internal censor – that aspect of your consciousness that wishes to keep you entranced in the certain of status quo realities. Over time, this voice will be replaced by the encouraging message from Beings of Light – your Guides who seek to assist you in expanding your awareness.
Let me digress on this point… it is ALL LOVE,Dear Blog Reader. Even the millionaire banker, then, is created from Love. Yet us just say for the sake of argument, that the banker is war profiteer. Through supporting armament manufacturers or the military, this banker prospers from death, hatred, war. “What good,” you might ask, “does my Loving construct do in this context? “Vote with your pocketbook,” by selecting the most appropriate, Loving and peaceful institutions with which to do business, and then doing business with these institutions .
In this way, you are supporting, on both the physical and the metaphysical levels, the fulfillment of positive values. This takes research, of course. This activity may be thought of as the assessment of the Personal Reality Field with regards to the financial or business aspects of your life. Where will you put the Loving and Courageous energies of your being? From what institutions will you withhold your creative energies? Again, this is all about allying with select Gestalts of Consciousness, Entities, Beings of Light. This is conscious co-creation.
As I suggested our practice of giving to worthy causes only when we may claim a deduction from our taxes, is not Giving in truest sense. This is not the magical act of that we are teaching in this new material. To be honest, it is a sad form of money exchange, this corporate giving that is celebrated in our world. Many of us who give in this fashion expect something in return. Whether it is a tax deduction, God’s grace or simply the good karma that is so valued by the modern human, something is expected in return for the giving. Might I state it bluntly here? We taint this process with our bargaining. In Giving there are only the communication streams of Beings of Light. There is only the transformation of Light into something else. There is no bargaining.
I believe it might help us to think of our Giving of our money, our time, our Loving Understanding to others is simply the transformation of our Light Energy into what is needed by the recipient of the Giving. From this perspective, you may envision the immediate transformation of our gift of Light into what is desired, what is required by the receiver. In this context, the recipient uses their Reality Creation energies to collaborate with us on the subtle levels in the co-creation of the necessary constructs.
Take for example here my previous description of the children in our poor undeveloped countries. I am not suggesting that we refuse the tax deduction we “deserve” for contributing to their cause – though that would indeed demonstrate our commitment to true Giving – but please try attaching your powerful Light energies to the gift when we do make our donations for the purchase of food, medical care, and so on. And remember, Dear Blog Reader, there is no pity here in this true reality of the Soul. We are equals on the subtle levels, equals who are merely learning different Lessons. Do not give because you feel sorry for the other; give because you acknowledge the opportunity to endorse the Courage of another.
It may help you to think of oneself as a Light Body in this exercise. I am a Being of Light. You are a Being of Light. On the etheric levels, within the Telepathic Network, we both have equal powers. We communicate with one another instantaneously. We observe the instantaneous manifestation of our thought-forms. We are in the Third Dimension and we have a perception of a lag-time in manifestation. However, this is merely a perception. Your reality is my reality at its base. Our holographic messages are received INSTANTLY by the recipient. On the etheric plane, the recipient IMMEDIATELY benefits from our Loving and Courageous act of imbuing our transmissions with these creative energies.
Now if you are coming from a perception of lack, it is quite true that on the physical reality level, it appears that we are giving up our resources, our money, our personal property. However, as I said, the Soul Self of each of us engaged in the interaction know quite definitely that this is not the case. As the Soul Self of the cashier at the market, for example, receive the energy from our transmission as we hand them our payment for our food products, our higher Self receives an influx of beneficial energy from them. Now on the physical plane, all that we may notice is a slight knowing smile on the face of the cashier. This is our cue, however, that our thought-form is manifesting.
Here then is the secret. You will receive what you transmit, for you will be a transmitter of Love. The student attaches Love and positive emotion energy to all thought-forms that are transmitted within their mental environment. In mundane matters of daily living, then, while you pay your bills, you are attaching Love to them with your thoughts. While you work at your job, you are sending out thought-forms of Love to your colleagues and to customers. While you interact with your family and friends, you are sending thought-forms of Love into their mental environments of Love to all concerned with no expectation of receiving anything in return. This is a form of giving it all away, is it not?
As you are also, as a researcher, a student of your own self-development, interpreting each of your experienced moments in positive Loving ways – as best you can, of course, perhaps you have not yet achieved perfection in this technique – you will be contributing to the experiencing of positive realities with this divine perspective.
The mental construct, the thought-energy hologram we are calling Giving It All Away, is based in Love and Courage. With every transmission – for example, donating to your causes – you attach the holographic IdeaConstruct. This attachment powers the thought-form on the subtle levels. As my Holographic Inserts to us in the Third Dimension serve to enlighten and inform us, in same way, your transmission of these thought-forms attached to your mundane behaviors may serve to enlighten, empower and PROSPER the recipients. It is all energy, once again. It is all Light Energy in the form of the Consciousness Units.
Troubled by the assertion that to be truly successful and to truly perceive and create The Abundant Universe, the student must, in the final analysis, “give it all away.” To be sure, at first glance, this statement seems to imply that you will lose everything that you have worked for in the Spiritual Prosperity Program. Certainly, if you give your wealth or material possessions to others, you no longer have possession of them. You are without them. How does one put food on the table or pay bills if what is received is continually given away to others – individuals and collectives. These are earnest and excellent questions to ask. In answering them, please allow me to pass on to you, Dear Blog Reader, another fact of life for you in physical existence.
Now others before me have stated this bluntly, so this is certainly not something that you do not already know.
YOU RECEIVE WHAT YOU TRANSMIT.
In terms of energy – Light energy, which is, as we have stated earlier, the “Stuff” of all created realities – you get what you give. There is a popular aphorism that applies here, “What goes around come around,” The statement implies, I believe, that there is a type of karmic balancing dynamic that occurs within the lives of humans. My Blog readers know my feelings on karma and the Eastern theory of Reality Creation. I believe it is quite correct to a degree. ” Let me explain… you live your lives all at once, within the spacious moment, the eternal moment that exists NOW. Your lives are certainly not sequential, for there is no such thing as linear time in the experiencing of the Soul, your true reality.
Now as you are within this Moment Point possibly sensing your connection to your lives past, present and future, you are receiving energy to these lives. Additionally, at this moment, let us say that you are also receiving energy from and transmitting energy to COUNTLESS humans within our Consensus Reality. You are also NOW quite naturally transmitting energy to and receiving energy from the many elemental forms within your Personal Reality.
What does Light energy have to do with The Abundant Universe and giving it all away? Let us go back to my earlier discussions of conscious Units. Greatly simplified, this Light energy is the medium for the Reality Creation project. Let us say that Light holds within it the potencies and potentialities of all of our essential metaphors in our theory of Reality Creation. Now you may remember that the Conscious Units are electromagnetic. As they assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, they do so according to energies of attraction and repulsion: like with like, yet opposites assemble within the whole as counterparts to their opposites, and so on. This is the organizing principle of life. I have already described to you how All That Is – essentially Love in action – creates realities that are not Love, that are the opposites indeed of Love. In this way Reality Creation evolves, differentiates along every conceivable avenue of development. It is just this way with Light, my friend; the Love Light of All That Is.
We have suggested that we are an expert at distracting the ego/intellect from an examination of our life Lessons. Now we shall examine how we may distract our consciousness from the recreation of lack to the Divine – to a creation and perception of The Abundant Universe.
For our example here, let us say that you are currently addressing an issue of responding to financial events with fear. You may receive in your daily mail a notice that you are behind in paying a bill of some kind. As you read the stern warning, perhaps you are reminded of instances in the past when you failed to meet your financial obligations and were punished in some way. Because these negative memories are so rich in emotional intensity, you may be swept away for a few moments as you literally travel to the moment in time to experience the negative fear-producing emotions. This is a simple example of Astral travel. You have been triggered by the receipt of the bill to go back in time for a re-experiencing of what we might term “financial worry.”
Now let us devise a response to receiving the bill that will assist in the creation of positive realities rather than the continuation of negatives. The trick here is to awaken in the moment so that you may have conscious control IN the current moment. This you would possibly open the bill, read the stern warning, and before your subconscious can take you back in time for a reliving of the negative states of financial worry, you exert awareness of your current Moment Point. When you are established in the moment, at the second of recognition of the negative, fear-producing material, you imagine a positive outcome. This is best done by remembering positive outcomes of the past. Using your Intention, you distract your ego/intellect from responding unconsciously to the fear-producing material.
The negative historical data can be quite persuasive, so you must persevere in this moment. You might remind your self that you are existing in tandem with the Divine – with All That Is – and that there is an incoming message to be received. Then you would imagine with full sensory awareness your receiving sums of money, for instance, enabling you to meet your financial obligations.
This imaginative construct exists in your current moment, therefore, and in your future also as it is manifest enabling you to pay your bill, yet it is based on a positive financial event that occurred in your past. It may be advantageous for you to “mine” your perceived past for these positive financial experiences, no matter how small or insignificant they may at first appear. The emotional tone is what is important here. The idea of the Divine, prosperity and The Abundant Universe are the most important features.
The feeling of contentment and abundance you felt when your caregiver gave you a quarter to buy some candy when you were a child becomes an important reference point for you in these experiments. You are recreating these positive feelings of hope, faith etc. IN THE CURRENT MOMENT. You will then “push” the positive moments into the future as you embody the positive state of consciousness – abundance – moment-to-moment. This is easily done. And I specifically suggest you turn to your childhood experiences for the positive states of consciousness, for it was as a child that you most probably first experienced using your powerful imagination to create those things you desired.
I may help you to think of this activity as a form of back engineering your Reality Constructs in the immediate aftermath of their creation. Let me stand upon my soapbox for just a moment… we exist in linear time in the Third Dimension. This is the appearance of a reality that unfolds one moment after another. We create our own reality, and as such we have undoubtedly created Both prosperous moment and moments of lack.
In Consecutive Positive Assessment for this Spiritual Prosperity, then, you would, upon experiencing a moment of prosperous reality creation – receiving good financial news in a phone conversation, for example – contemplate the thought reality activities YOU YOURSELF used previously to create the prosperous moment. This information may come to you as an emotional tone, a feeling. You may receive an image from childhood, perhaps, a positive picture that epitomizes for you prosperity, abundance.
Again, we create our reality from ideas, images, emotions entertained within our consciousness at any one time. Within this matrix of possibilities lie the precise energies and methods for creating this prosperous moment we are describing. All of us have the potential to recreate the conditions for the experiencing of the prosperous moment, and then “remember” how we did so for future reference.
However, there may be roadblocks here that you find that “assist” us in avoiding the prosperous , moment. These are the ideas and images and ruminations of our personal consciousness that have effectively kept us from the level of Prosperity Creation we desire or believe we deserve. To use our terms here: Consciousness Units energized by these potent thoughts of lack, create Reality Constructs in the form of events, physical objects, behaviors we witness and embody that perpetuate the level of lack we are experiencing.
What do you then do in the moment, Dear Blog Reader? I suggest you persevere, and in the following moments in the best way you can, attempt to assess your sequential moments of experiencing in positive ways, DESPITE the lapse into negative thinking. True, you may have a period of time using this technique, when you feel that it is not doing much good for you. The abundant Universe seems quite far away. Then you continue on your own program of picking up where you left off, continually taking up the challenge to again begin the creation of the prosperous moment. You will get quite good at it over time if you take the time to practice this technique.
Now let me explain to you this CPA from a slightly different perspective than the one I used in the Healing regimen. Here I am asking you to address the Lesson demonstrated within each successive moment in linear time. What does that moment offer you in the way of learning? How may you experience Loving Understanding and courage as the result of your assessment of that moment in time? This may sound difficult to accomplish, but it is merely a matter of practice until it becomes habit. You could say that what you are accomplishing here is the creation of the virtues of humankind within the moment as a result of your research INTO the moment.
Truly ALL of our exercises, techniques and experiments are designed to allow you to wake up in the moment. However, this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessment we are presenting as your primary toll for this awakening. It is something that is easily learned and fun to do. The skills you acquire when practicing CPA will serve you well in your awakening on all levels of understanding.
You consecutively create each and every one of your moments in Third-Dimensional Reality. Though the creative/perspective powers of your Inner Senses, you create and then perceive the moments of your existence. With our Consecutive Positive Assessment technique, then, you will be interpreting each of your experienced moments in a positive fashion. Something good will emerge from all of your activities. You will see the positive wherever you look.
Your money issues – your prosperity issues – are in essence emotional issues. Are you satisfied with your “station” in life, what you have achieved financially, materially? Your emotional responses, ongoing, to your life events, strictly determine to what degree and in what form The Abundant Universe manifests in you Personal Reality field. Remember, recreation of your status quo reality is unconscious. In the case of money matters, your emotional subconscious responses to the events in your life are the determine factors in your continuing level of havingness. For this reason, waking up IN THE MOMENT is the prescription for achieving Spiritual Prosperity.
The Foundational Statement is quite important here The Blueprint for the Spiritual Prosperity Program would require a statement of purpose. This statement may include words and phrasing that present the plan for your prosperous attainment in symbolic and emotional terms. For example: let us imagine the day-to-day life of a human, a woman or a man who is just getting by financially. This person is employed at a job that certainly does not fulfill them emotionally or artistically. The job must be kept, however, to allow the bills to be paid and paid on time.
What would a prosperous life, a life of scared abundance, look like and feel like to this human? Let us approach this analysis from a perspective of Lessons, as we often do in this new blog material. Suppose that this human is learning specific Lessons regarding the ceding of power their powers of Reality Creation in the hands of heir empoyer. May we suggest that matters of self-worth enter here also? With the ceding of powers to others, the self-worth is automatically diminished.
In fact, in this example, let us assume that each workday in the life of this individual is a reminder to them that they are powerless and that they face a future of continuing powerlessness. My first questions to you would be, “Where is the Soul’s Intent here?” Where is the spirit of this human?” Now obviously, the spirit is not too brightly lit here. Perhaps they are too occupied with grieving over the lost life, that they do not hear the voices of spirit that call to them within their mental environment. If this person were to articulate their dilemma in a few succinct and symbolic words, they might say:
I desire to dream a dream of satisfying occupation that brings me financial rewards beyond mere survival. Abundance!
Do you see how this human yearns for a vision of a better life, a better world for themselves? They desire a dream, perhaps because they are not experiencing pleasant, creative dreaming in their private or business lives. They do indeed require a vision, a vision from spirit, perhaps, that may inspire them and give them a sense of direction and purpose. Of course, your Foundational Statement will be concerned with your own issues and Lessons regarding prosperity. Think about these issues a few moments.
You are preparing to create a positive reality of abundance. It would be a good idea to create a personalized program for the attainment of this goal. As you practice the suggested Techniques and as you conduct the Experiments that follow, you will quite naturally develop your own plan. Some of these Suggestions I offer you may work better for you than others. By all mean, implement the workable Suggestions. Leave the Techniques that may be too difficult for you at this time to another day. At the end of this Blog Series you will find the necessary work pages for you to develop your personal Blueprint.
The Spiritual Prosperity Program is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Prosperity. Rituals of Prosperity are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continued application of the Ritual of Prosperity until the manifestation becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.
I have just suggested that the human experiencing an absence of havingness has quite probably experienced emotional distress within the domains of personal power and authority. These injuries occur within the Simultaneous Lives and are re-experienced by the human via impulses sent to them from these lives. The human that acts upon these suggestions will create more unfortunate experiences in their ongoing life. Over time, the state of consciousness we are referring to as lack “solidifies” as the recreation of states of lack becomes habitual. It seems there is no hope here. The subject may feel they were born to be poor, to be without. Like depression, the entire field of the Personal reality is colored by these negative conditions. And in a reciprocal fashion, the outer environment reflects the inner state of emotional injury.
We create our own reality, you see. We have effectively created a belief in the inevitability of poverty. You have created poverty through the template of this belief. Because the emotional tone of lack is pervasive in the Personal Reality Field, you habitually will choose only those thoughts, images, behaviors that will recreate the status quo. Thus lack endures.
I have painted a bleak picture , DearBlog reader. Now I shall present some Techniques and Experiments that will assist you in your Spiritual Prosperity Program, at whatever level of lack you find yourself.
The key emotional support that the human brings to prevent the clear perception of The Abundant Universe is LACK. The perception of lack, emotionally experienced over time, creates and sustains the state of consciousness called poverty. In those who create lives of “just getting by,” this emotional tone is somewhat pronounced. In those who create lives of abject poverty, it is pervasive. The emotional Idea Construct of lack is the electromagnetic core to which the varying Reality Constructs that compose the Personal Reality of the human experiencing poverty are attracted. Briefly, if you see lack wherever you look, you are conceiving and perpetuating lack wherever you go.
Now before we continue with this explanation, please allow me to explain again the process of the Soul Self as it creates a life of Lessons. Thus far, my description of the self-created reality of poverty may seem to be quite heartless, a matter of ” blaming the victim.” After all, how does one explain the many innocent children living in famine-afflicted countries? How can I possibly suggest that these children CHOSE their current existences? Dear Blog Reader, remember that the Soul Self sends a fragment of itself into the body of the baby and then creates Lessons without guilt or other Negative emotions. Also, on deep levels of understanding, the baby also knows and accepts the conditions of the coming life. Yes, it is dramatic, the hundreds of thousands of humans who die under these miserable conditions. Yet that is the point here. The Soul is dramatizing for the Entity and All That Is, as well as the subject, these difficult Lessons.
Again, without generalizing too much here, I can tell you that many of these short lives are experienced by Souls who have reached the end of their incarnations of Earth. They are ready for the peaceful and Loving realities of other systems. They are quite enthused about “going out of the loop,” in a sense, with a great flourish – the short, dramatic existence of a child in a poor country, let us say, who seems to be truly a victim. In the greater perspective of the Soul Self, it is just opposite. These children are creating their lives through great bravery and Loving Acceptance. They are not victims.
Dear Blog Reader, I believe that a spiritual practice of prosperity is necessary to assist those in need of reconciling their religious or spiritual beliefs with their desires for material wealth. Within this spiritual practice of abundance it is perfectly “OK” to entertain thoughts of acquiring material possessions, engaging in desired behaviors with other humans, and so on. However, these thoughts or visualizations will be created within a different mental environment that you may be used to. For is it not true that there may be a lingering doubt that you may be engaging in desperation and foolishness, or worse yet, “the work of the devil” – the sin of avarice – may have held you back in your efforts at manifesting abundance. It is true, that in matters of conscious co-creation, the focus must be steady and unswerving with an element of hopeful expectation powering the exercise.
So faith enters the discussion, Here I would ask you to drop any negative connotations that you may have attached to the word faith. When we suggest you embody the state of faith, we would hope that no symbols or emotions, will be recalled that will keep you away from what you are attempting to create. Some examples of these counterproductive ideas are: fear of punishment by religious figures, thoughts that faith is a religious concept of empowered spirituality here. As in other experiments and exercises in this new material, we are asking you to change your beliefs and ideas about what is possible. In this case, the object that is Loving, accepting, Courageous.
Perhaps a short example may help you. Consider the bird, the rock, the tree, the mountain. Do they worry what the future will brings? I suggest they do not. All of these quite conscious elements LIVE within the moment, experiencing the existence as providing all that is required. The human, on the other hand, complicates matters in the matter of existence and brings fear, worry and doubt into the equation.
Let us say then that our faith, our trust, our hope in this theory of Reality Creation, is in essence the simple Loving expectation, in the moment, of consciousness. We may even go so far as to say that the human embodying this faith we are describing, is utilizing within the moment, the creative potencies of All That Is. Now the human would do well to emulate the bird, the rock, the tree in this embodying of faith. Look around you and see how the various living and “inert” compositions are sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not sustained within the moment. The future and the past do not exist. There is only the current moment of existence for consciousness.
Now all of us are on Earth to learn a literal lifetime of Lessons, The Lessons of value, abundance, money are often related to matters of authority, SELF– worth and personal power. We might say that the person experiencing a lifetime of lack has most probably experienced emotional injuries in these domains, certainly in the current existence, and also in other Simultaneous Lives. In this way, all perceived negative conditions are truly systemic, representing a focus by the Soul Self on the injurious Gestalt of Consciousness lending their creative energy and direction to the creation of the negative conditions in all of the participating Reincarnational Existences. It is indeed a group effort here, as it is in all matters of the individual human experiencing their Lessons – positive or negative – in any particular lifetime.
An example of this multidimensional group effort is in order. Imagine a Soul Self, an Entity composed of, shall we say, several thousand Simultaneous Lives, as well as innumerable probable existences. Each of these Selves, additionally, is unaware of the others. They are each individually living as suppose that of these many lives, a small percentage is experiencing what we call “Wealth” or a perception of The Abundant Universe. To simply, let us say that the remaining lives are experiencing less than favorable conditions. Now the lives experiencing lack “support” one another on the subtle levels via the Telepathic Network. Through impulses received telepathically from their fellow impoverished selves, the poor ones are given instruction and advice, in a sense, on how to create an impoverished existence. Now this is how it works under all circumstances for us in our world. As I said, you and all of your lives are learning Lessons. You support one another in learning your Lessons via these impulses sent and received on the subtle levels.
In these matters of the Soul Self and the learning of Lessons there is no judgment. There is no experiencing of the emotional complex of guilt on these levels of interaction. The Soul Self has a mandate, we might say, that is emotion-free, to assist in the creation of the reincarnational dramas and comedies for the Simultaneous Lives. It is the individual lives themselves that bring the emotional element into the mix for learning purposes.
Now my concept of Value Fulfillment enters here, as you might well expect. Money has value, I am sure you will agree. Yet please allow me to describe for you the “spiritual” basis of this value. An example for illustration: Dave receives a check from one of his blog readers in exchange for an item. When Dave takes the check in his hands from the envelope, he experiences an emotional response. These emotions may run the gamut from positive to negative depending on the context, the conditions of existence, you see. Remember, it is a process of creating realities from emotional states of consciousness, this Third-Dimensional existence. The emotions of Dave, and indeed of all of us, vary and degree throughout our waking hours. This is quite obvious to us I am sure.
Now let us say that our subject is perceiving through the perspective of The Abundant Universe, he is also strengthening this perspective through his appreciation and gratitude in the moment. Remember that in the Moment Point we are “priming the pump” with positive images and ideas that will set the stage for further demonstrations of The Abundant Universe in our perceived future. The creation of this positive reality of The Abundant Universe is becoming habitual.
On the other hand, just for the sake of argument, suppose for a moment that our subject is not necessarily perceiving from a grateful, magical, abundant perspective. Suppose that, moments before opening the envelope containing the check, he had an encounter with someone that “caused” him to become anxious, fearful, angry. These Negative emotions, further let us say, combine within his psyche to create a potent quite toxic brew of ingratitude and disdain that will color his Reality Creation efforts, as least for the short term – for the next few minutes of hours. You may possibly guess what might be the result of our subject’s opening the envelope containing the check. Certainly we might not expect gratitude or an appreciation of the magical nature of the Universe. Most probably we may expect a less than healthy response from him, for he has set himself up to create negative realities by succumbing to the energies of negativity.
Thirdly, may we take it for granted that our subject IS learning Lessons of gratitude, acceptance and the other virtues of humankind? If we may, let us also assume that he is actively involved in learning these Lessons consciously and has identified the negative GOC(Gestalt of Consciousness) resident in his psyche, one we might call Ingratitude. Knowing that he has the power to “change his mind” with his Intent, he uses his Divine Will to create Loving Understanding and Courage out of anxiety, fearfulness and anger. thus, upon opening the envelope and observing the check, he is well-prepared to experience gratitude, perceive The Abundant Universe and perhaps marvel at the magical nature of Reality Creation.
In the first case, our subject is appreciating the value of the magical aspect of money creation. In the second case, he is concerned with experiencing the value of Negative Emotions and those realities created through these emotions. In the third case he is experiencing the value of empowerment that comes with awakening in the moment to his Reality Creation agenda, and then using his powers of creation to change that agenda. In all cases, he is learning SPIRITUAL Lessons that will add to the experiencing of his Entity and All That Is.
The Abundant Universe exists, as does any other potent GOC, (Gestalt of consciousness) as a holographic entity within our collective consciousness. Both past and future memorized of this state are released in ecstatic dreaming. Our myths of paradise and our stories of the Garden of Eden and other highly idealized Utopian constructs, are fragments of this GOC that serve to remind us of how pleasant physical reality can be. We feel a great sense of longing when engaged in these visionary activities, as though a priceless element of existence has been lost forever. This, however, is OVER-dramatizing the issue. The Abundant Universe is there before us, where it always is, where it has always been, in our terms. The perceptual blinders we are calling the Negative Emotions serve to block our view of this paradise.
We have used terms such as calcification, hardening of the vision, etc. to explain the process of the human creating the self-imposed “blindness” within the personal consciousness. Knowing this. I am certain that you may grasp the simplicity of succeeding in this enterprise Spiritual Prosperity. It is a matter of waking-up to our true reality. It is a matter of facing our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding. It is a matter or remembering paradise and then recreating it in the moment.
Prosperity, The Abundant Universe, havingness are all simply “states of mind.” They are also Gestalts of Consciousness as we have defined the term in this Blog. As Consciousness Units are manipulated by consciousness over the millennia in the creation of realities, templates of creation are “agreed upon” to serve as the blueprint for the creation of Reality Constructs of all types. Those states of consciousness that we may call “poverty” and “just getting by,” serve as the blueprints for self – The Soul Self – to create an ongoing less-than-prosperous life.
This may appear to you as overly simplified. Dear Blog Reader, it truly is quite simple. This is the basic dynamic of Reality Creation in the Third Dimension. I have also referred to this act of creation as a matter of “alliance” with Entities of various kinds. It is all the same here. Reality creation occurs at the point where our Intention, our focus, our consciousness, our spirit meets the Third Dimension. Period.
Do you notice how matters of worthiness and guilt do NOT enter into this discussion of the basics of manifestation? The human being in the throes of feeling unworthy, of feeling guilty, of feeling cursed interjects these Negative Emotions into the blueprints of the Reality Creation project. This could be our current existence, for example. AS the human degrades, in a sense, this basic template of creation, the GOC (Gestalt of Consciousness) we are calling The Abundant Universe is transformed over time into one that creates a life of “just getting by” or even one of “abject poverty.”
The Abundant Universe is our baseline reality. We are born within The Abundant Universe. Over time we have a tendency to make this GOC “our own” by personalizing it with our Negative Emotions. We do this for purposes of dramatizing our Lessons in physical reality. We are aided by members of our Soul Family in this endeavor. Our main task in creating Spiritual Prosperity is to work with our Soul Family to perceive and create The Abundant Universe.
We have titled this section of the Series of BlogsSpiritual Prosperity to again challenge your beliefs about what is and is not spiritual. Everything is literally made of spirit. Everything in our world is spiritual, therefore. Spirit is Light. Spirit is energy. We are on the Earth currently to learn how to use energy to create our world in an improved fashion. From this premise we shall move forward.
Our Spiritual Prosperity Program will allow you to transform your beliefs and ideas about abundance. If you are experiencing a lack of necessities, you will be empowered to alter your perspective in a necessary fashion to reveal The Abundant Universe. Now this Abundant Universe is always there for you to experience. It is a probable manifestation from the field of limitless probabilities before you.
Your focus upon the positive elements within your field of perception is the path to creating and experiencing TheAbundant Universe. You may remember this as the Consecutive Positive Assessments technique from the last Blog. In the Spiritual Prosperity Program we shall avail ourselves of the techniques and experiments used in The Healing Regimen
You are required to learn your own Lessons in physical reality. The nonphysical beings are not permitted to interfere. Now this is why I must be rather vague in my presentation to you of these Ritual and Techniques. You are to work out the particulars on your own, and by so doing, gain the expertise and Value Fulfillment entailed in this project. Some of you will be satisfied to obtain modest results in this endeavor, while others will accept nothing less than “perfection.” These are your beliefs that determine “success” in this or any of our other projects. It is all a matter of your free will choice.
Hypothesis: You may empower anything with healing attributes.
You know that, beyond growing a new limb, there is nothing in your Personal Reality Field that cannot be changed provided you create the “conditions” for change that are required. Period. These conditions or requirements for manifestation are two fold: First – you require an intensity of desire and emotion that supersedes the level of emotion that creates and sustains the current reality. Second – your personal beliefs must expand to include the POSSIBILITY for the creation of the changes you wish to experience. The level of emotion that sustain or maintains your manifested reality within your Personal Reality Field may be thought of, for purposes of this explanation, as nominal or “just enough” to sustain your reality as you know it. This nominal output of emotional manifestation energy is an ongoing product of what you would term your “unconscious” or “subconscious.” You are not aware of it, in other words, as this creative energy stream does its work just beyond your field of awareness.
Now let us apply this theoretical concept to healing. As you know, Natural Healing is our term for the use of natural products – oils, water, empowered objects of various types – in the healing and balancing of the human body, that the application of these treatments to the various illnesses of the human body, need not be in a one-to-one correspondence. In other words, it is not necessary to use a specific malady. You need not seek out the specific curative. We have suggested that you have the power, within your creative consciousness, to imbue anything with the curative energy for the healing and balancing of the body. With this in mind, let us create an experiment in exploring the effects of the panacea.
Now a panacea is literally a cure-all. In our time it is often referred to in mythological terms, for our medical model cannot hold the concept of a cure-all within it.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax your body. Now the cure-all may be a physical product of some sort, as in an oil, water or perhaps a physical object such as a stone or artifact. It may also be visualized. As you enter your Intention to energize the panacea with curative powers. This panacea will be empowered with all of the healing energies resident within the Gestalt of Consciousness we are calling Spontaneous Healing. You are simply accepting the transmission of the energy flow from this Energy Body into your physical body. You will then, using your intention Again, direct the healing energy into the panacea for storage. This healing energy will not lose its potency while in the panacea. You may use your panacea in ways you see fit, to treat the malady.
You may sense this data bank of healing influences called Spontaneous Healing in any way you wish. Perhaps you will tune-in with your metaphorical Tools, guided by the Loving energies emitted by this Energy Body. Perhaps you will “travel” to this Gestalt of Consciousness in a metaphorical vehicle of some sort, or simply within the Astral Form, as you call it. The nonphysical body is always available for conveying your consciousness to any location in non physical and physical reality. Simply imagine it to be and it will be so.
FINDINGS – Document your successes and challenges in creating and using the panacea.
Hypothesis: You can receive advice from your future healed self.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This experiment would be a form of “back engineering.” For example: as you visit this future healed self, using your visualized transport, you might ask yourself, “What am I doing differently now that has perhaps helped me achieve this healed stat?” Make a list of what comes to mind. You are indeed in that moment of contact, receiving information from a probable future self that is experiencing a healed state. This information gathering may take the form of an informal interview. Have a list of questions prepared prior to the experiment. If you are sufficiently comfortable in Trance that you will not be distracted by reading your questions, have the questions available to refer to during the interview.
Now…. this is your most effective advisor, your future healed self. This information from your future self may take the form of nonsense. You may, for example, be advised to perform an absurd gesture, motion or such thing. This does not make sense to your third-Dimensional ego, for it may seem embarrassing, silly etc. If you feel that you are in contact with your Guides, that you are guided by them and you are in contact with your future healed self, my advice is to take the advice of this Energy Body. Perform the silly gesture. Do the embarrassing behavior. Obviously, we would not wish to harm anyone, including the practitioner, in taking this advice.
You may, using your Inner Senses, perceive this future healed self and you might ask questions of this self and receive the telepathic responses that you may integrate into your Healing Regimen. These responses may come in symbolic form. Again, using your intuitive faculties, interpret these messages and act on them or not. Of course you have free will here, as do you in all facets of your existence, and you may act accordingly.
FINDINGS – Write down the answers you are receiving or in another way document this information from your future self.
The suggestions you give yourself continuously, your “inner dialogue,” or whatever you wish to call this conversation, are indeed very influential in your co-creation of the Personal Reality Field. Everything is suggestion, you see. All is the work of Gestalt of Consciousness.
Let me digress… we have spoken at length in this Blog Series on the great value in “listening” to suggestions of your Loving Guides. These suggestions often take the form of positive thoughts, feelings and images sensed within your mental environment. It feels, at these times of contact, that you may be experiencing a divine intervention of sorts, for the experiences of the preceding moments may have been anything other than positive and Loving. Your preceding experiences may have been very negative and challenging. Perhaps what you have done then is you have put a call to your Guides to assist you in your Reality Creation, and they have done so. In this way, you have asked for assistance from your Guides and they have responded “right when you needed it most.”
Another way to experience this state of contact with the Divine in an ongoing manner, is to “plant” the positive suggestions within your consciousness purposely, so that over time you are training yourself to experience your world in a positive way, with continuous contact with the Divine. You then recreate your reality in a positive fashion. The creation of positive realities becomes habitual, replacing the habitual creation of negative or mundane realities. This purposeful guiding of the human mentally through speech is the basis of all our healing systems on our Earth. From the aboriginal shaman to our modern medicine practitioner, all have used Healing Talk for support in the healing process.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This experiment is similar to the preceding one, with a subtle difference. Now relax your body using your preferred techniques. The products of your belief Revisioning are the affirmative statements you may use to counter the negative ruminations that support the creation of your mundane existence. Ideally you would have committed the affirmative statements or suggestions to memory. If not, have your suggestions written out on a piece of paper to read when you are at your preferred state of relaxation. The next step is to read your affirmative statements to yourself while you are in Trance, or perhaps record the statements for playback while you are in relaxed state. Over time, if you are diligent, the positive healing statements will supplant the negative ruminations that support the malady.
FINDINGS – Document your findings rigorously in creating Healing Talk that counters your negative ruminations.
HYPOTHESIS: Beliefs that support disease may adapt to support healing.
Every thought you entertain within your mental sphere seeks to create itself within the physical or other dimensions, according to the templates of your beliefs about what is possible. Your thoughts of creating a healed physical body, therefore, create your potentially healed body within Dimensional-Realms that exist in probability, just as your thoughts of disease and symptoms create your malady. As you continue to focus in your Ritual fashion upon the creation of manifestation templates with “energy” in the form of Consciousness Units. This ongoing energetic support serves to move the potential reality from the probable Dimensional-Realms into the physical Third Dimensions. As you witness your co-creation of healing, your beliefs will adapt to these astounding new perceptions. The probability of healing becomes possible and finally inevitable. Your beliefs may change from skeptical to ardently supportive in this process.
Knowing this, what do you suppose the healer “sees” when they first look upon the healing or balancing that is taking place within their own system? Now this can be rather tricky to describe and to comprehend. In this case, the healer would INTEND to observe a healing transformation within the biological system. As you know, all of physical reality is a product of consciousness. In the case of the healing of the body, mind or spirit it is precisely the same. Here, your attitude is very important. Your conscious Intent is the most important element in this proceeding. So that when you observe your emerging reality, let us say upon first awakening from sleep, your conscious Intent is that you are very naturally and easily co-creating your emerging reality according to the Blueprint of healing you have decided upon in this project.
As you matter the co-creation of your Personal Reality Field, and you bring conscious awareness to the task a hand, the essentially magical act of healing becomes internalized. Beyond a particular point, you need not even think about it, for it has become automatic. Your beliefs will adapt and you will become more certain of your skills in the creation of the healing moment. You are redefining the templates of creation by making the creation of the healing moment habitual.
Now… identify and list beliefs you feel may be contributing to the creation and perpetuation of the malady. This material may take the form of a narrative or simply a list of short declarative statements. When you feel you have something to work with in this experiment, consider the divine opposites of these statements or a positive counter to the narrative. Write them down next to each other.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
You are in your protected state. Using your Inner Senses, relax with your written material and occasionally read out loud or to your self the statements and their divine counterparts. Here your intent many be in support emotionally of the Malady-producing statement of beliefs. So you are making a declaration here that you are changing your beliefs. You are withdrawing the emotional charge, form the one, and you are empowering with your emotional energy the other – the health-creating and sustaining statements or beliefs. The positive suggestion of healthful support will become internalized allowing you to release the malady-creating beliefs. As this occurs you may find that your symptoms change to reflect the changing beliefs.
Disease and symptoms serve very specific purposes, you see. They are the direct reflection of interior processes. They are the physical expression of nonphysical concepts and images.
FINDINGS – Note your beliefs and their adaptations over time.
Hypothesis: The emotional body displays the causes and cures of all maladies.
Now let us attempt to “read” The Emotional Body. You will be attempting to assess, with your Auric Vision, the energy signatures of the various imbalances and cures inherent in the Auric Display.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
First, please attempt to embody a deep state of relaxation. You may accomplish this by focusing on your breathing for just a few moments. You may also stretch your body in your particular fashion that leads to relaxation and a focus on the inner world. Use whatever methods you have perfected in your experimentation.
Now what we are attempting here, as in all experimental research in this new Teaching of mine, is nothing less than the entering into Trance State. This state of consciousness is simply the mental environment of your Soul Self. Here you bridge the inner to the outer worlds with your awareness. You fine-tune the perceptive tools – your Inner Senses – with you Intention to achieve the precise focus of awareness that YOU require to accomplish your goals.
The perceived representation of The Emotional Body may encompass the majority of the physical body, but is centered, as I said, within the heart region The “reading” of The Emotional Body has a visual component, yet it may be a felt sensation, as in a sense of tingling or other energy signatures within your own body. You may also experience it as a “heard” vibrational message in manner of song. These sensing’s may come to you as images and full visions, possibly composed of personas or animals in various roles, acting out various scenes for your education and enjoyment. The dramatizations may be sensed on the inward eye, though the eyes may indeed be open. The visionary state permits these contradictions – feeling the pulse of visualized scenes of hearing the songs of manifested illnesses and their sources.
The Auric Vision is the Inner Sense representation to your mental awareness of the health issue in its totality. This potent Idea Construct or Gestalt of Consciousness exists as a holographic reference that contains everything you as the Healer require to diagnose and bring balance to your own body or the body of your subject. Each of you will sense and interpret this information in your individual ways.
This Auric Vision may come to you quite quickly, just as you enter your state of awareness, or it may take several minutes for you to focus on your Inner Senses and achieve a diagnosis and perceive possible cures. You may need to “sleep on it” and receive the bulk of the information in the dream state, for assessment, diagnosis and curative measures to be achieved on awakening. These are matters of the healing process. Do what serves best your needs or the needs of your subject.
SOME TECHNIQUES THAT MAY BE USEFUL:
Use your hands to fan around the body, “feeling” for any anomalies of energy vibration. You may do this literally, with your physical hands and make passes around your own body or the body of your subject, or you may do this in the visualized form, using your imagination.
Project your consciousness into your body or the body or your subject, to search from within it as a miniature explorer.
Listen to the narrative of subject and derive from these words, the messages from the Energy Bodies that will serve to direct you to the cause of the difficulties. This narrative may serve to bring to your mind a visual or other sensory dramatization that holds the diagnosis information in symbolic or literal form.
When you are working on your own healing, simply attempt to tune-in to your inner ruminations. These messages are the supports of the Gestalts of Consciousness we are calling disease process. Now also within this inner dialogue are messages from Beings of Light. These suggestions may have come from your future probable existences of from other Guides who are attempting to assist you in your Healing Journey. Simply put, here in this experiment you are tuning-in the healing states and tuning-out the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the disease.
Now illness is a Lesson that your Soul Self has “arranged” for you to experience in physical form, yet it is possible to heal yourself if you can learn the Lesson in other ways. For example: suppose on reading your Light Body you discover that the “reason” for your diabetes, is an imbalance in The Emotional Body. You are having difficulty accepting and processing “the sweetness that life has to offer.” This manifests as physical illness in a very literal way. You may heal yourself by learning how to accept and transmit the sweetness of life. You needn’t suffer unto death from the illness. So it is essential that the underlying “cause” of the malady be addressed or the difficulty may come back in another form, as in a physical, mental or spiritual malady of some sort. These are matters of belief revision. This subject will be explored next.
FINDINGS – Document your Findings from this ongoing experiment.
HYPOTHESIS: The non-physical beings may assist you in the healing regimen.
You may have already contacted your Guides, such as the Energy Personality and others to assist you. If you you have yet to create these relationships, I suggest that you continue with The Healing Regimen “as if” you were in contact and communication with your Guides. Let me elaborate for just a moment.
PART ONE: PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY
Consider your powerful imagination. Now the imagination is the great creative force in our system that assists us in our creation of Reality Constructs. The emotional energy that “fuels” this Reality construction, as I have stated, is based in Love, a very potent emotion. Now here in this instance, in our protected state of Sanctuary that we are experiencing, can you imagine with your great creative intelligence, a relationship with what you might call a Spirit Guide?
Can you sense the powerful current of Love and compassion that supports and sustains this relationship? Stay with this for a few moments. Images may come to mind for you, suggesting characters from your childhood, possibly representing “imaginary playmates.” Loving characters from your mythologies may appear in the mind’s eye. I suggest you go with the flow here, knowing that there is Loving intent, and envision your Guide into being.
Ask for the name of the Guide and it will come to you. The name may have a nonsensical quality to it or it may be rather mundane. Accept the name if you intuitively feel it is right. This is a preliminary exercise here. You are not seeking perfection, simply progress in this endeavor. Whatever comes to you in so far as name and appearance and emotional content is quite sufficient. Honor this process and accept what you are creating with All That Is in this moment.
This is simply a way for you to conduct the necessary behaviors and Idea Constructs into reality formations in the Third Dimension. You usually do not value something as real, unless a beginning, middle and end to it in your Physical reality. This is why your Guides, even though they are seeking your contact, do not suddenly appear to us “out of the blue.” Our guides do not wish to scare us, in other words. This is the beginning of the manifestation of your Guides into your Personality Reality Field, and in a sense, we will “believe them into existence.”
FINDINGS – Take a few moments to document your experiences in contacting your guides.
PART TWO:
The second part of this experiment deals with the calling in of your various Guides and Helpers, for those of you who have already established these relationships.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
You are in your state of Sanctuary. From this perspective it may be easy for you to envision your Guides as they appear on your mental screen perhaps, and what skills each may employ in assisting you in The Healing Regimen. Your Energy Personality, for example, may be asked to assist you in remembering that you are embarked upon a path of positive moment-to-moment assessments of your experiences. You might ask, that, should you lapse into the robotic trance or negative ruminations common to many of us in our system, we would be reminded, possible by some specific sensory cue from your Energy Personality, to awaken and proceed with the Rituals of Healing.
You may have specific Helpers that you rely upon in matters of healing and balance. I suggest you call them into assist you in day-to-day program of positive assessment and Reality Creation. The Guides may provide you with the ongoing Loving emotional energy required to sustain The Healing Regimen.
In essence, here you are attempting to create a divine state of consciousness long term. You are asking for the assistance of your divine Guides, and as they help you through each successive moment in The Healing Regimen, you will feel the beneficial energies and effects upon our physical body.
FINDINGS – As the project moves forward, document your experiences in assessing and utilizing your Guides.
It is within our power as co-creator with All That Is to use our DivineWill to create more appropriate realities for oneself. We may do this with the Metaphorical Tools of various types. In our Blogs on Soul evolution we described one such tool: the Radio Dial Metaphor. Let us again describe the activity of this magical dial. This is simply a visualized dial, possibly modeled on a dial we have seen on one of our radios or other electronic devices. By turning the physical radio dial, different radio frequencies are accessed and different radio stations are contacted. By turning the visualized dial on our visualized radio, the researcher “tune-in” to the Energy Bodies that compose non physical reality.
This is a Metaphorical Tool used in a ritual way. Time after time, as these connections and communications with Beings of Light are established, it becomes a habitual act. I might add, that it also becomes easier to make these connection, the more we use our Metaphorical Tools.
With the dial, for example, we may discover our Guides, learn their names, and consult with other Gestalts of Consciousness that may assist us. Through the use of this tool, using our Inner Senses in an Intentional way, we may safely observe and study the disease-producing Idea Constructs. With the Metaphorical Tools we create a “protective barrier” between our consciousness and the Idea Constructs that support the malady.
Of course we may use any Metaphorical Tools that we have already established for our use in our past experiments. Or we may develop our own set of tools to assist us in our project. So that we might create for our use a transportation device of our choosing, one that may take us to various locations in the past, present and future and in both the physical and nonphysical worlds. It is up to us to use our imagination to create tools that can serve our particular needs. Now let us begin the experimentation that will furnish us with data to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen.
Another technique the researcher may use is the suspension of disbelief. This is the divine perspective that is necessary for us to CONTINUE to create moments of healing within our Personal Reality Field. When we first meet with success at creating a cessation of symptoms, for example, through our Healing Talk or other strategies, our rational mind will surely be amazed. If we are at that moment perceiving through the ego/intellect, we may “not believe our eyes, ” and ascribe the transformation to something other than our Divine Will. This may serve to short circuit the healing process. Doubt is interjected into the mix and so faith or courage becomes compromised. Rather I suggest that at the moment of cessation of symptoms, be joyous and amazed, knowing that we have succeeded in that moment with co-creating our reality with All That Is toward the healing of our body. There is a sense of humility we can muster here, and yet still marvel at our powers of manifestation. It is a balance we may achieve between humility and charisma, between supreme confidence and wishful thinking.
Dear Blog Reader, you are already expert at the suspension of disbelief. When you enjoy a book or a movie or other dramatic presentation, you are immersing yourself in the media and you are letting go of the skeptical aspect of your personality for the time being. As you create the story in you imagination that is suggested by the words in the book or the scenes in the movie or on the stage, you are submitting your inner self to the influences of the story. This you have done countless times, no doubt, when you were a child listening to fairy tales, for example. As well, you are continuing this tradition as an adult when you experience stories of any type. So this use of the imagination is a very natural one for you. It is the basis for all of your creative endeavors as human beings, including the very basic practice of Reality Creation.
Our ego/intellect is an expert in the creation of status quo realities. It always begins its work on awakening after our sleeping times, whenever that might be. As we open our eyes, there is a tendency for the ego/intellect to take charge IMMEDIATELY. It is our job to remember that our regimen will begin or continue at that particular time, and circumvent the strategies of the ego/intellect to control our Reality Creation agendas.
We do this by distracting the ego/intellect. This is a divine distraction. We divert our attention from the mundane to the Divine. This is simply a personal reminder from our Soul Self that we are supported on a wave of ecstasy just below the surface of consciousness. We have described this feeling state in our last few Series of Blogs. We are supported; we are endorsed; we are Loved. We do not need to recreate the status quo reality of suffering, illness and other negative states. We may also use our Energy Personality and other Guides to help remind us of our Scared Quest in these moments.
However, if we are like most people, our ego/intellect will not enjoy these attempts to divert the manifestation energies toward the Divine. The ego/intellect may flood our consciousness with Negative Emotions, traumatic memories, reminders of financial peril etc. We may experience a sudden fear that we are taking these explorations too far, perhaps wandering into “the danger zone.”
Religious conditioning may serve to bring doubt to mind. We may feel that perhaps we should go to church soon or speak to a priest. Or course we may do these things. We have free will. But might I suggest that we are now acting as our own intermediary? We are bridging the physical and subtle realms with our awareness. Just as the magician, the shaman, the witch does, we are acting as our own intermediary between the physical and the Divine.
My advice, when you are experiencing these responses from the ego/intellect, is to intervene with your Intention, and possibly with the assistance of your Guides, and divert your attention back to the Divine. It is really just a matter of choice in the moment. We are choosing from the perspective of the Soul Self, a path of improved reality Creation.
Let us proceed with the Techniques and Rituals that compose The Healing Regimen.
TECHNIQUE – CONSECUTIVE POSITIVE ASSESSMENTS The Healing Regimen is a continuous ritual enactment with the elements of our Consecutive Positive Assessments exercise embedded within it. In this exercise you attempt t interpret your moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways. Everything exists within the current moment. Everything that you need to support your Quest for Healing is available to you in your Point of Power, your current Moment Point, right now in this instance. So it is in the moment when you conduct your Ritual of Healing and when you see the results of these Techniques. In the moment is when you get to feel for the creation of successive moments of healing.
With this technique we are attempting to interpret each successive Moment Point as a divine opportunity for positive change. In my blogs we discussed in depth this technique of Consecutive Positive Assessments. Here let me simply state that it is up to you to create this perspective according to what works for you as an individual human, one with particular ways of behaving, one with a certain set of beliefs.
Now briefly, you will always have a choice, Dear Blog reader, regarding what you will experience in the moments of your waking life. You are the center of your world and the events that occur within your world. So you always have a choice and even a responsibility to make the proper decisions in your moment-to-moment existence to further your life.
You must be adequate, in other words, so that you may “live to live another day,” in a manner of speaking. Of course, beyond merely living there exists a state of being in which one excels, or develops or grow spiritually, intellectually, and so on. Here in this project, we maintain that to achieve relief from physical illness and the removal of symptoms, one may employ our Consciousness Personal Assessment exercise and “take charge” of the life. By assessing each moment as a joyous and educational experience, the researcher is reprogramming the psyche in a beneficial way. Positive belief change occurs over the long-term application of this technique. Positive realities are created in an intentional way.
Perhaps another example would help. Suppose that our theoretical subject, the human experiencing a disintegration of the musculature of their body, has obtained The Healing Regimen and is trying this Technique. There may be several days of false starts and disruptions of the program. Then one day there is begun a series of moments, perhaps lasting several minutes or even hours, when the subject is truly interpreting their moment-to-moment experiences in positive ways.
In this series of moments, let us say that the subject has perhaps burned the breakfast on the stove. Rather than sink into a depression or scream in anger at the stove, the subject continues to sing a favorite song. In the mental environment of this subject, you might say that the Negative Emotions do not find a place to establish themselves. The singing of the favorite song, perhaps a joyful song, prevents that manipulation of thought energy by the negative Emotions. The Consecutive Positive Assessments continue even as the song is being sung.
But let us suppose that the subject is then distracted, perhaps by the TV news program as it proclaims the latest tragedy to occur in a far away country. For a moment, the subject may feel a responsibility to the people involved in the tragedy to provide them with a compassionate moment of observation here, Unfortunately, as soon as our subject focuses on the television image, to express their compassion and understanding, the story is ended, and a commercial is run that encourages the viewer to buy products. At this point, the positive mental environment is disrupted. Thoughts relative to things to buy and products of various kinds prevail. The song ceases to be sung.
So the question arises in matters of techniques such as this: How can I possibly bring conscious awareness to each successive moment in my waking day?” The answer to that, of course, is that it may be difficult to achieve perfection in the assessment exercise. In your physical reality there are numerous diversions, as in our example. There are also natural lapses in consciousness that take you to other dimensions, as we have discussed in previous blogs. So practically here, I must say, that to the degree that you can accomplish this exercise, you will to that same degree experience positive changes in your Personal Reality Field – you will experience healing within your body, mind and spirit.
Fortunately, simple improvements are what we are marking progress in this endeavor. You will continuously change course, over the moments of your existence, making your simple improvements, until gradually you are experiencing the voyage as a positive habit of thought, feeling and manifestation.
The creation of a structure begins with the drawing-up of a blueprint, illustrating the placement of the materials that will compose the structure. Our Reality construction of Healing begins with the creation of a Blueprint listing the Techniques, Rituals and Suggestions that we will use to create our Positive Reality. The Blueprint for the Reality Construction of healed bodily states is a “living” document, in that it will change from day to day as you gain information about yourself from your experimentation.
Initially it is necessary to create a potent statement of affirmation that you will build to create the Blueprint for The Healing Regimen. The statement should be only a few well-selected words that do indeed epitomize for you the project at hand. It should be a deeply personal and symbolic statement, to the fact that you are identifying as best you can current life issue in emotional terms. It’s extraordinary the lengths we go to for a ‘labor of love’. We happily make sacrifices, suffer hardships and turn away from temptations. We do everything within our power to prove ourselves to be worthy. We put ourselves through hell and high water because we feel such depths of emotion. Yet, we rarely go to such efforts for our own benefit. Is that because we don’t love ourselves enough? Ask yourself what you’d do to help someone who deserved the best. Everything in our created reality is founded in emotion, the emotion of Love. Our health issues are created as we are diverted from Love. With this in mind, we may create our affirmative statement in positive terms, expressing our simple desires with regards to the healing of body, mind and spirit.
An example may be in order here. Suppose a theoretical subject is experiencing the painful symptoms of a degenerative disease of the musculature of their body. Further, let us say that this subject has experienced a traumatic loss in their recent past. Perhaps a loved -one, such as the father or mother or other family member, has made their Transition in an abrupt manner, through a fast-acting illness that took them within a few weeks, or perhaps through an accident of some sort. Now these traumatic losses are always a surprise to the ego/intellect of those who are left behind. However, as we know, Souls choose the time of their departures as well as the circumstances, so the Souls of the departed know that they are merely keeping their appointments in this way.
Yet even though our theoretical subject also knows on a Soul level that their loved-one has simply transferred their energy to the Home Dimension, they are experiencing a Lesson here. The ego/intellect is shocked, outraged, set into a tailspin, so to speak. The grief and other emotions that are triggered by the sudden death serve to take this subject into their Underworld, where they will experience instructional vignettes that illustrate the true nature of the event in a context of the Soul Family. If the subject may literally bring to a halt their Soul’s progression. This cessation of spiritual growth and fulfillment may result in the outward manifestation of this stasis – the atrophy of the musculature of the body.
As you may have noticed, the symptoms and illnesses that humans create within their bodies are often quite literal responses to the perceived traumatic episodes in their lives. But please understand, what one person may perceive as traumatic, another may perceive as business-as-usual. These are deeply personal issues, the creation of imbalances, and should always be addressed as such, taking into account the context of personality, life-style, experiences and all of the other myriad elements that compose the existence of the human.
Now with this in mind, that your health issues are emotionally-based and that some perceived as you know them, write out a few sentences describing the people basis for your malady and what it might look like it if you were relieved of this malady. Remember, you may always return to this statement to add or subtract material.
For example, if our theoretical subject were to write out a Foundational Statement, might read as the following:
I SENSE THAT LOST IN GRIEF, AND I WOULD LIKE TO FIND MY WAY BACK TO THE LOVE AND HOPE I HAD BEFORE THE TRAGEDY.
Do you see how this statement frames the healing Regimen in term of a journey? Each of you will use your own metaphors and symbols in creating the Foundational Statement.
The Healing Regimen is a cooperative effort between the practitioner and the Guides in a diagnosis of The Emotional Body. A Blueprint is then made for the creation of a positive reality called Healing.Rituals of Healing are then performed with the application of the various techniques and experiments. The continual application of the ritual of Healing until the Healing Regimen becomes habitual, creates a positive reality that will sustain itself over time.
Thus, a healing regimen implies regimentation, does it not? Here we are approaching the subject in a very systematic fashion. This is how you get results with these techniques, you see, by creating the Personal Reality Field in purposeful ways. You will not be “sleepwalking” through your life as you may have done in the past. The goal is to achieve conscious awareness in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest in the moment. Then in these moments of awareness, I suggest you enact your ritual of Healing and purposeful Reality Creation. It is the sequential empowerment of the moments in our existence, that leads in time to the creation of an improved Personal Reality.
This project is really an extended Ritual. If you remember, our definition for Ritual in the context of my new Teaching, is “the consistent requesting of contact and communication with non-physical beings – Beings of Light.” It is all about spirit thought and contact with this stream of communication. Everything in our reality has consciousness and everything may be contacted for communication.
Of course, you may if you wish, continue to heed the communication stream of the ego/intellect, as you have done for perhaps many years in your life. However, if you do, you will in all likelihood merely achieve a recreation of the status quo reality. If you are ill, for example, you may simply recreate a physical body that is ill. I suggest that you do something different here. Experiment with your reality.
As we co-create our Personal Reality Field, we might say that All That Is “supplies” the energy for our creations in the form of Consciousness Units infused with Love. This infusion occurs within a context of the Love Light Matrix. We have discussed this metaphor in earlier Blogs. Let me present a synopsis here for you. ALL realities created by consciousness are based in Love. Yet in Third-Dimensional Reality there exists the opposite OFLove that serves as a counterpoint and is quite necessary within our linear time illusion. The counterpoint to Love, what we might call Negative Emotion, serves to create alternatives in physical reality to the positive, and so Reality Construction evolves in multitudinous ways.
Our Personal Reality Field is a result of our Intention, conscious or unconscious responsibility for our creations as a cooperative venture with All That Is, we could say that we are using our Intention in a divine fashion.
To take this further… there is a history on our Earth of the positive use of the human will in tandem with the Divine. As I mentioned in my last Blog Series, the great altruistic Leaders of our human history knew of a concept we are calling Divine Will. They were experts in the use of Divine Will and took their place alongside of the Divine, acknowledging the collaboration entailed in creating a Personal Reality of worth. In this project, I suggest that we to conceive of our physical incarnation in this timeframe as a cooperative venture with the forces of Nature, the Divine and our Mother Earth.
As further aid to understanding here in this discussion, and as a way for you to possibly visualize the activity of the Divine Will, I offer the following: consider our theoretical construct of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, and visualize it as a stream of energy, much as a river is a stream of water. Using this metaphor, can you see, perhaps with your Intuitive Sensing, that just as the elemental energies of our great Earth, “push” water through the soil and dirt and rock until the water makes its way to the other side, further along to its “destination,” the human will, Divine Will as we are discussing, as a veritable “force of nature,” may push desired thoughts and images per a particular outcome or Reality Construct, across the threshold of potentiality and into the physical? Divine Will is Love guided by our intention in the moment. It represents the creative energies of All That Is as they are channeled through the consciousness of an inspired human.
Let me remind you that these metaphors are not the ultimate representations of the processes we are describing here, nor will they ever be. They may be seen as bookmarks within my greater theory. They will allow you to continue the study of the new Blog material in a focused way. You may always return to a concept for further meditation, inspiration and study.
We might say that our New AgeHealers refer to as the human Aura, is essentially our “timeless” Light Body. The Aura, is a reflection of our greater Soul Self THROUGHThe Consciousness Units that compose our current physical body. Now within this we may detect, by using what we are calling our Auric Vision, the exhibits of electromagnetic emanations of Gestalts of Consciousness of all types. Within this Auric vision we could, as a Scientist of Consciousness, diagnose past, present and future life issues. All of our many Simultaneous Lives exhibit their activities in an essential form within this aura.
Each consciousness Unit “remembers” each and every one of its voyages into form. These Consciousness Units tell their stories, and if we listen carefully, we may discover the proper path to take to heal and balance the human subject – oneself, a friend or family member or possible even a leader who has gone astray and requires an “adjustment” on the Etheric Plane.
Here, with an understanding of the animate Universe we are describing in these Blogs, it becomes quite possible for the Scientist of Consciousness to assume the role of Healer, and in a manner of speaking, “address” the Gestalts of Consciousness that support the malady. Thus the healer if “speaking” to the disease and acting on the responses to effect the healing.
Now when we use our Auric Vision, the information comes to us in unique ways, in a fashion distinct from our normal Third-Dimensional perceptions. Our auric vision may present us with a literal dramatization of the issues and problems inherent in the malady we are observing. This Inner Senses may project onto our inner field of perception, perhaps as we close our eyes, complete scenes peopled with characters of various descriptions. These dramatizations of the malady and the cure may run the gamut from literal representations to those that are so deeply personal and symbolic that only YOU would know the meaning entailed.
For example: we might view a scene in which a human heart is literally “broken.” And let us further state that the destroyer of the heart is a person easily recognized as our relative or friend or lover. Do you see the literal representation here? It is trying to tell us something. Most of us would probably interpret this scene in similar ways.
Or another example suppose that you viewed a scene that contained a surreal display of images accompanied by a changing stream of emotion. In this case, you are called upon to consult your personal symbols, utilizing images, ideas and emotions that one YOU would understand, to interpret the material. Your interpretation and your diagnosis style will be a direct reflection of your personality aspects. You will diagnosis and treat in your preferred fashion, using what works best for you.
What is the value, (in so much as these words may be valued by us,) of the messages of Beings of Light?
Some would say, of course, that these messages are priceless. The words are, after all, the messages of spirits – those who no longer exist as physical beings. If this is so, then should we worship these messages and these beings? Historically, humans have projected their own innate divinity onto these representations – gods and goddesses, spirit being etc. Yet at the same time, the human devalues their own contribution. The human projects the god within onto an outside entity, and then slavishly worships it, forgetting the origins of the god from within the human psyche.
We are discussing these matters in an attempt to remind the Blog Reader of our innate divinity. We are god. We are a goddess. This is a fact of life. As we begin to accept this condition, perhaps we will also remember that we have the power to heal ourselves and others.
Now as with all healing activities from our perceived past – within shamanic cultures for example – we will have help in The HealingRegimen. We will have assistance from our Guides. Our Guides are emissaries from All That Is – the source of all realities, the Loving center of the created Universes.
So it is quite naturally that we turn to our Guides to assist in The HealingRegimen. Our Guides know what Love is and can remind us of this over the course of the of the project. Our Guides, such as the energy Personality and others, may facilitate the healings that take place within the physical body. They help us to maintain the required intensity of emotion over the long term.
I suggest that the Blog Reader think if this Guide as a personal assistant, one that would be “on call” to assist in matters of importance, such as the learning of Lessons. The Energy Personality may serve as a divine assistant for us in this project. For now, let us discuss the Light Body and the means to explore it with the InnerSense of Sight.
The Emotional Body is the energy center of our human body within which the signatures of the various Energy Forms may be perceived. As we have stated in previous Blogs, within the electromagnetic corona it is central plane, the focus of the intersecting energies that comprise the Light Body. This nonphysical construct may be visualized as an oval form of pulsating light energy suspended within the heart region of the physical body. Of course, we may sense it in our individual ways. This form is perceived with the Inner Sense of sight we have named Auric Vision.
In my theory, emotion is the great creative force within our system that serves to push the incipient Reality Constructs into physicality. We have described this in a very basic way in our last series of Blogs. Let me summarize this material. It is ALL about emotion in our world. We exist within Third-Dimensional reality. We create our world according to the various thoughts and images within our mental environment AND the templates for creation that exist as Gestalts of Consciousness. We cooperate with EVERYTHING IN OUR EXISTENCE in this play of consciousness we are experiencing that we call “my life.”
Now everything in created reality exists as a particular frequency or vibration of emotion, what we have referred to as “bio-electric energy.” Everything is alive. Everything is composed of this Light Energy. We might think of these individual vibrations as the “emotional charge” that both creates and sustains the Reality Construct – whatever that might be – time and space in our system.
This idiosyncratic vibrational signature “My” entity, when we wish to communicate with one another. The entity has a specific frequency or emotional Energy Form that he/she displays, as do us all. These frequencies are perceived through the Inner Sense, so that we may “See” the frequency, “Hear” the frequency and so on. These senses tend to blend together somewhat, as we have stated earlier.
Since all Energy Bodies have their own individual emotional charge or frequency, where there are issues of symptoms and illness, there are the attendant Energy Forms representing these constructs that are observable within The Emotional Body. Also within this Emotional Body there are observable Energy Constructs that will lead us to “solutions” – the healing and balance we are seeking. We might call these Gestalts of Consciousness the non-physical “Data Banks” that hold the collected wisdom and experience of healing from the practices of magicians, shaman, witches and healers.
Another way to describe this repository of healing might be to briefly speak on the subject of “spontaneous healing,’ as we call it. Now our literature is filled with stories of humans who have “garnered their inner resources” to effect miraculous changes in their debilitating physical conditions. Of course, to the human raised within a society that stresses the medical model, these transformations from deathly ill to completely healed are indeed perceived as miraculous. Yet, if we view disease process and the medical model as Gestalts of Consciousness, may we also conceive of Spontaneous Healing as simply another readily accessible Gestalt of consciousness? The Gestalt of Consciousness we might call Spontaneous Healing is the ” transmitter” that we “tune-in” to with our Metaphorical Tools to receive the signal – that we will use to create the necessary changes within the body for the transformation.
Our emerging reality is composed of Light, as we have said. We might say that the Coordinate Points within the juncture of time and space of any particular Moment Point of our physical existence, serve to “hold the shape” of the emerging reality, the outgrowth, if you will, of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This context for Realty Creations is indeed the Love Light Matrix. The atoms or Consciousness Units are each, again as we have suggested, energized, animated, empowered by Love with a capital L.
Our world is an ongoing manifestation created from the Loving energized of All That Is. All That Is IS LOVE, and so it follows that Reality Constructs of all types are founded in Love. Now within our Consensus Realities of Earth at this time, there is a pronounced diversion AWAY from Love. We may see this in all of our social, political and even our religious institutions.
It is obvious, is it not? Our world is in crisis. It is increasingly difficult to find Love in our reality. It is true that there is a Turnabout that is occurring, as we see how the absence of Love is so damaging to humanity? See it and remember it.
Now with regards to human health and healing, it is the same: wherever Love is absent, you will surely find decay, illness, disease, imbalance. I am not telling you something you do not already know. Dear Blog Reader, you are conceived in Love, but we are diverted by either emotions as we live our life. The consistent experiencing of the Negative Emotions result in the creation of symptoms and disease. Now in a sense, The Healing Regimen is a matter of peeling away the residue of Negative Emotion that hardens like a shell around The Emotional Body. Underneath this shell we will find the core of humanity – Love, just as we have been describing.
These emotions of Love and Compassion serve a very important purpose here in this project. They are the forces the practitioner uses to affect healing and balance. So that here, in a very elementary way, Negative Emotions serve to create symptoms and disease, whereas Loving Understanding and Compassion serve to create healing and balance. Again emotion is an Electromagnetic Entity that serves as the impetus or natural energy source for the creation of Reality Constructs.
In this suggestion we may also see a strategy for approaching the Healing Quest we are to begin. Human emotion, is the concentrated force that the co-creator employs to “push” into manifestation the desired reality of healing. So that success here is determined by the intensity of desire you can consistently muster within the Rituals of Healing we will cover momentarily.
In The Healing Regimen, just as in other matters of intentional Reality Creation, the idea is to become cognizant of our unconscious agendas of manifestation IN THE MOMENT. In this moment of awakening, we may use our will to begin the creation of improved Reality Constructs with regards to our physical being, i.e. the transformation of symptoms and “disease states” to a lack symptoms and the perception of “healed” body states.
Now our approach requires a definite change of perspective for the average Blog Reader. Please allow me to present some background to this discussion for those of us who may be new to this material. In my last series of Blogs I encouraged you to take on the roll of Scientist of Consciousness. And as a specialist in the use of the Inner Senses, I asked you to go about your investigations in this ongoing “altered state.” I reminded you that the Scientist of Consciousness was the magician, the shaman, the witch of antiquity. You were simply affirming your connection to these original scientists from your perceived past. As you embodied the suggested role of Scientist of Consciousness, you “put on” the perceptual lenses of the witch or the shaman or the healer.
In this new Blog project of ours, as we intentionally create this altered state within our mental environment, we will enable our Inner Senses to “pick up” the vibrational messages of Consciousness Units that exist within the specific Gestalts of Consciousness, some representing, shall we say, “disease process,” and others representing “healing process.”
Both disease and healed states, as well as all states in between, exist in the moment. Our goal as researchers is to determine with our Inner Senses, the influences from the various Gestalts of Consciousness and how they assist in the creation of our particular malady of the malady of our subject. Then we shall use our MetaphoricalTools to diminish or eliminate these influences – guided by the Gestalts of Consciousness representing healing process – so the the body many return to balance.
Let us briefly discuss the related views of some of the indigenous peoples of our Earth. We often make these comparisons in our discussions to illustrate that unknown reality is already quite well known to some of us. For example: in the spiritual traditions among the First People of our human race, an intimate relationship exists between the human and the environment. It is common to speak to Nature directly in these collectives and receive responses from trees, stones, animals etc. These humans are well aware of the consciousness and integrity of plants, animals and the various elements around them. They accept that a rock has a spirit, that fire has a spirit that may be addressed and that will respond.
Just as the indigenous peoples communicate with the spirits of the natural world, it is possible for us on The Healing Regimen to seek counsel from these Energy forms, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness. We do this through the use of our Inner Senses, observing The Emotional Body.
As with all of our creations in physical reality, we could say that we are entranced by our own projections, including the bodily states known as “symptoms and illnesses.” Now I have spoken in other Blogs of the dangers in our medical community of constantly referring to the “inevitability” of certain illnesses forming in the human body. Statistics are bandied about SUGGESTING that such-and-such a percentage of men or women will INEVITABLY “fall victim” to certain diseases. Do you see where I am taking this discussion? The disease process is supported on the SUGGESTIONS of Gestalts of Consciousness. And so we might say that the great majority of our medical doctors are “under the spell” of these Energy Bodies. They are entranced with this Gestalt of Consciousness, the central information center called the medical model. They have been for many years indoctrinate with the data and procedures that support this system.
We play your part in this drama also. Dear Blog reader. It is our role to “pretend” that what the doctors say is true. We obediently create the applicable symptoms within our body. We are supporting our health and practitioner in this way. “Doctor’s orders” DEMAND that you create a particular set of symptoms to correspond to a particular disease state. This collaboration takes place on the subtle levels, of course. The telepathic communication streams are quite active between Gestalts of Consciousness of various types, the doctor and the patient. Everyone must do their part here in order to sustain the “appearance” of illness and the “appearance” of healing or perhaps failure to heal, initiated by the medical profession.
It is all supported on suggestion. These suggestions are essentially Idea Constructs that are the building blocks of disease and the treatment of disease. Thus we have, for example, a Gestalt of Consciousness know as Alzheimer’s Disease. The patient is experiencing this illness as a vehicle for the learning of particular Lessons. In the case of Alzheimer’s, Lessons of infantilism and being cared for without protest, are often the reasons for the creation of the disease state, though it is not wise to generalize in these matters.
Ultimately however, illnesses of all kinds are created as life Lessons. The disease state is a teacher to us in physical reality. Our Soul Self our Guides and all members of our Soul Family are engaged with us in the drama of physical illness. We are learning our Lessons as a collective, much as we would study and learn within a classroom in one of our universities.
Now to elaborate on this comparison here… just as we would learn in a classroom the subject matter in a course on, shall we say, Life Science, everything needed to pass that course, in The Healing Regimen we may discover that truths in the Lessons of physical existence. As we become knowledgeable on the causes of our malady, we may find the means to learn our Lesson in other ways, perhaps in ways that do not entail physical symptoms and disease. This is always our free will choice. We may decide to continue the Lesson of physical illness or we may decide to discover the “causes” and address them.
PHYSICAL CHALLENGES Prophecies are based on the most probable outcomes if you were to follow on your current trajectory. Thus, if you are currently in a positive frame of mind, the probabilities for a positive future are greatly diminished.
Create your positive future NOW with your positive life-affirming beliefs and ideas.
GESTALT OF CONSCIOUSNESS AND HEALTH
Let us review the basics for purposes of creating The Healing Regimen. As we well know, you are a Soul within a physical body and with All That Is we co-create our existence in Third-Dimensional reality. In this endeavor we cooperate with each and every Consciousness Unit in our perceptive field. The “blueprints” for our creative works are the beliefs, thoughts and images that predominate in our mental environment. These blueprints exist as arrays of Coordinate Points within the pre-manifestation domains. These arrays merge to create Gestalts of Consciousness – complex affiliations of mental constructs – that are, in essence, the nonphysical representations of EVERYTHING.
Thus, ideas and images relative to a concept identified as “the common cold,” for example, assemble into Gestalts of Consciousness, representing the accumulated “wisdom,” you might say, from all human experience of the common cold. All of the “requirements” for achieving the common cold are represent. The symptoms are there within these incipient Reality Constructs. In a sense, we could say that the operating system for the cold virus is “resident” within the mental constructs. The symptoms exist in potentiality. They await the invocation of the disease state into the mental environment of the human.
Now, the “disease process,” as we call it, exists first as a mental vulnerability. This is not the accepted view, I certainly realize. However, bear with me for just a moment, the mental precedes the physical in all matters of disease process. But if course, there must be the physical “cause” of the illness. The mental and thus the emotional vulnerability creates a physical vulnerability through suggestion. “I am near those who have colds, I will get a cold,” “I am old and vulnerable to disease, I will get a cold.”
The continual presentation to the inner mental environment that we are vulnerable – either through our own internal ruminations or through the transmissions from other Energy Bodies – Creates the physical vulnerability, such as a weakened immune system, so that exposure to particular strain of virus would then “lead” to the creation of the disease state in the body and the “inevitable” progression of the illness through to its conclusion.
Perhaps I should elaborate on my statement that the suggestions “create” physical vulnerabilities within the body. These suggestions or thoughts or potent images, form whatever source, are the same as any other thoughts or images generated by consciousness, in that they seek manifestation within the physical and other dimensions.
In the case of disease process, we find that the creation of imbalance occurs on a cellular level. So that if we might envision a cell within the body as it exists within the organ or blood or perhaps muscle tissue as being subject to the messages and the many systems that feed “information” to the cells to govern theory activity, such as the immune, digestive and other systems – do you see how the mental suggestions might serve to short-circuit some of these information streams?
A simple example here for illustration, would be the difficulties that may come from a sensitive person observing distasteful images while they eat. They may incur a bad case of indigestion from these mental suggestion that ALL illness and their symptoms, are caused by these Gestalts of Consciousness, in this case by an Energy Body we might call indigestion.
We do have many awakenings in our day-to-day existence, and these can be opportunities for accessing the spiritual awakening we seek. For example: each time you awaken from sleep, we have an opportunity to awaken also in a spiritual sense. As I have described in theses Blogs, our nighttime activities entail a great deal of what we might term “spiritual” or “Soul–Directed” activities. Yet on our awakening after sleep, the rigors of physical reality.
PRELUDE TO THE REGIMENS
The lessons we are learning currently may be categorized according to the three broad topics we will cover in the next three series of Blogs. This is a continuation of our discussion on the blessing “healthy, wealthy and wise” from our last Blog Series.
Now health would obviously entail Lessons Learned regarding the physical body, mind and spirit. We are asserting here the symptoms and illnesses humans generate within their bodies are for educational purposes. Each illness is a physical expression of inherently nonphysical Idea Constructs.
The same may be said of prosperity. The lessons of the Acquisition of wealth and the utilization of that form of energy is spiritual at its base. Money and wealth are simply very potent ideas pertaining to security and value in the physical domain. So here again, the physical is simply the observable component of the invisible, nonphysical spiritual construct.
The wisdom of the Soul, the third element in this blessing, may be accomplished in the learning of these symbolic Lessons in physical reality by allowing these Life Lessons to transform the psyche. Loving Understanding and Courage are some of the results of this transformative phenomenon.
Health – physical, mental, emotional, financial – is a state of consciousness that exists in a Moment Point in our perceptual reality. “Behind” this “spiritual” assessment is our Soul Self, the co-creator with All That Is of our Personal Reality Field.
All of the subatomic elements of awarized energy that comprise our Third-Dimensional world for us personally, collaborate to create this awareness of health.
Now speaking of physical health: this is the reason that our world and everything in it seems to support our physical symptoms, you see. Our field of Personal Reality creation, because it is a reflection, a direct reflection of our inner world, does continuously reflect our personal symptoms that we are experiencing/creating for purposes of Learning and Value Fulfillment. The improvements desired in our physical health, therefore, must obviously come from a change in this inner perception. We have been referring to these inner perceptive processes as the Inner Senses. We will go much deeper into this method in The Healing Regimen.
Dear Blog Reader, now in this moment of Good Humor resides your opportunity for an improved future. Perhaps a brief recap is in order here, to serve as a basis for the proclamation. You create BOTH your past and your future from your current moment. This is one of the basic tenets of my Teaching, and so it would serve you well to use this fact of life as a “given” – an essential building block upon which rests my theoretical construct of Reality Creation. So when I suggest to you that you may expand your consciousness intentionally, perhaps what I really mean is that you are capable, simply by virtue of your existence on our physical Earth at this time, of truly exploring and embodying the richness of our momentary existence.
Yes, our life is a series of moments. In this series of moments, obviously, you are reading from my Blog. Now the act of reading requires some focus “in the moment.” You muster all of your attention and direct it toward the task of reading and absorbing the Blog material. In a similar way, the student of my Teaching would do well to harness the same efforts of concentration entailed in the reading of this Blog, toward the appreciation and assessment of the current Moment Point – the spacious moment that connects all of our Simultaneous Lives.
Any moment will do here. This one… Or this one… Or this one… The study and appreciation of the spacious moment does indeed take some preparation. You are, in a sense, preparing yourself for the PROBABILITY of experiencing the moment of awakening – the moment of healing, the moment of perceiving the Abundant Universe, the moment of receiving Divine Wisdom. I am aware that in other Teachings, the student is taught that the awakening of the consciousness to its own spiritual heritage is a lifetime “undertaking,” if you will excuse my pun. Here however, we are offering the student the opportunity to awaken without first expiring.
Now for example… let us say that you are currently experiencing fear in its most basic form, perhaps dreading something that is to occur in your future, or perhaps fearing what has already occurred, perhaps fearing that the dreaded subject or object will continue to exist in our reality. As I have stated in previous blogs, if you are experiencing fear, you are under the influence of Negative Entities – Energy Bodies that thrive on the emotions of fear and anxiety. So perhaps a simple antidote to these energies would be for you to trivialize and make fun of these influences. By creating a state of simple Good Humor in your consciousness in this way, you are creating a comedy out of a fearful drama.
In the transformation, you are also creating Courage our of fear. Without getting into details, we could say that the natural abilities of human consciousness create this transformation of fear into Courage. You are, from the inception into human body on Earth, created out of Love. Your consciousness may easily return to this positive state, then, with merely the least amount of effort on your part.
This is easy to do. Making fun of the fear-producing ideas or images may be an enjoyable and creative act unto itself. You are using your imagination to turn down the fearful intensity of the ideas and images, and perhaps replacing them with humorous images and ideas.
Do you see how you are much better prepared to create positive realities when you are in this self-created state of Good Humor? Certainly it is important to continue creating this positive state as you attempt to create a positive reality. It is the extension of the current moment of Good Humor into the future that creates the positive future.
So let us assume that you have gained some mastery over the creation of Good Humor within your own apparatus. You may notice that, over time, as you get good at creating Good Humor, the quality of your daily existence improves. This is the creation of positive realities in itself, as even modest improvements in an otherwise fearful and anxious Reality Construction may have profound effects on your daily life. You create your world from the beliefs you hold about what is possible. As you embody the state of Good Humor consistently, it becomes possible for you to believe in the continuation of this positive state.
Fear may be thought of as the founding energy in the emotional states of anxiety, anger and hatred. Now fear and Good Humor do not mix well. If one is enjoying your state of consciousness known as Good Humor, one is most probably enjoying THE ABSENCE OF FEAR. I stress the importance of Good Humor here for the simple reason that, because it is often so simple to generate this mental state, it becomes a very useful too in the creation of Courage out of fear. Let me illustrate with an example, if I may.
Some of my students, upon reading my earlier Blogs, have expressed the criticism that my experiments and exercises are quite challenging. To these students I say, simplify this endeavor. Bring this back to the basics of manifestation. Prepare your mental environment for the creation of positive realities by FIRST embodying or generating within your consciousness, the state of simple enjoyment or Good Humor.
You are literally born out of the Love And Good Humor of All That Is. Here I am asking you to move beyond any religious conditioning that has convinced you that you perhaps were born out of suffering to live a life of pain. For in truth, the facts in this matter are just the opposite.
Let me state the obvious here, however, to avoid any misunderstanding. Yes, your reality is born in your imagination out of Love and Good Humor, yet you will of necessity also experience the opposites of these attributes – fear, anxiety, anger, hatred. Now the important thing here, is how long a hold on to the fear, anxiety, anger and hatred. How much importance do you attach to these emotional states as you experience them? How much do you invest your ego/intellect in the recreation of these states, once you have allowed them to enter your mental environment.
So love Light is born in a simple Good Humor. I trust that this will not be a difficult stretch of the imagination for you to comprehend and accept this information. It is true that in our world, Good Humor may be thought of as a simple and mundane aspect of existence. It may be thought of as too trivial to be considered in as serious an endeavor as the creation of realities. Yet I am suggestion here that ties, in particular, the positive realities that are the focus of this blog.
Hypothesis: In trance we may identify the communication streams within our mental environment.
Now we shall investigate the many information streams that “flow” and “time” are used to hopefully facilitate our connecting to the data streams and to identifying and understanding the content. We are familiar with a flowing river. The river flows regardless of our noticing it, observing it, studying it. In a similar fashion, the many information streams that flow through our mental environment, do so regardless of our attention to them, our noticing them. However, though we may be unaware of these streams of divine information, and of course others that are most certainly not divine, we are indeed quite affected by the ideas and images carried within these many streams of communication. Here I believe It would be a good idea for the student to become more aware of the content of these information streams.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter your Trance State, as usual. Now to begin, let us list the many providers of information that exist within the mind or psyche of the “typical” human engaged in co-creating an existence on our world.
First and foremost would be the divine source – All That Is. This data stream is quite easily recognized by the seeker of wisdom. The ecstasy felt during the encounter with the Divine, is the energy signature that marks this source.
Next on the list would be the “voices” of Soul Family members past, present and future.
Of course the negative gods and goddesses exist there also, as well as the Energy Bodies of divine beings of various types crested through the collective efforts of humanity over the ages.
Your own understanding of God with a capital G exists here as an energy form.
If you have pursued contact with the Elemental Beings, they exist within our mentality also, to the degree that we have co-created them through study, worship, observation, and so on.
Our Simultaneous Lives are there in their totality, providing information and both support and negative influence, according to what you are on our Earth to learn at this time.
Let us not forget our own ego/intellect that oversees this phenomenon and indeed censors and directs the activities therein.
Now there are certainly more examples of Light Bodies and other Energy forms that exist within our consciousness. Note these as you discover their activity in our experimentation. When we feel as though we have have received enough information from this experiment, return to full sensory awareness.
Findings – Document your findings in identifying the stream of information within your mental environment.
Hypothesis: By focusing on the precept you may catalyze the holographic insert from the entity.
You may with some preparation, feel the ecstasy and empowerment that some with the experiencing of the Holographic Inserts I stream into my Third Subject’s consciousness. For the purpose of elucidation and bringing Light and information to the discussion. I also present these “teachings aids” to you for the same purposes.
There are a few ways you may explain this to oneself that this phenomenon is real – so that you may indeed experience it clearly, without resorting to denial, fear, anxiety. The simplest explanation is that you are my student and as such you and I have a special , spiritual relationship. The connection here is a physical one also, relating to certain portals or chakras as we might call them, located on and around the physical body.
Any one of my precepts may be used as a Holographic Insert. We have mentioned before that the phrase “you create your own reality” is a particularly potent precept and stands as the foundational statement, if you will, of my entire Teaching. I would suggest an experiment to determine the precepts that have the greatest “effects” for you, when you activate them as Holographic Inserts by focusing on them in your mediations.
PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Relax and enter a light Trance State. First, I would have you read the percepts and attempt to identify those that “speak” to you with the most energy and frequency. The phenomenon known as resonance comes into play here. Your physical construct, your human body, is actually a vibrating system of Consciousness Units, as you know. Ideas and images of all types, either entertained from within your mental environment of considered from written texts and other media, also “hold” their individual vibratory signatures.
Let me again emphasize that it is the Divine Essence cultivated within the student that is the catalyst here. Through working on your self, through reading spiritual literature and engaging in these arcane practices, the researcher cultivates a certain perspective that allows for the experiencing of the Holographic Insert by the Inner senses. Also, on “the other side,” in a sense, the creator of the manuscript – in this case The entity – empowers the text with the essential energies of the Divine – All That Is – so that on the subtle levels where these types of spiritual growth and extra sensory and emotional perception are experienced, the stages is set quite well for the Holographic Inserts to display.
Now focus on your selected precepts one at a time. Have an intention to link up with the etheric component of each precept. There is an openness required in this endeavor. You might think of oneself as an antenna in search of a signal here. Be quiet. Be still. Listen with your Inner Senses for the response from the Entity.
Findings – Document your findings in catalyzing the precepts into Holographic Inserts.
To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, your current existence in this day, within this moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its Conscious Units “holding” its shape through the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of you in a life you may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era? Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different RealityConstructs of varied types within these different areas. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.
All timeframes or Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” You may conceptualize this, if it helps you, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously created “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists you in attempting contact with the other lives. The lives are out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material. Now for some experimentation.
The visionary state to which we aspire is always available to us. This state of consciousness exists probability at all times, for the time is right for this ascension of human consciousness. In our popular media we can see this. The 2012 phenomenon is exhibited for us in our books and other media, as a potentially horrendous affair entailing the destruction of the planet and humanity. These are actually the collective fears of humans being given life by authors, directors, and other artists. Their vision is a dark one, you see. They are going for the sensationalist expression of the potential inherent in this great change that lies before us.
Yet, the opposite is also true here. The change that we will experience in the coming years have just as much potential to express in positive ways as in the negative. Indeed,we could say that our visionary exercises are specifically tuned to allow a perception of this positive outcome, what we call the Positive Collective Manifestation. In my Blogs I presented an exercise for the researcher that wishes to explore this collective manifestation as it creates itself out of the positive thoughts, emotions, images, and beliefs of humanity.
Here I will present an exercise that you may carry with you so that you may become an advocate: an ongoing contributor to the Positive Manifestation.
To illustrate my last point: imagine if you will, our current existence in this day, within the moment that you are reading these words. Can you visualize how the Blog, with its conscious units “holding” its shape though the Coordinate Points we have discussed, exists also as, let us say, a section of a tree in front of us in a life we may be living as a forest dweller many years before our so-called Christian Era?
Likewise in this example, these exact same Conscious Units, as they flash on and off, creating different realities within different timeframes, do indeed compose different Reality Constructs of varied types within these different ears. This is why I describe the future and past timeframes as simply dimensions.
All timeframes of Reincarnational Existences exist “right before your eyes.” We may conceptualize this, if it helps us, as a layered effect, with the different existences and their constructs simultaneously create “one on top of the other.” I hope this description of the very easily accessible dimensions assists in attempting contact with these other lives. The lives out there in front of us. They are perceived through the fine-tuning of the Inner Senses. This process is quite doable for the student of this material.
The engineers were not limited to design and creation of buildings and other structures. They were instrumental in the creation of vehicles that were used by researchers to “travel” interdimensionally. I am now transmitting a Holographic Insert into Dorian’s mental field in an attempt to graphically illustrate one of the inter-dimensional vehicles.
Now these vehicles did not “travel” in the common meaning of that term. The crystal structure assisted the researcher in an attunement of their consciousness through vibratory resonance. The mental Intention of the researcher, directed through the “focal” aspects of the crystal structure, allowed for the “beginning in” of the SimultaneousLives lived in different points in space and time travel in our system. The future, in our terms, is really just our progressed reality in linear time. Our future is another dimension, a dimension that exists, as I have stated, within the exact same Conscious Units that compose the Blog Reader, as well as all of the current Reality Constructs that compose our world.
There was another serving class, another group of humans within the Atlantean society, that was dedicated to assisting the people within their social group in terms of leadership and the creation of social and political structures as well as physical structures. This group was composed of humans who were extremely talented in the mathematical sciences and had a natural affinity for numbers, figures and their manipulation. They were natural engineers and experts at what you might call the “hard sciences.” These humans “instinctively” knew the lost efficient methods for creating a structure, such as a house or other building, and possessed a facility for designing and building dams and other large structures.
These ancient engineers were also visionaries, just as the visionary leaders were prophets as well as gifted politicians. They could foretell the future stresses – from natural disasters etc. – that a particular structure of their design would incur after being built, and so could design and build the structure with this prophetic material in mind.
You may read about the “vestiges” of the class of prophet leaders in your stories of the Divine King. In successive civilizations after the “fall” of Atlantis, for example, this idea was kept alive, if only symbolically, in the concept of the King or Emperor having a direct connection to the Divine.
We may also read in our histories how ultimately this type of leadership failed miserably, for the leaders tool the power without taking the responsibility of divine leadership. They were more interested in ruling than leading. In our current leadership on our Earth, we may see this ultimate act of hubris in the leaders who have anointed themselves as the modern Divine King, yet choose to deny the citizenry their rights, and as I said, rule rather than lead.
As descendants of the divine rulers of the Mystery civilizations, the visionary leaders are engaged in the same sort of activities as their predecessors. They are art of a lineage of incarnation in our Third Dimension. Now genetically, there may or may not be a connection, however the Soul Family connections are there to investigate.
For example: those of us who have identified an AtlanteanHeritage, through our experimentation or other research efforts, may be interested to know that the leadership within the Atlantean culture itself was initially drawn from what you might call the “spiritual” class. This group fulfilled several different functions in the society. They were scientists of non physical reality, what we are calling the Scientists of Consciousness.
These humans were raised from birth as the “Magical Child” we spoke of in the last Blog Series. They had memories of all of their Reincarnational Existences. This information, which included “future” experiences, were quite valuable. The leaders were visionaries in the true sense of that term, in that they were aware of the probable events to occur in the future of their societies.
We suggested in our last Blog Series that there are true visionaries among us who are making themselves known. These are the advocates for our Mother Earth, the speakers, the teachers, the magicians, shamans, witches and healers of our timeframe, who are exerting considerable pressure on the current ruling regime – I am speaking in global terms here now – to “soften” and indeed spiritualize their expressions in physical reality, including their political systems. They are now coming forward to lead us in all the domains of human interaction.
Our leaders who have taken advantage of the people are now finding themselves “uncovered” and suddenly vulnerable. In their place there is becoming apparent this new class of “natural born leaders.” We have stated that these visionaries will not necessarily be elected. They lead in a very appropriate manner, for that is their natural gift, as humans in this very important era in our world.
Perhaps now we have witnessed this phenomenon, essentially a calling forth to those of goodwill for our Mother earth, to tend to THE TRUE BUSINESS AT HAND. The denial is lifting, you see, as many of us begin to see the damage done by our leaders with our tacit approval.
Or perhaps we have experienced this phenomenon in a more personal way, as we may have felt oneself called to serve our fellow humans in a more direct way than we have done in the past. Leaders come in many forms. Leading by example, to coin a phrase, is a wholly adequate and necessary service one may provide to initiate the rebuilding of our damaged societies.
You see, there are no authorities among these visionary Leaders. They do not hold power by virtue of authority, such as a power “over” others. They are powerful because they keep their own power. They do not give up their authority to others. In the broad sense, ALL of us are becoming enlightened, empowered with the natural creative energies that are our birthright. We are all becoming leaders in this way.
In other models, these primal blueprints are referred to as “archetypes.” Our eminent psychiatrist and researcher Jung popularized this term, as elemental to his theory of consciousness. Naturally this theory of Jung’s bears a resemblance to the ideas within current Blog work. Jung was informed by the Entity.
He was first informed through contact and communication with his Energy Personality, and later used this Energy Construct as a bridge to the greater Gestalt of consciousness to which he was associated – The Entity, broadly speaking. Essentially, this was the path used by all three of the recognized authors in our timeframe. It is also the recommended path for those of us who wish to receive energy from the greater energy Construct of which we are a part, be that TheEntity or any others.
I do not wish to repeat myself too greatly in this New BlogMaterial, but allow me to once again state the ultimate premise of our Third-Dimensional existence. Our world is composed of Light. Each and every Reality Construct is the “visible” manifestation of Gestalts of Consciousness of various types.
The leaf on the tree before you is the “outward” creation of the “inner” thought-form or Energy Gestalt of LEAF. The Beings of Light, therefore, exist at all levels of physical Reality Creation. And again, each and every Gestalt of Consciousness, including the Beings of Light, may be contacted through the Rituals of Contact and Communication we are presenting in these new Blog works. In this way, the researcher may communicate with the leaf in question through an attunement of the vibratory frequency of the researcher’s mental environment to the frequency of the subject i.e. LEAF.
When you state, for example, that something “resonates” with you, this is a statement of literal fact. Let us say that you are speaking of some particularly evocative material you are reading in a book. You find yourself becoming quite affected by the ideas in the text. You become emotionally invested in the material. It seems as though the author is “reading your mind,” as to what you are thinking and feeling.
This vibratory resonance occurs when the thoughts you are entertaining within your consciousness are vibrating at a similar rate as the ideas you are reading about in the Blog. In this instance, the Consciousness Units that compose the thoughts held in the mental environment are vibrating at the same frequency as the ideas, images and other material elicited by the written words.
Now in this activity of resonance, you might say that the energetic potential of the one, assists in creating the holographic replicant within the other. This is a rather simplified way of expressing the manifestation phenomenon, in that the one “brings the other up” to a station of equally evolving manifestation – streaming, energizing and facilitating the assemblage of the Consciousness Units within the other.
Now the reverse is also true here. It is a mutual sharing of energies in this resonance. There is a form of homeostasis or balance that is achieved once the level of Value Fulfillment is reached that is the “goal,” in a sense, of the Reality Creation project. These discussions may become quite etheric. However, in its simplest form we may say that our reality is co-created from the Consciousness Units that are charged with the life force of All That Is.
The resonance phenomenon exists as a cohesive force in the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs throughout our Third-Dimensional Reality. When we speak in the new material of the researcher “fine tuning” the Inner Senses, we are saying that the researcher may achieve a similarity of vibratory frequency is created – through our various techniques, for example – resonance is achieved. The Consciousness Units within your mental sphere resonate with their holographic counterparts – the “generic atoms” we have spoken of earlier. What is imagined on the “inner” is made manifest on the “outer” in this way.
This cohesive force is the electromagnetic energy we have mentioned that is at the basis of all created realities. The bioelectric energy that is at the basis if all created realities. The bioelectric energy that “Lights and Powers” the human body construct or any living or inanimate object, does so in a resonating, flashing on-and-off fashion.
Here again we are referencing my past discussions on the nature of the atoms or Consciousness Units as they create multidimensional realities, in a sense, flashing or vibrating at specific rates to create the realities that vibrate at the particular frequency.
You may also remember our discussion from our previous Blogs in which we presented the possibility for the researcher to experiment with modulating the frequency of their physical body construct to create healing.
For your information, Dear Blog Reader, the ideas and philosophies of the great leaders of your perceived past are available to you within the milieu of your personal consciousness. Now obviously, this is the psychic mechanism for the inspiration and motivation of vast numbers of devotees to follow the great religious leaders, for example. It is a psychic network, a Telepathic Network that one participates in to make these connections. The catalyst for such a voyage of discovery or quest for understanding and knowledge, could be as simple as he reading of a book authored by one of these respected leaders.
As I related to you in in previous Blogs, the printed words within our spiritual and philosophical texts have power on the subtle levels. In a sense, these words serve to “open Doors” within the psyche of the reader to allow for the reception of Divine Knowledge. This stream of energy has its source or transmission point within the after-death consciousness or Soul Self of the deceased writer.
So the selection of inspirational texts is very important in this project. You may find that certain authors “call out” to you in some way. You are drawn to particular authors, just as you may have been drawn to my Blogs, it is a very natural thing to act upon these inspirational impulses. These mental constructs, the motivating impulses, serves as markers along the way, as you make your voyage of self discovery, the discovery of your Soul Self.
Now the questions may arise, “What is my relationship to these authors? Why do I feel compelled to seek out their books and read them? The answers are that you are connected to a virtually limitless “family” of incarnated and currently “deceased,” in our terms, human Souls. These are your Simultaneous Lives, that I described in my previous blogs. These are your etheric Guides also, your Energy Personality and other assistants, and these are the authors of inspirational texts.
The preferred method of communication between the complex Gestalts of Consciousness you know as spirits, Guides, Angels and such, and the student in physical reality – the visionary – has always been the Holographic Insert. This is our name for a brief multisensory experience that is transmitted from the nonphysical being to the student. It is quite brief, usually, merely a fraction of a second in duration. It has Loving energy attached to it so that you will remember it. These are the visions that are experienced by students through the ages and documented in scared texts of various kinds.
The visionary experience is really a conversation between the nonphysical beings and the student. It is not necessarily a one-way conversation. The Nature Spirit, for example, does not transmit communication streams into the consciousness of an unprepared student. The student most probably has first been prepared through study and through continued communications and Lessons creates by the Spirit for the further education of the student. The student asks for the communication and the Spirit complies when appropriate.
Now, Holographic Inserts “pour off the page” for you, when you take the care to accept these multisensory messages within your mental awareness. These words and these phrases have power when they are considered carefully with the expectation of the manifested reality to be indeed made manifest.
It is an openness, really, a state of courageous expectation that you must cultivate. It is the same with spiritual literature of all types. The words do have power. The phrases, when they are considered after the required preparation of the human mentality, may initiate the unfolding the unfolding of the Higher Consciousness. We may also relate this to all types of inspirational literature. It calls to us for specific reasons, to catalyze within you – the individual human – the resources required for the exploration of our inner world.
Now we become what we think about. Our identity is created from the ideas and images that we entertain within our mental environment, including messages sent to us from our Simultaneous Lives. Our identity is quite fluid. We are continuously assessing our mental, physical and emotional spheres of activity and assembling our identity from data gathered in this investigation.
We have many colleagues in this endeavor – the reassessment of the Personal and Consensus Realities. Our modern world in this timeframe is witnessing the transformation of the human mentality on a grand scale. Our fellow inhabitants of our planet are questioning their roles and duties as human beings and many are acknowledging the TRUTH of this matter of identity.
For example: many who have been skeptics are engaged in a reversal of thinking. They are “seeking the light” quite literally in all of their experiences, particularly where they have sought to keep the truth from their fellow humans. These transformations will be shocking to some, for they occur so abruptly that the breath is taken away. Yet as this event in the lives of men and women becomes more commonplace, the basic correctness and obvious necessity of this wholesale change in human perception and attitude will be recognized. The Visionary of old is reborn in the present, during this shift – the Fourth-Dimensional Shift we are describing.
Let me answer my own questions. Beings of Light are responding. We ARE a Being of Light. We each are a Soul with a body. We are a multitude of personalities existing in many different areas on our Earth, on other planets and in probable systems. We are experiencing our amnesia in the Third Dimension, perhaps scoffing at this admittedly “far out” narrative, yet it remains quite true that WE are what we are talking about when we describe the Beings of Light. EVERYTHING in physical reality if “lighted” by Beings of Light, Gestalts of Consciousness, Light Bodies, Energy Bodies.
They are the energy and incipient matter templates for all forms in physical reality and all other dimensions. So that any discussions as to whether Beings of Light exist are really quite humorous, as these Gestalts of Consciousness comprise ALL of human experience.
Perhaps what we are truly saying here, is that we are an Etheric Being. The witty, the humorous and the creative responses are from the Nonphysical Personality aspects that form our Soul Self. This is our identity then. We are grounded in the nonphysical world.
Where does this visionary energy perspective originate? Let me explain with reference to the “typical” Blog Reader. You have Dear Blog Reader, I am sure, what you refer to as your personal resources of wit, humor, creativity. This is that aspect of your psyche that you rely on to “Come Through” with the appropriate responses in your dealings with you world. Another way to describe this might be that these spontaneous responses that you give when required, these are the material of the free-flow of your conscious state.
You seem to be accessing your personal reservoir of experience from which you create “answers” to the challenge of your environment, whether these challenges are human beings or circumstances that challenge you to feed back with appropriate germane information, behaviors, and so on. Now my questions to you would be, “Who is responding with this information? Who is the witty, the humorous, the creative one?”
The visionary within our modern culture is a much maligned figure. This may be because we have come so far from our tribal communities, as “progress” takes us away from core experiences of community and shared spirituality. In the U.S.A. in particular, and most of our developed nations, we take great care to marginalize our visionaries, particularly when they begin to speak of radical transformations to come in our world.
Here however, in our growing community, we honor the visionary and we accept the visionary state of consciousness as natural, normal and quite essential to the evolution of the human Soul and the human species.
The visionary has visions, quite simply, and these visions are experienced through the use if the intuitive faculties. The visions of these seers of society are filled with Light. The visionary is enlightened, you see, and senses the foundation of reality as the Light Energy that it is. In my view, I see all of humanity as potential visionaries.
Dear Blog Reader, you now have at our disposal the great perceptive powers of the Inner Senses. In my last series of Blogs I described to you in detail how to access these powers and how to use them to your advantage in physical reality. Here I would like to elaborate on this data with some suggestions on how to sense the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream.
This material may also be used in conjunction with Carl Jung material. The Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, as I said, support and nourishes our created reality – our Personal Reality Field. In the dream state, and when we are in our Home Dimension between lives, we are well aware of this stream of energy and we sense it as easily as we sense the various constructs within our self-created reality. Now, the Inner Sense of sight, Auric Vision, may be utilized to sense this stream. The following experiment will assist us in the awakening of this valuable Inner Sense.
EXPERIMENT – Sensing Reality Creation
Hypothesis: The Subconscious Energy Manifestation Stream may be observed as it creates the reality construct. The Reality Construct is our topic for the moment. The Reality Construct is all of created reality, and also describes the many elements of the created reality. Here I wish to digress somewhat and ask you the Blog Reader to imagine for yourself what it is I am attempting to describe to you.
Consciousness creates form, instantaneously, in the moment. We must use these descriptions of Reality Creation for us to make sense of this phenomenon, occurring as it does within a linear time conceptualization. The truth of the matter might be better expressed by describing the spontaneously responsive quality of manifestation in our system. So that here we could speak of consciousness creating form that creates consciousness, and so on, all within the spacious eternal moment. Everything is conscious. everything is creative. Everything creates consciousness. All That Is, another term for everything, IS the infinitely creative consciousness that gives birth to our own infinitely creative consciousnesses. This Idea Construct is an excellent one to entertain when we are attempting to KEEP IN THE MOMENT. I trust I have inspired quite enough to be receptive to these subtle energies.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
So I would suggest you relax. If you are sitting in a chair, make yourself comfortable. If you are lying down, prop up your body so that you will not fall asleep as you read this. Now imagine if you will, what I have defined as the Moment Point. Use your current existence, the moment you are now experiencing, as somewhat more extended in duration than you have experienced moments in the past.
In a previous Blog, we provided an experiment for the Blog Reader to practice slowing down time within their Personal Reality Field. This is the same feeling we are creating here and now. You use your intention to imbue your Moment Points with duration. Please make creative use of your Inner Senses to accomplish this, perhaps intuitively visualizing your present sensory images and sounds as slowing down, slowing down with your Intention.
What we are getting at here is a slowing down of time to the extent that we may glimpse the creation of physical objects from ideas. This would be Reality Construction viewed at the edge of creation. Now these are grand terms, and you might say I am making it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing it all sound so easy, but at its heart, it IS the easiest thing in the world. You are experts at creating “something from nothing,” and you can easily slow down this creative process to the microsecond level. Here you may see and feel what is involved in your creation of your Personal Reality Field. This includes your body and the senses you use to sense this manifestation activity.
How much must you slow down the act of reality creation to witness this? You will know you are meeting with success when you have a sensation of pulsing visually and as a felt sensation. This is the pulse of manifestation. This is the flow of the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream through the Coordinate Points and “into” the Reality Constructs.
A taste of perspective. I am experiencing the pulsation. It feels like the heartbeat, only accelerated many times. Visually there is a dreamy quality. Briefly I experienced a twinge of fear, as if I was receiving forbidden knowledge. Possible religious programming?
The flow of information “through” the Coordinate Point is so rich in imagery and other content that the researcher must intentionally slow down the flow of Conscious Units through this gateway if they are to observe and study the construct.
Now can you imagine these theorized Coordinate Points as permeating “physical” space and matter, yet not taking up any space whatsoever? Let us refer to the Conscious Points as etheric in nature in this experiment. They are the nonphysical “precursors” of the “future” created Reality Constructs. They exist inter-dimensionally and holographic ally. They are each everywhere literally all of the time, past, present and future. They exist as the determinant “values” in the manifestation phenomenon. And again, consciousness in the form of Consciousness Units expresses intentionally, as in the unconscious co-creation of the human or elemental expressions of all the other varied forms of “substance” in your dimension. When you have received adequate information from your experiment, gradually disengage from the Trance State. Return to fully sensory awareness.
FINDINGS – Document your observations of the Reality Creation phenomenon.
Now the strands of incipient matter we have just discussed compose the latticework that is the grid of Coordinate Points upon and within and about our self-created reality. There is a holographic nature of these strands of incipient matter. They compose the physical reality Constructs of our Third-Dimensional world INCLUDING our own physical body and the physical constructs that we might call space, air etc.
So you now imagine, as I attempt to bring this description to fullness, how this Reality Construction phenomenon might exist as a profound image? Can you imagine the creation of Third-dimensional Reality in its totality as being powered or energized into activity? What is lacking here in our description, you see, is the motivating energizing power that Sustains the phenomenon. Let us refer to this concept as the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream. This energy flow supports your reality by continuously lending the creative energy of All That Is to the manifestation of each and every construct in our Personal Reality Field.
The SEMES is subconscious. It is riven by our Soul’s Intent. We are experiencing on Earth our reincarnational dramas and comedies Intent is other- directed. It is directed in essence by All That Is. Now we decided before we were born, what body we were to inhabit and what Lessons we were to learn in this current Life. So we truly do co-create with All That Is our Earthly existence. But again I must remind that we have free will “to do as you please,” even while in the midst of our Lessons, which might be a truly sober and serious nature.
In previous Blogs, I described the Consciousness Units as being composed of threads. I now further state that these theoretical threads of awarized energy exist in various “arrays” of potentiality, what we are calling Gestalts of Consciousness – the pre-manifestation templates of creation. Infinitesimally small threads of energy under the direction of elemental consciousness, coalesce into strands of incipient matter that are combined in various ways to create our Reality Constructs.
Now a matrix implies a grid or network of interconnecting pathways or energy streams. Can you imagine in your mind’s eyes this network of Love Light? The pathways are the strands of etheric material composed of Consciousness Units. Within this matrix exist the Coordinate Points. The strands also coalesce into more complex structures – The Gestalts of Consciousness – which hold the potential for the creation of anything conceived by consciousness. All of this etheric material is literally “Love in action” the all-encompassing power of Love that is the essence and creative energy All That Is.
Are you beginning to see now? This Love Light energy that power the strands of etheric material, is the creative element for healing of all types. Focused Love Light is utilized by our tribal healers, for example, in very precise ways to assist their “patients” in balancing and “making whole” their unbalanced bodies. So it is literally true that Love is the healing agent in all restorations of the human body and spirit.
The Love Light is the matrix of divine influences onto which we fashion our Reality Constructs. Here let us speak of the importance of context. It is ALL context, Dear Blog Reader. Within this milieu we are describing as the Love Light Matrix, the Telepath Network, the Central Field of Experiencing and the Subconscious Manifestation Energy Stream, we create out of Consciousness Units those Reality Constructs that compose what we experience as “BedrockReality” – a cliché we have found helpful in these discussions.
Of course we use metaphors in this work to assist the Blog Reader in an understanding of the principles and ideas we are describing. Again, the creation of our Personal Reality Field that we accomplish on a moment-to-moment basis with the divine energy of All That Is, is so complex an undertaking that our physical brain could not conceive of the many operations that are undergone within ONE SINGLE SECOND of our existence.
“Mind Blower.” This refers to, I gather, a concept or image that is so stunning that a single human mind cannot comprehend it in its totality. This is an description of what the mind encounters when these matters of Reality Creation are considered.
To express the divine – the ineffable – we must always resort to metaphors and theoretical constructs, for the reality of the subject matter is so incredibly complex and rich, that the Third-Dimensional consciousness cannot hold it for very long before it falls away into chaos. The great traditions of our world teach the student how to maintain an equilibrium in these matters. The hope is that the student will master the skills of witnessing the Divine without succumbing to the negative states of fear, anger, confusion. So metaphors are used.
Now perhaps some mixing of metaphors is necessary here to provide a choice for you The Blog Reader. We are hoping that you will find some image or idea that works for you here in the understanding of this material. We are preparing you for the regimens that follow these introductory chapters.
Building upon this premise, can you see how a natural trajectory for a “typical” Consciousness Unit or Atom might well be toward the creation of Love? Love is information or light. What I shall be referring to as Love Light in this Blog, then, simply information of a particular type. It is the creative force of manifestation.
If you have been following our discussion of the nature of reality, you will remember that I have described All That Is as the source for All realities. You may then see that it follows that Love in our model of Reality Creation, is the energy or “impetus” for the expression of All That Is within our Third Dimension.
This is not new information I am providing . Our World Religions place great importance on the role of Love within society. The virtues of Love are spoken of by many healers and leaders within our communities. Yet here I hope to define what I am calling “Love with a capital L;” The Love that I am describing to you in the literal “fuel” for the manifestation of EVERYTHING in our world. This Love or Love Light has a particular frequency or rate of vibration that facilitates the assemblage of Consciousness Units into Reality Constructs. The Love Light is the power of All That Is. Period.
It is the force that activates the Consciousness Units to express ideas and images into physical reality through the Coordinate Points. Do you see, then, that it it important to learn how to utilize this Love Light in a conscious deliberate fashion?
Where is the Love currently? “My world is certainly lacking in the Love that creates realities!” We shall have more to say on the diversion of Love in the creation of negative realities later in this Blog series. For now, please remember that our Earth is a dramatic stage for the enactment of what are often perceived as “Negative” or “painful” reincarnational dramas.
These dramas may indeed “appear” to be devoid of Love in any measure. However, you have “set yourself up” to experience your Lessons in the way you are experiencing them. Indeed, your ultimate Lesson in the Third Dimension may be of creation to create the positive out of the negative. Coincidently, that is the precise subject of this blog.
Some areas of our world hold “more” of the Coordinate Points than others. These parts of our planet are much desired as places or worship and mediation. The potentialities for manifestation into physical reality are greater in these areas of high energy or accelerated vibration. Yet within our own personal environment, we may find with just a bit of exploration, just where the processes of creation work for us.
For example: have you ever found that the simple act of changing your study location within your home had the effect of greatly streamlining the creative process for you? Perhaps intuitively you understood that the dispersal of Coordinate Points in the new area was more conducive to study and learning than the previous one.
The Coordinate Points may also be conceived of as gateways into adjacent dimensions representing different timeframes and so different Reincarnational Existences I hope I am not complicating this discussion too much with these heady topics and definitions. In late Blogs we shall go further into our explanations with examples and experimentation.
For now let us just say that the precept – for example “you create your own reality” – may be thought of as the general, overriding influence in the New Science theory while as I said, the percept may represent the “cutting edge” – a useful comparison – of consciousness as it creates and perceives the world.
These Consciousness Units are, of course, the ubiquitous elements of awarized energy – the “building blocks” of Reality Creation. And as for the Coordinate Points, here we shall simply the Idea Construct for dissemination to a broader audience.
The Coordinate Points permeate our Third-Dimensional reality and direct the “activity” of the Consciousness Units, according to the energy templates of Gestalts of consciousness. We could say that the potential for physical expression of the Consciousness Unit is “adjusted” by the Coordinate Point at the direction of subconscious and conscious thought.
Now need I mention that this is a collective effort? The creation of our world is an exercise in mutual cooperation between our “human” consciousness and the “creative intelligence” or consciousness of everything else in our world. This description pertains to greater as well as the lesser here. We cooperate with every atom within our Personal Reality Field as well as every atom within the greater reality field that we might call our Consensus Reality.
To reiterate, our world is largely created by subconscious thought, as we know. During the dream state we create incipient Reality Constructs that we materialize into physical Reality Constructs on awakening. Now it may already seem obvious to us that we create our physical body without much conscious thought. Our unconscious, in tandem with All That Is, creates our physical body “naturally,” without the need for constant energy or direction from the conscious mind or ego.
However, as we explore the expression of the Soul through the ego, and we begin to correct our negative thoughts and their expression into physical Reality Constructs, we will begin to gain conscious control of these unconscious processes. This is the path of healing the physical body, for example. We learn how to fine-tune the expression of Consciousness Units through the Coordinate Points for the creation of an improved or symptom-free body.
Facts of our existence. These are the precepts – that when fully understood, will allow us to witness and remember the activities of our Simultaneous Lives, for example, as well as the literal moment-to-moment creation of our Personal Reality from the thoughts and images within our mental environment.
EXAMPLES OF PRECEPTS:
You create your own reality.
You are connected to everything in your world.
You can change the Consensus Reality from your Personal Reality Field. Emotion is the creative energy of All That Is in action.
Human consciousness is founded in Love.
Diversions from Love through Negative Emotions create Negative Realities.
All imbalances may be corrected through Love and Courage.
You are the sum of your Simultaneous Lives within your current Moment Point.
Your Inner senses may be used to examine and change anything past, present or future.
You are in telepathic rapport with everything in your world. Reality Constructs are composed of Consciousness Units of awarized energy. Coordinate Points permeate matter and space and modulate the activity of the Consciousness Units.
Your Intention, emotions and Beliefs provide the energy and direction for Reality Creation.
Everything exists initially as Gestalts of Consciousness, the nonphysical “templates” of creation.
Now the percept here – a slightly different spelling than precept. I trust you shall notice – is another very important concept we shall discuss. A percept may be defined as, “that element of consciousness that creates the Reality Construct and Instantaneously perceives or witnesses the construct.”
The modern scientific tradition is giving way to a body of work that was created by the forebears of our world. These proto scientists lived within the Mystery Civilizations. We refer to these as Mystery civilizations for the obvious reason that we have forgotten the valuable insights into human behavior and the nature of reality that we learned within these societies.
I have described how mankind has ceded the powers of Reality Creation to those in authority in exchange for “subtle gifts” – the protection of the group, the opportunity to earn a living, the confirmation of a place in the hereafter etc.; etc.; etc. This giving-up of power went hand-in-hand with a mass forgetting of the old traditions of healing, group spirituality and wonder-workings of various kinds.
HYPOTHESIS: You may create contact with the divine over the course of an entire waking day.
This experiment is one of creating the Trance State long term. For our purposes, the Trance is a sacred state of awareness. When you conduct your Ritual of sanctuary and enter your Trance, you are walking the Path of the seeker of wisdom. When you can embody this state of awareness over the course of minutes and hours, you will be well on your way toward awakening to the Unity of Consciousness Dimension that we have described in my blogs.
Now choose a day when you will not be bothered by outside forces. You will want to be left alone for this experiment, if at all possible. We are assuming here that you have already experienced some form of contact and communication with one or more of your Guides. However, if you have yet to manifest this relationship, simply “act as If” you are already in touch with your Energy Personality. Conduct this experiment as though guided by your spirit Guide, for this may well act to initiate that relationship.
In my last series of Blogs I presented an exercise in bringing the energy of Reality Creation up from the emotional center into the mental center. This mental center is located directly between your Eyes. It is here that you may sense the divine information stream as it seeks to penetrate the barrier of the ego/intellect. Just as we encourage the Blog users of The Healing regimen to create the healing moment long term – into minutes, hours and days – we encourage you the Blog Reader to create this initial contemplative state for as long as you can. It would be best if you could begin the Divine Day on Awakening from sleep.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY If you have yet to develop your Ritual of Sanctuary, simply imagine a GoldenLight surrounding you. Nothing harmful can penetrate this field of Light. It has a healing protective influence.
Now create the Trance State as best you can. The Trance is simply a natural state of awareness marked by deep relaxation and a focus on the inner world. I would ask you to sense what energies may be present in the solar plexus area of your body. If you sense a churning activity, as though emotions were ebbing and flowing, please bring this felt sense UP to the mental center directly between the eyes. As you do this exercise, you may notice that the churning sensation ceases. The felt sense becomes one of calm and assurance. There is also an emotional toe of ecstasy just below the surface. This is indication that you are using your intent to bring it up, up into the divine portal.
FINDINGS – Document throughout your waking day your experiences with keeping your awareness in the mental center.
Now there are at least two distinct ways to go with regards to belief change, if you do indeed wish to change your beliefs and thus your reality: you may change your perceptions of your Personal Reality Field, or you can go for direct change of the underlying beliefs themselves. First, though the ancient technologies of Healing Talk via the Trance State, and through other Rituals of Contact and Communication with nonphysical beings, such as the Energy Personality and other Energy Bodies, the perceptions of the Personal Reality may be altered, thus altering the Reality creation. We may also describe this as a “fine tuning” of the Inner Senses, so that they may more clearly perceive and create.
The second method entails identifying the beliefs you wish to change through a self-questioning process and creating more productive belief statements representing improved “healthier” beliefs that you wish to “make your own.” The statements are then continuously written down or typed into a computer, the theory being that the new beliefs are internalized the more that you document them.
These two methods represent two different ways of relating to physical reality: the imaginable and the literal. Naturally there are others. If you feel more comfortable visualizing your beliefs, I suggest you use the imaginable method in your experiments. If you feel more comfortable writing them down, use the literal approach. And of course, beyond my humble offerings, use your own methods that suit you.
Again, for those of you who may feel uncomfortable with terms such as Trance State and Ritual of Contact and Communication, please make up your own names for these states of consciousness. I am merely using common terms that the majority of my Blog Readers may understand. The Trance State is used by many of us on the subtle levels as we attempt to make ourselves understood.
As for the use of the term Ritual to describe the process of contacting and communicating with the denizens of non physical reality, please note that the term Ritual is the precise one used in our World Religions to describe their individual and carried methods for contacting the various spirits, gods and goddesses, God, and what have you. So we are merely presenting terms already in common usage by those of us in the West and elsewhere.
Your choice in these matters IS a matter of your free will in the moment. Might I suggest that in these moments of opportunity for You the Soul, that you listen to the suggestions of your Guides rather than to the self-centered voice of the ego/intellect? This is merely a suggestion, my friend. The free will choice is yours and I am acting here in a purely advisory capacity. I simply urge you to take your own advice in these situations, when in fact you are embodying the Soul Self. It will be quite easy to determine if you are experiencing this unique perspective. The Soul Self is informed through communications with All That Is. This perspective may guide you to the best resolution of any given creative challenge you may face.
The differences between the subconscious creation of negative realities and the conscious co-creation of positive life-affirming realities by the awakening human consciousness through use if the Divine Will are quite pronounced. You will know it when you are faced with a decision to go one way or the other. I will leave it at that for now. Obviously, you are each required to learn your individual Lessons. I would not wish to give you ALL the answers, and by so doing, rob you of the “joy” of learning your Lessons on your own.
Now this “quickening” is indeed upon us in Third-Dimensional Reality. Those of us engaged in negative ruminations, and their attendant manifestation into negative Reality Constructs, will find that we are confronted, in an almost simultaneous fashion, with the products of our mental digressions. Just as the practitioners of Loving Understanding and Courage will find their positive manifestations strengthening, so too will the practitioners of doubt, anger, hatred and such, find themselves consumed with the energies released during these errant creative activities.
Is there any wonder why such an intensification of this creative process produces the appropriate results? We create our own reality according to our beliefs. If we are focusing on the fear and cynical distrust of our neighbors, for example, is it any wonder that our neighbors continue to cause us discomfort? And is it any wonder that as we awaken as a species this discomfort grows? Indeed.
I suggest the discomfort may grow until it becomes UNBEARABLE. Then we will of necessity be faced with a choice in our reincarnational dramas. Will we learn our Lesson or will we not? Will we continue to hold-on to the anger, fear and cynicism, or will we let-go and feel the ecstasy just below the surface of our human consciousness? This ecstasy is the creative Loving energy of All That Is.
Our feedback reality continually endorses our ongoing emotional states according to the “structures” of our beliefs. Here we shall define as those “habitual patterns of perceptual analysis utilized in the creation of Reality Constructs.” Our beliefs are the potent ideas, images and emotional contents that exist within our mental environment or psyche. Our beliefs may be thought of as the “rough sketch” for our creative project – our ongoing life with its experiences, behaviors, and so on.
Now currently it is possible for us to address issues of core beliefs and core values, like never before in our history as a species. Our evolution as a Soul depends upon change in our beliefs. We will not, individually or collectively, make the transition we have been discussing in these new series of Blogs with the outmoded beliefs we currently hold.
The world is integrating, you see, at an extremely rapid pace. We in the developed nations, the many millions of us, are behind the learning curve in this matter. This may be due to our obsession with material objects of mass consumption. The prevalence of the egoic perspective within our individual and mass consciousness also holds us back. And it certainly does not serve us in the West to “export” these limited perspectives through our Negative Media and through our military excursions into foreign lands.
This is why I am writing Blogs. The greater part of the world is awakening “on Schedule.” It is in the developed nations in particular, and some other parts of our world, that we are still focused on the creation of negative, fear-based realities.
The Inner Senses, the nonphysical counterparts to our outer physical senses, are the creators of our Personal Reality Field. Perception creates reality in our Third Dimension. And the reality we create is dependent wholly upon what we believe is possible. If we are experiencing a reality of peace and Loving Understanding with our fellow inhabitants of Earth, we have a system of beliefs that permits, allows and effectively determines a Personal Reality Field of peace and Loving Understanding. We have in this example, believed into existence our peaceful Loving world.
Now it is also true that everything we find in our Personal Reality Field we have believed into reality. Might I say that, for the most part, if we feel uncomfortable, fearful, anxious with the state of our Personal reality, it may be due to our creating unconsciously? Creating unconsciously leaves us open to the Negative Entities. Watch your thoughts. Watch where your fearful thoughts originate. Are they being amplified and corroborated within the negative spheres of influence?
The negative realms are sensed as separate from the self. The Negative Entities that reside within these spheres of activity normally will not seek us out and attempt to fix on our being. Yet if we are experiencing negative, anxious, angry, or violent emotional states, we leave ourselves open to encountering these influences. For this reason, it is important to observe our emotional states throughout our waking reality. If we are experiencing fear, assess our sensing and Reality Creation and see if we are being driven by negative outside sources.
Yet please rest assured that if you find yourself “contaminated” by these energies, you may easily correct your situation. You may do so with your Intention in the moment. What I would suggest you do is first perform the experiment we have called Clearing The Emotional Body. This activity raises the Negative Emotions from the emotional center to the mental center where they may be transformed into their opposites.
Briefly, you simply relax in a meditative posture and imagine or visualize the “churning” energies of The Emotional Body rising up to the mental center directly between your physical eyes. Emotional resolution is achieved. The contact with the Divine is established.
Now this Emotional Body is perceived as Light to the Inner Senses. It is also conceived in Light. All is Light. Everything in our created reality is composed of Light in the form of our theoretical constructs the Consciousness Units. Here we are simplifying and spiritualizing my messages to humanity. For this reason we shall also refer to the Energy Construct of the human physical body as being composed of spiritual information.
In this context, you Blog Reader, are a divine message from All That Is, articulating your particular philosophy, behaviors and mentality within physical reality as an “envoy” of the sacred. Again, if you are tempted to dismiss this as mere “religious ranting,” I urge you to take a deep breath and go within for just a moment. Sense your ultimate divinity. It is obvious to us who are now instructing you, and to you it may become obvious in your experimentation, as you discover Findings that support my statement.
I realize that these are words that may carry their own emotional undertones for my Blog Reader. I would ask you then, if this is the case, to look beyond the ego-identified definitions and references of theses terms. Although it is not my desire to challenge you excessively in this endeavor challenge you I must. As an educator to humanity for “countless” years. I have found it advantageous to present material for the student’s assessment that stands what you might call “diametrically opposed” to the ideas, images and beliefs that the student may be holding in their mental environment at any one time.
I do hope that if you feel rising anger and righteous indignation making itself known within – as I have just described to you – The Emotional Body, that you perhaps take a deep breath and go deeper with this work, this project yours and mine.
You see, the Soul’s perspective is necessarily through the ego/intellect. I would suggest, in times of anger and when feeling affronted by this material, you simply step to the side a bit, metaphorically speaking, and allow your Soul Self to perceive your world. This is an easy first step in the “awakening” process. Please have faith, or perhaps Courage is a better word here, that this project will pay off for you in many different ways, rewarding you with information of a decidedly beneficial nature.
This emotional Body may be perceived as the intersection of “energies” of Reality Creation within our physical construct. We may experience it as existing within the heart region. It is within this construct that the Reality Creation agendas of All That Is of our Reincarnational Existences may read. We may, for example, observe within this Emotional Body the emotional and symbolic underpinnings of a chronic illness that currently plagues us. Or we may witness a dramatization of an event from our past that keeps us from enjoying prosperity in our present. Thus we may sense these strategies in our own particular fashion, using the Inner Senses that we are developing through experimentation in this project.
The greater sphere of activity within which rests this Emotional Body we refer to as The Light Body, as do many of the current teachers and practitioners in our world. This construct is “built” from the intersecting energies of existence – or dimensions if you prefer – of our many Simultaneous Lives. This Inner Senses representation of The Emotional Body, as well as the Inner Sense of sight itself, we are calling the Auric Vision.
For example: If my friend Rob was to select at random one of the planes surrounding the Central Field of Experiencing in our diagram, and using his imagination and his Inner Senses “tuned-in” to another life, he might very well find himself experiencing his aboriginal existence, or possibly his existence as a female in New Orleans Louisiana in the U.S.A. or as a Roman soldier from many hundreds of years ago, in our terms. These are just a few of Rob’s Reincarnational Existences.
You Dear Blog Reader also have a vast store of existences just waiting to be explored. This illustration may serve as a meditation piece for you in this way. In each of our Blog Series, we have presented these simple focusing tools to assist you in perceiving your greater reality – the reality of your Soul Self. Please utilize this tool in your experimentation as you attempt to access your other lives.
Let me add to this cursory explanation with a description of a new metaphor we are presenting: Central Field of Experiencing. Now we exist within an intersection of dimensional planes.
The intersection of several planes. They share a common area, that we shall call our Central Field of Experiencing. Let us say that each of these planes of existence represents one of our Simultaneous Lives. Let us further state that the common area here our Central Field, is our current self experiencing life in this time-frame.
Now all of these planes are connected at the Central Field and so not only does our current self have at its disposal the perceptual ability to experience events within our current life, but also, because we are indeed connected to the other lives – hard-wired, in a sense – we have the POTENTIAL to experience events, feel emotions and have thoughts from within these other simultaneously-lived lives.
The planes surrounding the Central Field represent our various Reincarnational Selves as well as the many PROBABLE existences that we co-create with our consciousness and All That Is. This Central Field, then, is our current Third-Dimensional existence. Look around at your surroundings. This is what we are referring to in this current discussion.
Now as we look around us what do we see? Do we see a futuristic landscape with mythological creatures grazing on the lawn? Do we see a vignette of interaction between two family members from a life in a Mystery Civilization, such as Atlantis? Do we witness the life we are living now, complete in every detail except for one? Perhaps there is a stranger, someone we do not recognize, apparently living their life with us in our home. Does this unique detail “prove” to us that we are viewing a scene that does not exist in our current physical reality?
I would guess that you are perceiving your surroundings as quite similar to those we left behind you as you proceeded to read this Blog. My point here is that the possibility exists for you, in this time of accelerated consciousness, during this Dimensional-Shift we have described, to briefly inhabit the bodies of your Reincarnational Selves. You accomplish this by refocusing your perceptive apparatus – the Inner Senses – on a tangential plane of existence. You will be picking up on the sensory experiencing of these humans who are indeed you, Dear Blog Reader, as you are engaged in living your lives within the many time-frames on Earth and in other systems.
Let us present an example here for illustration. Imagine if you will, a human undergoing an extremely stressful life event. Perhaps this person has incurred a job loss and is quite worried about the financial implications of this negative event. The emotional state of this human is chaotic – stress-filled – as a cascade of Negative Emotions floods their mental environment. Consequently, the Personal Reality Field of this person is also chaotic. And because it is created from Negative Emotions, there numerous triggers within their Personal Reality radius that “cause,” in a reflexive fashion, the continuing recreation of Negative Emotions with in their psyche.
Now immediately prior to the jobs loss, let us say that the mental environment of this human was quite balanced and even “happy.” Their monetary needs were met. Their needs for a social outlet were net with the job as well. So the firing of this person has a devastating effect upon their mental stability, as we may well imagine.
Now let us further propose that a great mistake was made here with this firing of out theoretical worker. The employer made a mistake through a mix-up of some sort, and upon discovering this, they immediately rectified the error, by perhaps calling the hapless human and giving them their job back.
Well, again as we imagine, the Personal Reality Field of this human example was instantly transformed with the call from the employer reinstating them in their position. Happiness was again experienced. Relief from monetary worry was experienced, as well as gratitude, perhaps, that they would continue to enjoy the social amenities of their employment with humans with whom they had developed strong, Loving relationships.
I hope you see my point here in this example. We are all, as humans existing within the Third Dimension, engaged in a witnessing of our mental environments projected outward into physical reality on a moment-to-moment basis. The ideas and images within our psyches are the blueprints for the creation of the varied Reality Constructs that compose our Personal Reality Field. The mutable emotions are the energies that power this reality Creation Phenomenon.
This Blog we will present the basics. The phenomenon we are calling Reality Creation will be discussed in a very simplified form. Though we will certainly add to my theory in so far as further describing the role of the Scientist of Consciousness in the exploration of the non physical reality, the following Blogs detailing the rise of the New Science will present a much more detailed analysis.
Now for information, Dear Blog Reader, our world is composed entirely of thought. A musician composes musical works of art with notes as the creative material. In the creation of realities, the human in the Third Dimension uses thought in artistic ways.
To carry the comparison further… just as the “mad” artist might refuse to admit their creation of the art before them – paintings, let us say – the majority of human beings refuse to admit that they have had a hand in the literal creation of their physical world. Certainly many of us would say that this is crazy thinking, or “magical thinking” as our psychiatrists refer to it. We have become so estranged from our works that we fail to see ourselves in the “mirror” of our physical reality.
One reason for this estrangement is that this creation of our world is done largely on the unconscious level. It is truly a projection, in this sense, for we are individually projecting our subconscious thoughts, images and other mental constructs out onto the “Screen” of our Personal Reality Field.
Our thoughts give birth to realities. Fearful thoughts gave birth to fearful realities. Thoughts of Courage and Loving Understanding give birth to Courageous and Loving realities. You may witness this for yourselves within your own manifestations. Watch and see how each element in your perceptual field REFLECTS your inner state of emotion and imagination.
Perhaps other examples are necessary to help pull you from your denial. Many of us are most probably familiar with denial of the drug addict or the Alcoholic. In these instances it is very clear-cut. The subject may be experiencing the destruction of all that they hold most dear – family, business, friends, it is all falling away – yet still they maintain their “innocence.” This is denial at its most obvious. But the negative effects of denial are also felt in every other sphere of human activity.
In the Consensus Reality Manifestation there is evidence of mass-created denial at work. Witness how the many millions of us in the West still deny our responsibility in the creation of negative conditions in the lives of those who live in developing nations. We are the squanderers of our Mother Earth’s resources. We in the West use a great deal more of the oil, minerals, lumber etc. relative to population than do those in the poor developing countries.
The rationalization here, a common one, is to state, perhaps under our breath, that “these people deserve their lot in life. They may be lazy. They merely have to pull themselves up by their own bootstraps,” and so on. I have chastised quite gently for these offenses in our last series of Blogs. I now continue this tradition in this series of Blogs.
Now I am aware that you are a student of mine and you are attempting to “work” on yourself. You are attempting to learn your Lessons and perhaps you are awakening from your denial. But please also notice the residual aspect of denial that is always with us in this regard. It is the seed from which racism and other unsavory misperceptions and misjudgments grow.
With denial we have another very successful strategy for avoiding our Lessons. Here we are literally creating a reality for oneself unconsciously, and then disavowing any hand in the creation of the reality. “I am innocent,” you are in effect saying. Yet obviously it is your world that you are co-creating here. Your Personal Reality Field certainly bears the marks of your personality. Still, when we are up against something that we do not wish to face-perhaps because it is embarrassing to us, something quite true, yet something that challenges our standards – we disaffirm it, we disempower it, we DENY it.
We deny the thing with vehemence relative to the importance we place upon it. In other words, we deny what we most know to be the utter truth, in the honest appraisal of the subject at hand. Here again, those of us who observe our behavior, and know our motives and indeed our probable developmental paths as human beings, must laugh at such nonsense. The amount of energy wasted in such denials of self – for that is what these instances truly represent – is vast beyond all comprehension. And so we must laugh to ourselves, as we observe in the midst of our “Issues.”
For example: when we experience a twinge of Negative Emotion, perhaps triggered by something in our environment that reminds us of an event, a negative event for our past, we immediately redirect the ego/intellect to something other than the negative memory, the negative event.
Now you may use this skill of distracting the ego/intellect to our advantage within Reality Creation programs described in this Blog. The key to use of this technique is to FIRST listen to what the information stream is attempting to convey to us. Listen and understand. “Face the Music,” to coin a phrase.
In this sense, we have the opportunity for awakening to our denial in each and every one of our self-created moments. This current Moment Point, as you are reading this Blog, may become a moment of awakening if we but merely CONSIDER, that what we most ardently deny – particularly with regards to our so-called “Issues” – may be better embraced as the truth of the matter.
This is a simple test that we may utilize in assessing any perceived fact of life in our current existence. What do we most fear? What do we hate most strongly. Herein lie our weaknesses in our Reality Creation agendas. Inconsistencies, prejudices, cultural delusions, artifacts of consciousness that cause us to grimace or wince inwardly may be indicators of this denial of the Soul Self.
One of the most popular forms of avoidance for us is intellectualization. Through this strategy we assess the Divine information within our mental sphere as something completely explainable. Scientific reasoning – logical deduction – is used to place the information in a neat and tidy and already known and understood category. Here a stream of spiritually – informed communication is interrupted and redirected to other parts of the psyche where it will not cause any disruptions.
To continue this metaphor, the stream of Divine Information attempts to erode or melt away the self-limiting beliefs within the psyche – beliefs that may no longer serve the purposes of the evolving Soul. But the ego is in charge here, and the strategy of intellectualization works quite well for the majority of us. It allows us to ignore, as mere mental anomalies, these messages from our Higher Self. A brief example: when you experience a viewing of a non physical being – a “Spirit” in our terms – we ascribe the sensory information we are receiving to “Tricks” of the eyes, being perhaps mentally exhausted, hallucinations due to any number of “Rational” causes. I am certain that the Blog Reader may contribute their own examples.
Of course in the workplace this strategy allows us to keep focused on the task at hand. In our private lives the misdirection of the ego/intellect allows us to continue on our path of development, however nonproductive and even self-destructive this path might be. Indeed, it seems that the more nonproductive the life lived, the more firmly the ego intellectualizes – “explain away” – the information received from the Divine Sources.
I have suggested that our main task in physical reality is to participate willingly in this exercise, as though we were in school, for we are indeed in an educational relationship with our Third-Dimensional Reality. You the Blog reader are both teacher and student. Your greater personal consciousness, what we have been calling the Soul in these Blog works, acts as a teacher to our Earthly ego. On the subtle levels, You-the-Soul know full well what are your Lessons for your current incarnation.
The ego, what we are calling the student aspect in this description, “pretends” to be unaware of these Life Lessons and their dramatization in physical reality. This is “the play” of our physical world – our creation of learning experiences in ensemble with other humans, for our mutual edification, and for the greater experiencing of All That Is.
I have covered this quite thoroughly in the new Blog Series, and so I shall not digress. However, please take from this brief reminder this fact of existence: just as many other teachers both physical and metaphysical have stated, “Each” second of our Earthly experience is an opportunity for spiritual growth. The way to move forward in our Soul evolution, is to perfect the transformation of Negative Emotions into their diving counterparts.
Now this quest for self-realization may be short if we are prepared to face our Lessons directly, without the denial and avoidance for which humans are so famous. To those of us in higher dimensions, it can appear as quite strange how many continue to suffer the effects of anger, fear, and the like, all the while knowing full well how we may extricate ourselves from our dilemma.
Here I am referring to the continuous messages from Beings of Light that exist within our mental environment, yet which we ignore through various mental and physical maneuvers. Perhaps I should take a moment here, before we get into the substance of this series, to describe for you these incredible gymnastics of consciousness.
This is an series of Blogs on the subject of Reality Creation. It is assumed that you have developed the skills of self-observation described in the new material, or perhaps you have read other Teachings on the subject of receiving and translating divine information. As an advanced work, we shall take it for granted that you are learning your Lessons.
As you well know, the Lessons for you in physical reality are the emotional states of anger, fear, shame, racial prejudice and others, that you must transform with you intent into Loving Understanding and Courage. In this way, our system is quite similar to others that you may have known in your life as a seeker of knowledge. This makes sense, does it not? The seeker of wisdom tries as many systems as necessary until they have realized the Soul’s Intent.
Babyhood is indeed an extremely creative stage of life in the development of the human. Since one is fresh from the home dimension, there may be lingering memories of that experience. The baby may hold full memories of the previous incarnation as well, and may be experiencing a “reliving” of past experiences while seemingly engrossed in the typical baby behaviors one notices. Now, the job of the parent, unfortunately, is usually to train the infant in the ways of the world – – physical reality. And so the parents begin to task of socializing the infant.
As this process continues, the baby spends so much time engaged in the training – being trained to fit into the culture – that memories of the past incarnation and the time in between lives, are quickly forgotten. It is rare that a child grows to adulthood with these precious memories intact. So the divinity of babyhood is experienced by all of us, but only for a few short months. After that, the connection is broken. The child is watched carefully to assure that they are developing “normally.”
And when imaginary playmates arrive, modern parents too often are fearful that the child might grow into adulthood with these characters at their side. They are mostly banished by parents, as an embarrassment. The child is then taught to let go of these primal relationships, and most do. Again, in our aboriginal cultures and some alternative communities, the baby is encouraged to be “the divine one” long into childhood. This sets the state for the development of the divine child, the magical child: being the human that lives in both the subtle and physical worlds with grace and power.
HYPOTHESIS: You may meet with other entity counter-parts within nonlinear time.
Counterparts within the spacious present moment of your shared Simultaneous Lives. I realize that this would seem to fly in the face of everything that has been taught to you in schools. Yet remember what I have been suggesting to you about authorities and institutions. In your awakening, which is currently well underway, you will be given the opportunity many times to reformat and reconstitute your core beliefs about yourself and your world. You may do this reformation with your imagination. In this example, the last experiment of this current blog series, I am asking you to take a very courageous step forward into the unknown reality.
I am asking you to demonstrate to yourself, Dear Blog Reader, that you can achieve contact and communications with others such as yourself – other Entity Counterparts – by simply affirming your intention to do so, here in your current Moment Point – your Point of Power. You may rely on all of the findings pulled from the previous experiments It may help to have an underlying attitude of playfulness here. You are having fun with your imagination, just as you may have done countless times when you were a child.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now relax yourself using your most effective methods. When you are experiencing a relaxed state of consciousness, with the metaphor of the radio dial in mind, tune the dial to that state of consciousness of Simultaneous Time in which you may sense your physical counterparts. Have the intention that you will make contact, just as you have and the intention to accomplish other research goals in the previous experiments.
Of course, you may ask for assistance from your Energy Personality. Now you may be presented with data for interpretation by your Inner Senses. It may come to you in various sensory forms. You may see images that are quite familiar, as if you have seen these faces many times, perhaps in dreams, other locales on your Earth.
If you feel that you may take notes into a recorder or onto the pages of your journal without disrupting what you are experiencing, do so. Again, you may have the overall sense that you are making it all up. Of course, you are indeed doing so, but no less and no more than you are making up your Personal Reality Field. When you feel as though you have learned enough from the experiment, gradually come to full sensory awareness in physical reality.
FINDINGS – Document your findings. Now the “after effects” of this final experiment may include “coincidental” meetings with your Entity Counterparts as you go about your daily activities. You will know them when you see them. I am quite confident that you will achieve great success in these sojourns into the non-physical.
In collaboration with your energy personality you may take back your power.
To take back power is very healthy thing to do for a human quite used to “hiding” within the security of groups. This is not a power “over” but a power “with,” you see – a power shared with all other incarnated humans beings. You will be reminded that you are first an individual Soul within a physical body. YOU-Soul are at the center of your physical and non-physical worlds. This cosmic center of our world is all-powerful. Though it appears that you are perhaps simply a tiny voice within a very large chorus, on a Soul level you know that you have only “pretended” to have this small voice. You had no intention of giving up your power permanently.
Let me digress on this point for a moment… in the reincarnational drama of our life, there is much pretending. The ego loves to pretend that life is a certain way and that interesting and dramatic events are occurring. If it were not for the ego’s excellent dramatic skills in diverting your attention from the TRUE reality beneath the façade, we would not believe with all our heart in the camouflage reality in which we live. So it is healthy and necessary, to a degree, to believe in the fantasies and pretendings that make up our moment-to-moment existence. However, if we are to awaken, we may have to dispense with the comforting stories of our physical reality. Now that is not to say that we must surrender ALL of the physical trappings of our Personal Reality. That is not advisable and indeed that is not possible for most of us.
To take back our power requires some personalized, empowered imagery. Perhaps we can remember when we experienced our power being ceded to authorities. Perhaps we can remember feeling diminished. Perhaps we remember feeling that it was necessary to be a part of the group. If so, it should be easy to create our ritual. Simply consider the opposites of these feelings and these images.
So just as I asked you to consider your personal feeling relative to a subtle emotion of peace and security, I now ask you to consider those ideas, images and emotions relative to the idea of “taking back power.” And again, it is a good idea to write down what comes to your mind. Draw pictures of the images you see in your mind. Consolidate these mental constructs into one image or emotion that virtually resonates with personal empowerment. If you feel it would help, you might create a symbolic piece of jewelry to wear or create a statement to repeat to yourself that infers the empowering ideas and images for You-the-Soul.
Now as an example: let us suppose you are experiencing a sense of disempowerment with regards to your family. This may be long-standing condition for you, as it is with many of your contemporaries. Though you are now an adult, your parents or other family members may treat you as though you are still a child. You ceded your power to these family members when you were a child and possibly reinforced this dynamic throughout your life to “Keep peace” within the group, to be a part of the family collective, in effect saying, “I am not powerful enough, I am not worthy enough to participate in the family and have my words valued.
Let these others, the authorities, run the show, and I shall reside in the background.” Then as you grew to adulthood, you used this template of creation to create your roles in other groups: in school, in social groups, at work, and so on. The single template has served to create for you a lifetime of subservience to authority. You have become this “small voice” within every group thereafter.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
You are now creating a different template for the creation of personal realities. It may be “the opposite” of the template you have been using since childhood. Now create your relaxed state. It should only take a few moments. You may connect it to snapping your fingers or gesturing with your facial expressions in some way, so that you need only to snap your fingers or gesture and instantly you are relaxed and ready for the experiment. When you are relaxed, consider your chant, imagery, piece of art, manifesto or other focusing object. Remember, it must have the capacity to elicit confidence and a sense of personal power.
As you experiment with this in mind, the ritual will grow stronger and more potent. When it has become habitual, you may bring it with you and perform it mentally in the field whenever you experience disempowerment or abuse in physical reality. You are then recreating reality through a new filter and you will perceive and create empowered physical realities thereafter.
FINDINGS – Document your findings. Does the hypothesis need to be changed to reflect findings over time?
As I promised you in an earlier blog, I will speak of matters related to control and submission. We have already discussed our tendency as humans to cede control – our very powerful energies of creation – to other humans, to those in power. This is a natural thing for us to do my friend, so you need not feel embarrassed. “The authorities,” meaning parents, teachers, employers, religious leaders, politicians, scientists and even movie actors, have encouraged us to give up our power, what we may also refer to as “personal power.” There is your dynamic – the authority pledges to provide us with protection, usually from “the other,” or to provide us with subtle gifts, in exchange for our allegiance. In this contract, we give up our rights as an empowered human. We pretend that we are without power and need the security of the family group, or the scholastic group, or the employment group etc. etc. etc.
It is always the same scenario: the authority usurps the power of the common one over time, usually at first with these promises of safety, of sanctuary. Do you see why we create The Ritual Sanctuary at the beginning of this series of blogs. This we do to remind that it is within YOU that you will find your security, your sanctuary. Within you is where it has always been. We have the power to create this state of sanctuary with our powerful thoughts and emotions.
And now it is necessary to create another ritual. This one will be a ritual of taking power – taking back you power that has been ceded, perhaps too hastily, to authorities.
Now I know that I have been critical of the organized religions in our world in my current of the organized religions on our world in my current Blog writings with with you. However, I saw this as necessary for the blog reader, in order to clear the air, so that truth of matter might be openly considered. I am not The Entity in these blogs, I’m not, some kind of doomsayer attempting to way the minds of humans to some nefarious path. My critique of our institutions and our behaviors as a collective of humans, is done for not only our own good, but for mine as a Higher Dimensional being in service to Earth at this time.
I point out the fallacies in our thinking and the negative attributes of our churches and other institutions, in what I hope is a loving fashion. We who no longer have physical bodies, the Light Bodies, are in service to us and we have only love to give. It is this love I am certain, that is felt by Blog Readers of the material who truly get the messages I am attempting to convey. I wish to educate and inspire , much as a loving coach or school teacher would. These are the personality aspects I am transmitting my energies through at this time.
The quest for connection with the Earthly personality and the exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension. Now, we may receive catalyze within individuals, the written word, the printed word as in books,blogs and internet. Our energy centers or “chakras” as we call them, can be opened by reading my material. This is probably the simplest way for us to commence with the work at hand. However, for those of you who feel you may be called for a more direct experience, you may attend the discussions and affirm your connection to The Entity in this way.
In these direct interfaces with, much more divine information can be transmitted and absorbed in a very brief time, compared to the reading of books or blogs, solitary meditations and so on.
Now, again, “the window of opportunity” for humans to engage the Soul Self and grow spiritually, is becoming smaller with each passing month. The culmination of countless years of evolution will soon be at hand.
This activity is not something that can be postponed until we “Have the time” to address the Issue. We are virtually OUT OF TIME at this time. Our suspicions that time seems to be speeding up are quite pointedly true. We are, as a race, speeding toward the great transformation, and indeed, the short time that remains ahead of us will be perceived as a VERY short time, particularly if we have procrastinated and avoided our responsibilities regarding our Soul Issues: the deeply personal Lessons we have come to our Earth existence to learn.
I urge you to participate in your spiritual practices, in your churches and religions if they serve You-the-Soul, in your readings of the great Masters and in our seeking direct contact with disseminators of my messages and the messages of other Light Bodies. Now, the negative energy forms, the Negative Entities, will be attempting to discourage us from walking our spiritual path.
This will be ongoing until the mass consciousness reaches a level of loving kindness and compassion that will tip the scales for a mass manifestation of the virtues of humanity in the physical reality of the Third Dimension. Indeed, that is what we are attempting to create, the Beings of Light, with the help of our human associates.
Yes, spirituality, as you may becoming to an understanding of this phenomenon, is simply the experiencing of Earthly existence by our embodies Soul. There need be No religious connotations. Thought forms that reflect memories, recent and ancient, of genocide perpetrated by religious movements, do not necessarily have a place in this discussion of what we are calling “spirituality.” So you see, there is a practical approach to our studies of Third-Dimension reality. We are undergoing a restoration, if you will, to our original, self-comprehending, godlike awareness.
We are all Avatars. We know this is on a certain level and as we awaken, our knowing shall “firm up” and become a great deal more supportive for us as we transform our beliefs and ideas about what is possible.
Spirituality is a remembrance of what it has been for us in ages past. This is true. Yet is also points the way for us into the future when we shall be called upon to remake our Social and Political and SPIRITUAL institutions. Therefore, I caution you and yours in using your cynicism and is trust to keep your spiritual transformation at bay. Rather, I suggest you embrace it. Go with the flow.
May I remind you that for every moment of your perceived reality, your waking reality, is complementary moment in one or more of your Simultaneous Lives? So each moment of spiritual unfolding bears the mark of all simultaneously-experienced moments in your multiple reincarnational lives. Now there are, of course, differences in the various aspects of your simultaneously-lived lives, for they are all being lived, for the most part , in different eras, by different sexes and nationalities etc, for the greater learning of All That Is.
But please understand, quite literally, when you may be experiencing a moment of ecstatic understanding here in our Current Moment Point in this timeframe, one or perhaps many more of our Simultaneous Lives may be experiencing a timeless moment also, but as I said, most definitely within a different physical body, of a different emotional makeup and station in Soul Evolution than you, Dear Blog Reader. I want you to ponder the enormity of this fact of life, for a moment.
Now when you meet a friend on the street, unexpectedly, perhaps a friend you have not seen for some time, you may be ecstatic, overjoyed, as you embrace and speak of your relationship, how good it is to see that person again after so long etc. Now in that moment of reunion, that spacious moment of reunion, you are also , in another body, in another era, most probably on our Earth, experiencing a complementary type of reunion activity.
Further, if you could take a motion picture or snapshot of the various reunion activities of you various lives during that moment, you would find that there are also Numerous correlations between these experiences. You may find on observing these movies or pictures that the settings – streets, field, within structures – are quite similar, in that the placement of objects, trees rocks, houses or what have you – are similar throughout. Is it not obvious that your experiences we are describing here, the reunion experiences, are all quite similar, because you are the multi-dimensional creator of these events?
As the creator of worlds here, most naturally, your creations would bear the mark of the maker – the creator who is indeed you, in tandem with All That Is. So now as you observe your moment-to moment experiences, remember that this is only the “surface” of a deeper experience of manifestation that is our multi-dimensional being.
A new world is coming and yet we are already there. As you read this blog, divine information is being streamed into your Energy Body. This information is our heritage. It is the truth regarding our circumstances as a living Entity on our Earth. This truth is simple. It can be stated in just a few words: we are ageless; we never die. The Soul Self that is at our core is eternal and has witnessed countless seasons on our Earth and on other planets and in other galaxies and dimensions.
And you, my friend, you and I are one. We are all one and it has always been that way. When I speak of our connections to each other I am speaking of literal energy networks that tie each conscious cell to every other conscious cell in all of created reality.
It is through this network that All That Is, the ultimate energy source, seeks to know itself through our experiences, Now, we have a physical body and so the truth of this fact may be somewhat difficult to experience, however, do not wait until your death to receive this information. Take advantage of these teachings I offer you in this life.
This is the ultimate simple test for us in physical reality: will you take up the challenge to learn your Lessons now, or will you postpone your awakening until the time of your physical death or in other lifetimes? The choice is always ours. But do not wait until it is too late. We may be required to incarnate on our negative Earth another time, to be again given a chance to learn our Lessons.
We have to experience events sequentially to understand them. It would be confusing for us, would it not, to see a cake being cooked in one of our ovens, rise and complete its cooking in seconds, rather than minutes? So we manifest according to rules “built into our reality. Fortunately we all “obey” the same rules – telepathy is operative on all levels – otherwise we would all be confused at the unpredictability of our world.
Now, our work represents some tinkering with these built-in rules and regulations, these core beliefs. In my blogs of long ago, I spoke of the difficulty in changing these core assumptions. Now is a different era, my friend, and our fellow Earthly associates are being prepared to change the core beliefs that we hold. This preparation is taking place during our dream state. Most of us do not realize this is happening. We simply awaken with more clarity and a feeling that anything is possible for us: this despite the wars and the famine and other negative phenomena so evident around us.
HYPOTHESIS: The dearly departed await our contact…
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now, this is an experiment in contacting our friends or family members in their Home Dimension. Obviously, if you are still too upset to attempt this contact, please do not consider trying this experiment. For some of you it may be best experienced after you have gained some emotional distance from the event of The transition.
Find a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable chair to sit in or perhaps a comfortable sofa or bed. The idea is to relax the body enough so that you can receive these impulses from the other side, yet not so relaxed that you fall asleep. In between worlds is where you want to be for this experiment and so I ask you to make those preparations you need to in order to enter that state.
Now the crux of this experiment is to distinguish, from the chorus of telepathic messages you are receiving in our relaxed state, those messages that are being transmitted by your loved ones. Beings of Light, friends and loved ones and other Entities from your past, present and future, are all constantly vying for your attention in this mental environment.
Since you are attempting to focus your Inner Senses, you might simply visualize the appearance of the loved-one. Mentally picture your family member of friend as though they were in the physical body. Fill the perception with color and enliven it with your thoughts. This will have the effect of you “tuning-in” to their communication band, allowing you to “home-in” on them, in a manner of speaking. Now it is important to proceed with this experiment as a loving Scientist of Consciousness. Love and kindness are your watchwords in these endeavors. Ego perceptions have no place here.
As you create the image of the person in your mental environment, imagine their voice becoming gradually stronger and stronger until it becomes the most prominent voice in your inner chorus. Use your intention and simply turn up the volume or use the metaphor of the radio dial to do so. This is very easy to do and I am certain you will find success with this in a short period of time.
After establishing contact – you will know you have contact if you feel the intense loving vibrations that emanate from the Home Dimension – simply have your conversation, just as you did when your loved-one was in physical reality. After the conversation, naturally say good-by and perhaps make an appointment to speak again in the future.
Then use your metaphor of the radio dial or whichever technique you used to make contact, to release contact with your loved-one. Gradually come back to your waking consciousness. In time, if you give yourself the suggestions and if you have the ongoing intention to do so for loving purposes, you will be able to make these contacts with the departed while you are at work, walking in the park, etc. etc. etc. As you use Inner Senses, they strengthen over time.
FINDINGS – Immediately document your personalized Findings.
These transformation in human consciousness and thus the Third-Dimensional physical reality we are discussing, have been noted in our media. “Strange” weather patterns and earth Changes are now commonplace around the world and the media report these unusual events. Often these stories are couched in terms of our Mother Nature displaying her power: power to upset the plans of humans to go to their sporting events, to the beaches for relaxation. To their weddings and other outdoors events. In an almost whimsical fashion these news stories often personify these weather changes as due to our Mother Nature’s unpredictability, but in a lighthearted way.
Yet the most potent and destructive events are described as something to be feared. In these instances, Mother Nature has become so unpredictable, no one knows when she will reveal her “anger” and strike us with a bolt of lightning, or rise a flood to carry us away in our automobile or cause an earthquake to bring down our great cities.
Now, if you have read my Blogs, you have been acquainted with the truth about the weather and about all physical manifestations. All physical reality in our dimension is the result of attendant thoughts and beliefs our humankind hold in the mass consciousness.
Let me go further….we have a saying in the West that “everyone talks about the weather but no one does anything about it.” In fact, this is not true. Each person on our planet has “a say” in how the weather will be expressed in their area at any given moment. This individual contribution is done, for the most part, under our awareness.
The Consciousness Units, through the individual expression of emotion, combine with other Consciousness Unit expressions of emotional content from the population of any given area. These stream of incipient Reality Constructs combine and are expressed in the manifestation of particular weather patterns and Earth Changes according to how the influences play out within the collective consciousness of that region of the world.
Now I must mention that when I say “mass consciousness of a particular region,” I include the collective “thoughts, idea and mentality” of everything in that region, including the rocks, the soil, the trees and the created products for mass consumption. All has consciousness and all contribute to physical manifestation of weather and Earth Changes. Now, obviously a bug might have less of an effect upon the weather than an angry, fearful human, but the bug does indeed contribute in measurable ways to the collective manifestation.
So do we see how many if us simply project our fears upon this great entity, our Mother Earth, forsaking our own responsibility in the creation of our physical reality? It was not always thus, however. In fact, in civilizations from our past, the weather was created quite consciously to support adequate conditions for the growth of particular crops, for outside celebrations and for other purposes. This takes place even today in some of our aboriginal cultures on our planet. Our modern scientists, also, are in a race to develop technologies to change the weather for profit, for the profit of corporation to which they are beholden. This matter will be discussed in future blogs. For now, let us explore, as Scientists of Consciousness, the Home Dimension of friends and family.
The idea of a Dimensional Shift is not new to humankind. Many of our world’s religions foretell similar events in their prophecies. Different words and concepts are used to explain the coming shift, but in fact, we may all be describing the same thing, with a different emphasis on particular points. Indeed, the breakthrough into higher dimensions is at the base of virtually all of our Earth’s spiritual systems. Certainly you the Blog Reader can confirm this statement for yourselves. Simply replace the words “Fourth Dimension” with “Heaven” or any other terms from any culture on our world denoting the Etheric Plane.
And again, these Portals to the higher dimensions open to humankind very infrequently. The coming shift, for instance, will occur at the end of a many-thousands-of-years cycle. It has been foretold in the scriptures of indigenous peoples, such as the Mayan and Hopi. The symbolism depicted in these prophecies, I might add, is a great deal more accurate than some of the Christian stories. Yet, as I said, we may be all describing the same event, merely with a particular cultural emphasis on dates, related gods and goddesses, and so on.
Now the world over, as we create this Blog manuscript, all of humankind is being readied for this event. Other Light Bodies conversant in the cultures assigned to them, are bringing their collectives of humans into a witnessing of the precursor events that will herald the Fourth-Dimensional Shift. You know by now what I am speaking about, if you are paying attention at all to my words. The Earth Changes – floods, hurricanes, tornadoes, glacier melting are the heralds to the shift. The turmoil of human thought is creating these changes. In a way, we as a race are setting ourselves up for a very positive or very negative experience here with the Shift. There is always the probability that we will allow conditions to deteriorate to such a degree that there will be no turning back and we will destroy ourselves with our own negative thoughts.
However, humans are quite fond of saving themselves from the Brink of Disaster, as is also documented in many of our spiritual scripts. Whatever the outcome, know that the Guides are watching and will intercede if and when they can. Again Laws of Non-Interference prohibit certain types of intervention. These messages I am conveying are a subtle type of intervention. Dramatic “rescue efforts” are obviously not allowed. We must learn our lessons as a race and as individuals. When we learn how to access our Energy Personality and other Guides, we will experience firsthand what I am describing. When we are experiencing the free flow of divine information into our consciousness, we will eventually dispense with the need for continually challenging the divine source as to veracity and specifics.
We will no longer require proof, for we will be LIVING our proof. We will no longer require prophecy, for we will be LIVING the prophecy. These dramatic transformations are already underway for the Blog Reader, and to some degree for every other human on our planet. The spiritual revolution of human and Earthly consciousness has begun. The Soul Self is making itself known. As this manifestation develops, visionaries from all spheres of activity on our world will step into leadership roles. Now we might ask, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “Will they be elected into these roles?” I would answer, “Not necessarily.” They will, for the most part, “assume” these roles. In the West, as I have mentioned before , our political processes will soon be rendered obsolete, as the citizens of Earth take back the power to govern themselves.
Hypothesis: You can superimpose positive realities over negative realities.
PERFORMING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Please think of a time from your past when you felt that you were living life to its fullest and you were amazed at yourself for your accomplishments. Now the primary objective here is to recreate the feelings of self worth and confidence you felt during this experience or time in your life. The second-phase in this experiment is to amplify these positive feelings. Imagine for yourself a dial or a switch that enables you to strengthen these positive feelings just by turning the dial or flipping the switch.
Now dial or flip the switch and experience the strengthening of positive feelings of accomplishment and self-worth. You will experience differing levels of emotion depending on your life experiences and personally aspects. However, all of you will in all probability experience an increase in positive feelings. Try adjusting the dial and working with the features of your switch to further increase positive feeling and emotions.
Do this experiment for a few minutes per day with the objective that you will be able to gradually increase your control over your emotional states. Once you have gained some experience in controlling you emotional states, you may experiment in superimposing your positive reality directly over the negative reality you are experiencing. When you are successful, you will notice a dramatic shift to the positive within your Personal Reality Field.
Now these experiments are vital for you as way to learn emotional control. In the Fourth Dimension, emotional control will enable you to keep your focus in the mental aspects of consciousness. You will not be dragged back into the emotional reactivity of the Third Dimension. FINDINGS – Document your findings.
HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may Illustrate other lives in the Vanguard.
If you are an avid Blog Reader of my material, new or old, you are in all likelihood simply reaffirming in this current existence, predictions of interests and behavior from other Simultaneous Lives. The members of The Entity are not, for the most part, stay-at-home bodies, who allow the world to go by them unchanged, unnoticed. No, my fellow travelers are eager to question the core values and beliefs of their cultures. Yet this questioning is not entirely intellectual, it is backed-up with advocacy and action in the physical domain. This action has behind it the spiritual impetus for transformation for the good of all. We are a very humanitarian group and you make your marks on your culture in very noticeable ways.
You will be protected. As we exercise our power to create loving realities, we will be protected by Beings of Light. We have the collective power of goodness on our side, you see, and so as we go about our activist duties in response to the inner promptings of Divine information, we may notice that the way before us is cleared of barriers to our destination. As in my earlier example of the “Crystal People,” we may have incarnated many times in many eras, but with a single emphasis or role: that of advocate for humanity. And so we may notice that we respond to threats upon others as threats upon ourselves. We take the threats upon our fellow Earthly inhabitants and upon the Earth inhabitants and upon the Earth in very personal ways. On this note, let us explore possible lives lived just as we may now be living this current life of ours, as an advocate for humanity and for Mother Earth.
Now you may have lived as Empowered Ones within “normal” occupations that no one would suspect. This may be true for you currently, Dear Blog Reader. Many of you use your nondescript careers – housewife, teacher, mason – to protect your true identities – magician, shaman, witch, healer. The true calling is protected. There is a tradition in these matters to work “Undercover,” and avoid the scrutiny that comes with self-disclosure. Naturally, it is always your choice to reveal or to not reveal your true motives and the real work that you are accomplishing. But as I have just stated: you will be protected. As a bringer of light and healing, you will be protected from harm.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL SANCTUARY The previous experiments in this Blog in contacting Simultaneous Lives lived in other time-frames may well have given you glimpses into lives lived as Empowered Ones. There is a certain unifying aspect among all of our reincarnational existences, and it may well be that we have come into physical reality on these various occasions to help and to heal. With your Energy Personality as your guide, imagine other lives in other eras in which you may have served in the Vanguard of progressive human consciousness.
FINDINGS – Document your Findings in your preferred way.
This next section concerns a critical issue with regards to the actions of our leaders in the U.S. and some of the other developed nations. The actions of these countries, particularly in the Middle East, where they seek to control the oil, are challenging the basic structure of acceptable behavior on our planet. Now there are those in other dimensions who take notice of such things and are quite concerned with the zeal with which these deluded humans continue to plunder our beloved Earth.
Certainly many of my Blog Readers may wonder what they can do personally about this critical matter, that of the brutality and warlike nature of our leaders, and I presented some exercises in my Blogs to answer these questions. However, some time has lapsed since that material was created and conditions have greatly worsened as of the time of this writing. I feel that I, as a protector of our planet, must look for more effective methods to counter the negative leaders.
Now I know some of you may scoff and say, ‘What can you do, as a entity, to effect change on this Earth?” The truth is that Beings of Light such as myself have exercised our power, in what we would call our “history,” in concerted efforts to effect quite dramatic changes in our Earth reality. These changes were brought about by our efforts in tandem with the mental and physical efforts of human beings. Each of us, as I have stated earlier, has an Energy Personality or Spirit Guide if you wish, that has watched over us from our birth into our current lifetime. Whether we acknowledge this as true or not does not in any way deny the truth of my statement.
Now consider what could be accomplished for the good of humankind, if many thousands, hundreds of thousands, millions of human beings were to act in unison toward a common goal, such as for instance, the creation of peace on our world, peace in the Middle East and all of the other areas of conflict on our world. How would we accomplish this, as peacemakers, you and I and our loving Guides?
As with all in creation, we do it with our thoughts. First we acknowledge that we have an Energy Personality. We affirm this, have the intention of communicating with it, and then experience the unfolding of that relationship in the manifestation. I covered this earlier in the Blogs, but I would like now to suggest an experiment on a grand scale. First Let me repeat one of the basic elements of my teaching: we are not separate from anything in the Universe, and we are connected to everything in it by virtue of our thoughts. If we believe this, or we can make the attempt to believe this, it follows that Peace on Earth is well within our grasp.
What if the soldier refused to fight? What if the soldier had a dream one evening that so affected him/her that he/she refused to fight? What if our negative media propagators had a change of heart and decided to state the truth instead of lies and propaganda? What if hundreds of thousands of people awakened one morning no longer support the negative leaders? I think you may be getting the point here. When we go into our meditations and we direct our energies, instead of sending out the positive images and emotions to just one or two, send out the energies to the Guides and to their physical counterparts throughout all of humanity. Our thoughts have power. Indeed our thoughts are the most powerful elements in our physical reality, for THEY CREATE OUR PHYSICAL REALITY. If we desire peace on our Earth, then use our powerful thoughts to create it.
Link up with other peace lovers on the subtle levels and imagine our peaceful world into being.
In our world, terrorism is the subject of choice for modern humans. We are enthralled with the subject for we are daily inundated with terrorist data from the various negative media to the degree that many of us in the modern world eat, drink and sleep terror.
We “like” it that way, for we have become entranced by our negative leaders and the negative media into believing that these terrorist issues should occupy our every waking hour. Our leaders like it that way, for that is the way they want us to respond. The negative leaders are in business of control, and so in a way they use their proclamations to control us through fear. The fear produces body chemicals that create stress and anxiety as well as addiction to these fear-producing statements. We just can’t take our eyes off it. We just can’t ignore the headlines. And so the negative media like it that way, for they are profiting tremendously by spreading the negative messages of the negative leaders.
Now, I must remind of a lifesaving point here: we create our own reality. At risk of repeating myself, let us visit that concept again. On an individual and collective basis, humans create their individual Reality Fields and the mass-create consensus reality that we perceive in a linear fashion. Let us use an example to see how the negative leaders and their media “help” us form our individual and also our mass consciousness realities. It’s quite simple really… You are an average American who awakens to the sound of the radio news program that describes the latest atrocity perpetrated by the latest enemy of our country. Can you see how this sets the tone for the remainder of your day? Before becoming fully awake, in that “in between state” in which we are so impressionable, out mind is already picking up negative information that we will, no doubt, carry with us throughout the day. And as our mind finds in our mental and physical environments what feels is “corroboration” of this negative information – proof – it will note this proof and add it to the mix of negative data, beliefs, images and so on.
Again, in this way, the negative leaders and the negative media have won the contest for control of the minds of individual listeners and viewers and also have they gained control of the masses of listeners and viewers. Now, since telepathy among humans is imperative continually, we reinforce this negativity on the subtle levels by communicating, with other humans in the collective, on the negative leaders and their media. On these subtle levels ideas are accepted as fact, though there may have been NO CRITICAL THINKING Involved in accessing this data. Do you see how our leaders, our media and our unaware selves conspire to terrorize us? We are terrorizing ourselves. It is true that our leaders are at most fault for our predicament. But we as human individuals are also responsible for our dilemma. We have not taken individual responsibility for our own thoughts and actions. We have given our power to institutions, to leaders, to employers. No wonder then do we find ourselves afraid and powerless.
Obviously, the most direct and simple way to take our power back from the institutions of global negative media would be to not participate in them. As I have suggested at different stages in my Blogs, we can always TURN OFF THE RADIO, TURN OFF THE TV, TURN OFF THE VIOLENT MOVIES. Avoid the negative media when we are out in our physical environment. Vote with our pocketbook by not purchasing negative, violent, controlling media and other life-denying products of our mass-consumption society. We will soon begin to like it – our freedom – and our negative institutions and leaders will begin to not like it. The repression may grow then, because “the powers that be” will know that we are taking responsibility for our own thoughts and beliefs. However, persevere and our numbers will surely grow. The Forces of Light are in our favor. The probabilities for a mass transformation of consciousness into the positive arena are growing. Our contribution is necessary for the greater good of our species and our Mother Earth.
Perhaps some of the Blog Readers, considering the constant perceived negativity surrounding us, wonder how one person could possibly make a difference in the global picture. You may be asking yourselves, “Why should I go through the effort of changing my beliefs and my Personal Reality for the better, if it will be only a “drop in the bucket” in the “greater scheme of things?” My answer to you would be that your efforts in changing your beliefs and behaviors and thus your Personality RealityField, also have the added effects of broadcasting by example, the benefits of loving kindness and confidence to those around you in your physical reality.
The effects are also felt telepathically. As you change your personal world for the better, you are each moment broadcasting on the subtle levels your successes in overcoming negativity to the collective network of Souls on our planet through this web of subtle energies. I have noted elsewhere in these Blogs that we as a species are literally “One.” We are all co-creating with All That Is our individual lives, yet we are all sharing the same timeframe as One People.
This Telepathic Network is our communication system that we use to achieve consensus while sleeping, on what will be manifested as our world reality upon awakening. So you see, You can truly make a difference. Thoughts have power. Thoughts of good Intent and loving kindness have extreme transformative power. Our positive thoughts seek out other positive images and thoughts being transmitted in this collective mental conversation. These thoughts merge to create incipient Reality Constructs. When these potentialities reach a stage of imminent creation, it could be YOUR SINGLE LOVING THOUGHT that could tip the scales towards the positive manifestation.
This mental conversation does indeed continue while we are awake and going about our activities. In other words, we are still dreaming and in contact with the collective while awake, but it goes on “on the background.” It is just as important to create the thoughts of loving kindness and confidence while awake, because that is when we have the most conscious control over our mentality. It is this exercise of consciously changing our thoughts and behaviors that creates a spillover into our dream world, our sleeping times, affecting the world thought consensus in a positive way.
Now you may still be harboring the belief that “Evil,” particularly in our times, may be stronger than “Good.” Indeed, with the variety of wars, famines and other negative events going on around us, this would seem to be the case. However, this belief is still only a habitual idea that we hold. You may have been in the habit of thinking to oneself, “Evil triumphs over good: in politics, in business, in my personal dealings with people,” that you have blinded yourself to other options, other ways of perceiving our world.
Look beyond these perceptual blinders and you may see that the opposites is true: Good triumphs over evil: in politics, in business, in your personal dealings with people. The opposite is true my friends. Reflect on this for a moment and see if you agree.
Be ruthlessly loving in this matter. Prove yourself an adequate match for this person in this endeavor by reflecting back love and faith and confidence when they test you out of fear and mistrust. The trick is to identify the incoming negative Consciousness Units and transform them with your energy into loving thoughts and emotions BEFORE they enter your energy field and cause disruptions.
These energies are very powerful. They are indeed like parasites that attach themselves to your Energy Body where they then can attach themselves to others, but only if the host is fearful, mistrusting and negative, cynical etc. Negativity is the feeding ground for these energies. Where there is only love and acceptance and compassion, these influences cannot take hold.
Integrity is an excellent concept and we can discuss it a bit here. In this situation, you are integrating your Soul aspects of loving kindness and acceptance, with you core personality or egoic aspects of self-defense, anger etc. So integrate, integrate, integrate. Love dissolves the egoic response motivated by territoriality and competition. Coming together – integration – is what is needed here on all levels. Common ground, conciliation, cooperation for a higher ideal, these are all relevant issues to be considered at this time.
Now, know that many of our contemporaries are also involved in these Soul issues. Our planet is going through a transformation that will be felt down through every atom in our perceptive field. All is in flux. Everyone’s issues are being presented to them for transformation and healing. Now you can ignore these “requests” from Soul, but you do so at your peril.
These lessons will help you gain the wisdom and skills necessary to make the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension and stay there. The more deeply this divine information is taken into your being, the more likely you will retain it, remember it and
use it in your spiritual pursuits.
The Negative Entities are created by negative thoughts and emotions, but it is unproductive to ask which came first, the Negative Entities of the ideas and emotions that created them, for all exists at once. The hope lies in more people opting for Courage and Love rather than fear and anger.
HYPOTHESIS: The IGBOL are the “closest” and most accessible of the light bodies. Now , you can be informed of which being or group of beings you are allied with by virtue of your evolution as a Soul. This can be discovered by asking your Energy Personality, using your free will to ask the names and locations of other beings associated with You-the-Soul.
The IGBOL is the “closest” to you in terms of affinity of purpose. They are on a path of Loving Understanding as are you the Blog Reader. This is why we have suggested that you contact this group as a preliminary to further explorations. Let me say that you need not fear approaching this group in your experiments.
As I state often in my blogs, the great majority of us are in all probability, members of the Same Entity and so have a direct connections to these Energy Bodies we are describing. The Entity is vast, again as I have noted previously, and at this time we are having a “reunion” of sorts on these subtle levels. You may assume you are rekindling old relationships in these communications, for indeed you are. The fear and mistrust will fade as you receive memories of these associations, in the form of divine impulses. You will know it when you feel is. This is ongoing assistance the Beings of Light in service to mankind/womankind during this time of awakening.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY Establish your relaxed state of consciousness. Now with the assurance and confidence that comes with mastering these various levels of consciousness through the experiments done in the preceding Blogs, have the intention and profound expectation that you will encounter these Loving Beings.
The contact come with the attendant feelings of compassion and love. There may be an “alien” component that may cause discomfort. You may go beyond surface appearances by utilizing your skills at turning Fear and Anger into Loving Understanding and confidence. The IGBOL are you, Dear Blog Reader, in your multidimensional future. Knowing this, you may experience this contact as a homecoming. When you sense that the meeting is over, gradually come back to your Third-Dimensional awareness.
EXPERIMENT – Becoming aware of Astral Travel during sleep. HYPOTHESIS: You can use your intention to become aware of astral travel during sleep.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
The Ritual Sanctuary is important here in this investigation. Perform it just as you are falling asleep, with suggestions to yourself that you will become aware of your inner environment – your sleeping world – as you are about to engage in Astral Travel as we call it. It may be necessary to conduct this experiment for several days to get results.
The suggestion that you will become aware within the dream state is important. You may also suggest that you will awaken after a particular sojourn into the Astral Realms, so that you may document your experiences in your dream journal or other medium. It would then be advantageous to return to sleep with the suggestion that you will awaken briefly to document your further Astral Travels, and so on.
This will give you an ongoing record of your adventures during sleep. And again, the core experience you gain through experimentation in the dream state, the greater mastery gained in perceiving and documenting this state of awareness.
FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with a journal or recorder.
The notion that you are going too far with this exploration of consciousness, that we are going into “forbidden” territory where few have gone before us, may cause us to become fearful, wishing we had not begun the journey. This is a natural reaction, and I wholly expect many of you, especially those with religious conditioning, to at first react with fear and anxiety when you “see something in the dark.”
GIVING UP POWER
You are not guilty. You are not to blame. Your, Dear Blog Reader, have done nothing wrong. Because you are in the habit of giving away your power to others, you leave yourself in a vulnerable position. You relinquish your power and then the usurper of your power – parent, employer, priest, politician – can use guilt and other unsavory emotional states to control you.
Yet you have done nothing wrong. You only think you have, second-to-second, because of this manipulation by those in perceived authority. They want you to feel guilty and powerless. It makes their job much easier when you are afraid, anxious, experiencing feelings of low self-worth etc. How much easier it is to take money from someone, for example, when they are feeling unworthy. Indeed, after you have ceded your power to people and institutions, no wonder you feel unworthy.
Yet again, you are not guilty of a thing. You are not to blame. Now, that is not to say that you are absolved of all responsibility in the matters of power between yourself and those in our world. That is not what I am suggesting at all. For that matter, the main reason I write this Blog is to help you get your power back. We cannot have a revolution in human consciousness with so many humans without the full human power that they were incarnated with when entering into life on our world.
Currently in our timeframe there is much talk of “taking back power” – personal empowerment. It is almost a cliché in our world. Yet truly taking back our power from persons and institutions is a heroic act. There is much perceived risk in doing so, for most Western humans fear reprisals when they go beyond the status quo. There may be feelings of guilt that come with “not doing what you are told.”
You also may have feelings of loneliness. Breaking away from the pack may leave you feeling as though you have made a mistake in surrendering the safety of the group. Yet also know that as more of you go on your Soul journeys, relinquishing the negatives in your lives, pursuing positive, loving experiences and creating a radically different world for yourselves, you will also meet up with others who are on a similar path. Those with positive loving thoughts will be drawn to others who have positive loving thoughts. As you meet with others on a similar path, you will form groups, naturally as humans do, and soon you will have remade your social institutions into something truly sacred and life-affirming for all.
They are what we would call “of Alien Extraction.” Their heads are quite larger than ours. Eyes are much larger than ours also. They have no protruding nose formations, merely slits, as in our reptilian species. The bodies are small and thin. The limbs are long, and fingers thin. And hairless. The skin is gray in appearance. They have been called grays by some of our UFO researchers.
Their home is in a future dimension of Earth. Humankind, in the progressed future.
These are not accidental meetings. Their overtures to our people are part of a plan to introduce humankind to their civilization. They are welcoming us to the greater reality of which we are a part but do not recognize currently.
They are beings of love. They live on love, in a very literal sense. The powerful emotion of love fuels all of reality. They have received negative imprinting by some of the more dangerous of our Negative Entities. Obviously, the negative beings would prefer that their kind stay out the picture as the Nefarious Entities attempt to grasp control of our Earth in its entirety. They will not let that happen. That is why they are making themselves known to some of us. They mean no harm. They are providing help to us as their people resist the takeover of our Dark Forces.
Simply, consciousness creates, and as it does, both positive and what we would term “negative” creations result. Consciousness including the opposite of love. Yet because love is at the base of all realities, the tendency is to revert back to love in any given cycle. Our people in our current era are at the end of a cycle. It appears to many of us that we will be consumed by negativity, particularly in our U.S. However, know that Beings of Light, including our association and millions of other Light Bodies, are stemming the tide of evil. They are helping us. Yet we must do our part.
We can love our way out of this dilemma. By reinforcing love within our being and in our relationships with others, we create an irresistible counterforce to the negativity in our world. The more we and our people promote love in this way, the sooner we shall subvert the agenda of the Negative Entities. Their wish for us is to realize that they are with us in support of our loving evolution as a race.
They are not the enemy. They have been slandered by the Negative Entities. Look for our appearance on the world stage as we all – meaning humanity as well as the Light Bodies – unite to overturn the evil ones.
A group of Energy Bodies that resides within dimensions beyond our physical reality. These beings have been in contact with humanity on Earth for many, many years. They were known to our indigenous cultures for example, and they were also known to visionaries throughout the centuries in our recorded histories. They have been know by different names.
Each culture that has known them, naturally, has named them through the perceptual lenses of their individual societies. This group is and has always been a very loving, gentile species of beings. Because of this loving attribute, many cultures have honored them as gods or what we might term Angels, Deities and so on.
This same group I am describing is available to us for achieving contact and ongoing communication. They exist Inter-Dimensionally and so may provide a link to us from the distant past, in our terms, to the present and beyond. This may be said of all the Energy Bodies we may come to contact.
However, the group I am describing, because they represent the evolution of peace and loving understanding within non-physical reality, may be particularly valuable advisers to us in our current reality, seeing as how we as a race are on the edge of the Fourth-Dimensional Shift, with our capacity for loving understanding to be the deciding factor. This group of loving beings is called the Intergalactic Brotherhood of Light.
Now, our Spirit Guides are a more personal matter. It would be as though an energy personality essence were “created” to the specifics of our individual personality being the Entity from which the specific characteristics are drawn. Now beyond the Energy Personality, of course, exist continuing manifestations of energy gestalts, more complex in form and substance, until one reaches All That Is, the fundamental energy source from which all realities in all dimensions are created.
Let me go a bit further there… using our wonderful little metaphor of the radio dial. Suppose that you think of All That Is as the totality of all radio waves. Then on your dial you would have listed those “channeled sources” as you have so described , in separate parts of the dial, so that each time you turn that dial, you connect to a different part of the energy “wavelengths” of All That Is.
Now let us say at the far left of the dial is the name David, and when you metaphorically turn the dial to that spot, you receive through your antennae, which we might describe as the Chakra receptors of the human body, the David transmission. And if you turn the dial to the right to the spot marked X you would “pick up” the transmission of that specific Energy Body and so on.
I think that our metaphor is a good one. Blog Readers can use this visualization to tune-in to their own guides and it becomes a ritual they can use to make these connections in their own lives. Ritualizing these activities – practicing making these connections – is what is going to help us in our Spiritual Evolution. It is the first step.
These beings are better described as Inter-Dimensional Beings. And being Inter-Dimensional, they are far from being in outer space and beyond. They are indeed, as close to us, Dear Blog Reader, as our most intimate physical and mental environments.
They are for these reasons, quite easy to tune-in to, and many of us do just that. Let me say once again that everything in our reality has consciousness. Knowing that, how would a microbe, that has its own consciousness, intelligence and power, appear to a human, if the human tuned-in to one accidently? One might indeed believe they had contacted a being from out space.
Our sleep times are highly important for our health physically, psychologically and spiritually, and so we will now comment on this state of consciousness. Now the adventures of you and your Soul Family are ongoing. Within your waking reality you experience your waking SoulFamily manifestation. However when dreaming you may be experiencing other manifestations of your Soul Family, within your current incarnation and possibly within past and future timeframes.
If you watch your dreams closely, you may notice the appearance of “familiar yet unknown faces” on this inner stage of awareness. These hard-to-place characters may indeed be members of your Soul Family as they engaged with us in activities on the subtle levels. Let me leave it at that and encourage us to do your own research in this matter.
On a biological level, as you may know, the body rests and repairs itself during sleep. Without going into too much detail, this restoration begins with the onset of sleep and continues until waking. During sleep, the consciousness, for the most part, travels from the physical body to visit locations far and wide in our Third-Dimension as well as other dimensions. Your Soul, therefore, is engaged in many different activities while your physical vehicle rests and recuperates.
These Sojourns from the physical body have been named Astral Travel by some of us, and this is an adequate description. We do indeed visit the Astral Levels during sleep, but there is much more to it than simply “visiting” these non-physical locales. You-The-Soul are refreshed, revitalized and energized via these inter-dimensional travels.
These are the roads we have traveled for countless years while in incarnation and in the time in between lives. We know these pathways in the grid work of the higher dimensions, as well as we know the route to take to the market in the physical world of the Third-Dimension.
Many of us are engaged in projects and collaborations on these subtle levels. Without the physical body, times takes on a fluid aspect. Travel is instantaneous. We progress by simply intending to go to a particular location. For example: we may be providing comfort to a human or group of humans who are in Tragic Circumstances. We may be providing support to these people in their dream state, even as we may be supported by other in ours.
As I describe in other parts of my Blog, during sleep the consciousness also participates in the creation of what will be local, regional and worldwide waking environments. We create the framework for our reality during sleep. When we awaken, you and our fellow humans “fill in the details” by choosing from the limitless field of probable realities open to us, those that will become our Personal Reality Fields
We do have different beings assisting with our Soul. Some have been Guides and friends in other incarnations on Earth. Some of these Energy Bodies have been watching over us and others in our Soul Family since the beginning of time as we understand it.
Broadly speaking, each of us has a constellation of these Energy Bodies, and we are each potentially able to achieve contact with some or all of them, depending on our level of Soul Evolution or spiritual growth. These entities are awaiting our call.
Mankind/Womankind are at the stage of development that it is necessary to make these connections with the Higher Self. This must take place on a grand scale before the Fourth-Dimensional shift can occur.
Now, let me go further with this explanation by discussing the concept of Soul Family. Each of us lives within what we might call our “core” family. This would be the family or families that raised us. These are the people who we call our family members.
Now among this group of humans that we may or may not be related to genetically, are members of our Soul Family these would be the Souls that have incarnated with us into our current timeframe to learn their lessons with us. These members of our Soul Family may well have participated in NUMEROUS permutations of family groupings with us throughout the millennia.
Some of these family groupings may be or have been in other solar systems, on other planets and so on. For the most part, however, our Soul Family has developed in the Earthly realms. Again, members of Soul Families reincarnate together in different roles, of different sexes, of different temperaments and so on, to experience different Lessons for the Entity – the overall collective of Souls in which Soul Family resides – and of course, for the greater experiencing of All That Is.
I must mention, that our Soul Family may include others that we may not acknowledge as “family” members. These participants might include, for example: the cashier at the local market that you may be very attracted to or perhaps find abhorrent, as well as others within your community that you hold strong emotions for.
However, the Soul Family may be thought of as that small group of active participants in our reincarnational activities in our current timeframe. This primary group is the one in which we learn our lessons while other members of the group also learn their Lessons.
Now if we are clever and if we learn to use our Inner Senses, we may find the connections between our current Soul Family, and the Lessons learned and to be learned, as well as perhaps the most “Immediate” or “Recent” past lives. For those of us interested in such things, I suggest we conduct your experiments with this information in mind. The connections will then “come to mind” as we put together your findings
Hypothesis: You can use your intention to transform Fear and Anger into Courage and Loving Understanding.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY.
Think of a fear or anger-creating an idea or image that you have been entertaining lately. Surely most of you can come up with an example. Now that you have it in your mental environment, enliven it with your thoughts and make it seem real. Do this for a few seconds… Now mentally say, “Stop!” and have the intention that you will now turn down the energy on the thought or image, by using your dial or other metaphorical tools, and remind yourself that you are supported on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed your Soul Self.
You may consult your EnergyPersonality or other Guides for help in this matter. When the positive emotions of love and compassion are felt, experience them and relish them for a few seconds. Then end the experiment with your intention to go about your activities, this time experiencing the residual feelings of Ecstasy that you will no doubt be enjoying for some time after the experiment.
FINDINGS – Make your notes or remember this use of the Inner Senses for the next potentially Fear or Anger-producing experience. Document your findings.
HYPOTHESIS: Positive assessing all that you experience creates the positive future.
In addition to enacting your Ritual of Sanctuary before you go out into your world, I suggest you practice positively assessing everything that comes your way in your existence. Practice until it becomes a matter of fact – a positive habit that you practice ongoing throughout each and every day. Perhaps an experiment is in order here. Again, this build upon exercises in previous Blogs.
Let us say that you are about to begin your day. You have awakened from sleep, you have opened your eyes and you are perhaps walking to the bathroom.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
This may be habitual for you now. It should only take a few seconds to perform your ritual. Then here is where you immediately intervene between the Moment Points of you waking life. In between the moments of remembering and forgetting… you intervene. “It’s easy to find the good in each sequential perception.” This is your idea for the day.
Remembering to conduct your Ritual of Sanctuary; remembering that you create your reality out of your perceived beliefs, ideas and images about your world; remembering to positively assess each sequential perception. Then do you see how the positive perceptions create the positive future, moment-to-moment? You are rolling out your positive moments before you to create the positive path of your future.
(Thought afterwards – this experiment is a especially useful for when you can’t avoid the negative media. The blog reader hopefully will choose not to watch negative TV, violent movies etc.)
FINDINGS – Remember to write down your findings from worthwhile experiment.
In our world currently, we as a race are experiencing the disintegration of the fundamental structures that hold our societies together. It is easy for us to see this phenomenon in our Western World, for our media proclaim the disasters and upheavals within our institutions on a daily basis.
I refer to these media as the “negative media,” for obvious reasons. In a very real sense, our media shape and negatively spin the events of our world to depict the basest interpretation, appealing to the lowest aspects of humankind. Because there are very few alternative voices in our media network, the media as a whole tend to reinforce and perpetuate negative experiences in the minds of humanity.
Those of us who wish to go into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension “with our eyes wide open,” would do well to divorce oneself from all forms of negative media.
I have explained in previous blogs how the violent images and stories serve to trigger biochemical responses in our bodies, so that we are conditioned to continue watching, reading or listening. It becomes an addiction in time, so that we become “hooked” on negativity. We become hooked on the adrenaline that is released with our bodies.
Remembering what I have described concerning the activities of the Negative Entities as they seek out fear and anxiety, perhaps the blog reader can see how a daily diet of this – such as violent movies, newscasts and the like – could increasingly attract the Negative Forces, until there is not room with our mental environment for love, compassion or the human virtues.
“But how,” you might say, “can I protect myself from these media if they surround me in the physical environment? They are everywhere and I must confront them every second of my life just to go out and do my job, go to school, go to church etc. etc. etc.” I appreciate your dilemma and I have an answer for you.
By expressing negative thoughts about war or anything, we are colluding with the Negative Forces. Make the effort to deal with these issues in Love. Love is the strongest of all energies in the Universe. Focus on the Love that we can feel for everyone, including the “war people.” The only way to convince the haters is to model Unconditional Love in all our actions.
Be a peacemaker by converting your negativity into Love and by turning hatred into its opposite. This skill is what will convert people to peaceful side, and this skill is what will allow us to stay in the Fourth Dimension. So practice, practice, practice.
You see, our Personal Reality Field is literally feedback of our ongoing mental activities. We can always look at our created reality to see how we are doing. This of course assumes that you are aware of your Lessons and are not denying the spiritual, or need I say, “metaphysical” underpinnings of your so-called “physical ” life.
If you feel you haven’t enough information as to what your Lessons are, the next time you are in communication with our Energy Personality, simply ask for guidance as to what your Lessons might be in this incarnation and wait for the reply. You will get a direct reply telepathically if it is appropriate information for you to have at the time, or you may be presented with a “graphic example” by way of a reincarnational drama or comedy in your physical world.
These events present your Lessons in stark relief against the background of your mundane, robotic existence. You will recognize these as “teaching moments” or ” moments of awakening” by their surprising appropriateness and synchronous attributes. Again, as I have stated previously, you will know it when you see it for YOU HAVE CREATED IT, for purposes of Your own learning and Soul Evolution.
For example: You may have noticed a teaching moment in your own life that was not tragic in the least but amusing and profound. Perhaps you have had the experience of being the center of the cosmic joke, when everything around you was turned against you in humorous and symbolic ways. Certainly all of us have had these experiences, yet they are too easy to dismiss as coincidence.
These are your reincarnational comedies – teachings moments of the absurd and ironic. Now within these teaching moments, you also have the opportunity for creating loving understanding out of negative emotions – embarrassment and shame, anger and fear – just as you have the opportunity for transformation within the reincarnational dramas of our life.
Simply note that these episodes of dramatic and comedic teaching moments represent opportunities for IMMEDIATE TRANSFORMATION, IMMEDIATE SOUL GROWTH. I advise you Blog Reader to take advantage of these experiences, therefore, when they arise.
With an appreciation for Loving Understanding and the power of this state of consciousness to transform fear and anger, comes the possibility for peace. Dear Blog Reader, if we want peace, we can have peace. Make it with our thoughts. If we want the wars to cease, we can create that with our thoughts.
It all begins with our Loving Intention in the moment. Our thoughts of peace and Loving Understanding coalesce on the subtle levels, to create their counterparts in physical reality. What is the counterpart to peace, love and understanding? A physical world where WAR IS NOT TOLERATED BY THE PEOPLE.
War cannot be sustained on a diet of peace and Loving Understanding. War perishes in such circumstances. And as war and violence fade into memory, new, positive life-affirming Reality Constructs are thrust into our world with the energy of the loving thoughts, the peaceful thoughts, the thoughts of understanding and acceptance for our fellow human beings
When we look at our Personal Reality and see a change, one that reflects a change in our beliefs, and perhaps it feels uncomfortable to acknowledge it because it feels so foreign to us, let that serve as validation that you are on the right path. For example: where once there was fear of a particular group or race and there is now acceptance and growing affection, let that serve as validation that our Soul is evolving in beneficial ways.
No, we cannot err on the side of too much love. We cannot have too much affection for our fellow humans. My advice is to practice loving one another WITH ALL OF OUR MIGHT. The emotional content, highly-charged, is what helps the new reality break through the old, and establish itself as the new manifestation.
“The New World.” I continually encourage to be ruthlessly loving and confident, and I suggest that also to the Blog Reader of these words. Continually, moment-to-moment, create our world through a perception of love and confidence. We can be a model for those who need this guidance, in how to think, feel and act.
For those of us who can accept such responsibilities our growing skills with the use of the Non-Physical Senses and our growing knowledge of how to use the powers of love and confidence, can thrust one to the forefront of the movement of humans beings who are seeking their own enlightenment and the Soul progression also of the species.
So in a word, Love is the answer. If we were to live our life as a poet, a romantic poet let us say, one that was immersed in love, and indeed unable to sense or formulate a single thought that was not love, imagine how LOVING our existence would be.
But instead many of us focus on murders, such as we have in our negative media; personal vendettas, such as we are engaged-in at the workplace; and general cynical gossiping, such as makes up the Movement-to-Moment Points of our ongoing lives.
This is not to paint all of us with the same brush, but we must take responsibility for whatever part we play in the creation of negative Reality Constructs in our world. If we contribute If we contribute a negative gesture, we are partly responsible for the collective negative manifestation. It makes senses, does it not, given what I have described about the nature of our reality.
If we become angry at a person of a different color while driving our cars and shout at them and gesture at them in an absence way, we are responsible for our part in the collective negative manifestation of racial prejudice in our current timeframe. Does this not make sense? If we scream in anger at our child, we are responsible for the collective manifestation of child abuse in our time frame. It is quite logical in its consistency.
We may believe that if we commit these violations in private, that they do not count, because no one is observing our behavior. But telepathy, as I said before, is operative at all levels. We ALL know what is “on your minds.” We feel that we have to pretend that we DON”T know, however, to maintain our private lives.
Yet all of this will be out in the open soon, and I would urge us to clean up our thoughts and behaviors so that we will not be caught in the habitual negative thinking and behavior that currently hold us back.
Let us now discuss Loving Understanding some of the great virtues of humankind. Now there is love and there is love. It would seem that each of us might have our own definition: “love of another is acceptance of another regardless of how the other appears, speaks of behaves.” This aspect of love comes from understanding what the human purpose is on our great Earth.
Generally, the purpose is to co-create with All That Is a life of learning. We are on the planet to learn from our experiences in our particular niche in our personal environment. When we can appreciate this overriding fact of life, we can come to a loving understanding of ANYONE we meet upon our Earth.
We are All on the same voyage: that of the path to Soul Realization. Each person we meet in our experiences is a teacher for us, therefore, and from these interactions we learn our lessons and our knowledge grows. Now, All That Is also grows in knowledge and experience with us, as we co-create and then experience our lessons.
All That Is is the energy source for all of creation. Indeed, we’re on our Earth to experience for All That Is, our life lessons that include EVERY MOMENT in our existence. Each second of our waking and dreaming hours provides learning opportunities for You-the-Soul.
This is true for not only our current life in this timeframe, but for all our many lives in this and other timeframe, past, present and future. This is not to minimize the importance of any given life. It is simply a fact of life, Dear Blog Reader. And when we understand this in its most profound sense, we can begin to have this sense of Loving Understanding I am describing, for myself as well as for others.
An excellent question in these matters be, “if negative thoughts and images lead to the creation of negative events, and these events are painful, why do people continue in the creation of negative thoughts?” I have covered this before and I now will elaborate on this paradox. Why would a human continue to think and imagine the negative and create negative Reality Constructs and thus feel the negative emotions that come with the negative manifestation?
In a way, the reason for this unusual behavior is that many of the negative reality creators are so accustomed to creating from their negative, repetitive thoughts and beliefs that they essentially know of no other way to think and feel. The creation of their negative personal realities has become “a force of nature,” to coin one of our phrases. The force is quite powerful and has become personalized over time so that the human is entranced with these thoughts and behaviors, thinking these is absolutely no other possible way to think and behave.
Sometimes under these circumstances of entranced negativity, the only way out is through a reincarnational drama or lesson. The Higher Self of the individual creates a life-or-death struggle to divert the attention always from the increasingly negative and self-defeating manifestations.
The human, then, is often quite relieved to enter into a different creative opportunity, even though it might entail a serious illness, accident, mental crisis and so on. The diversion has the effect of waking up the individual from the trance of negativity. They then see the world with a new-found clarity. They have a sudden appreciation and sense of gratitude for life where before they were living a robotic existence.
These creative opportunities may result in the death of the physical form. Still, the Soul experiences that result as a success, for the human has encountered and met the challenge in their own way. This is the Lesson they were to learn, and whatever was learned is now part of the knowledge of the individual Soul, The Entity and All That IS.
Of course, there is the probability we may avoid the life-or-death drama by approaching our lessons “head on,” and not avoiding them – learning what we have come to Earth to learn. The free will choice is always ours.
Another example: let us say that there is a single Soul Self that is experiencing this multitude of Reincarnational Existences for the purpose of dramatization of particular Lessons in physical reality. Now the lessons here obviously also have similarities.
Consider a human, perhaps a neighbor, family member, or friend of ours. suppose that this person, let us call them a Soul Family member, is experiencing a Lesson in forgiveness, that is, as is so often the case in these matters, not at all obvious or apparent to this subject, but quite painfully obvious to those around this person – the members of this person’s Soul Family. The Lesson is obvious to everyone but the subject here.
Yet on a deeper level of perception, through the eyes of the Soul Self, the subject here is also quite aware of a Lesson. Yet do we agree that it would be not much of a Lesson if the subject were to be painfully aware of the Lesson? What would be the point? And so the Amnesia is brought in to the mental environment of our subject through the creative powers of consciousness.
This is the way that all of us have set up our lives: to live without the deeper knowledge of our other existences. The Amnesia again. We have a perfect view of the status quo reality, but a very dim view of our true reality, the inner reality that creates the outer world. This narrowing of perception keeps us distracted by the minutiae of our moment-to-moment existence. It keeps us within the drama so that we are not compelled to look beyond what is directly in front of us.
For the sake of argument, though the situation is exceedingly complex, let us suppose the our subject could go either way here. They may choose to ignore the advice of trusted friends and family and continue on the path of excess, or they may indeed heed the advice of Soul Family Members and pay attention to the signs within their mental environment that seek to direct them onto a different and more productive path.
Our subject has free will to choose one course of development over the other. All members of the Soul Family also have free will to choose their level of participation in the learning experience. At any second in linear time, then, each member of the ensemble CHOOSES, on either a conscious or unconscious level, to participate or not participate in the drama and to what degree.
Again, the Soul Self of each participant ALWAYS comprehends the subjective value in each choice. The Soul Self informs each participant in this example, through impulses received within the mental environment, on the unlimited probabilities for Reality Creation within any particular moment.
Now there is great leeway here in this educational experience in the our Soul Self may accept any one of countless opportunities over the course of a lifetime to engage with others in the conscious learning of Lessons. Each of us has an agenda in the achievement of –Value Fulfillment – within the various domains of living.
For some of us, for example, the Lesson of personal responsibility may be paramount currently, for a variety of reasons. As in the case of our subject from the well-to-do family, this Lesson is currently the most pressing in their “curriculum” of Earthly existence.
Their life is quickening as many influences come to bear upon them. They are highly motivated to consider alternate ways of thinking and behaving. The normal methods are failing. Those humans our subject knows and respects – Soul Family members – are suggesting that this person change their ways.
The other members of the Soul Family are learning their Lessons also: some consciously, some by default. Each participant in this drama is learning something according to the requirements of their Soul Self. As I said, each of us enters into life in the Third Dimension with an agenda, with a general plan for development on all levels – body, mind and Soul. As we live our life, our Higher Self definitely keeps tabs on our activities with regards to the learning of Lessons.
Incidentally, some or even all members of a particular Soul FamilyGroup may be expressions of a singular Soul Self. This happens quite frequently within our system. As such, these types of groupings often express a particular intensity of character and emotion around certain values: these values being the Lessons learned in the collective.
We might say that this tendency of some Souls to experience multiple lives within a singular genetic family, shall we say, is a repertory expressions and shows itself throughout time. In these cases, we would find this repertory expressions in the home, in the workplace, in the church, and so on. A similarity of Lessons being learned by all members of the collective would be noted.
Again, all members of the Soul Family act in this benevolent conspiracy to assist the subject in learning their Lesson. Yet now there is the dawning of divine information within the mental environment of our subject, to the degree they may be considering changes in their behaviors and mentality.
Humility may be emerging within the emotional life of the subject. The value of working for one’s own room and board may become an important concept in their psyche.
This would be an example of learning the Lessons consciously rather than unconsciously by default. The subject may be now on the track of spiritual discovery. They may be spiritualized with this information from their Higher Self. They are waking up.
Now because we create our own reality. We also create all of our human relationships in cooperation with everyone and everything involved. We do this on a basic level in the dreamstate and in other altered states of consciousness. We create a strategy for development during these times, then we flesh-out our designs on awakening.
Additionally, we agree with the premise so popular within New Age circles, that everyone we meet enters our life for a reason. Does this then mean that everyone we meet is part of our Soul Family? Let us more clearly define our terms…
Soul Family members are those humans who enter our life to teach us something or for us to teach them something. We feel this connection, you see.
A simple example to illustrate: we are introduced to someone at an event or on the job and we shake hands with them. As we shake hands, let us say we look into their eyes, perhaps in an attempt to learn more about them or simply because it it required thing to do in our culture. As we maintain eye contact with this human, we have a deja vu type of experience in which we receive impressions on the mind.
In this split second of perception, images, sounds, feelings arise. We are busy shaking hands and do not have time to pursue these sensations. Yet we do note a connection of some sort with this human. We note to ourself the feeling-tone generated within this meeting. Most humans have had these experiences I am sure, not merely the seekers of wisdom we address in our blogs.
The Soul Family begins with us: an individual human learning our Lessons as best we can, without intellectualization and denial. And let us assume that you are such a human. We are on the path of self-awareness. You are reading this blog to discover where that might lead you in relationship with others. Let us move to the next Blog in this discussion.
Taking ownership of the difficulty is an important first step in creating this relationship of conscious co-creation. For example: in terms of health and the cessation of symptoms, we have suggested that the practitioner first own the malady. Take responsibility for our creation. Learn the Lesson. Then begins the task of doing things differently to create an improved reality. This is made easier through the realization of culpability.
Our strategies for creating the negative reality are apprehended and understood with all of the shame and other negative emotions that entails. The denial lifts to reveal our TRUE self. The intellectualization FAILS at long last, forcing us to encounter YOU, Dear Blog Reader. When it occurs, grasp it closely to our self and do not forget what you are learning in those moments. Use this knowledge to move forward in our Soul’s evolution.
There is a great practical advantage in selecting the conscious co-creator perspective. When we take responsibility for the creation of our own reality, and we begin to learn our Lessons with Courage and Loving Understanding, our awakening does indeed quicken, so that we are given more and more information.
This may take the form of knowledge regarding other lives we are living on our Earth and perhaps in other systems of reality, probable systems for example, as we have just discussed. It could take the form of valuable information regarding a profound question we might have, or simply an insight into a mundane matter that concerns us in the moment.
Conscious co-creation entails the intentional learning of Lessons without denial or intellectualization. To illustrate: consider what occurs when the average human in the throes of learning their difficult Lessons tries to “figure things out.” Typically, the human will look for “reasons” that support their own beliefs, their own behaviors, their PersonalReality Creation.
Though intellectualization and denial, any evidence of responsibility in the creation of Negative Realities is overlooked, while information supportive to the ego/intellect is noted and confirmed.
These rationales are commonly called “excuses” by many of us. Indeed, they do deserve this negative connotation, if in so intellectualizing and denying we are shirking our responsibilities in the matter. Figuring things out becomes figuring a WAY out of our predicament: a way that does not entail personal ownership of the difficulty.
Here it is all about Spirit, Dear Blog Reader, spirituality. Our greater self, The Higher Consciousness. The god within, whatever terminology we wish to use, this energy source is composed of Spirit. Perhaps we should define our terms.
SPIRITUALITY, AS IT IS UNDERSTOOD IS SIMPLY THE CONSCIOUS LEARNING OF LESSONS.
Now we are all learning our lessons However, we may be experiencing these Lessons by “default,” in that they appear to be put upon by outside forces. It may appear that we have no choice in the matter. Great tragedies may befall us for no reason, at least in our perception of these occurrences.
Contrast this perspective – we refer to this as the Victim or Martyr Perspective – with the perspective of the Awakening One. The human upon a spiritual path adopts a perspective of co-creator. The Lessons of life are not intellectualized, not are they denied; they are acknowledged as valuable and necessary to the growth of the Soul.
The original Soul Mate conceptualization from our ancient spiritual traditions included honoring the negative aspects also: the shadow or Dark Side.
Now: every human has the repressed, hidden personality aspects. And so, in the practice of these ancient traditions, Lessons were learned regarding the negative aspects of consciousness as a way to mutually integrate the “forgotten” material. The Dark Side of the personality was honored just as the divine aspects were honored within the spiritual practice.
The modern metaphysical concept of the Soul Mate often lacks this component. Further, our religions tend to denigrate these Dark Soul Issues as the work of the Devil, or as the result of a “weak will” or Spirit. This practice quite naturally leads to further repression of the cast-off images, ideas, and emotions.
In fact, what many of us think of as the “born again” experience is simply the spontaneous release of this material into the conscious mind. The result of this influx of energized constructs is often a full-blown visionary experience: the spiritual rebirth, the transformation of the “dark” material into Light.
We are modeling our Soul Mate theory on the practices of the ancient paths. Therefore we shall include the creation of the Light from the Dark in relationship as a necessary process to observe and nurture. In the interests of integrity and power we shall work from both sides: the polar opposites of the creative principles.
The Shift entails a remembering of the Ancient Wisdom that has informed the religious and spiritual practices of humankind over the generations. We are awakening individually and collectively to our innate powers of manifestation. As we awaken we will become aware of our reincarnational existences, for these lives are the essential creative works of our Soul.
May I be blunt? We have come into physical form in this particular era in our Earth’s history, within our particular body, within a particular collective of humans, on a specific point of the globe, to participate in a focused enactment of behavior, emotion, mentality, and so on, for the greater experiencing of our Soul Self.
There is no “fate” involved here, however. All realities are created at once, and expand, in a sense, “forever” within the eternal moment. Can we grasp this crucial point? We have free will within each moment of our life to select from infinite probabilities, those we wish to manifest.
Yet I do realize that these descriptions may appear as though there is no free will at all. This is how it looks from the outside looking into our reality. I sense, for example, not only me David as I write on this computer on the patio in my backyard, but the Soul Self of David as it presents itself within numerous other human life-forms on our Earth in other eras. All of these manifestations I can see if I wish.
What looks like destiny to us from within our system – the “fateful” meeting of our Soul Mate, for example – appears as infinite choice to my eyes as I observe all of us making our spontaneous free will choices within this moment in time. In other words, the end result of any reincarnational activity is determined by the Free Will choices of the participants.
In addition, we may remember that even the probable realities NOT chosen, continue on their trajectories of manifestation and development. Thus, we have these numerous probable worlds, parallel realities given birth by our varying choices moment-to-moment.
We are on our Earth for a purpose at this time: a “greater” purpose, if we accept spiritual concepts such as this. Forever as we are engaged in our normal activities – we awaken, we eat, we have experiences, and we sleep – we may find oneself looking for something more. We may be at a stage in our development when we are capable of looking beyond the surface reality to find the true meaning of our existence.
This is our greater purpose. We are not satisfied with the status quo explanations. Perhaps a Death in the family or a “failed” relationship drives us to enter on this quest. Whatever the reasons, we may now be encountering our Lessons directly and asking for the meanings of the events in our life.
Please understand that there is no blame or shame involved in these types of reincarnational dramas. The actors in this drama – parent, child, and other family members, as well as other community members who are involved in Soul Family interactions – are essentially blameless.
On a Third-Dimensional level all concerned may feel sense of shame, disappointment at the features of child-rearing. The child may feel these negative states also. Yet on a Soul level everyone involved realizes their critical role in the dramatization of these Soul Issues.
Then let us say that, on the subtle levels, in the dreamstate where all plans for future Reality Creation are conceived, the members of the Soul Family of this subject – including the subject – agree to intensify the Lesson for the sake of the subject and everyone else involved. For as the subject learns their Lesson, all others involved learn something also.
Perhaps poverty and Lack are interjected into life of the subject in a very abrupt manner, so that our subject is left reeling and disoriented from the swiftness of the change. Where one day all of this person’s needs were met, let us say that now, none of their needs are met. The family fortune has collapsed for some reason. Our subject is FORCED to go out into the marketplace and earn their bread.
Now this subject is certainly learning Lessons by default. They are not taking ownership of the life. They shirk responsibility for any of their actions. The members of the birth family, let us say, are co-conspirators in this avoidance of responsibility, in that, they shield their offspring from the harsh realities of existence.
They pay-the-way for this human to live the life of “the pampered one,” perhaps out of a sense of parental obligation, you see. They are attempting to protect their child from the pain of Lack and other negative emotional states.
However, you see I am sure where this protection becomes imprisoning for our subject. By allowing the child to grow into adulthood without any constraints, without the teaching of the virtues if humankind, the parents have “created a monster,” in a sense.
Another example of Lessons in the Soul Family: consider the particular type of human who has grown to adulthood within a family that provides every possible opportunity and physical Reality Construct for this person. The person has not had to “work” for their sustenance in any way. They are for all intents and purposes “spoiled rotten,” to use our vernacular.
Let us say that this adult has a smug attitude toward others that they feel are of a “lower” class. They spend the majority if their time enjoying their toys – the Reality Constructs of privilege, shall we say, given to them by their family – expensive cars, lavish homes, and other products.
Consequently, may we suggest that this subject of our discussion is lacking in certain desirable values we are promoting in our new Blogs? This human has, through a coincidence of privileged upbringing and perhaps a personality that avoids anything more than a cursory examination of the value of the Personal Reality in which they find themselves, created a life that does not include the human virtues we have discussed at length here.
This subject of ours is leading an “unexamined life,” to use one of our cliches again. Personal responsibility for mistakes or negative experience within this person’s existence is not taken under circumstances. Perhaps they deny quite earnestly any culpability in the matter.
Our individual awakening is an awakening to our other lives. We have suggested before that we are not always a sweet and loving people in our many lives. In some of those lives we are, quite naturally, the opposite of Sweet and Loving.
Thus, when we are mastering this awakening exercise, we become aware of our own “baggage:” the leftover negative ideas, images, and emotions that we carry with us Lifetime-After-Lifetime. It is a distinctive residue of negativity, made up of the essence of every shameful, hurtful, hostile, envious thought or behavior of our Simultaneous Lives.
Now in this example, we are witnessing a religious zealot attempting to convince us of the value of their system. Yet something is not right here. Something is very distasteful indeed. Let us say for the benefit of this discussion, that we are being triggered by this human to re-experience our own negativity as we have expressed it in other lives.
That is why it is so personal, you see. That is why we may overreact with this human, and perhaps respond in an angry fashion. This time it IS personal, for they are our reincarnational mirror, reflecting back to us our shameful angry past. Perhaps we have even lived a life as a religious zealot, so that we are witnessing the negative lifetime in all its glory, in all of its educational power.
In learning our Lessons we enlarge our belief system. We effectively “grow” our beliefs to encompass the beliefs of everyone we meet. This is CPA in action, as we find the good, in quite literally now, EVERYTHING.
Of course, in expanding our beliefs we will often find it necessary to discard beliefs that no longer serve us as an awakening human. Self-limiting beliefs, such as a belief in the superiority of a particular race, type of personality or human, may have to be discarded. This even though we may be feeling that we do not wish to surrender our belief, even though it may have been proven to be obsolete and even counter-productive.
However, why hold fast to our belief? Please realize that others have the opposite beliefs that are also quite valid. All of our realities are valid.
We may distinguish between two separate groups of Soul family members. For purposes of study, we shall refer to the group of humans we are interacting with in our current timeframe as our Current Soul Family Gestalt. The Soul Family members we associate with over linear time, in different bodies, within different human collectives, in our perceived past and future, we shall call the Interdimensional Soul Family.
Remember: the future and past can be considered as simply different easily-accessible dimensions for the student. We currently exist within the Third Dimension, yet we may access the future and past dimensions through practices learned in my new Blogs.
With the following experiment we are assuming that you are familiar with my new Blog material. If you are familiar, you are no doubt already proficient in attaining at-will the Trance state. As such, you may be quite expert at taking this state of awareness with you, as in the sanctuary, as you go about your daily activities.
Or perhaps you have perfected this Ritual to the degree that you may initiate it within just a few seconds, at any time or place in your waking world, just by holding a particular thought of feeling. You might describe this feeling-tone as a hunch or an intuition. In this case, it would be an intuition that you and the person being assessed have a history, either a past or future history, if you can imagine such a relationship.
EXPERIMENT –THE MOMENT POINT
HYPOTHESIS: Your current empowered moment reveals to you all that you need to know
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Then create this state as best you can. It is a containment Ritual that keeps your energies within your sphere and protects you from any negative influences from without.
Now simply relax. The one being assessed need not be in your immediate vicinity. You may make your assessments of anyone from wherever you happen to be. When you have perfected this technique, you will be able to carry the state with you in your waking reality, or simply create it instantly in the Field when you have need of this special assessment tool.
In a very general way, you are attempting to determine whether a particular human is a Soul Family member. There will be a basic yes or no answer to these inquiries. If you would like to take it further ask:
In our Blogs we affirm for you the necessity of comprehending the moment-to-moment experience we are creating for oneself in our Personal Reality. “Waking up in the moment” is another term we use for this pursuit. So we are in a continuing exploration of our world, as we examine the momentary experiences of our life.
The doorway to our other lives is the Moment Point. It is the commonality, the Home Base, we might say, of our Soul Self as it creates our numerous lives. We have stated before that “it is our Moment Point if we say it is.”
The student, the Scientist of Consciousness, in exploring the many lives, “take ownership” of the current moment, empowers it with the Divine energies of perception – the Inner Senses – and breaks through the veil between lives with these instruments.
We have called this a form of multitasking, in that, the explorer does not forsake the current body, the current consciousness manifestation in their experiments. BOTH the current existence AND the destination life – the target existence – are supported, nourished, vivified with the creative energies of consciousness in these explorations of the Moment Point. The Soul Self the creates all of our lives has limitless energies. It is inspired by the foundational powers of All That Is, and so can be always counted on for support.
Through these practices of magicians, shamans, witches and healers of all types, modern Scientists of Consciousness are now able to individually disconnect from the mass Common Trance of freedom that enslaves, to participate in this Uncommon Trance of freedom, of release from authority, of common good, of magic, you see.
In essence, here, we are creating our OWN suggestions, we are taking our OWN advice, we are responding to the communication stream of our magic ancestors, rather that the mass media, the toxic culture, that standard of conformity offered to us by our leaders.
Learning our Lessons often involves turning the negative into the positive: the negative emotions are transformed into the positive emotions. We may be experiencing negative emotions, but we are continually processing our experience to create a positive outcome. This we accomplish through a continual practicing of the virtues.
Will we become virtuous by so doing? That wholly depends upon our Lessons we have chosen to explore in this life. Let me just say, that, we are living in times of great potential. We do have the potential, therefore, to experience an enlightened existence in this timeframe. The energies, the vibrations, we might say, are quite supportive at this time.
The Shift is occurring NOW. Now is the time to address our Issues squarely and ultimately, to learn them once and for all.
As this occurs with millions of us, the vibratory level is increased for us as a collective. It becomes easier to transform within the group, being supported by the group in this way. This is why we are affirming in the new Blogs the activities of the lightworkers, the magicians, shamans, witches, and healers among us.
During The Shift it will be our group that holds the responsibility for personal transformation, so that the rest of humanity, the uninitiated, we might say, may be brought up with us. The Resonance Phenomenon, we may read about it elsewhere in this Blog material
We incarnate on our Earth to learn Lessons and these Lessons are learned in relationships. The Lesson itself is often the core relationship experience we may be having with a particular individual or group in any moment in time. There are also, usually, Past Life influences involved.
For example: we are confronted with a religious zealot. They are counseling us in a heated exchange on the street or in a market somewhere. They are suggesting the if we do not pay allegiance to their particular view of the Godhead that we are doomed. Our Souls will be consumed by demons. Do you get the picture?
Even with this extreme example of negativity, we may, with the proper perspective, absorb this communication stream and integrate it with our own belief structure. The information will assuredly undergo a transformation. The negative will be transposed into the positive. The good will then be saved within our comprehensive belief system.
Now the requisite objection may come to mind here, that it would not be a good thing to absorb the negative prejudices, and such, into our own system. Yet let us see how this works with the Master, the one who is getting quite good at this awakening enterprise.
Now we are here in our Blog era, discussing a concept of Soul Family. Do you see how the greater Soul Family includes the perceived Negative Other? We will have more to say on this in future blogs on humanity, however I shall briefly present my Findings on the matter now, in essence, our lives in the Third Dimension are about exploring The Other within relationships of various types.
Whenever we may truthfully encounter The Other with Loving Understanding and Courage, we are learning our Lessons consciously. If we find we cannot do this, in that, our Issues prevent us from doing so, we are not learning our Lessons. This pertains to all of the lives we are living, Dear Blog Reader.
It is really quite simple, yet admittedly, often seemingly impossible to accomplish long term. We would need to become a master at this. By mastering the techniques, we create an existence of habitually creating from a position of Loving Understanding and Courage.
There was a group-mind effect operative within our consciousness in the early days of humanity. This may be referred to as human instinct. We were all receiving communications from the greater group of humans on choices to make in order to preserve the integrity and continuity of the collective and thus the local consensus reality.
This instinct for the preservation and continuity of the whole was eventually challenged as other collectives of humans entered into our territory with different ideas, different images, different ways of doing things. These different mental communication streams were picked-up by the primal group, and the Idea Constructs that were found to be supportive and conducive to preservation of the group were integrated into the mental collective of the primal group. Those Idea Constructs that were deemed not supportive of the group were rejected.
Also, an “ethical marker” we placed on this stream of consciousness, identifying it as having the potential to harm the group. Thus the Negative Other was born. Remember here that all realities are born first within the mental environment of those concerned. We create our own reality. We create our consensus reality in cooperation with others. Period.
The Negative Other was created out of fear: fear of change, fear of a different type of human, fear of losing the cohesion and support of group life. From the moment of the creation of the Negative Other, we might say that humankind has been trying to get back to that basic unconditional human connection of one to the other, indeed, of one to all of humanity.
What served as an instinct in the primal collectives of humans, was simply an ongoing connection to the non-physical world, the Unknown Reality, as we call it, from which springs the known reality of the physical world. Of course, we may also call this Unknown Reality the Divine, our other term for this energy source.
We are writing today thinking about the 9/11 events. Many of us, particularly in the USA, are feeling somewhat on edge, as we wait to see if we will be once again “punished” by our adversaries. This is the ongoing mental environment for many of us.
We have been taught by our Negative Media, by our governments, by the authorities in our societies, to fear. We are obliged to fear the terrorists, those identified by our countries as enemies of us and our fellow citizens. Here I would like to take some time to explore this dynamic as it relates to Soul Family Issues.
This entire concept of The Negative Other is an ancient Gestalt of Consciousness that had been with us since the dawn of our human race. Originally, the idea of The Negative Other was one of careful attention to what mental energies we would entertain within our psyche.
The Charting is always done according to Lessons. It is not, therefore, so important to name the humans you are interacting with as a Soul Family as to note the Lessons being learned. This is why we are in your physical body, Dear Blog Reader. This is why we are here now. Yes, it is true that we may be involved in highly intricate, dramatic, and even entertaining reincarnational presentations. Thus it is good to note the memes of the participants. But the important thing here is to consider the Lessons we are learning within these relationships with The Other.
If privacy is an issue for you, create a Legend in code and keep your Lists anonymous. Hide your Legend if someone finds your list, they will not be able to understand it.
I will bring this Blog Series to a close with a very important experiment for the awakening student. This technique will give us the ability to assess, within the moments of our existence, the humans within our Personal Reality. We will be able to assess them for motives, ethical qualities, and other values.
In these Moment Point of assessment we become truly aware of what is around us. We may easily sense the “back story” to the current behaviors of even strangers after we have gained some experience in our assessment practice.
As we practice this technique, it becomes quite easy for us to identify the members of our Soul Family, generally and specifically. As we proceed it may be a good idea to organize the members into groups according to the separate spheres of activity in which they are known.
Thus we might speak of our “business Soul Family,” or our “spiritual practice Soul Family members.” We may even identify perceived “enemies” with whom we have Issues to be resolved from Past Lives, and so on. Out them all on the lists. later in future Blogs we will chart the Current Soul Family and the Interdimensional Soul Family.
Yet fortunately, for millions of us who are awakening currently, what we are calling the Uncommon Trance is becoming quite familiar, quite common to us. We speak of the Ancient Wisdom being remembered in our current timeframe, and part of this wisdom entails the intentional creation of uncommon states of consciousness.
Through various types of experimentation, the explorer of non-physical reality ritually creates the Uncommon Trance, so that it becomes as automatic as the Common Trance. It becomes a new form of perception.
Practicing in our waking reality the re-creation of the Uncommon Trance helps to make it habitual. Like the Ritual of Sanctuary creates a movable Sanctuary for you-the-students, within the portable Trance State we may assess the people we meet as far as Soul Family status goes.
If we have an intuition that the salesman at the hardware store, for example, is connected to us in some way, take a second to create our Trance State and assess this human with our Inner Senses. Trying the attainment of the Trance State to a gesture, or statement, or thought, to talisman is also quite practical.
Our Guides are accessed through Trance an intermediary state of consciousness that separate our Third Dimension from the non-physical world. Here we distinguish between two types of Trance: the common and the Un-Common.
Now the common Trance we are already experiencing when we go about our daily activities as a modern human. As we focus on “getting through the day,” we quite literally put our cognitive faculties on automatic. We go along without thinking too much about what we are doing.
Many of us take cues from our mass media about how to think and feel about the issues of our day. We do what the authorities – the media experts, the scientists, the leaders – “suggest” we do.
The energy Personality of Spirit Guide may assist me in my exploration into the Soul family. As we may already know, the road to awakening literally begins when we acknowledge that we have non-physical Guides that are watching over us and that may guide us.
It is an age-old story. Ritual contact with the non-physical beings is at the base of all our religious systems. Every spiritual tradition on our great Earth has the devotee first initiate contact with a spiritual being of some sort – god, goddess, God, animal spirits of various kinds, and so on.
Each culture has its variations on this procedure. This system I offer you as a metaphysical teacher of countless years. And so, yes, the first step here is to ask for assistance until you get it. We are thus not entirely on our own in this quest for spiritual understanding.
We may be already well aware of our Current Soul Family Gestalt in so far as they are also members of our genetic family, our adoptive family, our friends and our social networks. However, to fully explore the connections between us, and for example, the tens or hundreds of people we interact with on any given day, we are advised to consider researching our Personal Reality Field as a Scientist of Consciousness.
As a scientist we would delve into the thoughts, feelings, images evoked in the momentary assessment of the human we are evaluating or the experience we are exploring. We investigate with our Inner Senses within our own consciousness by simply Intending to do so.
How do you Intend? Briefly, we intensely desire to get to the bottom of this intuition we have about a possible Soul Family member, for example. Then we wait to see what arises. We may immediately receive more information on the subject via our Inner senses. Or later in the day it may occur to us, as in a dream or state of reverie, what the connections are. Then, as you are receiving information, we document it in some form – other than the memory, which can be quite volatile – for later study.
From these information streams we gather our data and glean our Findings. A Findings is simply something of value, in this case, something pertaining to Reincarnational Existences of the Soul Family that you didn’t know before the investigation.
This culling of knowledge from the Unknown Reality is how the Ancient Wisdom reveals itself within our system. These skills we are learning will help us become aware of our greater creaturehood on all levels.
Our current relationships are alway representative of our affiliations on other lives. We may follow these correlations to the nth degree. Thus, the delivery person at the door may well represent a human interacting with you in another of your lives, a Past Life, let us say. The telemarketer you have just spoken with on the phone may represent a human from another era with whom you are interacting.
Indeed, the entire workforce at your place of employment may well represent a collective of humans with whom you have associated in other livers. For the Soul Family, broadly defined, incarnates together to work in groups, and learn their Lessons together.
Our human activities occur in cooperation with the creation of ALL of the Reality Constructs within the existences of all of our Simultaneous Lives. Everything in our system is alive, including what we call “dead” or “inert” matter. Everything is composed of the Consciousness Units that are anything but dead. They are each holographic and telepathic, alive and vibrant entities, with a defined consciousness and an agenda for development.
Now do you see how this brings us back to my God concept – All That Is? everything is a reflection of everything else. All That Is reflects itself through every Consciousness Unit that composes every Reality Construct in All of our self-centered lifetimes throughout time. All of our relationships may be thought of as divine associations, therefore. I trust I am not pushing too hard.
Perhaps the computer analogy will help in this presentation. We have used this before… Imagine that this process of Soul Family member negotiation, acceptance, and denial occurs as though within the processors of the world’s fastest computer. Our subconscious mind, which is related to the Collective Consciousness of all humanity, is like this great computer, in that, without expending great amounts of energy, it instantaneously assesses each individual we meet in our existence and notes Soul Family connections throughout time.
We are unaware of this activity as we observe the person in front of you. We may be thinking to ourselves, “I am drawn to this person,” or, “I would like to feel this person out, to see if there is something to be discovered here.”
Now obviously, this great computer of consciousness may not reveal to us ALL of data it is processing about human individuals we meet. Our mental environment would become quite disoriented and flooded with information if this were the case.
And so we place amnesia upon the majority of this information and allow in only what is necessary to allow us to make our decisions and learn our Lessons.
We have free will within the Third Dimension to make our choices from an infinite array of probable choices. However, we are on Earth to learn Lessons within our collectives-humanity, Soul Family, genetic family, and so on.
Thus, our choices will reflect the information we receive telepathically from other humans. We are constantly keeping appointments and having reunions with Soul Family members that we have associated with, loved, and hated throughout time. We use our free will to accept, reject, or perhaps re-negotiate Soul Family agreements established in other lifetimes.
We come together in all of our lives to learn our Lessons together, as a group, we see. This is how it works… in the dreamstate we agree to enact behaviors of educational value for our own benefit and for the benefit of other Soul Family members. When we awaken after sleep, we generally fulfill these agreements in a largely subconscious fashion. Our lives may thus be described as dramatizations of life Lessons in the Third Dimension. The Lessons are learned within Soul Family relationships as the higher Consciousness of each of those involved, “speak to,” and energizes the participants.
Yet we may well ask, “But how can this be so, David? How could I have been kept from this information all of my life?” First let me say that this is something that we already know, for we are in telepathic contact with everything in our Personal Reality. Telepathy works constantly in our world on a subliminal level. On this subtle level of understanding, just below our conscious awareness, we know everything.
However, to get along in your world, you must keep yourself in an amnesia that allows you to forget your multidimensional reality and focus on the mundane world in which you live. This occurs even as you are continually receiving profound amounts of information on your life condition and on the lives of your co-inhabitants subconsciously. Your focus on “current events,” rather than your greater godlike reality, allows your consciousness to guide you through your existence without distractions
Now we live many lives and those with whom we are experiencing our current life also live their many lives. And just as those humans with whom we interact in our current existence-our genetic family, our adoptive family, our extended family, our colleagues, our acquaintances – are learning their individual Lessons with us now, so too are each of us in what we are calling the Soul Family, learning our Lessons together in other lives.
In all of our lives, in whatever era we are experiencing our lives – Renaissance Europe, for example, or perhaps within a tribal unit in our prehistoric past – we are also interacting with Soul Family members, the same group of people with whom we always interact, for they live their lives just as we do: in different bodies, in different times, in different circumstances.
To begin with my Blog friends…. you create your own reality. This has been my primary refrain to humanity in my messages over several decades, and I fervently hope that my blog readers remember. In this moment and in every moment of our life, we form the world that we know, even as everything else within our reality cooperates with us in this creation process.
Our world is made from Consciousness Units: awarized elements of energy that seek out the fulfillment of infinite values in the manifestation of Reality Constructs of infinite variety. This etheric substance – the stream of manifestation – literally travels outward from our body to create the world that we experience. It is fantastic. It is unbelievable. It IS the way we create our reality. Dear Blog Reader. For in this endeavor of Reality Creation, everything that can happen does happen, all in the spacious moment of creation – the eternal moment of NOW.
Included in this construction project of the Soul is the creation of our own physical body within a context of multi-dimensional existence. We do indeed live countless lives; some are lived in our future. We have referred to these as the Simultaneous Lives and also the Reincarnational Existences. These lives are our lives throughout time.
The concept of spontaneity can further our discussion of creating the Personal Reality Field. To be spontaneous, according to one of our Earthly definitions, is to act without forethought, willy-nilly, according to the present moment’s frivolous inclinations. Now I may be casting this term in a negative light somewhat, yet is it not true that spontaneous is thought to be somewhat reckless and unthinking, is it not? The spontaneous are thought to be irresponsible, in many ways, and lacking in maturity and good judgment.
I am a big fan of spontaneity, and the accompanying practice of recognizing and “following” life-affirming impulses. But for now, let us investigate how the practice of spontaneity may have earned such a bad reputation in our culture.
To begin, the founders of our American nation were of a strong puritanical bent. They were hard working, intensely religious humans, who were taught that “idle hands are the devil’s playground.” So the natural spontaneous behavior of humans enjoying the moment, even of children in many cases, during those seminal years of occupation in our country was discouraged.
Now this is speaking of the U.S. only here. Other nations had obviously different beginnings, yet some were similar. So we, as a people, were not generated from hedonistic loins, in other words. Our culture has proceeded from day one until the present on a decidedly anti-pleasures trajectory, admittedly with a few pleasure-seeking counter-culture movements in between.
So given this history it is no surprise that, for the most part, Americans are not a spontaneous lot. This type of behavior is not rewarded in a society that values business interests and profit-taking over positive human development. Currently, as a culture, the U.S. has entered an era of warlike anti-pleasure such as our modern Earth has never seen. Surprisingly, many of our citizens appear to accept this state of belligerence and negativity, if one is to believe the many polls that are taken and the results proclaimed to the world.
For now, let me simply suggest an alternative to the anti-pleasure movement in our country. This would be the search for pleasure within our Personal Reality and the creation of pleasure through the acknowledgment of and acting on pleasurable, life-affirming impulses. These are behaviors that may lead us to experience the feeling of being supported like a beloved child on a wave of ecstasy that is indeed the embodiment of All That Is.
Now let us clear up some of the misconceptions some may have of spontaneity with a description of “true spontaneity.” we need look no further for a graphic example of true spontaneity than the experience of accessing one’s Inner Senses and learning one’s lessons. The first requirement for this communication is a lowering of the ego defenses: that quality of mind that protects and defends one’s beliefs and one’s worldview against “attack” from differing and differing world views.
The ego must release its stranglehold on the physical perceptions before divine information – spontaneous impulses – can be adequately perceived with the Inner senses, and then acted upon if appropriate. So true spontaneity is ultimately profoundly responsible and ethical at its base. True spontaneity is not necessarily the actions of the “free spirit,” however, in our terms.
This aspect relates to the terms “Young Soul” and “Old Soul” that we discussed in previous blogs. Let us go further here. The idea of a free spirit, in our culture and other of the world’s cultures, who acts on every whim that comes to mind, is not the spontaneous spirit I am describing. True spontaneity requires discernment as to which impulses within consciousness to act on to further the learning of lessons for oneself and for the higher good of everyone else. This is critical.
The awakening human learns their lessons consciously and with courage, relishing the life experience whatever the “conditions,” positive, negative or in between, in our terms. Then, as I said, contributing to the consensus manifestation in positive, life-affirming ways, always.
Now further… we are awakening, some of us, within lives that some would call “miserable.” Some of us will use our formidable powers in collaboration with All That Is to heighten our vibrational rate in this lifetime and bring an end to our miseries. Yet some of us will live out our lives in these subjectively named “miserable conditions,” knowing that we are fulfilling our contract with oneself, and learning our lessons for our Soul Self and for All That Is.
Both of the examples I have just described are becoming fully awakened and finding pleasure there, yet only they know this on a Soul Level. Again, to outside observers it would appear that some are trapped in their misery. If one were to look closer though, perhaps one would see the spark of SoulWisdom in the eyes of those I am speaking about. We are all involved in a complex dramatic presentation for the benefit of oneself and All That Is.
HYPOTHESIS: You can heal yourself and others via the Etheric grid-works.
The Etheric grid-work the sustain the realities of our Universe. These energetic lattice-work of creation and support are currently unknown to the majority of humans on Earth. Yet again, the natives or aboriginals have used these networks since the beginning of your time to interplay with the natural world around them. So certainly this experiment is simply a means to reintroduce you to practice that you may have have engaged in countless times, in other eras, in other bodies.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Utilize your calming practices to access a deep state of relaxation. With your Energy Personality as your guide, ask for guidance as to causes and solutions in these matters of personal health and the health of others. Suggestions may come to you as images, sounds or other sensations. Keeping with the metaphor of a grid-work, you might receive an image of a lattice superimposed over your own body or the body of the subject you are assisting.
The area of interest may glow or otherwise make itself known to you. Using whatever means that comes naturally to you, facilitate the transformation of the area of interest into one integration and support with the rest of the body. This is a personal choice of methods and means that may come into your awareness through your Inner Senses.
Later in this series I will speak of the possibility of the blog reader increasing their vibrational rate and so intentionally moving themselves out of a “disease” state and into a state of health. This is done in collaboration with your Energy Personality. You may experience your current state of illness within the dream reality and so learn your lesson there instead of in Third-Dimensional reality within your current Timeframe.
If you are currently at a stage of Soul Evolution that would enable you to experiment with these probabilities, Please do so in a systematic way, with guidance from your Energy Personality and with attention to the requirements of experimentation as a Scientist of Consciousness.
FINDINGS – Document your findings, perhaps with drawings and ideas for future experiments.
It is a matter of the power differential with respect to our relationship with our world. Depression is largely a matter of powerlessness accepted as a reality – a field of reality – by the individual. As a field, it colors the entire existence and all DOES INDEED seem hopeless.
I advise to unlock our conditioning and take back our power from people and institutions, so too I advise the so-called “depressed” person to rise up and make the gesture of transcendence into the Realm of Power. All it takes in one charged Moment Point of personal responsibility for our evolution, to push the balance out of stasis into change: positive change for the individual.
Then we simply place further Moment Points of personal responsibility for our growth and positive assessments and behaviors, “one in front of the other,” to create the positive future.
Now, should the negative energies make a come back, it does require the individual to reaffirm a commitment to a positive future, in that moment, and once again push the manifestation chain of creative moments out of stasis and into the positive. The Negative Reality is rejected and the Positive Field of reality is accepted once again.
As an addendum, remember too, that in these moments we are affecting all of our Simultaneous Lives. So certainly we are doing our selves much good via these positive assessments.
And perhaps I should mention the obvious – that just as the Accepted Negative Field of Reality experienced by the “depressed” person has momentum and continuity in a morbid, yet familiar sense, so to does the Accepted Field of Positive Emotions and Behaviors hold its own momentum, continuity, and familiarity in a positive, even joyful sense.
HYPOTHESIS: Through intention improvements can be made in your health, havingness and learning.
We have covered the means to these improvements in the previous blogs. Generally, it is a good idea to have a richly visualized image of what you would like to create with regards to health, wealth and wisdom.
As in the previous suggestions in these matters, the image should virtually resonate with the desired thoughts and emotions that you would experience on having created and perceived the manifested Reality Constructs. It may help to create a piece of art that helps to focus the creative energies.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
With your art piece or your written manifesto or other focusing objects at hand, enter into a relaxed state of consciousness. Here you are asking for the natural energies of the world to assist you in creating your improvements. In a sense, you are using these energies of transformation to imbue the focusing objects with generative power on the small level to create the desired outcomes on the larger level. You are providing the emotional charge through your visualization to drive into creation the Reality Constructs you have in mind.
You will know when the changes have been made, as you may feel an inner Sense awareness that you have succeeded.
HYPOTHESIS: The energy personality can read and interpret your dream symbols
As in previous Dialogue, write down what you remember of a dream upon awakening from sleep.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
When you are next in contact with your Energy Personality through meditation or other rituals of contact, ask for an interpretation of the dream with regards to your particular symbols. Within a context of learning your lessons and understanding your own dreams, your Energy Personality can help with interpretation. Typically, your Energy Personality will not resort to revelations that may interfere with the learning of lessons.
FINDINGS – Document your findings in whatever form you best-suited to this endeavor
HYPOTHESIS: You may effectively slow down time for study or for other practical purposes.
Using your Inner Senses as exploratory tools, you may conduct your experiments free from what you might refer to as “the constraints of time.” You know that the past and future are created now, in this Moment Point. You may use you conscious intent to imbue your Moment Points with an “elasticity” that can afford you greater leeway in your studies.
For example: you may through your intention create a “slowing down” of time within your Personal Reality Field. Now you have undoubtedly already experienced this slowing down of time while engaged in an activity that you know well, an activity in which you are completely absorbed. Time slows down in such circumstances.
So let us suppose you wished to cover a broad range of activities in a meditation session, for example, and you have only a few minutes to do so. Before your meditation, simply give your Energy Personality your intention to expand time for the moment, or slow it down, to enable you to complete your activities. This is especially effective for those who are on self-healing regimens. You can intend to deliver several hours of self-healing suggestions to your self in the space of just a few minutes. Your Higher Self or Energy Personality will then carry it out. You have used your free will to choose this activity.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Induce a relaxed state in your physical body by whatever means suits you. When you are relaxed, consider the Inner Senses counterparts to your physical senses of sight, touch, smell, hearing and taste. As you do, you may notice that these Inner Senses make themselves known to you in a somewhat “dreamy” fashion.
What I am saying is that these senses have a quality of duration and intensity unlike the physical senses of the outer world. Your perception of Inner Healing, for example, may be perceived as though each sound resonated within your consciousness. This might be somewhat similar to the sounds you hear as you are falling asleep. The sounds seem to be extended, as though time were slowing down.
For purposes of this experiment, this is exactly the perceptive state I am asking you to create. Simply utilize your imagination to “turn on” the Inner Senses with an eye towards the slowing down of time within and without. The seeing on the inward eye is slowing down. The sounds are slowing down. Perhaps even your sense of how your skin feels in contact with the air around you and the surface or your chair or pillow begins to deepen and lengthen.
Now when you have slowed down time within your Personal Reality Field in this fashion, present to your awareness your healing suggestions, you questions of what have you, with the intention that resolution will be found, thanks to the slowing down of time you have created. This alteration of your perceptive field may also give you insights into the uses and powers of your Inner Senses.
Now wisdom comes from lessons learned in all of the domains of human interaction. I have mentioned the physical, the mental and the spiritual domains, to establish lines of discussion for us as we attempt to make ourselves understood. Naturally, these realms of understanding must surely overlap in some instances in the lives of individuals. We will likely discover where these domains merge as we conduct our experiments in the field.
To be healthy, in terms of these domains of learning, would imply that certain standards of creative manifestation would be consistently met within the overall context of the particular body we are using in the current incarnation.
The powers of creative thought with which we create the body and the world around the body have great leeway in creating health and disease according to lessons to be learned. For example: we may be currently incarnated in a body of physical health, relative to others who have no defects. Here we enter into the area of Value Fulfillment that I have described in previous Blogs.
It is not easy to assess any particular individual’s incarnational learning experiences using flimsy surface indicators. For example: a human with a major facial or other disfigurement might elicit a responding emotion of pity from another. Yet the Soul Self of this human may wear the disfigurement as “a badge of honor.” For Souls may CHOOSE these types of lives to learn their lessons quickly, due to the high-emotionality involved in living a life with honor and acceptance within a disabled physical form is explored in earnest. Soul Wisdom is earned through such a life lived.
Now the opposite, of course, is also true. Lessons regarding living a “charmed life” are in store for all who inhabit the Third-Dimension. All That Is seeks to know through the experience of Souls, both the exalted and the mundane. No experience is better or worse than another. Again I refer to my previous discussions on Value Fulfillment for more light on this matter.
This current life on Prosperity, abundance, havingness.
CREATING PROSPERITY
Now we shall turn to matters of prosperity. Let us proceed from the beginning. The first step is an assessment, a self-assessment if you will. You first must assess what level of abundance you wish to achieve. You then assess the current level of havingness and examine the difference between the two. This difference between what you have and what you wish to have, can serve as the emotional impetus or motivation to create or manifest the desired result. There is no manifestation without emotional content. The greater the emotional intensity or desire, the more quickly and surely the manifestation occurs.
We create our reality. We are magicians in this respect and it would be good to be more intentional in this magical view of things: creating consciously, with a positive perspective for the good of not only ourselves, but for all others, all of humankind. This deference to the sum of all humanity holds the key to effective conscious manifestation for you, Dear Blog Reader. In effect, we are demonstrating your commitment to the good of all with these intentions. The Divine Logos that is All That Is holds us to this commitment to all, as a condition of progressing on our development path, our path of Soul Evolution. Now if this indeed sounds fantastic and perhaps unworthy of consideration, let that egoist response serve as the measure of our distance from Soul. Now we know how far you have to go in this enterprise.
Our personal manifestation of our current level of prosperity or abundance is an important indicator of what our beliefs are with regards to havingness. This is the feedback I have been describing to you in this blog: the reflection of your mental environment that IS your Personal Reality Field. Often you may notice that there is a direct relationship between giving and prosperity; for in the natural perspective – the magical view of things – there IS a give-and-take at the foundation of your manifestation activities. We can see this in the breath of life in the “pulse” of our natural reality. Just as breath is cyclical, with the inhalation and then the exhalation followed by a pause, the pulse of life or manifestation is cyclical with a pre-manifestation period followed by a pause and the manifestation. The completion of one cycle may take less than a microsecond in our perceived time. This is still long enough to give the “appearance” of physicality or “bedrock reality,” as some call it.
As we begin to get a feel for this pulsation of ideas into constructs, powered by the Consciousness Units with electromagnetic properties, we will also begin to gain conscious control of our creativity in the moment. This manifestation cycle is the framework upon which our camouflage reality is built. This pulse can be experienced under specific circumstances.
You may, as I describe in an experiment, using your inherent powers of creativity, slow down the progression of time within your Personal Reality Field. You do this with your intention, using your Inner Senses. Time is felt as elastic with the use of these Inner Senses, and slowing time down to the microsecond level may reveal this breath of life we have been discussing. You may also observe how your thoughts create and support the various aspects of your Personal Reality Field.
Now to simplify for the Blog Reader, let us discuss a distillation of some of the natural elements of manifestation related to goodness and giving. There is much good to be had in the giving of money, personal items, your time or money creates a state of consciousness that is not conducive to prosperity. This may already be quite apparent. You may be miserly and have the “appearance” of prosperity, yet you may not enjoy it for you have not shared it with others. And by creating your “mental estate” on a foundation of stinginess and greed, are you really expecting to create lasting abundance? Better to create a foundation of sharing and love for yourself and others, intentionally.
You look The positive creates upon the positive for the good of all here. The Reality Constructs tale hold and are tempered in a telepathic mental environment of trust and love. Others with similar loving strategies of manifestation will be drawn to you in support of this beneficial world-view. This is the beginning of the loving, self-sustaining communities that will reshape our world.
To continue on this line of thought – that of exploring the possibility of healing all wounds, physical, spiritual and mental – let me elaborate on a concept we may refer to as Natural Healing. By this type of healing, I mean allowing the body to heal itself with the aid of “soft” technologies. These soft technologies do not include surgery or drugs but do include some age-old therapies and some natural products of the Earth: hypnosis or “healing talk,” and the application of various plants, minerals, waters, oils etc.
This system I am describing is of ancient origins. It is the basis of All of our modern medicine. The simplest way to describe this is to say that the human body is a natural organism – it is a creation from the natural elements of our Earth by our divinely-inspired consciousness. And from the beginning of our time on Earth, healing talk has been used by our healers to effect healing changes within human beings. So does it not make sense that we may repair or renew the organism in a natural way, with natural methods and products?
But where to begin? Do we have to seek out systems of correspondence, looking for the leaf or oil that will bring relief of a corresponding ailments? Not necessarily. When we approach this activity from a magical perspective, any natural remedy will do. We make make our own association between the remedy and the condition, in effect personalizing this divine activity. We do it with thoughts, again, and we imbue the activity of healing with emotion – strong emotion – which is the electromagnetic healing force in this endeavor.
Now this naturally requires a profound trust in your own abilities to choose and to empower the remedy with curative powers. But this is entirely within the potential of all human beings to accomplish. It may be conceived of as a form of self-hypnosis while perhaps reminding oneself that we are a Soul with a Body rather than a Body with a Soul. Within the etheric domain of the Soul, all is possible, including the healing of all ailments.
Creating health… I will be extremely brief, though some may doubt that I can BE brief. Our health is the most evident aspect of our Personal Reality creation, for we create the rest of what we have been referring to as our Personal Reality Field. Now we ARE experiencing our physical body created through the template we choose before our birth. This template provided us with a body that holds “build in lessons for us to experience.
The lessons of the physical body are myriad and continue until our physical death. Yet on a basic level, relative to all other humans, if we are experiencing a happy, healthy mental environment, we may be in all probability co-creating with All That Is, a happy, healthy body. If we are entertaining negative thoughts of disease and low self-worth, we may be in all likelihood creating a body that will experience that level of disease. This happens unconsciously for the most part, this creation of healthy or non-healthy bodily conditions.
Sometimes though we can catch oneself responding to our own apparatus. For example: if we respond to a statement such as, “I’m catching a cold,” by saying to this person, “Yes, I’m catching a cold too,” you are creating the bodily conditions to receive the cold. This is material we have covered elsewhere and so I shall not digress.
Now there are those of us who are experiencing our current lives with challenges, such as a lack of arms, legs, various organs and so on. There are also some physical diseases that may seem to be ‘BeyondHealing.” Within our Third-Dimensional world, it is indeed thought to be impossible to grow a new limb or new organ, or to recover from a “terminal” illness. However, we are headed for a realization that All of the maladies and illnesses of humankind may be corrected through proper use of the imagination and the sacred powers of manifestation with All That Is.
In the Fourth Dimensional our thoughts will be instantly manifested into Reality Constructs without the lag-time in between that we currently experience in Third Dimensional Reality. Should we have self-created “incurable” illnesses and physical challenges, we may learn lessons through resolving these Soul issues with our powerful thoughts of healing. These are simply some of the more profound experiences that await us in the post-transition Fourth-Dimensional Reality.
It is a blessing one wishes for one’s self and others: healthy, wealthy, wise. These three elements of life are the focus of many in our world. Perhaps we can use this blessing as an example of how we can, with consistent intention and application, co-create with All That Is, our greatest potential for health, prosperity, and wisdom.
Now, we are all individual humans on our great Earth, each with our separate, idiosyncratic propensities for growth – evolution – on all levels of manifestation in the physical and other dimensional realms. Therefore, it should seem obvious that one human’s health, wealth and wisdom might certainly not be another’s. Having said that, let us examine the powerful, evocative ideas and beliefs suggested in the three words.
Health is a topic we could easily spend an entire blog series on discussing. There is physical health, there is mental health and there is spiritual health. There are lessons to be learned in all three realms for all of us as we make our journeys into physical reality. What might appear confusing to our eyes as we judge another, may be simply the other’s decision to learn their lessons in their unique fashion. And find the truth regarding The Transition from the physical into the etheric.
Key word here is conscious. Me and my fellow humans co-create our lives “unconsciously” for the most part. This is the result of the amnesia I spoke of in earlier Blogs, so that we forget the love and are more inclined to learn our lessons. Now the amnesia is being lifted, and we are becoming aware of the true nature of our reality. So it is a matter of habit.
Make our use of Conscious Units conscious on a moment-to-moment point basis. This is easily done, is it not? Whenever we find our selves varying from thought-path, nudge oneself back. We have done this a few times this morning already. Negativity will try to draw you toward its own path. That is what it does in our reality. Our task at hand is to redirect negativity’s energy into creating love and confidence in the moment.
The Conscious Units that comprise the environment are fluid in the moment. They can go either way, positive or negative, depending on our subconscious or conscious intent. Keep the scales on the positive side consciously and watch your positive manifestations of house and land – prosperity – be creative in these moments.
Men and women as magician. The Magical way is simply an appreciation for conscious manifestation in the natural world. We are a part of the natural world. AS I have said many times before, we are co-creators with All That Is of all that we observe in our reality.
Now, this is a magical process in that we create seemingly something out of nothing. Referring back to my concept of Consciousness Units, we use the “material” of CUs with our free will and intent to create our shared consensus reality.
Telepathy is operative on all levels and so we have a cohesive illusion; a manifestation of our world and our Universe that all of us can agree upon. It does look quite real, does it not? Yet if you believe what I have been telling over these many years, this “enduring” physical reality of ours is really just “a bunch of hot air.” It falls apart under the kind of scrutiny I am asking you to muster as a Scientist Consciousness.
The truth about the HumanSoul is that there is no Karma, there are only experiences. One experiences one’s lessons in materialized form that one comes to Earth to experience. These experiences run the gamut of what we consider as “positive” or “negative” and we keep returning to these experiences in human form until we have masters our lessons.
Karma entails, in general Western, popular definition, some sort of “dues paying” left over from supposed “past lives” that one endures in the current life. But since all lives are simultaneous, these sorts of definitions lose meaning. If we attribute a brick falling on your foot in this life to your karma from a past life, you are greatly over-simplifying an essentially scared, or should I say soulful or spiritual experience.
The EasternReligions are closer to the truth of the evolution of the Soul than the Christian Religions. However, no religion has yet explained it in terms useful enough for humans to comprehend in its totality, and by so doing receive the divine information that would unlock the heart. No, we have been blocked in our spiritual evolution by our egos. It is now time to relax your ego and let our Souls shine through
Astral Travel, time travel, projections of consciousness – these are various terms describing essentially a single activity: the use of human consciousness in a focused way. If you look at the various descriptions of the activities of let us say, a magician, a shaman or a witch, you would find distinctions made between the various activities. Yet if you were to compare these activities across the board, you would see that all three are attempting to accomplish similar goals, for similar reasons, in similar ways. Ultimately, all are making use of the human consciousness to create changes – changes in personal and shared Reality Fields.
Dear Blog Reader, when you conduct your experiments, you will find you have the most control in your own Personal Reality Field. You will be investigating within your radius of manifestation. Yet over time, as you become proficient in the use of intention in the creation of Reality Constructs, it becomes easy to expand your potential field of manifestation to include related or contiguous fields.
Now, because all is one and everything is related, you can have effects on anything in your consensus reality. All you need is the focus and power in the moment. This is the vehicle for healing others at a distance, for example. It takes some time and experience to get acquainted with these networks of creation, or “grid works” as I have described them in earlier blogs. However, any one of us can master the workings of these fields and grids. Turn to the experiments in my Blogs.
The Scientist of Consciousness is the magician of old. The magician, the shaman, the witch: these forbearers of humanity’s spiritual traditions were our world’s first scientists. It was only later, when the outer senses replaced the Inner Sense as a means of investigation and exploration – the accumulation of “facts” for their own sake, the acquiring of knowledge without meaning – that the scientist’s role became de-spiritualized, secularized and developed
The work at hand is to spiritualize and make scared the experiences of humans on Earth at this time, though collaborations with Beings of Light. Now I do not mean to offend when I exclude organized religions from this discussion. If we are getting what we need from our religion, by all means continue. That is my advice to you.
However, if you feel that your evolution as a Soul is stagnant and you are not getting what you need from your religion to see you through the coming transformation, then I would advise to try the methods in my blog. Keep affiliation and use these ideas as an adjunct to our practice.
There is much good in the mainstream religions and there are opportunities in all of them to achieve the enlightened state necessary to make the transition into the Fourth Dimension. Unfortunately, these opportunities are often hidden under the great weight of dogma and misconception that clouds meaning and disempowers the individual.
This is why I counsel my blog reader, to accept nothing into your heart that goes against your very nature as a child born in love out of the creative power of All That Is. Make up your own mind. Think for your own self. Accept no ideas, including the ideas in this blog, if your intuitive voice tells you they are not right for You-the-Soul.
The Topic for discussion is the magical perspective. If readers of my previous blogs had indeed taken the tides to heart and created for themselves the Loving Reality Constructs based on the virtues of humankind. My previous Blogs about The Magical Approach, presented some very powerful means for altering the Blog Reader’s Personal Reality in beneficial ways.
Potential will remain just that if it is not acted upon. A probability of altered realities for the better will remain a probability if not acted upon. Again this should be obvious to all of us, but it is the acting upon the impulse, it is the acting upon the potentiality, it is the taking of advice lovingly given by Beings of Light that begins the process of actualizing these impulses, these potentialities and this advice. And so I must convey to you Blog Reader the importance of actually conducting the experiments and absorbing the material, working it into our lives on a daily basis.
The magical perspective is simply a special way of looking at our world. This perspective empowers the Blog Reader with the forces of manifestation that we have denied for so many generations on our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our world. Now there were ages in what we would call our “past” that the magical perspective was appreciated by the majority of the people.
Our “myths” – though I do not like the word myths, for it denotes that these events did not transpire, for indeed they did transpire for the most part – depict those eras in human evolution when humankind took the responsibility of personal manifestation quite seriously. Currently, in what we term “the aboriginal systems,” the magical perspective is appreciated and practiced. However, it is usually only utilized by a select caste of revered leaders who are endowed by the members of the collective with the Magical powers.
HYPOTHESIS: Your Energy Personality can monitor your conscious state and give you valuable feedback.
You are gods studying your manifestations. I make this statement once again, reminding you of your status as creators of worlds. AS humans, we are endowed with the virtually unlimited powers of creation to manifest our desires into physical constructs. This happens naturally, all by itself. It may be somewhat difficult to study this manifestation phenomenon, for you yourself are part of your creation.
Therefore, in this experiment, you may attempt to inhabit an alternate perspective in order to study this creation activity you do in tandem with All That Is. It is somewhat like taking snapshots of moments in linear time – the perceptual illusion – for consideration at a “later” date. Let us label this aspect of the Energy Personality the “Self Observer.” This aspect of consciousness has the power to “recall” elapsed Moment Points for purposes of inquiry into the nature of events in physical reality. This observing self has the attributes that you endow it with by virtue of your god-like powers of creativity.
The purpose of this experiment is have your Energy Personality witness and “document” for you, notable excursions into the unknown reality while you are awake. Your Energy Personality will recall instances of Astral Travel, communications with Simultaneous Lives, and other phenomena for review at a later date. This is your Self Observer aspect that you may use to remind you of what you have experienced throughout any given day.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now create your relaxed mental and physical environment. Then simply assign the task of self-observation to your Energy Personality, much as you would assign a task to a personal assistant. For example: you might say, “Please document as memories today, my voyages into other dimensions, for review this evening.”
Then mark out time in the evening for review. At that time, ask your Energy Personality to release those memories into you consciousness sequentially for your review. Now obviously you may have your review at other parts of the day or immediately after the notable event. This protocol is simply one of convenience for those of you who have busy daytime working lives.
As you continue with your regimen of self-observation, you may notice that inter-dimensional travel is the rule rather than the exception. You are subject to frequent “mental vacations” of this type throughout your waking and especially your sleeping times. In fact, the great majority of your day-to-day life is spent within these alternate dimensions.
FINDINGS – Documents your findings with successfully eliciting information from your Energy Personality on events which have transpired.
In our esoteric literature there is much talk of the Perfected Human and the best means to achieve that state of development. Here in this current blog work, we are exploring similar territory with regards to the transformation of the “baser” human aspects – anger, fear, hatred – into their divine counterparts – love, understanding and courage. In many ways, my teaching has been a continuation of these esoteric studies and philosophies initiated by humans in our perceived past.
I must add, that these humans were in close touch with their Energy Personalities and other Guides, as they created these great works of “inspired” literature. It seems obvious to me given what I have described for you , but the whole of inspired literature is infused with the divine information imparted to human authors by Light Bodies.
Inspired ideas are , for the most part, just that – inspiration or spirit ideation or communication. Quite literally, our Guides, acknowledged as such or not, are responsible for most of the “spirited,” life-affirming ideas we have ever entertained or acted upon. Now this may seem to refute my other statements that the impulses conveyed by our Simultaneous Lives are what make up the great percentage of what we would call “the activity of the conscious mind. ” This remains true.
Beings of Light within this milieu of a collective consciousness, seed us mentally with inspired and beneficial ideas, images and feelings. There is no contradiction when we consider the vastness of human consciousness: the webwork of Simultaneous Lives contributing thought forms, our own individual Personal Reality consciousness and the lattice of Light Body communication that supports and nourishes it all upon a foundation of limitless creative energy that is All That Is.
Now such profound pronouncements may have the potential of leaving us feeling somewhat diminished. I would remind you then, that YOU are creating this Personal Reality Field of yours, in tandem with All that Is. You are the magician. You are the creative ally with the Divine who creates your part of the world, and as a member of the collective of humans, the world consensus reality.
And this brings up another salient point… many of us have NOT been listening to the voices of the Divine. Many of us have turned a deaf ear to the suggestions of Beings of Light. That is why we find ourselves in such a dire circumstances. So there is a balance. The perfected human is one who balances the input of divine information with their own Reality Creation agendas, within the greater dramas of learning one’s
We can access the constellation of Guides we have watching over us. It is possible for any one human, with determination and insight, to cultivate communications with many Beings of Light. The only limitations to these explorations are the ones we put on them.
Documenting our explorations in the finest detail seems to be imperative for these voyages within: asking for the names of the various entities, feeling them out for what services they offer, keeping everything organized in the physical arena, and so on. Now let us proceed with some experimentation.
The signs of inner-gration are common to all who undertake these explorations in human consciousness. For that reason, I will now spend more blog time documenting these effects. Now you can go deeper. Just close your eyes and intend to deepen this connection.
There is a marked heaviness one feels throughout the body, but especially the head and chest, when one is in contact with the Energy Personality. A “pressing in” on the body from without. It is as if the air pressure of the atmosphere is increased somewhat and one is invited to slow down one’s physical and mental activities and focus within.
Of course, different personalities may experience different sensations. These are simply the broader physical effects experienced by most people. The emotional element is striking, I think, in that one feels one’s self supported on a pleasant wave of good feelings. This is the ecstasy that comes with contact.
Now, knowing what to expect, you can set yourself up for the experience itself. By this I mean, you can cultivate this sense of riding a wave of ecstatic emotion just below the surface of consciousness; and this sense of being comfortably pressed in by the environment that surrounds you; and a sense that you are supported like a beloved child.
One embodies these emotions and sensing as a means to prepare the mental and physical environments for contact with the Higher Self, the Energy Personality. Having achieved these conditions, it would be a simple matter to ask for the name of your Guide, perhaps asking for the one “closet” to you to come forward and make contact, for one has many Guides. One must be selective at first.
So you have prepared the emotional and physical space for contacting and communicating with your Energy Personality. Next you can increase the odds of making contact by “Invoking” an attitude or a sense of “hopeful, faithful expectation.” Here you are anticipating in a positive, loving way, the contact – the encounter.
Now as I said, over time you will make contact and succeed in connecting with your Energy Personality whenever you wish. Some will succeed sooner and some later in these experiments. It is important to keep a positive expectation during these attempts and to keep negativity at bay.
“Picking up the thread” describe the activity of connecting in a relaxed way to my communication stream. It is a subtle endeavor to trust. It is as subtle as picking up a thread from a tapestry of a greater work, to coin a phrase for the blog reader. The activity of asking for the name of the Energy Personality and having received the name, continuing to seek a mental dialogue with the Energy Personality, is a delicate endeavor.
The usual approach is one of hopeful, trusting questioning, done on a regular basis, that leads to two-way telepathic conversations. The questioner asks for the name and receives the name. The questioner asks questions and the answers begin to flow the source, The Higher Self of the questioner. It is a simple task that we must do diligently and with the roper positive attitude to get results over time.
These matters of personal contest and communication develop in individual ways, according to peculiarities of personality, the mental environment and the energy within the subject’s Reality Field.
“That space between worlds”. But just take it as an interesting game. “Don’t stress,” to coin a phrase. In fact, trying too hard can subvert the process. Diligence with ease is the way to go.
As I have said earlier, human consciousness visits other times periods and participates in activities in other dimensions, even as we may be participating in our daily unremarkable activities. We are experts at vacating our human bodies and venturing forth into the unknown realities.
Our New Age metaphysical literature is quite filled with stories of angels, demons, extra-terrestrials and the like. So too do our motion picture business prosper through the creation of science fiction and fantasy movies. Yet does it surprise us that these stories are “literally” true?
Remember, Dear Blog Reader, that it is our human consciousness that creates our reality in tandem with All That Is. And so the creativity of our artists, as well as our own, feeds and supports alternate dimensions. When we are experiencing these tales, either through reading or watching movies or plays, we are submerged in the alternate dimensions for that time. So this is the simplest example of inter-dimensional travel – experiencing entertainment media.
With regards to the subject of contacting other Entities in the Fourth Dimension, I must caution to certainly create the Ritual of Sanctuary and have this ritual memorized. As an explorer of these realms, we undoubtedly will encounter negative energy forms that may come into our consciousness and attempt to fix on our light.
By this I mean these Negative Entities can transmit a propensity for negative, repetitive thoughts or images entering our consciousness that can be difficult to undo. We recognize these circular ideas of information loops as disturbing pangs of dread, and other negative emotions. They seem to come from nowhere. Actually these negative energies are attracted to specific memories and ideas we are holding in our mental environment that are of a negative nature: Ideas and feelings of low self-worth, replays of past mistakes and all of the other negative inner experiences humans punish themselves with every day.
Now this is how the Negative Forces gain control over the minds of many in our world. They gain a stronghold in a sense, within the mental environment of those with weakened protection systems. It is as though the immune system of the Etheric Body is weakened through the activity of the negative thoughts, images and such, creating the conditions within the mental environment for viral contamination. The negative, circular thoughts – the thought viruses – are then free to multiple.
The comparison is very useful here. With our suggestions and experiments we are using love and acceptance and confidence to dispel the viral attack. To carry it further, antibodies are created with the introduction of positive thoughts and emotions into the suppressed immune system of the Mental or Etheric Body.
The negative viral front is neutralized and overcome by love, acceptance and confidence. To be sure, a healthy mental, motional and spiritual body is one that is nourished on love, acceptance and confidence, to the degree that these positive states of consciousness are the typical experiences of the embodied Soul.
I hope you Blog Reader will become proficient as you go along, practicing in sequence as much as you can.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
I would like you the blog reader, just for a few moments, to relax and to close your eyes. This is easy to do. Quiet your mind. Think of a relaxing scene. Now Imagine that you have contact with that part of you that is all-knowing – for indeed you do. Ask for its name and you will receive it. It may take a few moments to achieve contact. It may take a few more minutes for the name of your Guide to come to you. Be patient.
The important thing is to have the expectation that we will achieve contact. And working from the loving aspect of consciousness always, this will keep you moving in the right direction. When you receive the name of your Energy Personality, you may sense that you are rekindling a past relationship, possibly dating back to you childhood or even beyond that into what you may term “past lives.”
This remembrance, along with the loving aspect, is a firm indication that we are indeed engaging your Spirit Guide. The excitement that comes with contact may throw you out of trance. Simply try it again after performing the Ritual of Sanctuary. This experiment can be done on a daily basis to strengthen the connection to your Energy Personality.
PROOF: Proof is around us. Receiving information from a person who is unconscious. These types of communications will be commonplace in just a few years in our reality. This will be so, partly, because we will be educating the public on how to develop these communications. Again, the closer you look at your perceived reality – the Personal Reality Field that you co-create with All That Is according to your beliefs – the more validation you receive for what I have been saying to mankind/womankind for decades in these Blog writings.
Each moment of perceived reality serves as a graphic example of the manifestation of thought into Physicality, Which is related to the Soul, will be the etheric teacher to those of us who are to experience the transition into the Unity of Consciousness Dimension with our “eyes wide open.” We will have read my blogs or received messages from other Energy Personalities and we will have acted on the advice given us.
Many of us, without recognizing the fact, have already been given instruction on the use of our Inner Senses, what to expect in the Fourth Dimension, how to move beyond fear and anger and into love and confidence and other subjects of great importance. In dream state we are being “brought up to speed” by those of us who teach on the subtle levels. And so now we are reading this blog and perhaps having a singular sense of familiarity, DejaVu, as though we have done this before, with accompanying feelings of pleasure, “elementary ecstasy”.
Our world is larger and more complex than we know – our world meaning our created reality. We have physical teachers and we have “metaphysical” teachers, all of us, and now it is time to introduce us to the metaphysical Guides who have been with us since birth into our dimension.
When we ask for our Energy Personality to come forth into our awareness, we may feel that sense of familiarity. For even though we have been pretending that ghosts do not exist even since our childhood ended – adults do not have imaginary friends, after all – on a deeper level we will recognize these connections. Now we may not be willing to admit these relationships to the world because of fear of being exposed.
However, and to illustrate my point, currently a cycle in human consciousness is coming to an end and a new cycle is beginning. We are gradually becoming aware of our connections to our Guides, our Simultaneous Lives, and other energy forms within our Gestalt of Awareness.
We need only to look at the headlines in our daily newspapers to notice how many changes are upon us in our Third-DimensionalReality. With the ending of an era comes dramatic change amid much clinging, by some, to outmoded belief systems. Yet know this: the more we cling to the past, the more likely we will be regulated to the past when the transition is complete. The new world for humanity is being created in the dream state by all of us as we participate in the manifestation of our collective consciousness.
In our dream state, we freely collaborate with our Energy Personality and other Guides in the creation of incipient Reality Constructs that are manifested on awakening. This is how we create our reality with All That Is. Naturally, this phenomenon is much more complicated than I have Described, but that does not mean that we cannot grasp it experientially.
In conclusion to this blog series, we shall have success in creating positive realities to the degree that we hold positive thoughts within our mental environment. This habit of positive thinking is our foundation for the creation of an improved Personal Reality. Now as you know, you are ONE with all of humanity through the interconnectedness of the Consciousness Units. And so, as you do your part here, and others of like mind and behavior do theirs, the whole of humanity is influenced in a very positive fashion.
Keep a good thought Dear Blog Reader. Nourish Loving Understanding and Courage within your consciousness. Challenge the toxic status quo reality with your powerful thoughts of forgiveness and compassion.
Our world is on the verge of a breakthrough into multidimensional perception. We may assist others by leading through example in all that we say and do. Regardless of our perceived “faults,” regardless of any history we may have of creating negative realities for ourselves and others, we may in this current moment set the stage for future continuous positive reality reactions, for our own sake, and certainly for the sake of all beings that share the planet with us.
HYPOTHESIS: You may anticipate, create and sustain coincidental events within your personal reality field.
In this experiment you will attempt to intentionally create coincidental events within your Personal Reality Field. This experiment is most easily conducted when you are experiencing the coincidental events in your current Moment Point. As you gain experience in observing your consciousness and the synchronous events you participate in, it will become easier to anticipate coincidental events. You will be able to sense them coming to you from the future.
Now you are creating these future events from your current moment, you see. As you are experiencing the wonder, awe and amusement that comes with this type of experience, you will be pleasantly motivated to continue with your research. Remember that you may use your powers of intent to extend these feelings and these events for some time.
CONDUCTING YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Pick out anything in your field of perception. For example: say to yourself that the bird in the tree in front of you will now be a part of a coincidental event with something else in your Personal Reality Field. Quite soon after this inner declaration, watch your environment closely for the coincidental experience.
You are using your imagination to create a synchronous event, you see, that will then be fabricated out of Conscious Units for your viewing within your Personal Reality. You may then “expect” a third synchronous event to materialize, and so on. This is very much like child’s play, and is quite a fun way to spend a few minutes of your day.
HYPOTHESIS: Some thoughts are special impulses from our simultaneous lives.
This experiment is one that we can do on an ongoing basis as we go about our life, doing those things that we normally do, engaged in the mundane experiences of our existence. Some of us may have noticed that much of this life is lived in a rote fashion, by habit, almost as if in a dream. Then something occurs in our consciousness to pull us out of the habitual pattern.
A sudden thought might occur to you the blog reader, that you can easily change your course somewhat and experience a new avenue of exploration in your life. Now this impulse might be quite simple, as simple as changing the type of breakfast cereal you eat. Or this fleeting idea might urge you to consider breaking off a relationship that has been negative for some time.
Often these ideas can present new opportunities to your awareness, so that in retrospect, perhaps after several months or years, you realize that your acting on the impulse had the effect of completely transforming your life. You are amazed at how the alternate path taken had set up a series of alternate events that led to a uniquely different, and often more positive and life-affirming outcome, than had you continued on your habitual path of experience.
It is these special impulses we will be exploring in this experiment. These may indeed be impulse for your Simultaneous Lives, offering you suggestions for creating more productive Reality Constructs in your life.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
Now use your relaxation techniques to create a relaxed state with your body. There are two approaches to recognizing special impulses: First, you may work your way back in time from the present regarding a special impulse that you noticed and acted upon which spun you off into a new, positive direction. You can then see the context of influences you were in that created this catalyst for action.
Then recreate this context in your present moment – emotional content, physical circumstances – through use of the imagination. Consider these special impulses within your consciousness NOW that may be these messages from other parts of yourself. Write them down. Act on them if appropriate using your free will.
Second, if you cannot think of a special impulse you have acted upon, simply relax into your meditation and ask for the special impulses to present themselves to your awareness. Then write them down and either act on them or not. This practice leads to experiences of synchronicity, wonder, amusement and awe.
HYPOTHESIS: The intuitive senses may be strengthened through use.
And so what are these Inner Senses? Briefly, they are both the creators and the perceiving apparatus of our world. In our Third-Dimensional existence, we create out of Consciousness Units our physical realities, and then instantaneously perceive our creations as a form of feedback of this endeavor, the creations of the worlds.
In past Blogs I have often informed of our god status. It is difficult for us humans to take seriously this talk of godlike abilities, for many of us have been indoctrinated by our various religions to be meek, to be mild, to obey. And as I have stated in my previous blogs, after transferring our power to our religions, we then transferred our power to our governing institutions and to our scientists.
What I suppose here in this blog is that we are not meek, mild and obedient unless we truly wish to be so. We are whoever we THINK we are and we have the power in this moment to completely change who we are. That is because YOU are at the center of your world as the ultimate creative force. With the energy of All That Is, we as co-creator do indeed manifest from our beliefs and ideas of what is possible, our perceived reality.
Now, without further lecturing, we will give a short description of the experiment. It builds upon a short described in my earlier blogs in which I asked the BlogReader to get a sense of the wonder of their own Personal Reality. Here we will take it further. We will be taking the senses back into the inner world.
As I suggested , the physical senses grew out of the Inner Senses, of necessity, to perceive the exterior, physical Universe. The Inner Senses from which these outer, physical senses were derived, are awaiting our discovery and use within our mental environment.
PERFORM YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
We have several physical senses: sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell. Our Senses are complementary to these out senses, yet they go beyond the physical senses in capabilities.
For example: let us get a feel for the Inner Sense that may be a complement to the outer sense of sight. You may relax a bit for this experiment, yet you needn’t close your eyes. We will be relying on your sense of physical sight to conduct this experiment.
With the eyes open, yet with the relaxation and contentment that comes with the state of Sanctuary you are embodying, can you see the deeper, perhaps symbolic meanings entailed in Personal Reality Field? Remember here: everything in your field of perception is a reflection of an interior reality.
As you consider this statement, you may find that your visual field begins to swirl a bit, as the etheric blends with the exterior. Go with this flow of blending transformation for a few moments until you have observed noteworthy findings. Gradually come back to your physical perceived world. Naturally you may experiment further with the compliments to the other senses to gain more information.
Opening up to one’s greater reality simply by affirming it. That is how one does it: with our thoughts, just like everything else in our reality. Have the intention that we are opening up to these Simultaneous Lives of which we are speaking, and soon enough, proof of their reality will be presented to us.
Now, without belaboring the example, it was IMPULSE that I decided to transcribe my Blog material into a more readable format. My intuitive voice spoke to me and promised that much of value and interest could be recovered if I were to do so. So where did this voice come from?
In my case it was from my ancestor personally, though this is by no means the rule in these phenomena. My ancestor reached across the time-frames into my future, to communicate with me and motivate me. Now this may sound fantastic to some of you. Indeed it will remain unbelievable and so un-witnessed by you in your own realities. The following experiments may help you prove to yourselves that you are ALREADY active participants in the non-physical reality.
The experience of Astral Travel, as some have called it, is quite common among us. It is a refreshing experience, after having say, engaged in a difficult day at our job, to simply cast off from the physical, even while engaged in other activities with our fellow humans, and travel the subtle levels.
I would like to emphasize that in these matters of Soul exploration, you can be quite successful with a gentle, yet persistent effort. Your initial experiments in accessing your Inner Senses are an exercise in subtlety. Approach these activities with any eye on gradual results over time. The clouds, in most instances, do not part and reveal the Etheric Visions to us, after only a few attempts in your experience in the field.
I realize that this subtle route to discovery may be difficult for those of us who have expectation of immediate results. Some of us may be of mind that, like everything else in our Western world of mass-consumption, if it is not forthcoming immediately, on our schedule, because we have so much “to do,” that it might not be worth attempting.
To these blog readers I say, take the time necessary to accomplish your goals in this Soul Work. One of our sayings extols the virtues of waiting with patience for the truly beneficial aspects of our life to materialize.
And honestly, the days of instantaneous manifestation are still in our perceived future. These experiments will give us an advantage for the time when we will be experienced enough to use our Inner Senses appropriately for the instantaneous manifestation of Reality Constructs.
Now once again I would remind that all of these experiments are designed to lead to the uncovering and practical use of our Inner Senses. And these Inner Senses are what we may broadly term “Intuition.”
In past blog writings I have lectured on how the intuition can be divided into separate senses and I did indeed name them. I sense that it may have been a mistake to do so, for it is now I waiting for my blog readers to make practical use of the Inner Senses and allow each blog reader to do whatever delineation they may, as they discover the attributes of these senses for themselves – again, learning by doing, and perhaps creating their own names for their experiences.
We can share our ancestor’s Point of Power experiences as one is working with the written material, organizing it on a computer and so on. this is a literal fact. Astounding as it may be to some blog readers, this type of things goes on continuously in our own private lives.
We “leave the body,” to coin a phrase, and travel interdimensionally to participate in these activities. Often we can do so while carrying on a conversation with one of our fellow humans and appear quite normal. Our eyes may glaze over a bit; an indication that we are traveling and experiencing other time-frames.
Now, our scientists may characterize this as pathological, dissociation, fantasy, escape; completely missing the importance of what is occurring.
I don’t want to go off on one of my critiques here, but let me say this: until our scientists can learn to turn their empirical noses inwardly, they will not be able to sniff out one iota of truth regarding human consciousness, or the human condition or the human Soul.
Simultaneous Lives are engage in this continuous exchange of impulses and energy I am describing. As you can see, you are at the heart of this reciprocal activity. You occupy the center in your Gestalt of Consciousness: the energy network that comprises the receiving and sending of impulse energies between your current self and all of your other selves past, present and future.
This very basic activity of consciousness rests within a framework that is totally dependent on the loving and creative energies of All That Is. And the culmination of all of these energies within your individual consciousness at any one moment, can be described as “the activity of the conscious mind.”
Should you wish to consider these ideas while using the illustration as a meditation focus piece, you may perceive for yourself more intimate meanings than any of my explanations can provide.
In my previous blog, I provided an illustration for you on how to send out energy – positive, loving energy – to Simultaneous Lives. In the experiment you will be “completing a circuit” by discerning with your awareness, when entering your consciousness. This is not hard to do. As I have just mentioned, in each vying for your attention. These impulses, however, the special impulses I am now discussing, are easily recognizable for what they are, by virtue of their obvious loving utility.
When one of these impulses is recognized, you have an immediate sense of rightness, as though you wonder why it took so long for the idea to come around. These ideas are also based in a truly loving aspect of consciousness that is undeniable. In essence, this loving energy is the energy of All That Is transmitted through your various Simultaneous Lives, and then captured by you as your consciousness participates in the Gestalt of Awareness that is you and your many lives past, present and future.
These impulses may be accompanied by synchronous events and a sense of wonder and divine bemusement. Everything comes together in your life drama for the benefit of your learning experience. These synchronicities and thus the life lessons may be brought into your awareness intentionally.
So you Blog Reader, when engaged in this dialogue with your Simultaneous Lives, are receiving the benefits of learning experience from the personalities who are LIVING these many lives. In fact, just as I communicate to educate and inform humanity on the very, very serious issue of the survival of the species – and for the matter the planet Earth – these communiques from your Simultaneous Lives in the form of impulses serve to educate and inform the Blog Reader, of a personal level with regards to appropriate action you can take to improve your life.
I would like to restate my point regarding these types of messages and all messages from you Higher Self: these messages are benign and loving in their intent and that is how you can tell they are from your Higher Self. And as always, free will is operative; you can choose to act on or ignore these impulses.
Generally, it is quite easy for those of us in this land and some of the other industrialized nations, to think of ourselves as individuals. The pioneer influence is felt by many of us in our cultures and so we fancy ourselves as independent explorers of our personal domains.
And so it follows that we feel as though our mental life is our own, and then even though privacy in the personal and business fields of endeavor is rapidly being lost, at least our thoughts are our own, if what we define as “thoughts” are “the greater elements of human mentality.”
Yet our thoughts are not truly our own, in this pioneer sense. In the great Gestalt of Consciousness I have been describing to us, the thoughts of our Simultaneous Lives past, present and future are being received by us, as well as the thoughts and suggestions of Beings of Light, the negative transmissions of Nefarious Entities and the telepathic thoughts of our fellow humans.
Our thoughts are alive. Each of our thoughts, including the thought-forms transmitted into our consciousness by Energy Bodies and our fellow humans, has a propensity for creating itself in physical reality. And because our human thoughts have distinct properties – such as a “desire” to associate with other similar thoughts, and an energetic ability to transcend space and time – our thoughts can be considered to be the most powerful Energy Constructs in our system of reality.
However, unfortunately for most of us, we begin our lives on Earth by surrendering our powers of thought-creation and manifestation to individuals and institutions. And so we are taught to create with our powerful thoughts, the Reality Constructs of the institutions – family, church, business, country – in which we participate.
Many of us abandon our loving, altruistic visions in childhood, therefore, and it may be that you the Blog Reader are only now remembering the idealism of our early manifestation activities. These activities may have included collaborations with imaginary playmates.
Now I shall discuss this further, this topic of childhood Spirit Guides, in future Blogs. For now simply note that there are a host of potential relationships with “Imaginable” beings available to us within the sphere of our personal consciousness.
Impulses are indeed inspirational and creative as we recognize them and use them in the creation of our world. But as we have discussed, many in our world regard these impulses as “voices of the devil,” or at the least, untidy remnants of pathology to be surprised and ignored. To be sure, within this vast chorus of telepathic transmissions, the Negative Entities also vie for attention.
But it is a simple matter to protect oneself with our own positive affirmative thoughts when exploring these areas of consciousness. Surrounding oneself with “white light” is a very effective precaution to take before our explorations or meditations. In this way, we focus our attention on the positive and look, we find the positive creative impulses coming into view. This is all simple Metaphysics. We get what we focus one. We create our reality
A critical and necessary aspect of Reality Creation is what we will call the concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields of Reality. Simply put, our beliefs determine what we accept or reject as part of our Personal Reality Field. Another way to express this idea is that each of us, as the thematic structures of our belief system. Moment-to- moment, we accept from innumerable probabilities, those that complement our ongoing Personal Reality Field. We act upon these probabilities and so bring them from the potential and probable into the realm of the possible and actual. Our Personal Reality develops staying power and permanence in this way.
This concept of Accepted and Rejected Fields can be used to explain how our belief system changes as we learn our lessons in Third-Dimensional reality. For example: let us examine a person who may be new to matters spiritual. They are a male or female who has lived a very material life. Their main activities are shopping and watching television. They have not reproduced or built a network of family or friends.
This may describe many millions of the inhabitants of our Western world. We could say that their Accepted Field of Reality, the Personal Reality they have known and can come to expect in the future, is one of robotic existence. The inner life is not examined here to any degree. This is simply the way it is for them.
But let us suppose that the Higher Self of one of these people creates an opportunity for going within, to perhaps briefly meet the Soul Self. Divine information is streamed into the consciousness of this person. Let us say this has the effect of motivating them to take a walk in the forest rather spending the day watching television. As this person walks in the forest, they participate in the exchange of energies with the vibrant, life-affirming aspects of the forest environment. This may have the effect of revitalizing and spiritualizing this person, to the degree that they would want to make this activity a regular part of their existence.
Do you see how the chosen activity of walking in the forest, merely one of an infinite number of probable activities, acts to bring new life to this person? Perhaps this is part of their lessons they have come to Earth to learn. Perhaps they are to seek out empowering activities in nature that will expand their consciousness and serve to spin them off onto a different, more life-affirming trajectory than their current life path.
Now, this is of course greatly simple, this example, for the accepting or rejecting of individual probable actions, ideas and images is infinitely more complex. To bring in the computer analogy here for a moment: the process would be similar to the function of the world’s most powerful computer. This theoretical computer would be able to make an infinite amount of choices from among an infinite array of probabilities each second. In our previous example, each choice would serve to complement and endorse and continually verify the belief system. And the activity of walking in the forest, done over time, is moving from a Rejected Field of Reality to an Accepted Fieldof Reality. It is being incorporated into the Personal Reality Field.
Everyone has an “inner life,” whether they acknowledge it or not. All of us are involved in the great dramas and subliminal activities of the underworld of human consciousness. Memories of these experiences are carried out with us from sleep and we my marvel at the peculiar symbols of this material. Yet this non-physical universe is ALWAYS ON, despite our knowing or unknowing of its reality.
In our waking hours, as we go about our work-a-day world behaviors, this unknown reality of the spirit continues to unfold beyond our physical senses. Indeed, it is this etheric counterpart to our physical reality that lives life to our “normal” waking hours perceptions. The two work together, in other words – the waking and the sleeping times realities – to present to us for our edification, the life lessons we have incarnated to learn.
Now, to get a sense for this complementary non-physical reality, all we must do is present a line of inquiry to oneself, while in a relaxed and open state of mind. This non-physical reality is “waiting in the wings,” to enter into our particular life-drama that we are experiencing.
As I have hinted at in these new blogs, most of us who are reading this material are doing so for a purpose; that is, to catalyze the use of our Inner Senses. In this way, we will be receiving a preview of what is to be humanity’s next perceptual breakthrough – an exploration of the Unity of Consciousness Dimension.
So our inner world will be making itself known to the outer, in a way never before experienced by humankind. And we have the opportunity of learning about this new land beforehand, so that if we feel called upon to do so, we may assist in the awakening of others. Now let us speak of the creation of the new realities that will bridge inner to outer worlds.
I refer the blog reader to our blog series on Soul Evolution for a discussion on the value of the individual human consciousness in the collective conversation that we are calling the Telepathic Network. One person can truly make a difference here in this Consensus Reality.
It could well be our single Loving thought – expressed in the telepathic conversation – that could tip the scales to the positive manifestation. Imagine how powerful our Loving thoughts could be when joined by hundreds, thousands, millions of other Loving thoughts directed intentionally by LOVERS of our Mother Earth.
There is certainly power in numbers in these matters. And that is what it shall take… huge numbers of Lovers of the Earth using their powerful thoughts of creation on the subtle levels to creative positive realities.
So individual is important. The individual expression of Loving energy directed toward the creation of a positive reality – world peace for example – is what will save us from ourselves. All of our thoughts of Love are acknowledged, you see. Each Loving thought matters. They have a cumulative effect also, so that a momentum is built over time, such that the creation of the positive reality might well become inevitable.
Incidentally, in recent years we have used our Loving thoughts in concerted ways to make profound changes in our waking realities. Great disasters were averted. Calamities that would have claimed many hundreds of thousands of lives were “de-energized” and so were not manifested.
It is true that our world has seen recent Earth Changes that entailed great loss of life. What I am suggesting is that there was the potential for many more disasters to occur entailing many more casualties. As a consensus of reality creators, then, you and our fellow occupants of the planet agreed to manifest and then did manifest an altered reality. We saved ourselves, you see.
This phenomenon happens quite often, though we do not realize it for we are not yet awakened fully. We do not yet acknowledge our full creative powers. However, we soon shall
HYPOTHESIS: Current interests may illustrate lives in the Mystery Civilizations.
Using the methods from a previous experiment, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have resided in. There have been others not mentioned in this blog that you will put on your list. Just get a sense of where your interests have been over the years of your current life. Are you an engineer type or a scientist? Are you a nurturer and yet also a leader?
With the knowledge of what type of personality you are currently, consider which of the Mystery Civilizations you may have lived within, that could serve to complement your personality and interests. In past blogs I have established for you several families of consciousness.
With this in mind – that you may be a participant in a family of consciousness and that you share traits with others in this family – yet without creating unnecessary dogma around it, as I may have done in the past – I would invite you to consider the Mystery Civilizations that most suit your temperament and personality and put them on your list.
CONDUCT YOUR RITUAL OF SANCTUARY
As before, create your relaxed state and go through your list. Visualize the possibilities of life within these civilizations. For you it may be as though you are watching a motion picture, or perhaps a particular feeling tone will serve to direct you. The Sumari language is very distinctive, perhaps you will hear some dialogue from a possible existence in GA.
“You will know it when you see it or hear it.” Watch and listen. Continue this line or inquiry for as long as you wish, without of course, trying to find something that is not there. When you sense that the experiment is over for the time being, gradually come to full-waking consciousness.
